(navigation image)
Home American Libraries | Canadian Libraries | Universal Library | Community Texts | Project Gutenberg | Children's Library | Biodiversity Heritage Library | Additional Collections
Search: Advanced Search
Anonymous User (login or join us)
Upload
See other formats

Full text of "American anthropologist"

This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 
to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 
to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 
are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other marginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 
publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing this resource, we have taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 

We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain from automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attribution The Google "watermark" you see on each file is essential for informing people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liability can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 



at |http : //books . google . com/ 





Digitized by 



Google 






V 7 2^.0: 



Digitized by 



Google 



Digitized by 



Google 



M mwm .iL !■ 



Digitized by 



Google 



Digitized by 



Google 



THE 



American Anthrotologist 

PUBLISHBD UNDER THE AUSPICES OP THE 

AHTHROPOLOGIClll SOCIETY OF WASHINGTOII 




VOLUME VIII 



.Ti:i)D A DKTWKILER 

PRINTERS TO TIIK SCIKMTIFIC HOCII'mKH OK WAHlIINcrrON 

181)5 



Digitized by 



Google 



Digitized by VjOOQIC 

1 



CONTENTS OF THE VOLUME 



Page 

Stone Art in America. By J. W. Powki-l 1 

The Huacos of Chira Valley, Pern. By Samuel Matiiewson Scott. H 

Ca«te in India. By J. II. Porter 2;> 

Micmac Customs and Tnuiitions. By Stansbury Hagkr 31 

The Writings of Padre Andres de Ohnos in the Languages of Mexico. 

By James C. Pilung 43 

Chinese Origin of Playing Cards. By W. H. Wilkinson 61 

Colonel Garrick Mallery, U. S. Army ; an Obituary. By Rohekt 

Fletcher 70 

Similarities in Culture. By Otis Tui«ix>n Mason 101 

A Comparison of Sia and Tusayan Snake Ceremonials. By J. 

Walter Fewkes 118 

The First Discovered City of Cibola. By F. W. Hodgk 142 

Cliff Ruins of Canyon de Chelly, Arizona. By Cosmos Mindelefp. 153 
Obituaries: Robert Henry Lamborn, Franklin Austin Seely, Joaquin 

Garcia Icazbalceta, Charles Candee Baldwin, James Owen Dorsey, 

William Bower Taylor 175 

The God " D " in the Codex C/Oi-tesianus. By J. Walter Fewkes. . 205 

The Early Navajo and Apache. By F. Webb IIodge 223 

The Relation of Sociology to Anthropology. By Liistkr F. Ward. 241 

The Name Chickahominy. By William Wallace Tooker 257 

A Yuma Cremation. By G. R. Putnam 204 

Australian Rock Pictures. By R. II. Matphews 268 

Some Principles of Nomenclature. By W J McGee 279 

The Arrow. By F. H. Cusiiing 307 

The Beginning of Agriculture. By W J McGee 350 

Siouan Tribal Appellatives. By W. W. Tooker 370 

Upper Orinoco Vocabularies. By A. Ernst 393 

Clay Figures from Guatemala. By P. J. J. Valentini 402 

James C. Pilling ; an Obituary 407 

MISCELLANEA 

Book notices, 81 ;— Tecumseh's name, 91 ;— Tarahumari runners, 92; — 
The Palteontographical Society of Australasia, 92;— Ethnography of the 
Acorn islands, 93 ; — Mortuary customs in New Hebrides, 93 ; — Poisoned 
arrows of the Akas, 94; — Quarterly bibliography of anthropologic litera- 
ture, 95; — Book notices, 185;— The snake ceremonials at Walpi, 192; — 
Imperial Russian (leographic Society, 190 ;— The Beebe researches, 197 ;— 
Chinese folk-lore, 198; — Scottish charms and amulets, 198;— Erratum, 
198; — Quarterly bibliography of anthropologic literature, 199 ; — The early 
Navajo and Apache, 287; — Alexandra V. Potanine, 290; — Anthroi>ology 
in the Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, 290; — The Allentiac 
language of Argentina, 297; — Quarterly bibliography of anthropologic 
literatui-e, 298; — Quarterly bibliography of anthropologic literature, 410. 

(iii) 



Digitized by 



Google 



I 



Digitized by 



Google 1 

i 



1 

J 



THE 



American Anthropologist 



Vol. VIII WASHINGTON, D. C.,- JANUARY, 1895 No. 1 



STONE ART IN AMERICA 

BY J. W. POWELL 
DIRECTOR OP THE BUREAU OP AMERICAN ETHNOLOGY 

In the December number of the American Naturalist Mr. Read, 
of the British Museum, has an article which exhibits a strange 
misunderstanding of the American problem of *' paleolithic " 
man. It is a comment on a recent publication by Mr. J. D. 
McGuire, and is a naive misinterpretation of Mr. McGuire's 
position. A brief statement of the present condition of this 
question may save other well-meaning men from falling into 
like errors. 

In the years 1867-1873, inclusive, a number of scientific men 
were engaged in exploring western Colorado, southern Wyoming, 
eastern Utah, and northern Arizona, in company with the writer. 
The country was then a wilderness, and the tribes inhabiting it 
were practically unknown before that time. They were many, 
yet each one embraced but a small number of persons, while 
they were scattered at wide intervals. 

In a little valley north of the Uinta mountains a tribe of 
Shoshoni Indians were found still manufacturing stone arrow- 
heads, stone knives, and stone spears. Although a few of them 
were armed with guns purchased at far-distant trading stores, a 
greater number of the men and boys were armed with bows and 
arrows. In the valley which they occupied chalcedony is found 
in the form popularly called moss-agate. In 1869 the writer 
often saw these Indians manufacturing stone arrow-heads and 
stone knives. These were made from masses of moss-agate 
weathering out of the sandy shales of the district. The imple- 



Digitized by 



Google 



2 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

ments were made by breaking the masses with rude stone ham- 
mers, and selecting favorably shaped fragments to be further 
fashioned by the use of little stone hammers. A fragment held 
in one hand, protected by a piece of untanned elk skin, was 
wrought with a hammer held in the other hand. Having some- 
what improved the original fragment in this manner, a work- 
man would proceed to give his implement the final shape by 
using a deer-horn tool from 8 to 12 inches in length and worked 
down from its original size by grinding, so that its diameter was 
about five-eighths of an inch. Holding the specimen in one 
hand, with the implement in the other, he would work the little 
stone into the desired shape by sudden pressure on its edge with 
the horn tool and in this manner breaking off small flakes. The 
arrow-heads thus made were small, slender, and symmetric, 
while the stone knives were given keen but somewhat serrated 
edges. I visited this tribe of Indians many times and lived 
among them many months and found their camps strewn with 
the chips, among which were many discarded failures, all hav- 
ing the characteristics of those finds which in the eastern por- 
tion of the United States had been called " paleolithic." These 
Shoshoni were making " paleolithic " implements, in that all 
were chipped and none were polished. 

At another time, on the eastern slope of the Wasatch mountains, 
I was with a tribe known as the Pahvant, and found them mak- 
ing stone arrow-heads and knives by the processes of breaking, 
battering, and grinding. They were making " neolithic " imple- 
ments and no others, and this I observed many times through a 
succession of years. 

At various times through a series of years I saw the Uintah 
Indians, a tribe living in the Uintah valley, on the eastern slope 
of the Wasatch mountains, make arrow-heads and stone knives, 
both by chipping and grinding. 

At other times, again and again, for years, I saw the Pagu In- 
dians manufacture stone implements in the valley of San Rafael, 
a tributary of the Colorado flowing from the eastern slope of 
the Wasatch plateau. These people made their implements by 
chipping. A mile above the mouth of the river, in a cottonwood 
grove, there is a village site which has been occupied intermit- 
tently for many years and probably for many centuries. In the 
Cretaceous bluffs near by great quantities of chert are found, and 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] STONE ART IN AMERICA 3 

not far away quantities of moss-agate. From these materials 
the Indians made their implements by chipjnng, and near the 
village site the flakes, rejects, and accidents may be found in 
great quantities, measured by wagon-loads. 

In the valley of the Kanab, which is a tributary of the Colorado* 
are to be found the sites of ancient villages of the Uinkaret. 
These people made their stone implements of chert, moss-agate, 
and quartzite by chipping, and their pipes of steatite by grinding 
and boring — that is, they were polished. 

The Tusayan Indians, on a tributary of the Little Colorado, 
have stone implements, pipes, and many other stone articles. 
Arrow-heads and knives are made chiefly by chipping, though a 
few are made by grinding ; other objects in stone are often made 
by grinding and boring. 

I have often seen all of these Indians and many others work 
in stone, for I have lived among them many years. By the 
criteria which are used to distinguish " paleolithic " man from 
'* neolithic " man, some of the tribes were " paleolithic," making 
their implements solely by chipping ; others were " neolithic," 
because they made their implements in part by chipping and in 
part by grinding. The criteria, therefore, do not apply to these 
Indians as a time distinction, nor do they apply to them as a 
culture distinction. All forms of '* paleolithic " and " neolithic " 
implements were found to be made at the same time and by 
people in the same stage of culture, adapting their work to the 
materials found, while the chips and rejects, even to the so-called 
turtle-back forms, were produced in great abundance, though the 
turtle-back forms were rarer from the fact that they are chiefly 
derived from storm-fashioned bowlders. 

Such facts were observed not by myself alone, but by others, 
who were geologists and archeologists. 

We now reach another phase of the question. ^ In the eastern 
portion of the United States many so-called " paleolithic " finds 
have been made in a region of country extending from the Hud- 
son to James river. These implements were freely gathered into 
our museums and distributed to the museums of Europe. One 
particular locality early attracted the attention of the writer — that 
on Piney branch, in the District of Columbia. Over this site I 
have wandered many scores of times. The implements found 



Digitized by 



Google 



4 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

here were by many believed to be " paleolithic " and to be a part 
of the gravel deposits found in the bluffs. In the examination 
which I made of them I found them strangely like the forms 
found near the Shoshoni village site, near the Pahvant village 
site, near the Uintah village site, near the Uinkaret village site, 
and near the Tusayan village sites, except that the turtle-back 
forms were much more abundant on Piney branch. Here we find 
the flakes or chips ; here we see the turtle-back forms or rejects, 
and here we have the spoiled implements ; and from this particu- 
lar site many museums have been stocked with specimens illus- 
trating the workmanship of " paleolithic " man. Years went by 
and the problem which I had contemplated so many times grew 
in interest, until at last the geologists and paleontologists decided 
that this particular gravel represents the Potomac formation be- 
longing to the Cretaceous system. Now the problem assumed 
still greater importance, for if these vestiges of the work of man 
were actually deposited in the gravels at the time of their forma- 
tion as shore accumulations, then the age of man must be car- 
ried back to Cretaceous time. Thereupon one of my associates, 
Mr. Holmes, assumed the task of solving the problem and was 
furnished with funds for the purpose, and he commenced at this 
particular site and trenched the Piney branch hill with care, re- 
maining with his laboring force from day to day and from month 
to month. In doing this work it was clearly demonstrated that 
the gravels were not in the place where they were deposited by 
waves — ^that is, that they were gravels redistributed by overplace- 
ment, and that the manufacture of the stone implements could 
not be assigned to a period farther back than a few centuries. 
Thus ** paleolithic" man was lost from the Cretaceous period. 
But Mr. Holmes' work did not stop here. He studied the vil- 
lage sites found in far-away towns by the river and found the 
stone implements which had been scattered there in modern 
times, and again found all the forms discovered at Piney branch, 
together with a much greater number of finished implements ; 
and by a series of researches, the stages of which he has recorded 
in his deft manner, connected the two. 

Mr. Holmes did not end his work at this stage ; he went on 
from point to point dow^n to the James and up to the Hudson, 
trenching the bluffs and examining the village sites, and every- 
where demonstrating that the so-called "paleolithic" imple- 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] STONE ART IN AMERICA 5 

ments were of comparatively modern origin. Now in this region 
of country there are many gravels of diflferent ages, extending 
from those of the Potomac formation below to the latest Pleisto- 
cene deposits above. In all of these gravels he found quarry 
sites with chips, rejects, and broken implements, and in the same 
manner he connected the artificial material with the village sites. 

Thus throughout the eastern portion of the United States the 
old sites of " paleolithic " implements were examined and many 
new ones were discovered, and ever they told the same story. 
Then Mr. Holmes extended his observations far westward into 
many states and found kindred facts in many localities, and no 
facts inconsistent with those of eastern United States. 

These observations did not rest on the shoulders of Mr. Holmes 
alone ; many other American geologists visited him during the 
time he was occupied in examining the Piney branch site, and 
at other times in other places ; and so far as I know all of the 
geologists who visited the sites at the time the excavations were 
made fiiUy and cordially agree with Mr. Holmes. 

One case now remains unexplained. At Newcomerstown, in 
Ohio, a rude stone implement was found in what was supposed 
to be a glacial gravel. The man who found it was doubtless 
honest in his belief that it was a genuine glacial find, though he 
did not claim to be a geologist. Mr. Holmes and others have 
visited the site since that time, but it has been changed to such 
an extent that it is impossible to determine whether the gravels 
were in place as primitively deposited, or whether they were in 
gravels modified by methods not understood at the time the find 
was made, though now well understood by geologists engaged in 
the study of glacial phenomena. Thus the evidence of " paleo- 
lithic " glacial man in this country has been narrowed to the 
single find at Newcomerstown, made by a man not trained as a 
geologist though doubtless intelligent and honest, and made 
many years ago under conditions which have now been changed 
so that it is impossible to discover the geologic facts. Such is 
the status of the " paleolithic " problem in America. 

Other finds have been made on the Pacific coast, which, if 
genuine, carry man back in Pleistocene time, as an associate 
with extinct animals. These finds were made many years ago 
and have not been reexamined by the new methods of research, 
but they do not bear on the problem of " paleolithic " man, for 



Digitized by 



Google 



6 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

if the conclusions reached from the finds in California are to 
remain as valid, then this early man was " neolithic," since he 
made polished implements. 

Wherever the facts are known in this country chipped and 
ground implements are essentially contemporaneous. Some of 
the lower tribes in North America make chipped implements ; 
others make battered and ground implements, while still others 
make both, and the character of the materials which they use 
determines the method of production. In a region where quartz 
in its various forms, as flint, chert, agate, chalcedony, etc., are 
found, and often where quartzites are abundant, and especially 
where obsidian abounds, implements are made by chipping. 
Where softer quartzites and the metamorphic and igneous rocks 
abound, battering and grinding is the process used. In North 
America thousands of tribes were found making stone implements, 
and how they made them is well known. Stone implements are 
still made by many tribes, and the process by which they are 
made can yet be observed, and everywhere the Indian adapts his 
process to the materials used. Several of our observers have 
become adepts in the manufacture of stone implements. Mr. 
Holmes, Mr. Gushing, and Mr. McGuire can make stone imple- 
ments as deftly as any Indian and produce forms even superior 
to the best of native manufacture. From observation and from 
experience, the method of battering and grinding is found to be 
simpler and more easily acquired than that by chipping. 

Now, let us see where the problem stands : 

First Two methods of making stone implements are observed 
and practiced, each adapted to a particular class of material ; 
that by battering and grinding is the more obvious and simple, 
while it involves less labor than the chipping process. 

Second, The Indian tribes adapt their methods to the material. 

Third, Some tribes make their tools exclusively by the chip- 
ping process ; other tribes exclusively by the battering and grind- 
ing process, while still other tribes make stone implements by 
both processes. 

Fourth. In studying the practices of extinct tribes it is discov- 
ered that the articles of stone-work are found in two places : one 
where the materials were quarried, and one where the implements 
were finished. If the quarry sites are examined, chips, rejects, 



Digitized' by VjOOQIC 



Jan. 1895] STONE ART IN AMERICA 7 

and broken implements are discovered in great abundance. If 
the village sites are examined, finished implements are common. 

Fifth, It is found that the existing Indians sometimes go to 
distant quarries and select the materials for stone implements, 
which they rudely fashion for the purpose of making a selection, 
and carry these inchoates to their homes to be worked into final 
form. 

Sfvxth. It is found that the extinct Indians had the same prac- 
tice, for quarry refuse may be found at quarry sites and fin- 
ished implements at village sites, all of the same materials. 
Then, deposits of unfinished tools are sometimes found. 

Seventh, In America it has long been conceded by those who 
believe in " paleolithic " art as a time or culture distinction that 
the chipping of implements is not its distinguishing trait, but 
that the distinction is found in a particular character of chipped 
implements, i. c, as flakes which we now call chips, as turtle- 
back forms which we now call rejects, and as rude blades, often 
broken, which we now call accidents. It has been made clear 
that these are quarry forms, and that the sites where they are 
found are to some extent distinguished from village sites ; and 
further, that the quarry forms must not be interpreted as belong- 
ing to the time when the formations were laid down unless clear 
geologic evidence demands it, and that only the geologist skilled 
in the study of overplacement can properly distinguish between 
primeval gravels and disturbed gravels. 

In view of these facts, abundantly demonstrated far and wide 
over the continent, many American archeologists and geologists 
have reached the conclusion that the distinction between " paleo- 
lithic " man and " neolithic " man, as determined by the method 
of making the implements, is not valid for this continent. If 
these facts or the conclusion flowing from them startle European 
observers in geology and archeology, it behooves them to re- 
examine their own facts, and if by the new methods of geologic 
observation they can demonstrate a time distinction between 
exclusively chipped implements and mixed implements fash- 
ioned by both processes we shall not fail to accord belief to their 
conclusions ; but we shall hold the question open until assured 
that the new methods have been tried. 



Digitized by 



Google 



ff THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



THE HUACOS OF CHIRA VALLE7, PERU 

BY SAMUEL MATHEWSON SCOTT 

The northern portion of Peru is a vast desert extending from 
the sea to the Andes and for about two hundred miles from 
Tumbez, the first landing place of Pizarro, on the north, to 
Sechura, on the south, a waste of sand and rock broken only at 
long intervals by narrow valleys that bring down the waters 
from the western slopes of the mountains. 

Although this dreary expanse now maintains but a scattered 
population, there are still many evidences that not only the 
valleys, but also the desert itself, once supported a numberless 
people. The Chira valley, through which runs the principal 
river of the northern region, is filled with the ruins and the 
graves of this once flourishing civilization. The valley has an 
average width of three miles in its principal portion, which 
reaches from the town of Sullana to the Pacific, a distance of 
forty miles. The land is fertile under irrigation and supplies 
the wants of several towns and villages adjacent to it. It is at 
present divided into private haciendas or farms, or held by 
small communities ; but no general system of cultivation is fol- 
lowed. While some of the haciendas are scientifically irrigated, 
much of the land receives only such attention as its natural po- 
sition makes easy. 

In the days before the Spanish conquest, however, it is evi- 
dent that this valley was occupied by a people who, under the 
system of government which the Incas always imposed upon the 
various nations they conquered, developed all the resources of 
the territory to the fullest extent possible. Remains still exist 
of a great irrigation canal which ran, probably, from above Sul- 
lana to the sea. Tributary ditches laid with regularity and 
trained judgment may yet be traced. It is principally on the 
uncultivable land lying between the great ditch and the cliffs 
that form the northern wall of the valley that the ruins and 
graves are found, and it was through a series of excavations in 
this district during the last two years that I made the collection 



Digitized by 



Google 






93 



O 



:? 




o 
orq 




01 

o 
> 

r 



-< 
o 



Digitized by 



Google 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] THE HUACOS OF CHIRA VALLEY, PERU 9 

of Peruvian antiquities now in the museum of the University of 
Pennsylvania. 

The group of ruins which first attracted my attention is that 
situated some five miles to the westward of the town of Amotape, 
on the northern side of the valley, and which is known as Pare- 
dones, or the Great walls, a name which the natives have cor- 
rupted into Paderones. These ruins lie close to the cliffs of the 
desert, in a small bay-like ravine. They consist of a series of 
stone inclosures about a thousand feet long by six hundred feet 
wide, built in rough mud-mortared masonry, now so dilapidated 
that it is impossible to determine their original height. Into the 
center of this inclosure runs a low spur of the cliff, on which are 
a number of heavy adobe quadrangles, which apparently were 
the foundations of buildings or courts. On the western side of 
these walls the spur of the cliff was extended in the form of a 
square terrace about two hundred feet in each direction, from 
the center of which rises a truncated pyramid or pyramidal 
mound of two stories. The faces of the terrace and of the 
pyramid incline at a steep angle, which is reinforced by a wall 
or covering curiously constructed of conical adobes about the 
size and shape of a traditional sugar-loaf. In some portions 
of this facing, the cones, or tulpas as they are called by the 
natives, are set regularly one above another, the large end of the 
upper one resting upon the point of the lower one; but in some 
instances, without any apparent cause, the upper tidpas are in- 
verted and their points lie between the points of the lower tier. 

This arrangement may have served a decorative purpose, but 
the rains of centuries have so scored and destroyed the walls that 
no opinion can be formed of their original appearance. The face 
of the terrace is 30 feet high ; that of each story of the pyramid 
23 feet. The top of the pyramid is therefore between 75 and 80 
feet above the plain. The base of the pyramid is about 90 by 75 
feet; the top about 65 by 50 feet. One hundred yards to the 
westward of the terrace is another pyramid nearly the same size 
as the one just described, but differing from it in that it appears 
to have been built in the form of a square spiral of three stories. 
This second pyramid was not inside the great inclosure. An 
inclined road rising from the plain on the northern side of the 
inclosure and parallel with its wall gave access to the terrace. 
The arrangement of the quadrangular foundations at the upper 
2 



Digitized by 



Google 



10 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

end of this road indicates an elaborately constructed gate or 
entrance. 

Within the eastern portion of the inclosure, which is on a level 
with the plain, are numberless hillocks thickly covered by small 
white bivalve and spiral shells. The soil throughout this portion 
of the ruins is mixed with the finely powdered dust of ashes and 
is thickly strewn with heavy potsherds and pieces of more deli- 
cate pottery. These potsherds and ashes litter also the ground 
inside the large quadrangles. 

As I had heard that pottery had often been exhumed in the 
neighborhood, I decided, after a careful examination of the ruins, 
that these sherds and fragments were the remains of pottery 
washed out by the rains, and indicated a fruitful field for exca- 
vation. I therefore set my diggers to work among the quad- 
rangles. We soon penetrated the upper layer of ash dust and 
pieces of coarse jars and came upon a thick stratum of vegetable 
matter, which greatly resembled decaying thatch. Under this 
we found onl}' the hard undisturbed soil of the spur. As repeated 
efibrts in this direction were equally fruitless, I turned my atten- 
tion to the hillocks. Here also I was disappointed. Nothing 
was encountered but loose earth mixed with ashes, shells, and 
fragments for several feet ; then the hard undersoil. I learned 
from the natives, and confirmed their testimony by my own sub- 
sequent experience, that whatever may have been the object of 
these small shell-covered mounds, which are common to all the 
ruins of the valley and which often occur among the burial 
grounds, they were not used as graves, and may have been ovens 
for baking pottery. 

Rather discouraged by my lack of success, I made inquiries 
among the people who live near the ruins and discovered that 
very little pottery had ever been found within the inclosure. One 
woman was able to tell me, however, that her husband and a 
friend had dug up several huacos, or pieces of pottery, in a ravine 
a mile or so lower down the valley, on the preceding Good Fri- 
day. The natives regard these relics of* an ancient art with 
superstition. They believe that they are enchanted, and claim 
that they can be found only on Good Friday, when they come 
near to the surface. On that day the people go in large compa- 
nies to the huaco fields, as they call the burial grounds, and spend 
the time in picnicing and digging. Whatever pottery they find 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] THE HUACOS OF CHIRA VALLEY, PERU 11 

they use in their houses or sell. They can give no explanation 
of this idea of the charm of Good Friday, but they all accept it 
trustingly, and when I lighted upon a rich field shortly after my 
ill luck among the ruins they at once regarded me as a brujo, 
or wizard. 

Following the woman's suggestion, I took a laborer with me 
and spent some days in exploring the ravines. We met with 
indifferent results until one day I came upon a quiet little valley 
nestled between the cliflfe, in front of the village of Vichayal. We 
set to work at random on a gentle slope, and after digging 
through the tough mixture of gravel and clay that through the 
long years had been washed down from the hills we found a sand 
mixed with tiny white shells and charcoal. About a foot deep 
in this layer the boy uncovered the edge of what looked like a 
bundle of rags. He worked with his fingers for a moment and 
detached a piece of cloth. Jumping from the hole, he declined 
to dig any further. 

" It is a Christian who is buried there," he said, reverently. 

I seized the shovel and soon unearthed the bundle, which 
proved to be the bones of a baby enveloped in a coarse napkin 
of cotton. 

" This is no Christian," I said to him ; " Christian children are 
buried in coflSns." 

This argument proved conclusive ; and as the soil below still 
showed signs of having been moved, I made him continue the 
work, for he had no scruples about disturbing antique bones. 
Some three feet lower down and about five feet below the natural 
level of the ground we disclosed two mummies lying side by side 
in the loose sand. The draina<4e of the slope was so rapid that 
no moisture had ever penetrated to the bodies, and the cloths in 
which they were wrapped were in perfect preservation. Beside 
each body was a bundle of weaving rods and a large gourd filled 
with tUlles, or the long wooden sticks like knitting needles, used 
as shuttles. The absolute dryness of the soil had saved even 
these perishable things from decay. This was the first find in a 
field that proved very fruitful. 

Almost invariably at about two feet below the surface we came 
upon a child's grave similar to the one first discovered. Evi- 
dently little care was taken in the burial of children under seven 
or eight years of age. The unembalmed body, dressed simply in a 



Digitized by 



Google 



12 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

sleeveless shirt, was tied up in a shroud and laid in the sand in 
some portion of the cemetery that had already been used for 
adults. It is rare to find pottery in these little graves. Some- 
times a small stick is placed beside the body, and there may be 
a string of coral beads around the child's neck. 

About four feet below the children's graves we meet with those 
of adults. These lie one below another, at irregular intervals, 
often to a depth of twenty feet. They dififer greatly in their con- 
tents ; less in their general character. The deepest graves are 
evidently of much greater antiquity than the upper ones. The 
objects they contain are fewer and of coarser quality and bear 
the characteristics of a less practiced art. While some bodies 
are buried directly in the sand, most are contained in hollow 
graves, into which the earth is prevented from falling by a slant- 
ing covering made of flat stones or large adobes. These graves 
are about eight feet long, four feet wide, and two feet deep. The 
dead are disposed in a manner different from that in other parts 
of Peru. Instead of being trussed up in sitting posture, the body 
lies on its back. 

Some process of embalming was used, although the tissues are 
not preserved, as in the case of Egyptian mummies. The skin 
usually remains intact. The hair is perfect and is lighter in color 
and much finer in texture than that of the modern natives. The 
face also is well preserved, excepting that the eyes have fallen 
in and the cartilage of the nose is gone. These ancients were of 
about the same stature as their descendants, but they had smaller 
and more shapely hands and feet. The body was evidently 
dressed -in tlie richest garments of the dead one. Beads of 
coral, fluorite, glass, and gold were twined about the neck; 
rings of gold or small strings of coral and copper beads adorned 
the fingers, and bracelets of beads encircled the arms. From the 
necklaces of the men hung a small pair of silver tweezers for 
plucking out the beard. In some instances bands in red and 
blue patterns were tattooed upon the wrists. The head, which 
always rests on the left shoulder, was covered with a kind of 
turban composed of strips of embroidery and fine cloth folded 
about the hair. The face, often tinted with a red pigment, was 
covered with raw cotton and tightly bound with cerements. A 
delicately woven fringed shawl, about a yard S(iuare and doubled 
diagonally, was wrapped thickly around the neck. About the 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] THE HUACOS OF CHIRA VALLEY, PERU 13 

waist was usually wound a long sash, sometimes of tapestry. In 
this sash was occasionally tucked a small clay image ; perhaps 
a charm or idol. It is difficult to discover the exact details of 
the rest of the clothing, as the moisture of decomposition and the 
preparations used in embalming have reduced to powder the 
fabrics immediately next the body. The dress of the women was 
apparently long and ample. The men wore a sleeveless shirt or 
tunic, supplemented by a cloak. On one of the ornamental water 
jars which I found is the figure of a man from which may be 
gained some idea of the usual costume. 

Thus carefully attired, the body, covered with a winding sheet 
of cotton finely woven, was placed diagonally upon a series of 
large square shrouds. The ends of these shrouds at either side 
of the corpse were then folded across and around it, and the outer 
edge was carefully sewed up along its entire length with a large 
wooden needle, which was usually left sticking in the wrappings. 
The ends at the head and feet were then doubled over the body 
and secured to one another with a stout scarf, or, if the body wa« 
small, merely tied together in a knot. The fabric of these outer 
coverings differs greatly, probably with the condition in life occu- 
pied by the person. Sometimes there are but two coarse sheets ; 
more frequently there are three or four, varying in fineness from 
the body outward ; occasionally the outermost shroud is a double 
quilt thickly wadded with cotton. 

The grave was dug without reference to the points of the 
compass ; but a regular system was observed in arranging the 
objects buried with the dead, although these objects themselves 
are of endless variety. At the feet of the corpse were placed 
several cooking pots covered with pieces of gourd or earthen 
plates and filled with food, meat, cooked com, beans, frijoles ; 
and small bundles containing whole ears of maize. There may 
be only one or two such pots, or there may be seven or eight. 
In one grave I found also a small gourd daintily wrapped in a 
napkin and holding a skillfully carved wooden spoon, the handle 
of which was fashioned into the figure of a man. At the side 
of the body, near the hands, were put the tools or implements 
used in life. In the case of men, there were walking-staffs of 
hardwood, with carved heads of men and animals, probably em- 
blems of authority; small copper and stone tools — in one case 
the complete set of those of a silversmith, with cane blowpipes. 



Digitized by 



Google 



14 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

copper drills, and stone hammers or polishers ; paint-pots made 
of gourds, with pigments and brushes ; copper ladles used as 
melting pots ; bows and arrows ; once a barbed spear of algar- 
roba wood very much decayed ; agricultural implements, such 
as wooden shovels, rods, and pointed sticks ; fish nets, water- 
bottles, and long netted traveling bags decorated in colors and 
filled with potatoes, ears of corn, and other provisions, and little 
packages of coca leaves. 

In the graves of women were sets of weaving and spinning 
utensils similar in form, but greatly superior in finish, to those 
today used by the Indians. The weights for the spindles were 
of carved bone or shell. The various needles are prettily painted 
in rings, many of them still having colored threads wound upon 
them. The fineness of these threads and the skill and workman- 
ship of the various fabrics show that these ancient women were 
more dextrous in the arts of weaving and spinning than are 
their descendants. The crotch for holding the copo, or roll of 
carded cotton, which today is only a natural fork cut from a tree, 
is in these graves an elaborately carved piece of algarroba wood. 
There were large gourds fashioned into work-boxes, bags full of 
balls of spun cotton ; yapata, or magnesia, in large natural lumps 
or cut into cones like a corncob, for lubricating the thread in 
spinning. There were small shells containing red and blue 
paints, probably used in the toilet, and also larger shells wrapped 
in strips of rag. Some gourds containing skeins of brown and 
blue cotton point to the eltistence today of a very ancient custom. 
The Indian women who wear their hair in two braids always 
plait in similar skeins at the extremity of the braid, for the pur- 
pose, as they explain, of preventing the ends of the hair from 
splitting. The skeins in the gourds were doubtless used in the 
same way by the aborigines. 

About the head of the munmiy, whether male or female, were 
arranged the fantastic pieces of pottery in black and red clay 
which are known as huracos. These were probably filled with 
water or chicha — a beer made fi'om corn, the beverage of an- 
cient Peru. Upon these jars the old artists expended all their 
skill. The clay itself is very finely worked. The designs are 
infinite in variety and imitate every form of animal and vege- 
table life. There are jars in the shape of bananas, gourds, and 
melons ; there are jars ornamented with human figures, climb- 



Digitized by 



Google 



American Anthropologist 



Vol. VIM, No. 1 





Articles from Chira Valley, Peru. 

1, Head ol mummy with ear-ring in place; 2, Double huaoo of black potiory v^itli figure ol man; 

3, Gourds containing weaving implements; 4, Cookiiig-pots with gourd li<l.s, 

5, Labret ; G, 7, Tweezers ; 8, Ear-ring. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] THE HUACOS OF CHIRA VALLEY, PERU 15 

ing monkeys, pelicans, parrots, fish, and serpents. There is, 
moreover, a distinct tendency toward the comic and grotesque — 
many animals have exaggerated teeth and birds have quaintly 
elongated bills. Very little of this class of pottery from the 
Chira is decorated with painting, although such decoration is 
common in the pottery from other parts of Peru. The pieces 
are also smaller than those from other districts. Besides the 
natural forms, there are many conventional shapes of much 
grace and beauty. The double whistling huaco is very common 
in this region. It consists of two vases joined by a tube ; one 
vase forms the spout or mouth ; the other is surmounted by some 
animal or bird, and is so devised as to emit the air through a 
whistle while water runs in through the spout. This whistle 
was probably a charm against evil spirits. One of the htiacos 
which I unearthed, taken in connection with another of the col- 
lection from Chimbote, a field about four hundred miles to the 
south, offers a valuable suggestion as to the class of buildings 
which were erected upon the pyramids of the ruins. It repre- 
sents a shed-like structure, roofed with thatch placed on a square 
base. The huaco from Chimbote is more significant, as it shows 
a building on top of a terraced pyramid, which is connected 
from story to story by flights of stairs. The decayed thatch 
which I found among the quadrangles of Paredones may have 
been the remains of such structures. 

There are evidences that these burial places were of a conse- 
crated character. Once, quite near the surface, I came upon a 
small bundle similar to a child's mummy. On opening it, how- 
ever, I found inside the rough shroud, wrapped in a cotton cloth 
a yard square, one half of which was white, the other blue, about 
half the bones of a man, including the skull. They were covered 
with clay mud, and had evidently been gathered up, brought 
from a distance, and buried thus in holy ground. Thrown among 
them were a triple necklace of large coral beads and a piece of 
colored tapestry, on which was the conventionalized figure of a 
man. From what I learned from the contents of other graves, 
this piece of tapestry was a portion of the man's war or gala shirt. 
As the bones were dry when buried, no moisture had attacked 
the fabrics, and they were as good as on the day they were made. 
One side of the skull was crushed in, and in the center of the 
break was a small round hole, such as might have been made by 



Digitized by 



Google 



16 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

a spike of a club or by a bullet from a sling. The man may have 
been a warrior whose bones had bleached upon a distant battle- 
field. There was no pottery of any kind in this grave. 

The similarity between the figure upon the tapestry and the 
human figures carved upon the wooden spoon and the walking- 
stafifs, and also repeated upon another shirt which I found, to- 
gether with the constant use of the monkey on staff's and pottery 
throughout this field, led me to the conclusion that these figures 
and animals may have served as tribal or family badges. 

One of the mummies found on this slope was that of a chief 
or priest. The grave was hollow, but considering the importance 
of the occupant, it was singularly poor in contents. There was 
no fine pottery, and aside from a few cooking-pots and a water- 
jar, held only a long staff, with a human figure for a head. The 
wrappings of the body were very elaborate. The outside cover- 
ing was a wadded quilt, embroidered all over with a figured 
design repeated in black, brown, and yellow ; within were three 
shrouds beautifully woven of white cotton ; each had an em- 
broidered border in brown several inches wide of most compli- 
cated but regular geometric pattern, and in the center a large 
square of similar embroidery. The sumptuous attire was rich 
with tapestry, fold upon fold, especially in the turban and in the 
sash. The left hand, which, as in the case of all these mummies, 
rested by the side, was swathed with two napkins, fringed and 
tasselled and embroidered in brown like the shrouds. In the 
palm of the hand was clasped a small black wooden vessel with a 
copper stopper, probably a lamp. About the neck were the 
strings of beads, with the silver tweezers. This was the only in- 
stance in which I found anything in the hands of the dead. 

In many portions of Peru bodies have been unearthed with 
the mouth covered by a disk of gold. I have never seen indica- 
tions of this custom on the mummies of the Chira, although I 
have found fragments of such disks among the ornaments hang- 
ing from the necklaces. In the graves of women, however, I dis- 
covered another custom. Through the lower lip of most of the 
female corpses protruded a jeweled conical-shape cylinder of 
silver or of gold, about an inch long and three-fourths to half an 
inch in diameter, slightly flanged at the larger end to prevent the 
piece from slipping. Most of these ornaments are badly corroded, 
but by good fortune in one of the little toilet gourds I found a 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] THE HUAC08 OF CHIRA VALLEY, PERU 17 

specimen in perfect condition. In the top is sunk a bloodstone, 
about which is set a circle of red coral balls, mounted separately. 
The body of the piece is of silver, hollow, but entirely closed. 
As these jewels do not occur in all the graves of females, it is possi- 
ble that they were a sign of marriage. Many of the specimens 
have flowers of gold upon the crown instead of gems. All are 
wrought with great skill and show a high development of the 
silversmith's art. There are also other pieces of jeweler's work 
of great merit, such as wooden earrings inlaid with mother-of- 
pearl, and of gold wire twisted into spirals. 

Another feature of these graves is worthy of attention. The 
soil with which they are filled shows signs of fire, and is thickly 
mixed with charcoal and pieces of charred leaves, sticks, and 
animal bones. These probably indicate that sacrifices formed 
part of the burial ceremony at the tomb, and that their remains 
were thus interred with the dead. 

Unfortunately other duties prevented me from digging con- 
tinuously upon the slope. The success of my excavations was 
bruited about and during my absence the natives, convinced 
that I was hunting for gold and buried treasure, kept up a series 
of diggings on their own account, which soon exhausted that 
portion of the field. Excavations in the level plain proved both 
diflScult and unprofitable, as water had sunk into the graves, de- 
stroyed the contents, and damaged the pottery. I therefore con- 
tinued my search in other directions. The best field proved to 
be the head of the ravine in which lie the ruins of Paredones. 
Here I found many graves, but their pottery was much coarser 
and cruder and seemed to belong to a remoter age than did that 
which I found upon the slope. The animal forms were less 
natural and the clay was by no means so fine. Although most 
of the graves had fallen in, it was clear that the same general 
system of burial had been followed as in the Vichayal field. 

While I was carrying on this work I received an invitation 
from the owner of the hacienda of San Jacinto, near Sullana, to 
examine some huaco fields on his estate. As I had expected, 
the steward in charge of the place could tell me little about the 
fields beyond their locality. He merely knew that the people 
went digging occasionally and brought back haacos and ** curi- 
osities,*' and that some years before the mummy of a cacuiue or 
chief, fully dressed, had been unearthed. Two silver bowls had 
3 



Digitized by 



Google 



18 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [A^ol. VIII 

been found with the body, but he could not say what had be- 
come of them. 

Accompanied by a small force of peons, the steward and I left 
the fertile lands of the hacienda and came out upon a great 
barren plain about a mile in width and extending all along the 
foothills of the valley. Rising out of the midst of this flat 
stretch was a high hill irregularly surrounded by lower eleva- 
tions. Inspection soon showed the eminence to be a flat-topped 
pyramid faced with conical adobes. The highest portion was 
perhaps 50 feet above the plain. The sides were about 200 feet 
long. Three of these sides were steeply inclined faces, running 
to the top without intervening stories. From the fourth or north- 
eastern side ran out a series of rectangular additions, wings, or 
L's of a lesser altitude. In spite of the long washing by the rain 
to which they had been exposed, these additions were still fairly 
level on top and the walls and divisions were clearly visible. It 
was on the outer slopes of the lowest of these wings, in the angle 
formed by its junction with the main structure, that the mummy 
of the cacique had been disinterred. It was evident that after 
this discovery a great deal of digging had been done. Bones 
and skulls were lying about, and in several places walls made of 
large brick-like adobes had been laid bare. Though smaller in 
extent, this edifice, known as Cerro de Mate, greatly resembled 
the one at Paredones. 

After I had set my peons to work the steward and I mounted 
the principal height or pyramid, and from there he pointed out 
to me, at the western extremity of the plain about five miles 
away, a similar hill or mound, somewhat greater in size, which 
he assured me was of the same nature as the one we were on. 
Many smaller mounds were visible all over the barren country. 
Close at hand lay several low mounds, like the remains of out- 
buildings, from 5 to 20 feet in height. Along the southern edge 
of the plain we could see the line of the great irrigation canal, 
which must have been 50 feet wide by 20 feet deep. It is pos- 
sible that the mounds and pyramids that dot the plain were 
built from the earth excavated from this big ditch. 

For two days I dug around the foot of the ruin without suc- 
cess so far as huacos were concerned, although the whole surface 
of the ground is covered with bits of broken pottery. I there- 
fore ran a shaft down the center of one of the smallest of the 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] THE HUACOS OP CHIKA VALLEY. PERU 19 

neighboring mounds and uncovered foundation walls and many 
pieces of bone, shell, and pottery. I had determined to dig until 
I encountered the original surface of the plain. When I had 
sunk the shaft about twelve feet, and more than four feet below 
the present general level of the country, I came upon a layer of 
very fine ashes some four inches thick. Under this was the 
original undisturbed clay, but in spite of the ashes resting upon 
it, it showed no signs of fire or baking. The ashes must have 
been brought from elsewhere and spread here before the mound 
was raised. While I found no graves at this point, the bones 
and rags scattered about proved that many bodies had been un- 
earthed on the lower skirts of this same mound at about four 
feet below the surface. Possibly the foundation walls I encoun- 
tered were those of a small chapel, and in digging from the top 
I had only gone down through its floor, under which no graves 
were made. The dead were doubtless buried in the outside 
slopes. 

Taking the advice of one of my peons who knew the place, I 
changed the field of work to a part of the plain a mile or two to 
the west. Here we met with better luck, and although much of 
the ground had been dug over by the natives in years past, we 
found several huacos, some beads, and two of the silver lip cylin- 
ders already described. Only a few bones and strips of cloth 
remained of the mummies. The earth here was clay impreg- 
nated with niter. It had been so soaked by the rains and baked 
by the sun that it was almost impossible to dig through it. This 
plain is so thickly covered with potsherds and shells that I have 
no hesitation in saying that the whole of it is one great burying 
ground. 

On my way back to Amotape, while nearing a small town 
called Tamarindo, my attention was called to some wall-like 
lines on top of one of the cliffs. On examining them I found 
that they were parts of an immense edifice larger than many of 
our cathedrals. It crowned a cliff" at least 150 feet high. The 
walls were adobe, with retaining foundations of stone on the 
more precipitous sides of the hill. There were the outlineo of 
many rooms and corridors. In places huacos had evidently 
been exhumed. Shells and fragments abounded as in other 
places. On the plain just at the foot of this cliff" was another 
structure identical almost with the one at which I had been 
working. 



Digitized by 



Google 



20 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

From the cliff above I could see the two great ruins on the 
plain of San Jacinto, the first one five miles distant, and Cerro de 
Mate five miles farther east. These ruins at Tamarindo are called 
CapuUano. Undoubtedly there was some reason for placing 
these huge edifices at almost equal distances and within sight of 
one another. On the opposite side of the river, facing Tama- 
rindo, near the town of La Huaca, is another set of similar ruins. 

It is almost vain to speculate upon the age of these various 
works. We know that this portion of the country was well pop- 
ulated at the time of Pizarro's conquest, and that the Spaniards 
were astonished at the advanced condition of the people ; beyond 
this we have few data for conjecture. Such evidence as there is 
seems to give the works a sacred character. Religion must have 
played a great part in the lives of a people who made so much 
of death. Had they been fortresses or palaces they would hard ly 
have been made the centers of national burial fields. The enor- 
mous quantities of ashes mingled with the earth about them may 
indicate the perpetual fires of sacrifice. Many of the buildings 
may have been in ruin long before the Spaniards came, for it 
seems incredible that the rains and winds and neglect of three 
hundred short years could have reduced them to the condition 
in which we now find them. 

The valley, even under the most elaborate system of irrigation, 
could have maintained only a few thousand people, while the 
graves must be numbered by millions. The development in the 
arts of weaving, silver-working and pottery revealed by a com- 
parison of the contents of the lower graves . with those of the 
upper tiers must have resulted from the labor of many genera- 
tions among a people so un progressive as we know such races to 
have been. That graves lie thus one above another is not in it- 
self a proof that the lowest graves greatly antedate the up})er 
ones. They are lower because floods or rains raised the level of 
the valley after they were made, and the stratum newly formed 
above them became available for burial purposes. Such changes 
may have been the work of ages, but the torrential rains which 
sometimes break over the desert might accomplish the same re- 
sult in a single season. 

Physically, and no doubt intellectually, these aborigines were 
superior to their modern successors. They must have had an 
extensive commerce, for the gems found in the graves could 
only have come from the far north and east. But whence this 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] THE HUAOOS OF CHIRA VALLEY, PERU 21 

people came, how long they occupied this valley of the desert, 
and whether their civilization was in its zenith or in its de- 
cline at the time of Pizarro's arrival among them are mysteries 
which, through the absence of written records, we shall probably 
never be able to solve. We know that they were tributary to the 
great kingdom of the Incas, but otherwise we know nothing of 
their history. 

A study of the practices of the modern natives in the light 
afforded by the collection shows a remarkable survival of an- 
cient industries and methods. At Catacaos, near Piura (the old 
San Miguel de Piura, the first permanent city founded by the 
Christians in Peru), there exists today a very curious community 
of Indians, whose manners and customs differ greatly from those 
of their Cholo neighbors. They have but little intercourse soci- 
ally with the people about them, marry among themselves, ad- 
here to an obsolete form of attire, and seem to be generally in a 
condition of arrested development. The inhabitants may be 
regarded as an unchanged remnant of the past. Their principal 
industries are straw-braiding (they make most of the so-called 
Panama hats used in the world) and the manufacture of pottery. 
The former industry is probably a modern adaptation of an 
ancient art. The potters follow without change the methods of 
their prehistoric ancestors, but their products fall far behind in 
finish and artistic taste. In a hole in the ground a moistened 
mixture of clay and sand is set to " rot " for several days. When 
in proper condition this clay is formed by hand, with wooden 
tools, over rounded stones, into the shapes of the ordinary coarse 
cooking pots and other vessels for common use. The neck or 
mouth is made in a separate piece and joined to the body by a 
separate operation. When finished, the pots are dried in the sun 
and then piled in a rude oven, with layers of dry grass or reeds, 
and baked. This method of firing is very imperfect, as at least 
ten per cent, of the pieces are lost — a fact which accounts for 
the tons of fragments which lie around the ancient ovens. The 
fancy shapes, such as human heads, figures, fruit and vegetable 
forms, which are used as water jars, are made in sections, in 
molds of baked clay exactly like the molds found in the old 
graves. The art is handed down from father to son. 

From the weaving tools in the collection Mr. Frank Hamilton 
Gushing, of Washington, has been able to reconstruct the loom 



Digitized by 



Google 



22 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

of the ancients, on which it is possible to reproduce the most 
intricate patterns and tapestries of the graves — a feat hitherto 
declared to be impossible, for as no loom frame has ever been 
found in Peruvian remains it was supposed that the work was 
accomplished by unknown methods. I was surprised to dis- 
cover that Mr. Cushing's loom is identically the same as the one 
now in use by all the Indian women in the Chira region, although, 
as in the case of the pottery art, the moderns have fallen oflf 
greatly in skill. The peculiarity of this loom is that the weaver, 
by the use of a strap passed around the body, becomes herself 
the frame. 

I found another case of survival in the silversmith's art. Al- 
though the present practices have been modified by modem tools 
and other foreign influences, the force of tradition appears in a 
persistent fondness for wire filagree. In the collection there is 
a pair of gold earrings of wire twisted into spiral cones. At 
Amotape, on the Chira river, I met a very intelligent half-breed 
named Cornejo who is an exceedingly skillful goldsmith. The 
art has been in his family for generations. 

In one of the graves I unearthed a bundle of agricultural im- 
plements, consisting of an algarroba spade with a straight handle 
and blade, a short wooden dibble, and a plain stick four or five 
feet in length. These have their counterparts in modern times. 
The natives still use a straight-handled spade, but the blade 
is now of steel, and the dibble for planting corn and cotton. 
The rod in the bundle was doubtless employed as a measure of 
distance between the corn or cotton rows. 

The superstitions and ceremonials of ante-Spanish times ai>- 
pear today in a thousand forms under the thin gloss of Chris- 
tianity, and even in connection with many features of the 
modern ritual. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 18a5] CASTE IN INDIA 23 



CASTE IN INDIA 

BY J. H. PORTER 

When caste in an inchoate form issued from overcrowding 
within limited areas, spontaneous social segregation, and race 
and religious antagonisms, a priesthood, recently become domi- 
nant, took advantage of it at once, systematized its restrictions, 
and declared its laws to be revelations from heaven. There was 
nothing national or ethnic in this action. It was the natural 
and obvious policy of a usurping order, seeking to strengthen a 
position it was unable to maintain by force. Persistent efforts 
to the same end were made in Persia and Egypt, but unsuccess- 
fully. 

Vedantism did not lend itself to ecclesiastical encroachments. 
Brahmanism, on the contrary, rested upon the supremacy of a 
priestly class, as did that Hinduism by which it was followed. 
To the first caste was unknown, while both the latter supported 
it with all the power they could command. 

Practically Buddhism was a revolt against caste tyranny. In 
this respect it finally failed. While the church in India main- 
tained itself no alteration of abstract doctrine could afiect formal 
observances. Caste outlived the jar and conflict of nations and 
creeds, the wreck of theologies, and the transformation of gods. 
It still lives, while the principles of Sakya Muni are taught at 
Banaras and when the Neo-Brahmanism of Sankaracharya, in 
so far as it can be said to possess any religious vitality, has de- 
rived it from Buddhism. 

Caste was invincible except to an assault which would over- 
throw the order whose interests were involved in its existence. 
The results of causes operating toward that end have been here 
traced in general outlines. 

Freed from myths and traditions, conflicting views, the intri- 
cacies of state papers, and those technicalities which obscure 
Sanskritic codes, caste organization is seen to put an end to all 
we consider essential to liberty and happiness, prosperity or 
progress. It is the most memorable, comprehensive, and suc- 



Digitized by 



Google 



24 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

cessful attempt ever made by an order to oppress humanity in 
its own interests. Its enactments broke up the race into frag- 
ments never to be reunited, separating Aryans from other peo- 
ples by impassable barriers, permanently fixing their occupa- 
tions, interests, associations, and aspirations. As men were born, 
so must they remain. Their course of life was prescribed, their 
places after death predetermined. Of the four castes, three were 
formed from the conquering race, Brdhmanas, a priesthood ; then 
KshatriyaSy warriors, and Vaisyas, herdsmen in the first place, 
afterward farmers. These last two existed chiefly for the benefit 
of the first. As for the fourth, Sadras, they were those *' slave 
bands of black descent " (varna meant both caste and color), 
the remnant of a native population (Ddsas), whom our worthy an- 
cestors had not slaughtered when they took possession of their 
property. Those Dravidian and Kolarian peoples who remained 
unconquered and still occupied three-fourths of Endia when 
these revelations concerning them came down from heaven, were 
dogs and devils, given up to eternal reprobation. 

The sacred text treats of caste distinctions as follows : ** In 
order to protect this universe He, the most resplendent one, 
assigned fto men) separate duties and occupations. * * * 
To Brdhmanas he assigned teaching and studying" [the Veda, 
sruti, or revelation], " sacrificing for their own benefit and that 
of others; giving and receiving alms."* These avocations and 
offices were limited to the '* twice born " — Aryans who came into 
the world naturally, as men, and had a second birth through 
initiation into the number of those that might be saved. SCldras 
and the rest — aborigines, out-castes. Pariahs — were not men, but 
as beasts that perish, to be taught nothing and given nothing ; 
likewise nothing could be accepted from them. On the other 
hand, " the very birth of a BrA-hmana is an eternal incarnation of 
the sacred law." By divine right he is a member of all courts, 
an assessor or judge in every case. It is his province to settle 
disputed points, to impose penances, to perform rites essential 
to salvation. He sanctified the companies into which he came. 
To resist his will was mortal sin ; to defame him, sacrilege ; to 
strike him, death. " Let the first part of a Brahmana's name de- 
note something auspicious * * * the second part of a Br^h- 

*C. i. V. 87, 91, 95. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] CASTE IN INDIA 25 

mana's name shall be a word implying happiness." But with a 
Sj&dra, •' the first part must express something contemptible," 
and the second part " be an expression denoting service."* A 
member of the priestly caste could not be executed. **A11 other 
castes shall suffer capital punishment," but " no greater sin is 
known on earth than killing a Br^hmana. A king must there- 
fore not even conceive in his mind the thought of killing a BdVh- 
mana. * * * Let him never slay a Br^hmana, though he 
has committed all possible crimes." f There is no need for him 
to be " uselessly active with his hands or feet." Gifts to a Br^h- 
mana are meritorious, and if he wants anything let him take it. 
"A Brahmana coming into existence is born as the highest on 
earth, the lord of all created beings. * * * Whatever exists 
in the world is the property of the Brilhmana. * * * The 
BrS-hmana eats but his own food, wears but his own apparel, 
bestows but his own in alms ; other mortals exist through the 
benevolence of the Br^hmana." J He might not " give the leav- 
ings of his meal to a hungry SCldra," and if even a " twice-born " 
man listen to his instructions without permission, *' he shall 
sink into hell." 

" One occupation only the T^rd prescribed for the Sftdra, to 
serve meekly." § ** A wealthy Br^hmana shall compassicmately 
support both a Kshatriya and a Vaisya if they are distressed," 
but not " make initiated men of the twice-born castes against 
their will do the work of slaves. A Sddra, whether bought or 
unbought, he may compel to do servile work, for he was created 
by the Self-existent (Svaya mbhd) to be the slave of a Br^hmana. 
* * * Though emancipated by his master, he is not released 
from servitude ; since that is innate in him, who can set him free 
from it." II 

This and much more to the same effect by those who traded 
in all human needs and necessities from the hour of birth until 
a man's ashes mingled with those of his funeral pile. No such 
system can come into existence immediately, but the priesthood 
taught that it descended from on high to the prophets in a com- 

*C. ii, v. 31,32. 

tC. viii, 379,380,381. 

tC. i, v. 99, 100,101. 

«C. i, v. 87. 

II C. viii, v. 413, 414. 



Digitized by 



Google 



26 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

pleted form. Brahmanism, however, began when a section of 
the pastoral Aryans, rent from their kinsmen in the region of 
the modem Kahnates, probably by some ritualistic schism, burst 
into the Punjab. India has no secular history of ancient times, 
but her religious records in some measure make good this defi- 
ciency. From them we learn that in those days the head of each 
family was father, chief, and priest; that in every tribe its leader 
stood in like relations toward the whole aggregate. On the occur- 
rence of public sacrifices whose efiicacy depended upon a strict 
adherence to traditional rites it was found that this aggregate 
was very frequently at fault. They understood fighting better 
than sacred services, and as it .was of the last importance that 
these should be performed correctly, some householder who knew 
the rubric was selected as a celebrant. Such men grew into perma- 
nent sacrificers and priests ; their functions became hereditary ; 
they founded families which were the repositories of a knowledge 
that the laity had forgotten. Such groups developed into classes, 
and finally consolidated as a caste. The BrAhmanas' position 
depended upon their attainments. Schools were founded to pre- 
serve and propagate sacred learning, and in time they inevitably 
diflfered, so that their names, taken from those of great teachers 
(Apast^mba, Gautama, Baudhy^na, and so on), really represent 
separate codes whose revelations (Srati) and traditions (Smriti) 
are not the same. 

With a caste organization the priesthood found means to in- 
crease their power by recasting scholastic systems, changing and 
adding to the injunctions they contained, and adapting them 
more perfectly to their own advantage. Such Dharma-Sdtras 
(laws of duty) were declared to be obligatory upon all " twice- 
born " men and issued as direct utterances of the Almighty — 
" He who is indiscernible and eternal." Enough of those works 
survive to show the process described, but that great canonical 
Manu-Smriti quoted, and which is known throughout the world 
as ** The Laws of Manu," was taken from a M^nava Dharma- 
Sfttra that has perished. 

In early days, however, if Aryas had souls to be saved, they 
had also battles to fight. Priests claimed that victory was granted 
through their intercession; soldiers said it was won by their 
swords. The parties clashed ; both claimed the spoils, and they 
fought for precedence in long, fierce wars whose history is lost 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] CASTE IN INDIA 27 

and of which all we know is that the Br^hraanas won. It was to 
this success that the caste system owes its existence, while those 
claims, restrictions, and penalties it contained necessarily led to 
the formation of sub-castes, sections, and out-castes. A sage 
saturated with sanctity could not do as a warrior might, nor the 
latter do what was proper for an agriculturist. Many things 
that mud be done and which men toUl do under all circumstances 
were unlawful for any Aryan. 

Caste, however, never became effective in the ideal form in 
which it was promulgated, nor was it so widely diffused as people 
generally suppose. Nevertheless this incubus crushed progress 
and public spirit out of unnurnbered millions and stood unde- 
stroyed amidst shocks such as no similar system ever sustained. 
Wars of conquest overwhelmed it in infancy, maturity, and old 
age, and its form arose again. Scythian and Greek, Arab, Per- 
sian, Pathan, and Mongol, Sikh and Englishman, destroyed and 
changed, while this endured. The religion of which it was the 
keystone passed from nature worship through Vedantic doc- 
trinalism into the base idolatries of Hinduism, and caste re- 
mained. Buddhism , which is before all else a protestation against 
its tyranny, converted one-third of the earth's inhabitants and 
became extinct in India, leaving caste unchanged. Reformers 
and heresiarchs, with innumerable foUowings, renounced its au- 
thority, but proselytes came in upon all sides to take their places. 
Christianity and Mohammedanism assailed caste unsuccessfully. 
Human nature revolted against it in vain. 

Now its last barriers are breaking down. During the more 
tranquil ages succeeding Aryan invasion the warrior class lost its 
former individuality ; the old Vasaiya assumed the character of 
a modern husbandman. Theoretically these castes persisted, but 
practically they faded slowly and insensibly away. Members of 
powerful Kshatriya families had at all times made their way into 
the Brahmanical order, and the descendants of rich farmers were 
adopted into the military class, but such permutations availed 
nothing against that suppressive power by which they were 
opposed ; neither did they touch the distinction existing between 
the highest and lowest. That last impassable gulf is being 
bridged, but not by organized effort of any kind. 

People who in anywise appreciate the importance of great 
events do not attempt to foretell their consequences ; that depart- 



Digitized by 



Google 



28 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

ment of prophecy is appropriated by men of a different stamp. 
If, however, we can neither foresee such results in their fullness 
nor estimate the respective values of those factors by which they 
were brought about, nothing prevents us from recognizing exist- 
ing facts, and perhaps the most important of these in India is 
what Sir Alfred Lyell calls " the gradual Brahmanizing of the 
aboriginal, non-Aryan, or casteless tribes." It may seem at first 
sight that the conversion of outsiders and opponents into adher- 
ents tends to strengthen this institution ; that to accelerate and 
increase transitions heretofore inconspicuous would build up the 
system instead of breaking it down. No such metamorphosis, 
however, as that of Sddra masses into " twice-born " men can 
take place othenvise than destructively. This is obvious, and it 
accounts for an anomalous feature of those periods when it was 
impossible, namely, that caste, before senile atrophy enfeebled 
it, remained apparently unaffected by national convulsions of all 
kinds. Those great resolvents which bring about reconstruction 
by affording an opportunity for elements of change which have 
accumulated imperceptibly to coalesce and display themselves 
under distinctive forms left it untouched. While the classifica- 
tion made by sacred law of casteless men with " elephants, horses, 
and despicable barbarians '' represented a living principle, the 
distinction between Sftdra and Br^hmana, wide as that between 
man and beast, might be maintained ; but how could this be 
possible while the priesthood were receiving the former among 
Aryans in multitudes? 

This is but comparatively lately the case, and the fact wit- 
nesses to a decay of the religious order, not to its development. 
In days of old D^isas had no rights; they could acquire none, 
so far as the dominant caste was concerned, except through its 
indifferentism and loss of power. Even when the Aryas were 
comparatively newcomers in the Punjab and their intolerance 
was still intense, the institutes of their law were violated under 
the influence of expediency. All Dravidians and Kolarians 
were accursed, but some native tribes were more powerful than 
others, and a process of compromise began. Political associa- 
tions and alliances paved the way to a more intimate union, and 
certain families of aboriginal race pretended to be Rajputs and 
their claims were allowed. That wreck and confusion insepa- 
rable on both sides from protracted war afforded an opportunity 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] CASTK IN INDIA 29 

to go back to periods when genealogies became obscure and un- 
certain. These haughty warriors, who professed to be of royal 
descent, would have scorned to mix their blood with that of such 
canaille as their former enemies. The aspirants for that honor, 
of which there were only individual examples, had therefore to 
prove a fictitious extraction, nor under the circumstances was 
this very difficult. A Brahman priest was always at hand to 
forge a pedigree, invent a family miracle connected with the 
locality where the tribe settled, and receive the head of a group 
and his descendants into the fold set apart for " twice-born " 
Aryas. Not then would a patrician whose line went back de tout 
jamais give his daughter to such an upstart. With his grand- 
sons, however, it was dififerent. The posterity of such people 
contracted marriages with girls of pure lineage or with the higher 
class of manufactured Rajputs. 

This may be regarded as the first step toward obliterating race 
distinctions and removing caste obstructions. In *^ the Middle 
Land " or Bengal, where this system crystallized, but where also 
ancient institutions were most corroded and changed through 
time and a struggle for existence that bore heavily upon over- 
crowded areas, transitions like the above took place not only in 
separate instances, but en bloc. Sections of native clans or entire 
tribes gave in their adherence to some Hindu sect, became 
Vaishnabs, Ramayats, and the like, lost their tribal name, and 
often their language. Whether there was any intermixture of 
blood in such cases depended upon local circumstances. These 
increments soon became indistinguishable, except in physical 
type, from the Aryans. They worshipped a new set of gods in 
the old spirit, and were speedily swallowed up among surround- 
ing throngs. 

Gradual conversion likewise aided in making good the losses 
continually taking place through heresy and schism. As was 
said, it was always impossible to carry out the sacred law liter- 
ally. Contact, self-interest, and the indifference attaching to a 
change of faith where nothing is altered but a name, facilitated 
the movement, and in India, as throughout the East, ritualism 
is more than religion, and the latter stands instead of nationality. 
New aggregates were formed by this kind of interstitial change 
who did not need to account for their origin, whereas where 
masses went over, priestly aid was essential in order to show that 



Digitized by 



Google 



30 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

these aborigines were in reality ancient Aryan septs which had 
been occulted amidst the storms of past times. 

Such is caste, and such were the principal means by which it 
was modified. How obstructive and destructive it has been ; 
what secret springs of progress have aided in the amelioration of 
that complex and wonderfully contrasted society it has so long 
controlled, and how long its intiuence may yet be felt it is not 
attempted to say. India has done great things, despite her 
thwarted energies and arrested growth, much greater than the 
world in general knows, and whatever is latent within her is 
now exposed to the quickening influence of Western culture. 
The new birth will be in a period far removed from ours, but in 
the meantime her actual accomplishments, what she has suf- 
fered, and how her afflictions were sustained may be studied 
with advantage. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] MICMAC CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS 31 



MICMAC CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS * 

BY STANSBURY HAGER 

My information about the customs and traditions of the Mic- 
mac Indians of Nova Scotia has been derived ahnost entirely 
from Abram and Newell Glode, the first a man of seventy-three 
years, the latter somewhat younger and of exceptionally pure 
blood for a time when none are wholly so. These two Indians 
have justly achieved a reputation among their tribe for intelli- 
gence and knowledge of their native lore. During the many 
days I have spent with them at Digby and elsewhere I have 
invariably found them as eager and interested in being ques- 
tioned as I was in catechizing them. However, in most cases 
I have confirmed what they told me by information obtained 
from others, and I have read to them what I have written in 
order to avoid mistakes. 

It is a misfortune to these Indians that while all their tribe 
have been taught to read the characters invented by one of the 
early priests they have been debarred from learning the much 
simpler Roman characters by the successors of that priest, who 
until quite recently forbade Micmac children to attend the public 
schools. 

The Micmacs have a system of communicating while in the 
woods. Sticks are placed in the ground ; a cut on one of them 
indicates that a message in picture-writing on a piece of birch 
bark is hidden near by under a stone. The direction in which 
the stick leans from its base upward indicates that in which the 
party moved, and thus serves as a convenient hint to those who 
follow to keep off their hunting grounds. 

A game much in use within the wigwams of the Micmacs in 
former times is that called by some writers altestakun or wdlt^s 
takiin. By good native authority it is said that the proper name 
for it is io6ltMdmkw6n, It is a kind of dice game of unknown 
antiquity, undoubtedly of pre-Columbian origin. It is played 

*The author's thanks are due to Major W. 8. Beebe for vahiable assist- 
ance in the preiwiration of this paper. 



Digitized by 



Google 



32 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

upon a circular wooden dish, properly rock maple, almost exactly 
a foot in diameter, hollowed to a depth of about three-fourths of 
an inch at its center. This dish plays an important r6le in the 
older legends of the Micmacs. Filled with water and left over 
night, its appearance next morning serves to reveal hidden knowl- 
edge of past, present, and future. It is also said to have been 
used as a vessel upon an arkite trip. The dice of caribou 
bone are six in number, having flat faces and rounded sides. 
One face is plain, the other bears a dotted cross. When all the 
marked or all the unmarked faces are turned up there is a count 
of five points ; if five marked faces and one unmarked face or 
five unmarked faces and one marked face are turned up one point 
results ; if a die falls off the dish there is no count. 

There are fifty-five counting sticks — fifty-one i)lain rounded 
ones about seven and a half inches long, a king pin shaped like 
the forward half of an arrow, and three notched sticks, each pre- 
senting half of the rear end of an arrow. These last four are 
about eight inches long. Three of the plain sticks form a count 
of one point ; the notched sticks have a value of five points, while 
the king pin varies in value, being used as a fifty-second plain 
stick, except when it stands alone in the general pile. Then it 
has, like the notched sticks, a value of five points. Thus the 
possible points of the count are seventeen (one-third of fifty-one) 
on the plain sticks and fifteen (five times three) on the three 
notched sticks, a total of thirty-two ; but by a complex system 
the count may be extended indefinitely. 

In playing the game two players sit opposite each other, their 
legs crossed in a characteristic manner, and the dish or woltes 
between them usually placed on a thick piece of leather or cloth. 
A squaw keeps the score on the counting sticks, which at first lie 
together. The six dice are placed on a dish with their marked 
faces down ; one of the players takes the dish in both hands, 
raises it an inch or two from the ground, and brings it down 
again with considerable force, thus turning the dice. If all or 
all but one of the upturned faces are marked or unmarked, he 
repeats the toss and continues to do so as long as one of these 
combinations results. When he fails to score, the amount of 
his winnings is withdrawn from the general pile and forms the 
nucleus of his private pile. His opponent repeats the dice- 
throwing until he also fails to score. Two successive throws of 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] MICMAC CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS 33 

either a single point or of five points count thrice the amount 
of one throw — that is, three points or fifteen points respectively. 
Three successive throws count five times as much as a single 
throw, etc. After the pile of counting sticks has been exhausted 
a new feature is introduced in the count. The player who scores 
first takes a single plain stick from his pile and places it by itself, 
with one of its sides facing him to represent one point, and per- 
pendicular to this, either horizontally or vertically, to represent 
five points. He continues to add sticks thus as he continues to 
score. This use of the sticks as counters to indicate unpaid 
winnings is a device for deferring further settlement until the 
game seems near its end, and also serves to increase the count 
indefinitely to meet the indefinite duration of the game, as after 
one player secures a token his opponent when he scores merely 
reduces the former's token pile by the value of his score. The 
reduction is effected by returning from the token pile to the 
private pile the amount of the opponent's score ; hence at any 
time the token pile represents the amount of advantage which 
its owner has obtained since the last settlement. These settle- 
ments are made whenever either party may desire it ; this, how- 
ever, is supposed to be whenever one player's token pile seems 
to represent a value approaching the limit of his opponent's 
ability to pay. If his opponent should permit the settlement to 
be deferred until he were no longer able to pay his debts, then 
he would lose the game to the first player ; whereas if one player 
after the settlement retains five plain sticks, but not more, a new 
feature is introduced which favors him. If while retaining his 
five sticks he can score five points before his opponent scores at 
all, he wins the game in spite of the much greater amount of his 
opponent's winnings up to that point. If his opponent scores 
one point only before he obtains his five points he still has a 
chance, though a less promising one. After paying over the 
three plain sticks that reprf^sent a single point, two plain sticks 
still remain to him ; he is then compelled to win seven points 
before his opponent wins one, or he forfeits the game ; but if he 
succeeds in winning his seven points the game is still his. How- 
ever, in these last chances he is further handicapped by the rule 
that he can at no time score more points than are represented in 
his private pile; consequently, if with only five plain sticks in 
his possession he could score only a single point, even if his toss 
5 



Digitized by 



Google 



34 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

should call for five; but with six plain sticks he could score two 
points ; with nine sticks, three, etc. The last chances are : With 
only five plain sticks, five points are necessary to win ; with four 
plain sticks, five points are necessary to win ; with three sticks, 
six points ; with two sticks, seven points ; with one stick, seven 
points. 

There are two other minor rules : one, that in counting five 
points on the plain sticks four bundles of four each are given in- 
stead of the five bundles of three each, as one should expect; 
total, sixteen. The other rule is that to count six points we use 
a notched stick plus only two plain sticks, instead of three, as 
might be expected. 

It will be seen that the complex counting system of this game 
presents marked inconsistencies. Ingenuity of a high grade 
exists side by side with features which can only be regarded as 
extremely clumsy when viewed from the standpoint of simple 
utility. Granting the necessity for using three plain sticks to 
mark a count of a single point, tlie method by which the results 
are simplified is admirable ; but what is the necessity for using 
three sticks instead of one to represent a point ? The apparently 
needless confusion which results directly from this feature will 
be patent to any one who attempts to explain the game in his 
own language. Why did the inventive genius of the race sim- 
plify the results of a clumsy start instead of simplifying the start 
itself? Does it not seem that it would have done so unless there 
had been some motive other than that of utility for the retention 
of this feature? Through almost all the customs, dances, and 
legends of the Micmac, as through those of all peoples not aff^ected 
by our literal modern civilization, there runs a vein of mystic or 
allegoric motive, and here must we look for the explanation of 
the woltes or dish. When we examine the numerical combina- 
tions of the game the preponderance of odd numbers is noticeable. 
We are dealing with 1, 3, 5, 7, 15, 17, 51, and 55, and most of these 
numbers occur in several distinct relations. The only even num- 
bers that we encounter are 52, 32, and 6, the first two occurring 
but once and the last twice, though in an insignificant position. 
This agrees well with the observations of Dr. Rand and Mr. Leland 
of the remarkable respect in which the number 7 is held by the 
Micmacs. It would thus seem that they are believers in the luck 
of odd numbers. Is it chance, moreover, that two of the even 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] MICMAC CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS 35 

numbers (52 and 32) and one of the most prominent of the odd 
(17) are intimately associated with time relations among the 
Indians of Central America? The number 52 among the Maya 
is the ahaic katun or great cycle of years, and is divided into two 
smaller cycles of 20 and 32. 

If we turn to the materials of the game we obtain further sug- 
gestions. The circle about the perimeter of the dish and the 
cross on the dice and on the king pin provide two figures which 
throughout America are connected with the calendar. Moreover, 
it can scarcely be chance that if we put together the straight sides 
of two notched sticks and attach the king pin at one end of them 
we obtain the unmistakable representation of an arrow. 

The arrow whose point is single and whose rear end is bifurcate 
is to be found in many mystic associations in America. For 
example, it occur© in the hands of two of the converging rows of 
figures on the so-called Great Gateway of Tiahuanacu, Bolivia, 
and also in the left hand of the central figure on the same monu- 
ment. We meet with it again figured on a bowl which Squier 
brought from Nicaragua, where the three arrow-points alternate 
with three feathered tips, thus giving the alternate stellar inter- 
lacing, which is one of the most conspicuous ornaments on the 
facade of Uxmal. In this connection we may consider the magic 
arrows of Glooscap, the Micmac demigod, which arrows, to use 
the words of Mr. Leland, ** are, of course, world-wide and date 
from the shafts of Abaris and those used among the ancient Jews 
for divination." * Again, this feature suggests the Navajo story 
of the Apache who came from a hole in the ground and diced 
with some Navajo opponents until he had won everything that 
the latter possessed. They were so angry over this that they tied 
the Apache to an arrow and shot him off* into si)ace ; but he lived 
to have revenge, for he brought the whites in three bands and 
utterly exterminated the Navajo.t 

The only other Micmac game of which I have learned any- 
thing is tooddljlk or football. The goals were of two sticks placed 
slantingly across each other like the poles of the traditional 
wigwam. About a score of players, divided into two parties, 
faced each other at equal distances from the center of the field. 
The ball was then rolled in by the umpire, and the object of the 

* Algonquian Legends, p. 23. 

t Bancroft: Native Races, iii, p. 83. 



Digitized by 



Google 



36 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

game was to kick it between the goal posts. In more recent 
timas a player may catch his opponent by the neck and thus 
hold him back until he can obtain the ball himself, but scalping 
was anciently employed as a means of disposing of an opponent. 

The choogichoo yajik, or serpent dance, is well worthy of atten- 
tion. Newell Glode assured me that very few of his tribe knew 
anything about it now, and not even he remembered the song 
of the dance, for he had not heard it since his childhood. It 
appears to have been suppressed by missionaries. 

In performing the serpent dance the male and female partici- 
pants, in no fixed number, formed a circle, at the center of which 
stood the head man, who did the singing. The circle of dancers 
moved first to the right three times around the head man. The 
dancers then turned their backs to the head man and repeated 
the revolution three times ; next the two sets turned their backs 
to one another and again moved thrice around the circle ; finally, 
in the same position, they reversed the direction of the motion 
and move backward around the circle three times. This figure 
was thus completed in four positions and twelve revolutions, 
and, according to Newell Glode, signifies the rattlesnake waking 
from his winter sleep. 

The head man now left the circle through the space made for 
him, simulating a serpent coming from its hole ; he led the 
dancers around the field, making many snake-like twistings and 
turnings. In one hand he held a horn filled with shot or small 
pebbles ; with this he rattled the time for the step and the song of 
the other dancers. After they had advanced some distance the 
last dancer remained stationary and the others moved around the 
leader in a constantly narrowing circle until all were closely 
coiled around him. The head man then reversed the direction 
of the motion and the dancers came out of the circle in line as 
before. This represented the coiling and uncoiling of the rattle- 
snake. 

Again, the line twisted and turned around the field until at 
length the head man remained stationary and the last dancer 
led the line around him as a center, coiling and uncoiling as in 
the preceding figure. Then the head man resumed the leader- 
ship, there were more twistings and turnings, and a third time 
the line coiled and uncoiled again around the last dancer. Three 
times, they say, the rattlesnake must coil before it can shed its 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] MICMAC CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS 37 

skin ; therefore, after the line came forth from its third coil the 
head man led it back toward the point whence it started, and as 
soon as he moved in that direction the dancers dropped out of 
line one after another at regular intervals, beginning with the 
last dancer, until the head man only remained ; then the music 
ceased and the dance was ended. 

The authorities seem to be agreed that there are no rattle- 
snakes in eastern Maine, the Maritime provinces, or any part of 
eastern Canada, nor is there any evidence that there ever have 
been any in those localities.* It seems a fair inference, there- 
fore, judging from this dance, that one of the most important 
features of Micmac ritual has come into Nova Scotia from the 
southwest. The word choogich is indeed but a general name for 
reptile, according to Dr. Rand, but several Micmacs have assured 
me that it designates the rattlesnake. The Micmacs assert that 
the traditional object of the dance was to obtain the poison of the 
serpent for medicinal use, and that at one time long ago their 
ancestors used to dance it so much that nearly all of them were 
turned to serpents. The symbolism of the dance evidently coin- 
cides with the time of exuviation. In modem times I cannot 
find that the performance of the choogichoo yajik has been limited 
to any particular time of the year, further than that it was never 
danced in the winter ; but this might have been due to other than 
ritualistic causes. It is, however, considered a proper feature at 
the election of a chief, and the connection of its symbolism with 
ritual and time relations of some sort is self-evident. In Maya 
the Pleiades are called tzabec or rattle asterisra, and altars in the 
form of the rattle are numerous in Yucatan, as Major Beebe has 
pointed out to me in the illustrations of Charnay 's Ancient Cities, 
pages 140, 149. The scorpion is also connected with the same 
stars in Maya mythology, and when we hear of the gather- 
ing of the poison for medicinal use we may recall the Italian 
cure for the bite of a tarantula or scorpion by the use of its bane 
(similia dmilihm curantur). In Peru, Yucatan, Mexico, and in 
almost all parts of the world this group of stars was preeminent 

* Whatever may be the opinion of naturalists in this matter, it is a fact 
worthy of note that the Indian women of the Hudson bay region, par 
ticularly the Cree, formerly drank water in which the rattle of a rattle- 
snake had been boiled to reHeve pain during parturition. See Harmon's 
Voyages and Travels (1800) : Lond., 1820, p. 345. -F. W. H. 



Digitized by 



Google 



38 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

as time-markers, especially in the first-named countries, in con- 
nection with the period of fifty-two years, when its celestial posi- 
tion was carefully noted. Again, the special and ultimate con- 
nection of the seven stars with ritual dances in widely distant 
localities has been noted in the masterly researches of R. G. 
Haliburton, who says, in his " Traditions of Mount Atlas," *' The 
very words of the song of the Pleiades, who are known in the 
New World as well as the Old as ' The Dancers,' the ' Celestial 
Chorus' of the Greeks, the * Heavenly Host' of the Hebrews, 
and the 'Seven Dancers' of the North American Indians, are 
familiar to ears that can catch * the music of the spheres,' and 
have been repeated to me by one of those favored mortals, a 
Susi wanderer from the Sahara. 

Oh, Moon, oh, Mother, we hold our feast tonight; 
We are dancing before God between heaven and earth. 

Words that recall Milton's allusion to those * morning stars that 
sang together with joy ' at the creation. 

And the Pleiades before him danced, 
Shedding sweet influence." 

As to the Micmac tradition of the transformation of the dancers 
into serpents, Squier states that the serpent was prominent in 
nearly all the mysteries of the so-called Old World, and that in 
America the rattlesnake was typical of the most arcane ideas. 
Is it not possible, therefore, that this tradition, literally rendered, 
would read that in former times this Micmac dance formed an 
initiation into their esoteric ritual? for we know at least that 
nearly all if not all the Indian tribes have possessed some such 
ritual. ^' Why I am a Serpent " is the title of a work by a native 
Maya, and in the Maya language ah ah chapat signifies both ser- 
pent and wisdom. Again, we see by the Micmacs' own inter- 
pretation of the dance that it refers to the seasons, and this is 
not surprising, for, alike in Persia, India, Egypt, and Mexico, 
exuviation was the peculiar symbol of the year. It seems, then, 
that the existence of this dance among the Micmacs should be 
considered evidence that they once possessed a ritual having 
noticeable points in common with that of Indian peoples farther 
south. 

One of the folk-tales told me by Abram Glode was that of the 
water fairies. Far within a thick dark forest there dwelt a family 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] MICMAC CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS 39 

in which were two sons. The younger of these when traveling 
one day along the shore of a lake saw a group of beautiful young 
women playing ball. He was so pleased with their appearance 
that he decided to go nearer and watch them. When he ap- 
proached he found that the girls were dressed in the costumes 
of the olden time [which, I suspect, means that of nature]. At 
length one of them perceived him and cried out '^Huaydahay ! " 
*' Look out ! " None of the girls had ever seen a man before, and, 
being alarmed by his appearance, all of them dived into the 
water and vanished. The young man was much disappointed, 
for they were so pretty that he wished to capture one of them, 
blinking they might return, he made himself small by magic 
and hid near the spot in a peculiar leaf, which has a kind 
of cover over its top [probably the jack-in-the-pulpit or the 
pitcher plant]. This leaf he had previously broken off its stem 
and placed upon a rock. Presently, as he had hoped, the girls 
reappeared from the water and renewed the ball game not far 
from the spot where our hero lay hidden but too far off for him 
to reach them. When he saw that the girls came no nearer he 
jumped up and down in the leaf, shaking it nearer to them, but 
when he had nearly succeeded in reaching them one of their 
number again espied him and cried out as before. Again the 
fairies plunged into the water and disappeared, leaving the 
young man more disconsolate than ever, yet more determined 
to win one of them for his bride. He looked about for some 
new place in which to hide, and espying a bunch of rushes 
growing near the water, he broke one off and found within it a 
little hollow, in which he hid. A third time the water fairies 
appeared and set about their game, coming very near the rushes 
in which our hero lay, but a third time something alarmed one 
of them, and, with the usual cry, they all fled to the water ; but 
this time, however, our hero managed to capture one of them 
before she could disappear. She begged him to let her go, plead- 
ing that she was married, and promising that if he would release 
her she would bring her younger sister to him on the following 
day. So he did as she wished, and the next day she returned 
with her beautiful young sister, who willingly followed him to 
his wigwam. 

The next spring his' wife said that she wished to see her father 
and mother again. The young man consented, and decided to 



Digitized by 



Google 



40 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VllI 

accompany her; so she led the way to the ocean, carrying her 
child in a case on her back. Arrived at the shore, she continued 
straight on into the water, where her husband was at first afraid 
to follow her. At length, however, she managed to overcome his 
fears, and he went with her, even under the surface of the water. 
Things soon began to appear to him much as in the upper world. 
After a journey they came to a large village in the midst of a 
hard-wood country of wondrous beauty. " My father is chief 
here," said the wife, and she led her husband and child to his 
wigwam, where they were hospitably received. All kinds of fish 
dwelt in the village, and the chief and his wife were themselves 
fish below the waist. The chief was the ruler of all the fish. 
Our hero and his wife passed some time very pleasantly with the 
parents of the latter, but at last he wished to return to earth* 
He and his wife had not gone far, however, when they were pur- 
sued by an enormous shark, and after a wearisome flight the 
wife's strength began to fail her. Then she took off* her case in 
which she carried her child and fastened it upon her husband's 
back, so that it might be saved. " Do not wait for me," she said, 
" but flee yonder," pointing to the sun, ** and you will reach the 
shore at the point where we left it. If I am saved I will follow 
you." Our hero did as she directed, and when he reached the 
shore sat there and waited for a long and weary time, but his 
wife never appeared again. At last he knew she must have been 
slain by the shark, and so he went sorrowfully home. 

Curious enough is the commentary which my Micmac host 
attached to this tale. ** When Moses led the children of Israel 
through the Red Sea one woman was drowned, and she became 
a fish from her waist downward. I think she was the same 
woman who was lost in this tale." The Micmacs frequently con- 
nect some feature of their legends with a biblical episode which 
to our eyes bears little resemblance to the point in question. 

The student of Indian mythology will recognize that this tale 
of the Water Fairies is but a variant of the Chippewa legend of 
the ** Magic Circle in the Prairie." Nevertheless that legend 
presents some curious contrasts when compared with the Micmac 
version. In the fornier the home of the bride is in the upper 
world of the stars instead of in the under world of the sea, and 
birds take the place of fishes, but the dancing girls are present 
with their game of ball, and the youngest of them is captured 
by the hidden hero, etc. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] MICMAC CUSTOMS AND TRADITIONS 41 

Another legend is of the culloo, the most terrible of creatures. 
So large was this winged monster that it could dispose of any 
animal at a single swallow. It had a huge nest on a very high 
cliff, which no man could possibly scale. Thither it would bring 
moose and caribou with which to feed its young. One day the 
monster captured a man who was hunting moose and carried 
him to its nest. It was the custom of the culloo when it reached 
home to beat its victims to death on the rocks, so it proceeded to 
dispose of the hunter in this manner. But the hunter had kept 
hold of his bow and arrow, and when the monster attempted to 
destroy him he saved himself by keeping his weapon underneath 
him, so that the pressure upon him simply bent the bow. For 
some reason the culloo failed to discover this, and after pounding 
the hunter against the rock till weary, found to its great amaze- 
ment that he was still uninjured ; so it departed in search of other 
food, leaving the man in the nest. Soon the hunter began to cut 
up pieces of meat with his knife and to feed them to the two 
young culloos in the nest. These were so pleased with this novel 
method of serving food that on the return of their parent they 
interceded for the hunter's life. The request was granted, and 
the hunter resided with the culloo family until the members 
thereof became quite attached to him. Once there arose a ter- 
rible storm, and then the younger culloos crawled under their 
parent's wings like chickens under a hen. The hunter went to 
the same refuge, and the culloo brooded over them all till the 
storm was over. But the man longed to return to his home, so 
in devising a means of escape it occurred to him to kill one of 
the young culloos, skin it, and try to use its wings for his own 
benefit. At once he put the project into execution, but just as 
he was adjusting his borrowed plumage the parent culloo re- 
turned. The hunter, nothing daunted, quickly managed to adjust 
his wings in a sort of half-way fashion, and then jumped off the 
cliff. The culloo saw at once what had occurred and angrily 
pursued the winged man ; but the man fell uninjured upon the 
tree tops, and scrambled to the ground only an instant before the 
culloo descended on the same tree. Owing to its immense size, 
the culloo could not penetrate below the tops of the trees, and 
so our hero was saved. The defeated monster then returned to 
its nest, in which there was now only one young bird. That one 
will not be big enough to fly until the last day. 

6 



Digitized by 



Google 



42 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

It is easy to see some analogy between this legend and the 
mini myth of the Piasa. Newell Glode related it to me imme- 
diately after I bad told him about the Piasa, and himself com- 
mented on the resemblance. 

These last two traditions were selected at random from a col- 
lection of thirty or more obtained by me this summer. It is a 
good indication of the extent of Micmac legendary lore that of 
the many tales related to me all but one or two are new to us, 
in spite of the years of research of such able investigators in the 
field of Micmac folklore as the late Rev. Dr. Rand, Mr. Leland, 
and others. The knowledge of these myths is rapidly disap- 
pearing ; but few Micmacs now know anything about them, but 
with those few the most insignificant peculiarities in animate 
and inanimate nature often suffice to call to mind some new 
old story. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] THE OLMOS WRITINGS 43 



THB \7RITINaS OF PADRE ANDRES DE OLMOS IN THE 
LANGUAGES OF MEXICO 

BY JAMES C. PILLING 

Among the early missionaries who came to New Spain to 
teach and convert the natives, one of the earliest and most pro- 
lific writers was Padre Andres de Olmos. Born about 1491, he 
was a native of the archbishopric of Burgos, in Spain, near Ofia 
(miscalled Ocafia by one of his biographers), and was sent to 
Olmos, near Valladolid, whence his name. Here, when about 
twenty years of age, he entered the university and joined the 
order of Franciscans, and distinguished himself as much by his 
learning as by his piety. He was sent by the Inquisicion first to 
Biscay in company with Bishop Zumdrraga, who went by order 
of Charles V, and afterward to Mexico, also with Zum^rraga. 
Promoted to the episcopate, and wishing to have for the accom- 
plishment of his apostolic labors in the new world an intelligent 
and devout assistant, Zumarraga cast his eyes upon Olmos. Full 
of zeal and robust, though of medium size, the intrepid Fran- 
ciscan answered perfectly the expectations of his superior. He 
remained in the new world from 1528 until his death, in 1571. 
He became well versed in the languages of the country, particu- 
larly those of the Nahuatl, Totonaca, Huasteca, and Tepehuana, 
" in which he excelled," says Torquemada, and in each of which 
he composed a number of books. He is also said to have been 
familiar with the Chichimi, spoken near the Floridian boun- 
dary, but I liave found no mention of any work by him in this 
dialect. 

The ardent missionary traveled through several provinces, 
always on foot, over mountains and through forests, exposed to 
many privations and dangers. Many times during his forty- 
three years of unceasing labor he was threatened with death by 
the Indians, but was able to escape, and even succeeded in 
making himself loved and admired by them. From very far 
they came to hear his sermons, follow his lessons, and give him 
evidences of sympathy and gratitude. 



Digitized by 



Google 



44 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

Despite a life of unremitting labor and despite serious infirmi- 
ties, Andres de Olmos reached a ripe old age, and died at Tam- 
pico the 8th of October, 1571, from the result of an abscess, and 
was buried in one of the seven convents which he had founded. 

From Simeon's Introduction to the Grammaire Nahuatl, Paris, 
1875, 1 quote the, following: 

" Olmos had taught Latin at the college of Santa Crux, at Mexico, in 
the chair that a Frenchman, Arnaud de Bassace, had been the first to 
occupy. He translated first into Spanish the Adversuji omnes hiereseSjlibn 
XIV, of the Franciscan Alonzo de Castro, and two letters written by two 
rabbis. Then he composed linguistic works on three of the Mexican 
idioms and some books of piety in these same idioms. 

" The UArte de la Inigua Mexicana forms the object of the present pub- 
lication. As for his other works, we like to think that they are not all 
lost. In the time of Betancourt ( Teatro mexicana iiienologWy Mexico, 1698, 
p. 138) the grammar, vocabulary, Christian doctrine, and the confes- 
sional in the Huaxteque tongue were preserved at Ozolocama, near 
Tampico. 

** There exist a sufficiently large number of grammars of the Mexican 
language, printed or manuscript, which the missionaries, for the most 
part Spanish, composed at various times to facilitate the conversion of 
the Indians by the devout of their order. Many of these have become 
extremely rare and sell sometimes at exorbitant prices. We will men- 
tion as of the first rank the grammar of the Jesuit Horacio Carochi (Mex- 
ico, 1645), the most universally known, and the abridgment of which 
another Jesuit, P. Ignacio de Paredes, made in the following century 
(1759). Afterward there were various elementary treatises due to the 
Fathers Alonso de Molina, Antonio del Rincon, Betancourt, Augustin 
Aldama, and others ; but these last works, for depth as for extent, are 
far from being equal to the Arte of the Franciscan Andres de Olmos. Fin- 
ished in 1547, this work preceded by twenty-five years the gi'ammar of 
Alonso de Molina, the most ancient of all those which have been printed. 
One may say that Andres de Olmos opened and prepared the way for 
grammatical studies in the Nahuatl language. 

** After having named the two Spaniards, Francisco Ximenez and 
Alonso Rengel, who were the first grammarians in this language, Juan 
de Torquemada immediately mentions de Olmos and thus expresses him- 
self: * It was he that above all had the gift of languages, because in the 
Mexican he composed the most copious and useful Arte of all those that 
have been made, and he composed a vocabulary and many other works 
which are counted in liis life, and he made the same in the Totonaca 
language and in the Guaxteca ; and I understand that he knew other 
languages, among them the Chichimecas, because he spent much time 
among them.* Further on, in speaking of the Arte de la lengua Mexicana^ 
the same author adds : * A thing very particular and of much erudition, 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] THE OLMOS WRITINGS 45 

and from it I have profited in knowing the language profoundly and 
making it plain to those to whom I have read it.' 

" Moreover, it would not be difficult to show that his manuscript has 
served the grammarians and lexicographers who came after him, for they 
have often given the same rules and the same examples ; but that is not 
its only and chief merit. As complete as it is exact, the grammar of 
Andres de Olmos recommends itself by its order, clearness, and concise- 
ness. The principles are excellent, the choice of examples irreproachable. 
As for the method of exposition which he has followed, Olmos, not dar- 
ing to repudiate the ideas of his times, proceeded generally according to 
the Latin grammar of Antoine de Lebrixa. This assimilation of the 
simple and frequently rudimentary forms of the Nahuatl w^ith the more 
complex and learned forms of the Latin is, according to us, a capital 
fault, common, as for that, to the greater number of works which have 
appeared till now upon the ancient languages of the new continent. A 
little later, when we shall be permitted to publish [since printed] our 
general Mexican grammar, now in preparation, we will develop this im- 
portant subject in treating of the particular character of the proposition, 
and, by the analysis of the various forms of the Nahuatl language, we 
will try to show at what point and under what bearings it differs from 
the languages of Europe. For the present we must limit ourselves in 
making know^n the book of A. de Olmos. 

"One will be astonished, without doubt, that a work of so real a value 
should have remained unpublished, and we cannot better explain this 
fiact than by referring to the proloejue of the editor. It will be seen tliere 
that the printing of this grammar was attempted several times without 
success, and that it fell through notably in 1562, in consequence of the 
death of an ihustrious protector of Olmos, Francisco de Bustamente, who, 
during a voyage to Spain, was charged to solicit the privilege of the king, 
Philip II. One will conclude with us that an edition of the grammatic 
treatise of Olmos could not have been given to Mexico in 1555, as a state- 
ment in the Caadro descriptivo v comparaiivo de laa lenguas indigenas de 
Mexico by M. Francisco Pimentel (Mexico, 1862, vol. 1, p. 162) would 
make it appear. Thus we print the Arte de la Ungtm Mexicana by the 
Franciscan de Olmos as a work, in our opinion, entirely unpublished. 

** According to the title of the work itself* and the note which ends 
it Olmos composed his grammar when he was superior of the Franciscan 
convent established at Hueytalalpan. He was then about 55 years old 
and had lived in Mexico twenty years. His varied knowledge in lin- 

* A hand other than that of the copyist has written the title on the 
first leaf of the copy of the manuscript of this grammar which the Bib- 
lioth^ue Nationale possesses. In reproducing it we have been obliged to 
rectify it, and particularly to substitute for the supposed name of Fr. 
Andres de los Olmos the only recognized and veritable name of Fr. 
Andres de Olmos. 



Digitized by 



Google 



46 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

ji^istics had then been strengthened by long practice in the exercise of a 
laborious apostleehip. A mind cultivated and hungry for knowledge, he 
made learned researches, and neglected nothing in studying thoroughly 
the old land of the Aztecs. Not content with learning what usage and 
observation could furnish him each day, he took pains to consult the In- 
dians worthy of consideration, through their knowledge or through their 
social position. Thus Juan de Torquemada {Manarquia indiana) tells us 
that Olmos, during a long sojourn at Tetzcuco, united himself with a noble 
old Mexican, remarkable for the extent of his information, and occupied 
himself with him in questions of antiquities of very keen interest. The 
same writer assures us that Olmos had recorded the substance of these 
archeologic conversations in one of his works. His great love for study 
still shows itself in the grammar which we are publishing, and it is that 
which explains the esteem which it has constantly enjoyed. 

"This grammar, in which the author declares he has employed scarcely 
any expressions not in general use in Mexico at Tetzcuco or at Tlaxcala, 
is divided into three parts. 



•* The work terminates with the text of the first of the exhortations or 
admonitions which Olmos had collected under the title of 'Platicas que 
lo8 senores mexicanos hacian sus hijos.* This bit of Nahuatl literature, to 
which the pious Franciscan sometimes added Christian thoughts, is fol- 
lowed by a short declaration or imitation in Spanish. We have accom- 
panied it by a French translation as literal as possible. One will judge 
without doubt that this part of our work has not been the least difficult. 

"According to Betancourt, a clever Mexican writer at the end of the 
sixteenth century, Juan Baptista had reunited these same discourses with 
those of the kings to their vassals under the general title of HuelmetlaioUi, 
or antique discourses. A copy of this precious collection, published in 
Mexico in 1599, was sold in London some years since." 

But little of Olmos' work has been printed — a doubtful Arte 
Mexicana, in Mexico in 1555, and a still more doubtful Gramatica 
el Lexicon in three of the native languages, in Mexico in 1560 — 
titles of which, with authorities, are given below. It was left 
for the present generation to give the students of philology the 
benefit of his work. From time to time copies of his manu- 
scripts were discovered, and from two of them there were com- 
posed and printed in Paris in 1875, under the direction of the 
Commission Scientifique, a Grammaire Nahuatl,, and in the City 
of Mexico in 1885 an Arte Mexicana; full titles and collations of 
these are given below. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] THE OLMOS WRITINGS 47 

But the greatest interest attaches to his manuscripts and copies 
of them. As it has been my good fortune to see several of the 
more important ones, it is of these I wish principally to speak. 

Printed Works. 
Arte Mexlcana, 1555 (?). 

Arte de la lengua Mexicana. Mexico, 1555. 

Title from Beristain's Biblioteca Hispaiio-Aniericano Septen- 
trional. The author does not claim in so many words to have seen 
the volume, but speaks of it in such manner as to indicate that 
he had : 

*• This work is dedicated, in Latin letter, very chaste and very learned, 
to the Bishop of Tlaxcalla, Dr. D. Fr. Martin de Hojocastro, he being 
Comisario-General of New Spain. Torquemada used the work for learn- 
ing the idiom and for teaching it to others." 

As will be seen below much doubt exists as to whether this 
was printed at the early date mentioned. Indeed, it is almost 
certain that it was not printed at all. 

The learned bibliographer, Sr. Joaquin Garcia Icazbalceta,* 
in his Apuntes para un catalogo de escritores en lengua indigenas de 
America, Mexico, 1866 (p. 153, no. 88), speaks of it as follows : 

'* That this Arte (or another by the same author) was printed in Mexico 
in the year 1555, 1 have always doubted, and now doubt the more, because 
in this manuscript of 1563 nothing is said of its having been printed eight 
years before, though the author gives a history of the book. Certain it 
is that no one claims to have seen the edition of 1555, and the opinion 
favorable to its existence is supported, so far as I know, by but one pas- 
sage, not very clear, in the additions to the BibUotheca Unirersa Francis- 
cana of Fr. Juan de San Antonio." 

Gramatica et Lexicon Mexicana, 1560 (?). 

Gramatica et Lexicon Lengua) Mexicanae et Huastecce. Mex- 
ico, 1560, 2 vols., 4°. 

Title from Clavigero's Stoi^a Antica del Mess^ico, Cesena, 1780. 
Vater's Litteratur de Grammatiken, Berlin, 1847, gives it the dates 

*This gentleman, among the best of bibliographers and one of my 
warmest personal friends, died suddenly at his home at San Cosrae, 
Mexico, November 26, 1894. 



Digitized by 



Google 



48 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VlII 

1555, 1560. Adeluna's MithridnteH, Berlin, 1806-1817 (vol. 3, pt. 
3, p. 92), gives the title also and adds : Cum Cathecismo, Evan- 
geliis, Epistolique Mexicanice, Mexico, 1560, 2 vols., 4^. Neither 
Beristain, Briinet, Rich, nor Ternaux-Compans mentions the 
work, and it probably never was printed. Sr. Icazbalceta, in 
speaking of the work titled next above, adds this note : " Still 
less do I believe in the existence of the Arte y Vocabidario de los 
lenguas Mexicana, Totonaca y Hitastera, which it is asserted were 
printed in Mexico in 1560. 

Gi'amviaire Nahuad, 1875. 

Grammaire | de | la langue Nahuatl | ou Mexicaine, | com- 
post, en 1547, I par lefranciscain Andre deOlmos, | et | publi^e 
avec notes, 6claircissements, etc. | Par R4mi Simeon. | [Mono- 
gram.] I 

Paris I Imprimerie Nationale. | MDCCCLXXV [1875]. 

Half-tide : Mission scientifique | au Mexique | et dans PAm^- 
rique Centrale. | Ouvrage | public par ordre du Ministre de Pln- 
struction publique. | Linguistique. 

Half-tide: Grammaire | de | la langue Nahuatl | ou Mexicaine. 

Half-title verso blank, 1 1. ; half-title verso blank, 1 1. ; title verso 
blank, 1 1.; introduction (Paris, February 1, 1875), pp. iii-xv; 
half-title (title of the Bib. Nat. copy of the manuscript) verso 
blank, 1 1.; heading, "Comienca," etc., p. 3; Epistola nvncvpa- 
toria, pp. 3-5 ; Prologo al lector (Bib. Nat. copy), pp. 7-11 ; Pro- 
logo al benigno lector (from the Maisonneuve copy), foot-note, 
pp. 7-8; text, pp. 9-230; Platica, pp. 23L-264; colophon from 
the original manuscript, p. 264 ; Indice, pp. 265-273; corrections, 
p. [274], 8°. 

In this work the editor has mainly followed the manuscript 
copy belonging to the Bibliotheque Nationale because of its con- 
formity to the plan adopted by the author. He noted with care, 
however, the variations in the Maisonneuve copy, and utilized 
the latter as far as his judgment warranted. Such changes are 
duly noted. 

I have seen copies of this in the following libraries : the Astor, 
New York ; Boston Public ; Dr. D. G. Brinton's, Media, Pennsyl- 
vania ; British Museum ; J. H. TrumbulPs, Hartford, Connecti- 
cut, and in that of Yale College. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] THE OLMOS WRITINGS 49 

Arte Mexicana^ 1885. 

Arte I para aprender | la lengva Mexicana | compvesto | por 
Fr. Andrea de Olmos, | gvardian | del Monasterio de Sant Andres 
de Sant Francisco de VeitlalpJin en la Provincia de la Totona- 
capa I que es en la Nveva Espafia. | Acabose en primero dia de 
henero | del alio mil qvinientos y qvarenta y siete afios. | Pub- 
licado por Mr. R^mi Simeon. Paris. Iraprenta Nacional. | 
MDCCCLXXV [1875]. Reimpreso en Mexico, 1885. 

Mexico I Imprenta de Ignacio Escalante, | bajosdeSan Agus- 
tin, num. 1, | 1885 

Colophon, p. 125. Fue hecha esta arte en Sant Andres conuento 
de S. Francisco en Ueytlalhpa, | a gloria de N. S. I. C, afio de su 
nacimiento de 1547. 

Colophon, p. [126]. Acabose la reimpresion de esta Arte | en 
Mexico, en casa de D. Ignacio Escalante, | a 30 de Enero | de 
1886. 

Portrait of Olmos recto blank, 1 1. ; title verso blank, 1 1. ; 
heading, " Comienca," etc., p. 3, followed by the Epistola nvncvpa- 
toria, pp. 3-4 ; Prologo al lector (from the Bib. Nat. copy of the 
manuscript), pp. 5-7 ; Prologo benigno lector (from the Maison- 
neuve manuscript copy), foot-note, pp. 5-6 ; text, pp. 9-125 ; 
colophon of 1547, p. 125 ; colophon of 1886, p. 126, 4^. Practi- 
cally a reprint of the edition titled next above. 

I have seen copies of this in the Astor Library, New York ; 
Boston Public Library, the library of Dr. Daniel G. Brinton, 
Media, Pennsylvania; British Museum Library; in that of Mr. 
Wilberforce Eames, Brooklyn, New York; that of Dr. J. H. 
Trumbull, Hartford, Connecticut; in the Yale College Library, 
and the one in my own. 

Unknown Prints or Manuscripts, 

The following titles and notes I take from Beristain's Biblioteca 
Hispano-Atnericano Septentrional, where it does not say whether 
any were printed or not. 

Vocabulario Mexicano. 

Tratado de los Pecados Capitales, en Megicano. 

Tratado de los Santos Sacramentos, en Megicano. 

Tratado de los Sacrilegios, en Megicano. 

Arte y Vocabulario de la lengua Totonaco. 
7 



Digitized by 



Google 



50 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIJI 

Arte, Vocabulario, Catecismo, Confessionario y Sermone Huax- 
tecos. 

" In addition to these works, which are given by Torquemada and 
Betancourt, and several of which I have seen in the libraries of Mexico, 
Leon Pinelo adds: Tratado de las Antiquedades Mej3;icanos." 

In the Grammaire, titled above, the following list of Olmos' 
writings is given on pages v-vi : 

En langue Nahuatl. 

1. Arte de la lengua Mexicana. 

2. Vocabulario. 

3. El juicio final. 

4. Platicas que los senores Mexicanos hacian a sus hijos. 

5. Libro de los siete sermones. 

6. Tratado de los siete pecados mortales y sus hijos. 

7. Tratado de los sacramentos. 

8. Tratado de los sacrilegios. 

En langue Huaxtfeque. 

9. Arte de la lengua guaxteca. 

10. Vocabulario. 

11. Doctrina Christiana. 

12. Confessionario. 

13. Sermones. 

En langue Totonaque. 

14. Arte de la lengua Totonaca. 

15. Vocabulario. 

Sobron's Los Idiomas de la America Latina^ Madrid [1877], says 
the Gramatica Megicano, the Vocabulario Megicano-espafiol, the 
Arte and Vocabulario Totonaca, and the Arte and Vocabulario 
Guaxteca were printed in Mexico. In addition to the works 
quoted above, Sobron adds the following : 

Doctrina Christiana in Totonaca, in Mexican and in Tepehua. 

Vocabulario in Tepehua. 

Confessionario en Mexican. 

It will be observed that none of the authorities quoted, except 
Sobron, give intimation as to whether any of the volumes named 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1896] THE OLM08 WRITINGS 51 

by them were printed. It 18 almost a certainty none of them 
were ; indeed, all the later bibliographers, myself included, have 
come definitely to this conclusion. 

I come now to existing manuscripts — four copies of the Arte 
Mexlcana — which are known, and which are herewith described 
in the supposed order of their age. 

Manuscripts of the Arte Mexicana. 
The Aubin Copy. 

Comienca el Arte de la lengua mexicana compuesta por el 
Padre Frai Andres de Olmos de la orden de los Frailes menores 
dirigida al mui Rodo Padre Fray Martin de Hqjacastro, comis- 
sario gral. de la dicha orden en todas las Indias [etc.]. 

Colophon. — Esta Arte fue hecha en el monesterio de sant 
Andres de Ueytlalhpa a gloria de Nro Sefior lesu Cresto, aiio de 
8U nacimo de 1547. 

** Manuscript, 1 vol. , 184 pages, 4**, bound in parchment. Near the end 
of the manuscript one reads [the colophon]. It treats of the Mexican 
languages and was published in Mexico in 1555. 

* 'According to Mr. Aubin this manuscript grammar by Andres de Olmos 
belonged to Las Casas and to Torquemada. There is at the end a long 
piece of eloquence. ' It is,* says M. Aubin, *an example of those ad- 
mirable exhortations still so pleasing in the translation of Sahagun, de 
Ziirita, d*Ixtilzochitl, Torquemada, and others.' *' 

The first information we have of the existence of this copy, 
supposed to be the oldest, was while it was in the hands of M. 
Joseph Marius Alexis Aubin, of Paris, who spent much time in 
Mexico, whence on his return to France he brought many old 
and rare documents, original and copies, many of the latter 
made by himself This material remained in his possession 
many years. About 1890 they passed into the hands of M. 
Charles E. Eugene Goupil, who proposes to divide the collection 
between the Bibliothfeque Nationale and the library of the 
Trocadero. Before doing so he had made by M. Eugene Boban 
a very extensive catalogue of it, two large quarto volumes of 
text, and a third consisting of plates. It is entitled, Documents 
pour servir a Vhistoire du Mexique. Catalogue raisonne de M. E. 
Engine Goupil (jincienne collection de J. M. A. Aubin) j Paris, 1891. 
From this work, vol. 2, p. 496, I have taken the above title, or 



Digitized by 



Google 



52 THE AMERICA.N ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VllI 

rather the beginning of it (which is all that is given) and the 
notes. It is regrettable that the author of the Catalogue did not 
give a much fuller one and a more detailed description of it. 

The Bibliotheque Nationale Copy, 

Arte para aprender la lengua Mexicana compiiesta por fr. 
andres de los olmos, guardian del monasterio del S. S' fran** de 
ueitlalpa en la prouincia de la totonacapa. qs. en la nueba 
espafia. acabose en primero dia de henero del ano de mil y qs. 
y quarenta y siete anos. 

Two blank leaves, 11. 1-119, the text in Spanish, 4^. The leaf 
of the title page is followed by a blank one, and on the next the 
grammar begins with the following heading : 

Comienca el arte de la lengua mexicana compuesta por el 
padre fray andres de olmos de la orden de los frailes menores 
dirigida al muy Reueredo padre fray martin de hojacastro comis- 
sario general de la dicha orden en todas las indias. 

Then follows an Epistola nvncupatoria in Latin, and on 1. 6 
begins the Prologo al lector, from which it appears that the 
grammar was the second that the author had written or a correc- 
tion of the first. It reads as follows : 

Prologo al lector. 

Dos cosae, muy amado lector, me com; 'ieron a poner mano en eeta 
pequefia obra : que fueron la caridad y obediencia de mi prelado, por lo 
qual no con menos temor que osadia compli este mandamiento deseando 
a gloria y honra de N. S. I. G. y salud de las almas destos naturales in- 
dios, abrir a sus sieruos, si quiera, una senda: la qual, otro quien el fuere 
seruido darle mas lumbre, haga caniino, conociendo a la primera que 
hize, fiiltarle mucho en el corte : aunque casi tocase lo principal questa 
segunda, a la qual, despues de mucho lo encomendar a Dios, parecio 
darle la orden y traca que lleua, considerando y mirando sobre la mesma 
materia algo de lo que otros liombres auian escripto por guardar la cos- 
tumbre de los escriptores, afiadiendo y quitando, segun que mejor parecio 
conuenir, y Dios fue seruido alumbrar : por no yr contra aquel sacro auiso 
que dize : tie eniterut pradeniix tux, quia prhtatus spiriius nwm quam per- 
nicio8U9 est. Lo qual nos da bien a entender san Pablo que con auer sido 
transportado al terccro r' Iq, siendole cometida la predicacion por I. C. 
N. S. y confirma*'- ] ^ ; despues de los catorze afios de su predi- 

cacion sancta, fue salem (segun la rcuelacion) con Barnaba y Tito a 

comunicar y confeuir con los stinctos apostoles el diuino euangelio que 
predicaua entre los gentiles. En lo qual no menos da a entender lo del 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] THE OLMOS WRITINGS 53 

sabio que dize : nil facias m\t cotMio. Mayormente en cosa tan ardua 
como esta, que es querer poner cimiento sin fundamiento de escriptura en 
una tan estrafia lengua y tan abundosa en su manera y intrincada. Pues 
81 el sancto apostol, diuinalmente alumbrado y lleno de gracia, acudio a 
lo8 viuoB y diuinoa libros que son bus sanctos compafieros, quanto mas 
deue acudir do quier que aprouechar se pudiere, el que tal obra, aunque 
pequeilita parezea, quiere fundar sin el dicho cimiento de escriptura y 
libros de que estos carecian ! A cuya cauea con gran dificultad se colige 
y percibe, de lo qual abundan otros escriptores mayormente en el latin, 
donde aun cada dia no dexan de hallar, afladir y descobrir cosas, ni se 
dexan de aprouechar de los sudores de otros ; no queriendo les priuar de 
su loor y galardon, sabiendo y creyendo que cada qual sera segun sus 
obras remunerado. Dixe pues senda, o lector, y no camino, por que para 
tan gran lengua ne me atreuo dezir que baste del todo, lo mucho que a 
algunos parecera yr aqui, ni se marauillen si algo quedare para que ade- 
lante otro afiade : quia facile est inueniis addere. Mas querer yo dezir en 
breue lo que, para los nueuos y sin maestro, largo tiempo y platica re- 
quiere, seria satisfacerme casi como quierendo de lexos ensefiar a alguno 
un* camino fragoso sin medianamente especificarle los inconuenientes, 
circunstancias y trabajos del. Notorio es del primer corte ningun maestro 
cortar bien un sayo, y del segundo apenas ; por lo qual ruego al deuoto 
lector que, con la caridad que esto se le ofrece, supla los defectos que en 
ello hallare, tryendo tambien a la memoria al apostolico sieruo de Dios, 
que con sancto feruor a estas indianas partes pasare por la salud del 
proximo tan necesitado, ^s cosas, las quales, a mi ver, le deuen mucho 
combidar y animar al estudio desta senda. 

La prima, que con esta pequefia luz, a menos costa y trabajo, podra 
saber, hazer y exercitar lo qiie^ /iesea. 

La segunda, que orando y tmbajando fielmente, y contiento y discrecion 
conuersando, ut sit dilectus Deo et hominihus^ sin duda al fin se vera en el 
cielo acomjmndo de sus spirituales hijos y de grados de gloria coronado. 

Finalmente oso afirmar que qualquier que esta senda seguire sentira, o 
sabra mas desta lengua mexioana o tetzcucana en un aiio que yo xx que 
ha que viene, por no tener semejante centella de lumbre, ni auer puestoen 
ello la diligencia que de poco tiempo aca puse. 

Diuidese pues esta arte en tres partes: la primera trata de los nombres 
y pronombres y de lo que a ellos j)ertenece. 

La segunda la conjugacion, formacion y preteritos y diuersidad de los 
verbos. 

En la tercera se ponen las partes indeclinables y algo de la orthographia, 
con una platica por los naturales compuesta, prouechosa y de buena doc- 
trina, con otras maneras de hablar; ansi para o.ue.vean los nueuos como 
han de escriuir y distinquir las partes, cpr* ^ • yj^r mas en breue 
hablar al natural. Xo hablo en el acento iK)r.se'^ , j vario y no estar ni 
dexar siempre las dictiones enteras sino coinpVeijiari,- y porque algunos 
vocablos parecen tener algunas vezes dos acentos ; por4o qual lo dexo a 
quieu Dios fuere seruido darle mas aniuio para ello, o al uso que lo descu- 



Digitized by 



Google 



54 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

bra. Y asi como no oeo dezir que no aya falta en esta obra, asi tampoco 
080 afirmir, en alguna de las reglas generales que aqui van, dexar de aver 
por Ventura alguna eception que al presente no alcan^o, o no me ocuire 
a la metnoria. Y si esta arte pareciere larga, deuen considerar que los 
nueuos no a cada paso hallaran maestro, y como dize S. Pablo : omnibus 
debUores mrmuf, Por lo qual el que no sabe algo desta lengua, y aun el 
que algo alcanna, por ventura hallara alguna cosa a su proposito de que 
aprouecharse pueda ; porque breuedad y claridad en una tal lengua no 
caben. Vale. 

In the opinion of Sr. Ramirez the manuscript in the Biblio- 
thSque Nationale is a clear copy of the first (Aubin) grammar, 
there having been made in it the corrections and additions of 
which the author speaks in his prologue. 

The work is divided into three parts, which are followed by a 
PUiiica and its translation, the whole terminating on 1. 119. 

On the verso of 1. 112 are these lines : 

Fue hecha esta arte en santandres Conueto de S. fr.* en ueytlalfSa a 
gloria de n. s.** ix" afto de en nacimi* de 1547. 

After 1. 100 several pages are left blank, presumably for the 
transcription of the last one-third of the metaphors, and ancient 
expression. There is also a transposition of signatures 15 and 
16, whence arises an incorrect numbering from 1. 101 to 116, 
the book having been bound perhaps before being numbered. 

Squier, in his Monograph of authors xoho have written on the lan- 
guages of Central' America, New York, 1861, collates this copy of 
the manuscript as 220 pages. 

This copy is said to have been purchased in 1665 for the 
library of the king from Raphael Trichet du Fresne, a book- 
seller. 

In the summer of 1886 I had the pleasure of seeing this copy 
of the Arte in the BibliothSque Nationale. Unfortunately in 
those early days of my bibliographic work I did not appreciate 
the importance of describing manuscripts, even the early ones, 
which had been printed, and this I knew had been used in part 
in the compilation of the Grammaire Nahuatl^ which had been 
published in Paris in 1875 ; hence my notes were few and sketchy 
and I availed myself of the title and description in Sr. Joaquin 
Garcia Icazbalceta's Apimtes, Mexico, 1866 (p. 148, no. 88), who 
received the description from Don Jos6 Fernando Ramirez, who 
also owned a copy and from the Grammaire NahuaXl of 1875, for 
several points of desired information. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] THE OLMOS WRITINGS . 55 

The Maisoimeuve Copy. 

Comienca el arte de la lengua raexicana | compuesta por el 
padre fray and res de ol- | mos de la orden de los frayles men ores 
di- I rigida al may reueredo padre fray Martin de- | Hojacastro 
comissario general de la dicha orde | en todas las Indias y al 
pse. obpo. de taxcala. 

Manuscript: one unnumbered leaf, 11. i-cxlv, sm. 4°. The 
original manuscript is preceded by 2 11., in a handwriting of 
the same period, which treat of the manuscript and its author. 
On the recto of the first leaf, unnumbered, begins the — 

Prologo al benigno lector, 

Muchas obras (christiano lector) dexan de salir a luz ser inpressas, no 
porque en ellas aya alguna cosa que repre bender, o menospredar, si no 
que o el author de ellas (por algun inconneniente) las dexo por acabar o 
perfectionar, o porque deapues de acabadas les falto el fauor y solicitud 
que se requiera para ser inpressas. De suerte que lo que su utilidad y 
prouecho les concede la negligencia o poca ventura lo obscurece y occulta. 
Y de ser esto assi, no menos lastima y conpassion causa el zelo y trabajo 
de el author perididos que el prouechamiento de que los lectores son de- 
fraudados, mas el que en verdadera charidad esta a de suffrir qlialquiera 
peesado y recio trabajo por euitar porque el sudor y estudio del proximo 
por este deffecto no sea perdido. Pues essa mesma charidad (que todo lo 
suffre) le dara virtud y esfuerzo para salir con ello al cabo. Y si en el 
Deuteronomio se mandaua y permitia que el hermano leuantasse la 
generacion del hermano que moria sin hijos, con juxta razon los que por 
charidad y amor estamos coadunados en hermandad, emos de procurar, 
de reetaurar la honrra y bien de nuestro hermano, como a generacion 
caida y mueria. Vino a mis manos este arte util y necessario para aprender 
la lengua de los Indios, el qual (por la mucha &lta que auia de arte por 
donde esta lengua ce pudiesse aprender) conpuso un padre de la orden de 
nuestro Seraphico padre Sanct Francisco, llamado Fr. Andres de Olmos, 
fraile cierto de muy buenas prendas' y partes. Y fue le cometido y man- 
dado (a este dicho padre) la edicion de este libro por el Reuerendo padre 
fray Martin de Hojacastro, que entonces era comissario general en aquel- 
las partes y despues succedio en obispo de Thlascala, llamando para este 
parecer a otroe muy essenciales frailes de la mesma orden. Conpuesto 
pues este libro con mucha fidelidad y cuidado, por la falta de inprentas 
que ay alia, y porque murio a aquella conjuntura el impressor, se dexo de 
inprimir. Succedio luego en provincial, y despues en comissario el muy 
Reuerendo padre fray Francisco de Bustamente, grandissimo theologo y 
lector de theologia en Espafia e Indias, y no menos erudite en la lengua 



Digitized by 



Google 



56 THE AMERICAN ANTHKOPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

Indiana. Visto por este padre ser libro muy bueno y necessario procure 
con grande desseo de le hazer imprimir, y ofFreciendose le negocios que 
tratar con su magestad passo en Espafta y trajo consigo esta Idc] arte y un 
bocabulario de la mesma lengua escripto por otro padre de nuestra 
sagrada religion. Y estando trando sus negocios murio, cuya muerte fue 
causa para que la inpression de los dichos libros ne se solicitasse. Despues 
los ube yo no sin pequena ventura loqual me a engendrado ser nuestro 
sefior seruido que salgan a luz, que no poco contento me daria. Y lo que 
yo puedo dezir (si mi parecer merece ser admittido) es que sera cossa 
muy necessaria si inprima y corra, porque (como persona que lo e visto 
en algunoB ailos que en las Indias e gastado) muchos predicadores venian 
a dezir dispirates y herrores non con malicia, sino con ignorancia y pro- 
breza de esta lengua. Y pues es negocio que tan to inporta y modo con 
que facilmente se aprendera aquella lengua, digno de reprehension seria 
quien no pusiesse calor y estudio para que su utilidad de todos fuesse 
participada, tiniendo por bianco a nuestro senor, el qual como a obra 
Buya fauorezca, y a todos nos de su gracia para que en todas las cossas 
que hizieremos sea nuestro fin y remunerador. Y yo quedo a la correc- 
tion de todos como hijo humilde de nuestro Seraphico padre Sanct 
Francisco. 

This extends to the recto of the second leaf, numbered i, the 
verso of which is blank. The third leaf, numbered ii, is headed 
as above (Comienca, etc.) on the recto, followed by Prologo al 
lector, gothic letter, which is not a copy of the preceding prologo 
and which extends to the bottom of the verso of 1. iii ; contents 
recto 1. iv, the verso of which is blank ; text in gothic letters, 
beginning as follows : Comienca al primero po, 11. v-xxix, con- 
taining the first elements, declinations, pronouns, etc.; Division 
de la 2d parte, 11. xxx-lxxix, treats of the verbs, their formation 
and conjugation ; Comienca la 3d parte en la qual letra, . . . 
11. xxx-cx, treats of the different parts of speech, rules of orthog- 
raphy, Spanish and Mexican dialogues, etc. Platica q haze el 
padre atbyo avisando les amonestando le q se a a buebo, 11. cxj- 
cxlv, entirely in Mexican. 

This manuscript of Maisonneuve presents some irregularities, 
and has the disadvantage in certain accessory parts of being not 
entirely as Olmos conceived his work. Thus it includes neither 
the dedicatory epistle in Latin, nor the Spanish translation of 
the first platica, but it contains the editor's prologue. The pres- 
ence of this prologue and the absence of the dedicatory epistle 
would seem to prove that this manuscript is of a date later than 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895J THE OLMOS WRITINGS 57 

that of the BibliothSque Nationale. The addition which it 
carries in the title, "y al pae obpo. de tlaxccday^ confirms that 
opinion. Several leaves have on the margin the word nota, which 
recalls the project of publication that a Franciscan, whose name 
is unknown, had formed subsequent to the death of Olmos. 
This manuscript offers, moreover, a series, probably complete, of 
the plnticoB or moral exhortations of fathers to their children. 
This collection gives it much value, in that this Nahautl text is 
difiicult to procure. The manuscript ends with a list of relative 
pronouns and by a resum^ in Latin of the formation of preterits. 
These two articles, which do not appear to be by Olmos, add 
nothing new to the text of the grammar. Several other passages, 
very short, perhaps apocryphal, have been preserved. 

This copy of the manuscript belonged to the booksellers, 
Maisonneuve et Cie, Paris, France. It is catalogued and quite 
fully described in Leclerc's Bib. Am,, 18G7, no. 1097. It was pur- 
chased by M. Alph. L. Pinart, and at the sale of his collection. 
Catalogue de lim-eSy 1883, no. 684, was repurchased by the above- 
named firm for 101 francs. In the Pinart catalogue it is de- 
scribed but briefly : " Made in Mexico in the middle of the six- 
teenth century, gothic characters, 196 pp., on paper." 

From the Leclerc catalogue of 1867 I extract these notes : 

"This manuscript, which we can say with assurance is unpublished, 
although several bibliographers have announced it as having been printed 
at Mexico in 1555 (see Eguiara and Ludewig), is one of the most precious 
volumes in the Bibliotheca Americana. 

" His grammar, which Torquemada cites as a work of great erudition 
and which he used to learn Mexican, is of great importance for Mexican 
studies. 

** In regard to the other works of Padre de Olmos we refer to the follow- 
ing authorities: Torquemada, Wading, Antonio, Pinelo, and Eguiara, 
who give the list of them. But they certainly have not been printed ; at 
any rate these bibliographers do not mention that they had. 

" Two leaves in a handwriting of the time, which are found at the be- 
ginning of our volume, confirms us in that opinion." 

The work is not mentioned in Leclerc's larger catalogue of 
1878, but is in his Bib. Am. Supplement, Paris, 1887, no. 340, 
where it is priced at 800 francs. When I saw it in 1886 it was 
in possession of Maisonneuve frSres et Ch. Leclerc. Whether it 
has since been sold, and if so to whom, I do not know. 
8 



Digitized by 



Google 



58 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

The Ramirez Copy. 

[Arte Mexicano, y Declaracion de la Doctrina.] 

Manuscript, 1. 1 [extraneous], 11. 9-94, in a handwriting of 

the sixteenth century, 4°. 

The following notes I take from Icazbalceta's Apimies (Addi- 

ciones y correcciones), p. 150, no. 88 : 

** The volume begins with a leaf upon which there is a note, in Mexi- 
can, in much more modern characters, and which undoubtedly does not 
belong to the original manuscript. The work begins with 1 9, a part of 
chapter 5 of the first part ; in addition to 11. 1-8, there are also lacking 
11. 13-14; the first part terminates on the verso of 1. 23; 11. 46-47 are 
lacking. Between the 48th and 49th there is no leap in the numbering 
of the leaves, but there seems to be one in the text. On the verso of the 
64th ends the second part, and the beginning of the third. The grammar 
ends with three lines on 1. 78, and then continues as follows : 

"Declaration de los diez mandamientos en lengua mexicana muy 
copiosa en lenguaje y en materia hecha el ano de 1563. 

** A [hd'] viente aiXos, o poco mas que hize vna doctrina xpiana en esta 
lengua mexicana la qual tiene muchos Religiosos en q puse la declara^io 
de los diez mandamientos cada vno dellos en tres putos. . . . Des- 
pues aca he entedido y procurado de saber las cosas particulares en que 
estes naturales quebrantan cada vno de los mandimentos y por tan to 
acorde este afio de 1563 ampriar la dicha declaracion, etc. 

** This continues as far as page Isic] 88, occupying the recto and a single 
line on the verso.'* 

Prologo, 

En los principios quando esta gente mexicana comogo a regebir la sficta 
comonio hize vna doctrina que contienen las Reglas q en de guardar los 
que quieren dignamente llegiirse a la sancta comunio es esta que ua al 
principio deste quaderno a cerca de trienta afios q se hizo esta diuulgada 
e muchas partes desta nueua Espafia y agora mueuamente la torne a 
emendar este afio de 1563. 

On the recto of leaf \_8ic] 98 is : 

Fin del dialogo. Siguiense las quatro orationt^s para cosolar los efermos. 
Actus uera contricionis. 

'*The manuscript ends with 9 lines on the verso of 1. 94. The rest of 
the page is filled with a paragraph in Mexican, in an entirely different 
kind of writing. 

*' Inasmuch as this manuscript bears in various places the date of 1563, 
we must consider it as later than that in the Biblioth^que Nationale. 
Comparing it with the long extract which Sr. Ramirez made from the 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] THE OLMOS WRITINGS 59 

latter copy, the most notable difference is that the one I have in view 
lacks the Platica and the reply thereto with which the copy in Paris ends, 
this being replacetl by the Declaracion de los mandamerUos. 

'* That this Artej or another by the same author, was printed at Mexico 
in the year 1555, as some say, is a statement I have always doubted, and 
now I doubt it still more, seeing that in this manuscript of 1563 nothing 
is said of its having been printed eight years before, whereas the author 
does relate the history of his book. One thing is certain, nobody says 
that he has sem the edition of 1555, and the opinion favorable to its exist- 
ence is based, so far as I know, merely on a passage, not very clear, in 
the additions to the Bibliotheca Universa Franciscana of Fr. Juan de San 
Antonio." 

Sr. Icazbalceta had already given an earlier and shorter de- 
scription of this manuscript in the main body of the Apuntes, 
Yt. 79, no. 88, where it was classed as anonymous. Subsequent to 
this Sr. Ramirez sent him from Paris a long description of the 
manuscript in the Bibliothi^que Nationale, which is also given in 
the Apnntes, no. 88 (Addiciones y Correcciones, pp. 148-150). 
He then entered into this longer description of the Ramirez copy. 
In his first account Sr. Icazbalceta has this note after the para- 
graph beginning a [Ad] viente aiios, etc. : 

** This reference carries us back to 1543. But on the verso of 1. 88 ref- 
erence is made to another date still farther back — that is to say, 1532 or 
1534, since it says ha cerca de treiiUa aiios. Thus there is no doubt the 
manuscript is by some one of the first missionaries." 

In the sale catalogue of the collection belonging to Sr. Ramirez, 
Bib, Mex., Ix)ndon, 1880, no. 604, this manuscript is titled and 
described as follows : 

Arte para apprendes la lengua Mexicana. 

** Manuscript of the 16th century, 11. 9-94, 4°. 

"After the grammar we have five leaves of an exhortation of a father 
to his son and his reply and two pages of geographical explanations, the 
first in Mexican and the last in Spanish. 

" It has unquestionably belonged to one of the first missionaries of 
Mexico. . . . Four copies are known to exist of this work — one in 
possession of M. Aubin, in Paris ; a second copy is in the National 
Library of Paris, a third in possession of Mr. Pinart, and the fourth is 
the present copy. 

**Thc late Mr. Ramirez had an opportunity of comparing the first two 
copies with his own, and, according to his judgment, the oldest copy is 
that in possession of Mr. Aubin, the next in date that of the National 
Library, and the most modern the present." 



Digitized by 



Google 



60 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [VoL VIII 

In my marked and priced copy of the Ramirez sale catalogue 
it is said to have been sold to '* Stevens " for 19/, 15«. I pre- 
sume Stevens, the Ix)ndon bookseller, is meant. At all events, 
I saw this copy of the Olmos manuscript Arte, or what I then 
and now suppose to be the same, in the Bancroft library, San 
Francisco, in the spring of 1883. As stated above, I did not then 
realize the advantage of describing manuscripts which had been 
printed, and hence my notes are not in great detail. 

The&e are the four known manuscripts of Olmos' Arte Mexi- 
cana. A fifth is mentioned by Simeon in his Introduction to 
the Grammaire Nahuall as being in the Bibliothkiue Nationale 
de Madrid, the only notice I have seen in regard to it; and if 
Beristain were always reliable we could add still another copy, 
a sixth, to the list. In his Bihlioteca HtspanchAmericana Septen- 
trional he says : 

" There is in the library of the Santa Iglesea of Toledo a manuscript of 
the Arte y Vocabulario Medcanos of P. Olmos, and the original was seen 
by Sr. Egiiiara in the pueblo of Tlanepantla. Betancourt asserts that the 
works in Hnasteca are preserved in Ozolvama, a town in Tampico. I have 
seen the greater number of the works in Mexican in the library of the 
College of San Gregory, in Mexico." 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] CHINESE ORIGIN OF PLAYING CARDS 



61 



CHINESE ORIGIN OF PIiAYING CARDS 

BY W. H. WILKINSON 

The current Chinese term for both dominoes and cards is p^ai 
(pronounced " pie," as in Tipperaryj. There is no essential dif- 
ference between cards and dominoes in China ; what are known 
among foreigners, owing to a superficial resemblance, as " domi- 



• • 



>ii> 





/s 




^ 



*Fia. 1(K). 



noes " are used for the most part precisely as we use cards, and 
the same game will appear either in the form of a pack of, it may 
be, coarsely printed slips of pasteboard or as highly finished 
tablets — " dominoes," in short — of ivory and ebony neatly fitted 

* The colorhig of the objects illustrated in this paper is represented by 
heraldic symbolism, the dotted signifying yellow or gold ; vertical lines, 
red ; oblique, green ; horizontal, blue. 



Digitized by 



Google 



62 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

into a sandalwood box. Where a distinction in language has to 
be made, cards of millboard are styled chih p^ai, *' paper p^ai," 
and dominoes ya j/a/ or ku p^ai, '* p*ai of ivory " or " bone." 

Literary Chinamen of today will use in writing but not in 
speech two other terms, yii-p^u, "slips," and yeh-tzd, *' leaves." 
These are the names of two old Chinese gambling games, the 
first of which was in vogue as early as the third century of our 
era, while the second was at the height of its popularity about 
the tenth. Some foreign writers have maintained that both these 
games were played with cards. Williams, for instance, in his 
Syllabic Dictionary, s. v. p'u, translates the former term by " an 
old name for playing cards," while Schlegel, as quoted by van 
der Linde * plainly identifies yeh-lzd with the cards of today. If 
either of these authorities is correct, playing cards of some kind 
can be proved to have been in use in China several centuries 
before their appearance in Europe. The records of the Tsin 
dynasty, for example, state that a well-known worthy, T*ao K*an 
(259-334 A. D.), " flung into the river the winecups and yu-p^u of 
his subordinates, remarking, ^Yu-p^u is a game for drovers and 
swineherds.' " Yang Kuo-chung, brother of the notorious Yang 
Kuei-fei, mistress of the Emperor Ming Huang, played yu-p^u 
with the imperial gambler in the palace a. d. 750. In 951 
T^ai-tsu, the " High Ancestor " of the Later Chou, assembled his 
nobles to play together at this game for '* embroidered rugs and 
damask and gauze of sorts." Forty years later yu-p^u was put 
under a ban and all players of it threatened with the headsman, 
after which the game appears very naturally to have fallen into 
desuetude. 

lli-j/u, however, pace Dr. Williams, was not a card game. 
Originally, so far as we can judge, it was nothing more or less 
than the modern poker dice, or something closely resembling it. 
Five dice were used, colored black above and white below (or 
perhaps having three of the faces black and three white), and 
one or more of the black faces was marked with a 2-spot, and 
similarly one or more of the white. The highest throw was five 
blacks, '* the hound," counting 16 ; the next was ** the cock," two 

*Ge8clnchte des Schachspiels, ii, pp. 381, B<iq. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] CHINESE ORIGIN OF PLAYING CARDS 



63 



white 2'8 and three blacks, counting 14. Later on yii-p^u would 
seem to have taken a form (while preserving the poker dice) more 
akin to backgammon, but in all the notices of it as yet examined 
it would be an abuse of language to call it a game of cards. 
Before dismissing it, however, it may be worth noting that it is 
credited, or rather debited, with a foreign origin. Said the old 






1 



^ 



m 





J^^% 




Fio. 2 (%). 



puritan, T'ao K*an, already cited : *' Tu-p^tc is a foreign game, yet 
nowadays scholars and officials play it. Can it be that the whole 
empire is turning foreign ? " 

There was probably more affinity with cards in the case of 
yeh-lzd than in that of yu-p^u. Indeed, a native work, of which 
the date is yet to seek, the Tan-yen-tsa-lu, declares explicitly 
that these *' leaves " " were like the modern pasteboard cards." 
Chinese authorities differ as to the derivation of the term. The 
most reasonable of them deride the convenient theory that they 



Digitized by 



Google 



64 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



were called after the name of their inventor (given by others as 
Yeh Tz^-ching). One writer, who dates their use from the middle 
of the eighth century, explains their origin thus: In the earlier 
days of the T*ang dynasty (say the seventh century after Christ), 
books were written in the form of scrolls. This was found in- 
convenient for purposes of reference, and books with leaver were 
substituted for them (the leaves, however, were more like the 
tablets in common use in England some few years ago for memo- 
randa — that is to say, they were detached or detachable). Among 
the books thus made up into tablets were works on dice games. 
As these were in constant use for reference, " tablets " or " leaves " 
in this way became synonyms for dice, and finally were used in 
the place of dice — and thus yeh-tzd grew into cards. The theory 
is ingenious and derives considerable support from two circum- 
stances : one, the employment to this day in Japan (which ob- 
tained all or nearly all its 

^e;> ^s^~n i<^iD\ 



u 



oC 



amusements from China) of 
card games in which the cards 
form practically the leaves of a 
book of poetry ; the other, the 
use throughout western China 
of packs in which the cards 
represent, much as in our 
proverbs, the different words 
of some well-known sentiment 
or sentence. 

Whatever these "leaves" 
may have been, the game into 
which they entered was ex- 
ceedingly fashionable during the last years of the T'ang dynasty 
(618-905 A. i>.) and the century following its extinction. 
China, on the fall of the Pang, was divided between native 
princelings on the south and the K^i-tan Tartars on the 
north — the Tartars from whom China got in Europe the name 
of Kitai or Cathay. These Tartars took so kindly to the 
game of yeh-tzd that one authority declares that **the Kitan 
were the first to use the game." He adds, however, that 
"its origin is not known." In February, 969, the Tartar 



Q 

Fio. s (i4). 






Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] CHINESE ORIGIN OF PLAYING CARDS 



65 




Fi«. 4. 



prince assembled his lords to a 

" tournament of leaves," and in 

the following month, says the 

chronicler, he was murdered. 

Of course tlie moral is pointed : 

" Did not evil follow speedily on 

the use of these unlucky things? 

Will not the scholars and high 

officers who now spend their 

days over them take warning 

thereby? " What is of far more 

interest to the western reader, 

who does not always share the 

Chinese fondness for a moral, is 

a scholiast which explains ?/<?/i-te<t 

succinctly as ** Sung money " — 

that is, coins (or their equivalent) 

of the Sung dynasty, of which 

more presently. 

References to cards under their present name of p^ai are rare 
in the encyclopedias. Besides the sentence from the tan-yen- 
tsa-lu, already quoted, to the effect that yeh-tzd were similar to 
the chlh'p'ai of today, the only passage so far found is that un- 
earthed several years ago from the Cheng-tzd-Vung by the late 
Abel Remusat, an armchair sinologue of some repute in his time. 
This paragraph is alluded to by, among others, Chatto, Merlin, 
and " Cavendish." The latter (quoting, though without ac- 
knowledgment, from Chatto) wrote in his Card Essays, ** It is 
stated in the Chinese Dictionary, Ching tsze tung, compiled by 
Eul Koung, and first published A. D. 1678, that the cards now 
known as Teen tsze pae, or dotted cards, were invented in the 
reign of S'eun-ho, 1120. According to tradition they were de- 
vised for the amusement of S'eun-ho's numerous concubines." 
In his recent article on cards in the Encyclopedia Britannica 
" Cavendish " throws tradition to the winds and boldly fathers 
the amusement theory on the dictionary itself. The original, 
however, though quaint enough in its way, is provokingly silent 
about the concubines ; indeed it is strictly seemly, not to say 
sanctimonious, in its tone. A garbled paraphrase is given by 
9 



Digitized by 



Google 



66 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

Chatto, but he omits altogether the conchiding and most impor- 
tant sentence : " It does riot follow that this class of games orig- 
inated in the period Hsiian-ho" [1119-1126]. A more curious 
vindication of the tedious maxim about verifying your references 
could hardly be imagined. Here we have a passage adduced 
again and again by European writers, from Chatto to " Caven- 
dish," to prove that Chinese cards " were first invented in the 
reign of S'eun-ho," which passage, when carefully examined, 
distinctly declares that such a conclusion would be unsound. 
It is perfectly clear, indeed, that all that was done or asked for 
in 1120 was an imperial decision as to which of several forms or 
interpretations of the game now known as T^ien-kia (" Heavens 
and Nines ") was to be considered orthodox. The game and the 
cards must have been in existence long before. The passage 
from the Cheng-tzd-t^ung runs thus (s. v. p'ai) : 

*^Also ya p'ai, now the instruments of a game. A common 
legend states that in the second year of the Hsiian-ho, in the 
Sung dynasty [i. q. 1120 A. d.], a certain official memorialized 
the throne, praying that the ya p'ai (ivory cards) might be fixed 
as a pack of 32, comprising 127 pips [sic, it should be 227, but 
Chinese printers are careless], in order to accord with the ex- 
panse of the stars and constellations. The combinatioii * heaven ' 
[f , f ] consisted of two pieces, containing 24 pips, figures of the 
24 solar periods ; ' earth ' [|, \'] also composed two pieces, but 
contained 4 pips, the 4 points of the compass — east, west, south, 
and north; *man' [J, J] two pieces, containing 16 pips, the 
virtues of humanity, benevolence, propriety, and wisdom, four- 
fold ; * harmony' [^,^], two pieces of 8 pips, figuring the breath 
of harmony, which pervades the eight divisions of the year. 
The other combinations had each their names. There were four 
players having eight cards apiece for their hand, and the cards 
won or lost according as the number of the pips was less or 
more, the winner being rewarded with counters. In the time of 
Kao-tsung [1127-1163] pattern packs were issued by imperial 
edict. They are now known throughout the empire as Ku p'ai, 
* bone p*ai ; ' but it does not follow that this class of games, 
po-sai, Ko-wu, and the rest originated in the reign Hsiian-ho." 

Ko-tou bore some analogy to gobang, po-sai was a form of 
backgammon. The classing together of these with the Ku p'ai 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] CHINESE ORIGIN OF PLAYING CARDS 



67 




Fig. 5 (full size). 



curiously resembles the method of Professor Hoffmann in his 
Encj'^clopsedia of Card and Table 
Games, where dominoes figure 
among the latter. Whatever may 
be said of English dominoes, Chi- 
nese " dominoes " are, however, 
most certainly cards, more partic- 
ularly in the game of Tienkin, 
here described. 

Cards basing their symbols on dice exist in many different 
forms throughout China, and it is possible with their aid to trace 
the gradual evolution of these playthings from knucklebones 
through dice and dominoes. As, however, these cannot be shown 
to have directly influenced the form of European cards, nothing 
further need be said about them here. 

It is indeed to yehtzci rather than to the ya pa'i that we must 
look not only for the origin of most Chinese paper cards, but for 
that of European playing cards as well ; and the modest scholi- 
ast already quoted gives the clue when he explains yehtzd by 
'' Sung money." Of all the Chinese varieties, and they are many, 
no one kind is so uniformly distributed or so universally pop- 
ular as that described by Chatto under the style of T^eea-wan 
che-pae,^ Illustrations of these are given by Breitkopf (whom 
Singer copies), Chatto, Taylor (and his original, Boiteau), and 
Willshire ; and portions of a pack are contained in the British 
Museum in a box numbered by Willshire O. C. 293. Perfect 
specimens, obtained from Peking, Tientsin, Chunking, Kiuki^ng, 
Shansi, Honan, Wenchow, Canton, and other parts of China, 
appeared as Nos. 1 to 17 in a collection of Chinese cards which 
Mr. Stewart Culin did me the honor to exhibit at the World's 
Fair last year.f Of the descriptions heretofore given of this class 
of cards, that by Chatto is the most accurate ; that by Willshire 
the most absurd. They are known in central China by the 
name of kun p*a?, staff or baton cards, or ma chioh, '* hempen 
birds." A set contains thirty pieces, namely, the ace, 2, 3, 4, 5, 
6, 7. 8, 9 of three suits, now commonly called ping, tiao, and wan 

*See Chatto: Facts and Speculations on the Origin and History of 
Playing Cards, 1848. 

t Now in the Collection of Games in the Museum of Archa3ology of the 
University of Pennsylvania. 



Digitized by 



Google 



68 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



[Vol. VIII 



(" cakes," " strings," " myriads "), and three separate cards, 
" whiteflovver," " redflower," and ch^ien wan, " a thousand myri- 
ads " — usually styled " old thousand." The game as sold con- 
sists, as a rule, of four of these sets or packets, with two, five, or 
six loose cards, known as " golds," '' flyers," or " butterflies." 
The use of these " golds " is precisely similar to that of mistigris 
in poker or the braggers in the parent game, Hoyle's brag — that 
is to say, they can stand for and take the place of any desired 
card. They have, however, no vital connection with the game, 
which may be, and often is, played without them. No speci- 
mens other than those at the World's Fair have so far found 

their way into west- 
ern cabinets ; none 
certainly have been 
described by Euro- 
pean writers. As a 
rule, they are five in 
number and carry 
portraits and em- 
blems representing 
the '' Five Blessings," 
Luck, Promotion, 
Longevity, Posterity, 
Wealth ; but they frequently take other forms. Sometimes they 
are ordinary cards, just as quinola, the knave of hearts, might, 
as Cavendish puts it, ^' be made any card or suit " at one of the 
oldest of European games, primero. In this latter case, how- 
ever, they are distinguished by a blot of gilt or pther token. 

The suit of pi/ir/, " cakes," was originally and properly that of 
ch'ieu " sapecks " or '* cash ; " the " strings " are strings of one 
thousand cash, the ** myriads " are myriads of cash. Every one 
knows the sapeck of China, a round coin of brass and co))per, 
with a square hole in its center. It is as a rule very badly cast, 
and it is worth just now about y^^th of a cent. This coin, then, 
is the unit of the kan p'ai In fact, the cards of a kan p'ai pack are 
or originally were bank notes, for which and ivUh tvhich the gamblers 
played. It may be objected that, according to Mayers, bank notes 
" were invented in China in 1265 ; " but Vissering* has pointed 

* Chinese Currency, Leyden, 1877. 




Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 18951 CHINESE ORIGIN OF PLAYING CARDS 



69 




Fig. 8 (K). 



out from Ma Tuan-lin the antiquary (oh. 1325) that Tai-tsu of 
the Sung (a. d. 960-976) revived the old system of flying cash 
used under the Pang dynasty " (618-905), the '' flying cash " 
being paper money or bank notes. In Vissering's monograph 
is given an illustration of a note of the Ming dynasty (1368- 
1644) and a still earlier one of the Yuan (1280-1367) 
has been recently purchased for the British Mu- 
seum. If any one will examine either of these he 
will find upon them illustrations of strings of cash 
the exact counterpart of which appears in the suit of 
tiao of the kan p^ai packs. Assuming, then, and the 
assumption seems sound, that the kunp^ni cards were 
originally bank notes, the question remains, How did 
these bank-note cards come to affect, if they did affect, 
the cards of Europe? The question was anticipated 
by Singer Q' Researches," 1816) : 

The grotesque appearance of the figures on modern European court 
cards bears no small degree of resemblance to some representations of the 
human form in the more rude and early attempts of the Chinese at de- 
picting it. This resemblance has been frequently remarked, but has 
never, we believe, led to the enquiry whether it was probable that the 
Europeans obtained the knowledge of cards from thence. As it is certain 
that they practiced the art of engraving on wood many centuries before 
it was known in Europe, and as the European card-makers are considered 
by some to have first introduced that art, a conjecture might be hazarded 
that they obtained both cards and the means of multiplying ^them from 
China by means of some of the early adventurers who, for purposes of 
commerce, are known to have reached that country as early as the 12th 
century. Zani says, he adds in a foot-note, ** the Abb^ Tressan showed 
him when he was at Paris a pack of Chinese cards and told him that a 
Venetian was the first who brought cards from China to Venice, and that 
city \va.s the fii*st place in Euroi>e where they were known." . . . This 
traveller could have been no other than Niccolo Polo, who, with his 
brother Mattoo, returned from China about 12()9, or else the celebrated 
Marco Polo. . . . Still both the printed text and the various MSS. 
make no mention of such an occurrence. 

That Marco Polo, while speaking, as he does, of the paper 
money of the Great Khan, should have been silent about his 
playing cards proves little, for to Polo they would not necessarily 
be as interesting as to Singer or to Chatto. Nevertheless he may 
well have brought a pack from China with a hundred other trifles 
of too little value to catalogue in his book. Nor does Merlin's 



Digitized by 



Google 



70 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



[Vol. vni 



m 



objection to the small size of the Chinese cards as compared with 
the earliest specimens in Europe affect the argument. Even at 
the present day the cards of western China are far larger than 

^ ^ those of Canton (the petits 

I \ C^ — T^ (/rmoimof Merlin), and may 

well in the Polos' time have 
been broader still. The nar- 
rowness of the modern Can- 
tonese cards is due to the 
prevailing fashion of holding 
them in the clenched fist and 
not spread out fanwise. 

The coincidences, indeed, 
between the first European 
packs and the Chinese han 
pf'ai are too numerous to be 
accidental. The earliest suit- 
marks in Europe, those of 
Italy and Spain, w^ere spade 
(espadas), '* swords ; " coppe 
(copas),*' cups;'' (/mari(oros), 
*• money," and hastone (bas- 
tos), *' clubs." Spanish ])acks, 
remarked Vives (ob. 1541), 
had no 10-spot (Singer, p. 37). 
The first coat cards were the 
King, Cavalier, and Servant — 
Rey, Caballo, Soto. Early 
Il]uropean packs contained emblematic cards, the naibis, inde- 
pendent of the rest. In the first games knowMi the cards were 
used much as in commerce or poker now — to form flushes, 
sequences, or triplets. Now, if we turn to the hui p'ai we find 
that the leading principle of the games played with them is the 
same as that in the old Italian Frusso or Primero, while at the 
same time, like the Tarocchi, the kun p^at packs usually include 
a number of emblematic cards curiously suggestive of the naitis. 
(Of this more presently.) No Chinese pack contains a ten, the 
reason for which is clear if we take the cards to have been bank 
notes, but altogether absent if we call them *' cups " and "' clubs ; " 
for let us suppose that the suit of cabh represented notes ranging 



m 


:^ 


m 



Fio. 9 (full size) 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] CHINESE ORIGIN OF PLAYING CARDS 71 

in value from one hundred sapecks to nine liundred (as was 
probably the case, since notes for a single sapeck or for nine 
sapecks would be ludicrously small) ; the suits of strings and 
myriads on the face of them represent notes for one thousand to 
nine thousand and for ten thousand to ninety thousand cash 
respectively. We then have a decimal series of hundreds, thou- 
sands, myriads, and a ten of strings would be clearly superfluous, 
since its place is already taken by an ace of myriads, ten thou- 
sands being equal to one ten-thousand. 

There is reason, then, in the Chinese suit names, but abso- 
lutely none in the European. An attempt has been made to 
explain the Spanish and Italian suits as emblematic of the four 
classes of society, clubs standing for peasants ; mone}' for trades- 
men ; swords for the nobility, and cups for the clergy ; or, again, 
as symbols, respectively, of fortitude, charity, justice, and faith. 
All this is obviously fantastic, whereas if we admit that the first 
European cards were copied from a Chinese kun p'ai pack (or 
from a still more remarkable one, to be presently described, the 
lieh chih)j then everything becomes clear. Rey and Soto find 
their prototypes in " Old Thousand " and " Redflower," while 
Caballo represents " Whiteflower," which, Breitkopf observes, 
" often bears the figure of a horse." (It is, in fact, a --rr^ 
stag, but that Breitkopf took it for a hoi-se makes it 
easy to understand that his predecessors, Marco Polo's 
Venetian friends, should have done the same.) There 
are three non-numeral cards in the kun p'ai pack; there 
were three non-numeral cards in those of medieval 
Europe. Here, again, there is reason in the Chinese 
game; none in the European. In the Chinese game, 
which, it should be observed, Messrs. Goodall have 
lately brought out in English dress under the name of 
'^ Khanhoo," the cards are brought together in com- ^^^^^ 
binations of three (suggested probably by the number '*'-^®^*^' 
of the numeral cards, 3x3x3), and hence, whatever the Red- 
flower, Whiteflower, and Old Thousand may originally have 
been, their mimber was necessarily fixed at three. (In some 
Kun p^ai packs these coat cards, as we should regard them, bear 
other names, as Wang Ying, Lin Chang, Wu Sung, and Prince 
of Mao, taken from an old romance of the Robin Hood typo, tlie 
Shui-hn chuan. Whiteflower, again, is sometimes *' Sprayflower " 
or " White Ash.") 



Digitized by 



Google 



72 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VllI 



But no such reasonable explanation can be given of the re- 
striction of European coat cards to three, whether we call them 
King, Queen, and Knave, or Rey, Caballo, and Soto ; nor is it 
obvious, however natural it may appear to us now, why the coat 
cards should be superior to the numeral cards. When we re- 
member that the proper name of Old Thousand is " a thousand 
myriads," or, as we should say, " the thousand of myriads," it 





1 


i 


ii' 


M. 



Fio. n (full size). 

is clear that it must necessarily be superior to all numeral cards, 
the highest of which is the nine of myriads, for a note for ten 
millions of sapecks must (or at any rate should) be more valu- 
able than one for ninety thousand. The circumstance, too, that 
one of the original Chinese coat cards should seem to have a 
special connection with one of the original numeral suits would 
explain how a set of coat cards came to be attached in Europe 
to each suit. It is highly probable, moreover, that Whiteflower 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] CHINESE ORIGIN OF PLAYING CARDS 



73 



and Redflower were originally marked Ten Myriads and Hun- 
dred Myriads, for in a lok pack (a- variety of lieh chih) from Tapu, 
near Swatow, cards marked ** sprayflower," " hundred myriads," 
" thousand myriads," and '' myriad myriads " are found in ad- 
dition to the numeral suits. ('' Sprayflower," as we have seen, 
is another name for ** Whiteflower.") This, then, would explain 
why one coat card should be considered in Europe superior to 
another, as the Rey to the Caballo, and not its coordinate, as in 
"Khanhoo." Lieh chih, "waste paper," indeed, throws much 
light not only on points like these, but also on the remaining 
difficulty — the fact that the Chinese game has three suits, while 
the early, like the modern, European has four. The normal lieh 
chih pack consists of thirty-six cards in four suits, arranged thus 
when the number of players is three : 

lakhs: '' hundred sons," 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2. 

rouleaux: 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1. 

strings: 9,8,7,6,5,4,3, 2, 1. 

cash : ace of cash, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 3, 2. 

With four players two addi- 
tional cards. Prince of Mao and 
Stagflower, are used and rank as 
the two highest cash, while the 
order of the numeral cards in that 
suit is reversed. In the lok pack 
just referred to the place of Stag- 
flower is taken by Sprayflower, a 
further proof of the identity of 
both with Whiteflower. 

Now, in the kun p^ai game, of 
which '' Khanhoo" is a faithful Fig. is m. 

copy, the suits are coordinate to one another ; no one suit is 
superior to any other. There is, indeed, no reason why any suit 
should be superior or any card as the game is now played, for the 
cards do not take one another, but serve, as in poker or com- 
merce, to form certain combinations. In lieh chih, on the con- 
trary, the cards do take one another, and in the very significant 
order given above — that is to say, the 5 of lakhs (500,000 cash) 
takes the 4 of lakhs and the 1 of rouleaux (10,000 cash) the 9 of 
strings (9,000 cash). In the case of two of the suits we find the 
ace counting before the nine, as in so many European games. 
10 




Digitized by 



Google 



74 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



[Vol. VIII 



The reason for this is to be found in the bin p^ai packs, where 
aces are valuable because of their mobility (the feature is copied 
into " Khanhoo ") and because they enter into so many combi- 
nations, index or "squeezes" marks are met with in most 
Chinese packs, and it is often the case that the aces are honored 
with the same index mark as Whiteflower, Redflower, and Old 
Thousand, which three, indeed, are sometimes spoken of as yao, 
" aces." In Ueh chih " Lin Chung " and " Wang Uing " are 
frequently substituted for " Prince of Mao " and " Stagflower," 
just as we have seen that in certain kun p'ai packs " Prince of 






Fig. 14 (K). 

Mao " and " Wang Uing " are occasionally substituted for Red- 
flower. There can be no question, indeed, that both lieh chih 
and kun p^ai have the same origin. In the absence of detailed 
information of early Chinese games it is impossible to say which 
of the two more nearly represents the j)rimitive form. It is al- 
lowable, however, to assume from Ueh chih that the parent game, 
packs of which found their way westward in the 13th century, 
had four suits of *.) cards each, and from kun pUii that it pos- 
sessed besides three coat cards. 

Says Willshire (p. 833): "It is probable that in the perfect 
sequence there are 5 suits of 9 pieces each suit, the marks of 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] CHINESE OKIGIN OF PLAYING CARDS 75 

which are bags, money, batons or bows, swords, and a fifth mark 
not satisfactorily demonstrable." This conjecture, erroneous as 
it is, in one way serves a most useful purpose, because it shows 
what view a European who knew nothing whatever about them 
would be apt to take of the suit marks of these Chinese games, 
for Willshire is describing a complete lieh chih pack in the British 
Museum (O. C. 251). If Willshire in 1878 took the lieh chih 
suits to be money, bags, batons, and swords, is it surprising if 
the Italians of 1278 — if that is when they first saw them — took 
these same suits to be money, cups, swords, and batons ? As 
regards the suit of cakes or cash, indeed it would require very 
little imagination to hit upon its meaning. Chatto himself says 
" the mark of the suit of" what he calls " Nines Cakes is nearly 
the same as that of the old Italian danariy This writer else- 
where observes, *' in the 16th century it appears that in Italy the 
suit of basloni, * clubs,' was also called colonne, columns, . . . 
merely .because the club or mace bore some resemblance to a 
slender pillar." Take a number of kun p'ai packs and submit 
them to various persons who are ignorant of their meaning and 
it will be found that among the interpretations given to the suit 
of strings those of " swords," " bamboos," " batons," and " pillars '» 
will be the most common, particularly if the ace or the two is 
the first card shown. 

But what of the " cups," the copas or coppe ? It is precisely 
this suit-mark, so altogether inexplicable on any other reasoning, 
that affords the best proof that the early European cards were 
derived firom the kun p^ai or lieh chih of China. Take the first 
three — the ace, 2, 3 — of the myriads : 

5 X ^ ^ ^- 

Plainly these are the i, ii, iii of rl . But unless you know Chi- 
nese — which would tell you that this character is the abbreviated 
form of the hieroglyph for wan, " ten thousand " — you would be 
at a loss to understand it until you turned it upside down. This, 
being ex hypothesi one of Marco Polo's Venetian friends, you 
would naturally do, because you would be in the habit of read- 



Digitized by 



Google 



76 THE AMERICAN ANTIIROrOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

ing from left to right and not, as the Chinese do, from right to left. 
Having once turned the hieroglyph round, no great effort 1/ 
of imagination would be rei^uired to see in it the cup. J^ 

The game of Tarocco as played in Italy at the present time is 
a suggestive compound of the two national card games of China — 
^an/it^CKhanhoo), played with the kan p^ai,and t'ienkiu, played 
with the " dominoes " — described in the passage from the Cheng 
tzd tang already translated. The Tarocco pack consists of 22 
tarots, numbered from to xxi, and of four suits of 14 cards 
each, namely, the King, Queen, Cavalier, Page, 10, 9, 8, 7, 6, 5, 4, 
^, 2, 1 of Money,;Swords, Cups, and Clubs. The order of the 
numeral cards varies with the suit, much as in four-hand lieh 
chih — that is to say, in Swords and Clubs the 10 ranks highest, 
the ace lowest, while the reverse is the case in Cups and Money. 
In lieh chih the natural order is preserved in Rouleaux and 
Strings (the prototypes of Swords and Clubs), the 9 ranking 
above the 8 and the 2 above the ace, while in Cash (the Italian 
Money) the ace ranks first and the 9 last. The deal in Tarocco, 
as in so many Italian and Spanish games, passes round '* nidder- 
shins," the way the sun does not go, precisely as in all Chinese 
card games. The dealer deals 19 cards to each player and leaves 
a stock of 2 cards, which the players successively make use of 
by exchange to better their hands, much as the stock is used at 
K'nnhu. Having done this, the players then announce any se- 
quences they may have.'obtained. In making up these sequences 
the lowest tarot, (iZ matto, the fool — the joker, in short), is given 
the privileges of the Chinese ''golds " — that is, it can take the 
place of any required card. So far the principle of ICanhu has 
been followed. The suit-marks are, as we have seen, the K^anhu 
suit-marks. There is the stock drawn on by exchange, the em- 
blematic joker, and the scoring seciuence. But after the announce- 
ments the game proceeds as in whist, and the cards take one 
another just as they do at lieh chih and t^ieakla. The tarots act 
as trumps to the other suits, and by a peculiar rule if the lowest 
of these, not zero — that is, tarot i, it bcgatto — ^takes the last trick 
it scores double points. 

What these tarots were originally has puzzled all writers on 
cards, nor has any one, so far as I am aware, ever attempted to 
account for their number, 22. Yet it is exceedingly probable 
that in them we have the set of twenty-one natural dominoes which 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] CHINESE ORIGIN OF PLAYING CARDS 



77 



forms the base of nearly all Chinese card games that derive their 
marks fiom dice. A domino is, of course, nothing but a pair of 
dice placed side by side (whence the mark across its face), and 
the number of possible combinations of two dice is f:|^, or 21. 
In the game of t^lenk'm these dominoes still remain as dominoes, 
of wood, bamboo, or bone ; but in many derived games they 
appear as pasteboard. In others, such as hua ho, " flower-match- 







FiG. 15 (full size). 

ing " (the original of the Japanese hana awase, praised, rightly 
but ignorantly, by Sir E. Arnold), they may be had in either 
form ; but wherever they enter the number 21 is always present. 
Take, for example, hiia ho. Here we have the 21 dominoes in 
three forms : (a) plain, (6) illuminated, (c) doubled ; three of 
the first, two of the second, and one each of the third — in all, 
126 cards, or six times 21, together with a varying number of 
blanks, which serve as jokers. (Portions of a hui ho pack in the 
British Museum are described, with more than his usual extra v- 



Digitized by 



Google 



78 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

agance, by Willshire, 0. C. 296, 297.) Moreover, each of the 
different combinations, f, }, f, |, and so on, has its name and 
fanciful signification, as " heaven,'* " earth," " man," " the trin- 
ity ; " and as this nomenclature is thoroughly Chinese, there is 
no real reason to disbelieve, with Merlin, in the tradition given 
in the Cheng tzd tung. Further, at i^ienkm the lowest card (the ^, 
for the \ ranks second) is allowed, when it takes the last trick, 
to score double, just as il begatto at Tarocco. 

Is it unreasonable to believe', then, that in the 21 natural domi- 
noes, the base of so many Chinese card games, we have the origin 
of the 22 tarots ? The Chinese dominoes have their emblematic 
names, just as the tarots have, and in their pasteboard form con- 
stantly are ornamented besides with full-length figures of men 
and women. 

But it will of course be urged, Why are there 22 tarots, then, 
and not 21 ? What, however, is the 22d ? It is zero, a blank, and 
its use is to serve as a "joker." But at hxia ho there are, besides 
the 21 so-called "doubles," a number (usually three) of blank 
cards, which are used exactly as il matto is used. If we assume 
that the Polos, father or son, brought home with them a hua ho 
pack and a tan hu pack, with directions, rendered somewhat 
vague by travel, of how to use them, and that their Venetian 
friends combined these into a single pack, we have an explana- 
tion of the tarots and the tarocco game that is at least coherent. 
The 21 doubles — the most striking of the set — with their full- 
length figures and emblematic names, would furnish the tarots, 
the blank (the joker) becoming il malto, while from the tan hy, 
game (the kan p^ai) would come, as we have seen, the money 
and the swords, the clubs and the cups. The 10 spot and the 
queen would be Italian innovations, born of the same ignorance 
which has added a blank to our European dominoes. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] COLONEL GARRICK MALLERY, TJ. S. A. 79 



COLONBL GARRICK MALLBR7, U. 8. A. 

American anthropology has sustained a great loss in the death 
of Colonel Mallery, who died after a short illness, at his resi- 
dence on N street, in this city, October 24, in the sixty-third 
year of his age. 

Garrick Mallery was born in Wilkes Barr6, Pennsylvania. His 
father, Judge Mallery. was a distinguished jurist and a man of 
cultivated tastes. Young Mallery graduated at Yale College, 
and after a due course of study under his father's direction he 
began the practice of law in Philadelphia. 

At the outbreak of the war he entered the volunteer service 
as captain in the Seventy-eighth Pennsylvania Infantry. He 
received two very severe wounds at the battle of Peach Orchard, 
Virginia, in 1862 ; was captured while lying on the battlefield 
and sent to Libby Prison, in Richmond. After a while he was 
exchanged and sent home, and upon recovering from his wounds 
he returned to duty and became lieutenant-colonel of the Thir- 
teenth Pennsylvania Cavalry. In 1866 Mallery received a 
commission in the regular army as captain of the Forty-third 
United States Infantry, and was retired in 1879 in consequence 
of disability resulting from the wounds received in battle. 

At an early period of his army experience at frontier posts 
Colonel Mallery (the brevet rank of colonel had been bestowed 
upon him for gallant services) began to take an interest in the 
customs of the Indian tribes with which he came in contact. 
He was especially struck with the extent of their sign language 
and pictographs, and, following up this particular subject of 
research during his subsequent connection with the Bureau of 
Ethnology, he brought out from time to time reports of the 
progress of his work. He made many f>ersonal investij^^a^tions. 



Digitized by 



Google 



80 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST . [Vol. VIII 

and an extensive correspondence furnished him with an im- 
mense collection of data and drawings. The result of these 
researches was embodied in the work, " Picture-writing of the 
American Indians," which appeared in the Tenth Annual Re- 
port of the Bureau of Ethnology. It consists of 822 pages of 
text, in folio shape, with 1,290 illustrations. Colonel Mallery 
had the satisfaction of seeing this monument of his industry and 
ingenious research published in 1894, but a philosophical sum- 
mary of the results of this vast accumulation of facts upon which 
he had entered was left uncompleted at his death. 

In addition to his ethnological work, Colonel Mallery was the 
author of many addresses and essays, all characterized by a 
philosophical vein of thought and much critical acumen. He 
was known to his intimate friends as a man of large scholarly 
attainments, and who had a generous acquaintance with the 
literature of his own and other tongues. To those friends he 
was greatly endeared by his genial manner, kindness of heart, 
and high bred courtesy. He was a graceful writer, with the 
clearness and simplicity of style which belongs to the well-read 
man. This was the result partly of early education, and perhaps 
of inherent good taste, but he gave much study to the subject of 
style in composition. Its application to scientific writings was 
the theme of his address before the Philosophical Society on 
retiring from its presidency. 

Colonel Mallery was one of the founders of the Anthropological 
Society of Washington, its president, and for many years an 
active and zealous member of its Council. In the Philosophical 
Society, the parent of all the scientific societies now existing in 
this city, he was an efficient member and its president in 1888. 

He will be long remembered with affection by his many friends, 
and his scientific work is original and of permanent value. 

RoBKRT Fletcher. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] BOOK NOTICES 81 



BOOK NOTICB8 

Statistics of the Negroes in the United States, By He)\ry Gannett^ 
of the United States Geological Survey, Published by the Dmstees 
of the John F, Slater Fund in " Occasional Papers,^^ No. If., 

In a prefatory notice to this monograph the trustees say: 
" Such varied statements are made in the pulpit and press, on 
the platform, and in conversation respecting the condition of 
the negro population that it seemed desirable to publish an au- 
thoritative paper on the subject. * * * It is hoped that the 
study of this paper will contribute to the understanding of many 
problems in education, morals, and politics." 

This study of the movement of the negro population by Mr. 
Gannett is, as all who know him might premise, conscientious, 
elaborate, and painstaking, and will stand as a valuable con- 
tribution to the general history of the African in the United 
States. 

It appears that the number of blacks in proportion to the 
whites in our population has, contrary to an impression which 
has prevailed in some quarters, decidedly but gradually de- 
clined since 1790, when the first reliable data were obtained, at 
which time the relative proportions of the population were 80.73 
per cent, white to 19.27 per cent, black 

It is now (1894), upon the basis of an estimated population of 
61,000,000 whites and 8,000,000 blacks, 88.41 per cent, white to 
11.59 per cent, black. 

Put in another form, the blacks in 1790 numbered nearly one- 
fifth of the whole population, and in 1894 considerably less than 
one-eighth. In only two of the eleven censuses taken has the 
ratio of blacks statistically increased, namely, in 1810 and in 
1880. I find that the average rate of increase by decades in the 
white population from 1790 to 1860 was 35.74 per cent. ; in the 
black, 28.85 per cent. 

" It may be said," remarks Mr. Gannett, " that this diminish- 
ing rate of increase in the blacks is due to the enormous immi- 
gration of whites ; but it can be shown that the greatest increase 
11 



Digitized by 



Google 



82 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

of the whites has not been dependent upon immigration, since 
their rate of increase was greater than the blacks before immi- 
gration set in." 

This decadence is more likely due to bad sanitary, hygienic, 
and, in the North, climatic conditions. In the *' black belt" the 
one-room cabin is almost universal, and is not only a sanitary 
but a serious moral menace to the community. 

jMr. Gannett remarks that "these figures and the conclusion 
necessarily derived from them should set at rest forever all fears 
regarding any possible conflict of the races." 

I am not aware that any such fears have ever had serious ex- 
istence, excepting perhaps in the South for a short time at the 
beginning of the civil war, and certainly no fears as to the result 
of such a conflict could have ever been reasonably entertained 
at any time in the country at large. Conflicts are always pos- 
sible, but not always probable. 

We have to thank Mr. Gannett for giving a final quietus to 
the much-preached theory that the negro when left to himself and 
having perfect freedom of movement would, despite his racial 
inclinations, drift to the North, where his environment is erro- 
neously supposed to be more friendly. 

The census of 1890 shows the center of the negro population, 
which was in 1880 in latitude 34° 42' and longitude 84° 58', or 
in the northwestern corner of Georgia, not far from Dalton, to 
be in that year ( 1890) nearly five degrees, or more than 300 miles, 
to the south of it, the longitude being nearly the same. 

** In the cotton States " the proportion of negroes has in nearly 
all cases increased until a very recent time; indeed, in two or 
three of them it has increased up to the time of the last census, 
while in most of them the only diminution in the proportion 
has occurred during the last ten years. 

All this shows, in the most unmistakable way, a general south- 
ward migration of the race. 

^' The former slave States in which the negroes have decreased 
are Delaware, Maryland, Virginia, Kentucky, and Missouri and 
secondarily in Tennessee and North Carolina. There are also 
areas of decrease in Texas and small areas in other States, but 
these are of little importance in comparison with the great areas 
of the border States in which the number of negroes has actually 
diminished. On the other hand, the most rapid increase of the 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] BOOK NOTICES 83 

race has been in the southern and southwestern parts of the 
r^on under consideration, and the heaviest increase is south of 
the 8o-caUed * black belt.' " 

The preference of the negro for the higher temperature of the 
South is more emphatically shown by the census bulletin No. 
199 than by these statements of Mr. Gannett. 

It appears that of the 7,470,040 persons of African descent in 
the United States in 1890, 90.26 per cent, were living south of 
the forty-first parallel and in the North Atlantic census division, 
comprising the States of New England, New York, New Jersey, 
and Pennsylvania, for which the negro is supposed to have a 
special predilection, we find but 3.61 per cent. 

The negro's liking for high temperatures would seem to be in 
the ratio of the purity of his blood. Of course, the census re- 
turns of the number of persons of negro and white blood in the 
various degrees of mixture can at best be but approximately 
correct, but the results are generally supported by our observa- 
tion. 

These returns as given show that of the whole purely African 
or n^ro population in, the United States nearly 92 per cent, are 
south of the forty-first parallel, and of the mulattoes, in the 
various degrees of blood mixture, but about 81 + per cent, are in 
that r^on. 

As regards the distribution and density of the negro popula- 
tion nearly all the Northern and Western States, with scarcely an 
exception, have less than four negroes to the square mile and 
many less than one, while in Louisiana, Mississippi, and South 
Carolina more than half the people are negroes, and in South 
Carolina three out of every five are of that race. 

The census of 1890 also forcibly shows us that the negro is 
not to be excepted in the general drift of population to the cities 
which is going on all over the world. 

Mr. Gannett estimates that in 1860 but 4.2 per cent, of the 
negroes of the slave States were in cities of 8,000 or more inhab- 
itants ; in 1870, 8.5 per cent. ; in 1890, 12 per cent. — a ratio of in- 
crease much greater than that of the whites in the same period. 

The negro is unquestionably gregarious, as Mr. Gannett sug- 
gests, but it is very doubtful if it is the principal factor in this 
movement. . It is more likely to be found in the difliculty he 
has experienced in obtaining a livelihood from the soil because 
of his ignorance and extravagant methods. 



Digitized by 



Google 



84 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

To keep him in the country and upon the land to which by 
his habits, character, and training he is best fitted, he should be 
industrially educated in better methods of agriculture. Until 
this is done the movement will go rapidly on. 

Precisely the same drift from the farms to the cities, and re- 
sulting from similar causes, is shown in Massachusetts, although 
our race is by no means so gregarious. 

" In 1790, when the first census was taken, the great mass of 
the people were well scattered over the State, on farms and in 
towns of less than 2,500 people— frugal, industrious, well-to-do 
.(for those days), and contented."* 

Boston was then the only town in the State with over 8,000 
population, representing 4.7 per cent, of that of the entire State- 
In 1885 66 4 per cent., or nearly seven-tenths of its population, 
were in cities of 8,000 inhabitants and over. 

In the country at large in 1790, 3.33 per cent, of its population 
were in cities ; in 1800, 3.90 per cent. ; in 1880, 22.5 per cent. ; in 
1890, over 29 per cent. ; "and while our total population in the 
year 1890 was but sixteen times as great as in 1790, our urban 
population had become one hundred and thirty-nine times as 
great." 

In England, in 1801, one-third of its population was in towns ; 
in 1881 two-thirds lived in towns. In Norway, in 1801, 9 per 
cent, lived in towns ; in 1888, 22 per cent. In Germany and 
France the same movement is going on. 

In his remarks upon the educational statistics Mr. Gannett 
appears to give too much importance to the enrollment of the 
negro school population. '' The true test of the application of 
our school system is not found in the * enrollment,' but in the 
proportion of children of school age, educable children, who 
attend school, to the whole number of such children," f and the 
relation between " enrollment " and " education " is of very un- 
certain value. 

The average percentage of colored children of school age 
" enrolled " in Alabama, Georgia, Louisiana, Mississippi, South 
Carolina, North Carolina, and Virginia is 47 per cent., but of 
these only 60 4- per cent, attend school. Put in another form, of 
the 2,000,000 colored children of school age in the District of 



* Editorial, Springfield (Ma.s.^i-husett8) Republican. 

t Article on ** Educational Status of the Negro." A. C. S. Bulletin No. 5. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] BOOK NOTICES 85 

Columbia and these States, but about 1,000,000 are enrolled, and 
only 625,000 attend school, leaving 1,375,000, or 68.75 per cent., 
of the whole colored school population out of school. Of the 
2,000,000 whites in the same States of school age, 60 per cent, re- 
main out of school — not a flattering exhibit for either race. 

With the movement and distribution of the population and 
the *' illiteracy and education " of the negro we leave behind the 
valuable and principal part of Mr. Gannett's paper and pass 
from the realm of the approximately known to that of the nebu- 
lous and the comparatively unknown. 

The " conjugal condition " of the negroes manifestly belongs in 
the latter category, and his criminality is but partially known. 
The demand of Congress for the conjugal condition, the mor- 
tality and pauperism of the country, it is impossible completely 
to satisfy. This is especially the case in the statistics of mor- 
tality and of the conjugal condition, for the simple reason that 
in many of the States there is no general law requiring the regis- 
tration of births, marriages, and deaths and no authentic records 
are available. In the States where there is no general law it is 
true that most of the cities require some sort of registration. In 
other States there is a general law governing marriages, but not 
requiring the registration of births and deaths. In others the 
registration is voluntary and erratic. 

A remarkable instance of the folly and failure of voluntary 
registration occurred in one of the leading Southern States a few 
years since, where an examination of the annual report of the 
State board of health to the legislature revealed the surprising 
statement that in two counties having respectively over 30,0000 
and 25,000 inhabitants there were but 74 and 14 deaths respect- 
ively during the year. 

In the States and cities having proper laws there is a frequent 
failure by physicians and clergymen to report — a failure which 
should be corrected by a sufficient penalty. In some instances 
the neglect has been so great as to cause the partial abandon- 
ment of registration and its confinement to deaths only. 

A public registration of births, marriages, and deaths was 
established by the Massachusetts Colony in 1639. As a result 
of that wise provision Massachusetts is now one of the very few 
States in the Union in which the increase or decrease of human 
viability can be even approximately determined during fifty 
years. 



Digitized by 



Google 



86 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

It is scarcely necessary to draw attention to the fact that in 
the rural population of the " black belt " it is impossible by any 
ordinary means to enforce a registration law, and the actual 
death, marriage, or birth rate of such populations is now alto- 
gether a matter of conjecture. Any attempted comparison of 
negro and white pauperism is equally valueless unless founded 
upon house-to-house visitation and not confined to paupers 
maintained in alms-houses, as in the present census, ^* In the 
South but little provision is made in the form of alms-houses 
for poor relief." 

The actuaUand growing criminality of the country is a sad 
history, and its sadness is heightened by the thought that a race 
which has been mainly dependent upon us for its education and 
guidance should have a criminal record nearly four times as bad 
as our own, and further by the fact that, as bad as the record is, 
it is still far from complete, and that the criminality of both 
races must be considered as but partially known, 

George R. Stetson. 



Tlie Human Bones in the Hemenway Collection in the United States 
Army Medical Museum at Washington. By Dr, Washington 
Matiheics, Surgeon United States Ai^ny, with Observations on the 
Ilyoid Bones of the Collection by Dr. J. L. Wortman. Proceed- 
ings National Academy of Sciences, vol. vi. 

('om pared with the elaborate studies that have been made 
by Broca, Virchow, and other European scholars, the labors of 
Americans in the somatological realm of anthropology have been 
slight. The work before us will, however, go far to redeem the 
reputation of our own scientists, since it is one of the most ex- 
haustive examinations of a small group of skeletons that has 
ever appeared. 

This group is distinctively American and of a most interest- 
ing character, being a collection of some fifty-seven skeletons, 
together with a large number of fragments of skeletons, consti- 
tuting the remains of an ancient people that formerly inhabited 
the valley of the Salado river, a tributary of the Gila, in south- 
western Arizona. 

The exploration of the valley and exhumation of the remains 
was conducted at first by Mr. F. H. Gushing aided afterward by 
Drs. J. L. Wortman and Herman F. C. ten Kate.. The bones 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] BOOK NOTICES 87 

were extremely fragile and had to he handled with the greatest 
are to prevent their crumbling. Not a vestige of hair or of any 
kind of woven fabric was found with them, and this, together 
with the fact that the early Spanish explorers make no mention 
of any cities in this region, argues a great antiquity for the 
remains. They probably date from a period long anterior to 
the Spanish conquest, possibly 2,000 years ago. 

The excavations show that the people lived in cities quite 
similar to those inhabited by the Zufiis at the present day ; that 
they had an extensive system of irrigating canals, and that they 
understood the art of making and decorating pottery. Their 
priestly rites and orders appear to have been similar to those of 
existing tribes. Figurines found in the excavations, as well as 
certain pictographs on neighboring rocks, indicate that they 
were acquainted with some animal allied to the vicuna, and that 
they used the bolas for capturing it. These suggest affinities 
with South American Indians. 

The skulls belonging to these interesting remains are remark- 
. ably brachycephalic, the average cranial index taken from 
forty-eight of them being 88.47, which is larger than that of any 
existing race, the Alieuts (86.5) and the Apaches (85.6) 
being nearest. Most of the skulls are flattened in the occipital 
region, indicating that the children were strapped upon a rigid 
board, as is customary with many modem Indians. This has 
probably increased the brachycephalism to some degree. The 
same cause probably contributed somewhat to the peculiar 
dome-shaped character of the skulls, some of them being almost 
scaphocephalous. 

The condition of the skulls was such that in but eight cases 
could their capacities be measured. These averaged but l,313cc., 
being about that of ancient Peruvian skulls, less than that of 
the existing Indian tribes, and much below modern Europeans. 
Among existing peoples they rank with Bushmen, Australians, 
and Andaman Islanders. The sex could not be accurately de- 
termined, and it is therefore possible that these were mostly 
female skulls, which would, of course, be under the average for 
the race. Dr. Matthews suggests that the capacity ot the skulls 
may depend upon the bodily stature, which was apparently 
low. Judging from the lengths of the femora reported in Dr. 
Matthews' tables, and using Rollett's formula for calculating 
height, the average of these individuals was 1.54 meters, or a 



Digitized by 



Google 



88 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

little over five feet. In this respect they were on a par with the 
Papuans, Malays, and Veddahs of Ceylon, surpassing somewhat 
the Bushmen and Andaman Islanders. 

There are other resemblances between these skulls and those 
of the ancient Peruvians. The interparietal bone, which is 
formed by the persistence of the fetal suture between the car- 
tilaginous and membranous portions of the occipital bone, and 
from its frequent occurrence in Peruvian skulls has been called 
the *' Inca bone," is found with surprising frequency, not less 
than 18 per cent, of the 88 occipitals examined possessing it. 
It seems doubtful whether the form called the " apical " bone, 
in which a separate ossification resembling a Wormian is found 
at the apex of the occipital, can be correctly considered as an 
interparietal. The teeth in their tendency to caries and the 
small proportion of tritubercular second molars show Peruvian 
characters. 

The hyoid bones found are remarkable in the lack of union 
between the cornua and the body. The matter has already 
been discussed in this journal. The numerous quotations cited 
by Dr. Wortman seem to us to prove that the hyoid has been 
but little studied, and that anatomists, like the rest of mankind, 
are prone to the ovine habit of jumj)ing the fences of fact in 
imitation of their comrades. The series of bones cited by Dr. 
Wortman are insufficient for any well-grounded conclusions. 
The cornua of the hyoid certainly do often remain ununited 
late in life, as the writer has often verified. It is necessary to 
protest against the tacit assumption made by Dr. Wortman in 
Fig. 42, in which he shows a hyoid of great depth of body 
and labels it "Anterior and posterior views of negro hyoid." 
The text shows that this is abnormal, but taken by itself 
the reader would suppose that the negro hyoid was decidedly 
ape-like. A considerable experience has convinced the writer 
that anomalies of a simian character are found quite as fre- 
quently in the Caucasian as in the African. 

The angle of torsion of the humerus, indicating, according to 
some anthropologists, the outward twist of the arm necessary for 
advanced tool-using capacity, was found surprisingly great, be- 
ing nearly equal to that of modern P]uropeans. It has been sug- 
gested that as this angle increases the inclination between the 
trochlear surface and the shaft of the humerus necessarilv 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] BOOK NOTICES 89 

changes, and it is to be regretted that Dr. Matthews did not tab- 
ulate this in each case. 

Perforation of the olecranon fossa was found in a great pro- 
portion of the bones. This has already been discussed in this 
journal by Dr. D. S. Lamb. The suggestion that it was due to 
natural causes, such as the pressure occasioned by grinding corn^ 
is ingenious and plausible, but needs to be confirmed by obser- 
vations on other peoples who have this habit. The anatomical 
configurations due to occupation are by no means well under- 
stood. 

We are greatly impressed with the thoroughness and care with 
which this investigation has been conducted, and it is greatly to 
be regretted that the author had not a larger series of skeletons 
of our indigenous tribes with which comparisons could be made. 

While there seems to be considerable foundation for Dr. Brin- 
ton's view, expressed in the last number of the Anthropologist, 
that the peculiarities of these bones are due mainly to the habits 
and food conditions of the people, yet it cannot escape the notice 
of the thoughtful naturalist that it is by precisely such influences 
that marked varieties and species of animals are believed to origi- 
nate. What is an evanescent character today may by inherit- 
ance become persistent. Frank Baker. 

Eleventh Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the Secretary 
of the Smithsonian Institution, 1889-^90. By J, W. Powell, Di- 
rector, Washington, Government Printing Office, 1891^, Roy, 
8°, xlvii, 553 pp.; pis, and figs. 

The Bureau of Ethnology has been zealously endeavoring to 
fix in distinct record all the accessible evidences of the Indian's 
work upon this continent before the white man came. 

The volume named is among the most important of its issues 
containing, in addition to Director Powell's statement of the work 
of the year, a number of valuable scientific papers upon special 
lines of investigation. 

The first paper, 157 pages, is that of Mrs. Matilda Coxe Steven- 
son, who has had a rare opportunity and has used it well. She 
accompanied her husband on explorations in the west, entering 
heartily into the spirit of his studies, which she has continued 
since his death. She has been welcomed as a sympathizing 
friend in the homes of Indian women, and has had a view of 
12 



Digitized by 



Google 



90 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

their domestic life which no man could have. The Spaniard 
with his horse could not crirsh out the people whose social and 
ceremonial customs she describes, but before the popular notion 
that all Indians were roving, without settled homes or agriculture, 
is overcome the Anglo-Saxon with the steam engine will have 
obliterated them. The poor people of the little pueblo of Sia 
have been reduced to a paltry hundred, but Mrs. Stevenson has 
caught their story from the old people, and she publishes it 
while there is yet opportunity to cross-question a few of the per- 
sonal and material witnesses. The stories in which the animals 
take on human attributes illustrate the community of mental 
action in mankind. Esop's fables, Grimm's tales, Uncle Remus, 
and the Sia animal myths have much of a common quality. 

The last statement applies also to kindred stories told by 
Lucien M. Turner in a hundred pages devoted to ethnology of 
the Ungava district, Hudson Bay Territory. This paper is the 
plain story of the life of Indians and Eskimo adjacent to the 
northern part of Labrador, popularly supposed to be utter deso- 
lation. A few hundred of these people maintain themselves in 
such relative prosperity that the Hudson Bay Fur Company 
finds it profitable to keep a post among them. The life of Arctic 
people in the United States is so perverted that it is no longer a 
promising field for original studies. These Ungava people have 
been modified somewhat by trading with whites, but the general 
story of their present lives represents the power they have de- 
veloped in a severely adverse climate. They are not in such 
immediate danger of obliteration as the Sia, but Mr. Turner's 
work will grow more valuable for preservation as changes pre- 
vent its duplication. 

James Owen Dorsey is well known for his linguistic work, 
from which his two-hundred-page study of Siouian cults is but 
a partial variation. This paper is especially devoted to religious 
beliefs and ceremonials. 

All these authors have personal acquaintance with the people 
they describe and are witnesses of the things they have seen. 
The bibliographic lists of Messrs. Mallery and Dorsey are im- 
portant. 

The papers are profusely illustrated. In the interest of truth 
they are ready for the tests of candid criticism, which ought to 
be prompt that it in turn may be tested before the last witnesses 
disappear. James H. Blodgett. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] NOTES AND NEWS 91 



NOTB8 AND NEWS 

Tkcumseh's Name. — As to their origin, the personal names in 
use among the Shawnee or Shawano Indians are either nick- 
names, pet names, or totemic names. This class of names is 
very significative, for by their interpretation may be discovered 
the totemic clan to which the person bearing the name belongs. 
The number of Shawnee totem -clans is not very large, but of 
great interest, through the fact that they are all named after 
classes of animals, as '' round-footed,'* " hoofed " or " split-footed," 
" living in the air," " inhabiting the ground," and others. When 
a man is named " Tight-fitting " or " Good-fit," he is known to 
be of the clan of the rabbit, for the fur of that animal fits very 
closely. A woman called ** Foaming Water " will be found to 
belong to the turtle totem-clan, for when the turtle crosses the 
water bubbles arise around its pathway. 

The name of chief Tecumseh (in Shawnee Tekdmthi or Tkam- 
thi) is derived from nila ni tkanidthka, ** I cross the path or way " 
(of an animate being). By this is meant that the name belongs 
to a totem of one of the round-footed animals, as that of the 
raccoon, jaguar, panther, or wildcat, and not to the hoofed ones, 
as the deer. Tecumseh and his brothers belonged to the inaneiuid 
msirpessi or *' miraculous panther " totem ; 77m means great ; 
peshiwi, abbreviated pesai^ cat ; both terms combined signify the 
panther or mountain lion. 

Tecumseh 's name has been variously translated in former 
times as *' panther-lying-in-wait," " crouching lion," and " shoot- 
ing-star." All these only paraphrase the meaning, but do not ac- 
curately translate or interpret the name. The adjective manetutvi, 
when it qualifies the noun msi-pessi as an epithet, points to a 
miraculous, unaccountable, even transcendental existence, and 
the whole must be rendered by *' celestial lion," which is a meteor 
or shooting-star. The manetuwi msi-pessi lives in water only and 
is not visible as an animal, but only as a meteor, exceeding in 
size and brilliancy all the other shooting-stars. It was the to- 
temic emblem of a Shawnee clan, and the members of this clan, 
to which Tecumseh or Tkamthi belonged, were consequently 
classed as the descendants of a round- or claw-footed progenitor. 



Digitized by 



Google 



92 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

The quick motion of a meteor was evidently likened to that 
of a lion or wildcat springing upon its prey, and the yellow color 
of both may have made the comparison more efifective. All over 
America the natives suppose these celestial bodies to be the souls 
of the dead, and as they travel mainly in a westerly direction 
they are believed to return to their western abode. In the west 
lies the Pacific ocean ; therefore the tribes west of the Rocky 
mountains think the souls are returning to that great aquatic 
world. To all primitive peoples the home of the deceased lies 
in the west, for there set the celestial bodies which represent 
souls of departed ones. A. S. Gatschet. 



Tarahumari Runners. — These runners show a remarkable 
endurance. An Indian has been known to carry a letter from 
Guazapares to Chihuahua and back again in five days, the dis- 
tance being nearly eight hundred miles. In some parts where 
the Tarahumaris serve the Mexicans they are used to run in the 
wild horses, driving them into the corral. It may take them 
two or three days to do it, sleeping at night and living on a little 
pinole. They bring in the horses thoroughly exhausted, while 
they themselves are still fresh. They will outrun any horse if 
you give them time enough. They will pursue deer in the snow 
or with dogs in the rain for days and days, until at last the 
animal is cornered and shot with arrows or falls an easy prey 
from sheer exhaustion, its hoofs dropping off. — Tarahumari Life 
and Ciiatovfis, by Dr. Carl Lwnholtz, in the September Scribnei\ 



The Pal^ontographioal Society op Australasia ha>s just 
been organized " to collect, illustrate, and place on record ex- 
amples of all systems of old-time written characters, whetlier in 
the form of pictograms, symbolisms, or phonograms, as also 
representations of the various mnemonic aids to memory used 
by so many savage and barbarous peoples." Its work will em- 
brace all countries and all known systems of written language. 
The cooperation of ethnological and archeological institutions 
throughout the world is invited. Dr. A. Carroll, Kogarah, Syd- 
ney, N. S. W., or Mr. Elsdon Bert, Wellington, New Zealand, 
will furnish all information. F. W. Hodge, 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] NOTES AND NEWS 93 

Ethnography ob^ the Aran Islands. — Professor N. C. Had- 
don and Dr. C. R. Browne, of Dublin, have recently prepared 
for the Royal Irish Academy an exhaustive study of the Aran 
islands, intended as the first of a series of studies in Irish eth- 
nography. These islands, which lie in the mouth of Galway 
bay, about twenty-eight miles west of Galway harbor, are three 
barren masses of limestone rock, thickly strewn with large, ice- 
worn, erratic bowlders of granite and sandstone from Conne- 
mara. The total population is nearly 3,000. The inhabitants 
of an island do not marry outside of it ; consequently little new 
blood is introduced, and there is considerable facial resemblance 
among the natives. They are well made, of good stature, with 
gray or blue eyes, and usually dark-brown hair. The general 
facial type has been described as an exaggeration of the Gaelic. 
The authors made a large number of anthropometric measure- 
ments, which are given, together with typical photographs. The 
data thus collected lead them to dissent from the opinion that 
the Aranites are descendants of the Firbolgs, a small, swarthy, 
dark-haired people, held to be of Thracian origin. The chief 
antiquities of the islands are well known pre-Christian duns or 
forts. Cloghans or beehive stone huts are common. Primitive 
customs and beliefs abound. The skin of the seal is used as 
a preventive against gout and colic. The belief in the evil eye 
is almost universal. Stone anchors are still in use and querns 
have been employed until quite recently. — Geog, Jour., Lond., 
1894, P' 59, 



Mortuary Customs in New Hebrides. — In Malekula a sort of 
mummy is made, of which specimens were brought to the ship 
at Port Sandwich by a white trader, who had procured them in 
exchange for a rifle at the conclusion of a " sing-sing " in the 
neighborhood. They are said to be the effigies of the chief 
whose skull (the only portion retained of all his remains) forms 
the head. This is plastered with mud, to represent a living face, 
and a body of bamboo, twigs, and mud, highly colored in black, 
white, red, and purple stripes, fonns the figure. All ** mummies " 
seem to be decorated with a similar design, and it is possible 
that they represent the body as laid out for burial. A small 
one — perhaps personating a baby — has its head founded on a 



Digitized by 



Google 



94 THE AMEKICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

small cocoanut,and others have no body, but only a stick thrust 
into the hole through which the spinal cord passes. On each 
shoulder is moulded a highly conventional face, looking to right 
and left respectively, and in each hand is a pig's lower jaw with 
tushes. Smaller, highly conventional heads on sticks, with 
feathers stuck in where the ears should be, and ornamented with 
pigs' tushes, were also brought to us by the same trader, the 
'^ tambu " having been removed off them. We were given to 
understand that they were held in the hand while dancing. — 
SomervUle, in Jour, Anthrop. Inst. G, B. and Ird.^ xxiii, p, 892^ 1894, 



Poisoned Arrows op the Akas. — The Akas are one of the 
so-called Lohitic tribes of the Asam valley, occupying inde- 
pendent hill territory to the north of the Brahmaputra. They 
poison their arrows for warfare as well as for large game, and 
such arrows proved deadly to most of the Sepoys wounded by 
them in the expedition sent against the tribe some years ago. 
Several of the arrows were sent to me for examination while I 
was acting professor of chemistry at Calcutta some years ago. 
From its physiological effects the poison was evidently aconite, 
and the roots from which the poison was alleged to have been 
derived undoubtedly belonged to a species of Aconitum. The 
arrow-heads are mostly made of bamboo, but a few are of iron. 
The shafts are usually of bamboo. Some of the heads are made 
up of pieces dovetailed and tied together with cane in such a 
way that dragging on the arrow when it has reached its quarry 
only pulls out the stem, and the barbs separate more deeply 
into the wound. The surface of the heads are scored so as to 
form valvular crevices for the poisonous extract which is smeared 
over them. — Waddell in Jounud of the Anthropologlcid Institute , 
London, A iigust, 1894, P- ^7'. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] 



ANTHROPOLOGIC LITERATURE 



95 



A QUARTERLT BIBLIOaRAPH7 OF ANTHROPOLOQIC 
LITERATURE 

COMPILED BY ROBERT FLETCHER, M. D. 



Boas (Franz). The half-blood In- 
dian ; an anthropometric study. 
New York, 1894, D. Appleton, 
11pp. 8°. [/2eprMi//rom; Pop. 
Sc. Month.] 

Brine (Lindesay). Travels amongst 
the American Indians, their an- 
cient earthworks and temples, in- 
cluding a journey in Guatemala, 
Mexico, and Yucatan. New York, 
1894, C. Scribner's Sons, 16 + 
429 pp. 8**. 

Calderwood (H.) Evolution and 
man's place m nature. London, 
1894, Macmillan. 8°. 

Dallemagne ( J.) IMg6n^r6s et d^se- 
guilibr^s. BraxeTles, 1894, H. 
Lamertin, 667 pp. 8°. 

Dwight (T. ) Methods of estimat- 
ing the height from parts of the 
skeleton. New York, 1894, 16 pp. 
12°. [Reprint from : Med. Rec., 
N.Y.] 

Qori (Guglielmo) i Enrico Perabo. 
Studio sulPorecchio e Tudito nei 
criminali. Perugia, 1894, Bon- 
compagni, 46 pp. 8°. 

Haeckel (Ernest). Monoism as 
connecting religion and science ; 
translated by J. Gilchrist. New 
York, 1894, Macmillan & Co., 
117 pp. 16^ 

HoKar (Alfred). Der Geschlechts- 
trieb. Eine social medicinische 
Studie. Stuttgart, 1894, F. Enke, 
160 pp. 8^ 

Hirach (William). Genie und Ent- 
artung. Eine psychologische 
Studie. Mit einem Vorwort von 
E. Mendel. Berlin u. Leipzig, 
1894, O. Coblentz, 340 pp. 8°. 



Hodge (F. W. ) List of the publi- 
cations of the Bureau of Eth- 
nology, with index to authors and 
subjects. Washington, 1894, Gov't 
Print. Office, 1 p. 1., 25 pp. 8° 

Holmes (William Henry) . An an- 
cient quarry in Indian Territory. 
Washington, 1894, Gov't Print. 
Office, 19 pp., 12 pL 

KoUmann (J.) und Leop. Rtlti- 
meyer. Bericht uber die ethno- 
graphische Sammlung der Uni- 
versitat Basel. Nach dem Bestand 
im Jahr 1894. 1. Hfl. Basel & 
Leipzig, 1894, C. Sallmann, 44 
pp. 8^ 

Kurtz (Herm.) Adam u. die men- 
schliche Urheimath. Eine an- 
thropolog. Skizze. Hannover, 
1894, F. Rehtmeyer, 45 pp. 8°. 

Lebon (Louis) . De Th^r^dit^ de la 
long^vit^. Nancy, 1894, 56 pp. 
4°. 

Lombroso (Cesare). Neuere Fort- 
schritte in den Verbreoherstu- 
dien. Autorisierte Uebersetzung 
aus dem Italienischen von Hans 
Merian. Leipzig, 1894, W. Fried- 
rich, 488 pp., 2 pi. 8°. 

Lammis (C. F.) The man who mar- 
ried the moon, and other Pueblo 
Indian folk-stories. New York, 
1894, The Century Co., 8 + 239 pp. 
12°. 

Mallet (A.) La station pr^histo- 
rique d'Ygrande (AUier). Mou- 
lins, 1894, Auclaire, 12 pp. 8°. 

Mantegazza (Paul). Die Physio- 
logic der Wonne. Vollstiiridige 
deutsche Ausgabe iibersetzt von 
A. Wildung. Berlin u. Leipzig, 
1894, J. Guadenfeld & Co. , 536 pp. 
12°. 



Digitized by 



Google 



96 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



[Vol. VIII 



Mason (Otis Tuflon). Woman's 
share in primitive culture. New 
York, 1894, D. Appleton & Co. 
12°. 

M^gret (Adolphe). fetude de men- 
surations sur I'homme pr^his- 
torique. Antliropom<^trie. Men- 
surations d'un squelette pr6his- 
torique nouvellement d^couvert 
dans la grotte de Menton (dite 
Barma Grande) le 12 Janvier 1894. 
Nice, 1894, 16 pp., 2 pi. 8°. 

Meyer (G. ) La liberty et le d^^t^r- 
minisme dans leurs rapports avec 
la th^orie de revolution, fitude 
critique par. . . . Bruxelles, 
1894, H. Lamertin, 55 pp. 8°. 

Orchansky (Isaac). [Positivism 
and Comtism.] St. Petersburg, 
1894, S. Dobrodieff, 153 pp. 8°. 

Patten (Simon N. ) The failure of 
biologic sociology. [ Philadelphia, 
1894], 63-91 pp. 8°. 

Riggs (Stephen Return). Dakota 
grammar, texts, and ethnog- 
raphy; edited by James Owen 
Dorsey. Washington, 1893, Gov't 
Print. Office, xxxii, 1-239 pp. 4°. 
[Rep. Bur. Ethnol.] 

Sarol^a (Charles). La liberte et le 
d^terminisme dans leurs rappoiia 
avec la th^orie de revolution. 
Bruxelles, 1894, Weissenbruch, 
175 pp. 8°. 

Smith (Harlan I.) Caches of the 
Saginaw Valley,Michigan. [ Frojn: 
Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sc, xlii, 1894.] 
4 pp. 8°. 



Allen (H.) The changes which 
take place in the skull, coincident 
with shortening of the face-axis. 
Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc, Phila , 1894, 
181-183. — American versions of the 
ballad of the elfin knight. J. Am. 
Folk-Lore, Bost. & N. Y., 1894, vii, 
228-232.— Ardu Onnia (E. ) Crani 
umanie della " Magenta " del Museo 
d*anatomiacomparata della R. Uni- 
versittl di Torino. Arch, per I'an- 
trop., Firenze, 1894, xxiv, 47-69.— 
Aahmead lA. S.) Leprosy in 
America before the advent of the 



Spaniards and the negroes. J. Am. 
M. Ass., Chicago, 1894, xxiii, 847- 
849. — B ( A. ) Caserio devant la cour 
d'assises du Rh6ne. Arch, d'an- 
throp. crim., Lyon et Par., 1894, ix, 
568 587.— Bailey (E. H. S.) The 
delicacy of the sense of taste among 
Indians. [Abstr.] Proc. Am. Ass. 
Adv. Sc., 1893, Salem, 1894, xlii, 31 1. 
— BaU (M. V.) Vital statistics of 
the negro. Med. News, Phila., 1894, 
Ixv, 392.— Balzan (L.) Un po'piil 
di luce suUa distribuzione di alcune 
tribCl indij^ene della parte centrale 
deir America meridionale. Arch, 
per I'antrop., Firenze, 1894, xxiv, 
17-29, 1 map.- Batchelor (S. • The 
mimicrv of hereditv. New World, 
Bost., 1894, iii, 735^757.— Boal (R.) 
Emasculation and ovariotomy as a 
penalty for crime and the reforma- 
tion of criminals. Tr. Illinois M. 
Soc, Chicago, 1894, xliv, 5:^-543. — 
Boaa (F.) Notes on the Eskimo of 
Port Clarence, Alaska. J. Am. Folk- 
Lore, Bost. & N. Y., 1894, vii, 205- 
208.— Bolton (Henrietta I.) Curi- 
ous relics of English ftmerals. Ibid.f 
233-236.— Bordier (A.) Uh^r6dit^ ; 
m(5canisme; theories. Rev. mens, de 
r^cole d'anthrop. de Par., 1894, iv, 
313-328.— Brewer (W. H. ) The in- 
stinctive interest of children in bear 
and wolf stories. [Abstr.] Proc. 
Am. Ass. Adv. Sc, Siilem, 1894, xlii, 
309-31 1. -Brinton (D. G ) Varia- 
tions in the human skeleton and 
their causes. Am. Anthrop., Wash , 

1894, vii, 377-388. The 

" nation " as an element in anthro- 
pologv. Rep. Smithson. Inst., 1893, 
Wash., 181H, 589-600. -Bryce (J.) 
The migrations of the races of men 
considered historicallv. Ibid., 567- 
588. — Buckman ( S. S*. ) Babies and 
monkevs. Nineteenth Cent., N. 
York [Lond.], 1894, xxxvi, 727-743. 
Abo, Pop. Sc. Month., N. Y., 1894-5, 
xlvi, 37 1-388. -Carthaua (E. ) Die 
Karhof-IIohle im Honne-Thal, 
Weatfalen. Nachr. u. deutsche Al- 
terthumsf , Berl., 1894, v, 70-72.— 
Chamberlain (A. F.) A Kootenay 
legend : the coyote and the moun- 
tain-spirit. J. Am. Folk-Lore, Bo.st. 
& N. Y'., 1894, vii, 195.— Chapin (H. 
D.) A plan of infantile meiisure- 
ments. Med. Rec, N. Y., 18^H, 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] 



ANTHROPOLOGIC LITERATURE 



97 



xlvi,649-651.— Cole(P.McA.) New 
England funerals. J. Am. Folk- 
Lore, Best. & N. Y., 1894, vii, 217- 
223.— Crawley (A. E.) Sexual ta- 
boo : a study in the relations of the 
sexes. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond., 
1894-5, xxiv, 116 125.-Cri8Uani 
(A.) Le ernie ed il loro significato 
antropologico negli alienati di 
mente. Arch, di psichiat., etc., 
Torino, 1894, xv, 401-407.— Dana 
(C. L. ) On the new use of some 
older sciences ; being a discourse on 
degeneration and its stigmata. Med. 
Rec., N. Y., 1894, xlvi, 737-741.— 
Danielli [ I. ) Contributo alio studio 
del tatiiaggio negli antichi peru- 
viani. Arch, per Tan trop., Firenze, 
1894, xxiv, 105-115, 4 pi.— De Blaaio 
(A.) La letteratura e le belle arti 
nelle career! di Napoli. Arch, di 
psichiat., etc., Torino, 1894, xv, 346- 
358.— Delafoase. Note sur une 
figure du Dahom^ repr^sentant une 
femme enceinte, Anthropologie, 
Par., 1894, v, 571-575.— Del Oreco 
(F. ) n delinquente paranoico omi- 
ciida. Scuola positiva, Roma, 1894, 
iv, 248-269.— faieseldorff (E. P.) 
Ueber ein beraaltes Thongefass mit 
figurlichen Darstellungen aus einem 
Grabe von Chamd. Verhandl. d. 
Berl. anthrop. Gesellsch., Berl., 1894, 
xxvi, 372-377, 1 pi. — Diettrich 
(G.) L' enfant criminel-n^; ^tude 
sur la criminality et les principales 
manjues qui distinguent I'enfant 
criminel de Fenfant normal, <5tudi6 
sur nn enfant de 10 ans en particu- 
lier (criminel-n^, fou moral). Cen- 
tral bl. f. Nervenh. u. Psvchiat. Cob- 
lenz & Leipz., 1894, n.' F., v, 579- 
584, 1 diag.— Donath (J.) Die 
phvflische Degeneration der Be- 
vOfkerung in den modernen Cultur- 
staaten mit besonderer Rucksicht 
auf Oesterreich-Ungarn. VVien. 
med. BL, 1894, xvii, 537.— Dorsey 
(J. O.) The Biloxi Indians of Louis- 
iana. Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sc., 1893, 
Salem, 1894, xlii, 267-287.— Dwight 
(T.) Statistics of variations, with 
remarks on the use of this method 
in anthropology. Anat. Anz., Jena, 
1894, X, 209-215. -BlUs (A. B.) On 
the origin of weeks and sabbaths. 
Pop. Sc. Month., N. Y., 1894-5, xlvi, 
329-343.— Emery (C.) Gedanken 

13 



zur Descendenz-und Vererbungs- 
theorie. Biol. Centralbl.. I^eipz., 
1894, xiv, 721-726.— BspArandleu 
(l6. ) Note sur un cachet anonyme 
de m^decin-oculist romain. Mar- 
seille m^d., 1894, xxxi, 667-677.— 
P6r6(C.) L'h^i^it^morbide. Rev. 
d. deux mondes. Par., 1894, cxxvi, 
436-452.— Pewkes (J. W.) The 
kinship of the Tusayan villagers. 
Am. Anthrop,, Wash., 1894, vii, 394- 
41 7. -Fiedler. Das Griiberfeld bei 
Gollschau, Kreis Goldberg-Hay nau, 
Schlesien. Nachr. u. deuteche Al- 
terthumsf., Berl., 1894, v, 65-67.— 
Qaxbini (A.) Evoluzione del senso 
cromatico nella in&nzio (da esperi- 
enze fette sopra 600 bambini negli 
anni 1891-92-93). Arch, per Tan- 
trop., Firenze. 1894, xxiv, 71-98.— 
OigUoU (E. H. ) L*EtA della pietra 
neir Australasia e specialmente 
nella Nuova Zelanda. Ibid., 99-103. 
— 05tze ( A . ) Neue Ausgrabungen 
in Hissarlik. Verhandl. d. Berl. 
anthrop. Gesellsch., BerL, 1894, 
xxvi, 317-319.— Gk>tt«er (J.) Psv- 
chologie de T anarch iste. Arch, 
d'anthrop. crim., Lyon et Par., 
1894, ix, 605-639. — Oradenigo. 
Normales Ohr. Internat. med.-phot. 
Monatschr., Leipz., 1894, i, 260.— 
arinnell (G. B. ) A Pawnee star 
myth. J. Am. Folk-Lore, Bost. & 
N. Y., 1894, vii, 197-200.— Haacke 
(W.) Die Vererbung erworbener 
Eigenschaften. Biol. Centralbl., 

Leipz., 1894, xiv, 513-543. 

Die Formenphilosophie von Hans 
Driesch und das Wesen des Orea- 
nismus. Ibid., 626 ; 666 ; 697.— aa- 
berlandt (M.) Die Eingeborenen 
der Kapsulan-Ebene von Formosa. 
Mitth. d. anthrop. Gesellsch. in 
Wien, 1894, n. F., xiv, 184-193.— 
Hallez (T.) Les mines monumen- 
tales de T Afrique Australe. Rev. d. 
deux mondes, Par., 1894, ex xv, 665- 
680.— HamUton (F. C.) Two Al- 
gonquin legends. J. Am. Folk-Lore, 
Bost. & N. Y., 1894, vii, 201-204.— 
Hamy(E.T.) Les imitateurs d'Al- 
exander Brunias, John Milton, 
Pierre Fr^ret, M.-L.-A. Boizot (1788- 
1794). Anthropologie, Par, 1894, v, 
542-553. — HeierU (J. ) Ein hel veto- 
alamannisches Griiberfeld in Zurich 
III. Verhandl. d. Berl. anthrop. 



Digitized by 



Google 



98 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



[Vol. VIII 



Geeell8ch., Berl., 1894, xxvi, 339- 
347.— Heitzman (C.) Identity of 
structure of protoplasm with that 
of striped muscle. [Abstr.] Proc. 
Ass. Am. Anat., Wash., 1894. vi,30- 
32.— Hoernea ( M. ) Ausgrabung auf 
dem Castellier von Villanova am 
Quieto. Mitth. d. anthrop. Ge- 
sellsch. in Wien, 1894, n. F., xiv, 
155-18:^.— Hoflfman (F. L.) Vital 
statistics of the negro. Med. News, 
J»hila.. 1894, Ixv, 320-324.— Holmes 
(B.) The sources of the defective, 
dependent and delinquent classes. 
Bull. Am. Acad. M., Easton, Pa., 

1894, 502-572. A study of 

child growth ; being a review of 
the work of Dr. William Town- 
send Porter, of St. Louis. N. York 
M. J., 1894, Ix, 417-423.— Holmea 
(VV. H.) Order of development of 
the primal shaping arts. Proc. 
Am. Ass. Adv. Sc, Salem, 1894, 
xlii, 289-300.— Jacob (G.) Vorge- 
schichtliche Wiille und Wohnplatze 
in den frankischen Gebiets theilen, 
der Herzogthiimer Sachsen-Mei- 
ningen und Coburg. Arch, f An- 
throp., Brnschwg., 1 894, xxiii, 77-95. 
-^acoby ( A,) Ueber das Erloschen 
der Naturvolker des hohen Nordens 
(anthropologische Studie). Ibid., 
1-19.— aacoby (M.) Ein Beitrag 
zur Kenntniss des menschlichen 
Primordialcraniums. Arch. f. mikr. 
Anat., Bonn, 1894, xliv, 61-86, 
1 pi. — Janea (L. G.) Ethics in 
natural law. Pop. Sc. Month., 
N. Y., 1894-5, xlvi, 322-329.— 
Kiahimoto (N.) Shinto, the old 
religion of Japan. Ibid. , 206-216.— 
Kniazeff (V. N.) Chvostat-tsche- 
loviek (homo caudatus). Vrach, 
St. Petersb., 1894, xv, 903. -Koll- 
mann (J.) Pygmiien in Europa. 
Verhandl. d. anat. Gesellsch., Jena, 

1894, viii, 206-216. Das 

Schweizersbild bei SchafFhausen 
und Pygmiien in Europa. Ztschr. 
f. Ethnol., Berl., 1894, xxvi, 189- 
254, 1 pi.— Lagneau (G.) Consan- 
guinite; herodit(^' morbide. Bull. 
Acad, de med.. Par., 1894, 3. s., 
xxxii, 282-285.— Lehmann-Pilh6a 
(M.) Ueber den Thorshammer. 
Verhandl. d. Berl. anthrop. Ge- 
sellsch., Berl., 1894, xxvi, 319-321. 
— Leiner (L.J Bildnereien und 



Symbole in den Pfahn)auten des 
Bodenseegebietes. Arch. f. An- 
throp., Brnschwg., 1894-5, xxiii, 
181.— Livi (R.) Sullo sviluppo del 
dente del giudizio. Atti d. Soc. 
rom. di antrop., Roma, 1893-4, i, 
159-165, 1 diag.— Lockyer (J. N.) 
The early temple and pyramid 
builders. Rep. Smithson. Inst. 

1893, Wash., 1894, 95-105.— Lum- 
holtz (C. ) Tarahumari dances and 
plant- worship. Scribner's Mag., 

1894, xvi, 438-450.— Luys (J.) La 
foule criminelle. Ann. de psychiat. 
et d'hypnol.. Par., 1894, n. s., iv, 
289-2^)7.— M. (A.) Notizen iiber 
Madagaskar. Deutsche Rundschau, 
Berl., 1894, xxi, 455-458. -McOee 
(W J) The citizen. Am. An- 
throp., Wash., 1894, vii, 352-357.— 
McGuire (J. D.) The develop- 
ment of sculpture. Ibid., 358- 
366. — Maaas. Die sogenannte 
Puppenfee Helene Giibler. Ver- 
handl. d. Berl. anthrop. Gesellsch., 
Berl., 1894, xxvi, 3(H.— Magitot 
(L.) et L. Manonvrier. Notes 
pour servir H la determination de 
I'flge probable d'un squelette ex- 
huin^ le 5 juillet 1894, au cimeti^re 
Sainte-Mar^nerite, il Paris et attri- 
bu^ a Louis XVII. x\rch. d*an- 
throp. crim., Lyon et Par., 1894, ix, 
597-604.— Mahoudeau (P.-G.) Lea 
caracteres humains des primates 
Eocenes. Rev. mens, de I'Ecole 
d'anthrop. de Par., 1894, iv, 345- 
355.— Maaon (O. T.) North Amer- 
ican bows, arrows, and quivers. 
Rep. Smithson. Inst. 1893, Wash., 
1894, 6:n-679, 58 pi.— Matthews 
(W.) Songs of se(iuence of the 
Navajos. J. Am. F()lk-Ix»re, Bost. 
& N. Y., 1894, vii, 185-194.— Man- 
Claire (P.) et Boia. Ectrodactylie 
et syndactylie ; mains et pied 
fourchus. Bull. Soc. d'anthrop. de 
Par., 1894, 4. s., v, 123-158.- Ma- 
zegger. Neue lii'nnerfunde in Mais, 
Tirol. Nachr. ii. deutsche Alter- 
thumsf., Berl., 1894, v^ 76-78.— 
Mehlia (C.) Archaologisches aus 
den Mittelrheinlanden. Arch. f. 
Anthrop., Brnschwg., 1894-5, xxiii, 
183-187.— Mercer (II. C.) Another 
ancient source of jasi)er blade ma- 
terial east of the middle Allegha- 
nies. [Abstr.] Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Jan. 1895] 



ANTHROPOLOGIC LITKRATURE 



99 



Sc, Salem, 1894, xlii, 307. 

The result of excavations at the 
ancient argillite quarries, recently 
discovered neartlie Delaware river 
on Uaddis run. Ibidj 304-307.— 
Mestorf (J.) Tor8l)erger Silber- 
helin. Verhandh d. Ben. anthrop. 
Gesellsch., Berl., 1894, xxvi 315- 
317. — Mikhailovskii (V. M.) 
Shamanism in Siberia and Euro- 
pean Russia, being the second part 
of Shamanstvo. [Transl.] J. An- 
throp. Inst., Lond., 1894-0, xxiv, 
62; 126.— MillikiniM.) Emascu- 
lation and ovariotomy. J. Am. M. 
Ass., Chicago, 1894, xxili; 475. — 
MontefuBCo (A.) I matrimonii 
consanguinei. Gior. dimed. pubb., 
Napoli, 1 894, xxv,15-23.— Moachen 
(L.) La statura dei Trentini com- 
frontata con qnella dei Tirolesi e 
degli Italiani delle Provincie Ve 
nete, Lombarde e Piemontesi. Atti 
d. Soc. rom. di anthrop., Roma, 

1893, i, 77-84.— Murfree (J. B.) 
What IS life? Nashville J. M. & 
S., 1894,lxxvi, 151-158.— Myrdacz. 
Ueber die geographische Verbrei- 
tung einiger Korpergebrechen in 
Oesterreich-Ungarn. VVien. klin. 
Wchnschr., 1894, vii, 888-891.— 
Neave (J. L.) An agency doctor's 
exi)erience8 among frontier In- 
dians. Cincin. M. J. , 1894, ix, 875- 
881. — Newcomb (S.) The ele- 
ments which make up the most 
useful citizen of the United States. 
Am. Anthrop., Wash., 1894, vii, 
345-35 1 . — Niederle { L. ) Bemer- 
kungen zueinigen Charakteristiken 
der altslavischen (iraber. Mittli. 
d. anthrop. (lesellsch. in Wien, 

1894, n. F., xiv, 194-209.— Notes 
on the aborigines of Australia. J. 
Anthrop. Inst., Lond., 1894-5, xxiv, 
158-198. — Orkhanaky (J.) Re- 
cherches sur I'origine des sexes et 
rii^r^dit^ : conclusions gil^n^rales. 
Arch, di psichiat., etc., Torino, 1894, 
XV, 445-451.— Ottolenghi (S.) Ija 
sensibilitA in rapporto all' eti\. Atti 
di r. Accad. d. fisiocrit. in Siena, 
1894, 4.S.. vi, 543-549.— Pastor (R.) 
El microbio como elomento funda- 
mental del Cosmos en sus relaciones 
con el hombre. Cr6n. m^nl. Valen- 
cia, 1894, xvii, 37; 105; 169; 262; 
3()6 ; 417.— Penta (P.) Pazzi e de- 



linquenti. Scuola positiva, Roma, 
1894, iv, 48l-4i)0.-P6rez (J.) Pro- 
toplasme et noyau. Mem. Soc. d. 
sc. phys. et nat. de Bordeaux, 1894, 
4. s.,iv, 277-305.— Piette(E.) Sur 
de nouvelles figurines humaines 
d'i voire, provenant de la station 
quaternaire de Brassempouy. 
Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc, Par., 
1894, cxix, 927-929.— Prando (P. P.) 
The medicine-men among the Crow 
Indians. Boston M. & S. J,, 1894, 
cxxxi, 483-485.— Putnam (Helen 
C.) Physical training as a reform- 
ative agent. Food, N. Y., 1894-5, 
V, 19r>-202. AUo, Bull. Am. Acad. 
M., Easton, Pa., 1894, 626-f).35.— 
Ray (S. H.) The languages of Brit> 
ish New Guinea. J. Anthrop. Inst., 
Lond., 1894-5, xxiv, 15-39, 1 map. 
— Reid (R. W.) Exhibition and 
description of the skull of a micro- 
cephalic Hindu. Ihld., 105-108, 2 
pi.— Reinach (S.) Le congres de 
Sarajevo. Anthropologic, Par., 1894, 
V, 554-570.— Roasi (U.) Contri- 
buto air antropologia del sordomu- 
tismo. Boll. d. mal. d. orecchio. 
d. gola e d. naso, Firenze, 1894, xii, 
198-201. Also, Atti d. r. Accad. d. 
fisiocrit. in Siena, 1894, 4. s., vi, 
551-554, 3 pl.-Saville (M. H.) The 
ceremonial year of the Maya Codex 
Cortesianus. Am. Anthrop., Wash., 
1894, vii, 373-376. A com- 
parative study ef the graven glyphs 
of Copan and Quiriunia. J. Am. 
Folk-Lore, Bost. & N. Y., 1894, vii, 
237-247.— Schmidt (E.) Die vorge- 
schichtlichen Indianer Nordameri- 
kas. Arch. f. Anthrop., Brnschwg., 
1894, xxiii, 21-76. — Schumann. 
Ueber die Beziehungen des Liiugen- 
breitenindex zum Liiugenhohenin- 
dex an altslavischen Gniberschii- 
deln. Verhandl. d. Berl. anthrop. 
Gesellsch., Berl., 1894, xxvi, 330- 

336. Skeletgriiber mit ri'y- 

mischen Beigaben von Redel \>e\ 
Polzin (Pommern). Nachr. u. 
deutsch. Alterthumsf., Berl., 1894, 
V, 67-70. - Schwalbe (G. ) Uelmr 
einige Probleme der pliysischen 
Anthropologic. In : Stiftungsf. d. 
K. Wilh. Univ. Strassb., 8°, 1893, 
13-38.— Senf (F.) Kopfknochen- 
fund in germanisdiem Brandgrabe. 
Arch. f. Anthrop., Brnschwg., 1894, 



Digitized by 



Google 



100 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



[Vol. VIII 



xxiii, 171-179.— Shrubsole (0. A.) 
On flint implements of a primitive 
type from old (pre-glacial ) h ill-grav- 
els in Berkshire. J. Anthrop. Inst., 
Lond., 1894-5, xxiv, 44-49, 1 pi.— 
SisBon (E. O.) Heredity and evo- 
lution as they should be viewed by 
the medical profession. Med. Rev., 
St. Louis, 1894, xxx, 304-308.— 
Smith ( W.) The teeth of ten Sioux 
Indians. J. Anthrop. Inst, Lond., 
1894-5, xxiv, 109-116, 2 pi.— Sny- 
der (J. F.) Buried deposits of horn- 
stone disks. [Abstr.] Proc. Am. 
Ass. Adv. Sc, Salem, 1894, xlii, 318- 
324.— Solger. Ueber ein brachy- 
cephales Schadel - Fragment, bei 
Daberkow. Verhandl. d. Berl. an- 
throp. Gesellsch., Berl., 1894, xxvi, 
370.— SpUeth (W.) Ausgrabun- 
gen im Nydam-Moor, Schleswig. 
Naohr. ii. deutsche Alterthumsf., 
Berl., 1894, v, 78-80.— Stevens (H. 
V. ) Die Zaubermuster der Orang- 
hiitan, bearbeitet von Albert Griin- 
wedel. Ztschr. f. Ethnol., Berl., 
1894, xxvi, 141-188, 2 pi.— Talbot 
(E. S.) Stigmata of degeneracy in 
the aristocracy and regicides.' J. 
Am. M. Ass., Chicago, 1894, xxiii, 
710-716.— Tenchini (L. ) SuU' in- 
dice ilio-pelvico (Ser^i) dei crimi- 
nali. Arch, di psichiat., etc., To- 
rino, 1894, XV, 359-362.— Thomp- 
son (Ellen P.) Folk-lore from Ire- 
land. J. Am. Folk-Lore, Bost. & 
N. Y., 1894, vii, 224-227,— Tooker 
(W. W.) On the meaning of the 
name Anacostia. Am. Anthrop., 
Wash., 1894, vii, 389-393.— Treichel 
(A.) Die Schwedenschanzen bei 
Zedlin, Kr. Stolp, Pommem. Nachr. 
ii. deutsche Alterthumsf., Berl., 
1894, v, 72-76.— Tschisch (V. F.) 
[Sketch of an essay on criminal an- 
thropology.] Arch, psichiat., etc., 
Charkoff, 1894, xxiv, 96-109.— Ty lor 
(E. B. ) Stone age basis for oriental 
study. Rep. Smithson. Inst. 1893, 
Wash., 1894, 701-708.— Valentin! 
(P. J. J.) Humboldt's Aztec paint- 
ings. Cosmopolitan, N. Y., 1894-5, 
x^ii, 331-339.— Vinogradoflf (K. 
N.) [On tailed men.] Vrach, 
St. Petersb., 1894, xv, 901-903.— 



Virchow (R.) Kelt oder Celt oder 
keines von beiden. Verhandl. d. 
Berl. anthrop. Gesellsch., Berl., 

1894, xxvi, 351-354. Haar 

und Schadel von Blandass Sinnoi 
(Malacca) und den Schadel eines 
Sel6n (Mergui-Archipel.). J^?Vi.,354- 
364.— V oik (E.) Observations on 
the use of argillite by prehistoric 
people in the Delaware valley. 
[Abstr.] Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sc., 
Salem, 1894, xlii, 312-317.— Volz 
(W.) Beitrage zur Anthropologic 
der Siidsee. Arch. f. Anthrop., 
Brnschwg., 1894, xxiii, 97-169.— 
'Waddell (L. A.) The Tibetan 
house-demon. J. Anthrop. Inst., 

Lond., 1894-5, xxiv, 39-41. 

Some ancient Indian charms, from 
the Tibetan. Ibid., 41-44, 1 pi. 
Note on the poisoned ar- 
rows of the Akas. Ilrid.y 57, 1 pi. — 
Wake (C. S.) Indian migration^. 
[Abstr.] Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sc, 
Salem, 1894, xlii, 324-330.— Wal- 
deyer. Ein voUstiindig erhalte- 
ner Dayak-Schadel. Verhandl. d. 
Berl. anthrop. Gesellsch., Berl., 
1894, xxvi, 383. —Wassell (W. H.) 
The religion of the Sioux. Har- 
per's Mag., N.Y., 1894, Ixxxix, 945- 
952.— Weir (J.) An example of 

Esychic atavism. J. Nerv. & Ment. 
Us., N. Y., 1894, xxi, 617-626.— 
Weir (J.) Jr. Is it the beginning 
of the end? Med. Rec, N. Y., 
1894, xlvi, 801-804. —Wickham 
(H. A.) Notes on the Soumoo 
or Woolwa Indians of Blewfields 
River, Mosquito Territory. J. An- 
throp. Inst., Lond., 1894-5, xxiv, 
198-208.— 'Wirth (A.) The tele of 
the king's daughter in the besieged 
town. Am. Anthrop., Wash., 1894, 
vii, 367-372.— Zoja (G.) Sopra 
quattro cranii e cervelli di persone 
nonagenarie e centenarie. Boll, 
scient., Pavia, 1893, xv, 97; 1894, 
xvi, 1 ; 33.— Zuccarelll (A.) Osser- 
vazioni intorno alia frequenza di 
dati degenerativi somatici in rap- 
porto con la condotta in alunni di 
scuole secondarie di Napoli (I* cen- 
turia). N. riv. di psichiat., etc., 
Napoli, 1894, ii, 19-21. 



Digitized by 



Google 



THE 

American Anthropologist 

Vol. VIIT WASHINGTON, D. C, APRIL, 1895 No. 2 

SIMILARITIES IN CULTURE 

BY OTIS TUFTON MASON * 

The subject of my address is '* Similarities in Culture," at the 
present time an important and perplexing question in ethnology. 
Let me state what is commonly meant by similarities in culture. 

Among peoples far removed from one another geographically 
and often belonging to different types of mankind there are 
found words, art products, industries, social structures and cus- 
toms, folk-tales, beliefs and divinities, and even literatures ap- 
parently so much alike as to raise the following questions in 
different minds : 

First Theory, — Are peoples identical or akin when their activ- 
ities and productions are alike; or can it be said that these like- 
nesses were derived from common ancestors ? In the case of the 
Aryan languages you will say yes. But may one employ this 
notion or concept of kinship and ancestry to account for likeness 
in custom, industry, fine art, government or myth, or in lan- 
guages generally ? Can the premise be laid down that, when 
two peoples are alike in their industries, customs, and laws they 
are connected by blood or at least by nationality ? To state the 
problem a liltle differently, to what extent must two distant 
peoples resemble each other in the characteristics just named in 
order to make it certain that they are near akin ? Nothing is 
more common than assertions by professed archeologists, eth- 
nologists, historians, and especially by linguists, that peoples are 

• Address of the retiring President before the Anthropological Society of Washing- 
ton, February 4, 1895. 

14 (101) 



Digitized by 



Google 



102 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

the same because certain presumed similarities are alleged to 
exist between them. Later on it will be necessary to examine 
this theory to ascertain what standing it may have in the study 
of culture. It is sufficient here to state the propositions that 
many peoples have been declared to be the same by reason of 
language or activity, and that when peoples are akin their speech 
and acts will be alike. 

Second Theory, — Or can it be that the occurrence of the same 
processes or productions among peoples widely separated may 
have been derived from contact or common teachers ? There are 
a multitude of ways in which this might happen. You know 
that before there was a beast of burden humanity had found 
its way over the earth on foot, and that in the simplest craft, 
without compass and with only Nature's pilots, every water had 
been traversed and every habitable island in all the seas had 
been discovered and settled. It is a long journey from the sup- 
posed cradle land of our species to Tierra del Fuego ; but it had 
been successfully accomplished in prehistoric times. 

Similar devices find their way about the world nowadays, and 
this has been true so far back as records exist : 

a. By commerce, trading from hand to hand, the authors or 
manufacturers remaining at home. Innumerable examples of 
this are forthcoming and long distances have been passed over 
by objects. In their new abode they have quickened the minds 
of inventive geniuses and started new wants and series of 
devices in the native industrial life. The practical museum 
curator will readily recognize this class of similarities. I myself 
have seen cocoanuts and Chinese coins in Alaska, Eskimo fish- 
hooks in Hawaii, and Venetian beads from every corner of the 
world. 

b. Itinerants and peddlers and tramps have marched about 
the world ever, and men and women have been enslaved and 
wrecked. These have transported things and ideas and words. 
They have set up a kind of internationalism from place to 
place. We read often that these middle men and women had, 
even among savages, intertribal amnesty. This kind of aborigi- 
nal pedagogy has been found in active operation among savage 
tribes in historic times. It is a fair question, then, how far 
backward in time this globe- tramping extended and what in- 
fluences the wanderers exerted. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] SIMILARITIES IN CULTURE 103 

Bandelier * says : 

Although languages and dialects were separated from one another by 
uninhabited res:ions, prisoners of war could tell of what was going on at 
their homes ; the booty would include a variety of strange objects ; and 
traders traversed the country in the face of numerous dangers, visited the 
enemy's markete, and carried goods to them, with many novelties. This 
process was repeated from tribe to tribe ; and in that w^ay the products of 
one half of the continent passed, often in single objects, to the other lialf, 
and with them accounts of far-off regions, though changed and distorted 
by time and distance, into remote quarters. 

c. Migratory bands and whole colonies have ever been on the 
the go. A distinguished ethnologist has said that ** early man 
was scattered over all the earth in kinship tribes, each one knit 
together by bonds of kindred blood and cords of marriage ties'^f 
This being true when the facilities of locomotion were rudest, 
the movements have grown more vigorous as the appliances 
were made better, until the idea of universal dominion was con- 
ceived. Peschel says that " all peoples were capable of accom- 
plishing the migrations which we have ascribed to them. The 
difficulty generally exists only in the imagination of the spoilt 
children of civilization." J 

Third Theonj, — The last theory to be noted here is this : Can it 
be argued that like activities may spring from a common human- 
ity, in similar environments and culture stages, under similar 
wants and stress ? This takes for granted the monogenist s doc- 
trine that the inhabitants of the earth were originally of one 
blood. There is no doubt of the profound effects and influences 
of the earth, the waters, and the air upon mankind. They pro- 
duce all that is natural in man, and they provoke and suggest 
also a large measure of his artificial or progressive life. § 

Three Schools. — Now, to remove all mystery and to make the 
question as perspicuous as possible, there seem to be three some- 
what opposing schools of belief regarding the origin of culture 
similarities. They may be called : 

♦ A. F. Bandelier: The Gilded Man, N. Y., 1893, p. 7. 

t Powell : Science, N. Y., 1896, n. e., i, p. 16. 

X Races of Man, N. Y., 1876, p. 31. 

{Consult Franz Heger, Mittheil. Anthrop. Gesellsch., Wien, xziii, May 3, 1893: Hat 
die von einander unabh&ngige Erfindung gleicher oder ahnlicher Oer&the und, wenn 
wir die Frage auf das geistige Qebiet ausdehnen, das Vorkommen gleicher Ideen und 
Vorstelhingen, auch einen Qrund in der Rasseneinheit oder nicht ? Also Brackenridge, 
Louisiana, 1814, p. 189. 



Digitized by 



Google 



104 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

1. The ethnographic school. 

2. The accultural school. 

3. The anthropologic school. 

At any rate, whether we employ connotive names or not, the 
first holds that similarities argue identity of peoples or blood ; 
the second contends that like industries arise by reason of the 
same teachers ; a third believes that similarities spring from the 
species, the want, the environs, and the nature of things and of 
mind. 

how Similarities are Effected, — In the presence of confusing 
theories it would be most satisfactory if one or more undisputed 
propositions could be found in this connection. The following 
will probably meet with universal assent : 

1. Similarities are in our day known to be effected by the same 
person, tool, or workshop.* 

2. Others are surely produced through hereditary and tradi- 
tional teaching. 

3. Some come by borrowing, lending, slavery, and conquest. 

4. They get about the world by barter and commerce. 

6. They arise through like psychical and physical attributes 
of race or species. 

6. They spring from similar attributes of environment acting 
on different races and on the homogeneous qualities of human 
nature.t 

7. Startling similarities occur accidentally, as the Greek pota- 
mos and the Algonkian Potomac. 

•There are in Japan typical localities, schools, and families wherein pottery of such 
peculiar paste, form, decoration, etc., is so marked that Professor Morse can distin- 
guish them not only from all other examples in the world beside, but by name firom one 
another. If he were to see a piece of any of these types in the remotest comer of the 
earth he would not say that any people similarly environed would make precisely the 
same things. He would say, " How did this Bairin or Odo, or what-not, get here.** 

t Major Powell says of the scattered first men : "There can be but one kind of mind. 
Two and two are four with every people ; the moon is round, gibbous or crescent 
wherever it shines for man ; the sun shines in every eye ; the child grows in every ex- 
perience. Thus the four great mental activities of number, form, cause, and becoming 
are the same in every land, and the mind of every man is a unity of these four 
powers, and every mind is like every other mind in their possession. They differ only 
In extent of experience acquired directly by self or indirectly from others. While the 
mind is the same with all men the will is the same. All desire to gain good and to 
avoid evil, so all wills develop on a common plan. By mind and will, by mentality and 
volition, man progresses on the five highways of life, so that all men are impelled to the 
same goal of wisdom. Pursuit of the common end has proved to be more powerful in 
producing involution than the forces of environment in producing differentiation or 
classific evolution."— Science, N. Y., 1896, n. «., i, p. 17. Also McCulloh, Res. on America, 
Bait, 1817, p. 188, quoting Gibbon, Decline, etc. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 18951 SIMILARITIES IN CULTURE 105 

8. Finally, there are like results that spring from opposite 
causes or occasions, as the building of a subterraneous house in 
one region to dispel the heat, in another to keep out the cold. 

Every one of these propositions is true under certain condi- 
tions ; they are true each under its own conditions, and that 
leads to the next argument. 

Species of Similarities. — In point of fact, then, there are different 
grades, classes, species of similarities in human culture. A Moki 
rabbit club is like an Australian boomerang and an Egyptian 
throwing club in a limited number of respects, but coins from 
the same issue and die are alike in a greater number and in dif- 
ferent degrees of respects. Some similarities therefore are to be 
accredited to one series of causes, others to a different series, all 
having unlike significance. 

Supposing it could be shown that there are distinct varieties 
of similarities, as well as distinct ways of accounting for them, 
then, when one has diagnosed his specimens correctly (and that 
is always his scientific duty), he may predicate the true theory 
of their production. Those similarities that belong to the first 
class and are effected by the same arrow-maker, potter, painter, 
architect, die, inventor, or author are certainly more near to 
identity and are more profound than those produced by — 

1. Different men or factories, even in the same group or com- 
munity. 

2. Different communities of the self-same family of peoples. 

3. Different stocks or families of the same race. 

4. Different historic periods of the same people. 

5. Different environmenta or. geographic areas or sources of 
supply. 

6. The human species in comparison with natural forces or 
other living species. 

Or, fixing the attention on two peoples under consideration, 
the question of similarity between them might run a gamut like 
the following : 

1. Casual resemblance in one or more respects. 

2. Similarity in one object or custom. 

3. Similarity in one process or activity. 

4. Similarity in several activities. 

5. Similarity in many industries. 

6. Similarity in language. 



Digitized by 



Google 



106 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

7. Similarity in social structure. 

8. Similarity in beliefs or religion. 

9. Similarity in practically all respects. 
10. Identities. 

Definition of the Term ** Similarity. ^^ — It is absolutely essential 
that the technographer, the artist, the linguist, the sociologist, 
the mythologist, each and all lay down a comprehensive and 
clear definition of the term *^ similarity in culture " that will 
enable one to use it advisedly. I imagine they would speak 
somewhat as follows : 

1. All devices of man involve the question of natural material, 
resources, unit;3 and elements out of which they are effected, " ex 
qua aliquid fity 

2. Involve differences in the formal cause, the motif or mental 
substratum of the action or thing, the patterns in the mind of 
the agent, ^'"per quam aliquid fit.^^ 

3. All inventions are produced by their own efficient causes, 
'* a qua aliquid fit,^^ This would comprehend all the tools, natural 
forces, metrics, mechanical powers and engineering involved, 
together with their processes, artificialities, and order of working. 

4. All devices of man involve the question of functioning or 
differences in the final cause, ^^ propter quam aliquid fit,'^' In the 
inventions of mankind every one is both an end in itself and a 
means to a multitude of other ends. This topic therefore in- 
cludes everything that an invention is and may become. These 
are the categories of Aristotle involved in all that men do. 
Perfect agreement in all of them is perfect similarity, partial 
agreement is partial similarity and may exist in a variety of 
degrees. 

Or perhaps it would be more in accordance with modern 
thinking to adopt the phraseology of the naturalist. He first 
investigates the perceptible attributes, the structures, and the 
functions of the adult organism by means of the most refined 
instruments; he studies the biography of each individual from 
germ to decay ; and, lastly, he attempts to find out how his 
species stands related to other species. In arranging these he 
endeavors to read the mind of nature, substituting homological 
agreements for analogical agreements. In point of fact both 
analogies and homologies are constantly held in mind. 

The ethnologist is bound to apply rigidly this natural-history 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] SIMILARITIES IN CULTURE 107 

method to the study of human activities. lie must scrutinize 
carefully the material and the structure of two industrial achieve- 
ments, of two esthetic productions, of two languages, of two 
social systems, of two religions, to ascertain how they are com- 
posed. In biological phrase, he must examine the structure and 
ontogeny of each specimen with a view to determine the ques- 
tion of philogeny between them. This gives ample scope to 
separate one kind of similarity from another and to tabulate the 
result in columns of likenesses and differences. 

Finally, besides the Aristotelian and natural-history methods 
of discrimination, there are, associated with all of man's activities, 
by-ways, by-fashions, tricks of the trade, and trade-marks non- 
essential to structure or function, and there are folk-fashions 
around every industry that help to brand its author's identity 
upon it. The cooperation of all these cannot exist in areas wide 
apart. When two phenomena or objects agree in all these re- 
spects they came from the same shop or the same author. The 
source is identical. There is no mistake about it, even though 
examples may be found in several parts of the world. 

Axioms, — From the particular propositions and from charac- 
teristics of similarities, just explained, the following axioms may 
be stated : 

1. In ethnology, the more that the same arts, languages, insti- 
tutions, and opinions are alike structurally and functionally or in 
accordance with the Aristotelian categories, the stronger is the 
evidence of their common origin. The more they are unlike in 
two areas, the stronger is the evidence of independent origin. 

2. If the same invention occurs in three or more places, that 
is stronger evidence of a common human origin, and the multi- 
plication of places strengthens the argument for oneness of cause. 

3. Again, the multiplication of respects in similarities between 
any two peoples is another strengthening of evidence that they 
were once one, or that they have both been infected with the 
same contagion of culture. It is the same here as in law, the 
greater the number of witnesses that give to the same transaction 
testimony in the identical language, the surer is the court of 
collusion. 

4. While it is true that inventions may be so similar in struct- 
ure and appearance that there can be no doubt of their having 
come from the same source, the converse of the proposition can 



Digitized by 



Google 



108 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

have no standing. It can never be said that any degree or kind 
of similarity between inventions will prove their independent 
origin. There is no mark of independent origin through similar 
stress or environment. Indeed, always the less similar things 
are, the greater is the probability that their originators had no 
connection. 

5. If two anthropological phenomena in different parts of the 
world are homologous, that is no evidence of their independent 
origin. To the normally constituted mind it raises the suspicion 
of contact after some fashion. The contact may be impossible 
of proof historically ; but the belief that complex structures with 
identical functions and widely separated in space arose inde- 
pendently is the last resort. It is never illogical to hypothecate 
some sort of contact or tuition ; but the difficulty of supposing 
independent origins increases every moment with the greater 
and greater likeness in the intimate structure. 

6. You can never be sure of two common resemblances, even 
that they arose independently, for everything that can be ac- 
counted for by the common-nature theory could also have been 
taught. What might possibly be accounted for by common race 
or family could frequently have been accultured. Indeed, a spo- 
radic resemblance between peoples living widely apart in corre- 
sponding environments immediately raises the question why is 
this the only art in which they resemble. That the profundity 
and immed lateness of relationship between peoples will be 
gauged by the intimate structural likenesses in their productions 
ethnology and biology agree. Two identical 8()ecies do notarise 
independently. 

7. It will be admitted that varietal dissimilarities in similar 
types of invention evidence independent origin of some kind ; 
and the more marked these varietal differences are, the farther 
apart may be their origins. In such cases the similarity is not 
the proof of independent origin. That proof must be sought 
elsewhere, perhaps historically. It is the style and degree of 
differences that declare the degree of independence. Things of 
the same type may differ and yet may have been made by the 
same man or in the same tribe. But differences in such cases 
are not the same as those that occur independently. Varieties 
may be generically alike in spite of independence, but they can- 
not be alike by reason of independence. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895J SIMILARITIES IN CULTURE 109 

The Independent Origin Theory. — Let us study a little more 
closely the independent origin theory, which is now very popular. 
There are activities which all human beings practice in common 
whenever the occasions and the facilities arise, certain laws to 
which all are subject, certain endowments which are the heir- 
loom of the species. The enumeration of these one by one 
would eliminate the common actions and culture similarities 
arising from a common human nature and leave the inquirer 
only such as have arisen by inheritance or acculturation. 

1. Man a Fart of Nature, — No one doubts for a moment that 
all human beings with their achievements are terrestrial objects 
and phenomena, subject always and everywhere, without re- 
gard to race or time, to the Keplerian laws, to physical forces, 
to chemical actions and reactions, to osmotic processes like the 
plant, to nervous stimuli and muscular movements like all other 
vertebrates. They all have five fingers on each hand and five 
toes on each foot, etc. Just so far as humanity is in the great 
streams of existence with other beings under the same canopy 
of heaven, dwelling in the midst of the atmosphere, the hydro- 
sphere, and the geosphere, where similar causes bring about 
similar results, no one will call the proposition in question that 
all sorts of people in every part of the world will act similarly 
under like provocations. 

2. Mankind as of One Species, — Before the human species began 
to separate at all its members must not only have been endowed 
with traits of mind and body in common, but already must have 
been schooled in many common experiences. These are the 
heritage of humanity, the mother arts, language, institutions, 
and beliefs, of which all others are the progeny. If, then, you 
find all mankind adapting house and clothing and occupations 
to the environment in a general way, it is what they ever did ; 
but, inasmuch as there are always several ways of getting at the 
same complicated result, this proposition is true only generically 
and in forms little difierentiated from nature. 

Brinton * says : 

It seems to me, indeed, that any one who will patiently study the paral- 
lelisms of growth in the arts and sciences, in i)oetry and objects of utility, 
throughout the various races of men, cannot doubt of their j)sychical iden- 
tity. Still more, if he will acquaint himself with the modern science of 

* Races and Peoples, N. Y., 1890, p. 82. 
15 



Digitized by 



Google 



110 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VllI 

Folk-lore, and will note how the very same tales, customs, proverbs, sai>er- 
stitions, games, habits, 'and so on, recurspontaneously in tribes severed by 
thousands of leagues, he will not think it possible that creatures so wholly 
identical could have been produced by independent lines of evolution. 

3. The Same Animal Teachers. — Not only mankind, but animals 
associated with man or living in his presence have generic and 
family resemblance in conduct and adaptabilities to human 
wants in various parts of the world. Different peoples have 
been instructed by these creatures in housebuilding and arts, in 
speech and society, and different species have surrendered the 
various parts of their bodies and their productions for the sup- 
ply of human needs. When two widely separated peoples use 
shells for spoons, gourds for vessels, or give like names to the 
whippoorwill, it is not necessary to suppose contact, if they agree 
only in these particulars and do not use precisely the same de- 
vice in each case. 

4. Plant and Mineral Friends, — After the same fashion there 
are obtrusively useful plants common to many geographical 
provinces, with prominent parts — fruit, qualities, and substances 
for man's comfort. The savage could not fail to take note of 
them, and their attributes sufficiently account for their employ- 
ment. 

The same is true of stone ; for early man's industries the world 
had but three kinds : stone for chipping, stone for battering and 
grinding, and stone for cutting. Perhaps all three arts are a 
common and continuous heritage. At any rate, stone is so re- 
fractory and circumscribed that we do not have to suppose the 
importation of teachers to impart processes that Nature herself 
constantly taught. 

5. Areas of Characterization. — The various races, peoples, and 
breeds of mankind have been endowed with characteristics pecu- 
liar to them by reason of environmental causes ; but they have at 
the same time perpetuated the generic spirit that makes all races 
akin. 

The new and plastic race spirit has had to go in predetermined 
tracks, by reason of the uniform number of wants, the restric- 
tions upon human endeavor, and the attributes or endowments 
of culture-areas ; so that, while differences are really the legiti- 
mate product of separate culture-areas, general similarities may 
survive in them. Similarities in separated culture-areas are not 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] SIMILARITIES IN CULTURE 111 

profound and the likeness between human productions begotten 
therein is no greater than that of the regions. 

6. Varietal and Race Differences. — These different races must 
under other stress learn also new arts, since an activity may be so 
congenial to a new region or material that the laws of mind and of 
least resistance would constrain all comers there or users thereof 
to walk in the same paths by a species of natural acculturation. 
Notice the reindeer, dog, and birch-bark occupations in hyper- 
borean regions, buffalo industries on the Missouri, pueblo and 
pottery industries in the southwest, bamboo industries in Ma- 
laysia, and so on. In each of these places there are several fam- 
ilies of mankind, and you will find them building, clothing, 
working somewhat alike, pursuing the same pleasures, and gaz- 
ing on the same spirit world. leaving out the fact of accultur- 
ation and intermarriage, even here Dr. Matthews, Mr. Cushing, 
or Dr. Fewkes would have no trouble in discriminating peoples. 

Just as the limbs of trees separate from a common trunk, and 
each of these limbs gives rise to a set of branches, and each 
branch is the starting point of twigs, which produce the spray, 
the whole process representing a very long time, so the human 
species has given rise to subdivisions. This is the common way 
of representing the affiliations of living beings ; but in the case 
of man, as of animals and plants, the limbs are not alike in 
variety ; neither are any of the other subdivisions. They stand 
for new centers of variation. 

There are three leading types of mankind — the Caucasian, the 
Negroid, and the Mongoloid. If certain proclivities and ways 
are the common inheritance of the human species by reason of 
common blood, then there must have been superadded upon the 
three types proclivities and ways and arrests by reason of the 
causes which made these three to differ. 

Again, there are about twelve well-defined races of men. You 
will find them enumerated in Miiller, Peschel, Haeckel, Huxley, 
Topinard, Keane, Brinton, and elsewhere. By the same proc- 
esses that made them distinct races, proclivities and ways were 
engendered in each one of them that were sut generis. 

Finally, there are several hundreds of families or stocks of 
mankind, speaking absolutely different languages, so far as the 
philologist is able to discriminate. By reason of the isolations 
and environmental pressures that made these to differ in appear- 



Digitized by 



Google 



112 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

ance and speech, they acquired finer proclivities and ways of 
doing things that one would discover to be their own if he were 
well enough infoiined. There are plainly before the eyes of all 
who will observe, in spite of a common humanity, well-marked 
kinship groups, territorial groups, national groups, technic 
groups, psychological groups. 

Again, from the earliest times the separation of the limbs from 
the trunk of humanity hasbeen coordinated with the interlacing 
of the leaves and spray. So the peoples of the earth have inter- 
married, traded, taught one another, lent, borrowed, and im- 
proved upon each other's activities. To this general transfer 
Powell gives the name of acculturation. 

Ihe True Question. — In point of fact, the question of a common 
humanity is not exactly whether inventions arose independently 
by reason of a common human mind, but how many genera- 
tions, varieties, or races back in time one is to look for the first 
appearance of the common want and culture status out of which 
the particular invention in question sprung. Omitting a few 
fortuitous examples, all resemblances in culture are derived from 
that specialized nature which is so far removed, both spiritually 
and biologically, from that of any other creature. The question, 
after all, is like that of a genealogical register. In fact, working 
perpetually within the grooves, tracks, currents, leading strings 
of environment, there are generations of similarities based on : 

1. The specific attributes of humanity as a whole. 

2. Varietal or racial attributes of peoples. 

3. Industrial association or acculturation. 

4. Common craft or union in activity. 

5. The genius and tradition of family or school. 

6. The unique spirit of one man. 

The Dividing Line. — Now we come to the dividing line between 
the anthropological similarity and the ethnological similarity 
and acculturation. After allowing to the notion all that can 
possibly be expected by reason of the earth's forces and 
resources (and they are very potent), by reason of common 
human nature and traits ('^ a great and noble fact "), of natural 
pedagogy, of corresponding culture-areas, and even by reason 
. of long-time-at^o ancestors, there still remain the whole im- 
mense body of characteristics in human achievement that 
belong to forces and materials that do not often come together 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] SIMILARITIES IN CULTURE 113 

independently, but are designedly brought together. The con- 
comitancy of so many identical movements, according to the 
doctrine of chances, more than once is not to be expected. 

It is agreed, then, by all that certain kinds of similarity may 
exist in regions wide apart independently when the occasion 
arises and the environment permits. It is also admitted that 
things may be so similar as to allow no doubt that they were 
created under the inspiration of the same teachers. There is, 
then, a criterion, a boundary line, not definitely fixed, perhaps, 
but a fence between those so-called similarities that arise inde- 
pendently and those which show acculturation of some kind. 
This fence must be largely psychological. 

The question, I repeat, is not one of origins at all, but one of 
the number, kinds, and degrees of similarities in the artificialities 
of life. For example, the invention of the canoe is a natural, 
human process ; the bark canoe is environmental, the birch-bark 
canoe is culture-historical. But what should we say of the Amur 
and the Columbia River types, each pointed beneath the water 
like a monitor and unlike any other species ? Surely these must 
have some kind of acculturation. Now, if it be found that the 
Columbia stock and the Amur people have also the same name 
for their pointed canoes and a multitude of other coordinated 
likenesses, then kinship of blood or nationality is proclaimed. 

There must have been very careless use made of these plain 
declarations, and the philologist has been the chief of sinners. 
Dr. Brinton, at the Anthropological Congress in Chicago, said, 
with reference to the relation between the peoples of America 
and those of the Eastern Hemisphere, *' that up to the present 
time there has not been shown a single dialect, not an art nor an 
institution, not a myth or religious rite, not a domesticated plant 
or animal, not a tool, weapon, game or symbol, in use in America 
at the time of the discovery, which had been previously imported 
from Asia, or from any other continent of the Old World."* 

This is a startling sentence after the thousands of pages that 
have been written based upon assumptions that the similarities 
therein denied do exist in sufficient number and intimacy of 
structure to proclaim identity of the Americans with numerous 
Asiatic peoples. 

*Interaat. Gong. Anthrop., Chicago, 1894, 151. 



Digitized by 



Google 



114 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

If you will carefully read Dr. Brinton'a paragraph, however, 
you will observe that the distinguished ethnologist probed the 
heart of the matter in a single paragraph. He is speaking of 
dissimilarities or similarities falsely so called. He means to say 
that so far as the genuine evidence goes the men of the two 
hemispheres are so different in themselves as well as in their 
activities that there is no good evidence of common origin or 
culture. The independence is proclaimed on the score of un- 
likeness. 

The rationale of this assertion is undisputed. When any two 
peoples, or arts, or industries, or institutions, or languages are 
scientifically dissimilar, then contact is so far forth disproved. 

If I should hesitate to indorse Dr. Brinton's paragraph fully, 
it would not be in its condemnation of those who, like Publius 
Considius, had claimed to see and hear what they had not seen 
and heard, but in ascribing too much originality to the Ameri- 
cans. To me the whole acti vital life of the Western Hemispliere 
looks second-hand. But ethnological literature is the graveyard 
of hasty generalizations. Great fault surely is with those who on 
slight coincidences of sound or arts or social phenomena have 
declared the identity of peoples not even belonging to the same 
subspecies of the human genus, and have assumed acculturation 
between races with half the circumference of the globe between 
them because of slight resemblances. 

The old-time travelers and ethnologists, being uninstructed as 
to our modern studies concerning man, themselves erred in mis- 
taking superficial resemblances and mimicries for essential and 
fundamental similarities. They did not err in thinking that 
like inventions spring from related peoples, but they were not 
called upon to discriminate the true nature of likeness. But it 
is not my intention to abuse those who have given me so much 
pleasure and a deal of solid instruction. 

We are indebted to these older students for many extremely 
precious books written to prove that this people were the same 
as that. The theory was wrong, but the works are crowded with 
information upon a thousand subjects of abiding interest. If 
we take issue with the authors, it is merely in the interest of 
science and with no wish to disparage them. Of the older 
writers I shall not now even 8[)eak. They walked by the light 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] SIMILARITIES IN CULTURE 115 

they had, and there are excellent modern examples to illustrate 
the point. 

The question that confronts us everywhere is at bottom one 
of the character of testimony, of the competency and credibility 
of witnesses, and of the use that is made of testimony. We are 
not ready yet to decide between anthropologic, ethnologic, and 
accultural similarities, but are arrested between folk-lore and 
science, between truth and falsehood. At the very outset of 
every one of the sciences students were confronted with folk- 
collections, folk-observations, folk explorations and researches, 
folk-tales, erroneous data, prejudiced and poetical statements. 

It is a melancholy admission, and I think every one of my 
brother curators will bear me out in it, that only a very small 
per cent, of the specimens in the anthropologic and ethnologic 
collections of the world are trustworthy witnesses in a refined 
study.* Let a trained Americanist go carefully through the 
cabinets of the world or examine what is inscribed on the backs 
of hoarded manuscripts. The Wilkes collection in the National 
Museum was received from the United States Patent Office and 
is of great value ; but one would lose his reputation for scientific 
accuracy who would base any conclusion upon it as it was origi- 
nally labeled. The same is true of the assertions of amateur 
travelers and of their collections and photographs. Too fre- 
quently attempts are made to commit these extremely interest- 
ing and popular accounts to an accuracy not attempted by the 
author. In no invidious sense, most of such writing is folk-lore 
and so designed to be, and delights the folk element in us or it 
would have no audience. 

The very essence of science is comparison. The remedy for 
superficial work is not in the abandonment of research, but in its 
prosecution according to better methods. 

If I may be allowed a suggestion, I should appeal to my col- 
leagues in this and other societies to have a tacit understanding 
to use with great caution what is contained in ordinary books of 
travels and passing articles in popular journals whenever they 
cannot be made to conform to the laws of historic science or the 
laws of ethnologic science. If the statements may not be sub- 
stantiated by accessible testimony or actual specimens or photo- 

*See R. Andree, Brasiliaoische Ankeruxt, etc., Brntschwg., Ix?, 17. 



Digitized by 



Google 



116 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

graph, it does not seem fair to the writer to put him upon his 
veracity beyond his own designs * 

The British Notes and Queries, the French, German, and Aus- 
trian directions to collectors and observers, especially the con- 
tinued series of pamphlets of instruction sent out by the Smith- 
sonian Institution and the Bureau of Ethnology, are entirely in 
the right direction. It only remains for the bodies issuing these 
circulars to call their agents to account and to put upon them 
the obligations of the naturalist, who is compelled to accompany 
every statement with tangible or documentary proof. I shall 
also hail the auspicious day when by illustrated publication all 
museums shall be practically turned into one museum, by which 
means one-half our errors will eliminate themselves. 

When men go out hunting similarities they usually find them, 
or, at least, the personal equation of the best of u^ interferes 
with that rigid scrutiny without which all our professed science 
is child's play. 

On the other hand, when men lay down the dictum that all 
widely separated similarities are due to a common humanity, 
and that is the end of it, they substitute dogmatism for science, 
and this has shrouded every mind or people in midnight 
ignorance that has been so unfortunate as to be subjected to it. 

I deem it of the utmost importance to open all questions of 
this kind to more careful and renewed scrutiny, to apply the 
principles of counted and graded similarities, to leave the evi- 
dence in some convenient center for the inspection of the most 
critical, to combine the technographic with the ethnographic 
arrangement in study, and finally to draw no conclusion that is 
not in conformity with the procedure of natural history. Above 
all, the best results will come from organized cooperation by 
skilled students combined in a perpetuated or endowed research. 

Let us hear the conclusion of the matter. Similarities in cult- 
ure do arise : 

1. Through a common humanity, a common stress, common 
environment, and common attributes of nature. 



*" To Htudy cuUare is to trace the history of its development, as well as the qualities 
of the people among whom it flourishes. In doing this it is not sufficient to deal with 
generalities, as, for example, to ascertain that one people employ bark canoes, whilst 
another use rafts. It is necessary to consider the details of construction, because it is 
by means of the.se details that we are sometimes able to determine whether the idea htis 
been of home growth or derived from without." (Lane Fox : J. Authrop. Inst., Lond., 
1876, vol. iv, p. 400.) 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] SIMILARITIES IN CULTURE 117 

2. Through acculturation — that is, contact, commerce, borrow- 
ing, appropriating, between peoples in all degrees of kinship. 

3. Through common kinship, race, or nationality. 

Generic similarities arise by the first cause ; special and ad- 
ventitious similarities by the second cause; the more profound, 
coordinated, real, and numerous similarities by the third cause. 

Similarities are partly natural, such as sounds of animals, forms 
of pebbles, qualities of stone, clay, and the like, but most of them 
are fundamentally ideal. Where the same idea exists in two 
areas, a simple one may have come to men independently. One 
containing two or more elements in the same relations and order 
is less likely to have so arisen, while a highly organized idea could 
not often have come to two men far removed from each other. 
Furthermore, a complex idea is never the progeny of a single 
mind, and that embarrasses the question further. 

The elements of similarity that appear independently are in 
new functions for old structures, the qualities of materials, the 
forms of vegetal life, the actions and voices of nature, in what we 
may call the working part or foundation of the invention. 

The elements of similarity that arise by acculturation are for- 
tuitous partly, and generally stand out as radically new. On 
examining the culture of the borrower and of the lender, the 
difference of race or people is apparent. 

The elements of similarity that arise from identity of race or 
blood are homogeneous, multiplied, ideal. They exist not so 
much in the working and natural as in the inventional and arti- 
ficial part of the activity. 

The generic and adventitious similarities are most striking 
and most frequently called to notice. The error is in taking 
them for profound and real similarities. Those similarities that 
are imbedded in the life of peoples and logically coordinated with 
the annual circle of activities are of the family or stock and 
beyond any reasonable doubt proclaim the people to be one. 
Furthermore, they exist for the trained and patient eye and 
hand ; they elude the gaze of the superficial observer. The 
identification of them is the reward of long years of patient re- 
search and the finder is the discoverer of a pearl of great price. 



16 



Digitized by 



Google 



118 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



A COMPARISON OF 8IA AND TUSATAN SNAKE 
CEREMONIALS 

BY J. WALTER FEWKE8 

Ever since I began my studies of the mythology and ritual of 
the Pueblo Indians of our Southwest, in 1890, I have looked 
forward to a time when sufficient data should be accumulated 
by ethnologists from all the pueblos to allow one to enter upon a 
second stage of research — the comparative study of Pueblo cere- 
moniology. The dictum that what is true of one pueblo is true 
of all, while seemingly probable, could only be accepted in a 
general sense, and it appeared to me that one great requisite to 
interpret this complicated subject was a careful record of the 
ceremonies in the dififerent pueblos. When a body of data of 
this kind exists a comparison, in which whatever is local might 
be eliminated and the essentials brought out in clear outlines, is 
possible, and would afford a reliable picture of the aboriginal 
culture which distinguishes the Pueblo peoples. Although recog- 
nizing this comparative method to be all important, I have con- 
fined myself to the less fiiscinating accumulation of details of 
Tusayan practices, awaiting investigations of the other pueblos. 

The account of the Sia ritual lately published by the Bureau 
of Ethnology,* while not all that I had wished, makes it possible 
to begin that comparative study which promises to be so preg- 
nant in results. The best known of all Pueblo rites at present is 
the Tusayan snake dance. f The Sia memoir describes similar 
rites in that pueblo, which belongs to the Keresan stock. In 
the present article I have therefore ventured to undertake a com- 
parison of the two, from which it seems that in essentials the 
Snake dance is the same in two widely separated pueblos gen- 
erally ascribed to two different linguistic stocks. 

The material which I have used for information concerning 
the Sia ceremonial is drawn from pages 76-91, supplemented by 
scattered references throughout the work. Of this material j 
suppose that the descriptions of the first part of the rain ceremony 

♦The Sia, by Matilda Coxe Stevenson, Eleventh Annual Report of the Bureau of 
Ethnology. 
tThe Snake Ceremonials at Walpi : Journ. Araer. Eth. and Arch., vol. iv. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] SIA AND TUSAYAN SNAKE CEREMONIALS 119 

of the Snake society (pp. 76-86) were from personal observa- 
tions ; the remainder (pp. 86-91) were " given the writer by the 
vicar of the Snake society." More detailed and personal ob- 
servations would aid us very much in the comparisons. 

It will be noticed in comparisons of the Sia and Tusayan 
rites that there are many differences in the two, as might be ex- 
pected, but the object of this article is to show that in essential 
points they are the same. Throwing out of consideration the 
dying out of the ceremonials and celebrants, it may be well, on 
the very threshold of the subject, to examine a cause which 
a priori would be likely to affect the ritual in Sia and Walpi 
somewhat differently. While the Pueblo peoples of our South- 
west have always been very conservative in religious practices, 
they have not altogether resisted the influences of the Aryan 
peoples with whom they have come in contact. A modifica- 
tion, small though it often is, has been more marked the more 
intimate the contact, so that many changes in mode of life 
directly traceable to white influence can be found today, espe- 
cially in those pueblos near the railroad or along the Rio Grande. 
Firearms, fabrics of eastern manufacture, wagons, household 
utensils, windows of glass, and many other objects are now in 
daily use, and no better place to study how many things of 
white man^s manufacture the Indian needs can be chosen than 
any one of the prosperous trader's shops resorted to by the in- 
habitants of the eastern pueblos. 

In those most conservative of all customs, religious faiths 
and practices, the Rio Grande Pueblos have been considerably 
influenced, and in some instances, although still observing an- 
cestral ceremonials and holding aboriginal beliefs, they are nom- 
inally Catholics. In other cases this modification has gone still 
further and the zeal of the devoted fathers of the church, who 
for three hundred years have labored among them, has intro- 
duced an element in their religious lives which has had a more 
profound influence. Much of their ritual is still aboriginal, and 
their ancient beliefs have a tenacious hold on their hearts, but 
no one can deny that Christianity is today a well-grounded and 
accepted faith among them. Many survivals of ancient belief 
and practice, varying in quantity in different pueblos, still exist, 
and there may still remain a strong belief in the old as opposed 
to the new ; but this fact is evident, Christianity has exerted a 
great influence on most of the eastern pueblos and this belief has 



Digitized by 



Google 



120 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

profoundly modified the religious life of the majority of the 
people. 

As we leave the Rio Grande pueblos and pass westward or 
withdraw from the railroad, the amount of this influence dimin- 
ishes. From pueblos in which there is a mission and regular 
priest we pass to Zufii, where neither exists. There are the walls 
of a mission in ruins, with roof fallen in and (in 1890) with floor 
littered with decaying .skeletons or putrefying carcasses of dogs. 
The bell, however (1890), hangs in place, and is said to be rung 
once a year, at the Fiesta de los Muertos,* and portions of the altar 
reredos are still visible. 

In front of the ruin is a cemetery, in the midst of which rises 
a wooden cross, which tells its story of the former influences of 
the zealous padres. No Christian service has been held in the 
Zufii mission for years, yet the people bury their dead in the 
churchyard and celebrate a feast of the dead. 

One step nearer the native religion of the Pueblos and we visit 
Tusayan, the least modified of all these people, both in secular 
and religious things. Among the Tusayan we find no church, 
no consecrated burial ground, no Catholic priests. Since the 
year 1700 no Catholic missionaries have permanently remained 
among them. At most, the length of the mission period was not 
more than sixty years (1629-1 680),t and I think we are justified 
in the conclusion that we find less evidence of modification 
from this source than anywhere else in the Southwest. In the 

*This festival, so common in all the other pueblos where it is a church observance, 
is not celebrated in Tusayan, although food is placed for four days after burial over the 
graves of the deceased. According to W. J. Rouse (Buffalo " Times," February 3, 1896), 
the bell and carved wood of the altar have now disappeared from the Zufti miHsion. 
Mrs. Stevenson (p. 15) considers that the Zufii and Tusayan religion and sociology are 
" virtually free from Catholic influences," which is practically true, but traces of 
Catholic influences are to be seen in burial customs at ZuQi. The influence of the 
Indian school at Keam*s Caflon in the modification of Tusayan society and religion 
will be very considerable when the children now taught there take the places of their 
parents. There are those now in the pueblos who have expressed contempt for the 
Katcinas, and another generation will see a great change in this interesting survival of 
aboriginal life. 

t Practically the mission epoch in Tusayan extended from 1629 to 1680, opening with 
Padre Porras and his two associates and closing with the massacres of the great re- 
bellion. Although Porras was poisoned in 1633, Awatobi remained a stronghold of the 
faith, but with its fall in 1700 active work in converting the Hopi practically ceased, 
and since that date the Christian faith htis hardly affected Tusayan. From time to 
time apostates fled to this country, but such as did return to the Christian teaching 
were carried back to Sandia and elsewhere in 1742 and 1780. The influence of the mis- 
sion epoch was never very great, and it was briefer in Tusayan than in any other 
pueblos. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 18951 SIA AND TUSAYAN SNAKE CEREMONIALS 121 

complicated ceremonials of this people, many of which I have 
elsewhere described, we detect no Christian influence of great 
moment. 

Recognizing, as we must, that Christian belief and ritual have 
exerted a profound influence on the difierent members of the 
Pueblo stocks, it behooves the ethnologist in approaching the 
study of their customs to discriminate between the aboriginal 
and the incorporated. Evidences of incorporated ritual per- 
formed side by side with aboriginal are apparent. How is it 
with their mythology ? I believe here we find like results, vary- 
ing with difierent members. Some of these are so clearly due 
to Christian teaching that I need not spend any time upon them. 
Others from extreme variations are so akin to aboriginal beliefs 
that different ethnologists entertain diametrically opposite ideas 
of their historic or aboriginal origin. 

From what is said above it is clear that, other things being 
equal, from geographical position we should expect the Sia ritual 
to be more profoundly changed by Christian influences than the 
pueblos of Tusayan, and that the performance of the Sia snake 
dance would be more modified than in the isolated province of 
the Hopi. The gradual extinction of the inhabitants of Sia 
would hasten this change. 

Moreover, in the progress of decay the tendency of a Pueblo 
ritual is to the consolidation of several rites into one. This 
process of abbreviation, resulting from outside interferences, 
leads to composite ceremonials which, when the cultus is flour- 
ishing, are differentiated.* Evidences of consolidation are every- 
where visible in the Sia ritual. A comparison of the snake 
ritual of Sia with that of Walpi would be greatly facilitated by 
an examination of the supernatural personages recognized by 
the two pueblos. 1 will therefore preface what I have to say of 
the snake ritual with a few remarks on the Tusayan equivalents 
of the supernatural conceptions of Sia as made known by the 
memoir to which I have referred. f 

• Mr. Politzer's interesting observations (San Francisco "Chronicle," October 21, 1894) 
on the Oraibi snake dance in 1894 have shown what I little suspected, that the Snake 
society in Oraibi is much smaller than at Walpi. Nowhere in the pueblo region is the 
cult stronger than at Walpi, although the ceremony at Middle mesa is an easy second. 

tThis comparison is only of a very general nature and not a detailed one. I have 
used Mrs. Stevenson's memoir as authority, and am responsible for my condensed ex- 
position of Sia mythology only so far as I have given a correct account of her more 
comprehensive work. I have not found it e:\sy m many instances to grasp her mean- 
ing, possibly on account of the natural obscurity of the subject. 



Digitized by 



Google 



122 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST LVol. VIII 

We must ever bear in mind in the study of survivals in Pueblo 
belief the potent influence in modification due to Christian 
teaching, to which I have referred. A picture of present beliefs 
is not necessarily one of unmodified aboriginal beliefs. This is 
true in a degree of the mythology and cosmogony of Tusa3'an. 
To weed out what is modern is a herculean task, perhaps im- 
possible. The best we can accomplish is to use as our standard 
the least modified Pueblos, if that can be determined. As be- 
tween the Tusayan and Sia people, I do not hesitate to take the 
former as the least changed, and have approached the study of 
Sia mythology with that thought in mind. The supernatural 
personages are so grouped that they would fall in categories 
which will not exclude those of Tusayan, on the ground that it 
is the best which can be done with this subject.* Had there 
been the interest in this subject and the sympathetic student of 
it three centuries ago he might have transmitted to us the un- 
modified mythology and cosmogony of the Pueblo Indians. 
Today we can do no more than make known what is now be- 
lieved by these people, more or less modified, and speculate on 
what part we hear from them is native and what derivative. The 
subject is capable of scientific treatment. 

The Sia mythology, for comparative purposes as well as con- 
venience, will be considered under the following headings, which 
are not necessarily arbitrary and in many instances different 
from present beliefs at Sia : 

1. Earth Gods and Goddesses. 

2. Sky Gods {jmrte Paiatdmo). 

3. Kopishtaiaf (Elemental gods — rain, thunder, etc., jieoples). 

4. Cultus heroes (offspring of Earth and Sky). 

5. World-quarter Gods. 

a. Animistic and Katsunas. 
6. Other World-quarter Gods. 

6. Paiiitiimo (parte). 

* We can do no more than approximate the original beliefs of the Pueblo peoples by 
a 8tud3' of the survivals of their mythology. The contribution to this subject, from 
the least modified, is at best only probabilities, not certainties. 

t These are in one sense world-quarter divinities. In Pueblo mythology the great 
gods appear to me to be the earth-goddesses, the sky-gods, and the two heroes, off- 
spring of earth and sky. The original goddess is mother-earth, who has many names 
and is "creator" of the innumerable lesser groups represented by .3, 4, 5, and 6 of the 
above scheme. I have yet to see valid rej\son.s to believe that the Tusayau Indians in 
their aboriginal system ever entertained the idea of a Great Spirit, creator of heaven 
and earth, or a philosophical notion of a time when the earth did not exist. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] SI A AND TUSAYAN SNAKE CEREMONIALS 123 

EARTH GODS. 

The following Sia earth-goddesses are mentioned with Tusayan 
equivalents : 

Sussistinnako, Spider * Woman Kokyanwiiqti. 

Utset Hahai wiiqti. 

Nowuteet Muyiflwft ( wuqti). 

Hishikoyatsaspa Huzriiwuqti. 

The Tusayan earth -goddesses, Tuwapofitumsi,t Lakonemana, 
Mamzrauraana and others are possibly names of attributes 
rather than of distinct persons. Calako mana { has similarities 
to Utset and Nowutset. 

It would seem from the following quotation that Spider is not 
always regarded as female : " Sussistinnako is referred to as a 
man, or, more properly, a being possessing all power; and as 
Sussistinnako created first man and then other beings to serve 
his first creation, these beings, although endowed with attributes 
superior to man, in order to serve him, can hardly be termed 
gods, but rather agents to execute the will of Sussistinnako, in 
serving the people of his first creation." 

If I rightly understand this quotation, it seems to me, first, 
that the conception of Spider as a male shows Christian influ- 
ence, and that the etymology § of the word indicates the true 
aboriginal conception in Sia as in Tusayan. I find, secondly, 
in looking for the account of the '' first creation " (p. 27) of Spider 
in Sia cosmogony that they were "two women," Utset and 
Nowutset, one or both of whom, by direction of Spider, created, 
among others, the Sun, Katsunas, etc. Considering the way the 
word god is used in polytheistic religions, 1 fail to see why we 
cannot designate them in this way or why one god cannot be an 
" agent " of a more powerful being ; but if the limitation of the 
word god to Spider is intended as an aboriginal unmodified con- 
ception, I have grave doubts in regard to this part of the Sia 

* Spider (woman) i» "creator" in Sia cosmoKony, whicli is anotlier way of saying 
the Earth is mother of all, for Haarts, the Earth, existed before Spider woman made 
living beings, beginning with Utset and Nowutset. 

fComplemental female earth deity of Maeiauwdh, whose representative in Sia myth- 
ology is unknown to me. 

X The Corn Maids ; the ear of corn is still used as a symbol of the universal mother 
(Utset?). 

§ From other combinations I take it that nako means woman, as wiiqti (Hopi) ; but 
I am not sure except by implication whether SusiUti means Spider, since elHewhere 
Kopina is given as the Spider when applied to a "society." The Tusayan word 
Kokyanwuqti is literally Spider woman, and probably this may be the same. 



Digitized by 



Google 



124 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

cosmogony. If it would imply that the Sia were monotheists, 
it needs many facts to support it. That the present Sia believe 
that " Spider " was the creator is not improbable, but that this 
belief is aboriginal I question, unless Spider and the Earth are 
identical conceptions.- 

I have seen no evidence strong enough to convince me that 
the Pueblos were originally monotheists, but all probably orig- 
inally believed as the Tusayan people today, that the Earth is 
mother, antedating all cosmogony. In one sense this may be 
called monotheism, but that is hardly the accepted meaning of 
the term. 

SKY GODS. 

With the exception of the world-quarter beings later men- 
tioned, the Sia have two sky-gods of highest rank, Oshats, Sun, 
and Tawac, Moon. The former is distinctly looked upon as a 
father, but seems to be a creature of Earth. Several sky-gods of 
the Hopi are not possible to recognize in the account of Sia myth- 
ology. Among these are Cotukinuiiwa, Taiowa, Kwataka, etc.* 

In one way the Tusayan people regard all supernatural beings 
as offspring of the Earth and Sky deities, the Sun being called 
father, the Earth, mother ; but this is far from believing that 
either the sun or earth is regarded by them as a creator in the 
sense employed in the systems of more cultured people. Mr. 
Gushing (Proctor's Song of the Ancient People, p. 30) says of Zuni 
cosmographical beliefs : 

It was said by their ancient seers : Before aught was, before even Time 
began to be, the Holder of the Trails of Life, whose person is the Sun, whose 
bright shield we see each shining day, — before aught was, save void space 
and darkness, He was. And by thinking he wrought light, and with 
light he dispelled the darkness . . . Into these life-sustaining waters 
he dropx)ed the seed of his being, whence sprang the Sky-Father and the 
Earth-Mother. 

As opposed to this interpretation, which certainly shows in a 
marked way Semitic and Aryan influences, Mrs. Stevenson finds 
the sun a creation from a shell (by an earth-goddess), the 

* Hecanavaiya, the Tusayan deity called the Ancient of the Six World-quarters, is a 
very elusive deity or supernal pernonage in Tusayan mythology. I incline to the be- 
lief that he is simply an attributal name of some other god, and since I made out that 
the sun determines the four cardinal world quarters by solstitial horizon points the 
theory suggested itself that the ancient of the six points was simply Tawa. the Sun. 
The Snake Hero was told in the underworld that he should bo called Hecanavaiya, aod 
liis representative, Wiki, is today ceremonially called by the same name. (See Snake 
Legend, Journ. Amer. Eth. and Arch., vol. iv.) 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] SIA AND TUSAYAN SNAKE CEREMONIALS 125 

earth being preexistent. Among the Tusayan Indians the earth 
is always spoken of in cosmogony as existent, and save when 
foreign influences can be readily traced, I find no knowledge of 
a spiritual being who created the earth. The Sia cosmogony 
be^ns with a created earth. 

The hero offspring of the earth gods and sky gods are the Twin 
War-gods, a conception which is widespread through the pueblo 
region, where these personages are generally culture heroes.* 
Among the Sia they are called Maasewe f and Nyuuyewe, and in 
attributes closely resemble the Tusayan heroes, Piiiikonhoya and 
Palanhoya. Their many deeds, such as killing monsters (Skoyo), 
which form such a large proportion of their folk-lore, coincide 
even in details with those of the Tusayan culture heroes. In 
Sia mythology they are reputed to be the children of Ko'chinako 
from an embrace by the Sun ; and the Spider woman, their 
grandmother, is their constant mentor and helper. The Tusayan 
Indians have been so little influenced by Christian teachers that 
it is not surprising they have no equivalent of Poshaiyanne, 
Poshyomo, or Poshaiank'ya, around whom so many biblical 
stories cluster. The word Pocbutu retains its original meaning 
of shaman and is applied to medicine-men who by exorcism 
relieve the sick. I have found no special Pocwympkiya or 
PocbutCl who has been deified by the Hopi or given special 
supernal powers. Moctezuma is also unknown even by the 
Tusayan Tanoan " thinkers,'^ which fact, together with the pov- 
erty of stories of Christian origin about any special shaman, 
would show how much less the Tusayan have been affected by 
Catholic priests than any of the eastern pueblos. 

WORLD-QUARTER GODS. 

The cultus of the world-quarter gods occupies a prominent 
place in Sia, as in other Pueblo myth and ritual. The gods of 
the world-quarters are referred to six cardinal directions — north, 
west, south, east, above, and below. In ceremonials in which 
they are addressed the sinistral circuit is practiced, and the 
sequence b^ns with the north. Examples of this circuit are 

♦ It would form a roost interesting article to compare the Sia and Tusayan stories of 
their many adventures in Tisiting the Sun, their father, and in killing the monsters, 
but I have not space to enter upon that subject here. There is a close resemblance or 
even identity in the Sia and Tusayan conceptions of these culture heroes. 

fNote the similarity in sound to Masauwilh, the Tusayan war-god. 

17 



Digitized by 



Google 



126 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

mentioned in asperging, in ceremonial smoking, etc. There is a 
similar association of colors with cardinal world-quarters to that 
in Tusayan, and the same assignment, with the exception of the 
color for the above and below. 

The cardinal world-quarters and corresponding colors are said 
to be the following : 

TiiT' } north,* yellow. 

PoSami } west, blue. 

irami}--th,red. 

Hamr }-^>-^^^- 

Six world-quarter serpents are mentioned : 
Skatowe (plumed), Serpent of North. 
Kaspaima, '' 

Koquira, ** 

Quissera, " 

Huwaka, ** 

Yaai, 

The Tusayan people make use, in a ceremony called the Palii- 
liikonti, of six effigies of their plumed serpent, one correspond- 
ing to each world-quarter, but I have not obtained their names, 
nor do I think there is any great difference in their nomen- 
clature, except in the addition of the corresponding word for 
color as a prefix. It will be seen that no similarity in radicals 
exists in the above names of the Sia plumed serpents. 

Six world-quarter warriors are mentioned by Mrs. Stevenson : 
Samaihaia,t Warrior of the North. 





West. 




South. 




East. 




Heavens. 




Earth. 



Shinohaia, 




" " West. 


Yumahaia, 




** " South. 


Ahwahaia, 




" ♦' East. 


Peahhaia, 




" ** Zenith 


Sarahaia, 




** " Nadir. 



♦ The magnetic north is not ceremonially recognized by the Tusayan Indians; their 
cardinal points are solstitial horizon points of the sun. 

f The element haiay which is common, would seem to mean warrior ; but as there is no 
similarity in the other elements and the prefixes of the plumed serpents of the world- 
quarters I am at loss to interpret them. I find the same want of uniformity of the pre. 
fixes of the trees of the cardinal points. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] SI A AND TUSAYAN SNAKE CEREMONIALS 127 

The Asperger (Nahaipiima) before the kisi in the Walpi snake 
dance called out (p. 92, op. cit.), as he threw charm-liquid to 
the cardinal points," Tcamahia, awahiye, yomahiye, tcimahaiye." 
These words are incomprehensible to the Hopi, and are possibly 
Keresan in derivation, invocations to the warrior gods, which 
would be most appropriate at that time. 

The women of the six world-quarters are stated to be : 

Kochinako, Yellow Woman of the North. 
Merrinako, Blue " " West. 

Kiirkanflinako, Red " '* South. 

Kashinako, AVhite " " East. 

Quisserrinako, Slij^htly Yellow Woman of the Zenith. 
Munainako, Dark Woman of the Nadir. 

The animals of the six world-quarters are given as : 
Mokaitc, Cougar of the North. 



Kohai, Bear * 


* West. 


Tuopi, Badger * 


* South. 


Kakan. Wolf 


' East. 


Tiami, Eagle ' 


' Heavens 


Maitubo, Shrew * 


* Earth. 



The trees of the six world-quarters are given as : 

Shakaka, Spruce of the North. 
Shwitirawana, Pine of the West. 
Maichina, Oak of the South.* 
Shwisinihanawe, Aspen of the East. 
Marshtitamo, Cedar ** Zenith. 

Morritamo, Oak " Nadir. 

The birds of the six world-quarters are stated to be : 
Hatee, Bird of the North. 



Shasto, •* 


" W^est. 


Mapeun, '* 


'* South. 


Shuwakai,** 


•* East. 


Tiami, 


Heavens (the Eagle). 


Chaska, ** ' 


* Earth. 



These six direction supernaturals, whether god, warrior, man, 
animal, or tree, are of early origin in Sia cosmogony, as will be 

• I do not understand why the word for ** oak " of the south is so different from 
**oak" of the nadir, and do not detect in them a common radical for oak. The Oak 
clan (extinct) is elsewliere (p. 19) called Hapanf\i, in which it is also difficult to distin- 
gaish a common radical. 



Digitized by 



Google 



128 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

seen from Mrs. Stevenson's article, and a similar conception is 
common to all the Pueblos and to many other peoples. 

Why, it has been asked, is world-quarter worship so widely 
distributed among different people ? No satisfactory answer has 
been given, but the theory that it is a direct outgrowth of suri 
-worship at solstitial risings and settings is not more absurd than 
many explanations which have been suggested.* 

ANIMAL SUPERNATURAL BEINGS. 

In this category I place the following from Sia, which are 
mentioned by Mrs. Stevenson, with their Hopi equivalents : f 



Shurtsftnna, Coyote Isauwiih. 

China, Mole Muyi. 

Chaska, Chapparal cock Hocboa. 

ffir}^°'f ^— 

MokaiL jCo-^'^'- Tohodh. 

Keowuch Kohone. 

Kohaira ] 

Xohai > Bear Honaawi!lh. 

Kohaiya j 

Ta^iie, Deer Sowinna. 

Tuopi ) 

Tupina >- Badger Honani. 

Tuope J 
Sisika, Swallow ', 



Ishits, Scarabseus Hohoyaiih ? 

Sika, Locust 

Shuahkai, Small black bird with white wings 

Skoyo, Cannibal giants Natacka, etc. 

Kurtz, Antelope Tcubio. 

SLaJEaBle Kwahu. 

Maitubo, Shrew 



The above list included the animal supernatural beings, except 
those previously mentioned, from Sia and their equivalents from 

♦ The Tusayan names of the bird skins corresponding to the six directions are given 
in my account of Naacnaiya, and later in the article on " The Tusayan New Fire Cere, 
naony." 

fMany of these are personified in Tusayan ceremonials when they are called 
Katcinas. The supernatural being personified and the dance or act of personification 
are called by the same name, Katcina. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895J SI A AND TUSAYAN SNAKE CEREMONIALS 129 

Walpi. It needs but a glance, however, to show that if the Sia 
list is supposed to be comprehensive it does not include a tithe 
of those which might be mentioned from Tusayan. Even such 
important animal supernaturals as Hawk (Kese), Kwataka (Man 
Eagle), Bee (Tatafiaya), Butterfly (Hokona), Owl (MonwCl), and 
Mountain Sheep (PanwCl), which play most essential roles in 
Tusayan ritual, are absent. All these in Tusayan, with many 
others, are called Katcinas, a conception implied in the Sia Kat- 
suna, which in Mrs. Stevenson's memoir are not clearly defined.* 
The following groups of peoples are likewise powerful in Sia 
rituals. These are especially interesting in relation to world- 
quarter worship in the snake ceremonies : 

Kopishtaia — 

PQrtuwishta, Lightning people. 
Kftwmotfi, Thunder " 

Kaahtiarts, Rainl)ow ** 

Kachard, aoud " 

The Paiatamof include, with other supernaturals, the Koshairi 
and Querranna, the former of which are represented by an effigy 
on the tiponi altar of the Sia snake ceremony. 

I find it quite difficult if not impossible for me to bring my 
observations of Tusayan mythology into harmony with those of 
Mrs. Stevenson on the lesser deities of Sia, nor is it essential that 
this part of the complicated subject be discussed here. Exactly 
what relation there is between the cloud-chiefs and cloud-people 
is very difficult to say, and I am not able to shed any light on 
this and many other difficult questions of similar character. In 
the lack of knowledge, which ignorance seems e(iually dense in 
the minds of other conscientious students of Pueblo mythology, 
I liave passed over the subject in a very unsatisfactory way, 
awaiting more opportunities for observation. 

*A diecaasion of the Pueblo conception of the Katcinas cannot be undertaken here 
on account of its intricacy On the same ground I must eliminate also Hoch&nmi and 
Saiahlia, the Sia equivalents of Hotcani and possibly Pokemil of the Hopi. My object 
is not to compare the Sia and Tusayan pantheons, but simply those members of it 
which are necessary to be acquainted with as a preparation to the study of the snake 
ritual. Hochanni of the Sia (Hotcani in Hopi), according to Mrs. Stevenson, is the 
** high ruler of the cloud people of the world." I do not know who the Tusayan Hotcani 
is, alihough 1 am well acquainted with his symbolism. (See my Tusayan Dolls.) 

fThis word recalls PaiakyamQ, the TaQoan gluttons, who are clowns, "delight- 
makers,** Koshairi or Koshare. 



Digitized by 



Google 



130 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

The personages whom I have called PaiakyamCl or Tewan 
gluttons and fio;ured (in vol. ii, Jour. Amer. Eth. and Arch.), 
have many points of likeness to the Koshare or " Delight 
Makers" described by Bandelier. These, I likewise suppose, 
are the Koshairi of Sia. I am not sure what Tusayan person- 
ages correspond to the Querranna of Mrs. Stevenson (Cuirana 
of Bandelier), and have not yet been able to identify their rain 
ceremony with any of those which I have seen in Arizona.* 

I am in much doubt about the limits of the three divisions 
said to be creations of the Spider woman, viz : 

'* 1. Paiatamo : All men of Ha'arts (the earth), the sun, moon, 
stars, Koshairi and Querranna. 

" 2. Kopishtaia : The cloud, lightning, thunder, rainbow, peo- 
ples, and all animal life not included under the first and third 
heads. 

" 3. Katsuna : Beings having human bodies and monster 
heads, who are personated in Sia by men and women f wearing 
masks." 

There is certainly something very obscure here, and new ob- 
8er\'ations must be made or more exact statements before the 
above classification can be of much value to the student of com- 
parative ceremoniology ; or, if the separation of two and three, 
as here defined, is a good one, the Sia system is so widely dif- 
ferent from that of Tusayan that comparisons of the Katsuna J 
and the Katcinas are impossible. 

* I confess my inability at this writing to fathom the meaning of that strange organi- 
zation, the Tusayan Tcukuwympkiyn, which includes the clowns, mud-heads, and 
gluttons. Their strange antics I have repeatedly observed, but no adequate explana- 
tion has yet been given me of them. "While the Koshare," says Bandelier, "are 
specially charged with the duty of furthering the ripening of the fruit, the Cuirana 
assist the sprouting of the seed. . . . While on certain occasions the latter are 
masters of ceremonies also, they never act as clowns or official jesters." (Delight 
Makers, p. 143.) 

'•Whenever the Katsuna appear," says Mrs. Stevenson (p. 116), "they are accom- 
panied by their attendants, the Koshairi and Querr&nna, who wait upon them . . . 
making the spectators merry with their witty sayings and buffoonery." 

1 1 have never seen a woman in a Hopi ceremony wearing a Katcina mask ; women 
Katcinas are personated by men. 

X After a faithful ntndy I do not know Wliat Mrs. Stevenson means by a Katsuna, as 
she seems to me to use the term In several different meanings. No doubt I am equally 
vague in my use of the Hopi term Katcina. I have, however, tried t^ define this won), 
more accurately than is possible here, in an article in a forthcoming report of the 
Bureau of American Ethnology. Practically all masked dances are Katcina dances, 
beginning in January and ending in August. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] SIA AND TUSAYAN SNAKE CEREMONIALS 131 

With these preliminary remarks on Sia and Walpi mythol- 
ogy let us pass to a consideration of the Snake ceremony in the 
two pueblos, as an instance of the similarities of the ritual. The 
Sia, as the Tusayan snake observance, is a ceremonial for rain, 
and participants in it prepare themselves for their duties by 
bodily purifications and other rites. 

We are told that the Sia Snake ceremonial is performed " after 
the ripening of the corn ; " the Tusayan takes place in August. 
(For dates see my Snake memoir.) 

For a proper comparison of this weird ceremony in the two 
pueblos I shall follow the headings adopted in my account of 
the Walpi snake dance, drawing my material from the Sia 
memoir. The following have served me as convenient head- 
ings for comparative purposes : 

1. The Altar. 

{Ceremonies at the tiponi altar, 
a, Making charm liquid. 
6, Invocation to world-quarter deities. 

I Ceremonies with live reptiles, 
a, Snake hunts. 
6, Ceremonies at the " log house.** 
c, Public dance (rites at the ''grotto"). 

I do not follow Mrs. Stevenson in the predominance which 
she has ascribed to ** initiations " in the third heading. The 
primary object of this component, especially the rites at the 
"grotto," is not an initiation but rather comparable with the 
Tusayan dance at the Cottonwood bower in the plaza. It is the 
acme of the snake ceremony with a distinct purpose ; novel to 
a novitiate ; possibly so worn down that but little remains but 
the initiation ceremony, an episode, not the main object of the 
performance. 

THE TIPONI ALTAR. 

In a comparative study of the Tusayan altars in their many 
variations, with all their modifications, I find one object which is 
always present in kiva observances. To this object fetishes, 
sand pictures, reredos, in fine paraphernalia of all kinds, are ac- 
cessories. This constantly present object, indeed that which 
makes the altar, is the society '' mother " called by the Hopi the 
tiponi. Two of these palladia are used on the altars of the 



Digitized by 



Google 



132 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

Walpi snake ceremonials, one representing each of the societies 
which participates in it. Six tiponis (iarriko) were placed on 
the Sia altar, four of which belonged to the chief (honaaite). 

A large part of the distinctive characteristics of the altars of 
different societies is made up of accessories, of which the follow- 
ing may be mentioned : 1, Sand pictures ; 2, Reredos; 3, Images, 
fetishes ; 4, Pahos, prayer feathers, sacred meal,* and pollen ; 
5, Paraphernalia used in other rites, as nakwipi (medicine bowl, 
corn, aspergill, etc.). 

The accessories of the tiponi altars of the Sia and Tusayan 
snake ceremonials differ considerably, showing evidences of con- 
solidation or want of differentiation or both. The two altars, 
that of the Snake and that of the Antelope, are possibly repre- 
sented in Sia by a single tiponi altar. 

Two sand-pictures are found combined in the Sia altar, one 
of which is comparable with the Antelope sand-mosaic, the 
other with the Snake. 

I have in my article on ** The Tusayan New Fire Ceremony " t 
pointed out the distinction between a tiponi altar and a cloud- 
charm altar. Any altar, simple or compound, upon which a 
tiponi stands is a tiponi altar, but the tiponi is not necessarily on 
the altar used in the making of the cloud-charm liquid or the 
invocation to the world-quarter deities or supematurala. 

These are represented on plate xiv of the Sia memoir. The 
former, instead of four sets of four different-colored semicircles, 
representing rain-clouds of the world-quarters, form different 
colored lightning symbols ; and a quadruple border surrounding 
the whole is represented in two colors, black and white, consist- 
ing of three white rain-clouds; and four black lightning symbols, 
the whole destitute of a border. 

The second sand-picture of the Sia altar approaches more 
closely that of the sand-mosaic of the Snake priests at Walpi, 
but in its design the colors are differently arranged, and the 
lightning snakes extend radially from the corners of the border 
instead of parallel with the sides. The place occupied by the 
outlines of four snakes in the Walpi Snake altar is filled in the 
Sia by four triple rain-cloud symbols, each triplet different in 

* Sacred meal is of course in a Nense not an accessory ; there in no altar without it, 
but it docs not, like the first three, distinguish the character of the altar, 
t Proc. Host. Soc. Nat. History, January 2, 1893. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] SIA AND TUSAYAN SNAKE CEREMONIALS 133 

colors. The mountain lion, which is drawn within a rectangle, 
is common to both the Sia and Tusayan Snake sand-mosaic* 

The altars of both the Antelope and the Snake societies at 
Walpi are destitute of an upright frame or reredos which forms 
such a conspicuous feature (plates xiv, xv) back of the Snake 
altar at Sia. The third group of accessories, fetishes in human 
or animal form, as represented at Walpi by the seven animal 
effigies mentioned in my account, but there are no effigies cor- 
responding to the following, said to be found on the Sia altar : 

Kochinako, " Yellow Woman of the North ; " f Maasewe and 
UyuunyewS, Twin Gods of War ; Six Warriors of the Six Moun- 
tains ; Three Koshairis (clowns ?) ; Fetish of White Stone Bear ; 
Two Coiled Stones representing snakes ; Cross J (decorated with 
feathers). 

The simple fact that a cross occurs on the altar is not neces- 
sarily an evidence of Christian influence, although in this case it 
may be probable. Cross-shaped paho were used by the Pueblo 
people when they were visited by Coronado in 1540 and were 
described by Castafieda (p. 239, Ternaux-Compans) : " A Acuco, 
nous trouv^mes pr&s d'une fontaine une croix de deux palmes 
de haut, et d'un doigt d'^paisseur. Le bois en etait carr6, et il 
y avait autour beaucoup de fleurs sSches et de petits batons 
orn6s de plumes. " A Tutahaco, nous trouv^mes sur une sepul- 
ture [pahoki] qui paraissait r^cente une croix faite de deux 
raorceaux de bois attaches avec du fil de coton, et orn^e de fleurs 
dessechtes.*" 

The rows of crooks (gneliikpi), which surmount the sand- 
mosaics of the Antelope and Snake altars at W^alpi, appear not 
to be represented at Sia, unless we find their equivalents in *' two 

* The arraDgemeni of the different colored sands as represented in plate XIV would 
greatly offend a Uopi Snake priest, with whom the sequence is always, whether in cir- 
cuit or on borders*, yellow, green, red, and white. I question the accuracy of the ar- 
rangement of colors in the second sand-picture of the Sia altar figured on plate XIV of 
the memoir. 

1 1 suspect that (his effigy of Kochinako is an attributal name of some earth god- 
dess. 

I A paho in the form of the cross was, however, made and deposited in the fields 
during the Walpi Snake ceremonials, as I have described (op. cit., p. 51). In the winter 
solstitial rites (Soyalui^a) a similar cross-shape paho is likewise manufactured, and 
called a wu-ka-si paho, or by some a Ka-wai-kn (Keresan) paho. On being asked if this 
cruciform object had not the same significance as that placed by the Castiiians over 
their missions, the maker responded, " No; I make it because I wish an ox I I want 
oxen with spotted bodies, and the spots I paint on the shafi of the paho represent those 
which I wish on the animal." The cross on the Sia altar shows Christian influences, 
according to Mrs. Stevenson. 

18 



Digitized by 



Google 



134 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [ Vol. VIII 

wands of turkey plumes standing in clay holders." The fine 
old stone implements (tcamahia) of the Antelope altar are com- 
parable with "two finely polished adzes, 12 inches long," and 
" two stone knives." * 

The paho, sacred meal, and pollen are common to all altars 
and are to be expected both at Walpi and Sia on the Snake altars. 
More will be said of the first of these objects when I speak of 
their delivery to the couriers. 

For the arrangement of the objects on the altar I have followed 
the description which unfortunately does not agree f with the 
figure (plate xv). Only two of the six tiponi are figured and the 
position of one of the sand-pictures is not clear to me. 1 am 
therefore obliged to limit myself to generalities and cannot carry 
a comparison into details. 

Of minor objects peculiar to the Sia altar may be mentioned 
the following : 

Tawaka, " gaming blocks and rings for the clouds to ride 
upon ; " Maickdriwapai, six direction's birds' feathers (see bird 
skins in my account of the Tusayan New Fire Ceremony) ; 
*' sacred honey jug (a gourd) ; *' shell with corn pollen ; rattle- 
snakes' rattles ; nakwipi (medicine bowl) ; miniature bow and 
arrow before each tiponi ; bear-leg skins and necklace of bear 
claws. 

Any or every sacred object efficacious to bring rain is naturally 
placed on the altar at Walpi, and, unless I am greatly surprised, 
the next ethnologist who describes the Antelope Snake sand- 
picture will find upon it a large specimen of the horseshoe crab 
(^Linmlus polyphemus)^ "giant tadpole," which I presented the 
priests in 1893. 

CEREMONIES AT THE TIPONI ALTAR. 

That part of the Sia snake ceremony which is described on 
pages 79-84 bears evidence of being composite, including at least 

♦As these are the same that the "medicine-maker" strikes togotlicr in making 
" medicine water," even Kakapti's act of beating the floor with a tcamahia (p. 2:<, Snake 
Dance), is not without a parallel at Sia. 

fMrs. Stevenson explains thiH difference in the following way: "Unfortunately, Ihe 
flash-light photographs of the altar of the Snake society made during the ceremonial 
failed to develop well, and, guarding against possible failure, the writer succeeded in 
having the homiaite arrange the altar at another time. The fear of discovery induced 
such haste that the fetishes, which are kept carefully stored away in different houses, 
were not all brought out on this occasion." 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] SIA AND TUSAYAN SNAKE CEREMONIALS 135 

two elements which are differentiated at Walpi, the invocation 
to the six world-quarter gods and the making of the cloud-charm 
liquid. The former of these necessarily presupposes the latter, 
and it is not unusual in other Tusayan rites (as Niman Katcina) 
to find them consolidated, although in elaborate observances like 
the Walpi snake dance they are distinct. I have tried to separate 
the elements of each in the Sia altar ceremony. The following 
acts, among many, I would refer to the making of the " medi- 
cine :" 

1, Gourdfuls of liquid pounded into the nakwipi (medicine 
bowl), with preliminary dedication by passes to the world quar- 
ters ; 2, Pebble fetishes, six in number, dropped in turn into the 
liquid with similar intent ; 3, Dipping knives into the liquid ; 
4, Addition of tochainitiwa (" a certain herb used by cult so- 
cieties to produce suds ") ; 5, Addition of meal or pollen ; 6, 
Smoking* above or into the liquid ; 7, Songs (incantations) and 
prayers. 

Mrs. Stevenson says (p. 81) : " The preparation of the medi- 
cine water began with the opening of the seventh stanza." I 
suggest that it began earlier or when the " maker of medicine 
water " " proceeded to consecrate the water " (p. 80). 

These elements of the Sia f ceremony about the altar I would 
compare with the making of the medicine in the Monkiva at the 
beginning of the snake ceremony at Walpi, where (as described 
on page 15 of my memoir) they are celebrated with modifica- 
tions in detail, but as a ceremony distinct from the sixteen-song 
ceremony enacted later in the day. In the remaining acts of 
this composite rite about the Sia sand-picture I find traces of 
what I have called in my Snake memoir the Sixteen-songs cere- 
mony, which is a consecration of pahos and 

INVOCATION TO THE RAIN GODS OF THE SIX WORLD-QUARTERS. 

The ceremonial acts referable to this component are like those 
of the same at Walpi: 1, Asperging to the world -quarters and 
upon objects of the altar ; 2, Striking stone implements on the 
floor or together; 3, Prayers and ceremonial smokes; 4, Purifi- 
cations ; 5, Delivery of the pahos to the couriers. 

* Ceremonial smokes are constant features at the opening and close of the making 
of the elouil-charm liquid in every great ceremony at Walpi. 

t At Sia the making of the charm liquid (medicine) is accompanied by posturing and 
dADcing. This has escaped me in Tusayan observance, in which this liquid is made. 



Digitized by 



Google 



136 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

The vein of similarity which runs through these and like com- 
ponents of the Sixteen-songs ceremony is so easy to trace, even 
when so much modified, that 1 have simply pointed out the ex- 
istence of similarities, but the prime essential of this component 
of the invocation is the prayer-stick, the paho, which may be 
said to be consecrated by these acts. 

In the paho of both Sia and Walpi societies we have tangible 
objects to compare, and an account of them naturally precedes 
a notice of their delivery to couriers. 

The Sia paho (of the snake ceremony ?), judging from Pis. 
XI, XII, and xiii,* differ somewhat from the Walpi (cf. pp. 
27, 71). No Walpi Snake or Antelope paho has a face or incised 
ferule cut on either shaft, and every paho has a package of 
meal (nuciata) tied to it, and a turkey-tail feather, a corn-husk, 
or the herbs pamnavi and kdrnyCl. These appendages are not 
represented on any of the paho figured in the Sia memoir. There 
are many other differences, but as the figures in plates xi, xii, 
and XIII are not specially described I am unable to carry my 
comparisons into details. The figures on plate xiii show a single- 
stick paho, but differ widely from the Snake paho and that of 
Masauw(ih, which are the only single-stick pahos used in the 
Walpi snake ceremony (see p. 27)t ; all the others are double. 

Sacred meal and corn pollen are used in the Sia as in the 
Tusayan rites. The latter is sprinkled on the head of the snakes 
by all the members in the ceremonials of the fifth day (p. 87") 
at Sia, and is used for the same purpose in the Walpi snake 
dance (p. 40, Walpi ceremony). In the legend of the Snake 
Hero it is said (p. 116) that the Snake people ate corn pollen for 
food. At certain times in the Sixteen-songs ceremony the altar 
is sprinkled with corn pollen, although meal is generally used. 

At the close of the Sixteen-songs ceremony at the altar of the 
Walpi Antelopes the pahos are given to a single courier (Kakapti) 
to deposit in the world-quarter shrines. Two bearers receive 

* Mrs. Sfcevenson does not state that the paho represented on plates XI, XII, and XIII 
are distinctively Snake paho, but figures them as hachamoni (paho) with or without 
feathers. As no one of them is distinctly referred to the Snake society, my compari* 
sons must be as general as her references to them. 

t My cut of this paho was drawn by an accomplished artist, Mr. S. F. Denton, from 
an original iL my collection, which was made for me in the kiva, with the others, by 
the Antelope priest, Masiiimtiwa. Dr Matthews' fear (Amer. Anth., October, 1894, p. 422) 
that it is faulty is perfectly groundless, as any one may see by inspection of the original 
and the copy. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895J SIA AND TUSAYAN SNAKE CEREMONIALS 137 

them, with a "litany," in the Sia celebration (pp. 84, 85). As 
nothing is said in regard to the place where the Sia pahos are 
deposited, I will simply refer the reader who wishes information 
on this point in the Walpi rite to my memoir (p. 35). 

The final event in the life of the altar was ita dismantling and 
the wrapping up of the fetishes and tiponi, between which there 
is a general similarity at Sia and Walpi. The efficacy of the 
sand and the use which is made of it has the same meaning in 
Tusayan and Sia, and pertains to many such pictures, as can be 
seen by consultation of my articles on other ceremonies. 

A paho is said to have been made for Spider woman in the 
Sia snake dance. Although I have not learned that the Tusayan 
Snake priests made one of these prayer emblems to this person- 
age, the details of the story of the Snake Hero would seem to 
call for one at their hands. Masauwuh is remembered at Walpi, 
as I have elsewhere recorded. 

CEREMONIES WITH LIVING SNAKES. 

Our knowledge of these rites at Sia is imperfect, and what 
has been recorded seems to have been derived from hearsay. 
The phraseology and kind of type used in the Sia memoir in 
the " account of the initiation of a member into the third degree 
of the Snake order " (p. 86) leaves me in doubt whether that 
which is recorded on page 87 was seen by the author or reported 
by the "vicar." The limitation of the first person singular of 
the personal pronoun to the smaller type implies that the larger 
type was a result of personal study, while the context indicates 
that all the "initiation " (pp. 86, 88) was given by the "vicar." 

I do not regard the rites described as primarily initiation cere- 
monials, but incline to the belief that we have in them frag- 
ments of several ceremonials, possibly worn down so much that 
the " initiation " is most prominent.* Every ceremony in which 
a novice participates for the first time he may regard as an 
initiation, as it is from his point of view. 

The following component rites are recognizable in the Sia 
"initiation:" 1, Snake Hunts; 2, Ceremonials (in log house) 
about an altar ; 3, Ceremony at the " cornstalk " bower, " grotto." 

* Of course it may be that in the more elaborate Walpi ceremony these have been 
differentiated from a ceremony like that of the Sia. 



Digitized by 



Google 



138 THE AMERICAN ANTHUOPOLOGIST [Vol, VIII 

The snake hunts at Sia took place, as at Walpi, on successive 
days in sequence corresponding to the north, west, south, and 
east world-quarters, and pahos were deposited in these at Snake 
shrines. The number of reptiles used at Sia is very small, but 
the signification is the same. The part which the novices ])lay 
in these hunts is not clear to me and I have never been allowed 
to witness the capture of a reptile on the snake hunts at Walpi. 
As at Sia there are " three members " of the Snake society, only 
the north, west, and south are visited for the collection of snakes, 
but the members must go to the east and deposit hachamoni 
(paho) to the snake honaaite * of the east. 

The snake hunts at Sia last four days, and on the fifth day we 
have the Sia abbreviation or representation of the Walpi ninth 
day.f The first of these are the rites in the " log house " about 
an altar (sand-picture), part of which is comparable with that of 
the Snake priests in the Wikwaliobi kiva. Different as the two 
ceremonials appear to be, I believe that this rite at Sia.is com- 
parable with the Walpi snake washing, when the reptiles are 
taken from the jars and violently thrown across the kiva. In 
the " log house " they are simply laid on the floor. ** The ritual 
begins with the rattle and song, and after the song the honaaite, 
passing before the line of women on the north side, takes a snake 
from a vase, and, holding it a hand's span from the head, ad- 
vances to the east of the sand-painting (which is similar in 
plate XIV, with the addition of two slightly diverging lines, one 
of corn pollen, the other of black pigment, extending from the 
painting to the entrance of the house) and lays it between the 
lines with its head to the east."" J " The snake is then placed 
around the throat '' of one of their number " novitiate,*' and later 
deposited in a jar. This is repeated with the other snakes. 

It seems incredible but by no means impossible that the weird 
snake washing at Walpi has a counterpart in this quiet rite, but 
there are several likenesses which lead one on to compare them. 
Both are highly modified, perhaps from an ancestral presenta- 

* Although it is not distinctly said who this Snako chief (honaaite) is, I think it will 
be found to be the equivalent of the Plumed Snake of the East, comparable with 
Palulukon. 

t With some elements of the seventh day, viz, the initiation ceremony in the 
Wikwaliobi kiva (see pp. 6it-65). 

X No mention is made of bathing the snakes, an essential feature in this ceremony 
at Walpi. I can only account for the women in the ceremony by supposing elements 
of the seventh day's initiation at Walpi are introduced. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April t895] SIA AND TUSAYAN SNAKE CEREMONIALS 139 

tion, but it seems to me that these modifications are not too great 
to render it improbable that they are the same.* If we remember 
that the Walpi use in their biennial snake dance sixty reptiles, 
it will readily be seen that it would take a long time to lay each 
snake by the altar, place it on a novice, and put it back in a jar. 
Allowing five minutes for this act with each reptile would make 
a ceremony five hours long at a minimum calculation. The 
germ of the idea which pervades both the Sia and the Walpi 
component is an introduction of the reptile to its home, the 
altar, and a sanctification of their prayers f by its presence. 

None of the Sia components thus far considered have any hint 
of the Walpi snake dance on the open plaza, when the hideous 
reptiles are carried in the mouths of the participants, the hor- 
rible acts which have furnished so much welcome material for 
sensational newspapers. Has the Sia celebration a component 
to compare with the public dance at Walpi ? 

The exercises near the grotto J are, I belive, comparable with 
those at the Walpi kisi (cottonwood bower) on the ninth day. 
At this time, however, at Sia, the reptiles are not carried in the 
mouth, but borne in the hands or passed into the hands of 
others. While they take place, songs are sung and rattles 
sounded, and at the close the reptiles § are released, one to each 
world-quarter. 

I cannot do better than to quote from Mrs. Stevenson's ac- 
count of the Sia snake dance to give an idea of this ceremony : 

** Upon the opening of the song and dance the ho''naaite procures a 
snake at the entrance of the grotto and holding it horizontally with both 
hands presents it to the novitiate, who receives it in the same manner, 
clasping the throat with the right hand ; the ho^'naaite and novitiate pass 
back and forth north of the line from the grotto four times. . . . The 
ho^naaite then takes the snake and returns it to the man in the grotto." 
At the close of this portion of the dance two or more men " are requested 

•If the Sin prients had sixty instead of three reptiles to place on the floor by the 
altar they might find it difficult to manage them, and find it expedient to throw tlie 
reptiles on the sand picture as the Walpi Snake priests do today. 

t The purport of the prayers to the snakes is an exhortation to them to intercede 
with the Cloud gods to bring the desired rains. I fail to find any more snake worship 
in the Sia than in the Walpi observance. 

{ This I suppose to be another name for "a conical structure of cornstalks bearing 
ripe fruit," which Is erected 70 feet east of the log house <p. 87). If I am right I would 
further compare this " grotto" with the cottonwood bower or Kisi at Walpi. 

SThe Sia Snake society is called Shuwi Chainn. Note the similarity of the Keresan 
word shuwi with the Hopi word for snake, tcua. 



Digitized by 



Google 



140 THE AMERICAN AXTHROPOLOGTST [Vol. VIII 

by the ho^'naaite to enter the grotto and receive the vases from the man 
inside. These they carry to a cave and . . . take out each snake 
separately. . . . The first snake is deposited to the north, the second 
to the west, the third to the south, and the fourth to the east ; this is 
repeated until all the snakes are disposed of" (p. 89, op. cit.).* 

Widely different as the acts at the Sia snake " grotto " are 
from the stirring events of the Walpi snake dance, with its 
fearless carrying of reptiles in the months, the many exciting 
episodes, and the wild rush of the participants t at its close to 
the four-world quarters, there still remains a likeness between 
tlie two.J 

Whether the resemblances between the Sia and the Tusayan 
snake dances are close or remote, it seems to me that it would 
be much better not to call the ceremonials at the *' log house " 
and "grotto" initiation ceremonies unless we are prepared to 
designate the Walpi snake dance by the same name. Mrs. 
Stevenson's informant called them so, perhaps, because he 
thought they were ; in fact, to him they were initiation novel- 
ties, but they bear marks of being veritable rites for rain. 

This examination of what is known of the Sia snake cere- 
mony has convinced me that what is needed most of all for 
future comparisons is a reinvestigation of this ritual and a veri- 
fication of many doubtful points. Personal studies of the cere- 
monials at the " log house " and " grotto " ought to reveal much 
more than we have. Mrs. Stevenson has done valuable pioneer 
work in her studies of Sia and is to be congratulated on the re- 
sults, and it is to be hoped that she or other ethnologists will 

* I confess I am at a loss to know how many snakns were used by the Sia, but this 
quotation leads me to believe a considerable number. On page 86 I read, "the number 
of snakes required depending upon the membership, the ratio being equal to the ' 

number of members. There must be a snake from each of the cardinal points, unless 
the membership is less than four, which is now the case." 

t The dress of the " Snake division" (p. 88) differs from the paraphernalia of the Snake I 

priests at Walpi. The Sia priests wear ** fringed kilts of buckskin with the rattle- , 

snake painted upon them, the fringes being tipped with conical bits of tin." The Walpi ' 

snake kilts are of cloth, fringed with triangular pieces of metal, also bent into cones, ^ 

with the headless body of a snake upon them. The moccasins of the Sia Snake priests 
are said to be painted with kaolin, those of the Tusayan are covered with red (iron I 

oxide). Plate XVII gives a picture of a Snake vice honaaite on whose kilt a head of i 

the snake is depicted. The head is absent and only the body remains on the kilt of 
Tusayan Snake priests (p. 79). | 

X ludefinite stories are current in Tusayan that eastern Pueblos have a snake dance i 

but do not carry the snake in the mouth. The Sia celebration would seem to show the I 

truth of these stories. I 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] SIA AND TUSAYAN SNAKE CEREMONIALS. 141 

rescue still more of the survival of the Sia ritual before it passes 
away forever. The ritual of the Pueblo Indians is praclieally 
virgin soil for the investigator and its cultivation is sure to 
yield valuable results. 

From the preceding discussion of material available on the 
Sia and Tusayan snake ceremonies, one conclusion of impor- 
tance is thrown into clear outlines. This ceremony at Sia and at 
Walpi has so many elements in common that we can conclude 
that they are parts of related rituals. Their identities mean 
contact, and cement stronger than has yet been possible the 
eastern and western Pueblo peoples. In connection with lin- 
guistic and documentary evidences, they show that in essentials 
the Arizonian and New Mexican Pueblo culture is the same. 
The fastnesses of Tusayan have received many groups of families 
from the Rio Grande region and assimilated with them. From 
them Hopi,,Tanoan, and Keresan fugitives have returned to their 
old homes. The Pueblos have been churned together over and 
over again too many times to allow the ethnologist to be able to 
distinguish ^* Moquis " from " Pueblos." 

One more word. Sia is said to belong to that linguistic group 
of Pueblos called Keresan. Acoma, where Espejo saw dancers 
with reptiles in 1582-'83, is of the same stock. Legends say that 
the snake dance is the cult of the oldest people of Tusayan. 
These facts mean something or, rather, several things, one of 
which is that the original Tusayan cult has kinship with that of 
the Keresan, the oldest of the linguistic stocks of the Pueblos. 



19 



Digitized by 



Google 



142 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



THE FIRST DISCOVERED CIT7 OF CIBOLA 

BY F. W. HODGE 

Through the labors of Mr. Adolf F. Bandelier* it has become 
quite definitely established that the region now known as Ari- 
zona was first visited by whites in the middle of the year 1538, 
when Fray Pedro Nadal and Fray Juan de la Asuncion (or de 
Olmeda) penetrated the southern part of that territory. . There 
the friars learned that to the northward were many-storied 
pueblos inhabited by people who wore clothing and possessed 
an abundance of turkis. This was probably the first news of the 
Pueblo Indians to reach Mexico, for although Nufio de Guzman 
about nine years previously (in 1529) heard of the existence of 
" seven towns " in the northern country, it is possible that the 
subsequently discovered " Seven Cities of Cibola " were quite dis- 
tinct from these. Indeed, mention of a suppositional group of 
" seven caves " in the new country was made soon after the 
Columbian discovery, while a legend of seven cities originated 
in the Old World as early as the ninth century, was imported to 
the New, and coincidently found its realization in the so called 
Seven Cities of Cibola. 

In September, 1538, or very shortly after the return to the 
City of Mexico of the two monks above mentioned, Marcos de 
Niza, a Franciscan friar, set out from the capital under authority 
and instruction from Antonio de Mendoza, then viceroy of New 
Spain, to explore the inhabited region of the far north. There 
accompanied Niza, as guide, a negro named Est^van or Est6- 
vanico, who had been a companion of Alvar Nuilez Cabeza de 
Vaca, Andr6z Dorantes, and Alonzo de Castillo Maldonado. 
These four survivors of the ill-fated expedition of Narvaez, 
which about 1529 was wrecked in the Gulf of Mexico west of 
the Mississippi delta, found their way to the Mexican capital 
after seven years' wandering and untold suffering. 

* Contributions to the History of the Southwestern Portion of the United States: Arch. 
Inst. Papers, v, 1890. Documentary History of the Zufii Tribe^ in Jour. Am. Ethnol. and 
Arch., edited by J. Walter Fewkes, iii, 1892. " 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] FIRST DISCOVERED CITY OF CIBOLA 143 

The story of Niza's journey has been more than twice told ; 
hence it is not necessary to repeat it in detail here.* The negro 
was sent in advance with a number of Indians, who were joined 
by others as they proceeded on their journey. While among 
the Opatas of Sonora, Estevan sent to Niza the first information 
regarding Cibola ; and as the friar hastened onward, being hospi- 
tably received by the Piman natives, through whose territory 
he was now traveling, the news of the populous and wealthy 
nations of the north received through runners sent by the negro 
grew more and more promising. The so-called despoblado, now 
covered in part by the White Mountain Apaclie Jeservation, was 
soon crossed, but when within two or three days' journey of 
Cibola the friar was astonished at meeting one of the Indians 
who had accompanied Estevan and learning from him that the 
negro and a number of his Indian companions had been killed 
by the Cibolans, and that those who had escaped were fleeing 
for their lives. 

It is not necessary to enter into details concerning the death 
of Estevan, nor to relate the causes which led to it. Friar Marcos 
held a parley with his natives, hoping to induce them to accom- 
pany him to Cibola, but they were so overcome by fear as well 
as so incensed at the death of their kinsmen, for which they 
held Niza responsible, that they not only refused to accompany 
him, but threatened his life. The judicious distribution of some 
articles which Fray Marcos had brought with him, however, dis- 
suaded the Indians from executing their threats, and he even 
finally succeeded in inducing them to continue the journey ; but 
when within a day's travel of the first village they encountered 
two more fugitives from Cibola, sorely frightened and covered 
with blood. The sight of the wounded and abject Indians re- 
newed the anguish of their brethren and it took Niza a long time 
to soothe them. 

Himself threatened with death by his Indian companions, the 
friar had no hope of entering Cibola, yet he was bent on obeying 
the orders of the viceroy, if his life should be spared, by at least 
looking upon the town. At last, accom panied by his own Indians 

*For fuller accounts see Bandelier, op. cit. ; also his "Discovery of Neto Mexico by 
Fray Marcos of Nizza^^ in Mag. Western History, September, 1886. Early Explorations 
of New Mexico, by Henry W. Haynes, in Winsor's Narr. and Crit. Hist. Am , vol. ii, chap, 
vii. W. W. H. Davis, Spanish Conquest of New Mexico. Reference to original docu- 
ments are given in these treatises. 



Digitized by 



Google 



144 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

and two chiefs of the tribe* whose people had been killed with 
Estevan, the obedient Niza made his way to the heights over- 
looking one of the towns. Here he erected a small cross, form- 
ally took possession of the country, and hastened back to Mexico. 
Upon his arrival he submitted to the viceroy a narrative of his 
exploits. 

Careful attention was apparently not given by the officials to 
Niza's reladoiij for there was a notable lack of discrimination be- 
tween the record of his personal observations and of the stories 
which were communicated to him by the Indians whom he 
encountered concerning the country and its wonderful riches. 
Consequently, when Coronado and his army, guided by Niza, in 
the following year found that Cibola comprised several villages 
of stone and mud, with no gold or other metals, their disappoint- 
ment knew no bounds, and the anger of the soldiers and the 
maledictions they uttered against the defenseless friar are men- 
tioned by both Coronado and Castafieda, neither of whom forgot 
to contribute his share of calumny. 

Mr. Bandelier has established quite satisfactorily that Niza was 
honest in his assertions, the fabrications concerning Cibola being 
recorded by the friar as having come to him through hearsay. 

It is regarding the identity of the village at which Estevan lost 
his life and which Niza observed from a distant height that ques- 
tion has arisen. The name of one of the Cibolan villages the friar 
learned from an old Zufii whom he found living with one of the 
Piman tribes and who had been a fugitive from Cibola for many 
years. This name was Abacus, and is identical with Ilawikuh, a 
pueblo occupied by the Zunis until about 1670, when the Apaches 
compelled its abandonment. It should be remembered, however? 
that the name Abacus was not applied by Niza to the pueblo 
visited by Estevan and seen by himself, nor indeed to any other 
j)ueblo ; hence the question as to which of the cities of Cibola 
was first discovered. 

The place of the killing of the " Black Mexican " is fixed by 
Zuni tradition at K'iakima, and this tradition Mr. Bandelier 
has attempted to substantiate by applying thereto the descrip- 
tion by Niza as well as by other documenUry testimony bearing 
on the point. It is my j)urpose to show that not K^iakima but 



* Probiibly the Sobaf puri PapHgos. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] FIRST DISCOVERED CITY OF CIBOLA 145 

Hawikuh was the town of Cibola discovered by Niza, that the 
latter village alone corresponds substantially with the settle- 
ment described by the friar, and that Zuiii traditional accounts 
of events which occurred over three centuries ago are not worthy 
of consideration as historical or scientific evidence. 

In order that there may be no difference in terms employed I 
will recite Mr. Bandelier's own translation from the Spanish of 
the description of the Cibolan village seen by Niza when he took 
possession in the name of the King of Spain of the territory 
now forming Arizona and New Mexico. 

Reviewing that portion of the friar's narrative relating to his 
desire to continue onward to Cibola after the death of Est^van 
and some of his companions, Mr. Bandelier says : " His Indians 
were unwilling to accompany him. They not only resisted his 
entreaties, but threatened his life, in atonement for the lives of 
their relatives slaughtered at Cibola. He pleaded and remon- 
strated, but they remained stubborn. At last two of their num- 
ber — ^ principal men,' he says — consented to lead him to a place 
whence he could see Cibola from afar. [Then quoting Niza :] 
* With them and with my Indians and interpreters I followed 
my road till we came in sight of Cibola, which lies in a plain 
on the slope of a round height. Its appearance is very good for 
a settlement, — the handsomest I have seen in these parts. The 
houses are, as the Indians had told me, all of stone, with their 
stories and flat roofs. As far as I could see from a height where 
I placed myself to observe, the settlement is larger than the city 
of Mexico.' . . . Here, again, in sight of Cibola [now con- 
tinues Bandelier], his Indian guides reiterated the statement that 
the village* now in view was the smallest one of the seven, and 
that Totonteac [Tusayan] was much more important than the so 
called Seven Cities. After taking possession of Cibola, Totonteac, 
Acus, and Marata for the Spanish crown, raising a stone heap, 
and placing a wooden cross on top of it with the aid of the na- 
tives, and naming the new land the * New Kingdom of Saint 
Francis,' the friar turned back, * with much more fright than 
food,' as he very dryly but truthfully remarks.''! 

♦The statement In his Gilded Man (p. 166) that Niza and his companions "at last 
reached a hill whence they looked down into a valley in which lay several villages** 
is an error ; but one village was seen. 

t Bandelier, Contributions, op. cit , p. 160, 161. 



Digitized by 



Google 



146 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

The natural approach to Zufii from the south westward, the 
direction whence Niza came, is by way of Little Colorado and 
Zuiii River valleys. Any other route from that direction would 
lead through a region of utter desolation, extremely difficult of 
travel by reason of its broken and arid character. The valley- 
through which Zuni river flows on to the Little Colorado part 
of the year, is easy to travel, and it may be reasonably assumed 
that water was abundant at or within easy reach of the sandy 
river bed when Niza's little force wended its way toward Cibola 
late in May of the year 1539. To have left the valley would have 
increased the distance which the barefoot friar must traverse, 
besides leading him over an indescribably dreary and rugged 
stretch. It therefore would seem that Niza, as well as Est^van, 
approached Zufii by the valley route over which Coronado, 
guided by Niza, went a year later — a route leading directly to 
Hawikuh, the southwesternmost of the Cibolan towns, and one of 
the two largest of the group. From the southwest K'iakima, 
which lies at the southwestern foot of T^aiyalone or Thunder 
mountain, in the eastern part of the plain, can be reached only 
by the tortuous route alluded to. Moreover, K'iakima was the 
most remote of all the Cibolan pueblos when approached from 
the southwest, Matsaki alone excepted. 

In the light of these facts, then, what would have been Niza's 
object in visiting KHakima, particularly when guided by unwill- 
ing natives, who evidently had visited Cibola before? Had he 
made a detour before reaching the vicinity of Hawikuh for the 
purpose of viewing K'iakima from the adjacent mesas, Niza 
scarcely would have used the words : " I followed my road until 
we came in sight of Cibola ; " * that is, the road he was follow- 
ing ; the only road.f 

The friar describes the pueblo as b'ing *' in a plain at the slope 
of a round height.'' This is one of the most significant points in 
the narrative in favor of Hawikuh. This ruin was surveyed by 

*The term Cibola is Bpeciflcally employed by Friar Marcos to designate the single 
village which he saw. 

t "Thnre existed, in 15)9, and prior to it, quite an intercourse between ZuQi and the 
land-tilling aborigines south of the Gila river. That intercourse took the form of jour- 
neys made by the Opatas, the Southern and Northern Pi mas, and poHsibly the Rudeve.s 
and Jovas, to Cibola-ZuHi, for the purpose of acquiring turquoises and buffalo hides.** 

Bandolier: Documentary Ilist.^ op. cit., pp. 3, 4. This being the case, there must 
have been a well-used trail for Niza to follow via ZuQi valley to Hawikuh, the only prac- 
ticable route. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] FIRST DISCOVERED CITY OF CIBOLA 147 

Mr. Cosmos Mindeleflf, and a carefully prepared ground-plan is 
reproduced in the memoir "Architecture of Tusayan and Cibola," 
by Victor Mindeleff, in the eighth annual report of the Bureau 
of Ethnology. This author describes (p. 80) the ruin of Hawikuh 
as " occupying the point of a spur projecting from a low rounded 
hill," a description coinciding precisely with that by Niza. More- 
over, Hawikuh is so situated in a plain as to command a view 
for miles in every direction * a situation worthy of the enthu- 
siasm of even the undemonstrative Niza, who described it as 
" the handsomest I have seen in these parts." K'iakima, perched 
on its inconvenient knoll of talus and cowering under the pro- 
tection of old Taaiyalone,t could not have conjured up this out- 
burst of praise from the honest old friar. 

K'iakima, it will be seen, is not in a plain. A view toward 
that pueblo from the southern heights is completely closed by 
Thunder mountain, which here seems to wall the very universe.J 
Furthermore, I am confident, through personal observation, that 
the mountain does not appear to be round from either the west 
or the south. 

Niza could never have been so deceived in the appearance 
of K'iakima as to have said : " Where I placed myself to ob- 
serve, the settlement is larger that the city of Mexico." Such a 
comparison might truthfully have been made with Hawikuh, 
however, situated as it was in a broad plain, with no beetling 
height to belittle it.§ 

Mr. Cosmos Mindeleff, who made a careful survey and study 
of the K'iakima ruin, informs me that in all probability the 
houses did not exceed one story. Those of Hawikuh, in the 
language of Mr. Victor Mindelefi", considering " the large amount 
of debris and the comparative thinness of sucli walls as are found, 
suggest that the dwellings had been densely clustered and carried 
to the height of several stories." In this connection it is of 

*See plates xlvii and xlviii of the Mindeleff paper referred to. The ruined church 
dates from about 1629. 

fSee Mindeleff, op. cit., plates lii and liii. 

}The view of the mountain shown in plate lix of Mindeleff's paper is from the west. 
K'iakima is situated near the corner at the right of the picture, Matsaki at the corner 
to the left. 

I Mr. Bandelier believes that the population of the City of Mexico could not have 
exceeded 1,0UO at this date. Hawikuh in 1510 numbered 200 warriors (Coronado says 
houses) or between 800 and 900 souls. Judging from the extent of the ruins of K'iakimn, 
its population could not have been half as great. 



Digitized by 



Google 



148 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

moment to observe that Niza speaks of the houses as " all of 
stone, with their stories and flat roofs," a reference that under the 
circumstances could not pertain to K'iakima. 

The reiteration of the Indians " that the village now in view 
was the smallest one of the seven " I believe to have been mere 
braggadocio, and contained as much truth as their allegation 
in the same breath that Tusa3^an was much more important 
than Cibola. Any statement to the effect that the smallest 
village of the Cibolan group was larger than the City of Mexico is 
incredible.* Niza has shown himself to have been a man of 
truth. The many groundless assertions of the Indians as re- 
corded throughout this and subsequent Spanish narratives 
speak for themselves.f 

Yet the clause " the village now in view " is of the utmost im- 
portance. Indeed, if there were no other evidence that Hawi- 
kuh was the village seen by Niza this would suffice, for inas- 
much as K'iakima is visible only from the southeast and south, 
there is no point of view from these directions that would not 
include Halona J (the site of the present Zufii), and from any 
point farther westward along the southern eminences Matsaki 
also would have been seen. From the heights south of the plain 
on which Hawikuh was situated, however, one village only was 
observable in the sixteenth century. That village was Hawi- 
kuh, and the massive walls of the ruined adobe church erected 
in the seventeenth century still rise above the plain. T'kanawe § 
(a triple pueblo of which Kechipauan formed a part), on the 

*The Postrerade Sioola (1540) says the largest village of the province "may have 
about 200 houses, and two others about 200, and the others somewhere between 60 or 60 
and 30." According to Vetancurt, Halona and Hawikuh were the largest villages a few 
years before the revolt of 1680, with 1,600 and " more than 1,000 " inhabitants respecti\roly. 
In Coronado's time Matsaki was regarded as the largest of the Cibolan pueblos, but it 
had degenerated during the following eighty or ninety years. Accepting the figures of 
the Fostrera, that three villages (Halona, Hawikuh, and Matsaki) had 200 houses each, 
the largest of the remaining four pueblos could not have exceeded 60 houses, or about 
260 inhabitants, while the smallest of the seven cities had but 30 houses with about 160 
occupants. The population of K'iakima therefore must have been between 150 and 
260, a figure far below what would have been regarded a fair comparison with the Mex- 
ican capital. 

fit will be remembered that the Quivira delusion was due to the misrepresentations 
of the Indian Rigotes. 

I And also Pinawa if that village was one of the group. 

g Tkanawe is the '* Canabi " of Oi^ate (1698), and was one of the Cibolan rities. It con- 
tains the standing walls of a stone church which in all probability was never finished 
or used. The village is not mentioned by Vetancurt, consequently it appears to have 
been abandoned between 1629 and 1670, the latter being the approximate dat« of the 
abandonment of Hawikuh. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] FIRST DISCOVERED CITY OP CIBOLA 149 

mesa to the southeastward, the nearest settlement to Hawikuh 
when that village was inhabited, could be seen neither from the 
valley below nor from the adjacent heights. Hawikuh, there- 
fore, necessarily must have been " the village now in view." 

Mr. Bandelier's belief that K'iakima was discovered by Niza 
is, it appears, based mainly on tradition. Concerning the visit 
of Est^van to the Zufiis, two accounts have been recorded by Mr. 
Gushing,* each of which places the scene of the killing at K'ia- 
kima. The text of one of these stories is approximately accu- 
rate ; the other maintains that the wise men of the K^-kA order 
took Est^van " out of the pueblo during the nightf and gave 
him a powerful kick that sped him through the air back to the 
south, whence he had come." A tradition so contorted by its 
authors that it bears but little semblance of its original form is 
worthy of serious consideration only in so far as it aids in estab- 
lishing the maximum age at which the authenticity of Zufii 
tradition ceases. 

Regarding the seven cities of Cibola, also, tradition is seriously 
lacking. The early Spanish names of five of the towns are : 
Magaquia (Matsaki), Coquimo (K'iakima), Aquico (Hawikuh), 
Canabi (T'kanawe or K'ianawe), and Alona (Halona). Thus 
far the identification is simple; but neither Mr. Bandelier nor 
Mr. Cushing has been able to identify satisfactorily the Aquinsa J 
mentioned by Onate in 1598, while the Zufii name of the seventh 
pueblo (the Spanish equivalent of which was never recorded) 
will in all probability never be definitely determined.§ It is 
quite apparent, then, that without the aid of Spanish records 
we would not know the names of any of the pueblos occupied 
by the Zufiis three centuries and a half ago (with the possible 
exception of Halona, the most recently occupied of the group), 
for the only names which the Indians are now able to give are 
those which bear close resemblance to the names preserved in 
Spanish records. Where these fail native tradition also fails. 

♦Arch. Inst PApers, op. cit, p. 154. 

t According to all the Spanish accounts, Est^ran was killed in the morning while at- 
tempting to escape. 

I Mr. Bandelier suggests Apinawa (= Pinawa) ; Mr. Cushing gives Ketchlna with a 
qnery, and Kwakina in different writings. See Jour. Am. Eth. and Arch., vol. iii ; 
Compte Rendu Congrds Int. des Am6r., 7me. sess. (18d8), Berlin, 1890 ; The Millstone, 
Indianapolis, April, 1884, p. 55. 

I Mr. Cashing has suggested both Hampassawiin and Pinawa, the latter being Bande- 
lier^s Aquinsa. Bandelier (Con<ri6utton«, op cit, p. 171) mentions Ketchipauan doubt- 
fully in connection with the seventh village. 

20 



Digitized by 



Google 



150 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

In further illustration of the untrustworthiness of Zufii tradi- 
tion, especially when dating from such a remote period as the 
one referred to, it may be remarked that the Messrs. Mindeleff, 
while endeavoring to gather from the Zufiis traditional data re- 
garding the coming of Coronado for use in connection with their 
archeologic studies in Zufii and Tusayan, found that they were 
acquainted only with the Spanish version, and uttered state- 
ments concerning incidents of the march that Indians could 
have learned only from recent contact with whites acquainted 
with the Spanish history of the discovery. Again, the Zuilis 
claim to have preserved a tradition of a visit to them by Cabeza 
de Vaca before the " Black Mexican " came.* That such a story 
could have gained foothold in Zufii only in recent years scarcely 
needs proof, for the question arose but twenty-five years ago, and 
since 1886 Bandelier has repeatedly and incontrovertibly proven 
that Vaca's route lay hundreds of miles away. 

In view, then, of the untrustworthiness of Zufii tradition, as 
above exemplified, can the persistent myth of the natives that 
K'iakima was the pueblo where Est^van met death stand in the 
way of such overpowering testimony to the contrary ? Should 
the story of the negro who by a powerful kick was sped through 
the air back whence he had come — a story suspended by a single 
strand of truth — ^take precedence as historical evidence over the 
statement of Jaramillo, who visited Hawikuh with Coronado 
only a year later and specifically recorded that " here was where 
they killed Estevanillo," or of the declaration in 162G of Fray 
Geronimo de Zarate Salmeron, who " mentions Hawikuh posi- 
tively as the Oivola of Fray Marcos and of Coronado " .? f It is true 
Jaramillo wrote these words some years afterward ; but would 
he have been more likely to err in such an important matter 
than would the unwritten story of the natives ? Furthermore, 
Jaramillo is supported by Castafieda, who, in Mr. Bandelier's 
language, " makes no direct mention of the locality, but it is 
plain that he labors under the same impression." Such an im- 
portant event in history as the scene of the murder of the actual 
discoverer of the ** new country," the strange forerunner of civili- 
zation in the Southwest, the first black man the Indians had ever 
seen, could not have been forgotten in a year. Coronado, writing 

♦ Haynes, op. cit., p. 483. 

t Bandelier, Contributions, op. cit., p. 171. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1805] FIRST DISCOVERED CITY OF CIBOLA 151 

frvm Bawikuh in 1540, says : " The death of the negro is perfectly 
certain, because many of the things which he wore have been 
found, and the Indians say that they killed him here." 

In 1893 Mr. Bandelier's GrUded Man appeared. Most unfortu- 
nately for the author, who was in South America at the time of 
its publication, the editing of the volume and the revision of the 
proofs were left to others, whose knowledge of Southwestern 
history was so scant that many errors were suflTered to creep in- 
Among these is a statement, contradictory of all the evidence 
presented in Bandelier's previous writings, to the efifect that 
Coronado did not go to Hawikuh, " fifteen miles southwest of 
Zuni, the village nearest to him,* but to * Oa-quima ' [K'iakima], 
hecauae [in the words of Jaramillo] the negro was hilled there.^^ I 
cannot believe that Mr. Bandelier would have allowed this state- 
ment to remain, since he has always declined as evidence the 
assertion of Jaramillo f concerning the village at which the 
n^ro was killed, on the ground that it was written years after 
his visit. If Mr. Bandelier 's statement is intentional, then it 
further substantiates the evidence which I have above presented, 
that Hawikuh was the pueblo at which Est^van was killed, as 
the Traslado de las Nicevas (Col. Doc. Indias, xix, p. 529) will 
attest. This document maintains that on the 19th day of July 
(1540) Coronado went *' four leagues J from this city [Granada] 
to see a rock where they told him that the Indians of this prov- 
ince had a stronghold, and he returned the same day." That 
the stronghold is the great rock mesa of T^iyalone, or Thunder 
mountain, on a knoll at the base of which stood K'iakima, needs 
no proof. It is the only impregnable height in the vicinity 
suitable for habitation, contains on its summit the ruins of de- 
fensive structures, is well known through direct statements in 
Spanish history under the name of the " Rock of K'iakima " as 
a place of refuge when the inhabitants of Cibola-Zufii fled from 
their villages in the valley in fear of Spanish or Indian invaders, 
and, as approximately stated by the Traslado, is situated four 

* Note the statement ** the village nearest to him," which also must have been the 
village nearest to Nisa and Est^van. 

t " En pocos dias de camino llegaron & la primera poblacion de Cibola, adonde mata- 
ron & E^tevanico de Orantes. "--i7«rrera, dec. K/, lib. tjtr, cap. xi, p. t05. Y aqui mataron 
4 Estebanillo el Negro, que habia venido con Dorantes, do la Florida, y volvia con fray 
M&rcos de Niaa."— JaramiWo Relacion^ in Col. Doe. de Jndia$^ XIV, p. SOS, 

I The distances given are somewhat underestimated. 



Digitized by 



Google 



152 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

or five leagues from Granada or Hawikuh — not K'iakima, which 
stood at its hase. 

Again, in the Gilded Man (p. 160), alluding to the mesas south- 
ward from Thunder mountain, from which, as Mr. Bandelier be- 
lieves, Niza first caught sight of Cibola, occurs the reference : 
" There, too, the remains of a wooden cross were visible till a few 
years ago. It has been supposed that this was the cross which 
the monk erected ; considering the dry atmosphere of the re- 
gion, the supposition, even if it is not probable, is not to be 
wholly rejected." 

My personal regard for the author refuses to make me be- 
lieve that this statement is made seriously.* The fact that the 
friar was possessed of " more fright than food," and had been 
reduced to the extreme of necessity, precludes the thought that 
he remained on the spot longer than was necessary to break the 
limbs of a tree with which to form a cross t (its arms, in all 
probability, being secured by a shred of his cassock), and to 
heap around its base a pile of stones. Could even a more stable 
structure have stood the snows of three hundred and fifty Zufii 
winters ? If a cross stood on this spot in recent times, we may 
more safely attribute its erection to the death by the wayside of 
some unfortunate Mexican, for such is the custom of his people. 

That Hawikuh was the village first seen by Est^van, who there 
met death ; that it was the " city of Cibola " rising from the plain 
which Niza and his Piman guides viewed from the southern 
heights in 1539, and that it was the pueblo which Coronado 
stormed in the summer of the following year, seems indisputable. 

* It will be observed that Mr. Bandelier does not claim that he saw the cross, nor does 
he gire the source of information. As no mention is made of it in any of his previous 
writings, I am inclined to believe that the reference is the work of the editor. 

t ** With the aid of the Indians, I erected on the spot a great heap of stones and placed 
on top a small cross, not having the tools necessary for making a larger one." (Nisa, 
quoted by Bandelier: Documentary History^ op. cit., p. 17.) 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] CLIFF RUINS OF CANYON DE CHELLY 153 



CLIFF RUINS OF CANTON DE CHELL7. ARIZONA 

BY COSMOS MINDELEFP 

Although Canyon de Chelly * is one of the best cliff-ruin regions 
in the United States, it is not easily accessible and is practically 
unknown. At the time of the conquest of this country by the 
"Army of the West" in 1846 and the rush to California in 1849, 
vague rumors were current of wonderful " cities " built in the 
cliffs, but the position of the canyon in the heart of the Navajo 
country apparently prevented exploration. In 1849 it was found 
necessary to make a demonstration against these Indians, and 
an expedition was sent out from Santa F6 under the command 
of Colonel Washingtoil, then governor of New Mexico. 

The expedition camped in Chin Lee valley, outside the can- 
yon, and Lieutenant Simpson, who accompanied it and who was 
much interested in the archeology of the country passed over, 
made a side trip into the canyon itself. He noticed a number 
of ruins, and one, subsequently known as Casa Blanca, he de- 
scribed. This is the first and practically the only description 
we have until the field was entered by the Bureau of Ethnology 
in 1882. Although at least two visits were made to the canyon 
in the intervening years, nothing came of them, and Bancroft 
could find no better or fuller description than that of Simpson. 
The canyon was surveyed by the writer in 1883 and all the ruins 
located, and late in 1893 some study of the ruins themselves was 
made, upon which the following remarks are based. 

The ancient Pueblo culture was intimately connected with 
and dependent upon the country where its remains are found. 
The limits of this country are closely coincident with the bound- 
aries of the plateau region, except on the south — so much so 
that a map of the latter, slightly extended around its margins, 
will serve to show the former. Tsegi is almost in the center of 
this country, on the western slope of the Tunicha mountains, in 
northeastern Arizona. 

On the east these mountains break down abruptly into the 

* CommoDly so termed. Its proper name, in Navajo, is Tsegi or Tsegihi. 



Digitized by 



Google 



154 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

broad valley of the Chaco. On the west they descend more grad- 
ually, through a series of slopes and mesas, into Chin Lee valley. 
The canyon has been cut by a group of small streams, which, 
rising near the crest of the mountains, combine near the head of 
the canyon, and flow in a westerly direction. The main canyon, 
known to the Navajos as Tsegi and to the whites as Chelly, is 
about twenty miles long, but it is joined near its mouth by a 
branch, coming in from the northeast, which is over fifteen miles 
long, so that there are practically two canyons. The second one 
is called by the Navajos Enatsegi, and on the maps Canyon del 
Muerto. There is another important branch, which joins the 
main canyon about thirteen miles above its mouth, coming in 
from the southeast. It is about ten miles long, and has been 
named Monument canyon. There are also numerous small 
branches, ranging in size from deep coves to real canyons one or 
two miles long. 

The Rio de Chelly, so called, flows through the canyon, which 
forms its upper course, and aft<er passing through Chin Lee 
valley discharges into the San Juan ; but except at the time of 
the autumn rains, and in the spring when the mountain snows 
are melting, the streams are not powerful enough to carry water 
even to the mouth of the canyon, the flow being absorbed by the 
deep sand which forms the stream bed. Ordinarily it is difficult 
to procure even enough water to drink less than 8 or 10 miles 
from the mouth of the canyon, but occasionally the whole stream 
bed, at places over a quarter of a mile wide, is occupied by a 
raging torrent, impassable to man or beast. Such ebullitions, 
however, seldom last more than a few hours. Usually water can 
be obtained anywhere in the canyon by sinking a shallow well 
in the sand, and it is by this method that the Navajos, the 
present occupants of the region, obtain their supply. 

The walls of the canyon are composed of brilliant red sand- 
stone, discolored everywhere by long streaks of black and gray 
coming from above. At its mouth it is about 500 feet wide and 
the cliffs are only 20 or 30 feet high. Higher up the walls some- 
times approach to within 300 feet of each other, elsewhere broad- 
ening out to half a mile or more, but everywhere the wall line 
is tortuous and crooked in the extreme, and while the general 
direction of Tsegi is east and west, the traveler on the trail 
which runs through it is as often headed north or south. Del 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 18951 CLIFF RUINS OP CANYON DE CHELLY 155 

Muerto is even more tortuous than Tsegi, and in places one 
could almost throw a stone across it. 

Near the mouth of the canyon the walls descend vertically to 
a wide bed of loose white sand absolutely free from talus or 
debris. Three miles above, at the junction of del Muerto, the 
walls are 200 feet high, but the rise has been so gradual as to be 
unappreciable ; 13 miles above, at the junction of Monument 
canyon, the walls reach a height of over 800 feet, about one-third 
of which consists of slopes of talus and broken rock. The rise 
in the height of the walls is so gradual that the traveler who 
enters at the mouth of the canyon loses the mental scale by 
which distances and magnitudes are estimated, and the most 
ludicrous guesses result. At first he fails to realize the stupen- 
dous scale upon which, the work was done, and when he does 
realize it he swings to the opposite side and exaggerates. An 
upright pinnacle or needle of sandstone at the junction of Mon- 
ument canyon has been variously estimated at 1,200 to 2,500 
feet high, although its base is less than 200 feet square ; it is 
actually less than 800. 

The rock of which the canyon walls are formed is a massive 
red sandstone in which the lines of bedding are almost obliter- 
ated. It is rather soft in texture, and has been carved by atmos- 
pheric erosion into grotesque and sometimes beautiful forms. 
In places great blocks have fallen off, leaving plane, vertical sur- 
faces extending from the top almost to the stream bed, 400 feet 
or more in height and as much in breadth. In the lower parts 
of the canyon the walls, sometimes of the character described, 
sometimes with the surfaces and angles smoothed and rounded 
by flying sand, are generally vertical and often overhang, de- 
scending sheer to the canyon bottom without talus or interven- 
ing slopes of debris. Higher up the talus becomes more and 
more pronounced, generally taking up from one-fourth to one- 
third of the height of the cliff, the upper part of which is always 
bare, vertical rock. At only one place in either canyon can a 
horse be driven in or out, except, of course, at the mouth ; but 
the Navajos have numerous foot-trails running over the bare 
rock, which slopes so sharply that they have to pick out little 
pits or holes for the hands and feet, and in one or two places 
they even drive flocks of sheep and goats over these trails ; but 
such travel is a matter of habit and practice ; certainly no man 
who wears boots would attempt it. 



Digitized by 



Google 



156 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

Near its mouth the whole bottom of the canyon consists of an 
even stretch of white sand, extending from cliff to cliff. A little 
higher up there are small areas of alluvium or bottom land in 
recesses and coves in the walls and generally only a foot or two 
above the stream bed. Still higher up these areas become more 
abundant and of greater extent, forming regular benches or ter- 
races, generally well raised above the stream bed. At Casa 
Blanca ruin, seven miles up the canyon, the bench is 8 or 10 feet 
above the stream. Each little branch canyon and deep cove in 
the cliff is fronted by a more or less extensive area of this bottom 
land. Ten miles up the talus has become a prominent feature. 
It consists of broken rock, sand, and soil, generally overlying a 
slope of massive sandstone, which occasionally crops out on the 
surface. With the development of the talus the area of bottom 
lands dwindles, and the former encroaches more and more until 
a little above the junction of Monument canyon the bottom land 
is limited to narrow strips and small patches here and there. 
These bottom lands are the cultivable areas of the canyon bottom, 
and their occurrence and distribution have dictated the location 
of the villages now in ruins, as they have also the sites of all the 
Navajo settlements in the canyon. Only a very small proportion 
of the available land is utilized by the Navajos, and not all of it 
was used by the old village-builders. 

Tsegi was until recently the great agricultural center of the 
Navajo tribe, and large quantities of corn, melons, pumpkins, 
beans, etc., were and are raised there every year. Under modem 
conditions many other localities now vie with it and some sur- 
pass it in output of agricultural products, but not many years 
ago it was regarded as the place par excellence. It will be 
clear, therefore, that prior to very recent times Tsegi would be 
selected as a stopping place by almost any tribe moving across 
the country, and, barring a hostile prior occupancy, would be 
considered the most desirable place for many miles in any direc- 
tion for the pursuit of horticultural operations. The vicinity of 
the Tunicha mountains, which could be reached in half a day 
from any part of the canyons and which must have abounded in 
game, for even now some is found there, would be a material 
advantage. The position of the canyon in the heart of the 
plateau country and of the ancient Pueblo region would make it 
a natural stopping place during any migratory movement, either 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] CLIFF RUINS OP CANYON DE CHELLY 157 

north and south or east and west, and its settlement was doubt- 
less due to this favorable position and to the natural advantages 
it offered. This settlement was efifected probably not by one 
band or tribe nor at one time, but by many bands at many times. 
Probably the first settlements were very old ; certainly the last 
are very recent. 

The essential uniformity of types which prevails over the im- 
mense area covered by the ancient pueblo ruins is a remarkable 
feature, and any system of classification which does not take it 
into account must be considered as only tentative. What ele- 
ments should be considered and what weight assigned to each 
element in preparing such a scheme is yet to be determined ; 
but probably one of the most important is the character of the 
site occupied with reference to its convenience and defensibility. 
There are great differences in kind between the great valley 
pueblos, located without reference to defense and depending for 
security on their size and the number of their population, of 
which Zufii and Taos are examples, and the villages located on 
high mesas and projecting tongues of rock ; in other words, on 
defensive sites, such as the Tusayan villages of today. Within 
each of these classes there are varieties, and there are also sec- 
ondary types, which pertain sometimes to one, sometimes to 
the other, and sometimes to both ; such are the cliff ruins, the 
cavate lodges, and the single-house remains. 

The unit of pueblo architecture is the single cell, and in its 
development the highest point reached is the aggregation of a 
great number of such cells into one or more clusters, either con- 
nected with or adjacent to each other. These cells were all the 
same, or essentially so, for while differentiation in use or func- 
tion had been or was being developed at the time of the Spanish 
conquest, differentiation in form had not been reached. The 
kiva, of circular or rectangular form, is a survival and not a de- 
velopment. 

The differences between the largest examples of villages on 
defensive sites and the smallest appear to be only differences of 
size. Doubtless in the early days of pueblo architecture small 
settlements were the rule. Probably these settlements were lo- 
cated in the valleys, on sites most convenient for horticulture, 
each clan occupying its own village. Incursions by neighboring 
wild tribes or by hostile neighbors and constant annoyance and 
21 



Digitized by 



Google 



158 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

loss at their hands gradually compelled the removal of their little 
villages to sites more easily defended, and also forced the aggre- 
gation of various related clans into one group or village. At a 
later period the same motive, considerably emphasized, perhaps, 
compelled a further removal to even more difl5cult sites. The 
Tusayan villages at the time of the Spanish discovery (1540) 
were located on the foothills of the mesas, and many pueblo vil- 
lages at that period occupied similar sites. Actuated by fear of 
the Utes and Comanches, and perhaps of the Spaniards, the in- 
habitants moved to the top of the mesa, where they now are. 
Many villages stopped at this stage ; some were in this stage at 
the time of the discovery — Acoma, for example. Finally, whole 
villages, whose inhabitants spoke the same language, combined 
to form one larger village, which, depending now on size and 
numbers for defense, was again located on a site convenient for 
horticulture. 

The process sketched above was by no means continuous. 
The population was in slow but practically constant movement, 
much the same as that now taking place in the Zufii country ; 
it was a slow migration. Outlying settlements were established 
at points convenient to cultivable fields, intended to be occupied 
only during the summer. Sometimes these temporary sites 
would be found more convenient than that of the parent village, 
and it would gradually come about that some of the inhabitants 
would remain there all the year. Eventually the temporary 
settlement might outgrow the parent and in turn would put out 
other temporary settlements. This process would be possible 
only during prolonged periods of peace, but is known to have 
taken place in several regions. Necessarily hundreds of small 
settlements, ranging in size from one room to a great many, 
would be established, and, as the population moved onward, 
would be abandoned without ever developing into regular vil- 
lages occupied all the year. It is believed that many of the 
cliff ruins belong to the same category. 

The cliff ruins are a striking feature, and the ordinary traveler 
is apt to overlook the more important ruins, which sometimes, 
if not always, are associated with them. The study of the cliff 
ruins of Tsegi has led to the conclusion that the cliff ruins 
there are generally subordinate structures, connected with and 
inhabited at the same time as a number of larger home villages 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] CLIFF RUINS OF CANYON DB CHELLY 159 

located on the canyon bottom, and occupying much the same re- 
lation to the latter that Moen-kopi does to Oraibi, or that Nutria, 
Pescado, and Ojo Caliente do to Zufii, and that they are the func- 
tional analogies of the " watch towers " of the San Juan and of 
Zuiii, the cavate lodges of the Rio Verde, the San Juan, and the 
Rio Grande, and the brush shelters or " kisis " of Tusayan ; in 
other words, they were horticultural outlooks, occupied only dur- 
ing the farming season, and not continuously then. 

It might be expected that the ruins of Tsegi, considering the 
topographic peculiarities of the region, would hardly come 
within a scheme of classification based on those found in the 
open country, and here, if anywhere, we should find corrobora- 
tion of the old idea that the cliflf ruins were the homes and 
last refuge of a race harassed by powerful enemies and finally 
driven to the construction of dwellings in inaccessible cliffs, 
where a last ineffectual stand was made against their foes, or the 
more recent theory that they represent an early stage in the de- 
velopment of pueblo architecture, when the pueblo builders were 
few in number and surrounded by numerous enemies. Neither 
of these theories are in accord with the facts of observation. The 
still later idea that the cliff dwellings were used as places of refuge 
by various Pueblo tribes, who, when the occasion for such use 
was passed, returned to their original homes, or to others con- 
structed like them, may explain some of the cliff ruins, but if 
applicable at all to those of Tsegi, it applies only to a small 
number of them. 

The ruins of Tsegi show several periods of occupancy, extend- 
ing over considerable time. They fall easily into the classifica- 
tion suggested and exhibit various types, but the earliest and 
latest forms are not found. In a general way they may be classi- 
fied as follows : 

I — Old villages on open sites. II — Home villages on bottom 
lands. Ill — ^Villages located for defense. IV — Cliff outlooks or 
farming shelters. 

I. In the upper part of the canyon and extending into what 
we may call the middle region, there are a number of ruins that 
seem out of place in this locality. They are similar to hundreds 
of ruins found in the open country, such, for example, as the 
older ruins in Tusayan, located on low foot-hiUs at the foot of 



Digitized by 



Google 



160 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

the mesa. The peculiar topographic characteristics of the loca- 
tion have not made the slightest impression on them. The ruins 
are located on gentle slopes, away from the clififs, the foot-hills 
of the talus as it were, and are now marked only by scattered 
fragments of building stone and broken pottery. The ground 
plans are in all cases indistinguishable. In only a few instances 
can even a short wall line be traced. The villages seem to have 
been located without special reference to large areas of cultivable 
bottom, although they always command small areas of such land. 
There is a remarkable uniformity in ruins of this class, in char- 
acter of site occupied, outlook, and general appearance. They 
are always close to the stream bed, seldom more than 10 or 12 
feet above it, and the sites were apparently chosen without any 
reference whatever to their defensibility. In fact, they are often, 
if not generally, commanded by higher ground in the immediate 
vicinity. Although as a rule ruins of this class are found in the 
upper part of the canyon, one of the largest examples occurs in 
the lower part. At the junction of del Muerto, three miles above 
the mouth of Tsegi, a large mass of rock stands out alone and 
extends nearly to the full height of the canyon walls. On the 
south it is connected with the cliffs back of it by a low tongue of 
rock, sparsely covered in places by soil and sand, and on top of 
this tongue or saddle, which is of considerable area, there is a 
large ruin of the type described, but no ground plan can now be 
made out. 

Possibly the obliterated appearance of this ruin and of others 
of the same class is due to the subsequent use of the material, 
ready to hand and of the proper size, in later structures. It is 
known that a similar appearance was produced in Tusayan by 
such a cause. The old village of Walpi, on a foot-hill below the 
mesa point, presents an appearance of great antiquity, although 
it was partly occupied so late as fifty years ago. When the move- 
ment to the summit of the mesa became general the material of 
the old houses was utilized in the construction of the new ones> 
and at the present day it might almost be said that not one stone 
remains above another. 

If similar conditions j)revailed in Tsegi there might be many 
more ruins of this class than those so far discovered. Even those 
found are not readily distinguished and might easily be passed 
over. Possibly there are small ruins of this type scattered over 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] CLIFF RUINS OF CANYON DE CHELLY 161 

the whole canyon bottom. At one place an example was found 
which shows no trace on the ground surface except some pot- 
sherds, which in this locality mean nothing. The site is a low 
hill or end of a slope, the top of which is perhaps 25 feet above 
the stream bed but separated from it by a belt of recent alluvium 
carpeted with grass. The hill itself was formed of talus, covered 
with alluvium, all but a small portion of which was subsequently 
cut away, leaving an almost vertical face 15 or 18 feet high. In 
this face the ends or vertical sections of several walls can be seen. 
One of them is nearly three feet thick and extends four feet below 
the present ground surface. Several other instances were found 
much resembling this. 

The filling of these ruins to a depth of four or five feet and the 
almost entire absence of surface remains or indications does not 
in itself necessarily imply a remote antiquity, although it sug- 
gests it. During the fall and early winter months tremendouif 
sand-storms rage in the canyon. The wind sweeps through the 
gorges with an almost irresistible power, carrying with it such 
immense quantities of sand that objects a few hundred feet dis- 
tant cannot be distinguished. These sand-storms were and are 
potent factors in producing the picturesque features of the red 
cliffs, but they are constructive as well as destructive, and cavi- 
ties and hollow places in exposed situations on the bottom are 
soon filled up. The stream itself is also a powerful agent of de- 
struction and construction. During flood periods banks of sand 
and alluvium are often cut away and sometimes formed ; yet 
there can be little doubt that the old village ruins on open sites, 
now almost obliterated, mark the first period in the occupancy 
of the canyon, perhaps even a period distinctly separated from 
the others. Excavation on these sites would probably yield 
valuable results. 

II. Ruins comprised in the second class are located on the 
bottom lands at the bases of the cliffs and without reference to 
the defensibility of the site. They are, as a rule, much broken 
down, and might perhai)S be classed with the ruins already de- 
scribed, but there are some distinctive features which justify us 
in separating them. Ruins of this class are always located either 
at the base of a cliff* or in a cove under it, and sometimes at a 
considerable distance from the stream bed. The ground plans 
can generally be distinguished, and in many instances walls are 



Digitized by 



Google 



162 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

still standing, sometimes to a height of several stories. The 
ground plans reflect the character of the site they occupy, and 
we would be as much surprised to find plans of this character in 
the open country as we are to find plans of class I within the 
canyon. Unlike the ground plans of class I, these of this group 
were laid out with direct reference to the cliff behind them, and 
which formed, as it were, a part of them. 

In point of size, long period of occupancy, and position, these 
villages were the most important in the canyon. The ruins often 
cover considerable areas, and almost invariably show the remains 
of one or more circular kivas. Sometimes they are located di- 
rectly upon the bottom land ; more often they occupy low swells 
next the cliff, rising perhaps ten feet above the general level 
and affording a fine view over it; sometimes they are found in 
alcoves at the base of the cliff, but they always rest on the bot- 
tom land, which extends into the alcoves and forms the floor. 
Ruins of the last-mentioned type merge insensibly into the next 
class, village ruins on defensive sites, and the distinction between 
them is partly an arbitrary one, as is also that between the last 
mentioned and the cliff ruins proper. 

The largest ruin in the canyons is of this class. It is situated 
in del Muerto, on the canyon bottom, at the base of a cliff, and 
is known to the Navajos as Pakashi-izinni (the blue cow), prob- 
ably from a pictograph of a cow, done in blue paint on the can- 
yon wall back of it. Traces of walls extend over a narrow belt 
against the cliffs about 400 feet long and not over 40 feet wide. 
Over this area many walls are still standing, and scattered over 
the site are a number of large bowlders. No attempt was made 
to remove these, but walls were carried over and under them, 
and in some cases the direction of a wall was modified to corre- 
spond with a face of a bowlder. 

About fifty-five rooms can now be made out on the ground, 
in addition to three kivas. There may have been altogether 
eighty-five or ninety rooms, but even this liberal estimate would 
give a population of only twelve or fifteen families, or, say, sixty 
persons. It seems, therefore, that, owing to the peculiarities of 
the conditions under which they lived and of the ground plan 
which resulted, one of the largest settlements in the canyon, ex- 
tending over 400 feet in one direction, afforded a home to a very 
limited number of people. As it is probable that each family had 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895J CLIFF RUINS OF CANYON DE CHELLY 163 

one or more outlooks, occupied in connection with their horti- 
cultural operations, it will readily be seen that only a small 
number of inhabitants might leave a large number of ruins, and 
that it is not necessary to assume either a large population or a 
long period of occupancy. 

One of the most striking and most important ruins occurs in 
Tsegi, seven miles above the mouth. This is the ruin seen 
by Simpson in 1849, and subsequently called Casa Blanca; it is 
also known under the equivalent Navajo term, Kini-na ekai, or 
White House. At first sight this ruin appears not to belong to 
this class, or rather to belong both to this class and the succeed- 
ing one, villages located with reference to defense ; but, as will 
appear later, it has nothing in common with the latter. 

In its present condition the ruin consists of two distinct parts: 
a lower part, comprising a large cluster of rooms on the bottom 
land against the cliflf, and an upper part, which was much smaller, 
occupying a cave directly over the lower portion and separated 
from it by a vertical cliflf about 35 feet high. 

The lower ruin covers an area of about 150 by 50 feet, raised 
a few feet above the bottom land by its own debris. Within this 
area there are remains of forty-five rooms on the ground and one 
circular kiva. On the east side there are walls still standing to 
a height of 12 and 14 feet. It is probable that the lower rum 
comprised about sixty rooms, which, with a liberal allowance for 
the rooms in the cave, would make a total of eighty. This would 
furnish accommodations for a maximum of ten or twelve fami- 
lies, or a total population of fifty or sixty persons. It is prob- 
able, however, that this estimate is excessive, and that the total 
population at any one time did not exceed thirty or forty persons. 

The principal walls of the lower ruin occur in the eastern part, 
where some of them are two feet thick and still standing to a 
height of over 10 feet Wherever a wall rises to a height of more 
than one story the lower part is massive and the upper walls set 
back five or six inches, reducing its thickness by that amount. 
All the heavy walls occur either about the kiva or east of it, and 
this part of the ruin is directly under the cave above. The cliflT 
back presents an almost smooth face, slightly overhanging, and 
on this face there are marks which show that formerly there were 
upper stories, the rooms of which are outlined upon it. The 
rock sur&ce was coated in places with a thin wash of clay, doubt- 



Digitized by 



Google 



164 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

less to correspond with the other walls of the rooms, but this 
coating was necessarily omitted where the partition walls and 
roofs and floors abutted on the rock. Although the marks are 
now so faint as to be easily overlooked, at a certain hour of the 
day, when the light falls obliquely on the rock, they can be clearly 
made out. At one point the structure was three stories higher 
than it is now, and the roof was within four feet of the floor of 
the cave and under a gap or gateway through the upper front wall. 

The kiva, which occurs nearly in the center of the lower ruin, 
was placed directly against the cliflf. This is an unusual arrange- 
ment ; but as the room walls in front of it are of a different char- 
acter from those on the east, it is probable that originally it 
formed the margin of the settlement on that side and opened to 
the air. 

West of the kiva there are remains of stone walls which differ 
in character from those on the east. They are 12 to 15 inches 
thick, and the lines are very irregular. South of the kiva, in the 
center of the ruin, there are other stone walls even thinner and 
more irregularly placed than those on the west, but most of the 
walls here are of adobe. As the use of adobe is not aboriginal, the 
occurrence of these walls is a matter of much interest, especially 
as they are so intimately associated with the stone-work that it 
is not always an easy matter to separate them. 

Adobe walls are not found in subordinate positions, dividing 
larger rooms, except perhaps in one instance. Apparently this 
method of construction was employed when it was desired to add 
new rooms to those already built. No room constructed wholly 
of adobe can be seen, but adobe walls closing one side of a room 
are common, and such walls forming two or even three sides are 
not uncommon. There are instances in which part of a wall is 
stone and part adobe, and also instances in which the lower wall, 
complete in itself, is of stone, while the upper wall, evidently 
added at a later period, is adobe. 

The mere occurrence of adobe here is evidence of the occu- 
pancy of this site at a period subsequent to the sixteenth century ; 
we might almost say subsequent to the middle or end of the seven- 
teenth century ; but its occurrence in this peculiar way and in 
such intimate association with the stone walls suggests that the 
occupancy of the site was continuous from some time prior to the 
introduction of adobe until a period long subsequent to it. This 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] CLIFF RUINS OP CANYON DE CHELLY 165 

hypothesis is supported by other evidence, among which may 
be noted the occurrence of four chimney-like structures in this 
ruin, all constructed of adobe, and all, except the one pertaining 
to the kiva, attached to adobe walls. 

The principal room in the upper ruin is situated nearly in the 
center of the cave and is the one which has given the whole ruin 
its name. The walls are of stone, two feet thick, twelve feet high 
in front, and seven feet high inside and on the sides. The ex- 
terior was finished with a coat of whitewash, decorated with a 
band of yellow. West of the principal room there is a smaller 
addition, which appears to have been added at a later period. 
The walls of this room are only about seven inches thick, of 
adobe on the side and back and of small stones in front. The 
coat of whitewash and the yellow band with decorations is con- 
tinuous over both rooms, but the white coat was applied also to 
the exterior west wall of the main room probably before the 
smaller room was built. 

In the western end of the cave there is a single or separate 
room whose front wall is eleven feet high outside and five feet 
inside. The lower portion of this wall is stone, the upper por- 
tion and sides are of adobe, and the side walls rest on nearly 
two feet of straw, ashes, etc. Against the front wall there is a 
buttress of stone, and the wall itself, which is slightly battened, 
rests on horizontal timber-work, a feature which is repeated in 
several walls in the main cluster. 

The use of timber laid horizontally under masonry is not an 
uncommon feature in the ruins here, although it seldom accom- 
plished the purpose designed. But the use of a buttress is an 
anomalous feature which it is difficult to believe was of aborigi- 
nal conception. Its occurrence in this ruin, together with so 
many other features which are either not aboriginal or doubtful, 
is suggestive. 

With the exception of the principal room and the rooms in 
front of it, all the walls in the upper ruin are of adobe or have 
adobe in them. These walls in the upper ruin generally rest 
on the rock, sometimes on ashes and loose debris ; in the lower 
ruin they rest generally on stone foundations. 

The village ruins, containing each one or more circular kivas, 
were the home settlements of the people, inhabited at the same 
time that the cliflf outlooks were in use. It is probable, fi-om 
22 



Digitized by 



Google 



166 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

evidence which cannot here be detailed, that some of them — the 
Casa Blanca, for example — were the last settlements to be aban- 
doned in the canyon, and that this final abandonment took place 
long subsequent to the beginning of the historical period, prob- 
ably considerably less than two centuries ago. 

III. The third class of ruins, the remains of villages in the 
location of which more or less regard was paid to the defensibility 
of the site, comprises a large number of examples, including most 
of the very striking ruins in the canyons. There is no well- 
defined line between this and the preceding class, but between 
selected ruins of the two classes there is a wide difiference. In a 
general way it may be stated that ruins of class II are always 
located on the canyon bottom or but slightly above it, while those 
of class III are never located directly on the bottom, but always 
at a greater or less elevation above it. There are some ruins of 
class III where, owing to the character of the site selected, access 
is now possible only with artificial aids, such as ropes and ladders. 
The number of these, however, is very few, not more than half 
a dozen in a total of one hundred and forty ruins, and there is no 
evidence that such aids were found necessary or were used by 
the builders. 

The sit^ occupied by defensive villages are of two kinds : one 
consisting of sites in coves in the rock corresponding to the 
examples already described, but higher up and approached along 
a narrow bench or over slopes of bare rock ; the other at the top 
of the talus. This division is artificial, however, and of no signifi- 
cance as regards the ruins. By far the greater number of ruins 
are located on the top of the talus, which often consists of a nar- 
row bench or platform forming a convenient site for habitations 
and affording a commanding outlook over areas of cultivable 
land below it. 

The best ruin of this class, and one of the largest in the canyons, 
occurs in the upper part of del Muerto and has been called 
Mummy Cave ruin. There are two caves, or more properly coves, 
in the rock, joined by a narrow ledge about 110 feet long. The 
western cove is about 100 feet across and 75 feet deep, and shows 
fourteen rooms on the ground. The connecting ledge shows ten 
large rooms, and the eastern cove, which is over 200 feet across 
and 100 feet deep, shows forty-four rooms and three or four kivas 
on the ground, the rooms occurring on a bench about 50 feet 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] CLIFF RUINS OF CANYON DE CHELLY 167 

wide. There may have been ninety rooms altogether, many of 
which could have been used only for storage. The total popula- 
tion may have been sixty persons. 

The rooms occur on a ledge or bench running around the backs 
of the coves. There are no traces of a kiva in the western cove, 
which could be approached only from the eastern part, over the 
intervening ledge and partly through the rooms which occupied 
nearly all its surface. The eastern cove, which is perhaps 80 feet 
above the ground, is of easy access over a slope of debris. In 
fact, a burro carrying a pack was driven up to and into it. 

The principal portion of the ruin is contained in the eastern 
cove. Many of the walls are still standing to a considerable 
height and exhibit a fair degree of skill in masonry. One of the 
kivas also is exceptionally well constructed. The rooms on the 
intervening ledge are exceptionally large and the walls are espe- 
cially heavy. The structure was continuous and its eastern 
portion still stands to a height of three stories, carrying its roof 
intact. The walls to the west are broken down to one story, 
but marks on the cliff wall show the former existence of an ad- 
ditional story over part, if not all, of the ledge. The masonry of 
this part of the ruin is exceptionally well finished, but, strangely 
enough, the front wall and the tower rest on compacted sheep 
dung about half an inch thick, and many of the walls in the 
eastern cove rest on heavier deposits of the same substance. As 
sheep were introduced into this country by the Spaniards, the 
occurrence of these deposits under the masonry is important. 

A fine example of this class of ruin occurs just below the 
mouth of del Muerto, on the north side of Tsegi. The cliflf 
here is about 300 feet high and the ruin is located on a ledge in 
a cove about 70 feet above the stream bed. Although apparently 
very difficult, the ruin is of comparatively easy access without 
artificial aid. The strata within the pocket where the site occurs 
are inclined at an angle of about 45 degrees, and their edges have 
weathered out so as to form a series of little benches a few inches 
wide and tilted at an angle. By the exercise of some agility one 
can ascend along them. 

The bench on which the ruin occurs is about 250 feet long 
and generally about 20 feet wide, the surface being almost flat. 
The structures are on the northern and the southern ends, but a 
considerable portion of the intermediate area was not occupied. 



Digitized by 



Google 



168 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

Many of the walls in the northern portion are apparently under- 
laid by a foot or more of ashes, sheep dung, and domestic refuse 
well compacted. 

There were two circular kivas in the village, one of which was 
unusually small, being but ten feet in diameter, and benched in 
part only. The interior is coated with a number of washes of 
clay, applied one after another, and now forming a coating nearly 
three-quarters of an inch thick. This has fallen off in places, 
and in the section thus exposed eighteen coats, generally about 
one-thirty-second of an inch thick, can be made out. These 
coatings or successive plasterings are separated from each other 
by a thin film of smoke-blackened surface. This feature of suc- 
cessive coatings in kivas is quite common in the canyon. 

The south end of the ledge was occupied by a structure whose 
use at first sight is not apparent. The front wall is very thick, 
slightly curved, and built partly over the sloping rock forming 
the back of the cove. There are no openings in it, although it 
still stands to a height of 5 feet above the rock. The structure 
measures 15 by 5 feet inside, one side being formed by the slop- 
ing rock. It is so situated that the sun shines on it only a few 
hours each day, and it seems more than probable that it was a 
reservoir, filled by carrying or lifting water from the stream below. 
This hypothesis is strengthened by the occurrence on the cliff 
wall back of the structure of pictographs representing tadpoles 
and other water symbols, which do not occur elsewhere on this 
site. This structure is especially interesting, as it is the only 
evidence found in the canyon of provision for the storage of 
water. 

Near the center of the site there are remains of a small struc- 
ture, apparently anomalous in the canyon. The bed-rock, which 
slopes slightly, has been removed over an area nearly 4 feet 
square, so as to leave a flat foundation, and on this there was a 
dome-shape structure about 3 feet in diameter, composed of 
mud and sticks, with a scant admixture of small stones. The 
walls were about 3 inches thick, and, from their slope, the struc- 
ture could not have been over 3 feet high. They were composed 
of mud, held together by thin sticks or branches curved with 
the wall, apparently some kind of vine twisted together and in- 
corporated in it. 

If this structure was a dome-shape oven, and it is difficult to 
Imagine it anything else, its occurrence here is important. It is 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] CLIFF RUINS OF CANYON DE CHELLY 169 

well known that the dome-shape oven, which is very common 
in all the Pueblo villages, in some being almost numbered by 
hundreds, is not an aboriginal feature, but was borrowed out- 
right from the Mexicans. If the example described was used 
as an oven, it is clear evidence of the occupancy of these ruins 
within the historic period. No other structure of this kind was 
found in the canyon, however, and it should be stated that the 
ovens of the Pueblos are, as a rule, larger in size and constructed 
of masonry. There is a suggestion here, which is borne out by 
other evidence, that only the idea of these structures was brought 
into the canyon, without detailed knowledge of how to carry it 
out, as if, for example, they were built by novices from descrip- 
tion only. 

IV. Ruins comprised in the class designated as cliff outlooks 
or farming shelters are b3' far the most numerous in the canyon. 
They are located on various kinds of sites, but always with ref- 
erence to some area of cultivable land which they overlook, and 
seldom if ever was the site selected under the influence of the 
defensive motive. The separation of this class of ruins from the 
preceding, village ruins, while clear and definite enough in the 
main, is far from absolute. The sole criterion we have is the 
presence or absence of the kiva, as the sites are essentially simi- 
lar ; but this in itself is a sufficient test. Settlements occupied 
only temporarily have no kivas, while those which were regu- 
larly inhabited must necessarily have had one or more. It 
might happen that the kiva would be so far obliterated as to be 
no longer distinguishable, but the number of cases in which this 
might have occurred is small. Moreover, the walls of the kivas, 
as a rule, were more solid and heavy than those of the dwellings, 
and in some cases have survived when the latter have almost 
disappeared. 

Remains of this class comprised, as a rule, only one or two 
rooms ; seldom as many as four. The masonry is generally good, 
sometimes excellent, and openings are arranged wherever con- 
venience dictated. Often there is evidence of an enlargement or 
addition of one or more rooms at a period subsequent to the 
completion of the first structure. Some of the sites are 300 or 
400 feet above the bottom ; others not more than 10 or 12 feet. An 
example of the latter occurs at a point opposite the mouth of 
del Muerto. Here there is a large mass of rock connected with 
the cliflf back of it by a low saddle, also of rock. The edge of 



Digitized by 



Google 



170 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

this rock, which may be 30 feet high, is bare and descends sheer 
or with an overhang to the bottoms or to the stream bed. On 
the western side, facing north, there is a little cave about 12 feet 
from the ground and overlooking a large area of cultivable land 
which lies before it. The cave is very small, but was divided by 
cross- walls into three parts. The back part is a completely 
enclosed space, dark, and not large enough to contain a human 
body, unless it was carefully packed in. 'i'he interior was wet 
and mouldy when examined (in winter), but in the summer time 
is probably dry enough. 

The masonry is fair and the surface was finished with mud 
plaster. In front of the little back room there is an open space, 
divided by a wall into a smaller and a larger part. The roof of 
this space and the outer wall of the back room are much black- 
ened by smoke, as though the inhabitant, for there could hardly 
have been more than one, cooked his food here and used the 
small room only to store his utensils and implements. The site 
is an ideal one for a lookout, but not well suited for habitation. 
There are numerous examples where, like this, the restricted 
area of the site precludes any possibility that they formed part 
of larger settlements since partly obliterated. 

Many sites which bear unmistakable evidence of occupancy 
at some period are entirely bare of walls or wall remains ; many 
others are marked by storage cists and burial cists of the Navajos. 
It seems probable that some of these were used just as they are 
now, the overhanging cliff affording such shelter as was neces- 
sary for the use to which they were put. 

There are many interesting details and much evidence to sup- 
port the hypothesis which has been advanced here, which can- 
not even be touched in this article. To properly present all the 
evidence would require much space. It is remarkable that, 
notwithstanding all that has been written about the cliff ruins, 
there is little direct evidence to support the hypothesis that they 
are defensive structures. Few, if any, examples can be cited 
which show anything that can be construed as the result or the 
effect of the defensive motive, except the general impression pro- 
duced on the observer. Nor, on the other hand, do these ruins 
as a whole give any support to the theory that they represent an 
intermediate stage in the development of the Pueblo people. 
Some few do perhaps, but more than 99 per cent., if studied by 
themselves and without a reasonably full knowledge of modern 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] CLIFF RUINS OF CANYON DE CHELLY 171 

pueblo structures, would lead rather to the conclusion that the}' 
are the ultimate development of pueblo architecture, for they con- 
tain evidence of a knowledge of construction equal if not superior 
to that exhibited in many of the modern villages. The only thing 
anomalous or distinctive about the cliff ruins, considered as an 
element of pueblo architecture, is the character of the site occu- 
pied. If this were dictated by the defensive motive, it would 
seem that the same motive would have a further influence, affect- 
ing to some extent at least the arrangement of rooms or the 
character of the masonry, but there is no evidence of this. 

An hypothesis as to the order in which sites of the various 
types of ruins were occupied cannot be based on the present 
condition of the remains. It is more than likely that the older 
ruins served as quarries of building material for succeeding struc- 
tures erected anywhere near them, and probably some of the 
cliflf ruins themselves served in this way for others. The Navajos 
have contributed their part to the destruction, for, notwithstand- 
ing their horror of contact with the remains of the dead, quite a 
number of buildings have been erected by them constructed of 
material derived from adjacent ruins ; and it is evident that to 
gather this material would be a much lighter task than to quarry 
and prepare it, no matter how roughly the latter might be done. 

In a study of the ruins of the valley of the Rio Verde made 
some years ago, a suggestion was made of the order in which ruins 
of various kinds succeeded one another, a sort of chronologic 
sequence, of which the beginning in time could not be determined. 
Studies of the ruins and inhabited villages of the old province 
of Tusayan (Hopi or Moki) and of Cibola (Zufii) and a slight 
examination made of ruins on Gila river show that they all fall 
easily into the same general order. This order is somewhat as 
follows : 1. The earliest form of pueblo house is doubtful. As 
a rule, in most localities the earliest form found is already well 
advanced. As it is now known that the ancient Pueblo region 
was not inhabited by a vast number of people, but by a compara- 
tively small number of little bands, each in slow but practically 
constant movement, this condition is what we would expect to 
find. It is probable that the earliest settlements consisted of 
single houses or small clusters located in valleys convenient to 
areas of cultivable land and on streams or near water. 2. The 
next step gives us villages, generally of small size, located on 
the foot-hills of mesas, overlooking areas of good land, which 



Digitized by 



Google 



172 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

were probably under cultivation. This class comprises perhaps 
more examples than any other, and many of these examples 
come well within the historic period. 3. In some localities* 
though not in all, the small villages were subsequently moved to 
higher and more inaccessible sites. This change has taken place 
in Tusayan in the historic period, and in fact was not com- 
pleted even fifty years ago. The pueblo of Acoma was in this 
stage at the time of the Spanish conquest and has remained so 
to the present day. As a rule, each small village preserved its 
independence, but in some cases they combined together to 
occupy a high defensible site. 4. The final stage in the develop- 
ment of pueblo architecture is the large, many-storied or beehive 
village, located generally in the midst of broad valleys, generally 
near some stream, and depending on its size and population for 
defense. In this class of structure the defensive motive, in so far 
as it affected the choosing of a site, entirely disappears, although 
in general it was at this period that it exerted its strongest in- 
fluence. The largest existing pueblo, Zufii, made this step at 
the beginning of the eighteenth century. Taos, the next largest, 
was in this stage in 1541, and has remained so since. In some 
cases villages on foot-hill sites (2) have passed directly into 
many-storied pueblos on indefensible sites (4). 

There is another step in the process of development that is 
now being taken by many villages which, although an advance 
from an industrial point of view, is degeneration to the archi- 
tectural student. Many of the Pueblo Indians have built single 
houses in the valleys and on the bottom lands, wherever most 
convenient to the fields under cultivation, and this movement, 
which commenced but little over ten years ago, is proceeding at 
a steadily accelerating pace. Its ultimate result is of course the 
complete destruction of pueblo architecture as a phase of Indian 
culture, and whatever we wish to know of that architecture we 
must learn now, for two generations hence probably nothing will 
remain of it. 

This hasty sketch will illustrate some of the difficulties which 
lie in the way of a complete classification of the ruins in the 
Pueblo country. It is impossible to arrange them in chronologic 
sequence, because they are the product of different tribes who 
at different times came under the influence of analogous causes, 
and results were produced similar in themselves but different in 
time. It is believed, however, that the classification suggested 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] CLIFF RUINS OF CANYON DE CHELLY 173 

exhibits a cultural sequence and probably a chronologic sequence 
within each tribe. 

No mention of the cliff ruins has been made in this classifica- 
tion. These structures belong partly to the class of villages on 
defensive sites (3), but principally to a subclass which pertains 
more or less to all the classes. In the early stages of pueblo 
architecture the people lived directly on the land they tilled ; 
later the villages were located on low foot-hills overlooking the 
land, but in this stage some of the villages had already attained 
considerable size and the lands overlooked by them were not 
sufficient for their needs. As a consequence, some of the inhab- 
itants were compelled to work fields at a distance from the 
home village, and as a matter of convenience small temporary 
shelters were erected near the place of work. In a still later 
stage, when the villages were removed to higher and more easily 
defended sites, the number of farming shelters must necessarily 
have increased, as suitable .sites which also commanded large 
areas of good land could not often be found. At a still later 
stage, when the inhabitants of a number of small villages com- 
bined into a single large one, this difficulty was increased still 
more, and it is in this stage that the construction of farming 
shelters received its maximum development. Often whole vil- 
lages of some size, sometimes many miles from the home pueblo, 
were only farming shelters. These villages, like the single-room 
shelters, were occupied only during the farming season — not con- 
tinuously, but periodically. In the winter the inhabitants aban- 
doned them entirely and retired to the home village. Such is 
the practice also today. 

It is significant that none of these subordinate villages possess 
a kiva. It is believed that the cliff ruins and cavate lodges, 
which are merely variants of each other, due to geological con- 
ditions, are simply farming shelters of another type produced 
by a certain topographic environment. 

The absence of any attempt to improve the natural advan- 
tages of the sites used is remarkable, if we accept the hypothesis 
that the ruins were defensive structures. No expedients were 
employed to make access more difficult; the cavities in which 
the ruins occur are always natural ; they are never enlarged or 
curtailed in the slightest degree, and very rarely is the cavity 
itself treated as a room, although there are some excellent sites 
for such treatment. 
23 



Digitized by 



Google 



174 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST fVol. Vlll 

The settlements were al\va3'8 located with reference to the 
canyon bottom, and access was never had from above, notwith- 
standing that in some cases access from above was easier than 
from below. There are many instances where slight works on 
the approaches to sites would increase their defensive value a 
hundredfold, but such work was never done. Regarded as })laces 
of habitation, the cliff ruins are an^^thing but ideal sites, and it 
would certainly seem that an influence strong enough to bring 
about the occupancy of such inconvenient and unsuitable sites 
would also be strong enough to bring about some modification 
in the architecture, such as would render more suitable sites 
available. Moreover, there is but one instance in the canyon, so 
far as known, where provision was made for the storage of water ; 
yet without water the strongest " fortress " in the canyon could 
not withstand a siege of forty-eight hours. 

There are many difficulties in the way of the hypothesis that 
the cliff ruins were defensive structures. If, however, we con- 
sider them farming outlooks, occupied during the farming sea- 
son, and then only for a few days or weeks at one time, after the 
manner that such outlooks are used by the Pueblo Indians to- 
day, most of the difficulties vanish. The apparent inaccessi- 
bility of many of the sites disappears on close examination ; and 
we must not forget, moreover, that sites really difficult of access 
to us would not necessarily be so regarded by a people accus- 
tomed to that manner of life. 

Finally, as bearing on the antiquity of these ruins, it may be 
stated that there is good evidence of an occupancy within historic 
times, probably in the seventeenth and perhaps in the eighteenth 
century. Moreover, nearly every one of the clans who compose 
the Hopi tribe and who reached Tusayan from various directions 
and at various times, some within the historic period, claim to 
have lived at one time or another in Tsegi. Further, there is 
a tradition among the Navajos, now confined to a few of the 
old men, covering the occupancy of the canyon, and the ruins of 
Mummy cave. White House, and one other are pointed out as 
places where monks were stationed. To more than ninety-nine 
in a hundred Navajos, however, this tradition is unknown, and 
if asked what became of the dwellers in the cliffs they will say 
that a great wind arose and swept them all away. The wind 
failed, however, to sweep away the internal constructive and 
architectural evidence, which confirms the older tradition. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1805] OBIT I' A HIES 175 



OBITUARIES 
Robert Henry Lamborn 

In the American ANTiiROPOLdoiST for A[)ril, 1893 (volume vi, 
page 223), the following announcement a[)pearecl : **A member 
of the Anthropological Society of Washington has placed in the 
hands of the Treasurer of the Society a sum of money, to be 
awarded in prizes for the clearest statements of the elements that 
go to make up the most useful citizen, regardless of occupation." 
Later numbers of the journal contained announcements of the 
selection of a distinguished Board of Commissioners of Award, 
and of the awarding of prizes to two out of the forty-two essays 
received under the terms of the com})etition from seventeen 
states of the Union and five foreign countries. The name of 
the founder of the prizes was not given in any of these notices. 
It is a melancholy pleasure to announce that the founder was 
the late Dr. Robert H. Lamborn, of New York. 

Robert H. Lamborn was born in 1836, near Kennett Square, 
Chester county, Pennsylvania. After acquiring a liberal educa- 
tion in this country he matriculated at the University of Geissen, 
in Germany, where he made special studies in mining and metal- 
lurgy and obtained the degree of Ph. D. ; afterward he took a 
course in the Ecole des Mines, Paris. Returning to this country 
in the early sixties, he engaged in railway business in Pennsyl- 
vania, and subsequently became interested in the construction 
of railways in southwestern states, and was an active promoter 
and large owner of the Mexican Central Railway. Through 
these enterprises he amassed a fortune, and later, on retiring 
from active business about 1887, devoted himself to scientific 
and literary studies. 

For many years he was secretary of the American Iron and 
Steel Association, and his earlier publications were chiefly tech- 
nologic; among them are "A Rudimentary Treatise on the Metal- 
lurgy of Copper," London, 18G0, and **A Rudimentary Treatise 



Digitized by 



Google 



176 TJiE amp:rican anthropologist [Vol. Vlll 

on the Metallurgy of Silver and Lead," London, 186L Numerous 
editions of the latter work have appeared. His later years were 
occupied in travel and in study of a wide range of subjects ; he 
was an indefatigable collector and generous distributor of mate- 
rial pertaining to the fine arts, history, ethnology, biology, geol- 
ogy, and mineralogy, and his donations have enriched the Metro- 
politan Museum of Art and the American Museum of Natural 
History in New York, the Museum of Archeology in the Uni- 
versity of Pennsylvania, and other institutions, including the 
United States National Museum in Washington. His private 
library, numbering several thousand volumes, and certain special 
collections were deposited in the University of Pennsylvania. 
Through personal encouragement of investigation and through 
the establishment of funds, he did much to promote research 
concerning scientific subjects. He was connected with numer- 
ous learned societies. His later studies were devoted largely to 
art ; his last important publication was a work on " Mexican 
Painting and Painters,'' New York, 1891. 

Dr. Lamborn's business associations in earlier years and ex- 
tensive journeyings in later years brought him in contact with 
all classes of men, and he became a keen student of men and 
institutions ; and his opportunities, coupled with a kindly dis- 
position, served to render him a philanthropist whose energy 
and means were devoted in large yet provident measure to the 
welfare of mankind. The anonymous founding of the Citizen- 
ship prizes of the Anthropological Society was but a character- 
istic incident of his career. Many such incidents might be noted, 
though there is reason to opine that most of his philanthropic 
acts were so modestly performed as to leave no record save in 
the minds of the widely dispersed beneficiaries. Industrious, 
energetic, and sagacious. Dr. Lamborn was a successful business 
man; amiable, upright, and generous, he was a useful niember 
of society ; in all ways he was a noteworthy contributor to the 
material and intellectual progress of the world. By constant 
activity throughout his adult life he contributed more to than 
he absorbed from his country, and was thus in himself a model 
of citizenship, and in his death the progressive nineteenth-cen- 
tury world lost one of its makers. 

Dr. Lamborn died unmarried January 14, 1895; a brother 
and sister survive him. W J McGke. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 18J)5] UBITUAIUKS 177 

Franklin Austin Seely 

A serious loss has befallen Ainerican anthr()])olo<j:y in the death, 
at Washington, February 6, 1895, of Franklin Austin Seely, in 
the sixty-first year of his age. 

Colonel Seely was born in Seely ville, Pennsylvania, April 4, 
lHt34, graduating at Yale college in the class of 1855. During 
the war of the rebellion he was assistant quartermaster of volun- 
teers, and was discharged in 18G7 with the brevet rank of lieu- 
tenant colonel. In 1876 he entered the civil service as assistant 
examiner in the United States Patent Office. In April, 1877, he 
was appointed chief clerk of the office, surrendering the position, 
however, in June, 1880, to accei)t the appointment of principal 
examiner, having charge of the philosophical division, to which, 
upon his accession, was added the division of trade-marks. In 
1887 the United States acceded to the International Union for 
the Protection of Industrial Pro})erty, and to Colonel Seely was 
assigned the task of reviewing the Convention of Paris. His 
interpretations of that technical convention have been univer- 
sally accepted, both in this country and abroad. It may safely 
be said that the mind of Examiner Seely was the only one in 
this country which by previous experience and training was 
adapted to follow with clearness and precision the scope and 
significance of the many questions arising within the office or 
referred to it touching the international relations of these recon- 
dite property interests. During the terms of Secretaries Bayard 
and Blaine the De])artment of State frcfjuently had occasion to 
.seek the aid of his opinions. In recognition of his eminent fit- 
ness for the duty, Secretary Blaine, in 1890, designated him as a 
delegate from the United States to the International Patent Con- 
ference held at Madrid during the summer of that year. His 
writings on the international protection of industrial property 
and allied subjects for use before patent congresses and conven- 
tions have been widely distributed. 

But it is in his researches in tKe fields of anthropology that 
the name of Colonel Seely is best known. While he was not a 
charter member of the Anthropological Society of Washington, 
which was founded in February, 1S79, the records show him a 
member of the Board of Managers in the following year, and for 



Digitized by 



Google 



178 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VI Jl 

ten successive years he gave his best services to the Society as 
secretary to this working body of the organization. In this forma- 
tive period of the Society's existence his trained faculty of analysis 
and investigation was highly instrumental in laying broad and 
strong foundations for the future growth of anthropology in this 
country. As a contributor to the proceedings of the Society, both 
in stated papers and in discussions, he was always ready, accu- 
rate, and convincing. His mind was eminently practical, and 
the reabn of industrial technology opened to him an inexhausti- 
ble field of investigation. His treatise on " The Genesis of In- 
ventions " will long remain one of the clearest expositions of the 
science of eurematics. The records of the Society show other 
papers upon cognate topics, such as that entitled "Time-keeping 
among the Greeks and Romans,'' a most felicitous monograph 
upon a hitherto little considered subject. 

Versatile, accomplished, practical, wise, the pages of his busy 
life are marked with monuments of work in many fields faith- 
fully done. The tribute of the Latin poet is eminently his: 
Inteyer mtae scelerisque punts, 

P. B. Pierce. 



Joaquin Garcia Icazbalceta 

Joaquin Garcia Icazbalceta was born at the Mexican capital 
August 21, 1825, and died in his native city November 2G, 1894. 
His father was Eusebio Garcia, of Spain, and his mother a Mex- 
ican lady of Spanish extraction from the Vas(|ue provinces. In 
the year 1829 his family came to the United States, where they 
remained for some time, and from there went to S]>ain, return- 
ing to Mexico in 1886. 

Young Icazbalceta received very little education ; his youth 
was spent mainly in his fiither s mercantile establishment, and 
most of his learning he gained at home. He early devoted him- 
self to the study of the English language, and his peculiar apti- 
tude enabled him soon to translate Prescott's " Conquest of Peru," 
to which he added an appendix bringing the history to date. 
Before this time, however, he published an analytical criticism 
of Prescott's work, under the initials F. M., in " El .Album Mexi- 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] OBITUARIES 179 

cano," a work that reflected his rare talent for investigation and 
analysis and preeminent ability as an impartial and conscien- 
tious historian. 

Senor Icazbalceta participated in the publication of the " Dic- 
cionario Historico y Geografico Universal," in ten volumes, the 
first of which appeared in 1852. His biography of Columbus 
has been highly commended, and his history of the press in 
America (it is well known that in Mexico the printing press was 
first established in the New World) is one of his most esteemed 
works, for he did not limit himself to the subject that the title 
implies, but wrote about the first publications that were made, 
their object, importance, destiny, and other biographic notices 
as curious as interesting. 

His marvelous critical talent, coupled with rare judgment and 
notable sagacity, gave Icazbalceta a keen appreciation of the just 
value of the materials with which he had to deal, so that his 
store of knowledge was ever rich. 

In 1858 and 1866, respectively, appeared the two volumes of 
his " Coleccion de Documentos para la Historia de Mexico," a 
work well known for the rare value of its contents. 

In the year in which the second volume of his collection of 
documents was printed he also issued from his own home (for 
he was collector, copyist, proof-reader, and in many cases type- 
setter) sixty copies of a rare little book bearing the title " Notes 
for a Catalogue of Writers in the Native Languages of America," 
which has been so well regarded by European and American 
scientists that it readily brings from twelve to fourteen dollars. 
It contains 170 pages, describing 175 works. 

In 1875 Icazlnilceta reprinted a book, first published in Mexico 
in 1554, containing three dialogues by Francisco Cervantes Sala- 
zar relating to historical events mainly in the city of Mexico. At 
the time of his death he was preparing a Mexican bibliography 
of the sixteenth century, besides a dictionary of Mexican pro- 
vincialisms, of which latter work he left corrected proofs up to 
the letter F (about 800 pages). These two works alone are a 
monument to this indefatigable worker, who could not be an 
instant idle, and who often exclaimed when finishing a work : 
" I shall do no more; I am tire<l. This is the last that I pub- 
lish I " 

J. C. Pilling. 



Digitized by 



Google 



180 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VTII 



Charles Candee Baldwin 

The subject of this sketch, the son of Seymour W. and Mary 
E. Candee Baldwin, was born at Middletown, Connecticut, De- 
cember 2, 1834, but while an infant his parents removed to 
Elyria, Ohio, where his mother died in 1836. His father, re- 
marrying, returned to Connecticut in 1847, but in 1856^ removed 
again to Elyria. In 1855 Charles was graduated with honors 
from Wesleyan University at Middletown, entered Harvard I^aw 
School, receiving therefrom the degree of LL. B. in 1857. The 
same year he was admitted to the bar at Cleveland, Ohio, enter- 
ing the offices of S. B. and J. F. Prentiss, which firm, after many 
changes, became in 1878 Baldwin & Ford. 

As a lawyer Charles C. Baldwin stood high in his profession, 
and his career was marked by rapid and brilliant success. In 
1884 he was elected judge of the circuit court, which position he 
retained until his death on February 2 last. Judge Baldwin 
was active in many educational enterprises, was at one time a 
trustee in two colleges, and was one of the founders of the 
Western Resei've Historical Society, being its president at the 
time of his death. His work in Ohio archeology extended over 
many years, and the published results of his research under the 
auspices of the Society of which he was a parent are widely 
known. 

Judge Baldwin was actively connected with numerous insti- 
tutions of learning throughout the continent, and was a corre- 
sponding member of the Anthropological Society of Washington 
for a number of years. 

F. W. HoDGE. 



James Owen Dorsey 

In the death of the Reverend James Owen Dorsey, at Wash- 
ington, February 4, 1895, anthropology has lost one of its fore- 
most and most promising workers in the domain of American 
linguistics and sociology. 

By the collection and acquirement of facts knowledge is in- 
creased and thereby human culture is broadened. The intel- 
lectual triumphs of the race and the memorable event^s in history 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] OBITUARIES 181 

are one and all intimately associated with the names of great 
and good men — men and noble workers in whom the divine and 
eternal are brilliantly reflected — who have wrought unselfishly 
to give them being. Of this band of noble workers one of the 
most modest, conscientious, and painstaking was James Owen 
Dorsey. Scientific research, through its numerous collaborators, 
is busy by day and by night, seeking to fathom the reasons of 
things* and encouraging its workers to gather, systematize, and 
interpret facts and data whereby Philosophy may test her ca- 
pacities in demonstrating them and the sum of human knowl- 
edge made greater. In the field of American linguistics and 
sociology Mr. Dorsey collected many facts and much data, which 
are a permanent addition to our heritage of knowledge. 

It is due, perhaps, to this more than to any other reason that 
man intuitively offers to the memory of the eminent and illus- 
trious dead the fadeless wreaths of commemorative tribute and 
eulogy, wrought from the buds and flowers of the worth, genius, 
and virtue of the departed. By this means are exalted the good 
deeds and noble aspirations of those most eminent in the vari- 
ous departments of human conduct, and the successes, triumphs 
over obstacles, and, it may be, reverses, of these men are made 
to teach others what to imitate and what to avoid, and to em- 
phasize what may be regarded as their contribution to the wel- 
fare and culture of the race. 

The subject of this brief sketch was born in Baltimore October 
31, 1848. He acquired his primary education in the schools of 
his native city. At an early age he evinced a marked precocity 
in the acquirement of language by learning the Hebrew alphabet 
at six and by reading that language at ten years of age. During 
1862-'63 he attended the Central high school (now City College), 
taking the classical course. When a member of the class of the 
second year illness constrained him to abandon his studies. In 
September, 1867, he entered the preparatory department of the 
Theological Seminary of Virginia, and the junior class in 1869. 
On Easter day, 1871, he was ordained a deacon of the Protestant 
Church by the Bishop of Virginia, and in May of the same year 
he began mission work among the Ponkas in Dakota Territory ; 
but serious illness in July, 1872, and again in the following year, 
compelled him to abandon his mission work in August, 1873, 
which was soon after he had acquired the ability to converse 
with the Indians without an interpreter. Having returned to 
24 



Digitized by 



Google 



182 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

Maryland, he was engaged until July, 1878, in parish work. 
Then, under the direction of Major J. W. Powell, he repaired to 
the Omaha reservation, in Nebraska, for the purpose of acquir- 
ing additional linguistic and other anthropologic material, re- 
maining among this people until April, 1880. In the mean- 
time, upon the organization of the Bureau of Ethnology in 1879, 
he was chosen one of its scientific corps, being up to the time of 
his last illness continuously and arduously engaged in linguistic 
and sociologic work. Subsequent to 1880 he made several field 
trips to Indian reservations, visiting, in addition to those of the 
Siouan stock, that of Siletz, on which he was able to collect im- 
portant vocabularies and valuable grammatic notes and material 
pertaining to the Athapascan, Kusan, Takilman, and Yakonan 
stocks. 

His grasp and comprehension of the principle of the genesis 
of words and the development of vocabularies is well and abun- 
dantly illustrated in his excellent paper, '' Siouan Onomatopes,'' 
and in his Athapascan studies. In the forementioned essay is 
seen his complete mastery of a wealth of etymologic detail, which 
is marvelous even to the linguist. In his paper on '* The Com- 
parative Phonology of Four Siouan Tongues '' we are introduced 
to a discriininating study of the i)honologic wealth of the various 
dialects of the Siouan family. No one but a trained phonologist 
can appreciate the difficulties to be overcome in such a study. 

His great modesty and his strong conviction that the views of 
a student should be moulded by facts prevented him from formu- 
lating subjective theories by which to judge the value of his facts. 
In the later years of his studies in linguistic morphology he 
began to feel the inadequacy of the venerable agglutination theory 
to explain all the facts of word-structure prevailing in the lan- 
guages he was studying, and he came to look upon adaptation — 
the infusing with a new meaning or function an element which 
before had or had not any definite signification— as an important 
and potent factor in the genesis and development of morphologic 
structures. His mastery of the wealth of forms in the languages 
he studied enabled him to illustrate copiously the working of 
this principle. His linguistic acumen and painstaking accuracy 
are brought out in his interlinear translations of numerous and 
voluminous texts, both in print and manuscript. 

In addition to numerous essays dealing with linguistic and 
other anthropologic matters which appeared from time to time 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] OBITUARIES 183 

in various periodicals, Mr. Dorsey published under the auspices 
of the Bureau of Ethnology the following excellent and sugges- 
tive memoirs : ^'Omaha Sociology," '^Osage Traditions,'^ "A Study 
of Siouan Cults," " Omaha Dwellings, Furniture, and Imple- 
ments," " Omaha and Ponka Letters," and ^' The Dhegiha Lan- 
guage, with Myths, Stories, and Letters." He also edited the 
" Dakota-English Dictionary " and " Dakota Grammar, Texts, 
and Etlinography " of the late Rev. S. R. Riggs, forming, respect- 
ively, volumes vii and ix of Contributions to North American Eth- 
nohgy. At the time of his death he had completed a paper on 
Siouan sociology. Among the papers and articles of marked 
importance published in extra-governmental media may be men- 
tioned: '* Migrations of Siouan Tribes,' with maps, in the -4m^i- 
can Naturalist^ volume xx, No. 3 ; " Comparative Phonology of 
Four Siouan Languages," embodied in the Smitlisonian Report 
for 1883; "An Account of the War Customs of the Osages," 
American Naturalist^ volume xviii, No. 2, and ^'' Mourning and 
War Customs of the Kansas," in the July, 1885, issue of that 
magazine. 

Although he published many essays in various media, by far 
the larger and most important part of the material collected and 
elaborated by him during the years of his active and successful 
career remains unpublished, but much of it is well on toward 
completion. 

As a worker Mr. Dorsey was methodical, rapid, and untiring, 
accomplishing in a given time an amount of labor that was 
astounding in its extent and accuracy. His marvelous aptitude 
in discriminating, grasping, and retaining sounds enabled him 
to obtain with great ease accurate vocabularies and texts and to 
detect differences of meaning and function through differences 
of sound. His freedom from subjective theories, his deep erudi- 
tion, and enlightened conservatism made him one of the fore- 
most authorities in American linguistics. 

By reason of the purity and unselfishness of his motives and 

the warmth and sunshine of his amiable nature, he won the 

esteem of all who had the pleasure of meeting him, and, being 

ever kind, affable, and cheerful to his colleagues, ever willing to 

aid and advise them, James Owen Dorsey was sincerely and 

cordially loved and revered by all. 

J. N. B. Hkwitt. 



Digitized by 



Google 



184 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



William Bower Taylor 

Mr. Taylor was bom in Philadelphia in 1821, and was a grad- 
uate of the University of Pennsylvania. He first practiced law 
in Philadelphia ; was then an examiner and afterward librarian 
of the Patent Office. In 1878 he became connected with the 
Smithsonian Institution as editor of its publications. He was 
specially known as the editor of the scientific writings of Pro- 
fessor Joseph Henry ; also by his work on Henry and the Tele- 
graph. He was a well-known member of the Anthropological 
and Philosophical Societies of Washington. He died in Wash- 
ington, February 25, 1895. 

Mr. Taylor, although primarily a physicist, was widely in- 
formed on all the deeper topics of general science. His mind 
possessed a delicate sensibility to suggestion from others, and 
was influenced wholly by the inherent merit of the suggestion 
and not at all by the supposed competency or incompetency of 
the person making it. Still, on most questions he had settled 
convictions, and on nearly all important subjects he possessed 
original ideas, ther result of prolonged independent thought. His 
conversation was particularly charming from the fact that it com- 
bined great learning and originality with the utmost simplicity 
and a complete absence of dogmatism. In a word, his entire 
character illustrated how extremely liberal genuine wisdom can 
afford to be. 

Lester F. Ward. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895 J BOOK NOTICES 185 



BOOK NOTICES 

As to Copper from the Mounds of the St. Johns River j Florida, from 
Part II of Certain Sand Mounds of the St. Johns River, Florida. 
By Clarence B. Mooi^e. 

Taken in connection with his admirable and thorough treatise 
on the sand mounds of Florida, of whicli it forms so conspicuous 
a part, this chapter by Mr. Clarence B. Moore "As to Copper 
from the Mounds of the St. Johns River " is in certain essentials 
one of the most satisfactory and conclusive records of archeologic 
research that has been made during the year just ended. 

As Professor Douglas furnishes a review from the standpoint 
of the metallurgist, and a clear statement of the main argument 
of the author, which is based upon chemical analyses of the 
ancient copper specimens in question, compared with analyses 
of other examples, both native and European, little remains to 
be said as to the final and authoritative nature, apparently, of 
this argument in proof of the aboriginal character of these 
Floridian and, presumably, of most other like mound remains 
of the copper art. 

Since analyses of this sort are, however, deemed liable, despite 
every precaution, to mislead, unless supported by other data, it 
may be well in passing to call attention to the ample archeologic 
and technologic evidence with which Mr. Moore also supports 
his conclusions, by which, indeed, it is easy to believe he was 
first led to not a few of them. In the nature of such evidence 
are the observations carefully made and recorded by him indi- 
cating the primary and, generally speaking, prehistoric character 
of the mound burials with which these copper remains were 
found associated, and the still more significant fact that the latter 
not only bear trace of just such operations as I performed with 
stone and horn appliances in the experimental reproduction of 
ancient sheet-copper figures in native metal, but also that the 
rods of copper intended to be solid enough to serve as " piercers,'' 
etc., were made up of bits of the metal economically beaten very 
thin and rolled and hammered compactly together in a way 



Digitized by 



Google 



186 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

which I find would be impossible with brass of any grade or with 
the ordinary copper of commerce. This applies also and espe- 
cially to the remarkable rivet-patched plates of large size figured 
and described by Mr. Moore. They are so obviously made up 
from small natural masses of copper beaten out, and thus, with 
minimum waste, as nearly as possible welded together by over 
and underlapping and the riveting to form solid plates of larger 
size than could have been shaped from any single piece the 
makers of them possessed, that one must needs infer, first, the 
purely aboriginal nature of the work as being that of artisans 
unacquainted with fusing or soldering; second, the very ancient 
character of this aboriginal work itself as having originated 
probably in the effort to use small nodules or bowlders of drift 
coi)per such only as was at first accessible to the mound-building 
Indians before they became acquainted with and worked in the 
great copper leads of the Lake Superior region, and such as they 
continued to use for a long time afterward, as indicated by the 
finds of Powell, Putnam, and other competent observers, even in 
far southern mounds and graves; and, finally, one must also 
infer the native origin of the extremely ductile and pure material 
used in such working, else piecing so perfect as to be unrevealed 
save by the most careful examination could not have been accom- 
plished by such methods as are above mentioned. 

Leaving other j)oints which might, were space available, be 
noticed with equal propriety, it will suffice if I simply quote 
the general conclusions reached by Mr. Moore and compre- 
hensively summarized at the close of his essay, and merely add 
that each claim made in this brief summary is satisfactorily 
suj)ported by his more detailed studies bearing on or leading up 
to it, as set forth in the body of the work. These claims (and 
others less generally, but equally significant, might safely have 
been adduced by Mr. Moore) are, as stated by him, " after a 
careful survey of the field," as follows : 

" 1. That the so-called copper found with objects of European 
make along the St. Johns and, we may add, in other portions 
of the United States, is almost universally not copper, but brass; 
and, conversely, that brass does not occur with original deposits 
of copper in mounds otherwise containing only objects of un- 
questioned aboriginal origin. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] BOOK NOTICES 187 

" 2. That the workmanship on the copper of the mounds of 
the St Johns is ahoriginal. 

**3, That the copper itself is of aboriginal production, the 
proof being mechanical, archeological, and chemical. 

"4. That such being the case, if copper plates cannot be pro- 
duced without recourse to annealing, then we must concede to 
the aborigines a knowledge of that art. 

"5. That the copper of the mounds of the St. Johns is native 
copper, as shown by its high percentage of copper, a percentage 
not obtainable by early smelting processes, and by its freedom 
from arsenic and antimony in some instances, and the very small 
percentage in others of these impurities, which are found to a 
much greater extent in the early copper from the sulphide ores of 
Europe. In addition, lead, used in smelting processes of Europe 
and not eliminated from many of the ores, is present in earlier 
sheet copper, and is, without exception, absent from native cop- 
per and from the copper of the mounds. 

"6. 'ITiat the Florida copper may have been derived from 
various sources, possibly in part from Mexico, New Mexico, or 
Arizona, and probably to a certain extent from Cuba,* but that 
the main supply was obtained from the Lake Superior region, 
most of whose copper is non-arsenical. 

" 7. That copper in which silver is visibly present has, so far 
as is known, for its only source of supply on this continent the 
Lake Superior region. 

" 8. Incidentally, that mound copper from other localities, 
including the copper of the famous Etowah plates of Georgia 
and of the no less well known Hopewell mounds of Ohio, is, like 
the Florida copper, aboriginal, having nothing in common with 
the products of the impure European sulphides and imperfect 
smelting processes of the fifteenth, sixteenth, and seventeenth 
centuries." 

It would be advantageous, I think, to take this work of Mr. 

♦This discovery of Cuban copper in the Floridian mounds ih of great importance, as 
bearing also on possible trade relations of the aboriginal inhabitants of Florida and the 
Mississippi valley, not only with the inhabitants of Cuba, but also, though perhaps in- 
directly, with those of Yucatan, for I am now inclined to believe (from evidence which 
has come to hand since my paper on " Primitive Copper Working" was published in 
the Akthropolooist of January, 189i) that such far-reaching trade relations did exist, 
and that to Nomo slight extent they influenced the arts of both these metal-working 
peoples. 



Digitized by 



Google 



188 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

Moore's not only as a model of its kind, but also as a precau- 
tionary example, in our studies of other questions still more or 
less mooted ; such, for instance, as the occurrence of art products 
or symbolic designs supposed to be too highly developed to have 
originated solely with our aborigines or from their resemblance 
to certain products of old-world art and culture regarded as de- 
rived therefrom. It seems not unlikely— and the present work 
marks a decided step in this direction — that we must ere long, as 
heretofore urged by such authorities as Major Powell and Dr. 
Brinton, concede the entire independence in general of American 
cultures. That the institutions and arts and even the minor art 
products in the main, no less than the languages of our in- 
digenous tribes, have developed here and alone. It may be true 
that at many points these native tribes have been touched ; that 
there may be found here and there traces— mere waife — of old- 
world things among their ancient remains. Yet, even so, this 
has nowhere given rise to a single new art or, until within the 
last century or two. modified to any considerable extent an old 
one. Its influence could have been but superficial at best, so 
evanescent, unless continuously exerted, that in no place can its 
presence in effects be positively affirmed to the satisfaction of all 
discriminating inquirers ; such influence, indeed, having wrought 
only seeming changes beyond mere externals, even within recent 
times, on such peoples as the Pueblos, whose cultural moods and 
art usages remain practically unchanged by all its intermittent 
pressure through full three centuries. Yet, notwithstanding all 
this, these questions of foreign influence are, on one plea or 
another, continually being brought forward to the detriment of 
true progress toward their solution either one way or the other. 
Now, it is to just such work as this of Mr. Moore's that we are 
to look for the evidence we need for putting these contested 
questions to rest, for it is evident from a perusal of the pages of 
his work as a whole that he started out without prejudice or 
predilection, simply from honest interest, and at first merely as 
a follower in the footsteps of his eminent predecessor, Dr. Jef- 
freys Wyman ; but that he soon cut a trail for himself through 
quite unbroken ground, and has ended by making of this simple 
trail a finished highway, over which we may all travel easily 
and safely to very definite dcvsti nations. F. II. Gushing. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] BOOK NOTICES 189 

Tenth Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology: Washington, 
1893. 

This volume is devotod to the picture-writing of the American 
Indians, and is the crowning work of Colonel Garrick Mallery's 
life. It is very seldom that a man in contemplating his studies 
may say on laying down his pen, they are finished. 

Colonel Mallery's observations on pictography and sign lan- 
guage began simultaneously during his military service among 
the Dakotas. He then formed the hypothesis that gesture- 
speech, though never exclusive of oral speech in the expression 
and transmittal of ideas, was developed into fitness for general 
and practical use among early men before oral speech had ad- 
vanced so as to form a system. This is paraphrased, that at a 
supposed period in the history of man gesture-speech often was 
used independent of oral language, when among the same men 
oral speech was inadequate without concomitant and explana- 
tory gestures. The gestures were at first purely ideographic, 
when not merely pantomimic ; of course they were transient, 
and the attempt to make them durable for records, notices, mes- 
sages, etc., was by ideographic markings and devices — i. e., pic- 
tographs. This hypothesis was strengthened by observing some 
glyphs bearing skeleton outlines of gestures with apparently the 
same significance as that which the gestures indicated. The sup- 
posed era therefore produced, by gestures, idea-speaking, and, 
by pictographs, idea-writing. When oral language advanced it 
was much more conventional, the sounds being far less than 
gestures, directly expressive of ideas ; indeed, except in a few 
cases of onomatopoeia, the sense cannot be deduced from the 
sound. Written syllabaries and alphabets, being applied only 
to designate sounds, were still more conventional and may be 
styled sound-writing as contrasted with picture or idea writing ; 
yet the devices used in syllabaries and alphabets to express 
sound were often the same which had earlier been used in pic- 
tographs, and thus had become familiar. The observed facts 
suggested that in picture-writing of North American Indians 
and other races the beginnings of our modern manuscripts and 
principal books were to be found. This cause of observation 
and reflection led to the studies presented in this volume, in 
preparing which, however, collateral matters came into view. 
25 



Digitized by 



Google 



190 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

In the explanation of these views Colonel Mallery has with 
great diligence for many years ransacked the earth for material, 
and it is presented in the book before us in a very practical 
form. The author, having devoted a great deal of attention dur- 
ing his early years to literary matters, gives the reader the ben- 
efit of his style in the text. 

The author's modesty is also apparent, since it would be im- 
possible to find the first personal pronoun, except as a quotation, 
in all these pages. Another literary feature of the book which 
commends itself is the absence of foot-notes and obtrusive refer- 
ences of authorities. The authora quoted, together with their 
works, are given in an appendix and referred to in the text by 
convenient numbers. It is for the reader to decide whether, in 
thus giving to the book a more tasteful literary form, the author 
has not put the reader to considerable trouble in referring back- 
ward and forward from text to list. 

The plan followed by Colonel Mallery is not without prece- 
dent in the volumes of very distinguished authors. Colonel 
Mallery has also wisely abstained from philosophizing too ex- 
tensively in this work, which is rather a descriptive than philo- 
sophic production. The enormous mass of material gathered 
together will make it possible for those who take up the subject 
in the future to draw any conclusions they may please there- 
from. 

In the prompt publication of this material the Bureau of Eth- 
nology has not only done the world a favor, but built a lasting 
monument to Colonel Mallery, who had scarcely laid down his 
pen ere he was called away from his earthly labors. 

0. T. Mason. 



The Tmayan New Fire Cerennony, By Dr. J. Walter Fewkes. 
HeDxenway Expedition, Proceedings of the Boston Society of 
Natural History, vol, xxvi, pp, i22-458. 

Dr. Fewkes has given in this paper a very satisfactory account 
of the '* new fire ceremony " of the Hopi. While a great deal 
has been written upon the occurrence of this world-wide cere- 
mony in other countries it has been only cursorily noticed in 
America. Here it has survived, perhaps, in a fragmentary state 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] BOOK NOTICES 191 

in the Green Com dance of many tribes and the White Dog 
feast of the Iroquois; but among the Pueblos has been semi- 
dramatized and surrounded by an amazing liturgy, which taxed 
Dr. Fewkes' endurance to follow. 

Curiously the Hopi ceremony is followed by the casting away 
of the fire and not by its distribution to the domestic hearths, 
as is usual. 

The modesty of Dr. Fewkes in generalizing from his careful 
observations of this ceremony is worthy of emulation. There 
seems, however, from the bringing in of the Dawn Woman and 
the God of Germs, sufficient basis for concluding that the Hopi 
had perceived the analogy between fire and life or germination 
and its relation to light or dawn, as did the Vedie Aryans. 

Walter Hough. 



Digitized by 



Google 



192 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



NOTES AND NEWS 

The Snake Ceremonials at Walpi. — I have recently had the 
pleasure of reading Dr. Fewkes' admirable presentation of the 
snake dance of the Moquis * and perhaps no higher compliment 
could be paid the author than to say that he made the fullest 
use of his advantages, which latter I understand were largely 
due to the munificence of that noble-hearted patroness of Ameri- 
can anthropology, the late Mrs. Mary Hemenway. But while 
passing over page after page of this most interesting monograph 
it was impossible for me not to keep in mind the wonderful in- 
crease, and the very intelligent increase, of popular interest in all 
that relates to our aborigines since my first acquaintance with 
our southwestern tribes, twenty years ago. 

When I first saw prayer-sticks and stone prayer-heaps in 1870, 
and a little later when it was my good fortune to be admitted 
into a kiva, the impression became strong within me that the 
Moquis were truly a curious people, well worthy of study, and 
just as deserving of our attention as they were of that which 
Brigham Young was giving them. 

Nearly ten years had elapsed before my next visit to the Moqui 
country, where it was my great good fortune to be the first white 
man to attempt to describe the weird rite of the snake dance. 
Although the country had been materially encroached upon by 
civilization (for newly constructed railroads terminated within 
less than two hundred miles of Ream's ranch), the dense crust 
of our ignorance had not yet been broken. A few adventurous 
spirits had penetrated to Zuni and the adjacent country, confi- 
dent that there was much to be discovered and described ; 
among these were Joseph Wasson, long since deati ; C. E. Cooley, 
Charles Franklin (who lived in Zuni for several years), James 
Stevenson, of the Bureau of Ethnology ; Dr. Washington Mat- 
thews, and Mr. F. H. Gushing. But the ecjuipment of all these 
men was wretchedly inadecjuate, and public opinion not infre- 
quently regarded them as uncanny. My own scientific outfit, 

* Journal of American Ethnology and Archseology, toI. iv. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] NOTES AND NEWS 193 

when I started to investigate the snake dance of 1881, consisted 
of a couple of lead pencils and a pad of paper. If ever chill 
penury repressed noble rage it was in those days, which we may 
now happily call the early days of North American anthropology. 

Yet it is to such dauntless spirits as the late Lieutenant General 
Philip H. Sheridan, Major General George Crook, Major John 
W. Powell, Lewis H. Morgan, Dr. Francis Parkman, Dr. E. N. 
Horsford, George Peabody, and others of that class that North 
American anthropology owes its rise upon the basis of exact, 
painstaking observation in the houses of the aborigines them- 
selves. Today American anthropologists are receiving appre- 
ciative attention from scholars in the old world, who recognize 
that all observations of primitive society now made on our side 
of the ocean are more or less applicable to what primitive society 
must have been centuries ago in Europe and elsewhere. 

From the appearance of my own work on the snake dance 
interest in the subject grew apace, the horizon of investigation 
widened, and there are now in existence as many as five hundred 
descriptions of the ceremony, written by more or less competent 
hands and with more or less exactness, but each of them more 
reliable and more vivid than any description of ophiolatry which 
have come down to us from ancient times. 

Dr. H. C. Yarrow, U. S. A., made a journey to the snake dance 
of 1883 especially to determine the noxious or innocent charac- 
ter of the snakes employed, and later Mindeleff did the same 
thing. Dr. S. Weir Mitchell, of Philadelphia, an authority on the 
subject, lending his assistance. The late Mr. James Stevenson 
passed some days or weeks among the Moquis and brought from 
them everything in sight, especially all that he could induce 
them to part with, which had any connection with their religious 
or festive observances. Major-General McCook, U. S. A., took in 
a large party of army officers and others in 1891, and Mr. Lund- 
gren, of Cincinnati, after long and critical study upon the ground, 
writes me that he is now almost ready to begin his life-size paint- 
ing in oil of this perhaps the greatest of our surviving sacred 
dramas. 

Great as has been the work accomplished, it is not yet per- 
fected. Connection must be established between the Moqui form 
of the snake dance and any variants which may exist, as I am 
inclined to suspect they do still exist among the people of 



Digitized by 



Google 



194 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

Acoma, Sia, Jemez. or Zufii, as well as among the Mohave and 
Apache. It will be of interest to note that the Apaches took me 
to their sacred caves in the Pinal range and the Sierra Ancha, 
and on the way we stopped at and prayed to stone heaps exactly 
like those described by Dr. Fewkes (p. 41). In these caves the 
Apaches showed me phallic symbols in stone, and pointed out 
where their medicine-men stood with naked feet and danced 
about among rattlesnakes. They also asserted that their medi- 
cine-men would take little rattlesnakes in their mouths and 
swallow them. Incredible as this may seem, it is strictly in 
line with what has been related of the Aztecs by early Spanish 
authors. 

Having thoroughly worked up the American field, it will be 
in order to examine into all that obtains in Whydah and Nag- 
pore and among the fanatics of Arabia. 

It would be interesting to know whether the Moquis attach 
any significance to the sinistral or the dextral ceremonial circuit 
around the sacred rock. The Celtic Druids certainly did. It is 
even stated bj^ some scholars that the Irish word for " pilgrim- 
age " means to march around a rock, from the number of " holy 
stones " once so abundant in Ireland. When the Druids wished 
an incantation to be beneficent they marched in procession with 
the sun — i, e„ to the right ; if it was to be maleficent they marched 
to the left. 

The use of honey in religious ceremonial (p. 46) inspires the 
question : Is there any account of the use of maple sugar in the 
same manner by the tribes of the Atlantic coast? What analogy, 
if any, is there between this and the use of sugar by the Thugs 
of India when offering sacrifice to the Goddess Kali or Bhowani 
previous to strangling a victim ? 

The Ko-ho-ni-no or Havasupai, mentioned by Dr. Fewkes (p. 
51) as bringing presents to the Moqui at the snake dance, brought, 
among other things, "a water-worn root of a cottonwood tree 
several feet long, which grew in the Grand canyon, on the banks 
of the Colorado river." We are not told what this particular 
gift meant, and it would be unreasonable to ask for an explana- 
tion at a moment when the fullest attention was necessarily con- 
centrated upon more important matters. The Havasupai have 
close commercial and some slight marriage relations with the 
Moqui. 1 found an old, blind Kohonino living and married in 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] NOTES AND NEWS 195 

Oraibi in 1881. When I went down into Cataract canyon every 
family of the Havasupai had Navajo blankets, procured in trade 
from the Moqui. They used to take over skins of the mountain 
lion, an animal held in veneration scarcely inferior to that ac- 
corded the snake or the bear. 

The Mohaves told me, and they told also Colonel Peirce, who 
was their commanding officer, that they originated at Cottonwood 
island, in Colorado river, some distance above Fort Mojave, near 
the mouth of the Rio Virgen, where they used to get salt.* They 
claimed kinship, more or less close, with the Yuma, Pima, Pa- 
pago, Cocopa, Opata, and Walapai, and said that long, long ago 
they were related to the Moqui. A peculiar feature of their 
legend was that the leader who conducted their forefathers 
down Colorado river to its mouth and beyond bore the name 
Ku-ku-mat, which is suspiciously like Gu-cu-matz, the cultus 
hero of the Guatalmaltecs. 

In Havasupai canyon I found attached to the rock wall of a 
little spring dripping out of the face of the precipice several 
feather prayer-sticks exactly like the poles of the Moquis (p. 
51). Dr. Fewkes was careful to note that the piece of cotton- 
wood root presented by the Kohonino *' was made into a cross- 
shaped prayer offering," a pretty sure indication that it was 
accepted with particular gratitude and veneration. 

The Moquis took pinches of sand from their sand-altars and 
carried them to their fields (p. 95), undoubtedly to secure bless- 
ings upon the crops. The Apaches and the Indians of Guate- 
mala did almost the same thing in curing the sick or casting the 
horoscope of a child. 

In the purification of the snake priest we read that " Kopeli 
filled his mouth with the mixture, went to the priests as they 
squatted on the floor, and forcibly squirted the liquid from his 
mouth upon their breasts, arms, and legs, where the decorations 
once were. When each person had been treated in this way he 
rubbed his arms and breast with his hands and then put on his 
ordinary clothing" (p. 97). Why did Ko-pe-li do this? The 
Sioux medicine-men did the same thing to the victims at the 
sun dance, and it may be learned that very nearly the same 



•See ** Notes on the Theogotty aud Cosmogony of the Mojavcs" In Journnl of Amer- 
ican Folk-Lore, 1889. 



Digitized by 



Google 



196 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

methods are followed by the Mexicans of the lower Rio Grande 
to avert the effect of the evil eye.* 

A typographical error on page 120, the only one I noticed in 
this beautiful monograph, makes Mr. James G. Frazer, of Trinity 
College, Cambridge, the author of " The Golden Bow." Mr. 
Frazer's work is "The Golden Bou<?h," a work which every 
American student might read with pleasure and profit. 

John G. Bourke, 
Captaiii, United States Army, 



Imperial Russian Geographic Society. — In 1892 there died 
in St. Petersburg the Grand Duke Constantino Nicolaevitch, 
brother of Emperor Alexander II, the founder of the Imperial 
Russian Geographical Society and for nearly fifty yeara its presi- 
dent. 

The plan of forming this society was first presented by him 
in 1845, at a small gathering of prominent scientists, in his private 
apartments at the Winter Palace. From its very beginning the 
society was not wanting in experienced leaders, for among 
its founders were the distinguished Russian navigators Litke, 
Krusenstern, Riccord, and Wrangel ; the distinguished Russian 
savants in the various branches of natural science Baer, Struve, 
and Helmersen ; the statisticians and ethnographers Arseniev, 
Keppen, Levshin, and Dabil, and such distinguislied govern- 
ment officials as M. N. Monravief and V. A. Perovski. 

The young prince took a very active interest in the success of 
the society, which never flagged during the forty-eight years of 
his connection with it. After his death the society expressed 
the wish to have a member of the imperial family for president, 
and the Emperor appointed the Grand Duke Nicola Michailo- 
vitch to this office. The list of membership on the 1st of Janu- 
ary, 1892, included 15 members of reigning families, 22 Russian 
honorary members, 6 foreign members, 21 patrons, 6G2 active 
members, 213 contributing members, and 30 correspondents. 

During the last year the membership has reached a thousiind. 



• " Popular Medicine, etc., of the Rio Grande " in Journnl of American Folk-Lore, 
1894. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 18951 NOTES AND NEWS 197 

The Imperial Russian Geographical Society has four great di- 
visions, each of which has its own chairman. The branches are 
mathematical geography, physical geography, ethnology, and 
statistics. The work is carried on separately in the different 
sections of tlie empire ; for example, there is the section of East- 
ern Siberia, of Orenburg, of Western Siberia, of the Caucasus, 
etc. Quite recently a new section has been formed — that of the 
Amoor country. 

A number of publications are issued yearly by this society, 
the principal ones being the bimonthly Geographical News, The 
Living Past (division of ethnology), published quailerly; the 
Meteorological Journal, and annual reports. There are also re- 
ports of the various sections and of the work of expeditions, of 
which there were twenty-two in 1892. A Bibliographical Index 
has also appeared, as well as Programs and numerous maps. 

The society distributes yearly a number of medals for the most 
important contributions. Chief in importance among these is 
the large gold medal of the Grand Duke Constantine ; another 
bears the name of Count Litke ; still another gold medal, bear- 
ing the name of Peshevalski, is awarded annually by the division 
of ethnology. Julie Mindelkff. 



The Beebe Researches. — Major William S. Beebe, of Thomp- 
son, Connecticut, has published privately seven portfolios of 
views and tables illustrative and descriptive of various subjects 
in American archeology to which their compiler has been devot- 
ing much research. The text which these portfolios are to ac- 
company is now in preparation. The titles of the parts are as 
follows: I, General views, Peru. Bolivia. II, Great Dial, Tia- 
huanacu, Bolivia ; Cosmic theory of primes. Ill, Series exhib- 
iting the influence of the Tia-huanacu dial in both the Americas. 
IV, American inscriptions; Mithraic tablet (obverse), Daven- 
port, Iowa. V, American inscriptions ; The Pemberton axe. The 
Piqua tablets. Primitive alphabetical types — (advance sheets). 
B, Numerical evidence in favor of the wide distribution of the 
theory of primes (plates). B, part 2, The Mithraic tablet (ob- 
verse), found at Davenport, Iowa. Major Beebe has generously 
contributed a set of these valuable portfolios to the Anthropo- 
logical Society. 
26 



Digitized by 



Google 



198 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

Adele M. Fielde, in "A Corner of Cathay," recently issued, 
gives the following interesting account of Chinese folk-lore : 

" When a child is just one month old the mother, carrying it 
in a scarf on her back, induces it to look down into a well. 
This is supposed to have a mentally invigorating effect, produc- 
ing courage and deepening the understanding. The infant is 
always fed from a large bowl to make it a big eater. A bride 
may be taken to her husband's house while a coffin is therein, 
but not within one hundred days after it has been taken out, or 
domestic troubles will surely follow. Moreover, the bride may 
not, during the four months after her marriage, enter any other 
house in which thore has recently been either a death or a birth 
without precipitating a quarrel with the groom. If a fly falls 
into the porridge it heralds the coming of a guest, while a cock's 
crow between sunset and midnight betokens death in its owner's 
family. It is not respectable for an old man to go without a 
beard or for a young man to wear one. A sneeze indicates that 
some one is thinking of you." 



Mr. George F. Black, assistant keeper of the National Museum 
of Antiquities, Edinburgh, has in preparation a work dealing 
with *' Scottish Charms and Amulets," to be published by Mr. 
George P. Johnston, Edinburgh. Mr. Black is desirous of mak- 
ing the work as complete as possible, and will be grateful to any 
one for information of such Scottish charms or amulets as have 
not hitherto been described. AH assistance given will be ac- 
knowledged in the work. 



ERRATUM 



In the article on the Micmac Indians, page 37 of the January 
number, the statement that the rattle-altars were found in Yuca- 
tan should be read as found in Mexico. 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 18951 



ANTHROPOLOGIC LITERATURE 



]99 



A QUARTERLY BIBLIOGRAPHY OF ANTHROPOLOGIC 
LITBRATITRB 

COMPILED BY ROBERT FLETCHER, M. D. 



Bailliot ( Marcel ) . Du d^tatouage : 
differents proc^d^s de destruction 
dee tatouages. Pane, 1894, 41 p. 
4°. No. 1G6. 

Bertillon ( A Ipbonse) . Dae an thro- 
pometrische Signalement. 2. Aufl. 
mit einem Album. Autorisierte 
deuteche Auegabe, breg. von V. 
•Sury. Bern « Leipz., 1895, A. 
Siebert, 233 p. 8°. 

BoKgiani (Guidof. I Caduvei 
(Mbaya o Guaycurii) con pre- 
fazione ed uno etudio etnografico 
dell Dott. G. A. Colini. Roma, 
1895, Loeecher & Co., xxv, 339 p. 

Brinton (Dan. G.) A primer of 
Mayan hieroglyphice. Boston 
[1895], Grim & Co., 3-152 p. 8^ 

Cmnont (Franz). Testes et monu- 
mente figures relatife aux mys- 
teree de Mithra, publics avec une 
introduction critimie. Fasc. I. 
Bruxelles, 1894, H. Laraert-in, 
184 p. 4?, 

Doraey (George A. ) The character 
and antiquity of Peruvian civili- 
zation. [Reprint from: Denison 
Quarteriy.] Granville (O.) L1894], 
10 p. 8°. 

Crania from the Necropolie 

of A neon, Peru. IReprhU from: 
Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. Sc.] Salem, 
1894, 12 p. 8°. 

Festschrift zur Begriieeung der 
Theilnehmer an der gemeinsa- 
men Versammlung der Deutschen 
und Wiener Anthropologischen 
Gesellwhaft in Innsbruck 24-28 
August, 1894. Hrsg. von der An- 
thropologischen Gesellschafl in 
Wien, redigirt von Franz Heger. 
Wien, 1894, Kohler & Hamburger, 
108 p., 4 pi. 4^ 



Fewkes (J. Walter). The Tusayan 
new fire ceremon v. [Reprint from : 
Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist. Proc, xxvi.] 
Boston, 1895, 37 p. 8°. 

Fortier (Alc^eV Louisiana folk- 
tales in French dialect and Eng- 
lish translation. Boston, 1895, 
Houghton, Mifflin & Co., 9 -f 
122 p. 8°. 

Koganai. Beitragezurphysischen 
Anthropologic der Aino. II. Un- 
tersuchungenamLebenden. [Re- 
print.] Tokio, 1894, 153 p. 

Laurent (femile). Les bisexu^s; 
gyn^comastes et hermaphrodites. 
Paris, 1894, G. Carr^, 230 p. 8°. 

Lombroso (Cesare). Entartung 
und Genie. Neue Studien gesani- 
melt und unter Mitwirkung des 
Verfassers deutsch heraus^gel)en 
von Hans Kurella. Leipzig, 1894, 
G. H. Wigand, 319 p. , 12 pi. 12°. 

Maack (Ferdinand). Heimweh 
und Verbrechen. Ein Beitrag 
zum Strafgesetzbuch. 2 Aufl. 
Leipzig, 1894, Bacmeister, 35 p. 

8°. 

Marsh (O. C.) On the Pithecan- 
thropus erectus, Dubois, from 
Java. 8° [New Haven, 1895]. 
Reprint from: Am. J. Sc, N. 
Haven, 1895, xlix. 

Montelius (Oscar). Les temps 
pr^historiques en Suede et dans 
les antres pays scandinaves. 
Paris, 1 895, Burdin et Ce, vi, 354 p. 
8°. 

Mailer (Josef). Ueber Ursprung 
und Heimat des Urmenschen. 
Stuttgart, 1894, F. Enke, 62 p. 
8°. 



Digitized by 



Google 



200 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



Nordau (Max). Degeneration. 
(Transl. from the second ed. of 
the German.) New York, 1895, 
Appleton & Co., xiii, 560 p. S°. 

Preventioa (The) and repression 
of crime, being a report of the 5. 
section of the International Con- 

fress of Charities, Correction, and 
•hilanthropy, Chicago, June, 

1893, Edited by Frederick H. 
Wines. Bait., 1894, Johns Hop- 
kins Press, 107 p. 8°. 

de Quatrefages ( A . ) The Pygmies. 
Transl. by Prof. Frederick Starr. 
New York, 1895, Appleton & Co. 
12°. 

Reclua (filie). Le primitif d*Aus- 
tralie ou les Non-Non et les Oui- 
Oui. fltude d'ethnographie com- 
par^e. Paris [1894], E. Dentu, 
1 p. 1., 391 p. 12°. 

Royal Irish Academy. Cunning- 
ham Memoirs. No.X. The deco- 
rative art of British New Guinea : 
A study in Papuan ethnography, 
by Alfred C. Haddon. Dublin, 

1894, Hodges Figgis & Co., 279 p., 
12 pi. 4°. 

Sergi (Giuseppe). Studi di antro- 
pologiaLaziale. [Reprint.] Roma, 

1895, 60 p. 8°. 

Ueber die europiiischer Pyg- 

maen. [Reprint.] Wien, 1895, 
3 p. 4°. 

Studier (Th.) und E. Bannwarth. 
Crania helvetica antiqua: Die 
bis jetzt in den Pfahlbauten 
der Stein-und Bronzezeit in 
der Schweiz gefundeiien mensch- 
lichen Schiidelreste. Leipzig,1894, 
J. A. Barth, 63 p., 117 p. 1., fol. 

Taylor ( Isaac). L'origine des Ary- 
ens et I'homme pf^histcjrique; 
expos6 de I'ethnologie et de la civ- 
ilisation pr^historiques do I'Eu- 
rope. Traduction de I'an^lais par 
Henry de Varigny. Pans, 1895, 
L. Battaille & ( )ie, 340 p. 12°. 

Thomas-Marancourt (Ed.) De 
quelques objets protohistoriques 
trouv«5s en Angleterre. Fontaine- 
bleau, 1894, Bourges, 18 p. 8°. 

Weatermarck. Origine du mariage 
dans I'espece humaine. Paris, 
1895, Guillaumin et Cie. 8°. 



von Andrian. Ueber einige Re- 
sultate der modernen Ethnologie. 
Cor.-Bl. d. deutsch. Gesellsch. f. 
Anthrop., etc., Miinchen, 1894, xxv. 
57-73.- -Backus (E. M.) Cradle 
songs of negroes in North Carolina. 
J. Am. Folk- Lore, Bost. & N. Y., 
1894, xxvii, 310.- Backus (Emma). 
Weather-signs from Connecticut. 
Ibid., 1895, xxviil, 26.— Barbour 
(A. H. F.) Some aspects of he- 
redity. Edinb. M. J., 1894-5, xl, 
602-611.— BatcheIor(S.) The mim- 
icry of heredity. New World, Bost, 
1894, iii, 735-757.— Berg6. L'action 
de la cuisson sur les aliments v^g^- 
taux et animaux. Bull. Soc. d' an- 
throp. de Brux., 1893^, xii, 191- 
217.— Bergen (Fanny D.) Burial 
and holiday customs ind beliefs of 
the Irish peasantry. J. Am. Folk- 
Lore, Bost. & N. Y., 1895, xxviii, 
19-25.— Besson. Rites fiin^raires 
en usage chez les Betsileos. An- 
thropologic, Par., 1894, v, 674-682. 
—Beyer (H. G.) The application 
of the mean values derived from a 
large number of measurements to 
the annual physical examination of 
cadets of the Naval Academy. Rep. 
Surg. -Gen. Navy, Par., 1894, 105- 
1 1 0.— Boas ( F.) Sagen der Indianer 
an der Nordwest-Kiiste America's. 
Verhandl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. An- 
throp., Berl., 1894, 281-306.— Bol- 
ton (H. C.) The Porta Magica, 
Rome. J. Am. Folk-Lore, Bost. & 
N. Y., 1895, xxviii, 73-78, 1 pi.— 
Bourke (J. G.) The folk-foods of 
the Rio Grande Valley and of 
Northern Mexico. Ibid., 41-71. — 
Brault (J. ) Ablation des tatouages 
par les piqdres serr^es au chlorure 
de zinc ; application de la methode 
k la gu^rison des nwvi. Ann. de 
dermat. et syph.. Par., 1895, 3. s., 
vi, 33.— Brissaud (E.) et H. Meige. 
Gigantisme et acromegalic. J. de 
m^d. et chir. prat.. Par., 1895, Ixvi, 
49-76.— Cabeaa (A.) De8cripci6n 
y medidas de una serie de cinco 
craneos de micronesios. Rev. de 
san. mil., Madrid, 1894, viii, 65; 
81 ; 97.— Camuset, De Tabsence 
du chevauchement habituel de la 
partie ant^rieure des arcades den- 
taires com me stigmate de deg^n^- 
rescence. Ann. m^d.-psych., Par., 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 1895] 



ANTHROPOLOGIC LITERATURE 



201 



18W, 7. 8., XX, 361-369.— Capitan. 
Le menhir de Clamart. Bull. Soc. 
d'anthrop., Par., 1894. 4.8., v, 474- 

476. Uue famille de micro- 

cephales. MM. mod.. Par., 1895, 
vi, 2-4.— Chatelain (H.) African 
races. J. Am. Folk-Lore, Bost. & 

N. Y., 1894, xxvii. 289-302. 

African fetishism. Jbid.y 303. — 
Chudsinski (T.) Quelques obser- 
vations sur le muscle jumeau de la 
jambe. Bull. Soc. d anthrop. de 
Par., 1894, 4. s., v, 486-499.— Com- 
haire (C. J.) L'age des m^taux en 
Belgique. Bull. Soc. d* anthrop. de 
Brux., 1893-4, xii, 18-24.— Corrado 
(G.) Intorno ad un cranio-cefelo- 
metrografo. Gior. di med. leg., 
Lanciano, 1894, i, 242-246, 2 pi.— 
Coaillault. Note sur les stations 
pr^historiques de Gafsa iTunisie). 
Anthropologie, Par., 1894, v, 530- 
541.— Dallemagne. Du r61e du 
r^ime et de Torganisme dans revo- 
lution intellectuelle. Bull. Soc. 
d'anthrop. de Brux., 1893-4, xii, 
100-119.— Debierre(C.) Le thorax 
de riiomme est-il en voie de r^- 
j^reaston? Atti d. xi Cong. med. 
inteniaz., Roma, 1894, ii, anat., 12- 
15. — Dell (J.) Architektonisches 
auf den Reliefs der Matres ans Car- 
nuntum. Festschr. z. Begriissung. 
. . . d. Deutsch. u. Wien. anthrop. 
Gesellsch. in Innsbnick, Wien, 
1894, 96-98. —De Notariatefani 
(R.) La funzione psicologica della 
l>ena. Scuola positiva, Roma, 18i>4, 
iv, 592-618. — De Pauw (L.-F.) 
Contribution k I'^^tude de I'ali- 
mentation de I'homme et des an- 
thropomorphes. Bull. Soc. d'an- 
throp. de Brux., 1893-4, xii, 139; 
218.— Dorsey (G. A. ) A ceremony 
of the Quichuas of Peru. J. Am. 
Folk-Lore, Bost. & N. Y., 1894, 
xxvii, 307-309. AU(0, Reprint.— Dxx- 
pont (6. ) Le regime frugivore est 
le regime naturel de I'homme. Bull. 
Soc. d'anthrop. de Brux., 1893-4, 
xii, 50-77. Suite de la dis- 
cussion sur rinfluence du regime 
alimentaire artificiel : 'X ToppoS du 
r^ime d 'aliments natureis, le r^ 
gime d'aliments artificialises par la 
cuisson n'est pas dependant de I'or- 
ganisation animale. I f/id, , 300-316. 
— Continuation de la discus- 



sion sur Pinfluence du regime ali- 
mentaire artificiel ; la th^rie de 
Wallace sur Parrot d'evolution de 
Torganisation humaine par I'eifet 
des progr^ de V intelligence. / fnd. , 
321-329.— Parrer {Lord). The rela- 
tion between morals, economics, 
and statistics. J. Rov. Statist. Soc. . 
Lond., 1894, Ivii, 595-608.— P6rt 
(C.) Note pour ser\iri Phistoire 
pathologique des jumeaux. Compt. 
rend. Soc. debiol.. Par., 1894, 10. s., 
i, 837-8:^9.-Perrero ( W. ) Suicide 
among women. New Rev., Lond., 
1894, xi, 637-646.— Pewkea (J. W.) 
The Walpi flute observance; a study 
of primitive dramatization. J.Am. 
Folk-Lore, Bost. & N. Y., 1894, 
xxvii, 265-288, 2 pi.— Pletcher (R.) 
Colonel Garrick Mallery, U. S. A. 
[A biography.] Am. Anthrop., 
Wash., 1895, viii, 79.— Powke (G.) 
and W. K. Moorehead. Rec^ent 
mound exploration in Ohio. Proc. 
Acad. Nat. Sc., Phila., 1894, 308-321. 
— O. (D. B.) La Piedra del OJimpo. 
Actes soc. 8c. du Chili, Santiago, 
1894, iv, 126-128.- Oarbini (A.) 
Evoluzione del senso cromatico 
nella in^nzia ; (da esperienze fatte 
sopra 600 bambini uegli anni 1891- 
92-93.) Arch, per Pan trop.,Firenze, 
1894, xxiv, 71 ; 193. — Garofalo. 
New theories of criminology. Pre- 
vent. . . . crime. In ternat. Cong. 
Char, [etc.], Bait. & Lond.. 1894, 
48-57.— OiglioU (E. H. ) Di alcuni 
ornamenti discoidali di conchiglia 
in uso presso i)Oj)oli della Melanesia. 
Arch, per Pantrop., Firenze, 1894, 

xxiv, 221-229. Du interes- 

santi e rari amuleti dalle isole Salo- 
mons /Wd.,231-234.— OigUoIirH. 
H.) Notes on some remarkable 
specimens of old Peruvian "Ars 
plumaria " in the Mazzei collection. 
Internat. Arch. f. Ethnog., Leiden, 
1894, vii, 221-226, 1 pi. -Godfrey 
(G. C. M.) The Indian woman in 
labor. Med. Rec.,N.Y., 1894, xlvi, 
(W.^ Gray ( W. ) Some notes on the 
Tannese. Internat. Arch.f. Ethnog., 
Leiden, 1894, vii, 227-241, 1 pi.— 
Ore* (D. B.) Escritura de los Col- 
chaquis. Actes Soc. pc. du Chili, 

Santiago, 1894, iv, 92-110. 

La Piedra de la Huaca. I hid., 116- 
126. I^ escritura entre los 



Digitized by 



Google 



202 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



LVol. Vlll 



Cafiaris. Ibid. , 162-1G8.— Ounder 
(R. S.) Ancestor worship in China. 
Fortnightly Rev., N. Y. (Lond.), 
1895, Ivii, 225-237. — Oundobln 
(N.) [The inner life of the child at 
breast.] Feld8cher,St. Petersb.,1894, 
iv, 538-551.— Haacke (W. ) Uel)er 
Wesen,' Ursachen und Vererbung 
von Albinism us und Scheckung und 
iiber deren Bedeutung fiir verer- 
bungstheoretische und entwick- 
lungsmechanische Fragen. Biol. 
Centralbi., Leipz., 1895, xv, 44-78. 
— Haberlandt (M.) Die Einge- 
borenen der Kapsulan-Ebene von 
Formosa. Festschr. z. Begriissung 
. . . d. Deutsch. u. Wien. an- 
throp. Gesellsch. in Innsbruck, 
Wien, 1894, 30-39. - Hager (S.) 
Micmac customs and traditions. 
Am. Anthrop., Wash., 1895, viii, 
31^2.-Hamy (E.-T.) Les iraita- 
teurs d' Alexander Brunias ; John 
Milton, Pierre Freret, M.-L.-A. 
Boizot ( 1 788-1794). Anthropologie, 
Par., 1894, v, 542-553. — Hayes 
(S.) Another Miami valley skele- 
ton, including a description of 
two rare harpoons. J. Cincin. Soc. 
Nat. Hist., 1895, xvii, 235-240.— 
Hein (W.) Die geographische 
Verbreitung der Todtenbretter. 
Festschr. z. Begriissung. . . . d. 
Deutsch. u. Wien. anthrop. Ge- 
sellsch. in Innsbruck, Wien, 1894, 
56-71. Aho: Mitth. d. anthrop. 
Gei^cllsch. in Wien, 1894, n. F., xiv, 
211-220, 2 1)1.— Hoernea (M.) Aus- 
grabungen auf dem Castellier von 
Villanova am Quieto in Istrien. 
Festschr. z. Begriissung. . . . d. 
Deutsch. u. Wien. anthrop. Ge- 
sellsch. in Innsbruck, Wien, 1894, 
l-2*.>.— Houa6. Les effets du r(»gime 
artificiel sur le developpement in- 
tellectuel ; Puree dans les types 
humains et les classes sociales; la 
taille et Pinstruction ; usure den- 
taire des classes inferieures. Bull. 
Soc. d' anthrop. de Brux., 1893-i, 
xii, 12()-139. - Hoyer (II.) Beitr-ag 
zur Anthropologie der Nase. Mor- 
phol. Arb., Jena, 1894, iv, 151-177. 
— Hyatt ( A. ) Phylogeny of an ac- 
quired characteristic. Proc. Am. 
Phil. Soc. 1893, Phila., 1894, xxxii, 
349-647, 16 pi.— Jacques (V.) I^s 
origines ethniques des Juife. Bull. 



Soc. d'anthrop. de Brux., 1893-4, 
xii, 153, [Discussion] 233.— Jot- 
trand. Note sur I'^volution du re- 
gime alimentaire de I'homme pri- 
mitif. Ibid., 90-100.— Kidd (B.) 
Social evolution. Nineteenth Cent., 
N. Y. (Lond.), 1895, xxxvii, 226- 
240.-Kidd (W.) The position of 
the theory of evolution. Lancet, 
Lond., 1894, ii, 1581.— KoUmann 
(J.) Sur I'existence des pygmies 
dans le temps n^olithique en Eu- 
rope. Atti d. xi Cong. med. inter- 
naz., Roma, 1894, ii, anat., 58-60. — 
Krauaa (F. S.) Wie Mohammed 
KOpriilii Vezier geworden. Ein 
Guslarenlied der slavischen Mo- 
hammedaner im Herzogtum. Proc. 
Am. Phil. Soc, Phila., 1894, xxxiii, 
293-325.— KusnezawiS.K.) Ueben 
den Glauben von Jenseits und 
den Todt^ncultus der Tscheremis- 
sen. Internat. Arch, f Ethnog., 
Leiden, 1895, viii, 17-23. — Le 
Doable (A.l Sur le muscle pr^- 
sternal. Bull. Soc. d'anthrop. de 
Par., 1894, 4. s., v, 480-483.— Le- 
toumeau. L'esclavage dans le 
r^gne animal. [Abstr.] Rev. mens, 
de Pficole d'anthrop. de Par., 1894, 
iv,356-367.— Lewin (L.) DiePfeil- 
gifte; historische und experimen- 
tel le Untersuch un gen . A rch . f. path . 
Anat., etc., Berl., 1894, cxxxviii, 
283-346.— Livi (R.) Contributo alia 
geografia antropologica d'ltalia ; 
carte della distribuzione dei biondi 
e dei bi*uni. Arch, per I'antrop,, 
Firenze, 1894, xxiv, 149-1 ()5, 2 

maps. Essai d'anthropo- 

m6trie militaire ; r^sultats obtenus 
du depouillement des feuilles sani- 
taires des militaires des chisses 18.59 
^ 18(k^, fait par I'Inspwtion de Hant6 
militaire de Parm^e italienne sous 
la direction du Dr. R. Livi, capitaine 
m^^decin. Bull, de PInst. internat. 
de statist., Rome, 1894, vii, 273- 
285.— Louisiana folk tales. [Rev.] 
J. Am. Folk-Lore, Bost. & N. Y., 
1894, xxvii, 317.— McCIaughry (R. 
W.) The Bertillon system for iden- 
tification of criminals. Prevent. 
. . . crime. Internat. Cong. Char, 
[etc.], Bait. & Ix>nd., 1894, 75-83.— 
Martin (C.) The stiniggle for the 
life of others. Birmingh. M. Rev., 
1894, xxxvi, 344-350.— Martin Sa- 



Digitized by 



Google 



April 18951 



ANTHROPOLOGIC LITERATURE 



203 



r (M.) El senio es hereditario? 
(Estudio fisiologico. ) Rev. de san. 
mil., Madrid, 1894, viii, 33-36.— 
M^linand (C.) Pourcjuoi rit-on? 
Etude 8ur la cause physiologique du 
rire. Rev. d. deux mondes, Par., 
1895, cxxvii, 612-<):J0.— Meringer 
(R.) UeberSpuren romischer Dach- 
conatmctionen in Carnuntum. 
Festechr. z. Begriissung. . . . d. 
Deutsch. u. Wien. anthrop. Ge- 
sellsch. in Innsbruck, Wien, 92-95; 
— Minakata (K.) The antiquity of 
the finger-print method. Nature, 
Lend., 1894-5, li, 199.— Mivart (St. 
George.) Heredity. Harper's N. 
Month. Mag., N. Y., 1895, xc, 631- 
641.— Moore ( Ruby A. ) Supersti- 
tions from Georgia. II. J. Am. 
Folk-Lore, Host. & N. Y., 1894, 
xxvii, 305.— Morris (J. C.) The 
etiiics of Solomon. Proc. Am. Phil. 
Soc, Phila., 1894, xxxiii, 310-332. 
— de Mortillet (A.) Statuette en 
ivoire de la grotte du pape a Bras- 
sempouv (Landes). Rev. mens, de 
I'ecole d'anthrop., 1895, v, 66-68.— 
de Mortillet (G.) Palethnologie et 
anthropologie de la Bosnie-Herc^- 
govine. Rev. mens, de I'ficole d'an- 
throp. de Par., 1894, iv, 377-392.— 
N. Sirabolismo geom^trico de la 
vida. Siglo m^d.. Madrid, 1894, 
xli, 707; 738; 754.— N. (W. W.) 
Folk-tales of Angola. II. J. Am. 
Folk-Lore, Bost. & N. Y., 1894, 
xxvii, 311-316. -Neave (J. L. ) An 
agency doctor's experiences among 
frontier Indians. Cincin. M. J., 

1894, ix, 875-881.— Newell ( W. W.) 
Theories of diffusi(m of folk-tales. 
J. Am. Folk-Lore, Bost. & N. Y., 

1895, xxviii, 7-18.— Niederle (L.) 
Bemerkungen zu einigen Charak- 
teristiken aer altslawischen Grilber. 
Festschr. z. Begriissung. . . . d. 
Deutsch. u. Wien. anthrop. Ge- 
sellflch. in Innsbruck, Wien, 1894, 
40^55.- Gloria (F.) Distribution 
de rindice cephalometrique en 
Espagne. Bull. Soc. d'anthrop., 
Par., 1894, 4. s., v, 520-524.— Orn- 
atein (B.) Noch einmal iiber die 
Vererbungs-Frage individual er- 
worbener Eigenschaften. Cor.-Bl. 
d. deutach. Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., 
etc., Munchen, 1894, xxv, 49. — 
Papillaalt. Photographie d'un 



homme chien. Bull. Soc. d' an- 
throp. de Par., 1894, 4. s., v, 471. 

Note sur dix crAnes de Vel- 

leches (Vienne). Ibid., 472-47L— 
Patrick (J. J. R.) Examination of 
prehistoric crania. Dental Cosmos, 
Phila., 1895, xxxvii, 1-24.— Patter- 
son (G.) Notes on the dialect of the 
people of Newfoundland. J. Am. 
Folk-Lore, Bo8t.& N.Y\,1895,xxviii, 
27-40. — Peakind (A.) Heredity 
and crime; its preventicm and treat- 
ment. Cleveland M. Gaz., 1894-5, 
X, l<)9-204. - Picard (E. I Notice 
sur quelques vt^tiges megalithiques 
et autres de la Campine limbour- 
geoise beige. Bull. Soc. d' anthrop. 
de Brux., 1893-4, xii, 222-232.- 
Piette (E.) Races humaines de la 
p^riode glyptique. Bull. Soc. d'an- 
throp. de Par., 1894, 4. s., v, 381- 
394. -« Pilling (J. C.) The writ- 
ings of Padre Andres de Olmos in 
the languages of Mexico. Am. An- 
throp., Wash., 1895, viii, 43 60.— 
Pontnau (R.j et B. Cabi6. Un 
cimetiere gaulois il Saint-Sulpice. 
^Tarn.) Anthropologie, Par., 1894, 
V, 6^41-657.- Porter (J. H.) Caste 
in India. Am. Anthrop., Wash., 
1895, viii, 2:3-:iO.— Powell (J. W.) 
Stone art in America. Ibid.y 1-7.— 
Putnam (Helen C.) Physical train- 
ing as a reformative agent. Food, 
N. Y., 1894-5, V, 196-202.— Rechia 
(E.) The evolution of cities. Con- 
temp. Rev., N. Y. [Lond.J, 1895, 
Ixvii, 210-231. - Reeve (C. H.)- The 
philosophy of crime. Prevent. . . . 
crime. Internat. Cong. Char, [etc.], 
Bait. & Lond., 1894, 28-47.— Reg- 
nault (F.) L'exageration en esthe- 
tique. Rev. scient., Par., 1895, 4. 

8., iii, 44-49. L'&ge de la 

pierre grossi^rement taillee au 
Congo fran^ais. Bull. Soc. d' an- 
throp. de Par., 1894, 4. s., v, 477- 
480.— Rogers (A. C.) State care 
of the feeble-minded. Care . . . 
feeble-minded. Internat. Cong. 
Char, [etc.], Bait. & Lond., 1894, 
8-13.— Scott (S. M.) The Huacos 
of Chira valley, Peru. Am. An- 
throp., Wash., 1895, viii, 8-22, 2 pi. 
—Short notes in anthropology. 
Eighteenth Year Hk. N. Y. State 
Reform., Elmira, (1893), 1894, 152- 
181.— Sighele (S.) ed B. Perrl. In- 



Digitized by 



Google 



204 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



[Vol. VIII 



telligenza e moraliU della folia; 
lettera a Gabriele Tarde. iScuola 
positiva, Roma, 1894, iv, 721-734. 
— Sirena (S.) Osservazioni ana- 
tomo-patologiche sul cadavere di iin 
gigante; con tribute alia macrosomia 
e sifilide ereditaria tardiva. Atti. d. 
xi Cong.ined. internaz., Roma, 1894, 
ii, patol. gen. ed anat. patol., 150-162. 
— Szombathy (J.) Neue figiiral 
verzierte Giirtelbleche aus Krain. 
Festschr. z. Begrussung. . . . d. 
Deutsch. u. VVien. anthrop. Ge- 
sellsch. in Innsbruck, Wien, 1894, 
72-76, 1 pi.— de Tarchanoflf (I.) In- 
fluence de la musique sur I'homme 
et sur les animaux. Atti. d. xi Con^. 
med. internaz., Roma, 1894, ii, 
fisiol.,1 53-157.— Telesforo de Aran- 
zadi y Unamano. Le peuple 
basque, 4tude d'anthro|X)logie. R^ 
8um4 par M. Azoubay. Bull. Soc. 
d'anthrop.. Par., 1894, 4. s., v, 510- 
520.— Tenchini (L.) Di una nuova 
maniera di compenso nelle anoma- 
lie numeriche vertebrali dell'uomo. 
Arch, per Pantrop., Firenze, 1894, 
xxiv, 167-191.— Tooker (W. W.) 
Some Indian fishing stations upon 



Ix>ng Island. Brooklyn Daily Kagle 
Almanac, 1895, 54-57'.— Van Over- 
loop. Projet de carte pr^histo- 
rique de la Belgique. Bull. Soc. 
d' anthrop. de Brux., 1893-4, xii, 
242-250.— "Wallace (A. R.) The 
method of organic evolution. Fort- 
nightly Rey., N. Y. (Lond.), 1895, 
Ixvii, 211-224.— Washburn (W.H.) 
Artificial selection. J. Am. M. 
Ass., Chicago, 1894, xxiii, 749-751. 
— Weisbach (A.) Die Oberoster- 
reicher. Festschr. z. Begriissung. 
. . . d. Deutsch. u. Wien. anthrop. 
Gesellsch. in Innsbruck, Wien, 
1894, 77-91. Also, Mitth. d. an- 
throp. Gesellsch. in Wien, 1894, n. 
F., xiy, 232-246.— Wilkinson (W. 
H.) Chinese origin of playing cards. 
Am. Anthrop., Wash., 1895, viii, 
61-78. — Zaborowski. Deuxi^me 
squelette de Thiais. Bull. Soc. 
d'anthrop. de Par., 1894, 4. s., v, 
461^65.— Zuckerkandl (E.) Zur 
Craniologie der Nias - Insulaner. 
Festschr. z. Begriissung. . . . d. 
Deutsch. u. Wien. anthrop. Ge- 
sellsch. in Innsbruck, Wien, 18i)4, 
99-108, 1 pi. 



Digitized by 



Google 



THE 

American Anthropologist 

Vol. VIII WASHINGTON, D. C, JULY, 1895 No. 3 

THE GOD •• D ' IN THE CODEX CORTESIANUS * 

BY J. WALTER FEWKES 

In his most valuable contribution to the study of Mayan 
codices Dr. Schellhas ('86, passimf) has suggested a nomenclature 
for their pictures of gods most advantageous in the study of 
their symbolism and worthy the recognition given it by the fore- 
most students of Mayan pictography. He proposed to designate 
the figures of deities in these aboriginal " books " by the letters 
A, B, C, D, etc. Following that nomenclature, the pictographs 
considered in this article are those referred to D, taken from that 
fragment of the Codex Tro-Cortesianus called the Cortez codex. 
The resemblance of D to B and G has led me to discuss all three 
together, although G does not occur in Codex Cortesianus, as I 
regard them all related gods. I shall preface what I have to say 
of D with a brief reference to B, which I have already considered 
elsewhere ('94). 

B — Loiig-nose God. 

This god, identified by Schellhas as Kukulcan, by Brinton as 
Itzamna, has snake and rain attributes, as already pointed out, 
and is associated with symbols of all four cardinal points. It is 
a beneficent deity, and is never represented as hostile or as a 
captive. He frequently occurs engaged in planting, and in some 
instances bears one or more torches, suggesting a god of light, as 
the sun. The symbolism of his mask or ceremonial helmet I 
have already pointed out, and need not be repeated. As, how- 
ever, one of the marked peculiarities of B in Cod. Cort., which 

♦Injustice to the author, the editors desire to say that owing to his absence in Ari- 
zona It was not possible for Dr Fewkes to read the proofs of this paper. 
fSee bibliographic references at the end of this paper. 

27 (205) 



Digitized by 



Google 



206 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

was there emphasized, appears to have been overlooked in a 
subsequent publication of a recent writer, I will again refer to 
this character. " The god B," says Brinton ('95, p. 51), " is 
associated with the signs of the east, and his especial and invari- 
able {sic) characteristic are two long, serpent-like teeth, which 
project from his mouth, on^ in front, the other* to the side and 
backward." As I have elsewhere ('94, p. 263) shown in my 
criticism of Schellhas' diagnosis of B, the so-called portion of the 
tongue (*' serpent-like tooth," (?) Brinton), in front f of the 
mouth is not an invariable characteristic of B, but is always (in 
the shape referred to) absent in Cod. Cort., and, I will now add, 
in Cod. Tro. as well. In Cod. Dres. it is likewise often wanting. 
Although I find it somewhat difficult to prove from Cod. Tro- 
Cort. alone that B is a sun god, the symbolism and association 
of figures of him in Cod. Dres. lean, no doubt, on this point. 

As I have already ('94, p. 272) pointed out, the features which 
distinguish the god D from B in Cod. Cort. are the absence of 
the teeth in the upper jaw and the want of a backward curving 
oral object or appendage of the mouth. The remainder of the 
mask or ceremonial helniet,J with unimportant variations which 
are not constant, is similar in the figures of the gods B and D. 

* The homology of this object, identified as part of the tongae by Schellhas and called 
tooth by Brinton, is doubtful. It occurs in figures of certain animals, serpents, and 
quadrupeds, where its homology with a tooth is doubtful. 

t Brinton is also mistaken in ascribing the second figure of his fig. 14 C95, p 53) to the 
Dresden codex. He evidently copied this from an erroneous one by Schellliaa (*86, 
taf. HI, fig. 7), which was rightly referred to Cod. Cort., p. xi 6, by the latter author. As 
1 have elsewhere (*(M, p. 263) shown, this copy is erroneously drawn, for the *'part of 
the tongue " (Schellhas), ** tooth " (Brinton), in front of the mouth has been modified 
as compared with ihe original, which it little resembles. Brinton's fig. 12 ('95, p. 52) of 
B has the union of the lateral " tooth " with the upper jaw inaccurately copied. This 
faulty figure is a copy of B from Cod. Tro. xxvii, where, ti» in all figures of B from Cod. 
Tro-Cort., the line of the jaw extends across the base of this oral object (see Brasseur, 
'80). By the omission of this line in the copy the object is thus made to resemble a 
** tooth" more than it does in the original. The true teeth of B in God. Tro-Cort are 
regular and prominent, and the backward curving body at the side of the mouth may 
or may not be a "tooth." Until, however, it can be shown that this lateral body is a 
" tooth," the reference of B to Cogulludo's god with teeth " muy desformis " is doubtful, 
so far as this object is concerned. 

X From the fact that it was customary in Central America, as in many other places, 
for divinities to be personified in ceremonials by men wearing grotesque masks with 
the symbolism of those divinities, it is possible to speak without valid objections of the 
heads of these divinities depicted in the codices as ceremonial masks or representa- 
tions of the same. The terms ** masks" and "ceremonial helmets" are significant 
words to use in thi.s connection, against which nothing of value has yet been urged. 
The use of masks in certain Mayan dances still survives, and according to Valentini 
('95) the tapir mask is still employed in a "ballet" of the " Zayi' dance. This latter 
fact, as mentioned by this author in connection with a cephaloglyph of B, is interesting, 
as the nose of K has been compared to the snout of the tapir by several authors. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] GOD ** D " IN CORTEZ CODEX 207 

The following features are common to all the figures of D in 
the Cod. Cort. : 

1. Nose prominent, not hanging below the lower lip, pointed, 
not continuous with an upper lip, but separated from it by a 
notch ; * end of nose not curving upward. 

2. Eye bounded by a scroll with marginal blocks. 

3. Upper jaw toothless ; single tooth in lower jaw. 

4. No curved oral object at the corner of the mouth. 

5. No scroll over the nose. 

6. Headdress present but variable. 

The following table gives suggestive associations of D : 

Associated with the symbol kan (maize) 11 

kan in the hand 4 

kan inix in the hand 3 

kan on ground before him 2 

seated on kan 1 

Associated with it. 1 

Associated with kin f 2 

Associated with akb<il t 

Associated with ahau i 

Associated with snake 3 

Associated with fallings; water 1 

In an analysis of this table we are struck by the large number 
of figures of D associated with the sign kan, maize.|| D is, we 
should judge from associations, a beneficent, not a malevolent, 
god connected with life, and the association of the snake with D 
and the existence of the kin sign on the head and at the feet 
suggest the sun. A figure of D is found once at least in the 

*Thi8 notch is absent in all figures of B in Cod. Cort. Attention is called to the fact 
that the sign akbal is wanting on the head of D in Cod. Cort. In figures of D in Cod. 
Dres. it is sometimes present, as shown by Sohellhas. 

t In one instance on the head, in another on the ground before him. In some of the 
cephaloglyphs of D is a half circle which resembles a conventional sign of the sun. 

X The existence of akbal on the forehead of ihe cephaloglyph of D wiU be discussed 
later. This sign occurs in the hieroglyphs of D in Cod. Cort., but not on the figures 
themselves. 

I Although associated with D in other codices, I find it with this god in Cod. Cort. only 
in one or two doubtful cases. 

1 Many English equivalents of kan have been pointed out, but there is a singularly 
uniform acceptance of the belief that one of these is corn or maize. Some of the deriv- 
ative meanings are not diflUcult to explain, as, for instance, ** wealth " (abundance), etc., 
on the ground that kan^ yellow, or corn is a primary translation. The Tusayan Indians 
use in the same way the word ka-tf maize, which has a startling phonetic resemblance 
U> kan. 



Digitized by 



Google 



208 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

neighborhood of the hieroglyph for west, and once near that of 
east. He is frequently seated in a house marked with a cross. 
The hieroglyph * ascribed by Schellhas ('86, p. 57) to G occurs, 
in Cod. Cort., over D on page xxix a 1. The cephaloglyph of D 
occurs over D in xvi a l,t xxi c 1 (xxi d 3 without akbcd^ but with 
dots), XXX b 1 (?), xxvi c 2, xxviii b 1. It is found over another 
god in XXX iii b 2 and xxix, xx c 1. Modifications of the cepha- 
loglyph of D with nkbcU surrounded by dots occur over animals 
or gods not identified as D in xxx a 1, xxix c 1. 

Idmtifications of D, 

It is natural that a pictorial element which forms such a con- 
stant and extensive element in the illustrations of the codices 
should be thought to represent an important deity, and it is not 
strange that D is identified with one of the most important of 
the deities mentioned by Spanish writers. Three identifications 
have more or less in their favor, viz., Itzamna, Moon god, and 
Kukulcan, and it is believed the evidence is good that it belongs 
to one or another of these three. 

One of the first steps taken to identify D was by Schellhas 
('86), who in his earliest publication pointed out some of the 
main features of symbolism, but assigned no definite name be- 
yond the letter *' 1) " and " God with the face of an old man." 
Later, however, he became convinced tbat it is a '* Moon god." 
From Schellhas' first descrii)tion ('86, p. 57) I quote as follows : 
**Geschicht eines alten Mannes mit eingefallenen, Zehnlosem 
Munde, verziertem Auge wie die Gott mit der Schlangenzunge " 
" vor (]i}n Gesicbt hurabhangenden Koppsmiick der das Tages- 
zeichen akbal J enthiilt." 

♦The form of this hieroglyph given by Schellhas ('92, p. 104, first figure of U) does 
not occur with D in Cod. Cort., so far as I can find. 

t Unfortunately the pages of the Rada y Delgado fiicsimile of the Cod. Cort. are not 
numbered, so that for uniformity with the enumeration of the pages of Cod. Dres. I 
have used Roman numerals, adopting the pagination of Rosny's copy. While, how- 
ever, there was no other course to follow in referring to the Cod. Cort., I fjelieve as it 
and Cod. Tro. are undoubtedly fragments of one large codex, that a simpler paging of 
the Cod. Tro-Cort., taken together, is called for and must be devised to insure con- 
venience of references as research progresses. 

J This feature must have \>een overlooked by Brinton when he identified a figure of 
D with the akbal on the head as Kin ich ('95, fig. 74). The proper identification of the 
middle figure of fig. 74 (op. cit.) is not Kin ich, but the god I), if we limit Kin ioh as 
Schellhas and Brinton have in their articles. 



Digitized by 



Google 



American Anthropologist 



July, 1895 




Pi^aTK I.— The God " D," after Codex Cortesian us 



Digitized by 



Google 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] GOD "d" IN CORTEZ CODEX 209 

In later publications ('87, p. 19; '92, pp. 110-111) the same 
author said of D that it " ist unzweifelhaft den Mondgott," 
which is the first of the identifications that I shall discuss. In 
following his argument stress is laid on the presence of akbal 
surrounded by dots, especially in the hieroglyph which is as- 
cribed to D. In the figures of D in Cod. Cort. I have never 
found the sign akhal hanging down before the face as in figures 
of D in Codex Dresdensis.* 

Granting, as we may with reasonable faith, that the hiero- 
glyph of D is rightly assigned, it is well to attempt an interpre- 
tation of the component akhalf as a significant factor in the iden- 
tification of D. The word akhal signifies darkness or night, and, 
according to Seler ('89, p. 58), the Mayas still use akab, akabil, 
and akbil to designate night. Others, as Kiche-Cakchiquel, use 
d'kab^ d*ka, a^kbal for the same, and the Ixil akbal, according 
to the same authority. The Nahuatl equivalent, calli, means 
*' house," which I may anticipate by saying it may refer simply 
to the sun-house or place where the sun sets, which, as the 
Nahuas associate with the west, refers to the western house, or 
place of sunset. 

The Tzendal equivalent is Votan, which, according to Seler 
('89, p. 57), is not the proper name of the sign, but that of a 
Cultus hero, the celebrated Votan, to whom the sign is conse- 
crated. If we follow him in his derivation of uo^an and find the 
etymologic meaning to be " H^art of expansion " or " Heart of 
the surface," it is possible that the root tan, "expansion," may 
refer to the sky, and the heart to the sun, possibly the same as 
the Kiche uc^xcah, the heart of the sky, of the Popol Vuh. 

The presence of akbal on the cephaloglyph J of the Bat god 
(Seler, '94) and in the name of the Bat month (Landa, '81) adds 
little one way or the other to the interpretation of I) as a Moon 
god, but conveys the same idea of darkness as in the cephalo- 
glyph of D. The association of the Bat god with the under 



• In figures of D the lower Jaw is furnished with one tooth and is not toothless in Cud. 
Tro-Cort. 

fThis is not limited to the cephaloglyph of D. 

t The term cephaloglyph is applied to those hieroglyphs which are simply conven- 
tionalized pictures of heads, either of gods or animals, and are readily distinguished 
from dny signs (hemeroglyphs , numerical signs (metroglyphs), and others. The 
hieroglyphs of the different gods ofien contain as an important component the cepha- 
loglyph of that god, as B, C, etc. 



Digitized by 



Google 



210 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

world as a subterranean cavern is in harmony with the idea of 
the solar interpretation of D, for the sun in setting sinks into the 
under world in the conceptions of many American tribes. 

Manifestly, if the etymologic analysis given above is correct, 
or approximately so, we find naught in akbal, except the mean- 
ing " to become dark," to suggest the moon, and this can be ex- 
plained on the supposition that akbal refers to the sun of the 
under world or the sun sinking into his western house, calll, 
followed, as suggested by Seler, by the Cihuateted, daughters of 
the Earth goddess, into whose home the sun goes. 

An examination of other arguments presented by Schellhas 
that D is a Moon god has not carried conviction. The associa- 
tion with the snail in the light of the relationship of this animal 
to the winter solstice recalls not a Moon god, but rather a Sun 
god. This author says ('87, p. 19) : " Dass die in sorgfaltig aus- 
gefiihrten Varianten der Hieroglyph e des Gottes (wie die oben 
abgebildete) unterhalb des Mondgesichtes befindliche bogen- 
fbrmige Figur den Mond in seinem Viertel darstellen soil. Es 
spricht dafiir noch die interessante Thatsache, dass in Landa's 
Alphabet eine ganz ahnliche mondviertelformige Figur gegeben 
ist, mit dem phonetischen Werthe U. U heist der Mond in 
Maya." In an examination of this argument we must bear in 
mind that Landa gives two signs for U, one of which, to be sure, 
might be called a crescent (a moon symbol), but the other is a. 
simple spiral, recalling the coil in caban. Surely the crescent 
sign for the letter u is not always a prominent element of the 
hieroglyph assigned to D. 

Sciiellhas ('92, p. 110) points out that there is "einer unbe- 
kannten Beziehung " between D and a " Water goddess, I," who 
has a serpent headdress. I think we may accept the belief that 
a goddess with a serpent headdress is a serpent being or in some 
way related to such a one. The association of D and I is not 
obscure if D be regarded a Sun god, as sun and serpent symbol- 
ism are almost inseparable in American mythologies. On the 
theory that D is a Moon god, it is difficult to explain the anom- 
alous association with a goddess bearing the serpent.* 

♦One figure of D in Cort. Cod. carries in (he hand ft serpent object (aspergil? or 
rattle?), and ihere are in the other codices other instances of serpent symbols associ- 
ated with D. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] OOD "d" IN CORTEZ CODEX 211 

Dieseldorff has added an important bit of evidence to the 
theory that D is a Moon god in his remarks on the decoration 
of a jar from Cohan. 

After pointing out the presence of the snail (which, I believe, 
does not militate against, but rather supports, the claim that D 
is a solar god), he says ('93, p. 380): "Das Zeichen Akbal, 
welches Nacht bedeutet, wird bei dem Stirnschmuck durch die 
Mondsichel ersetzt, von welcher Biischel niederfallen, in denen 
ich vermuthe, dass Regen dargestellt sein soil (vergl. Dresd. 74) ; 
auch sitzt der Gott an einem Wasserlauf." The figure referred 
to as attached to the forehead is certainly crescentic in form , and 
therefore not unlike a moon, and there is a likeness between the 
water falling from the dragon's head of the celestial tablet in 
Dres. 74, and, we might add, from the rain-clouds below it, and 
the " biischel " which fall from the crescentic figure of the fore- 
head of the decoration of the Coban jar. Notwithstanding, how- 
ever, these coincidences, all can be explained on the theory that 
D is a solar god, except the crescentic body. Supposing that the 
crescent in this figure has the same position as akbal in figures 
of D in Cod. Dres., we may compare the " biischel " with the ap- 
pendages to akbal in those figures of D in Cod. Dres. which had 
this sign above the head. In such figures, of which there are 
several, there is little resemblance between the appendage and 
water ; so that there may be a doubt whether the " Biischeln '' of 
the Coban jar really represent water, as supposed by Dieseldorff. 

If, moreover, the symbol akbal, night or darkness (to become 
dark), refers to the moon, there still remains to be interpreted that 
example of D which has the kin (sun) sign on the forehead and 
those like Cod. Dres. xv c, which carry kin (sun) in the hand, 
which are readily explained on the theory which follows, that D 
is a solar deity. 

The reasons, which appear to me to be valid, for the identifica- 
tion of D as Itzamna have been exhaustively stated by Seler ; but 
while I have no new evidence, it seems to me that a few addi- 
tional facta available add some weight to the conclusion that it 
is a Sun god of the hieroglyph akbal surrounded by dots. He 
says ('89, p. 64) : " I^a figure 366 \_akbar\, le symbole du dieu 
Itzamn^, me paralt indiquer la lumi^re qui descend de Tob- 
8curit6 de la nuit, le ciel 6toil^." On the supposition that D is a 
solar deity, I should regard it as well symbolized by akbal, the 



Digitized by 



Google 



212 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

(lark sun (under world sun) surrounded by the dots represent- 
ing sunrise or sunset rays.* 

Seler's studies of the Maya calendar have yielded important 
results in regard to the meaning of ahmi, which are highly in- 
structive, considering the association of the god D with the sign for 
east. Ahau signifies ** king," " master," according to this author- 
ity, and '* in this acceptation is employed not only in the Maya 
of Yucatan, but also in the different languages of Guatemala." 
He derives it from the masculine prefix ah (prefix denoting pos- 
session). " La signification fondamentale de ahau est, en tous 
cas, homme, maitre; les deux racines ah et vw, qui ont la m^me 
signification, paraissent concourir k la formation de ce mot (Seler, 
'89, p. 110)." 

The meanings of ahau given by Brasseur (70, p. 132) are 
"Siegneur, prince, roi, souverain." According to Seler, this 
author translated it '* mattre du collier," master of the coUar.f 

One " master," *' king," or " sovereign " sometimes referred to 
by ahau is undoubtedly the sun, and the interpretation of the 
Kiche myth of Hunahpu and Xbalanque by Seler is highly in- 
structive in this connection. Comparative studies also indicate 
the same, and Seler finds that Hunahpu " r^pond au mexicain 
C€ xochitl qu'on rencontre dans le Cod. de Vienne 23, comme 
symbole certain du dieu du soleil, ou, plutot, comme le nom 
m^me du dieu du soleil. Le soleil 6tant le roi des dieux, 
ehau et hunah pu s'accordent parfaitement avec le mexicain 
xochiiV^ In view of the application of the hieroglyph ahau 
to the sun, the reader's attention is called to the conventional 
Tusayan sun symbol as figured in my account of the Paliilukonti. 
The upper segment of the disk of Taxva (Sun) is separated from 
the lower by a horizontal line, from the middle of which arises a 
vertical which divides the segment into two parts, comparable 
with soms variants of ahaxi. (Seler, '89, p. Ill, figs. 848-851, 
871-873.) 

*No one in discussing the theory that D Is a Moon god seems to have called attention 
to the paucity of references to a Moon god in Spanish or semi-Spanish accounts of Maya 
or Kiche mythology. In D we have a god pictured almost as many times as the most 
numerous A or B. If it is a Moon god, is it not strange that it is so seldom referred to in 
Spanish writings ? Brinton ('95, pp. 37-45), in his account of the Maya mythology, does 
not mention a Moon god, justly, I believe, on account of its insignificance in the Maya 
Olympus, and we look in Popol Vuh (Brasseur, '61, pp. 5, 7, etc.) in vuin for a Moun 
god among the powerful deities. Does not this fact convey a word of caution to the 
observer against a^.^igning to the Moon god the figures of D, which are among the 
most numerous in the codices? 

t A god with an ahau on the head and collar on the neck is referred Co later. 



Digitized by 



Google 



American Anthropologist 



July, 1895 




Plate II.— The God "D," after Codex Cortesianus 

Digitized by VjOOQIC 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895J GOD " D " IN CORTEZ CODEX 213 

As shown by several authors, as, for instance, Thomas ('93, 
p. 248), the upper part of the sign for east is probably ah(iu. If 
the word for east (likin) is expressed by ahaa kin (master sun), 
the figure of D below it is not explained by the hypothesis that 
D is the setting sun, provided, of course, this symbol is rightly 
assigned to the east, as I believe it is. But evidence drawn from 
the argument that D is in the west world-quarter in the Tableau 
is offset by that drawn from the existence of D in the opposite, 
or east, world-quarter in the same Tableau. Evidently little 
light on the question of whether D is a setting sun can be de- 
rived from the position of D in the Tableau, so far as the element 
ahau in the east world-quarter sign is concerned. Furthermore, 
if the bound figure in the south world-quarter is the same as the 
right-hand upper figure of Cod. Cort. xix h, who has an cikau on 
the head, new corn plications arise ; for if it is to be interpreted the 
moon on the forehead of the sign of D, why not likewise call it a 
moon sign on this figure? This question, of course, might also 
be asked : If aitau is regarded as a sun sign, why is not the yellow 
figure with the high collar and ahau sign a sun god ? Ahau is a 
common prefix or suffix for many and diverse gods and exists 
in their names, " Cum Ahau," " Lord of the Vase " (probably 
Itzamnd — Brinton, '95, p. 42), Hunahpu, Ahraxahak, Ahraxa 
Trel (Brasseur, '61), etc., and does not in all instances refer to 
a sun god. 

Ahau is said (Seler, '89, p. 113) to form an important com- 
ponent in hieroglyphs referring to gods of light,* life, and pros- 
perity, but is completely absent in those of hostile powers, the 
divinities of death. It is natural to refer such to solar rather 
than to lunar deities (which are more often sinister and dark in 
nature), gods of the under world, death, and hostile powers. 

Seler ('89, p. 57) states his views that D represents Itzamna so 
clearly in his interpretation of some of the sitting figures in the 
Tableau des Bacabs that I will quote him at length : ** Sur la 
fameuse feuille 41-42 du Codex Cortez que Cyrus Thomas a dis- 
cut4e dans sa r^cente publication, nous voyons au milieu des 
quatre points cardinaux, deux divinites assises sons un arbre 
(le yax che le ceiba ?) ; nous avons certainement reconnu I'an- 
cien dieu, Itzamnt\, le dieu pc^re, d'apres Hernandez, et sa com 

* By compamtive stiidit^s of the other co«li«'os I find that thero is good ground for the 
belief that the Hign ahau is aMsociated with D in several instances. 

28 



Digitized by 



Google 



214 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VllI 

pagne (Ixchel, la mfere de Chibiriac, la mSre de Bacab). Les 
memes divinites se trouvent en haut de I'image, parmi les signes 
du ciel qui, d'apr^s I'hypoth^se habituelle, designent rorient, 
mais peut-^tre la direction du sud. Au milieu de la figure, le 
dieu tient une pile de trois signes ik (fig. 253) ; devant la divinity 
se trouve une autre pile (fig. 254) qui montre, en dessous, le 
symbole du vase, en dessus le signe ik, et enfin une figure d'ani- 
mal peinte en rouge * qui fait penser au signe imix, le symbole 
de la fecondit6. " 

A third identification of D is by Brinton ('95, p. 56), who 
diflfers from all others in referring it to Kukulcan. He mentions 
the several characteristics of D, and regards them as *' traits coin- 
ciding " with the myths of Kukulcan. I regret that he has not 
discussed the different interpretation of the same characteristics 
by Seler and Schellhas, and, as I find no distinctive feature 
among those mentioned to prove that D is Kukulcan, his argu- 
mentation does not appear to me conclusive, or is at most 
incomplete.f 

Schellhas has^ shown ('86, p. 58) that the god D has an appen- 
dage to the chin comparable with a beard, and claims that it is 
absent in all other figures: "Er (beard) kommt bei keiner 
anderere Figur der Handschriften vor." Notwithstanding this 
feature is not universal in figures of D, indeed occurs in but one 
figure of D in Cod. Cort., Brinton ('95, pp. 56, 57) gives it weight 
in an attempt to identify D as Kukulcan, and says : " When we 
perceive that he, and he alone of all the deities, is occasionally 
depicted with a beard under his chin, just as Cuculcan wore in the 
legend, the identification becomes complete." 

We find a figure of the head of D emerging from a " green 
dragon " in one page of Cod. Dres., and this fact has been ad- 
duced in evidence that D is Kukulcan. It is said in Popol Vuh 
(p. 315) of Gucumatz, the Kiche equivalent of Kukulcan, that 
every seven days he took on the nature of a snake and was veri- 

* Id my copy of the Rada y Delgado facsimile of the Codex Cortez the part of the 
pile of three signs mentioned as a figare of an animal is not peints en rouge and is of 
the same color as the other two. 

t This author says that D generally bears the sign akbcU *' because he is the setting or 
night sun; for which reason his headdress is often the horns of the eared owl." I 
readily subscribe to the view that D is a Sun god, possibly in cases where he has akbaly 
the darkened sun, but know not the evidence that the horn sometimes represented on 
the heads of this and other deities is the horn of the '* eared owl/' and reserve an ex- 
pression of opinion on that point. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] GOD " D " IN CORTEZ CODEX 215 

tably a snake, and it is natural to use a figure with a serpent 
body in support of the theory that it represents Kukulcan. The 
force of the argument is, however, that D is Kukulcan is some- 
what diminished when we remember that in two instances in 
Cod. Cort. a figure of a snake bears the head, not of D but of B, 
and the reptile figured with D in Cod. Dres. differs from a snake 
in having legs. 

While Brinton finds that Itzamnd is generally connected with 
Yaxche, '* The Tree of Life," which he, as Seler, believes to be 
represented in the middle of the Tableau des Bacabs, he identi- 
fies the god under it in this instance as Kukulcan. and does 
not refer to Seler's strong argument from this very association 
that it is Itzamn&. So far as I can follow the evidences brought 
forward to identify D as Kukulcan, they do not seem to me to 
overthow those of Seler that D is Itzamnd. 

The exact relationship between the text and the accompany- 
ing pictorial elements or components of the codices are more or 
less indefinitely known, and it is commonly supposed that there 
is a connection between the two. In some instances, however, 
I think I can show that this connection is distant. Let me illus- 
trate by a figure (Cod. Cort. xxxix b 2) which I have identified 
as D. Saville ('94) has shown that pis. xxxi-xxxviii plus the 
lower half of xxxix (Cod. Cort.) is a tonalamatl. This tonala- 
matl consists of eight full pages divided in the middle of a 
horizontal red band. In the upper half there are sixteen figures, 
and in the lower the same number, making thirty-two figures in 
all in these eight pages. Over each of the thirty -two figures there 
are six hieroglyphs, of which that in the lower right-hand corner 
is the same in all the thirty-two clusters. Whatever this series 
of thirty-two groups of six glyphs means, each group closes with 
the same sign, verb, substantive, or what not. 

Taking now a fresh start and looking at the lower series of 
sixteen groups, of six hieroglyphs each, we find that the seventh 
and eighth groups (xxxiv 6, Cod. Cort.), counting xxxi b as the 
first, have all the six hieroglyphs (cephaloglyphs and other com- 
ponents) identical with the sixteenth. In other words, a lesser 
series of eight closes with the same six glyphs, followed by a dif- 
ferent series of eight, likewise closing with the same six signs. 
In this repetition we may have a coincidence, but it is interest- 
ing that it is connected with the number eight. From a point of 
view of comparative ceremoniology , this continual and rhythmic 



Digitized by 



Google 



216 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

repetition suggests songs, incantations, invocations, or prayers 
rather than histories or accounts of rituals.* 

Again, the figure of D drawn below the eighth group of the 
lower series (xxxiv b 2) of the tonalamatl has, as shown above, 
the same six glyphs above it as a Black god (op. cit. 1) and a 
figure of the turtle in the sixteenth group (xxxvii b 2). Evi- 
dently, therefore, the text embraced in the six glyphs of each of 
these three is not illustrated by the same pictorial component. 
None of the three sets of six identical hieroglyphs contains the 
cephaloglyph ordinarily ascribed to D or that of the Turtle, al- 
though the glyph for earth is present in all and the cephaloglyph 
of B and one other is universal. Recognizing an absence of 
knowledge of what the whole series means, we are not denied 
the statement that there is a want of harmony between the text 
of the lower parts of plates xxxiv and the second part of plate 
xxxviii and the accompanying pictorial elements. I venture 
the suggestion that the series of thirty-two groups of glyphs re- 
ferred to as a recitative invocation or prognostic and the pre- 
dominance of the cephaloglyphs of solar deities implies that it 
pertains to these deities. The character of the pictorial elements 
does not prevent an acceptance of this theory or one of a related 
nature. 

Similarity in Symbolism to God G, 

Both B and D have masks which are similar to that of G,t 
which is generally recognized from the presence of the sign kin 
on head, arms, and thighs, and in the hieroglyph as a Sun god. 

As Schellhas has pointed out, there is no figure in Cod. Cort. 
which corresponds with god G as described by him. It would 
therefore naturally not be considered in this article, but from 
the fact that symbolically it can only with difficulty be separated 
from B or D, the one feature, the sign kiii mentioned as distin- 

* It is a suggestive fact in this connection that the glyph pax, which Brassear trans- 
hkted as a musical instrument and Brinton identifies as a drum, occurs many times in 
the series, in most instancns just before the final glyph common to all, never, so far as 
can be seen, as an initial sign in the series. 

t It is evident that there is such a close likeness between G (Kin ich ahau) and 
Itzamn& that it amounts to an identity, and Landa speaks at least twice (pp. 89, 97) of a 
ceremonial idol which was called Cinchahan YzamnA or Chinchan Yzamna. Here in a 
reason for a belief that Kin ich ahau in so closely allied to Itzamn& that Spanish account^^ 
confuse them. The symbolism of B, D, and G as expressed in the codices is so close 
that I doubt whether we are justified in separating G from the other two, and the evi- 
dence that G is a midday sun, while Band D are sunrise and sunset attributable names, 
is not wholly satisfactory. 



Digitized by 



Google 



American Anthropologist 



July, 1895 




rV-* 











Pi^ATK III.--Suiiinier Solstice, after Codex Cortesianus 

Digitized by VjOOQIC 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] GOD " I) " IN CORTEZ CODEX 217 

guishing it, being insufficient. As this is said to be one of the 
easiest gods to identify, and as the above statement is a departure 
from the interpretation of Schellhas, an examination of figures 
of G in other codices is called for in evidence of the validity of 
my conclusion ('92, p. 113.) 

Schellhas' diagnosis of G is as follows : " Charakterisch fiir 
seine Darstellungen ist ausser dem sonnenzeichen kin, das er 
auf Korper triigt, eine eigenthiimliche Nasenverzierung (fig. 43) 
die wie man aus einem Vergleich mit anderen ahnlichen Darstel- 
lungen im Dr. Sieht nichts anderes ist, als ein grosser und beson- 
ders kuntvolles Nasenflock." It would seem that the one 
essential characteristic of G is the sun (^m) symbol on the body, 
arms, or head, or in a hieroglyph which is associated with G. 

According to Schellhas ('86, p. 62), there is one characteristic 
of G which never fails, viz., ** die gebogene Verzierung auf der 
Nase," an appendage easily recognized from a figure of it which 
he has given in another article ('92). As this appendage or any 
well identified figure of G is not found in Cod. Tro-Cort, let us 
turn to Cod. Dres. for figures with this appendage. We find it 
well marked in xi 6 1, xi c 2, xv a 1, xxii 6 3, all of which have 
the sign kin on back, thighs, arms, or head, and all have the 
curved ** tongue " in the angle of the mouth like B. The ho- 
mology of the curved nasal appendage is shown in xiii a 1, 
where we find it comparable with the body above the nose in B. 
In looking over the 130 figures of B in Cod. Dres. I find twenty- 
five, more or less, decorated with what might be called kin signs 
on body, thighs, arms, or head, not half of which have the nasal 
body in the form said to be characteristic of G, while many do 
not have the hieroglyph referred to the same god. 

A result of my examination of G in Cod. Dres. has therefore 
convinced me that, instead of being the "easiest of all to iden- 
tify," it is one of the most difficult, and I have been led to doubt 
whether the so-called diff'erences in symbolism between G and 
B are important enough to always separate them. The theory 
that G represents the " Mid-day Sun," while possible, has cer- 
tainly not been shown to be so beyond doubt by the evidence 
presented.* 

* According to Schellhas (*92, p. 113), in no other codex except Cod. Drefi. is there 
found a figure of a god (except G) which has the sun sign (kin) on the body, but in Cod. 
Cort. there is a fijcure of D with kin on the head, as I have shown in this article. 



Digitized by 



Google 



218 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

The diversity of opinion in regard to the proper identifica- 
tions of B and D as Kukulcan and Itzamn4 or vice versa, which- 
ever may be right, still allow us to consider both solar deities, 
as indicated by the contents of the codices. 

Some of the evidences which may be mentioned indicating 
the solar nature of B, D, and G are — 

1. Association with the signs kin and ahau (except B). 

2. Association with all cardinal points (D generally with 
west). 

3. Association with snake (plumed) and falling water. 

4. Association with or engaged in beneficent acts, planting, 
pouring water or kan (maize field, corn, etc.). 

5. Torches in one or both hands.* 

The lower half of plate xix (Cod. Cort.) is instructive to study 
as a whole in connection with the theory that B and D are solar 
deities, as they and the other deities in the series forming the 
tonalamatl f (pi- x, xxxi-xxxix) figure in it. An explanation 
of this picture as a whole may be as follows : 

In the middle we find a house represented, perhaps a sun- 
house (earth, under world). Meandering on each side of this 
house and entering it, or passing behind it, is a cord (serpent?), 
the symbol of the path of the sun. The Maya artist placed on 
this path the symbol kin (sun) as if to show what he meant, and 
to it joined by a kind of umbilical attachment four gods (B, A, 
the Black god, and a god with an enormous collar and afiau on 
the head), thus indicating how intimately these gods were con- 
nected with the sun. At the point where the pathway (cord) 
enters or leaves the house is the Turtle,! emblem of the sum- 



* I do not regard it iieccMsury to draw from comparHtive mythology facta in biipport of 
the worship of several Biins (see Spencer's Synthetic Philosophy, I, p. 377), nor do I feel 
called upon to account for the " cultus hero" element of Kukulcan except to say that 
it would be perfectly natural for primitive man, as ha.« happened again and again inde 
pendently, to ascribe the beneficent attributes of one luminary or even his name to a 
religious reformer, teacher, or great leader. 

t Although the enumeration of the four rows of day si^ns on pp. xxxi-xxxix is not 
the tonalamatl (260 days), possibly such was intended by the writer. 

^ In a later publication on the Death god. A, the following resemblances between it 
and the Turtle as a i<ymbol of the solstices will be discussed: 

1. The globular bodies ("eyes," ••bells," etc.) on the heads. 

2. The zigzag lines ("spear-point") crossing each other on the head of A and the 
carapace of the turtle. 

3. The bands on the body. 

4. Short, stumpy tail of Home pictures of A. 

6. Shape of eyes of A and those of the Turtle. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] GOD "d" IN CORTEZ CODEX 219 

mer solstice (Forstemann, 392 a), with the yax sign to denote the 
sun's force at that point. The god D,like the other four, grasps 
the cord (the umbilical attachment not visible). 

The two lower gods are A, Death god, and the Black god 
(Ekchuah?), both gods of the under world. Two of the three 
of the upper half we know as B, Kukulcan ; D, ItzamnA. But 
what of the third ? Glancing at the Tableau des Bacabs, we see 
in the world-quarter with the symbol for south a similar per- 
sonage bound and seated, but with no sign of ahau on the head, 
although a halo is not wanting. Here also, if we consider the 
Death god as north, this god is south, diagonally opposite the 
north. Considering that the four gods united to the cord are 
four world-quarter gods, beginning at A and following a sinistral 
circuit, we would have A, Death god (north ) ; B, Kukulcan 
(east) ; " Bearer of the collar '' (south), and Black god (west) ; 
or, if we regard B as god of a fifth direction and include D in 
the circuit, we would have N., W., S., E., and B (middle, above). 
This lower half of plate xix (Cort. Cod.) closes a tonalamatl, of 
which it is the eighth (significant) page, the preceding bearing 
the four rows of day-signs which constitute that epoch. Every 
page of the section of eight, of which it is the last except itself, 
has falling rain depicted on it. There are six snakes on the 
seven preceding pages, so arranged that every page has the head 
or part of the body of one of these reptiles. We are, so far as 
can be judged from pictorial components of these pages, dealing 
with a rain occurrence of some kind, in which Kukulcan, the 
plumed serpent, and falling water figure conspicuously. I^et us 
suppose that the lower part of page xix represents the summer 
solstice or the Turtle month, Kaiab, whose cephaloglyph has a 
turtle's head in composition (see Landa). If the preceding 
seven pages refer to a ceremony, to what one, using Landa's cal- 
endar, shall we look ? According to I^anda, in the month of 
P(ix was celebrated the Pacumchac, in which the rites of Ku- 
kulcan performed in November were repeated. In this month 
(May) the rains in Yucatan begin. The plumed snakes spread 
over pages xii-xviii, the figures of B Kukulcan, the falling water 
on every one of the seven pages, the culmination of the eighth 
page in a picture with a turtle and the sun's coui*se, as I have 
theoretically interpreted page xix, may not refer to ceremonials 
described by Landa at the summer solstice and the month be- 



Digitized by 



Google 



220 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

fore it, but there are many circnmstantial coincidences between 
them, connected, doubtless, with cycles of time and movements 
of heavenly bodies. 

If, however, the seven pages refer to astrologic or astronomic 
events, as the character of plate xix would imply, we may have 
represented simply the position of certain celestial bodies, evi- 
dently prominently the sun, whose symbol is so constant.* But 
if the symbols in the Celestial Band are rightly assigned to 
planets by Forstemann, possibly this series deals with the planets 
Venus, the moon, and possibly others. The astronomical ex- 
planation rather than the ritualistic appeals to me when I study 
the symbols, but the association of ceremony and position of the 
sun, planets, stars, etc., was so close that the ritualistic element 
is not absent from these plates. 

The so-called Tableau des Bacab, which relates to a ritual 
period of 260 days, as indicated by the day-signs and accompa- 
nying dots, has three figures of D, one of which is seated under 
a yak'che or tree of life in the center, one seated in the eastern, 
and one in the western world-quarter. The one in the eastern 
houset faces a female or Earth goddess, before whom is a symbol 
of kan (field of maize), upon which falls either the lightning (the 
fertilizer?) or the fierce rays of the sun. 

In conclusion, I would state that some of the results of ray 
studies of the three gods B, D, and G are — 

1. They represent solar deities referable to those described by 
Spanish writers as^TCukulcan, Itzamnii, and Kin ich ahau, or 
the latter combined. 

2. The symbolism is very similar and characteristic, differing 
considerably from that of other gods, and indicating close rela- 
tionshij) in the supernatural person depicted. 

3. While evidence is good that B may be identified as Kukul- 
can and D as Itzamna, it falls short of proof of this or of the reverse 
theory. The argument that D is one of these personages is 
stronger than that it is a Moon god pure and simple. 

• Brinton haw already pointed out that the upper series of xiv, xv, xvi " may repreHeni 
positions of certain celedtial bodies l)eforethe summer solstice (indicated by the turtle, 
p. 7)," but I regard the summer solstice as pictured in p. xixb for the lower series. 

^The cross on the upright of these houses, which occurs so frequently in the codex, 
may refer to the sun or the sun-house (see Seler, '89, p. 58, where the cross is spoken of 
in the figs. '^)i>-2!)8). It is an interesting fact that a similar cross, as I have elsewhere 
shown, among the Tusayan Indians is a syml>ol of Cotokmuflwa, the Heart of All the 
Sky. In the discussion of akbal by Seler it seems that a crobs has relation to the heart 
of expansion in Mayan mythology. 



Digitized by 



Google 



American Anthropologist 



July, 1895 




Pirate IV.— After Codex Cortesianus 



Digitized by 



Google 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] GOD " D " IN CORTEZ CODEX 221 

4. The lower part of page xix (Cod. Cort.) is an example of 
picture-writing representing the summer solstice and the coui-se 
of the sun with world quarter gods. 

Spanish accounts of the peculiarities of Kukulcan and Itzamna 
are so vague and the differences indicated so doubtful that little 
information is added to our knowledge by affixing one of these 
names to B in preference to D, or vice versa ; but the recognition 
of B, D, and G as solar deities, if supported by the good authority 
of facts, is a step forward in the interpretation of the pictorial 
elements of the codices. 

I have introduced on the fourth plate seven pictures of an 
Earth goddess associated with the god D in several cases. The 
jTToper identification of this personage is as yet doubtful, but I 
incline to Seler's view that the}*^ represent Ixchel. In those in- 
stances which are intimately associated with D, as in Tableau 
des Bacab, it would seem that here we have one form of the 
Earth mother, as, in a way, the Sun god D is the father ; but this 
view may be subject to modification on more extended studies. 

This goddess is identified by Brinton as the ** Evening Star in 
her epiphany as Mother Earth, source of life, ancestress of the 
race." He calls her ('95, p. 63) by her Kiche name, Xmucane, 
drawing emdencefrom analogy of the Kiche mythology of Popol Vuh 
and that of the writers of the codices The two figures in the 
middle of the Tableau des Bacabs he identifies as " Cuculkan " and 
Xmucane, and considers the latter (op. cit., p. 64; the " female 
counterpart of Cuculcan " or ** consort '' of the same. These two 
he calls (p. 49) " our first parents "—evidently male and female. 
He states that Gukumatz, however, " is positively said to be the 
bisexual principle of life represented by the male Xpiyacoc, and 
the female Xmucane, ancestor and ancestress of all that is." I 
find it difficult to hannonize these two statements if Gukumatz 
and Kukulcan are the same or like conceptions, as I think they 
are. 

Articles Quoted, 

Brasseur de Bourbourg. *61, Popol Vuh. 
70, Manuscript Troano, vols. I and IT. 

Brinton, D. G. *95, A Primer of Mayan Hieroglyphics. 

Codice Maya denominado Corteeiano. Facsimile in color and form. 
Madrid, 1892. 
2J) 



Digitized by 



Google 



222 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

DieseldorfF, E. P. '93, Aiisj^rabangen in Coban. Verh. der Bed. Anih. 
GeselL, October 28, 1893. 

'94, Ein Thongefass mit Darstellung einer Vampyrkopfigen Gott- 

heit. Verh. der Berl. ArUfi. GeM., 18J)4. 

Fewkes, J. Walter. '94, A Study of Certain Figures in a Maya Codex. 
Amer, Anth,, July. 

Forstemann, E. '92, Die Maya-Handschrift der Koniglichen offent- 
liclien Bibliothek z\\ Dresden. 

'92*, Schildkr5te und Schnecke in der Mayaliteratur. Zur Ent- 

zifferung der Mayahandschrifben III. 

Landa, Diego. '81, Kelacion de las Cosas de Yucatan, 1666. (Edition, 
Dios de la Rada y Delgado.) 

Saville, M. H. '94, The Ceremonial Year of the Maya Codex Corte- 
sianus. Amer. Anih., October, 1894. 

S<!hellhas, P. '86, Die Maya-Handschrift der Koniglichen Bibliothek 
zu Dresden. Zext. far AiUh. Eth. u. Urgesch., 1886. 

'87, Maya-Hieroglyphen. Verh. d. Berl. Anih. GeseU.j Jan. 15. 

'90, Vergleichenden Studien auf dem Gebiete der Maya Alter- 

tiimer. Int. Arch. 

'92, Die Gottergestalten der Maya-Handschriften. Zeit. fur Anih. 

Eth. u. Urpesch., 1892. 

Seler, E. '86, Maya-IIandschriften und Mayagotter. Zeit. fur Anth. 
Eth. u. Urgesch., 1886. 

'87, Ueber die Namen der in der Dresdener Handschrifl abge- 

bildeten Mayagotter. Verh. d. Berl. Anth. GeseU.j 1887. 

'88, Der Charakter der Aztekischen und der Maya handschriften. 

Zeit. fur Anth. Eth. u. Urgesch., 1888. French translation. 

'89, Caractere des Inscriptions Aztt*ques et Mayas. Revue d'Eth- 

nogrnphie^ i889. 

'iH, Fledermaus-Gott der Maya-Stiiniuie. Zeit. fur AiUh. Eth. u. 

Urgesch., 1894. 

Thomas, Cyme. '93, Are the Maya Hieroglyphs Phonetic? Amer. 
Ariih.f July. 

Valentini, P. J. J. '95, Analysis of the Pictorial Text inscribed on two 
Palenque Tablets. Proc. Amer. Anliq. Soc., October, 1894. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895J THE EARLY NAVAJO AND APACHE 223 



THE EARLir NAVAJO AND APACHE 

BY FREDERICK WEBB HODGE 

The oldest clan of the Navajo, according to the great creation 
and migration tradition of that tribe, an outline of which has 
been published by Dr Washington Matthews * is theTse*jinkini, 
the House-of-the-dark-cliffs people. These are the descendants 
of the fii-st two human pairs, who had their origin in the San 
Juan mountains, the first pair having been created by the gods 
from two ears of corn brought from the cliff houses in Tse^gihi, 
a cation somewhere in the country north of the Rio San Juan, 
perhaps the Mancos or the McElmo. The Navajo estimate, as 
interpreted by Dr Matthews, fixes the time of the creation of 
this couple between 500 and 700 years ago, or seven ages of old 
men. Historical comparison, however, seems to establish the 
genesis at a more recent date. 

According to the tradition, seventeen years elapsed ere the 
Tse*jinkini were joined by the Tse*tlAni or Turn-in-a-cafion 
people. In fourteen years these two peoples were joined by the 
D8ilnao9flni or Dsilnao^flCinef (Dsilnaoyil-mountain people). 
Seven years later, or 38 years after the creation, the Qack^"- 
qatso-Cine or Yucca peo[)le united with the others, thus forming 
a fourth clan. Fourteen years after the accession of the Yucca 
clan (52 years after the creation) these combined people moved 
to Chaco canon, near the ruin of Kintyeli, where they were 
joined by the Naqopi'-dine, from the salt lake south of Zufii. 
The tribe now moved to the San Juan. Six years afterward 
(58 years after the creation) a sixth band came — the Tsinajini 
or Black-horizontal-forest people. As yet they had no herds, 
and they made their clothes mostly of cedar bark and other 

*Jour. Am. Folk Lore, vol. iii, no. ix, p. 90 et seq., 1890. Dr Matthewa has now in 
preparation for publication the complete legend as it was related to him by the Navajo 
shamans. The importance of such a produftion may readily be conceived by any one 
familiar with this scholar's admirable record of the Navajo »* Mountain Chant," in the 
Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology for 1883-'84, which, so far as I can recall, 
was tiie first complete record of an Indian ceremonial ever published. 

f The character C used throughout this paper approaches in sound the English id 
and is equivalent to the 4 of Dr Matlhews. 



Digitized by 



Google 



224 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

vegetal fibers. Eight years after the appearance of the Tsina- 
jini came the Qqa^nesa^ni, so named from the place where they 
were first found in camp by the Navajo. This was 66 years 
after the creation of their first people, or, perhaps we had better 
say, after the appearance of the primal couple or couples. 

After a period of five yeai-s succeeding the adoption of the 
(^'qa*nes&*ni, the Dsiltld^ni people were incorporated, and five 
years later (76 years after the creation) an important accession 
to the population of the tribe was gained from a place called 
Qqa*paha-qalkai, near the present town of Santa F6. These 
people were therefore named 5qa*paha*-^ine, and their chief was 
G6"tso or Big Knee. 

Years after the Qqa*paha*-^ine joined the Navajo a band of 
Utes were adopted, and about the same time a party of these 
Utes made a raid on the Mexican settlements somewhere in the 
neighborhood of Socorro, on the Rio Grande, and captured a 
Spanish woman, whose descendants form the People-of-the- 
white-stranger or Mexican clan of the tribe. At this period Big 
Knee, the chief of the Qqa'paha, was still alive, but he was very 
old and feeble. As the age of an old man is definitely fixed by 
the Navajo at 102 years, the number of counters used in their 
game of ke^itd, and as the genesis tradition calls particular atten- 
tion to the age and feebleness of Big Knee, it will be reasonable 
to assume that he was, say, 120 years of age at the time the Ute 
clan (NoyilCine) raided the Mexican settlement near Socorro. 

Prior to 1598, the date of Juan de Oiiate's journey from Mex- 
ico for the purpose of colonizing the new country, no Spaniards 
dwelt in New Mexico excepting the missionary left by ('oronado 
at Pecos, who was never afterward heard of, and the two frailes 
killed at Tiguex before 1582. In 1617 there were only 48 soldiers 
and settlers in the province.* In 1630 Fray Alonzo Benavides 
reported that 250 Spaniards dwelt at Santa Fe ; f but this town 
had been founded as the capital only about 20 years previously 
and was the sole settlement of Spanish origin in the entire 
province. Aside from Santa F6, and exclusive also of the few 
missionaries scattered among the Indian pueblos, it is quite im- 
probable that there were any other Spaniards in New Mexico in 
1080. In 1680, the year of the great Pueblo revolt, a few over 



* Bancroft, ArizoDa and New Mexico, p. 159, after early document. 
t Ibid., p. Ifi2, after Benavides. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] THE EARLY NAVAJO AND APACHE 225 

400 Spaniards (including 21 missionaries) were killed, and some 
1,950 escaped southward with Governor Otermin to El Paso. 
Twenty-three hundred and fifty souls, therefore, represented ap- 
proximately the number of Spanish inhabitants early in 1680 — 
a growth of but 2,100 in half a century — a population scattered 
along the Rio Grande for over 200 miles. 

It is highly improbable that Spanish settlements existed along 
the lower Rio Grande earlier than the middle of the seventeenth 
century ; certainly none were there in 1630. El Paso was set- 
tled by the Spaniards in 1659, and Albuquerque was reputed to 
have been founded as early as 1658, but regarding the latter 
authorities fail to agree. At any rate, Mexican settlements ex- 
isted along the Rio Grande in 1680, when Otermin retreated from 
Santa F6 to El Paso, for along the way he observed several 
haciendas that had been destroyed by the Indians, " with evi- 
dence that the occupants had been killed." Spaniards also ap- 
parently lived in Indian pueblos at the time named, for at San 
Juan three Spanish women were kept alive and bore children 
during their captivity. According to Escalante there were one 
Spanish villa (Santa F6) and several small Spanish settlements 
in New Mexico before 1680.* 

Assuming, then, that the raid of the Spanish settlement near 
Socorro by the No9Aeine clan of the Navajo occurred about 1650 
(while Big Knee was still alive), that the old chief was 120 years 
of age at that time, and that he had reached the age of at least 
30 years when his people were incorporated by the Navajo, the 
date of the last-mentioned event must have been some 90 years 
previously, or approximately in 1560. It already has been seen 
that the accession of Big Knee's people as a clan of the Navajo 
took place 76 years after their creation ; hence the date of the 
reputed divine origin of the primal coui)les, according to native 
traditional chronology, must have been about the year 1485. 

It also has been shown that the Naqop^*eine from the salt 
lake south of Zufii became a part of the Navajo 52 years after 
the creation, which from our calculation would fall in 1536. 
It will be remembered that Friar Marcos of Niza, on his way 
toward Cibola, in July, 1539, encountered among one of the 
Piman tribes of northern Sonora an old Cibolan (Zufiian) In- 
dian, who informed him of the existence, in the north, of the 

*See Bancroft, Arizona and New Mexico, pp. 168, 17U, 181, 182, 190, 214. 



Digitized by 



Google 



226 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

provinces of Acus, Marata, and Totonteac. Acus has been 
identified with Acoma, Totonteac with Tusayan, and Marata 
with the group of pueblos called by the Zufii Mak'yata or 
Mat'yata. near the salt lakes about sixty nniles southeast of Zufii 
pueblo. Marata was inhabited at the time the old Cibolan fugi- 
tive left his tribe years before, and he was, naturally enough, 
under the belief in 1539 that it was still an occupied pueblo, al- 
though his people had been at war with those of Marata. It 
appears that Marata had been abandoned on account of Zufii 
hostility not very long before the conquest of Cibola by Coro- 
nado in 1540, the year following Niza's visit to the country, for 
while on their way to Acoma from Hawikuh by the southern 
route some of Coronado's followers observed the walls of a pueblo 
ruin still standing to a height of thirty-six feet.* This could 
not have been the case had the pueblo been abandoned more 
than a few years. From these circumstances it would therefore 
appear that the NaqopA*-5ine clan of the Navajo, who " came from 
a place south of where is now Zuni, near the salt lake called 
Naqopa*," were the former inhabitants of the villages or '* prov- 
ince'' called by the Zuni Mak'yata and recorded by Niza as 
Marata, and that they were forced from their old home by the 
Zuni, the main body, at least, joining the Navajo about 1536.t 
There is other evidence toward fixing this year (1536), or per- 
haps better this decade (1530-'40), as the time of the abandon- 
ment of Marata and the adoption of its people, tlie Naqop^*-Cine 
or NaqopAni, by the Navajo: About 1542 the Black-horizontal- 
forest people made their appearance, but the Navajo "had as 
yet no herds ; they made their clothes mostly of cedar bark and 
otber vegetal fibers and built some store houses among the 
cliffs." A statement so explicit at this point in the legend nat- 
urally leads to the conclusion that about this i)eriod occurred a 
most important chapter in the history of the tribe — the intro- 
duction of sheep and cattle. In the more detailed part of this 
legend given by Dr MatthewsJ it is related that the first sheep, 

* Relacion de lo que Hernando de Alvarndo y Fray Joan de Padilla desctibrieron, etc., 
1540, in Doe. Ined. de IndiaSj iii, p. 511. 

1 1 have been informed by Mr F. H. Cushing that some of the Mak'yata people were 
adopted by the ZuDi, and that certain wordn of their language are still preserved in 
vSome of their saored rituals. Examination by Mr Gatschet of such terms an Mr Cush- 
ing found it possible to record seems to indicate Koresan affinity. 

X Noqoilpi, the Gambler: A Navajo Myth, in Jour. Am. Folk Lore, vol. ii, no. 6, 1889, 
p. 89. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] THK EARLY NAVAJO AND APACHE 227 

asses, horses, swine, goats, fowls, and manufactured cloth, as well 
as the first Mexicans, were created l)y Bekotci^^^e, the God Who 
Carries the Moon, for a legendary hero named Noqoilpi, who, 
after his visit to BekotciCe in the sky soon after the Navajo ap- 
peared atKintyeli, which pueblo was then in process of build- 
ing, descended far to the south of his former abode and reached 
the earth in old Mexico. " Naqoilpi's people [the Mexicans or 
Spaniards] increased greatly in Mexico," runs the legend, " and 
after a while they began to move toward the north and build 
towns along the Rio Grande." 

That one part of the legend should so thoroughly support 
other portions in point of time is remarkable, and emphasizes 
the weakness of Zufii tradition when compared with it.* The 
coming of the Naqop^*-Cine, the subsequent accession of the 
Black-horizontal-forest peoi)le, and the advent of the Mexicans 
under the guidance of Noqoilpi with their horses, sheep, cattle, 
and bayeta, of which they make their finest blankets, all tend 
to show that the Marata people were incorporated about the 
year 1536, and that the Spaniards came with their civilizing in- 
fluence a few years later. The first flocks and herds were 
brought to New Mexico by Coronado's army late in 1540, and 
there seems to be every reason for believing that the then insig- 
nificant Navajo obtained their first supply of livestock through 
the Pueblos soon after the army left the country in 1542, as the 
legend indicates.f 

Some twenty-four years after the adoption of the NaqopjV-t'ine 
from the salt lake, or about the year 1560, the first Apache came 
from the south in a large band and joined the Navajo, forming 
the Tsejintii\i (Black-standing-rocks) people. Between the latter 
date and the occurrence of the Socorro episode of 1650, above 
referred to, the Cestcini (Red-streak) and Tlastcini (Flat-red- 
ground) Apache peoples were incorporated. These three clans 
formed a phratry. The Navajo tribe now had nineteen clans, 
distributed about as follows : 

One Athapascan (the original Navajo ; evidently cliff'-dwellers). 

Three Apache, one being mentioned as a large band. 

Two Yuman, evidentl}^ Mojave orWalapai, and Havasupai. 

♦ See "The First Discovered City of CiboiR," in Am. Anthrop., April, 1895. 
t The army lea Compostela with 5,()00 sheep and 150 cows of Spanish breed; theHe 
were tlie first that were brought into the country now forming the United States. 



Digitized by 



Google 



228 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

One Marata, evidently of Keresan stock. 

One from north of the San Juan, possibly Shoshonean. 

A single Ute family, who joined the Qqd*paha, besides one 
girl, whose descendants formed a new clan. 

One from near Santa F6 (in two bands), with whom some Zuni 
were afterward affiliated without forming a separate clan. This 
is the ^qA'paha and was regarded as populous. Doubtless of 
Tanoan stock. 

Three miscellaneous Pueblo clans, including one from a Rio 
Grande pueblo, one from near Jemez, and another clan men- 
tioned as potters and basket-makers. 

Six of unknown origin. 

We may safely assume, I think, that at this period the lan- 
guage as well as the institutions and industries of the Navajo 
underwent the greatest and most rapid change. Dr Matthews 
has determined, by careful comparison with northern Athapas- 
can vocabularies, that the original Navajo was remotely con- 
nected with the same stock. The adoption of the Pueblo * pot- 
ters, basket-makers, and weavers taught them new arts, but the 
introduction of sheep, which made them a pastoral people, evi- 
dently tended to cause their basketry and pottery industries to 
decline, yet advanced the art of weaving among them even be- 
yond that of their Pueblo teachers. So with the language of 
the tribe : It is known that on the arrival of the important 
Qq&*paha no evidence of relationship between that people and 
the Navajo was discernible ; so the two bodies dwelt apart, but 
on friendly terms, for twelve years ere the (Jqk^paha. were re- 
ceived into the tribe. Now, as to the difference in language of 
the two divisions. In his outline of the tradition Dr Matthews 
remarks : 

" Up to this time all the old gentes spoke one common tongue, 
the old Navajo; but the speech of the Qq4*paha was different. 
In order to reconcile the differences, the chief of the Tsinajini 
and the chief of the Qq&*paha, whose name was Gd*tso, or Big 
Knee, met night after night for many years to talk about the 
two languages and to pick out the words of each which were 
the best. But the words of the Qq&*paha [according to a mem- 
ber of that clan] were usually the plainest and best, so the 

•The original Navajo, indeed, judging by their name, "House of the Dark Cliffs 
People," appear to haye been a pueblo people, or at least cliff-dwellers, although not 
potters nor basket-makers. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] THE EARLY NAVAJO AND APACHE 229 

present Navajo language resembles more the old QqjVpaha than 
the old Navajo." 

The effect of the language of the newly incorporated clans on 
the " old Navajo " prior to the Q(ja*paha accretion was probably 
very slight, as the new clans were small. We find, however, 
that the effect of the Qqa^paha tongue on that of the Navajo 
was great — so great, indeed, that it may be traced even today. 
This fact is mentioned as tending to show that had not the 
Navajo, prior to the Qq&*paha accession, been a very small tribe 
this newly adopted people could not have made a lasting im- 
pression on the Navajo language. Dr Matthews is evidently of 
the same opinion regarding the former insignificance of the 
tribe, for he says: "The myth speaks of these cliff-dwellers as 
gods ; but it is not difficult to believe that the rude Athapascan 
wanderers, in the days when they subsisted on small mammals, 
such as prairie dogs, and on the seeds of wild plants (as their 
legends relate), may have regarded the prosperous agricultural 
cliff-dwellers as gods."* In this connection it also should be 
mentioned that Big Knee's people wandered in the country of 
the Navajo for eighteen days before any of the latter people 
were encountered. 

From a study of the early history of the southwestern Atha- 
pascan and neighboring tribes, one is at once convinced that the 
Apache group, at present much smaller, but always more aber- 
rant, than the Navajo tribe, were of such little importance until 
after the middle of the seventeenth century that they occupied 
a very limited and not definitely determinable area ; that by the 
continual addition of small bands of foreign or kindred peoples 
during the succeeding few decades, in a manner similar to the 
various Navajo adoptions, their importance to the surrounding 
tribes gradually increased with their numbers, and their ag- 
gressiveness with both. 

About the time of the adoption of the first three Apache clans 
who had come from the south, and their organization into a 
phratry of the Navajo, the first known Spanish reference to the 
Apache tribe was made by Juan de Onate.f This was in 1598. 

* Some Illustrations of the Conaectioa between Myth and CevQinony, Memoirs Int, 
Cong. Anthrop., Chicago, 1894, p. 249. 

t Ofiate, Obediencia y vasallaje de San Juan Baptista, 1598, in Doe. Inkd. de Indiaa, xvi, 
p. 114 : " Todo9 lo« Apaches desde la Sierra Nevada haoia la parte del Norte y Poniente." 
Farther on, after speaking of the Jemez: . . . "y ma?, todos los Apades {sic) y Co- 
coyes de sus sierras y comarcas." 

30 



Digitized by 



Google 



230 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOOIST [Vol. VllI 

The Apache then resided in the *' Snowy mountains " of New 
Mexico, probably not more than seventy-five miles south of the 
San Juan home of the Navajo, and not in the southern country, 
in the White mountain section northward from the Gila — the 
despoblado, or uninhabited region, as Coronado's chroniclers aptly 
termed it. I believe that if any Apache were in the southern 
country in the sixteenth century they were about the headwaters 
of the Gila, in the present New Mexico, where Benavides found 
them 30 leagues (80 miles) from Senec6,and where, indeed, a mis- 
sionary is said to have established himself as early as 1628. It ap- 
pears more likely, however, that the Apache, like the Navajo, 
gradually increased in population, and about the date last given 
had already become broken up into bands, mainly for hunting 
purposes, which were termed Apaches de Xila (Gila) and 
Apaches Vaqueros (buffalo hunters). The Navajo were now 
classed with the Apache, and are for the first time called Apaches 
de Navajo.* 

When in 1539 Niza crossed the desert between the Gila and 
Cibola, the present Apache country, he encountered no resident 
strangers, nor were any seen either by Coronado or Jaramillo in 
tlie year following. None of these chroniclers, moreover, men- 
tion any difficulty existing between the Zufii and Apache or 
any other people in the south except the villagers formerly at 
Marata, or indeed between the Apache and the various Piman 
tribes — inveterate enemies in later times. Had the Apache been 
in this section the narrators could not have failed to notice them. 
The only suspicion of the occupancy of the southern Arizona 
country by the Apache is that aroused by a statement of Casta- 
fieda to the effect that in the region round about Chichilticali — 
which Mr Bandelier has placed " where now is Fort Grant, on 
the south of the Rio Gila, near the Arivaypa" — dwelt a " gente 
mas barbara de las que bieron hasta alii biuen en rancherias 
sin poblados biben decasar y todo los mas es despoblado."t 

If Mr Bandelier's determination of the location of Chichilticali 
is correct, and there can be no reason for doubting its accuracy, 
then that ruin must have been in the heart of the Sobaipuri 



*See Bancroft, Arizona and New Mexico, pp. 162, 163, 1889. 

t Through the courteay of Mr George Parker Winship, of Haryard University, I haye 
been enabled to consult his copy of the narrative of Cascnfteda, now in Lenox libmry. 
New Yoric city, as well as kindred documents which, with English translations and 
copious notes, will shortly be published. All references to unpublished documents 
throughout this paper were made possible by Mr Winship's generosity. 



Digitized by VjOOQIC 



July 1895] THE EARLY NAVAJO AND APACHE 231 

country, and these or the congeneric Opata were in all proba- 
bility the savages to whom Castaneda alludes. The Sobaipuri 
during the mission period occupied San Pedro, Santa Cruz, and 
Arivaipa valleys and the adjacent part of the Gila. They were 
driven from their stronghold by the Apache in 1762 and forced 
to join the Papago, of whom they were a direct offshoot.* The 
fact that they are referred to as dwelling in isolated cabins, as 
being savage, and as living by the chase, is not at all surprising ; 
indeed, these characteristics pertained quite as well to some of 
the early Piman tribes as to the later known Apache. The follow- 
ing remarks of the Viceroy Mendozaf support this belief in part : 
** Melchior Diaz says that the [Piman] peoples whom he found 
along the way do not have setded location anywhere except in one 
valley, which is one hundre<l and fifty leagues from Culuacan, 
which is settled and has houses with platforms, and that there 
are many people along the way, but that they are not good for 
anything except to make them Christians.'' 

The early writings concerning the Piman tribes are replete 
with references to their intertribal warfare. Castafieda records 
that these people were ** all at war with one another." The 
name of the Opata, a tribe of Piman stock, signifies en^my, and 
was applied to them by their kindred, the Pimas Altas. The 
ferocity of the Piman tribes at this early date is further demon- 
strated by their destruction, in 1541, of the newly established 
Spanish town of Corazones. Jaramillo calls attention to the fact 
that " at first the Indians [Pimas of Sonora valley] were peace- 
ful and afterwards not, but instead they and those whom they 
were able to summon thither were our worst eneinles. They have 
a poison with which they killed several Christians." This chroni- 
cler speaks of no Indians, hostile or otherwise, in the vicinity of 
Chichilticali, although he mentions the trivial circumstance of 
having seen, a few days later, an Indian or two at his Rio Ver- 
mejo (the Colorado Chiquito), " who afterwards turned out to be 
from the first settlement of Cibola." Concerning this neighbor- 
hood, Coronado,J shortly after his arrival at Cibola, says: ** No 
Indian was seen for the first day's march [from Chichilticali to- 
ward Cibola], after which four Indians came out with signs of 
peace, saying that they had been sent to that desert place to say 

♦ Bourke in Jour. Am. Folk Lort, in, p. 114, 1890. Bandelier, Final Report, part i, p. 
102, 1890. 
t Letter to the King, April 17. IMO. J Letter to Mendoza, August 3, IMO. 



Digitized by 



Google 



232 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

that we were welcome, and that on the next day all the tribe 
would provide the whole force with food. The army-master gave 
them a cross, telling them to say to the people in their city that 
they need not fear, and that they ought to have their people 
stay in their own houses." 

Coronado could not have been mistaken in these Indians. 
They were, as he thought, men of (/ibola, and they were prepared 
for him when, some days later, he reached that place and found 
the houses at Hawikuh defended by the natives, the roofs being 
abundantly supplied with stones, which were freely and effectu- 
ally used by the Indians against these first white invaders. 

Castafieda does not mention, in his account of Coronado's 
journey in advance of the main army, anything concerning a 
wild tribe having been seen in the locality under consideration. 
He merely remarks that Chichilticali " had been built by a civil- 
ized and warlike race of strangers who had come from a dis- 
tance."* He, however, describes Gallego's journey from Culiacan 
to meet Coronado, having traveled a distance of 200 leagues " with 
the country in a state of war and the people in rebellion, having 
encounters with them every day, although they had formerly 
been friendly towards the Spaniards. "f 

The statement of the Reladon del Suceso also is opposed to the 
theory of the occupancy at this early date of the southern Ari- 
zona country by the Apache. This anonymous document 
relates : " This whole way [from Culiacan] up to about 60 
leagues before reaching Cibola is inhabited, although away from 
the road in some places." It is gathered from this that in 1540 
the Piinan settlements were as continuous toward the northeast 
as they were just before the Sobaipuri became extinct as a tribe. 
The occupancy of the country the entire distance from the south 
left no place for the Apache, who have always been regarded as 
the hereditary enemy of the Piman tribes. 

The circumstances attending the return of Coronado's army in 
1542, after leaving Cibola, were similar to those of the journey 
northward. The wilderness or dettpobladoy the present White 
Mountain Apache country, Castaneda says, " was crossed with- 
out opposition ; " but when the troops departed from Chichilti- 
cali to make their way into Sonora — that is, through the 
Sobaipuri and Opata country — ** in several places yells were 
heard and Indians seen, and some of the horses were wounded 



* RelacioD, part i. f Ibid , part m. cap. 7. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] THE EARLY NAVAJO AND APACHE 233 

and killed, until Batuco* was reached, where the friendly 
Indians from Corazones came to meet the army and see the 
General. They [the Eudeve and Nevome] were always friendly 
and had treated well all the Spaniards who had passed through 
their country." f 

The Casa Grande of the Gila and the other extensive but 
now ruined pueblo structures of Gila and Salado valleys are 
claimed by the Pima to have been the homes of their ancestors. 
The destruction of these settlements, however, is not attributed 
by them to the Apache, but indefinitely to " enemies who came 
from the east in several bodies," and who compelled their aban- 
donment ; " but the settlements at Zacaton, Casa Blanca, etc., 
still remained, and there is even a tale of an intertribal war be- 
tween the Pimas of Zacaton and those of Casa Blanca after the 
ruin of Casa Grande. Finally, the pueblos fell one after the 
other, until the Pimas, driven from their homes and, moreover, 
decreased by a fearful plague, became reduced to a small tribe." J 
Had the Apache been responsible for this destruction the Pima 
could not have failed to note it in their tradition. 

This subject has been dwelt on thus extendedly in order to 
show that the statement of Castaneda concerning the ** gente 
mas barbara " might have referred rather to one of the Piman 
tribes, notably the Sobaipuri or Opata, than to the Apache, and 
consequently that the Apache were not in southern Arizona or 
northern Sonora at this early date. 

Indications of Apache and Navajo § hostility toward the 



* There were two vilhiKes of Batuco, one occupied by the Teguis diviaion of the 
Opatn, the other by the Eudeve. The latter, situated on the Rio Montezuma, u tribu- 
tary of the Yaqui, in latitude 29^, was the first village of the Eudeve going from the 
north after passing through the country of the troublesome Opatas, and is the Katuco 
referred to by Castaneda. 

t Castaneda, Relacion, part in. 

t Bandelier in 6th Ann. Rep. Arch. Inst. Am., pp. 80, 81, 1884. The eastern enemies 
referred to may have been the Toboso, a very warlike tribe, formerly of the lower Rio 
Grande. This long range is not at all improbable, as even the Comanche from Texas 
raided Piman ranch erias during the present century. 

gl do not use the terms Apache and Nnvajo in the same sense as did many of the 
earliest writers and cartographers, who referred to the latter as the Apaches Navajos or 
Apache de Navaio. The name Apache is probably of Yuman origin, the term e-pateh 
being the Kuchan and Maricopa name for " man." Navajo is possibly from the Spanish 
nav<\ja^ a knife, properly a clssp-knife, and I am informed by Mr James Mooney that 
the name was evidently applied to this people because in former times they were ac- 
customed to carry long stone knives, the simulation of the action of whetting which 
was their tribal sign in Indian gesture speech. The Spanish term navfijo signifies a 
pool ; also a level piece of ground. 



Digitized by 



Google 



234 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. Vlll 

Pueblos appear in history about a quarter of a century after 
they became known to the Spaniards, for in 1622 the missionary 
field was enlarged through endeavors to approach the Navajo 
and Apache. '* They were successful only for a short time, but 
saved the tribe of Jemez from utter destruction by those hered- 
itary foes of all civilization. The villages of the Jemez had 
already been abandoned in consequence of the forays of the 
Navajos,"* although not many years afterward the Apache ap- 
pear in the r6le of allies of the Jemez, Tewa, and Piros against 
the Spaniards.f 

The pueblos in closest proximity were naturally the first prey 
of the Apache and Navajo ; consequently Jemez, the western- 
most of the Rio Grande villages, hence the nearest to the Apache 
group in northwestern New Mexico, was the first to suffer. Em- 
boldened by their success, their incursions were extended to 
other directions, and as the tribe grew they conducted their dep- 
redations more successfully by dividing into bands, which later 
became known by the names of the country forming their re- 
spective ranges, as Pinaleno, White Mountain, Chiricahui (im- 
properly called Chiricahua), Gilefio, etc., or from some personal 
characteristic, as Mescalero, Coyotero, Vaquero, etc. 

The effect of these depredations on the life of the Pueblos was 
very great. At the time the Apache appear in history many of 
the village Indians, notably the Jemez, Zuni, and Sia, dwelt in 
several scattered towns situated mainly with reference to con- 
venience to the fields. So far as is known, none of the Pueblos 
west of the Rio Grande were molested by warlike nomads prior 
to the seventeenth century, although the sedentary Acoma, ac- 
cording to Oastaneda, " were robbers, feared by the whole country 
round about." J On the Rio Grande proi)er, however, seven vil- 
lages had been visited and destroyed prior to 1540 by Indians 
'* who painted their eyes, and who lived in the same regions as 
the cows [buffaloes], and that they have houses of straw and 
corn:"§ Who these warlike plains tribes were matters little in 
the present paper. There is no evidence, however, that they 
were Apache, altiiough it has been asserted that Coronado's 

* Bandelier, after Benavideu and Vetancurt, in Doc. HiHt. Zufti Tribe, Jour. Am. Eth. 
and Arch.^ J. Walter Fewken, editor, vol. iii, p. 96, 1892. 
t Bancroft, Arizona and New Mexico, p. 167 et seq., 1889. 
X Relacion, part i. g Alvarado, op. cit. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] THE EARLY NAVAJO AND APACHE 235 

Querechos were identical with the later Apaches Vaqueros. Mr 
James Mooney, during a long period of study among the plains 
tribes, has discovered that Querecho is an old Comanche name 
of the Tonka wa, who ranged the buffalo plains of western Texas 
and eastern New Mexico. 

Although the western Pueblos apparently enjoyed immunity 
from predatory enemies, yet they had defensive structures. As 
the Zufii, for instance, for reasons above given, could not have 
been molested at this early date by the Apache and Navajo, and 
as they were much too far from the plains tribes to have been 
harassed by them, we must look in another direction for the 
meaning of their defensive structures. I think it will not be 
denied that nearly if not quite all the Pueblos are composite 
peoples, the component bodies having belonged to different 
stocks and having migrated from different directions, in a. 
manner similar to the various gentile groups of the Navajo, so 
thoroughly set forth by Dr Matthews, as Dr Fewkes has well 
shown was the case of the Tu8ayan,*and as is well known to be 
the case of the modern pueblo of Laguna. Yet these peoples 
had their intertribal broils, and villages were divided in conse- 
quence.f Thus may be accounted for the defensive character of 
the Zufii pueblo of Matsaki, of which Castafieda J says : 

" In this village particular houses are used as fortresses. They 
are higher than the others and set up above them like towers, 
arid there are embrasures and loopholes in them for defending 
the roofs of the different stories, because, like the other villages, 
they do not have streets, and the flat roofs are all of a height 
and are used in common. The roofs have to be reached first, 
and these upper houses are the means of defending them. It 
began to snow on us there and the force took refuge under the 
wings of the village, which extend out like balconies, with wooden 
pillars beneath, because they generally use ladders to go up to 
those balconies, since they do not have any doors below." Such 
a village might have withstood an Indian siege, but how long 
it would have taken the Spaniards to capture it may be answered 
by the fate of the Zuni pueblo of Hawikuh, into which had as- 

* Fewkes, "The Kinship of a Tanoan-ftpeakiDg Commuoity In Tusayan," Am. An- 
throp., Apr , 1891. ** The Kinship of the Tusayan Villagers." Ibid , Oct., 1894 

fSee, for instance, Fewkes in Am. Anthrop., vi, p. 363, who shows how the pueblo ol 
Awatobi was destroyed by other Tusayan villagers. 

X Relacion, part i. 



Digitized by 



Google 



236 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

sembled the entire warrior population of a tribe of some 3,0(X) 
souls, when Coronado compelled its surrender within an hour 
with 75 companions on horseback and 80 footmen * notwith- 
standing *• the crossbowmen broke all the strings of their cross- 
bows and the musketeers could do nothing, because they had 
arrived so weak and feeble that they could scarcely stand on 
their feet."t Such a poor stand against Coronado's weakened 
little force shows quite clearly that the Zuni were unaccustomed 
to predatory warfare, for they knew of the advance of the Span- 
iards and were prepared to meet them.J This, however, was not 
the case of the Pueblos on the ^io Grande, who were exposed 
to the ('omanche and Tonkawa particularly ; for, although Coro- 
nado's army stormed Tiguex and cruelly butchered hundreds of 
innocent natives, they held their village against the whites for 
fifty days, when an armistice was declared. 

Such was the condition of aflfaii-s in the sixteenth century. 
In 1622, as above cited, the Jemez were compelled to abandon 
their villages on account of Navajo raids from the northwest ; 
in 1670, Hawikuh, one of the two most important of the six 
Zuni villages and the southwestern most of the group, was com- 
pletely abandoned on account of Apache depredation, and 
within five years from that time the six villages of the Salinas 
east of the Rio Grande, including the famous Tabira, or " Gran 
Quivira," were also destroyed and their inhabitants compelled 
to seek refuge among their kindred along the lower Rio Grande. 

For nearly two hundred years after the coming of Ofiate the 
history of the Pueblo tribes is one of Apache rapine. In 1680, 
soon after the destruction of the Tiwa and Piro pueblos of the 
Salinas, began the great Pueblo insurrection against Spanish au- 
thority, which, strictly speaking, continued until 1692. To wliat 
extent the Pueblos were harassed by the Apache during tliis 
hiatus in Spanish sway there is of course no record, but after 
the revolt we do not find the old villages reconstructed in their 
former unprotected situations ; but, on the contrary, each tribe, 
who occu|)ied several villages before the rebellion, now erected 

♦This is according to the Traalado de las Nuevas (1640). The Relacion d^ Suceso nays 
80 horsemen, 25 foot soldiers, and some part of the artillery. Jaramiilo says 70 horse- 
men. 

fCoronado'H letter to Mendoxa, August .% 1540. 

J The Zuiii are termed Sara-ide, " cowards," by the Tiwa of Isleta. It Is the only name 
by which they are known among that people. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] THE EARLY NAVAJO AND APACHE 237 

and dwelt in a large communal structure. Such, for example, 
is the present Zuiii. Today, with hut two exceptions, no puehlo 
in New Mexico occupies the site it held in the sixteenth and 
eiirly in the seventeenth century * or before, let us say, the in- 
ception of Apache invasion. The exceptions are Acoma and 
Isleta. The former pueblo occupies the mesa which it held 
when Coronado passed through the country. The reason is 
plain : the mesa was not continuously occupied on account of 
its impregnable character, but because of the inexhaustible 
water supply for domestic use in a natural cleft near the sum- 
rait. While Isleta stands on its prehistoric site, as determined 
by Mr Lummis, the habitancy of the pueblo has not been con- 
tinuous. 

We may now properly assume, I think, that selection of vil- 
lage sites by the Pueblos prior to 1680 was made mainly with 
reference to convenience in their agricultural pursuits, which 
depended on irrigation — that is, the selection was environmental 
and not made with regard to predatory enemies (although the 
defensive motive, on account of intertribal difficulties, entered 
into the construction) ; and from 1080 until the subjection of 
the Apache and his Navajo cousin — the period of the single 
communal village — pueblo architecture, if not site selection, be- 
came seriously affected by the incursions of these aberrant 
tribes. In view of this fact, then, one may, in these days of 
absolute freedom from Apache raids, look for a further change — 
the segregation of the single village into many small villages 
similar to those occupied when the Spaniards first came. This 
transition is already in progress. Lagunaf is being gradually 
abandoned, and what were its summer villages a few years ago 
are now permanently occupied ; likewise at Zufii, where Nutria, 
Pescado, and Ojo Caliente, farming settlements a decade ago, 
are now inhabited the year around, and most new houses at 
Zufii proper are built a short distance away from the great hive 
rather than as additions to it. 

The etymology of the name Tusayan, as generally interpreted, 
makes it at first appear that the Hopi came in contact with the 
Navajo or Apache early in the sixteenth century, and that the 

*Bandelier, Pinal Report, i, p. 34. Lummis, Man Who Married the Moon, p. 54. 
t Laguna Indian Villages, in Am. Anthrop.^ October, 1891, p. 346. 



Digitized by 



Google 



238 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

name reached the Spaniards indirectly through one of these 
Athapascan tribes. This term, as applied to the Hopi country, 
became known to history in various fonns in 1540, when the 
Zufii informed Coronado of the existence to the northwestward 
of a province of that name containing seven towns. Several 
attempts to determine the etymology of the name have been 
made. Dr Matthews suggests the Navajo To^caiya, " water under 
the sand ; " ToHse^ya, ** water under the rocks," and Casad^ 
(iS = td), "lying on top," said of something lying on a shelf. 
The last name is in part applied to a hill which the Navajo call 
Dsil-(^asa4', and which is recorded on the more recent maps as 
Zilh Tusayan. Captain Bourke gives Tuslanapay l\i8la, Taslango, 
TiC'Sahn^ and finally Ihisayan, the somewhat elastic name of an 
Apache clan, signifying " plenty of water." According to 
Mr Gushing, the Zufii name of a former group of pueblos 
at or near Tusayan j)roper was Usaya. The similarity in 
the Athapascan terms given by Dr Matthews and Captain 
Bourke to the name Tusayan as applied to the Hopi tribal 
range seems to be fortuitous, especially when their etymology is 
analyzed. Usaya was evidently the Zuni form of Asa, the native 
name of the important Tansy Mustard clan and phratry of the 
Hopi, whose " valley " is mentioned in the writings of Espejo in 
1583 as Asay and Osay. This element in the name T(usay)an 
is quite apparent. The failure of the Spaniards to meet the 
Apache or Navajo until 1598 renders it impossible for the name 
Tusayan, as applied in 1540 to the Hopi tribal range, to be of 
Athapascan origin, notwithstanding the appropriateness of some 
of the terms suggested. Even if the Zufii and Navajo had inter- 
course at this early day, the former, in all probability, would not 
have borrowed the Navajo name of the Hopi country. There 
was frequent intercourse between the Zufii and Hopi at this date, 
the former obtaining most, if not all, of their cotton from Tu- 
sayan. 

From the foregoing discussion the following conclusions are 
drawn: 

1. The creation and migration tradition of the Navajo is re- 
markably accurate regarding the chronologic sequence of the 
events recorded therein, as attested by historical comparison. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 18951 THE EARLY NAVAJO AND APACHE 239 

2. The appearance of the ancestors of the Navajo tribe in San 
Juan valley not earlier than the latter part of the fifteenth cen- 
tury is established beyond reasonable doubt. 

3. The original Navajo, being remotely of Athapascan stock 
and making their appearance at the time given, were probably 
a cliff-dwelling people. As the first accessions from the Apache 
were not made until many years after the advent of the primal 
couple in the San Juan region, the Navajo cannot be regarded 
as an offshoot of the Apache, as previously supposed. 

4. At the time the Navajo appeared in the southwest the 
Apache were already there, forming, as judged from the various 
branches thereof which joined the Navajo at an early date, a 
more populous body than the Navajo ; but each of these tribes 
was very insignificant in point of population. 

5. The Apache did not occupy the region of southern Arizona 
or northern Sonora nor the plains of Texas in the middle of the 
sixteenth century, but more probably limited areas in north- 
western and southwestern New Mexico. 

6. The Navajo were a composite people even before the 
eighteenth century, the tribe then embodying remnants of the 
Athapascan, Tanoan, Keresan, Zunian, Shoshonean, Yuman, 
and possibly other Indian linguistic stocks, in addition to a 
slight admixture of Aryan. 

7. Owing to their weakness and consequent lack of agressive- 
ness, the Navajo and Apache did not molest the Pueblo tribes 
I)rior to the seventeenth century. 

8. The Navajo acquired their first flocks and herds through 
the Pueblos soon after 1542, an event which changed their mode 
of life and formed an epoch in their tribal history. 

9. The accession of at least one foreign clan by the Navajo 
had a marked effect on the language of the tribe— a fact that 
should be considered in the classification of all linguistic groups. 

10. The defensive character of at least the western pueblos 
previously to 1680 was due not to predatory nomads, but to in- 
tertribal broils. 

11. The time of the abandonment of Niza's province of Marata 
is established with reasonable accuracy. 



Digitized by 



Google 



240 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

12. The village of Kintyeli in Chaco cafion was built shortly 
after 1542. 

13. Indian tradition, when preserved in a manner that insures 
approximate accuracy of detail, particularly as r^ards numbers 
and chronologic sequence, and when recorded without interpola- 
tion and carefully employed, may be used to substantiate histori- 
cal events. 

14. Indian tradition, although apparently bearing evidence of 
great antiquity, may be of very recent origin. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] S0C10Lf)Gy AND ANTHROPOLOGY 241 



REI.ATION OF SOCIOLOaT TO ANTHROPOLOQT 

BY LESTER F. WARD 

Almost any subject may be classified in more than one way. 
Anthropology is the science of man, and taken in ite broadest 
sense it embraces everything that concerns the human race. It 
first received prominence at the hands of Paul Broca, the emi- 
nent student of man in his physical relations. Owing to his in- 
fluence, it was long restricted to the study of the human body ; 
but so appropriate a term could not be thus bound down, and 
to-day it has come to receive the broadest meaning of which it 
admits. The Anthropological Society of Washington, which 
was founded in 1879, introduced into its constitution the follow- 
ing classification of the science : 

1. Somatology ; 2. Sociology ; 3. Philology ; 4. Philosophy ; 
5. Psychology, and 6. Technology. These subdivisions were 
adopted, after prolonged and careful consideration, by such men 
as Maj. J. W. Powell, Director of the United States Bureau of 
Ethnology, Colonel Garrick Mallery, the eminent student of 
sign language and kindred subjects, and Prof. Otis T. Mason, 
Curator of Ethnology for the United States National Museum. 
It has been found during sixteen years' experience that every 
subject proper to be brought before the Society could be classed 
under some one of these heads. 

Here, as will be seen, sociology is made a subdivision of an- 
thropology, and properly so; but this does not in any way in- 
validate an entirely different classification in which sociology is 
made the generic science, and anthropology is looked upon as 
in some sense a part of sociology. It all depends upon the point 
of view. As man is the being with whom sociology deals, that 
science, of course, belongs to the science of man ; but if we look 
upon sociology as embracing everything relating to associated 
man, a large part of the facts and phenomena of anthropology 
overlap upon its domain, and it becomes iniportant to consider 
the relations subsisting among these phenomena. Moreover, 
the phenomena of association are not exclusively confined to 



Digitized by 



Google 



242 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

man. Sociologists are coming to pay more and more attention 
to phenomena among animals analogous to those displayed hy 
men, and animal association is a well-known fact which is re- 
ceiving increased attention ; so that sociology is not wholly in- 
cluded in any view of anthropology. 

But when we examine the two sciences closely we perceive 
that they differ generically. Anthropology, in dealing with 
man — i, e,, with a particular being or species of animal — is pri- 
marily a descriptive science. It is not concerned with laws or 
principles, but with material facts. Sociology, on the contrary, 
deals primarily with association and whatever conduces to it or 
modifies it. But association is not a material thing ; it is a con- 
dition, and the science that deals with it is chiefly concerned 
with the laws and principles that produce and affect that con- 
dition. In short, while anthropology is essentially a concrete 
science, sociology is essentially an abstract science. The dis- 
tinction is very nearly the same as between biology and zoology, 
except that anthropology is restricted to a single species of 
animal. Thus viewed, it is clear that it becomes simply a 
branch of zoology with classificatory rank below ornithology, 
entomology, mammalogy, etc. ITiere is no other single species 
or even genus that has been made the subject of a distinct 
science, as might obviously be done — e. g., hippology, the science 
of the horse, or cynology, the science of the dog. 

It comes, however, wholly within the province of social philos- 
ophy to inquire into the nature of this being, man, whose asso- 
ciative habits form the chief subject of sociology. First of all, 
his position in the animal world needs to be understood. No 
possible good can come from ignoring the true relations of man 
to the humbler forms of life around him, while, on the other 
hand, if this relation is correctly understood, it furnishes one of 
the principal means by which man can learn to know himself. 
Accepting, therefore, the conclusions of the masters in zoology, 
among whom, as to the main points, there are no longer any dif- 
ferences of opinion, we must contemplate man simply as the most 
favored of all the '* favored races " that have struggled up from 
a remote and humble origin. His superiority is due almost ex- 
clusively to his extraordinary brain development. 

Very few have seriously reflected upon the natural conse- 
quences of this one characteristic — a highly developed brain. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 243 

Without inquiring how it happened that the creature called 
man was singled out to become the recipient of this extraordi- 
nary endowment, we may safely make two fundamental propo- 
sitions, which tend to show that this question is not as important 
as it seems. The first is that if the developed brain had been 
awarded to any one of the other animals of nearly the same size 
of man, that animal would have dominated the earth in much 
the same way that man does. The other is that a large part of 
what constitutes the physical superiority of man is directly due 
to his brain development. 

As to the first of these propositions, it is true that man be- 
longs systematically to the highest class of animals, the placental 
Mammalia. It would have looked somewhat anomalous to the 
zoologist if he had discovered that the dominant race to which 
he belonged must be classed below many of the creatures over 
which he held sway, as would have been the case if the organ 
of knowing had been conferred, for example, upon some species 
of large bird or reptile ; but in fact something a little less anom- 
alous, but of the same kind, actually occurs. The line along 
which man has descended is not regarded by zoologists as by 
any means the most highly developed line of the mammalian 
class. It is a very short line and leads directly back through 
the apes and lemurs to the marsupials and monotremes, animals 
of much lower systematic order, the last named forming a par- 
tial transition to birds. Most of the other developed mammals, 
such as the Carnivora and Ungulata, have a much longer an- 
cestry, and have really attained a far higher stage of develop- 
ment. In the matter of digits it is maintained that true progress 
is characterized by a reduction in their number, and that the 
highest stage is not reached until they are reduced to one, as in 
the horse. In this respect man is a slight advance upon the 
apes in having lost the thumbs of his feet. No one can deny 
that the power of flight would have been an immense advantage 
to man, yet few mammals possess this power, and it is chiefly 
confined to creatures of low organization. 

It is difficult to conceive of a being entirely different in form 
from man taking the place that he has acquired ; but if any one 
of the structurally higher races possessed the same brain de- 
velopment it would have had the same intelligence, and although 
its achievements would doubtless have been very different from 



Digitized by 



Google 



244 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

his, they would have had the same rank and secured for that 
race the same mastery over animate and inanimate nature. 
This will hecorae clearer when we consider the second of the 
ahove propositions, which we may now proceed to do. 

To what extent has brain development reacted upon man's 
physical nature ? I cannot, of course, go fully into this question 
here, but nothing is better known to anatomists than that the 
erect posture is not the natural or primary one. It has been 
acquired by man within comparatively recent time. It is a 
legitimate inference that it is chiefly due to brain development: 
physiologically as a means of supporting the enlarged and cor- 
respondingly heavier head, which it would be difficult to carry 
in the horizontal position, and psychologically as the natural 
result of a growing intelligence and self-consciousness, which 
seeks to lift the head and raise it to a position from which it can 
command its surroundings. It is a common observation that 
those persons who possess the greatest amount of self-esteem 
stand straightest, and it is this same principle that has operated 
from the beginning to bring the human body more and more 
nearly into a vertical position. 

Pari passu with this process has gone on the diminution of the 
craniofacial angle. The same influences that tended to raise the 
body from the horizontal to the vertical position tended also to 
carry the brain and upper part of the face forward and the jaws 
and mouth backward. It is not claimed that this reaction of 
the developing intelligence upon the physical form is sufficient 
alone to account for the development of the entire type of ph^'s- 
ical beauty attained by the most advanced human races. Esthetic 
considerations are needed to com])lete the process, and especially 
the powerful aid of sexual selection ; but even the sense of beauty 
must be in great part ascribed to mental increase and refinement. 

Nothing is more certain than that the faculty of speech is a 
product of intelligence. Both by direct effort and by hereditary 
selection the organs of speech received increment after incre- 
ment of adaptation to this end. The means of intercommuni- 
cation was the indispensable requirement, and this would be 
secured by any intelligent creature, np matter what the physical 
organization might be. Oral speech is by no means the only 
way in which such intercommunication is secured, and even if 
no organs had existed by which sound could be produced, some 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1805] SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 245 

other means would have been adopted. But man possessed 
sound-producing organs in common with nearly all animals. 
There is no evidence that he was specially favored in this respect. 
In developed man the larynx is more complicated than in most 
mammals ; but this may be com[)aratively recent. In many 
animals it is greatly specialized. In birds it is far more elabo- 
rate than in man, being double and sometimes, as in the crane, 
enormously elongated and coiled into a trumpet Who can 
doubt that with such an organ all birds could talk if they 
possessed ideas to communicate? The parrot and many other 
birds actually do distinctly articulate the words of human 
speech by imitation, but they lack the power to clothe them 
with thought. It would be easy to add a great number of other 
proofe of the all-sufficiency of the one leading characteristic of 
the human species — his superior brain development — to account 
for all the important features that distinguish him from the lower 
animals, but those already mentioned must suffice in this place. 

Before leaving the general subject of the relation of man to the 
lower animals, it may be well to inquire more specifically into 
the qualities that are alleged to be distinctively human. As 
sociology deals chiefly with man, it is desirable to arrive, as 
nearly as possible, at a correct idea of what man is — not the 
loose conventional idea which, as we have just seen, is not only 
crude but in great degree false — but a true and fundamental 
idea, based on attributes that are not superficial, but that lie deep 
in his essential nature. Even if we are obliged to conclude that 
there is no direction in which man's superiority is not quantita- 
tive rather than qualitative — i e., a matter of degree rather than 
of kind — it will be worth while to consider this difference of de- 
gree. There are no hard and fast lines in nature, and the great- 
est leaps that seem to have been taken in cosmic evolution are 
such only when statically considered, and blend together when 
viewed in their dynamic or historical aspects. 

Nothing is more frequently met with in literature than the 
statement that some particular quality under consideration con- 
stitutes an essential distinction between man and the lower ani- 
mals, r have for many years been accumulating such state- 
ments, most of which readily yield to analysis. A few, however, 
are worthy of serious consideration, and we shall see whether 
32 



Digitized by 



Google 



246 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

the claim that there exists anything distinctively human can be 
regarded as established. It is difficult to classify all these al- 
leged distinctively human attributes in any logical order. I 
shall exclude, except in their collateral bearings, all physical 
differences and confine myself to those which can be called 
mental in the broad sense of the word. Thus circumscribed 
the natural subdivision would seem to be into affective and in- 
tellectual qualities ; but in attempting such a subdivision I en- 
counter many difficulties arising out of the interaction of these two 
great departments of the mind. Indeed, from what has already 
been said, it is obvious that the great distinction is intellectual, . 
and that the developing intellect has reacted alike upon the 
physical form and the nervous system (sensory and emotional 
apparatus). If I were simply continuing the preceding argu- 
ment and seeking to show that increased brain development is 
adequate also to account for observed psychic modifications I 
should, of course, reverse the order here employed; but that 
would perhaps be too much to prejudge the case. I shall there- 
fore consider the lower faculties first and endeavor to rise suc- 
cessively in the scale. 

One of the most modest claims is that of Comte, that it is 
only in man that we find the purely vegetative functions of life 
subordinated to the distinctively animal functions. The lower 
animals and, as he admits, the lowest types of men, according 
to this view, simply vegetate — ?. c, they do nothing but live — 
while the higher types of men not only live, but live for some- 
thing, are conscious of living, which, he says, is the noblest con- 
ception we can form of humanity as distinct from animality.* 

It is easy to see that he here refers to feeling as an end of life, 
but the same logic which prevents him from recognizing psy- 
chology as distinct from biology debars him from saying this in 
so many words. 

Man is said to be the only animal that laughs, and if we re- 
strict laughter to the modifications made in the facial muscles, 
this distinction is one of the most complete of all that have been 
insisted upon. But every one knows that the eye is strongly 
expressive of the sense of amusement, and certain animals, as 
the dog, express emotions with the eye that are closely akin to 
mirth. But men laugh from a number of motives, among which 



• Phil. Po8. Ill, 1869, p. 494. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 247 

are joy and gladness, and it is these last that animals chiefly 
manifest. The psychologic basis of wit and humor is something 
very different from this, and belongs to the intellectual group of 
characteristics. 

Crying, in the sense of a vocal manifestation of the sensation 
of pain, is, of course, common to man and most of the higher 
animals. Reptiles, and even fishes, also occasionally utter such 
sounds ; but in the sense of weeping, usually accompanied by 
the shedding of tears, crying is as exclusively a human attribute 
as laughing. Schopenhauer, than whom no one has more acutely 
analyzed the mind, denies that we ever weep from the pain ex- 
perienced, but only from its ** repetition in reflection," and he 
defines weeping as " sympathy with one's self or sympathy re- 
flected back upon its source."* 

Sympathy proper — i. e., sympathy for others, to which the last 
remark seems to lead — is certainly not an exclusively human 
affection. While it may be a question whether the defense of 
their young by nearly all animals is anything more than an in- 
stinct developed through natural selection for the protection of 
races, neither is it certain that the same instinct manifested by 
the human mother rises far above this. The pure article is 
therefore to be looked for between individuals that are not bound 
together by such powerful ties of interest ; but there are many ac- 
counts of what seems like genuine sympathy on the part of dogs, 
and it is even less doubtful in the case of monkeys. 

Sympathy, as the word implies, is a real though representa- 
tive feeling, usually painful, and consists of a " realizing sense " 
of suffering in another being. There are two prerequisites to the 
existence of sympathy, viz., the experience of a similar pain to 
the one sympathized with, and the power of recalling the sen- 
sation experienced. Still another condition might be added, 
which is distinct from these. The creature sympathizing must 
be able to derive from the facts observed an idea that the creature 
sympathized with is suffering pain. This last condition is a 
form of reasoning, while the remembrance of past painful states 
requires some degree of perfection in the structure of the brain. 
It is not therefore to be wondered at, that only the highest animals 
are capable of manifesting sympathy. 

* Welt als Wille u. Vorst., Leipzig, 1859, Vol. i, p. 444. 



Digitized by 



Google 



248 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

The question whether sympathy increases with intelligence 
has been much discussed. To those who hold that it does so 
increase, it has been answered that among enlightened people it 
is not the most intelligent who manifest the most sympathy ; 
that philosophers and wise men are often not sympathetic, while 
many women not possessed of abundant wisdom are intensely 
so. I have never felt that this was a sufficient answer, and if 
this were the proper place I would attempt to point out its falla- 
cies ; but as it does not directly bear upon the question of sym- 
pathy in animals, it must suffice to refer to the patent fact that 
altruism has steadily increased with the progress of civilization — 
i, e., true sympathy is almost directly proportional to intelli- 
gence. 

The quality which is of course most frequently referred to as 
peculiar to man is what is commonly called the moral sense. 
It is believed by many that man possesses a special faculty by 
which he can unerringly distinguish right from wrong. This, 
of course, represents a crude stage of philosophy, in which ob- 
servation plays no part. But some very respectable philosophers 
have maintained that there is an abstract right and wrong which 
may be known and upon which a science of pure ethics can be 
based. Not to speak of Kant's rather obscure statement of this 
doctrine, it is worth noting that Herbert Spencer set out from 
this point of view and defended it in his Social Statics, but in his 
later works repudiated it as not sustained by the great body of 
facts that he had gleaned from the history of all races. 

Paley maintained that the power to distinguish good from 
evil grew out of the expectation of reward and j)uni8hment, and 
Darwin has shown that the moral sense iis thus defined cerUiinly 
belongs to some of the higher animals. In most civilized men 
the "categorical imperative*' is so strong that it is no wonder 
that it should be regarded as a special endowment of human 
nature; but every one knows in his own experience with the 
world that there are many fully civilized men who lack the 
ethical sense on certain subjects, even though it may be fully 
developed as regards all others. Who, for example, does not 
know certain persons who make it a principle of life never to 
surrender money until compelled, whatever may be the obli- 
gation to do so? The saying that "if you wish to make an 
enemy of a friend, lend him money " is based on the common 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 249 

observation that a full moiety of mankind consider it a hard- 
ship to have to return money that they have borrowed and used 
witliout giving any equivalent. This is only one of a long list 
of bad traits in human nature, these being simply cases in which 
the ethical sense is not fully developed. So prevalent is this 
that it is a common remark that one only occasionally finds 
a person who is thoroughly upright in all matters. There is a 
"screw loose" somewhere in almost every one, so that it is 
considered necessary to praise one who always does as he 
should do. 

Bishop Whately strikes the keynote in the parenthetical part 
of the following remark : " The moral faculty, or power of dis- 
tinguishing right from wrong (which appears also to be closely 
connected with abstraction, without which it could not exist), 
is one of which brutes are destitute." * 

It is probably true that brutes are destitute of the power to 
represent the pains of others to any great extent, and it is this 
power that forms the basis of the moral sense ; yet I have my- 
self frequently observed in the case of dogs which I knew had 
never themselves been shot, but had seen many other animals 
killed and wounded by shooting, that they always recoil when 
a gun is pointed at them. They certainly must conclude that 
the gun if discharged when pointed at them will produce the 
same effect on them that it does on other animals. There is no 
room for instinct or automatism here, and I cannot doubt that 
they actually represent to themselves the pain that they see 
wounded animals manifest. What impressions they may de- 
rive from the frequent sight of animals thus rendered lifeless is 
only a matter for speculation, but there is no doubt that one of 
the first facts about which a dawning intellect would reflect is 
death. 

We may next consider the faculty of volition. Says Dr Car- 
penter : " Whilst we fully recognize the possession by many of 
the lower animals of an intelligence comparable (up to a cer- 
tain point) with that of man, we find no evidence that any of 
them have a volitional power of directing their mental oi)era- 
tions at all similar to his." f It is not, of course, denied that 
animals possess will and are governed by it in their actions, 

* Logic, Appendix No. 1, 1 xxiii, American edition, 1854, p. 253. 
t Mental Physiology, p. 106. 



Digitized by 



Google 



250 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

but it is supposed that man has a power, not possessed by them, 
of deciding among many conflicting motives which one to obey. 
This need not necessarily involve the acceptance of the doctrine 
of free will in the popular sense. Schopenhauer, who, while 
defending a form of that doctrine, denies the liberam arbitrium 
indiffermtise^ remarks : 

"Although animal and man are determined with equal neces- 
sity by motives, man possesses over the animal a perfect power 
of choice (Wahlentscheidung), which is often regarded as a free- 
dom of the will, although it is nothing but the possibility of a 
fully fought out conflict between several motives, of which the 
strongest necessarily determines his act." * 

A discussion of the question of free will would obviously carry 
me much too far afield ; but there is one aspect of this question 
which is so important and so little insisted upon that it may ap- 
propriately receive mention. I will introduce it by quoting a 
passage from that acute thinker, Professor Joseph LeConte. 
He says : 

** There are four planes of matter, raised one above the other : 
1. Elements; 2. Chemical compounds ; 3. Vegetables; 4. Ani- 
mals. Now, there are also four planes of force similarly related 
to each other, viz., physical force, chemical force, vitality, and 
will. . . . With each elevation there is a peculiar force 
added to the already existing, and a peculiar group of phenom- 
ena is the result. As matter rises only step by step from plane 
to plane, and never two steps at a time, so also force, in its 
transformation into higher forms of force, rises only step by step. 
Physical force does not become vital except through chemical 
force, and chemical force does not become will except through 
vital force. ... I might add still another plane and an- 
other force, viz., the human plane, on which operate, in addition 
to the lower forces, also free will and reason." f 

This just and luminous conception I have myself elaborated 
in an article on ** The Natural Storage of Energy." J Its appli- 
cation here is this : Every creature, including man, is undoubt- 
edly determined by this concourse and storage of forces, and in 
this sense a man's acts are indeed products of his constitution ; 



• Welt ftls Wille, i, 350, 351. 
fPop. Sci. Monthly, vol. iv, p. 167. 
t The Monist, vol. v, pp. 247-263. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 251 

but it is possible to abstract all these antecedent agencies and 
contemplate man solely with reference to the future. I^ookcd 
at for just what he is, regardless of how he became so, he ap- 
pears as a source of independent energy, and in this sense his 
will is free. But this helps us little to distinguish the human 
from the animal will, for, except in the degree of this initiative 
power, the same seems to be true of the one as of the other. 
Dr Carpenter attempts to draw the line between children and 
adults; but this is obviously to beg the question, since no age 
can be fixed at which any wholly new power is added. 

The last of the affective faculties to be considered is the sense 
of beauty. Have animals any esthetic sentiments? Half a 
century ago this question would have received an almost unani- 
mous negative answer. To-day every well-informed person 
knows that the true answer is an affirmative one. The two 
great facts of sexual selection among animals and the cross- 
fertilization of flowers by insects have abundantly shown that 
nearly or quite all living creatures have tastes and admire cer- 
tain forms and colors. Not only is this so, but, while the tastes 
of animals, like those of men, differ widely, there is a general 
standard which is substantially the same for both. The ostrich 
feathers, which are the admiration of the social world, are the 
products of a sense of beauty in the ostrich. The peacock, the 
pheasant, and the bird of paradise owe their beauty to sexual 
selection. The antlers of the stag, that can engage the attention 
of a Landseer, are secondary sexual characters, utterly useless 
except as pure ornaments with which to win the favor of mates 
that have created them by withholding their favors from those 
in which these ornaments fell below their ideals of beauty. 
And what is considered more beautiful than flowers? Yet 
every flower is an expression of some insect's ideal of beauty ; 
otherwise it could never have come into existence. Paleon- 
tology teaches that plants with showy flowers appeared on the 
earth simultaneously with nectar-seeking insects; and the more 
we study the flowers and insects now living the clearer it becomes 
that the same process is still going on, determining size, form, 
color, and fragrance. 

But, it may be said, man is the only creature that artificially 
adorns himself. M. de Quatrefages has laid great stress on this 
fact, and deservedly so, for, although he did not understand it. 



Digitized by 



Google 



252 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

this involves one of the most important principles of both an- 
thropology and sociology. The principle is none other than the 
one upon which I have so often insisted, that the environment 
transforms the animal, while man transforms the environment. 
Though it is much broader in its scope, we may here restrict it 
to the esthetic sense. Both animals and men possess this sense. 
The former satisfy it by acts which, in the course of generations, 
produce physical modifications in their organic structure. The 
latter, unwilling to wait the slow process of organic change, create 
the objects of their admiration. Bodily ornamentation is prob- 
ably the earliest form in which the esthetic sense of man found 
expression. Strange, grotesque, absurd, and even injurious as 
this form of art has been in its rudest stages, it is still the product 
of man's efforts to satisfy whatever sense of beauty he possessed. 
In the course of its development it at last assumes the form of 
fine art, and is extended beyond the body and carried into all 
the great fields of natural beauty. Says Professor Huxley : 
"Among the many distinctions which have been drawn between 
the lower creatures and ourselves, there is one which is hardly 
ever insisted on. . . . It is this, that while, among various 
kinds of animals, it is possible to discover traces of all the other 
faculties of man, especially the faculty of mimicry, yet that partic- 
ular form of mimicry which shows itself in the imitation of form, 
either by modeling or by drawing, is not to be met with. As 
far as I know, there is no sculpture or modeling, and decidedly 
no painting or drawing, of animal origin."* 

This is all very true, and it certainly constitutes one of the 
most trenchant distinctions between men and animals. Its ex- 
planation is not far to seek. Having now passed in review 
all the more important affective attributes, we may next pro- 
ceed to examine those which belong to the intellectual side of 
man's nature, in the hope that they may furnish the key to the 
various questions involved in the class already considered. 

First and foremost among these stands the attribute of ration- 
ality. Do animals reason ? This is the old question, and it 
must be frankly admitted that the answer which flows from all 
the facts is an affirmative one, at least so far as concerns the 
most highly developed animal races, especially those that have 
been longest associated with man, as the dog and horse. Rata, 

♦Science and Education ENsays, London, 1893, pp. 27f»-277. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 18951 SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 253 

too, which must constantly scheme to escape from man, are ex- 
ceed inj^ly sat^acious. But such wholly wild animals as wolves 
show scarcely less intelligence, and the wisdom of the elephant 
is proverbial. Length of life seems to have much to do with it, 
and to show that acquired experience is utilized as it is by man. 
Now, if we look over the whole field we find that the several 
affective attributes above enumerated and numerous others 
chiefly confined to man, but faintly displayed by certain ani- 
mals, are confined and ascribed to the same animals that are 
believed to exhibit the beginnings of reason. Is there a causal 
connection between the two? I maintain that there is, and 
that the possession of the affective powers is the direct conse- 
quence of the corresponding power of reason. In nearly every 
case I have discussed I have carried it to the point where this 
hypothesis not only would apply, but seemed necessary to com- 
plete the explanation. We saw that sympathy and the moral 
sense in general depends absolutely upon a power of represen- 
tation sufficiently strong to react upon the centers of feeling, 
and this representative power is purely intellectual. We saw 
that volition, to rise at all above the mere animal impulse, de- 
pended upon a power of choice between motives, which is noth- 
ing else than to say that foreseen future or remote benefits in- 
fluence action more strongly than immediately present ones. 
This, again, is a form of reason. And finally we saw that artistic 
production depends upon the power to frame and execute an 
ideal, and therefore has entirely to do with ide^s as distinguished 
from the mere feelings which actuate the lower animals. 

In my Psychic Factors, Part II, I have endeavored to set forth 
the manner in which the rational faculty took its rise, primarily 
as an aid to the will in better securing the ends of existence, and 
have then followed its progress through its incipient stages and 
onward in its remarkable development until it wholly lost sight 
of this original egoistic function and became the servant of 
humanity in general, even to the sacrifice of self. And it is in 
these higher stages that we find the most marked cases of purely 
human powers — powers of which animals, even the highest, 
scarcely manifest a rudiment. Language, properly so called, 
consists of symbols for things, actions, and relations, and these 
are all rational abstractions. Every name or common noun is 
an embodied idea and may embrace any number of individuals. 
33 



Digitized by 



Google 



254 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

It is doubtful whether any animal could perform the mental 
operation required in saying dog, horse, mountain, river. All 
the nouns in an animal's language would be proper nouns, the 
names of particular dogs, horses, mountains, and rivers. The 
same would be true of verbs. Indeed, the ruder human lan- 
guages show a tendency in this direction. The word go is a 
very abstract term, and certain Indian languages have no such 
word. All verbs of going must specify the manner of going, as 
to go-over-the-mountain, to go-to the river, to go-on horse-back, 
etc. — i. e., early languages, for want of the power of abstraction 
on the part of the people possessing them, become kolophrastic. 
Such people speak in phrases instead of words. This idea 
might be followed out much further. 

After language, which is itself an art, we find man developing 
other arts, not merely the arts of decoration, already considered, 
but the arts of self-protection and self-preservation. These de- 
pend on inventive power, which, though wholly rational, is a 
power very early developed. Art of every kind is exclusively 
human. Man is the only creature who uses tools. The tools 
and weapons of all animals are a part of themselves, and are 
genetic products ; those of man are part of their environment, 
and are mechanical products. Everything that pertains to cult- 
ure is of this last class. Civilization is exclusively artificial and 
exclusively human. Art is essentially teleological — i, e,y it is a 
product of design — and there is no evidence that animals possess 
this faculty. Many of the lower creatures do indeed lay in 
stores for the future, but it is always the result of an instinct 
genetically developed as a condition to survival. Clustering 
round this idea of prevision there is a large class of phenomena 
which seem to be especially human. Besides purpose, inten- 
tion, and provision, there are the states known as anticipation, 
ambition, and aspiration, which all grow out of the power to 
forecast the future. It is not believed that the lower creatures 
live in the future in any such sense. They have their wants, 
even yearnings, no doubt, and they have expectations, and per- 
haps hopes, but they have no anticipations in the sense of feel- 
ing the pain or pleasure of experiences that are not present. 
This is a representative power which is wholly intellectual. 
Men really both suffer and enjoy more in anticipation than in 
participation. Imagine the criminal condemned to death, or, to 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895J SOCIOLOGY AND ANTHROPOLOGY 255 

take a simpler case, think how much of the pain of a surgical 
operation is due to the antecedent realization of what must be 
undergone. It is the same with enjoyments, not merely the 
simpler physical ones, but especially the remote mental ones, 
and the sacrifices of a long and laborious life are cheerfully made 
in anticipation of the foreseen results. 

Self-consciousness is often referred to as a distinguishing char- 
acteristic of man. Many, however, fail to gain a clear concep- 
tion of what this faculty is. Dr Carpenter confounds it with 
the " power of reflecting on their own mental states,"* while 
Mr Darwin associates it with abstraction and other of the deriva- 
tive faculties. It is certainly something much simpler than in- 
trospection, and has an earlier origin than the highly derivative 
speculative faculties. If it could only be seized and clearly un- 
derstood, self-consciousness would doubtless prove to be the 
primary and fundamental human attribute. Unlike reason, it 
has no roots in the animal stage ; but neither do all men possess 
it. Our language seems to lack the proper word to express it in 
its simplest form. " Think " approaches this most nearly, and 
man is sometimes described as a *' thinking being." The Ger- 
man language has a better word, viz., beainnen, and the substan- 
tive Besonnenheit seems to touch the kernel of the problem. 
Schopenhauer says : " The animal lives without any Besonnen- 
heit, It has consciousness — i. e., it knows itself and its weal and 
woe ; also the objects which produce these ; but its knowledge 
remains constantly subjective, never becomes objective : every- 
thing that it embraces appears to exist in and of itself, and can 
therefore never become an object of representation nor a problem 
for meditation. Its consciousness is thus wholly immanent. 
The consciousness of the savage man is similarly constituted in 
that his perceptions of things and of the world remain pre- 
l)onderantly subjective and immanent. He perceives things in 
the world, but not the world ; his own actions and passions, but 
not himself As now, through infinite gradations the light of 
consciousness rises, Besonnenheit enters more and more into it, 
and thus it gradually comes about that occasionally, though 
rarely, and with very different degrees of clearness, the question 
flashes through his head, ^ What does it all mean ? ' or, * How 
has it been brought about ? ' The first question, when it attains 

♦ Mental Physiology, p. 102. 



Digitized by 



Google 



250 THK AMERICAN ANTHJIOPOLOGIST [Vol. Vlll 

great clearness and persistency, makes the philosopher; the sec- 
ond, the artist or poet ; and thus the high calling of both these 
has its roots in the Beaoniienheit, which first of all springs from 
the clearness with which they become conscious of the world, 
and are thereby led to the contemplation of it. But the whole 
process is due to the intellect gaining the ascendant and at 
times breaking loose from the will, whose servant it originally 
was." 

This self-orientation or incipient reflection is thus seen to be 
something quite different from self-consciousness in the usual 
sense. It is not so much self as it is the outside world of which 
the intellect becomes conscious. It is not a subjective but an 
objective phenomenon, and in so far as self is concerned, it is 
objectively contemplated as part of the world. This early in- 
tellectual state is succeeded by those higher powers of introspec- 
tion, speculation, reflection, abstraction, and generalization which 
characterize the developed mind of man, and all this is accom- 
panied by the general differentiation of the faculties and refine- 
ment of the mental and moral organization of the race. Among 
the more important of these powers are those of creating new 
wants and of increasing the supply necessary to satisfy tliem. 
No animal accomplishes this. The animars wants are adjusted 
by the slow process of adaptation to the sources of supply, and 
even when these wants are all supplied it is not probable that 
any higher ones arise. Not so with man. The moment the 
coarser and more essential physical wants are supplied he feels 
new ones, both physical and mental, arise, and he proceeds to 
supply these. 

To what extent the fact of association has been a factor in pro- 
ducing this last fundamental difference between men and animals 
is one of the leading questions in sociology. For my own part, 
I am disposed to attribute it, directly or indirectly, almost wholly 
to this cause. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 18a5] THE NAMK CIIICKAHOMINY 257 



THE NAME CHICKAHOMIN7. ITS ORIGIN AND 
ETTMOLOGT 

BY WILLIAM WALLACE TOOKEtt 

This well-known name acquired considerable celebrity in the 
days of the Rebellion for the reason that the geographical i)Osi- 
tion of the river made it one of the natural bulwarks of defense 
for the capital of the Confederacy. Over two and a half cen- 
turies prior to this historic epoch it constituted one of the bar- 
riers of Wahunsonacock or Powhatan, when he immured him- 
self and his treasures far up in the swampy wilderness at its 
source in order to escape the close proximity of the Jamestown 
people.* 

It is not, however, the strife and turmoil of war, neither is it 
the jealous vagaries of Powhatan, that is now the theme of our 
story, but of an earlier period, in the very dawn of its annals — 
a point of time in the calendar of the past from which in reality 
we may date the genesis of our country. Inasmuch as Professor 
Edward Arber has justly observed, there can be no doubt what- 
ever had Captain John Smith and his companions failed to have 
survived the winter of 1607-*8 it would have delayed all settle- 
ment from English sources for many years. Therefore the sur- 
vival of the colony had a very marked bearing on the events 
which followed, and that led finally to the creation of this great 
commonwealth — the United States of America. 

As the subject of my study, as applied to a i)eople, is inti- 
mately concerned in having contributed more than their quota 
to these events, their story is more than worthy of being retold 
and analyzed — in fact, the name Chickahominy deserves to be 
enshrined in letters of gold on the pages of our colonial history ; 
for we cannot find a counterpart where a tribe of Indians, in 
its consequent results, did more for an English settlement than 
the friendly natives whom Captain John Smith found dwelling 
on the stream now bearing their name. 

The early recital of the Jamestown colony is a narmtive of a 

• Arber's Smith, p. 80. 



Digitized by 



Google 



258 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

struggle for existence— a struggle for their very lives, which we 
at this late day cannot realize, nor can we adequately appreciate 
it. The long and weary voyage of over five months' duration, 
in the most inclement of seasons, had its share in weakening the 
energy and ambition of the colonists, as it was also one of the 
main causes for the exhaustion of their food supply. The un- 
healthfulness of theirchosen plantation soon showed itself, and 
in the very hot summer ensuing they dropped off one by one, 
until out of one hundred and five persons only fifly-nine re- 
mained wlien September arrived. This sickness, quarrels, and 
fear of the Indians had so unnerved the survivors that they were 
unable to plant or to properly provide themselves with food 
sufficient to last through the winter, which now confronted them. 
Their tents were decaying, and their temporary shelters were but 
poor substitutes for their English homes. Many of the colonists 
were gentlemen, totally unused to manual labor and to their new 
modes of living. Smith, however, was inured to hardships and 
to privation, and by his own example and unbounded personal 
resources induced them to build and to thatch their houses for 
the winter. Time was onward flying, all were on a limited allow- 
ance, having but fourteen days' food supply left. Lots were cast 
as to who should command a party to trade among the natives 
for the actual necessaries of life. The chance fell to our heroic 
English captain, who unselfishly was ready and willing for any 
emergency. 

After a trip to several places on the James river with almost 
barren results, on the 9th of November, 1607, he set forward for 
the "country of the Chikahamania."* Tliat evening, while 
'' staying the ebb " in tlie bay of Paspahegh, ** at the mouth of 
the river," he was hailed by certain Indians, one of whom, being 
of " Ohikahamania," offered to conduct him to their country. 
He started by moonlight, under guidance of this Indian, and at 
midnight arrived at the town. The next morning he began his 
bartering of copper and hatchets for corn, each family endeavor- 
ing to give him all he wanted. They caused him to stay so long 
that one hundred at least finally assembled exj)ecting trade. 
What he desired he purchased ; but in order that they should 
not i)erceive his great want, he went higher up the river. Smith 
remarks : " This place is called Manosquosick [= \Vanas(iua- 

•Arber's Smith, p. U. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] THK NAME CIIICKAHOMINY 259 

es-ick, at or on the top of a hill], a quarter of a mile from the 
riuer, conteinincr thirtie or fortie houses, vppon an exceeding high 
land : at the foote of the hill towards the riuer, is a plaine wood, 
watered with many springes, which fall twentie yardes right 
downe into the riuer. ... A mile from thence is a Towne 
called Oraniocke. I further discouered the townes of Mansa, 
Apanaock, Werawahone, and Mamanahunt.'' 

Smith was very kindly received at all of these villages, espe- 
cially so at the last named, which was about the center of the 
habitations on the river, where he found assembled two hundred 
people, with such an abundance of corn that he might have 
loaded a ship ; but he, having in his mind the great need of his 
associates remaining at their plantation, went back, where he 
arrived at midnight. The. next morning he unloaded seven hogs- 
heads of corn into their store. On November 13 he was back 
again at Mamanahunt, where the people, having heard of his 
visit, had gathered there with three or four hundred baskets, 
little and big, and soon he was enabled to load his barge again. 

He says : " So desirous of trade wer(e) they, that they would fol- 
low me with their canowes ; and for any thing, giue it me, rather 
then returne it back.* So I vnladed again 7 or 8. hogsheads at 
our fort." 

Having thus provided a store amounting altogether to sixteen 
hogsheads, he, for the third time, went up the " riuer of the 
Chikahamanias." He discovered and visited eight or more 
towns ; but he found their plenty of corn had decreased, al- 
though he was enabled to load the barge again. 

Others beside Smith bear testimony as to his visits vp the 
river. Wingfield says: * " The 10th of December, Master Smyth 
went up the Uyuer of the Chechohomynies to trade for corne." 
This was Smith's last voyage that season, on which occi\J3ion he 
was taken prisoner by neighboring tribes for being too adven- 
turous, although the attempt was urged upon him by the colo- 
nists.f It will be observed from Wingfield's statement that he 
was aware that the appellation properly belonged to the people 
and not to the stream. 

Thomas Studley t says : § " But in the interim, he made 3 or 4. 
iournies, and discovered the people of Chickahamine. Yet what 



♦ Arber's Smith, p. Ixxxv. 
t Arber'M Smith, p. 98. 
I Arber'8 Smith, pp. 80, 411. 
g Ibid., p. 97. 



Digitized by 



Google 



260 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

lie carefully provided, the rest careles(8)ly spent. . . . The 
Spanyard never more greedily desired gold then he victuall: 
which he found so plentiful in theriuer of Chickahamine, where 
hundreds of Salvages, in diuers places, stood with haskets ex- 
pecting his coming." 

This extract is taken from the second part of John Smith's 
map of Virginia, with a description of the colony, etc., which 
was the condensed vindication or manifesto of thirty or forty 
gentlemen and soldiers who, under Smith, saved the colony. 

In this portion of Smith's works I find the terminal dropped, 
and the name there given as Chickahamine or Chickahamina, 
which affords strong evidence in favor of the etymology that I 
shall present. 

The highest inhabited town on the river was called Apocant, 
at the edge of the swampy wilderness, only forty miles from its 
junction with the James ; consequently all of these towns that 
contributed so willingly to the necessities of the colony, and 
undoubtedly saved them from the horrors of starvation, were 
situated within a short distance of each other. The peaceful 
and un warlike character of the tribe is accounted for by several 
facts. First, that they were under a different form of govern- 
ment from their neighbors, and had no war chief; second, that 
they were industrious agriculturists and a sedentary people at 
the time of Smith's visits ; third, that the isolated position of 
the rivei*, totally unnavigable, even by canoes, from the west^ 
surrounded by almost impenetrable and uninhabited thickets, 
made their homes a place secluded and safe from the more 
nomadic and warlike tribes of the north and west. 

In my essay on the name Susquehanna * I gave an analysis 
of its earliest form, Sasqu-emh-anovgh (= people who break into 
small pieces ; hence by connotation " people of booty "), corrob- 
orated by historical facts and paralleled in several dialects of 
the Algonquian language. After further extended research and 
study, I am still more firmly convinced that this derivation is 
the true one; and that its demonstration can be much further 
augmented and proven, I quote it again, at this time and place^ 
because I believe its terminal -anoaqh and verb -eaah enter into 
the composition of our present study. 

In searching Smith's works I find that Chechohomyniea, 

^American Antiquarian, vol. 15« p. 28G. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] THE NAMK CHICKAHOMINY 261 

Checka Hamania, Chikahamania, Chickaham mania, Chicka- 
haminos, and the form before mentioned are among the most 
marked of its variations. The name, as well as the greater num- 
ber of those terms applied to the principal Virginia tribes, belongs 
to the class formed from verbs, as participials or verbal nouns, 
denoting according to its terminal a place where or a people by 
whom the action of the verb was performed. In the proper in- 
terpretation of such cluster words we must find a clue, either his- 
torical or traditional, which will assist in unlocking its synthesis. 
The key was discovered in the case of my studies of the " Kus- 
karawaokes of Captain John Smith,"* ** The Algonquian Terms 
Patawomeke and Massawomeke,"t *' On the Meaning of the Name 
Anacostia," J and it has been found in the foregoing relation left 
us by Captain John Smith and his associates, as will be observed 
later. 

In our modem form of Chickahominy we have the original 
sounds, as indicated by its early variations, of Chick-akdm-mhi' 
anotigh. The special aflBx or verb -ahdm implies " he beats or 
batters " the object min\ after the manner of the root-word or 
prefix chick, and it is the Powhatan equivalent of the Massachu- 
setts -etaham ; Delaware, Ateh'm ; Cree, -tahu^m ; Narragansett, 
-m^oAmw, " he beats." This verbal affix is the inanimate third 
person singular in all these dialects,§ and is in common use in 
all four, as well as in other dialects of the same linguistic stock. 
The verb, however, becomes animate in such words as the Massa- 
chusetts m'etah ; Cree, m'iteh, ** the heart," i. e., " the beater; " 
Narragansett, w'nttah, " heart," i e,, " he beats." The prefix chick 
or Vchick, " it is large, great," i. c, " coarse, in distinction to fine," 
implies, with its verb -aAam, "he beats coarse," t. e., ** coarse- 
pounded." The object min or mXin denotes any kind of small 
berry, fruit, or grain,|| but when used in compound words with- 
out a special prefix refers to corn. The terminal in -iVw, -nnids, 
or 'OS I regard as a softened or abbreviated sound of the generic 
^ancmgh, " nation or people," with the mark of the English posses- 
sive added. Thus we have a synthesis of K^chick-ahdm-mm'- 
anough, " coarse-pounded corn people," or, as it might be rendered 

* American Anthropologist, vol. vi, p. 409. 

tibid., vol. vii, p. 174. 

: Ibid., vol. vii. p. 3'«9. 

^ Howse Grammar of the Cree, p. 87. 

I LeuAp^ and Their Legends, p. 48, Brinton. 

34 



Digitized by 



Google 



262 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VlII 

by a free translation, " hominy people." The term was probably 
applied to them by neighboring tribes for the reason that it was 
one of their products of trade, or, as was more probable, their 
principal article of sustenance, as it remains today among certain 
classes in the Sunny South. 

Some analogous terms are Scheechgdnim!* "shelled corn 
coarse-pounded.'' [Chaff? Zeisberger.] This word is identical 
in meaning with our k'chick-ahav}rmin\ sche being an explosive 
sound and a variation of k'clie or I^chick-echgdn, being another 
verbal signifying to beat [with a hand instrument], -'im' a contrac- 
tion for min', com. Powhatan (Strachey), rokohamin = rok- 
ohdm-mm, " parched corn ground small." Allowing for the al- 
ternating sounds of its initial, rok is undoubtedl}' the same 
verbal noun as the Narragansett n6kehick, " parched meal," 
nokhik (Eliot), " meal," ** flour," ** ground corn." Wood says : f 
"Nocake (as they call it), which is nothing but Indian corn 
parched in the hot ashes, . . . beaten to powder." Ushuc- 
co?iomen, " to beat corn into a meal ; " icsketehamu, '* meal miule 
of gynny wheat." Strachey here gives us two distinct forms of 
the same verbal in words having the same meaning, for " gynny 
wheat" was another name for maize.J The verb in the first 
-ohom has the Powhatan characteristics, while the latter -eteham 
resembles the Massachusetts and Delaware forms. The reason 
for this is probably found in the fact that tusketehamu, " fine- 
beaten corn," belongs to a dialect other than the Powhatan. 
Compare the Narragansett iackhumviw, ** to grind corn ; " tack- 
humiinnea^ " beat me parched meal." From these cluster words, 
including that of our subject, is derived our common name 
" hominy," of which it is a contraction for ease of utterance 
among the English. Here I differ somewhat from Dr J. Ham- 
mond Trumbull, with good reasons, for the name "hominy" 
was given to the grain dried and pounded. 

He says : § " Hominey is a form of minne with an emphasiz- 
ing aspirate -Kminne^ to denote the grain par excellence — t. e., 
maize; but in Virginia and New England this name was re- 
stricted by the English to one, and the most common prepara- 

* LenAp^ Diet., Brinton. 

t N. E. Prospect, p. 2, chap. 6, p. 76. 

J Hariot*s Narr., p. 21, Qaaritch Ed. 

I On some Words derived from Language of the North American Indians, p. 6. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] THE NAME CHICKAHOMINY 263 

tioii of maize. In Norwood's ''Voyage to Virginia, 1649, * homini ' 
is described as the corn of that country beat and boiled to mush." 
Josselyn in " New England Rarities," page 53, says that '* after the 
first flour had been sifted from the pounded com the remainder 
they call ^homminy,' which they boil upon a gentle fire till it 
be like a hasty pudden." Consequently, as will be observed, the 
k^ is not an emphasizing aspirate except as it is so much of the 
AJgonquian verb ** to beat," as erroneously used by the English. 

Rev. John Heckewelder, in his " Names which the Lenni 
Lennape or Delaware Indians gave to rivers, streams, and local- 
ities within the States of Pennsylvania, New York, Maryland, 
and Virginia," presents a translation of the name which has 
been and is still frequently quoted, viz., '' Chickahominy, cor- 
rupted from Tschikenemahoni, signifying ' a turkey-lick, a lick 
frequented by turkeys.'" It does not require much argument 
to show that such a derivation is entirely out of place, as applied 
to these people, and that this suggested etymology is entirely 
contrary to its early forms, therefore unworthy of further exam- 
ination or reiteration. 

Again, some one has suggested that Chickahominy denoted 
" great com," which Dr Trumbull * says " does not stand for 
' great com,' because ' com ' does not designate place or imply a 
fixed location, therefore cannot be made the ground -word of a 
place name." Dr Trumbull is undoubtedly correct in this 
statement so far as a " place name " is concerned, but he was 
evidently unaware that ** Chickahominy, as I have demon- 
strated, was not originally 'a place name,' although it became 
one by its bestowal on the river by the English, without consid- 
eration for its true meaning." In proof of this fact, the tribe 
offered to relinquish the appellation of '* Chickahomania and to 
be called Tassantessus [= strangers], as they call us."t There- 
fore the analysis which I have presented, although it does not 
exactly stand for " great corn," is in accordance with Algonquian 
grammar, and, as I firmly believe, beyond question, its true 
etymology. 

♦ iDdmn Geographical Name^, p. 49. 
t Arber'8 Smith, p. 515. 



Digitized by 



Google 



264 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



A TUMA CREMATION 

BY G. R. PUTNAM 

Opposite Yuma, Arizona, on the California aide of the Colorado 
river, lies the reservation of the Yuma Indians, and here, scattered 
through the bottom lands, live some three thousand of the tribe. 
They are a comparatively harmless people, few finding their way 
into the territorial penitentiary at Yuma. At San Quentin, in 
California, however, there are several of the tribe who got them- 
selves into trouble by carrying out an old traditional privilege — 
the right of the relatives of a person who has died to kill the 
medicine man in case the deceased is the third patient lost 
Another and rather more rational custom they have is that of 
burning the dead, and the following notes are written to describe 
one of these rites witnessed by the writer in March, 1892, while 
engaged in work for the United States Coast and Geodetic Survey. 

Antonio (for most of these Indians are known by English or 
Spanish in addition to their native names), a well-formed young 
man of about twenty-seven, had been suddenly taken sick early 
in the morning while at work in the town, and by 11 o'clock was 
dead, despite the efforts of the medicine man. Although the 
Indians now usually resort to an American physician, in this 
instance the doctor was not called until all was over, when he 
pronounced it a case of apoplexy. The body was carried across 
the river to the meeting-house of the tribe, an open structure 
composed simply of a roof of cut boughs supported by symmet- 
rically placed poles, the sides being entirely open, save a small 
room at the back. This house stood a few rods behind that of 
McGill, the chief of the tribe. The latter was a more pretentious 
structure than the ordinary Indian hut, being built of rough 
lumber, with low flat roof, but with no floor and few openings 
and looking much like a large dry-goods box. 

The body, rolled in a blanket, was laid on the ground near the 
front of this open lodge, and the Indians, who had gathered from 
far and near, grouped themselves about. Close to the corpse stood 
the old men and women, usually very slovenly dressed and often 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] A YUMA CREMATION 265 

with hideous faces. On these seemed to fall the principal burden 
of lamentation, and for hour after hour they kept up a succession 
of unearthly groans and wails, interspersed sometimes by remarks 
about the deceased made by the men in a loud tone. Only in a 
few instances were real tears seen. On the right stood a few of 
the young men, a class not well represented, however. Among 
these were to be seen some handsome faces. Their dress was a 
pair of blue overalls and a white undershirt, without hat or shoes. 
They never wear anything on the head, depending entirely on 
their luxurious growth of jet black hair for protection from the 
fierce sun of Yuma. This is their chief ornament and their 
greatest pride. It is allowed to fall over the shoulders, and is 
then cut off straight across the back. It hangs behind in cords 
formed by rolling when wet. In front it partly covers the face, 
a characteristic motion being a jerk of the head to throw it back 
from the face. Their faces were usuall}' clean shaven, and some- 
times ornamented with streaks or blotches of paint, or with orna- 
ments in the nose. The young men were generally silent at this 
ceremony, as were also the young squaws, who were seated on 
the left of the group. These were dressed in red or blue calico 
prints, and wore their hair much as the men, save that it was 
less carefully kept, and was cut straight across the forehead 
similar to the modern bang. 

Early in the afternoon the chief selected a half dozen strong 
men, and with axes on their shoulders they went to the woods 
to cut the timber for the funeral pile. This was erected a few 
rods south of the lodge. A shallow square hole was first dug in 
the sandy soil. On each side of this was driven an upright stake, 
standing some three feet above the ground, and at one end a 
half dozen stakes. Across the hole and between the two side 
stakes were then laid a number of heavy green willow logs, about 
eight feet in length, the logs being piled higher on each side so 
as to leave a trough in the middle to receive the remains. At 
one side was another pile of logs, which were to form the cover- 
ing when the body had been placed in position. The upright 
stakes at the head were intended to support these logs at one 
end, so that their weight would not rest on the head of the corpse. 
Around the whole evenly cut brush was placed, standing on end. 
Everything was arranged neatly but simply. 

Without the slightest intermission the wailing in the lodge 



Digitized by 



Google 



266 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

continued throughout the afternoon and on into the night As 
evening came on the scorching heat of the day was succeeded by 
a teniperature so much cooler that many little bonfires were 
kindled here and there in the neighborhood, and those Indians 
who were not taking active part in the ceremonies gathered 
about in picturesque groups ; others wrapped their blankets 
about them and lay down to sleep, with perhaps a log or a tin 
can for a pillow. The relatives of the dead man lived at Algo- 
dona, about twelve miles down the river, and the ceremonies 
were not proceeded with until the messengers had returned with 
them. When all had arrived the medicine man took charge of 
the remains. A space was cleared about the body, and the 
lamentations became more subdued. For nearly two hours the 
medicine man went through various rites. He inhaled the 
smoke of a cigarette and blew it into the mouth, eyes, nose, and 
ears of the corpse, and occasionally blew it up toward the stars. 
He rubbed and pressed the body and now and then straddled 
grotesquely up and down over it. He finally sang with a clear 
voice a rude incantation, a repetition of a few short sentences. 
As his efforts ceased, one of those from Algodona b^an to speak 
and continued for many minutes in a calm, dignified, and most 
pleasing tone. He was followed by McGill, the chief of the 
Yumas, who spoke in much the same style, though not such a 
gifted orator. McGill was dressed much as his fellow Indians, 
save that he carried a cane and wore shoes and a ribbon in his 
hair. He was a fine-looking man, with a kindly and intelligent 
face. 

As these ceremonies ceased the circle again closed about the 
])ody, and the lamentations, which had continued through all, 
iv^'din increased in volume. Nothing more was to be done until 
tiie moon rose, about 2 o'clock in the morning. Many again 
stretched themselves on the ground, and as the hours passed 
away the scene gradually assumed a quieter aspect. But over 
the mesa in the east a faint light appeared ; gradually the sky 
was illumined, and the beautiful moon arose, throwing its light 
over the turbid yellow torrent of the Colorado. When it had 
mounted half an hour into the sky the scene suddenly became 
more animated, the wails and moans were redoubled, all were 
on their feet, and four strong men took up the body, bearing it 
by the blanket in which it was rolled, and carried it to the 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] A YUMA CREMATION 267 

funeral pile. Here it was carefully placed in the center of the 
logs and a blanket spread over it, and then the heavy logs were 
{)iled above, supported on the upright stakes, so as not to touch 
the head, but resting on the feet The chief stood at one side 
and directed all. When completed, the pile was about four feet 
high, four feet wide, and eight feet long, containing therefore 
about a cord of wood. 

On top were placed the possessions of the dead man — in this 
case but a single blanket, for he was poor. If he had owned a 
house that would have been burned also. A fagot was brought 
and applied to the dry brush in many places, and in an instant 
all was ablaze. As the heat increased the circle gradually 
widened until there was a great ring of Indians about thirty feet 
from the burning pile, as near as the heat could be endured. 
Various articles of clothing were thrown on the pile, some being 
removed on the spot and others brought for the purpose. This 
clothing the spirit was supposed to take to the other world, 
where it will be claimed by the original owner on his death. 
Those who spoke earlier in the evening now spoke again for an 
hour or more, uttering detached sentences with long pauses be- 
tween. The groans and wails continued, and some of the old 
squaws and men went around the circle, laying their hands on 
the shoulders or heads of others. Some of the squaws had been 
wailing continuously for fifteen hours (since the preceding noon), 
and as a consequence their voices were almost entirely gone, and 
their efforts to use them now were almost ludicrous. A most 
weird and impressive scene was this, the flames leaping high in 
the air and lighting the dusky faces of the great circle of Yumas, 
seated or standing, some now with rather scanty attire, the un- 
earthly wails and the solemn words of the chief, with the moon 
looking down on all. As the pile slowly crumbled the sounds 
ceased and many silently moved away in the earl}' dawn. 

The next day there was nothing, save a few mesquite beans 
scattered over the surface, to show where this remarkable cere- 
mony had taken place. The ashes had been carefully gathered 
into the hole below and the ground smoothed over. 



Digitized by 



Google 



268 THE A^fERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



AUSTRALIAN ROCK PICTURES 

BY R. H. MATHEWS 

Aboriginal drawings, more or less artistic, have been observed 
throughout Australia, but until recently no systematic attempt 
has been made to copy and describe them in detail and to fix 
their position on public maps. 

In the Journal of the Royal Society of New South Wales, vol- 
ume XXVIII, now in press, 1 have described and illustrated a 
number of rock carvings and paintings in New South Wales, 
and have also contributed an article on the same subject to the 
Royal Society of Victoria, which appears in their *' Proceedings." 
volume VII, n. s., with illustrations and descriptions. 

I have described the paintings contained in three caves, all 
of which are of an interesting character, containing a variety of 
figures, including men, women, animals, birds, fish, and other 
objects. Figures 1 and 3, plate i, are exact reproductions of the 
pictures on the rock, in their correct relative positions. In figure 
2, as stated in the description, the different paintings have been 
placed close together, regardless of their position on the cave 
wall. All the objects shown are in black, the predominating 
color in native drawings, but they are also frequently found iji 
large numbers in red and in white. In a few instances I have 
seen small objects, such as hands, drawn in yellow. For an 
average specimen of the difierent kinds of drawing, and the 
colors used, see plate viii of the " Proceedings of the Royal 
Society of Victoria," volume vii, n. s. 

Plate II shows 36 figures, all of which are described separately 
in the letter-press. Figures 1, 2, and 3 represent groups of sev- 
eral objects exactly as they appear on the surface of the rock. 
Figures 4 to 36 are placed on the sheet in such manner as to 
take up no more space than is necessary to exhibit them clearly, 
without regard to their relative positions. 

All the paintings and carvings treated of in this paper are 
original, with one exception, and I have drawn attention to that 



Digitized by 



Google 



« 

I 



3 



i ^ 

I ? 

p 




3 



otj 



00 

en 



Digitized by 



Google 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] AUSTRALIAN ROCK PICTURES 269 

exception in my description of it. The figures are drawn to 
scale from careful measurements and sketches taken by myself, 
and the position of each on the Government maps is also stated 
in the descriptions, so that they can be readily found. 

Rock paintings are met with in all the Australian colonies, 
but rock carvings on an extensive scale have been seen only in 
New South Wales and West Australia.* Regarding the latter, I 
will quote from Captain Wickham's " Notes on Depuch Island," 
published in the Journal of the Royal Geographical Society, 
London, 1842, vol. xii, pp. 79-83 : 

Depnch island, latitude 20° 38'' S., longitude 117** W E., is one of a 
string of small islands called the Forrestier group, lying from one to three 
miles off the coast of West Australia. The island is connected with the 
main land by ridges of sand, which in many places become quite dry at 
low water and afford facilities to the natives for reaching the island for 
the purpose of procuring? turtle, as well as for the exercise of their talent 
for drawing on the smooth surface of the rocks. 

From the vast numbers of specimens of art, the natives seemed to have 
amused themselves in this way from time immemorial ; and from the 
verj' hard nature of the stone and the accuracy with which many animals 
and birds are represented, they deserve great credit for patient persever- 
ance and for more talent and observation than is usually bestowed on 
the natives of New Holland. 

The method pursued in tracing the different objects appears to be by 
cutting the surface of the rock with sharp-pointed pieces of the same 
stone ; and as the exterior of all parts of it is of a dark reddish brown 
color, the contrast becomes great when that is removed and the natural 
color of the greenstone is exposed. It is difficult to conjecture what 
many of their drawings are intended to represent, but others are too well 
done to admit of a moment's doubt. Probably many of the inferior per- 
formances were the work of the children. In some of the drawings the 
surface of the stone was entirely cut away ; others were only in outline. 

Captain Wickham forwarded to the Royal Geographical So- 
ciety at London ninety-two specimens of these carvings, describ- 
ing the various objects represented. Many of these are illustrated 
in the journal mentioned. Captain J. L. Stokes, in his " Dis- 
coveries in Australia," published in 1846, volume ii, pages 168- 
172, also mentions these carvings, but his description is not so 
full and exact as that of Captain Wickham. 

•Some simple marks or scratchings have been observed on rocks in a few places in 
South Austi-alia and Queensland, but nothing of this kind has, so far as I knovr, been 
seen in Victoria. In the latter colony, however, I know of some paintings in caves in 
the counties of Dnndas and Borung. 

35 



Digitized by 



Google 



270 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

As a remarkable instance of the small amount of inquiry 
hitherto bestowed on Australian rock pictures, I may point out 
that these carvings have been referred to as paintings. In 
Smyth's "Aborigines of Victoria," volume i, page 292, he says : 
" On Depuch island Stokes found a large number of paintings." 
The Rev. J. Mathew, in the " Journal of the Anthropological 
Institute of Great Britain," volume xxiii, page 42, speaks of " the 
paintings on Depuch island." I hope that this mistake will not 
again be made when referring to these native drawings. 

In the papers which I contributed to the Royal Societies of 
Victoria and New South Wales, respectively, I have fully de- 
tailed the way in which paintings and carvings were executed 
by the native artists, the different styles of drawing, their geo- 
graphic range, etc., so that it is unnecessary for me to treat of 
these parts of the subject in the following pages. 

For the sake of clearness, aboriginal rock pictures should be 
described under two heads — paintings and carvings. In the 
former the pictures are painted on the walls and roofs of caves 
or rock shelters in various colors. In the latter the drawings 
are in the nature of outline engravings or carvings cut or ground 
into the surface of the rock. In my previous papers I have 
separated the subject under the two heads indicated, and will 
continue this distinction in the present memoir. 

I will now describe the plates illustrating my original work, 
and hope that the information which I have collected may prove 
of some interest and value. 

Description of the Plates. 

PLATE r — PAINTINGS. 

Figure 1. — The cave or rock shelter in which these drawings 
appear is 29 feet long, 8 feet 6 inches from the front inward to 
the back wall, and averages about 8 feet high. The floor is 
sandy soil, and there are traces of smoke on the roof, showing 
that the cave has occasionally been used as a camping place by 
the natives. It faces the east. 

As the spectator stands facing the paintings on the back wall 
of the cave, the first figures on his left are those of a man and a 
woman, the former 25 inches, the latter 17 inches in height. 
Next is an animal which appears to be intended for a dog, al- 



Digitized by 



Google 



Julyl81>5] AUSTRALIAN ROCK PICTURES 271 

though much larger than the human figures alongside of it. 
I have often observed this want of uniformity of scale in 
native drawings. Scattered along the back wall of the cave are 
six more rude delineations of men, all of which are in the atti- 
tude usually assumed by the natives when dancing the cor- 
roboree. A few feet in front of the dog are two objects which 
may have been intended to represent the sun. The upper one, 
averaging a little over two feet in diameter, has fourteen rays. 
The other one, which is not complete, has nine rays. Near the 
right-hand upper corner is a female kangaroo, 16 inches long, 
from the pouch of which a young one is in the act of jumping. 
This is an interesting drawing, and I have seen it in but one 
other instance. There are also four paintings of birds, apparently 
of the cursorial tribe, and two tracks of bird feet. The last ob- 
ject on the right is 16 inches in diameter, and may have been 
intended to represent the moon. All the above drawings are in 
black outline, and all are shaded within their margins with the 
same color, with the exception of one of the human figures and 
what I have supposed to be a representation of the sun. Inter- 
spersed among the other figures, and in some instances partially 
covered by them, are seven human hands, done in white in the 
" stencil method '* of drawing.* The only right hand amongst 
these is shown in the shut position, which is rather uncommon. 

The escarpment of Hawkesbury sandstone in which this 
shelter is situated is about four or five chains west from Harris 
creek and about a mile and a half northerly from portion No. 
17, of 40 acres, in the parish of Eckersley, county of Cumber- 
land. 

Figure 2. — This cave is a few yards northerly from the one 
last described, in a continuation of the same escarpment, and 
faces the same direction. It is 25 feet long and the average 
depth inward is about 8 feet. The back wall leans forward 
at an angle of about 30** from the perpendicular, and the height 
at the entrance is about 8 feet. Owing to the irregular way the 
figures are scattered over the wall, I have departed from my 
usual custom of showing them in their relative positions and 
have fitted them on the plate regardless of their position on the 
rock. 

* For de8criptioD8 of the differeDt methoils of native paiDting and illustrative Hpeci- 
mens, see Ptoc. Roy. Soe. Vic, vii, n. s., pp. 144-6, plate viii. 



Digitized by 



Google 



272 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

The most interesting object in this figure is an emu 3 feet 9 
inches long from the point of the bill to the end of the tail. 
The neck is too short and the legs too thick near the feet, but I 
feel certain the picture was drawn to represent the emu. There 
is a large eel 7 feet 2 inches long and 12 inches wide, with a 
smaller one in a bent position beside it. There are two fish 
with four fins, three with one fin, and two without fins. The 
large snake-like animal in the upper right-hand comer of the 
figure and the object near the tail of the emu I cannot further 
describe. There is a small quadruped which appears to belong 
to the mt or bandicoot tribe. Under two of the small fish, and 
produced previously to them, are two left hands stencilled in 
white. All the other figures are outlined in black and shaded 
with the same color within their margins. In this cave, as well 
as in that represented in figure 1, there are several other draw- 
ings, almost obliterated and too indistinct to be copied with 
certainty. 

Figure 8. — The large cave containing these paintings is at the 
base of a precipitous escarpment of Hawkesbury sandstone about 
five chains easterly from the right bank of Georges river, within 
portion No. 1, of 640 acres, in the parish of Eckersley, county of 
Cumberland, and about 55 chains southeasterly from the north- 
west corner of that portion. Its length is 78 feet, depth from 
the front inward 20 feet, and its height about 30 feet. The roof 
is stained with smoke, and the shelter appears to have been used 
by the aborigines as a camping place for a considerable period. 
Fish were plentiful in Georges river, close by, and there were 
good hunting grounds all around. 

The cave faces S. 70° W., and therefore the sun does not shine 
into it very much in winter; consequently the disintegration of 
the sandstone is more rapid than it would be in a dryer situa- 
tion. Here and there throughout a considerable extent of the 
back wall traces of the former existence of paintings are dis- 
cernible ; but those shown on the plate are the only ones which 
can now be copied with any degree of certainty, and even these 
are becoming faint, owing to the natural decay of the rock. 

An emu 4 feet 10 inches from the point of the bill to the tail, 
apparently sitting on its nest, is shown in solid black. There is 
a cavity in the rock just under the bird's breast which I think 
w^as there at the time the figure was drawn. About a foot above 



Digitized by 



Google 



Digitized by 



Google 



CO 








^ 





I 






Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895J AUSTRALIAN ROCK PICTURES 273 

the tail of the emu is a kangaroo, likewise in black, its whole 
length being 1 foot 9 inches, and having what appear to be in- 
tended for two spears sticking into its back. The same want of 
proportion in the relative sizes of these animals is observable 
as in the painting of the dog in figure 1. 

PLATE II — CARVINGS. 

Figure 1. — The group of six emus here shown appears to be 
intended for the cock and hen and four young birds. The cock, 
which is the largest figure of an emu which I have yet seen, is 
10 feet 6 inches from the point of the bill to the end of the tail 
and 11 feet 3 inches from the bill to the end of the foot. What 
I have supposed to be the hen, or mother of the brood, measures 
9 feet 3 inches from the bill to the tail. Similar measurement 
of the smallest bird of the group is 4 feet 3 inches. This figure 
is an exact reproduction of the group of birds as they appear 
on the rock. In all the native carvings of emus which I have 
yet seen only one leg is delineated, and the foot is a straight 
continuation of the leg. In paintings of this bird I have seen 
the two legs shown, but the foot has been depicted in the same 
way as in the carvings. See the emu in plate i, figure 2. 

This group is carved * on a large flat rock of Hawkesbury 
sandstone, about two acres in extent, elevated only a few feet 
above the level of the surrounding land, in the parish of Spencer, 
county of Northumberland. It is situated on a bridle track (or 
trail) leading from Mangrove creek to Hawkesbury river, on the 
top of the range dividing the waters of these two streams. 

Figure 2. — This group of carvings is situated on a flat sand- 
stone rock, slightly elevated above the surface of the ground, on 
the western side of the road from Pymble to Cowan cre6k, a 
tributary of Hawkesbury river, about half a mile southerly 
from Bobbin trigonometrical station, in the parish of Gordon, 
county of Cumberland. 

The carving represents a man and woman in the attitude as- 
sumed by the natives in performing a corroboree or native dance. 
The eyes and mouth are delineated, but the nose is missing in 
both. Each has a belt round the waist, and the man has a band 

•For explanation of how earrings are executed, see Proe. Roy Soc. Ktc, vii, ». s., 
pp. 146-8. 



Digitized by 



Google 



274 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

round each arm near the shoulder. The male figure is very 
much the larger of the two, a disparity often found, but not 
universal, in native drawings. Seventeen ray-like lines rise 
from the head of the man and eight from the head of the woman, 
which may be intended either for hair or for ornaments stuck 
in it — probably the latter. There is a carving evidently intended 
to represent a native ** dilly " bag, but the usual disregard of 
proportion between it and the human figures is observable. 
Close to the woman's Hght hand is an object which may have 
been intended either for another bag or for a human foot-mark. 
There are three or four representations of human foot-markS 
above and close to this group which I have not included. They 
are about 1 foot 2 inches long by 6 or 7 inches wide, the distance 
between the strides varying from 4 feet 2 inches to 5^ feet 9 
inches. I have observed representations of human foot-marks 
among other carvings and also in native paintings. 

I have reproduced this group and the description from my 
paper published in the " Proceedings of the Royal Society of 
Victoria," volume vii, n. s., pages 152, 158, and plate ix, figure 8, 
for the purpose of enabling a comparison with other native 
drawings. 

Figure 3. — The group here delineated is situated on the road 
from French's forest to Pitt Water road, joining the latter at 
portion No. 64, of 640 acres, in the parish of Narrabeen, county 
of Cumberland. The carvings are on a flat rock on the eastern 
side of the road, a short distance southerly from the southern 
boundary line of the portion referred to, which line also forms 
the boundary between the parishes of Narrabeen and Manly 
Cove, the carvings being, therefore, just within the latter parish. 

The central figure represents a man who, if the legs were 
straight, would measure about 7 feet 6 inches. He wears a belt, 
and there is a band round the left arm at the shoulder. Part of 
the right arm and hand, as well as the fingers of the left hand, 
are barely distinguishable. Beside him is the figure of a woman, 
about the same height, whose body is marked by a number of 
stripes extending from the breast to the feet, the left foot being 
rather indistinct. The mammae are delineated in the way usu- 
ally observed in native drawings. The eyes and mouth are 
shown in both figures. Above the heads of the man and woman 
is the representation of a shield 2 feet 4 inches long and a foot 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] AUSTRALIAN BOCK PICTURES 275 

wide in the middle, with three transverse bars cut upon it. On 
the right of the man is an animal somewhat resembling the 
kangaroo, but it may have been intended for a dog. It meas- 
ures 5 feet 10 inches from the end of the tail to the nose. There 
is a line marked on the body of this animal, extending from the 
neck about 2 feet 6 inches towards the tail. 

The man and woman are in the attitude of dancing, and the 
lines on the body of the latter may be intended to represent the 
stripes painted on the bodies of the natives on these occasions. 
This group, taken in connection with figure 2, is very interesting, 
as showing some of the positions assumed by the dancers. R. 
Sadleir, in his "Aborigines of Australia, ' page 19, says : " There 
are many kinds of Corroborees. All have the song and the 
dance ; both are at times very libidinous, especially the dance 
of the women. . . . Their bodies are striped in white, and 
their heads fancifully adorned." 

The tabular mass of sandstone containing this group is on a 
level with the surface of the surrounding land, from which the 
water oozes in wet seasons and in time of rain and flows over 
the rock, thus keeping it very damp, causing it to disintegrate 
more rapidly than if kept dry. The erosion caused by the ac- 
tion of the water has partly obliterated some parts of the figures 
and made the whole group ^somewhat indistinct. It was very 
fortunate that I discovered it and rescued it from oblivion, 
because in a few more years it will be altogether indistinguish- 
able. 

Figure 4. — This carving of a man 5 feet 7 inches tall, with an 
abnormally long body and short legs, appears on the same rock 
as figure 1. The eyes and mouth are shown, and also the nose, 
which is rare in these native drawings. There is a necklace and 
a belt round the neck and waist, respectively, both of which form 
part of the native dress. 

Figure 5. — A rude figure of a man 4 feet 7 inches tall is de- 
picted on a flat rock about 5 or 6 chains northwesterly from figure 
3. There is a band round both arms, a belt round the waist, six 
ornamental lines rising from the head, and the eyes, but no other 
features. The feet are not shown, the 1^ terminating like the 
left leg of the woman in figure 2. 

Figure 6. — This is another rude figure of a man, 5 feet 4 inches 
tall, carved on a southerly continuation of the same rock as that 



Digitized by 



Google 



276 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

on which the last-described figure appears. There are nine lines, 
averaging about 10 inches long, radiating from the head and 
bands round each of the arms near the shoulder. Part of a leg 
and part of an arm on one side have been obliterated by the 
natural decay of the rock. 

Figure 7. — This unique little figure of a man 3 feet 3 inches 
tall is delineated on a large flat rock about half a mile south- 
westerly from Jones trigonometrical station, parish of Manly 
Cove, county of Cumberland. The fingers are shown, but not 
the feet, and there are four lines radiating from the head. There 
are bands across the arms, a belt round the waist, and two bands 
reaching from the belt to the shoulders, but crossing each other 
somewhat like a pair of braces. 

Figure 8. — Another rude human figure, with a very long body 
and having the legs spread almost at right angles to it. The 
eyes are shown and there is a belt round the waist. This carv- 
ing is on the same rock as figure 1. 

Figures 9, 10. — These are two shields, the dimensions of the 
smaller being 3 feet 7 inches long and 1 foot 5 inches wide, and 
those of the larger 4 feet long and 1 foot 7 inches wide. Each 
has a longitudinal and two transverse bars cut upon it. 

Figures 11 to 17. — These seven small objects are probably in- 
tended for the echidna, or hedgehog, the length of the smallest 
being 1 foot 3 inches, and that of the largest 2 feet 5 inches. 
They are on the same rock as figure 5, and each is within a few 
yards of the next. 

Figure 18. — This small animal, 1 foot 10 inches long, which 
is on the same rock as the last described, may be intended for 
the flying squirrel or opossum, or perhaps for some of the rat 
tribe. 

Figure 19. — It is difficult to decide whether this strange carv- 
ing is intended for a man or for the skin of a kangaroo, but 1 
think the former is the more probable. I have seen somewhat 
similar grotesque native drawings in which other detail showed 
unmistakably that they were intended for human beings. This 
carving is in one of the small gullies at the head of Deadman 
creek, within portion No. 19, of 960 acres, in the parish of Eck- 
ersly, and is about two miles northerly from Woronora river. 

Figure 20. — This is a fairly well executed fore part of a kanga- 
roo or wallaby, and is on the same rock as the last described. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] AUSTRALIAN ROCK PICTURES 277 

The remainder of the figure has been carried away by the nat- 
ural wasting of the rock. 

Figure 21. — This is another rude carving of a man, but all the 
lower part has disappeared, owing to the decay of the rock. It 
is on the same flat rock as the last two figures. 

Figure 22. — This shield, 4 feet 9 inches long and 1 foot 9 inches 
wide, is carved on the same rock as figure 6. There are one 
longitudinal and two transverse lines upon it. 

Figure 23. — Represents a snake 4 feet 11 inches long and 2i 
inches across the body. It is on the same rock as figure 1. 

Figure 24. — This small figure, which is only 18 inches long, 
may be intended for a dog or a native cat, and is on the same 
rock as the last described. 

Figure 25. — This small figure of a man is on the same rock as 
the last two figures and is 2 feet 6 inches tall. He wears a belt 
and a band round one arm near the shoulder. 

Figures 26, 27. — These represent the Australian boomerang. 
The former is on the same rock as figure 1 ; the latter is near 
figure 5. 

Figure 28. — This represents the aboriginal weapon known as 
the nulla-nulla. It is 2 feet 4 inches long and 4 inches across 
the widest part. It is on the same rock as figure 1. 

Figure 29. — Another shield, 2 feet 8 inches long and 16 inches 
wide, with a longitudinal and two transverse bars. Near it is a 
small oval object, 9 inches long by 4J inches wide, which I am 
unable to identify. These are on the same rock as figure 5. 

Figure 30.— This curious figure, which I assume to be intended 
to represent a black fellow sitting down on a log or a rock, with 
his cloak made of opossum skins wrapped around him, is carved 
on the same sandstone rock as figures 19 to 21. It is 4 feet 10 
inches from the top of the head to the wavy line, which I have 
supposed to represent the folds of the lower end of the cloak. 

The legs, with the bent knees and feet, are fairly well drawn, 
but the arms resemble those seen in native pictures of kangaroos, 
except that in the latter there is usually only one limb delin- 
eated. The head is oval and two eyes are shown, but no other 
features. This is the only figure of this description I have yet 
met, and is therefore unusually interesting. If it is not intended 
for a human figure it may have been drawn to represent some 
monster of the native artist's imagination, connected witli some 
tribal legend. 
30 



Digitized by 



Google 



278 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

Figure 31. — A kangaroo 7 feet 10 inches from the nose to the 
end of the tail is here depicted. Only one fore leg and one hind 
leg are shown, the usual mode adopted hy the natives in draw- 
ing figures of kangaroos. It is carved on the same rock as 
figure 1. 

Figures 32, 33. — Native drawings of boomerangs are generally 
shown about the natural size, but those under notice measure 
5 feet 1 inch and 4 feet 4 inches, respectively, in a straight line 
from end tc^end, which induces me to think that possibly they 
were intended to represent the moon. This is only thrown out 
as a suggestion. It is quite common to find drawings of men, 
animals, and other objects very much exaggerated in size. 
These carvings occur on the same rock as figure 7. 

Figure 34. — This circular carving, 1 foot 10 inches in diameter, 
is on the same rock as figure l,and unless it is intended to rep- 
resent thQ moon, I cannot offer any other explanation. I have 
occasionally found such circular objects carved on rocks, and 
also in caves. See figure 1, plate 1, of this paper; also " Pro- 
ceedings of the Royal Society of Victoria," volume vir, n. s., 
plate viii, figures 2 and 5. 

Figure 35. — The large representation of a kangaroo here given 
measures 11 feet 1 inch from the end of the tail to the tip of the 
nose, and both as to correctness of figure and in detail is a great 
advance on similar drawings of this animal. Lines or bands are 
shown on the nose, neck, hind leg, and tail. Both ears are de- 
lineated and the eye is not forgotten. The animal is in the 
attitude of running. This carving is on a large mass of Hawkes- 
bury sandstone, trending north and south, on top of the dividing 
range between Macdonald river and Webb creek, about where 
the boundary line between the parishes of Macdonald and 
Wonga, county of Hunter, crosses that range. 

Figure 36. — This rude representation of what appears to be 
intended for a sting ray is carved upon*the same rock as figure 
1. The length of the body proper is 12 feet 9 inches, but, in- 
cluding the tail, the total length of the fish is 22 feet 1 inch, and 
its greatest breadth 9 feet 9 inches. The weight of some of these 
fishes may be readily understood by quoting from Captain Cook, 
when he visited Botany bay, New South Wales, in 1770. " I 
observed several large sting rays and caught one weighing 336 
pounds after his entrails were taken out." 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] SOME PRINCIPLES OF NOMENCLATURE 279 



SOME PRINCIPLES OF NOMENCLATURE 



BY W J MCGEE 



Many of our common family names, or surnames, such as Smith 
and Carpentel", Hunter and Weaver, stand for occupations ; others 
suggest personal characteristics, such as White and Brown for 
complexion, Small and Long for stature. Good and Meek for 
disposition ; ,still others suggest place or condition of residence, 
such as Seaman and Hillman, Warman and McGee (MacEagh, 
or Child of the Mist). Many other family names represent either 
surnames or prenames with diminutives added; and these de- 
rived names may either indicate paternity, like Smithson and 
McDonald, Johnson and Fitzgerald, or they may stand simply 
as undefined diminutives, such as Smithie, Wilcox, and Peter- 
kin ; and the diminutives may be either prefixed as in O'Neil 
and Apthorp, or suffixed as in Clarkson and Wilcox. Many of 
our family names are derived from other tongues in which sim- 
ilar meanings may be found ; and in yet other cases meanings 
are not at first apparent, yet are ascertainable if traced back- 
wards tlirou;<h successive generations to the days when language 
was less definite than now and when every man was a law unto 
himself in matters of orthography and pronunciation. Thus 
most family names are found to have meanings, but the mean- 
ing is seldom recognized, and would commonly convey a false 
impression if it were. 

In like manner certain prenames stand for character or con- 
dition, like Peter (rock) and Theophilus (god-beloved), though 
m most cases the signification is doubtful or completely lost ; 
but analogy with the later-developed surnames and inference 
from the known meaning of certain prenames, either in the 
English or other languages, alike indicate that all such names 
originally carried associated meanings, and were indeed applied 
to express personal characteristics or other ideas connected with 



Digitized by 



Google 



280 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VI II 

the individuals, just as is the case among those savages who have 
risen to the plane of applying names to persons and things. 

Similariy a part of our geographic names, like Blue ridge. 
Long island, Rocky mountains, and I^ke Superior, express 
ideas associated with the features to which they are applied ; yet 
many of the names of our rivers, lakes, and mountains are of 
aboriginal derivation, and while they conveyed poetic or prosaic 
meanings to the Red Men, are meaningless to us. So, too, in 
the older countries many names of places were originally com- 
mon nouns, as indicated by the modern meaning (e. ^., Norfolk 
and Cambridge), by the retention of articles (e. g., Le Havre and 
La Haye— Havre and The Hague in English), or by more ob- 
scure relations brought to light through antiquarian research. 
Thus, inference from known cases and analogy with family 
nomenclature and with the proper names of primitive peoples 
all indicate that geographic designations originally conveyed 
associated meanings ; and this conclusion is in no way weakened 
by the fact that in most cases the original meanings are lost. 

Accordingly, examination of the proper names applied to 
persons and places in this and other countries during the last 
three or five centuries indicates (1) That proper names originally 
expressed ideas collateral to or associated with the person or 
place named ; (2) That as time passed these collateral or asso- 
ciated meanings were lost; and (3) That concurrently with the 
loss of the original by-meanings there has grown up a system of 
applying and using proper names as simple designations of, or 
labels for, the persons and things named. This differentiation 
in nomenclature has been effected witliin a few generations, and 
was evidently not only unforeseen but strongly opposed at every 
step by the tendency to apply names of associated meaning to 
new-born persons and newly discovered places— a tendency com- 
monly failing only when invading races accepted names current 
among the conquered peoples, which, being of strange tongues, 
carried no associated meaning. 

These conclusions concerning the evolution of place names 
are in harmony with the evolution of language as expounded 
by Whitney, Sayce, Powell, Mallery,and other scientific linguists. 
In the beginning certain ideas were doubtless conveyed by signs, 
as they are in some measure among the lower animals ; and as 
ideas multiplied, the signs, whether movements, gestures, or 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1«)5] SOME PRINCIPLES OF NOMENCLATURE 281 

postures, increased in number until the sign once standing for 
a group of ideas was differentiated into a group of signs, each 
more or less definitely expressing its own idea. So, too, it is 
certain that in the primitive vocal language words were few, and 
while each represented perhaps a fairly definite central idea, ill- 
differentiated by-meanings also clung about it; and that as time 
passed, new words were invented or evolved to express the asso- 
ciated meanings, and thus the original words gradually became 
definite. In like manner the primitive written language was 
pictographic and represented animals, plants, and other objects 
to which associated meanings clung ; but as the mind of man 
expanded the pictographs were replaced by symbols or ideo- 
graphs, which expressed ideas directly rather than by associa- 
tion; and still later the more or less fanciful ideographs were 
pruned and molded into purely arbitrary characters expressing 
ideas only by combination — the process throughout represent- 
ing change from a multiplicity of meanings toward simplicity. 
The general process of evolution in language, vocal and written, 
continues today, and nearly all of its stages are recorded in con- 
temporary history of different peoples as well as in classic writ- 
ings. Thus, there is a stage in the development of definite lan- 
guage in which more or less obscure by-meanings cling to words, 
and this is the stage of mysticism or dialectics, or esoteric ideation, 
from which we are not yet completely emancipated ; and there 
is another stage in which by-meanings are expressed through 
modification of primary terms by inflection and by combination 
of elements, this being the stage of grammatic differentiation 
from which only the English language is at all emancipated. It 
is to be observed, however, that the tendency of the times is 
toward tlie elimination of complexities of both sorts and toward 
the abandonment of the more complex languages ; and this 
would appear to be a reason for the ascendency of the simple, 
tangible, and definite tongue and writing of the Anglo-Saxon. 
Possibly the Anglo-Saxon blood is more potent than that of 
other races ; but it is to be remembered that the Anglo-Saxon 
language is the simplest, the most perfectly and simply sym- 
bolic, that the world has ever seen, and that by means of it the 
Anglo-Saxon saves his vitality for conquest instead of wasting 
it under the Juggernaut of a cumbrous mechanism for convey- 
ing thought. Accordingly, on tracing the evolution of language, 



Digitized by 



Google 



282 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VllI 

it appears that signs, words, and symbols followed the course of 
late pursued by proper names ; at first the expressions covered 
a multitude of meaninors, but the liy-meanings have gradually 
fallen away until the principal linguistic elements have come to 
stand for simple dissociated ideas. 

II 

The evolution of nomenclature has now reached a stage .in 
which it is not only possible but needful to discriminate two 
classes of proper names : The first or primitive class includes 
those having collateral or associated meanings, and maybe called 
connotative or connotive ; the second class embraces simple desig- 
nations without collateral or associated meanings, and may be 
called denotative or denottve. 

Placing these classes in the order of their development, it is 
found that the connotive names are ancient, the denotive names 
modern. During earlier centuries nearly all place-names, as 
well as most surnames and many prenames of people, were con- 
notive, while today, and particularly in this country, most place- 
names and nearly all person-names are practically denotive; for 
even when an etymologic or ethnologic or antiquarian meaning 
clings to a name this by-meaning conveys no impression to ordi- 
nary users of the term ; Mr Miller is a man, tall or short, rich or 
poor, merchant prince or county pauper, as rnay happen, but 
neither the owner nor the driver of a mill ; and Harpers Ferry 
is a village or town, large or small, refined or rude, but never a 
strumming musician or a ferry. The forefathers infused their 
own indivi<luality and that of their neighbors into their proper 
names, and thus developed an anthropomorphic nomenclature ; 
but their busier descendants will have none of it. 

Yet, while in general connotive names have given place to 
denotive names, there is a noteworthy exception to this tendency 
of the times. In the cities of two centuries ago the street names 
were given in commemoration of men, trees, birds, streams and 
the like, and bore no relation to each other, while the houses 
were designated by their owners or by fanciful names ; but in 
this century city houses have come to be designated by num- 
bers and, particularly in this country, the streets receive names 
or other designations designed to indicate their relation. So the 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] SOME PRINCIPLES OF NOMENCLATURE 283 

modern city nomenclature is connotive rather than denotive. It 
is to be observed, however, that this development of denotive 
nomenclature is not a reversal to the primitive condition, since 
the by-meanings are not accidental but designed, not random 
but systemic, and adapted to a definite end. In brief, the 
general tendency in the evolution of place-names is in the di- 
rection of denotive designations for independent units, and in 
the direction of connotive designations for interdependent parts. 
The extended and vigorous growth of systemic place-names 
and person names during the last five centuries is a striking 
feature of our civilization and is worthy of careful considera- 
tion. Its cause would appear to be simple. As energy takes 
the path of least resistance, so the mind seeks to encompass its 
end with the minimum expenditure of energy ; and thus it hap- 
pens that men refuse, albeit unconsciously, to employ a complex 
idea when a simple one will do, and eventually fall into the 
habit of not only expressing themselves, but even thinking, in 
the most economical ways. Now, the idea conveyed by a con- 
notive name is complex, while the idea conveyed by the deno- 
tive name is simple ; the one is a more or less elaborate impres- 
sion, the other a single definite mark ; the one a pictograph or 
hieroglyph, the other a simple arbitrary symbol. So, however 
strongly sentiment may cling to the complex connotive mean- 
ing, economy of energy leads gradually, through instinct rather 
than definite consciousness, to the simplification of the idea, 
until finally it is intuitively stored, used, and conveyed in its 
most economic form. Hence economy in thought and utterance 
would seem to be the key-note to the evolution of proper names. 
It is to be observed that the same cause will explain the growth 
of language in general from the associative to the dissociative 
forms; for it is economy (including much more than the " lazi- 
ness " of Sayce) that forms the key-note to linguistic evolution. 

Ill 

The function of science is three-fold : (1) to discover that 
which is ; (2) to ascertain that which was in terms of that which 
is now ; and (8) to find courses of action in that which is and 
that which was, and thus to determine what is to be. Accord- 
injrly, the astronomer first observes the positions of the cosmic 



Digitized by 



Google 



284 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

bodies, next compares these positions with those observed by 
his forefathers and thus obtains a measure of cosmic movement, 
and then determines eclipses and conjunctions and occultations 
for decades in thp future, and all modern ships are guided by 
his predictions. In like manner the chemist first ascertains the 
properties of a substance in a given form, next examines it under 
other forms and compares its different forms, and is then able to 
formulate laws of chemic action and predict changes going on 
with changed conditions to the extent that modern industries 
and household economy are based on his predictions. To a less 
degree the same order is pursued in the biotic sciences, though 
vital phenomena are more complex, so that prediction is less 
certain ; yet the breeding of stock represents observation, com- 
parison of stages, and prevision, so that domesticated animals 
and fowls represent in some measure the outcome of biotic 
prediction. The anthropologist has to deal not only with the 
animal body, but with the still more elusive and complex mind, 
so that his methods and results are still less exact than those of 
the biologist ; yet even the student of man and his institutions 
profits greatly by the scientific method so useful in the ancillary 
branches of knowledge. 

Now, when the scientific method is applied to personal and 
geographic names, it is first found that some names have asso- 
ciated meanings and others not ; next, on comparing the present 
with the past, it is found that the meanings associated with cer- 
tain nan)es are constantly disappearing, and with further study 
that the by-meanings disappear through an instinctive tendency 
toward economy of thought and expression ; and accordingly it 
is easy to predict that denotive names must come to prevail over 
connotive names. The principles thus suggested must guide the 
application and use of personal and geographic names ; they 
will not indeed be recognized by all individuals, many of whom 
will employ the primitive method of giving more or less com- 
plex connotive names; but in the end economy of thought and 
expression in the hundred or thousand will outweigh the whim 
of the one, and thus the work of the obstructionist will come to 
nought, however strongly it be guarded — the child loves to re- 
member that two apples and two apples are four apples, but the 
busy adult soon comes to remember only that 2 + 2 = 4. The 
principles indeed will govern nomenclature, whether they are 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] SOME PRINCIPLKS OF NOMENCLATURE 285 

recognized or not, in the future as in the past; they represent a 
law of nature which it were folly to oppose. 

On applying these principles to the subject of American geo- 
graphic nomenclature, a significant fact appears : Many of our 
rivers and mountains and some of our cities and towns bear 
aboriginal names. Now, while these names bore a meaning to 
the Red Man, and while in some cases the ethnologist or anti- 
quary is able to interpret them, they are meaningless to the vast 
majority of people. Thus they are typical denotive terms. 
Moreover, a characteristic of the American people is directness 
of method in thought and expression ; and in this way denotive 
nomenclature has been stimulated more than in other countries. 
For both of these reasons our American geographic nomenclature 
is largely denotive and to only a limited extent connotive; and 
since the denotive form is the higher in the evolution of proper 
names, it follows that our geographic nomenclature is superior 
to that of any other nation. And for this nomenclature we are 
indebted to the Red Men, whose homes we have despoiled and 
whose lands we have confiscated, and sentiment argues the rear- 
ing of a monument to a passing race by retaining the original 
names wherever possible. Be it remembered, too, that the re- 
tention of such names is but the extension of that denotive 
nomenclature which makes for further weal by simplifying 
thought — for it is not enough to say that Americans seek deno- 
tive nomenclature because of our national directness of method ; 
here as elsewhere in nature tendencies are cumulative, and 
mental directness is increased and progress gained by reason of 
the simpler nomenclature. 

Many local applications of the principles of nomenclature 
might be made, and some of these are worth stating. The best 
names for hills, valleys, rivers, and towns are denotive, since 
these features are not related, and since therefore the independ- 
ent designation is the most economical. But streets and ave- 
nues, squares and houses, are parts of a unit and stand in rela- 
tions to other parts which it is commonly economical to express. 
It is for this reason that while older cities gave unrelated desig- 
nations to streets and houses, modern cities apply connotive 
street namas and connotive house numbers. This is particularly 
true in America, where national characteristics have so largely 
led to the conscious or unconscious development of economic 
37 



Digitized by 



Google 



286 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

methods ; and it is especially noteworthy in the more modern 
cities. The simplest and thus the best application of the con- 
notive method in street designation is found in numbering 
streets ; another application is found in lettering them, and the 
l)erfection of street designation along two different but related 
lines is found in Washington, where the streets are numbered 
one way and lettered the other, and in Salt I^ke City, where 
the streets are numbered both ways. Less desirable applica- 
tions of the connotive method are found in the designation of 
streets by names of related meaning, whose initials are arranged 
alphabetically, so as to indicate their position with respect to a 
starting point. An excellent example of this method is found 
in certain suburbs of Washington, where streets take the names 
of American cities — Albany, Boston, Cincinnati, etc. Similarly 
streets may be designated by the names of trees arranged alpha- 
betically — Aspen, Beech, Chestnut, etc, — or by the names of 
rivers — Atchafalaya, Brandywine, Colorado, etc. It is to be re- 
membered, however, that use of names of cities, trees, or rivers 
in this way represents a return toward the primitive connotive 
nomenclature, which has been tried in the crucible of time and 
found bad ; it is a reversal of normal development, a social 
atavism, and it is too much to hope that the arrangement will 
serve any other useful purpose than that of permitting repeti- 
tion of the alphabet without danger of confusion. Another ap- 
plication of the connotive method by means of the alphabet is 
found in the use of names of celebrities arranged alphabetically ; 
but this method is not only bootless, except for permitting the use 
of the alphabet in a distinctive way. but is perhaps objectionable 
in that it tends to degrade honored names without commemorat- 
ing individuals — for Washington market, Jefferson place, and 
Adams street are but labels, and not one in ten who use them 
is reminded thereby of the founders of the nation, and many 
there are who never know their meaning. Viewed in the light 
of the evolution of proper names, the system of numbering 
streets and houses is the best that can possibly be devised, and 
next in excellence is the system of lettering streets ; and any 
departure from these systems is a step backward. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] NOTES AND NEWS 287 



NOTB8 AND NITWS 

"The Early Navajo and Apache." — The deductions pre- 
sented by Mr F. W. Hodge in the present number of the "An- 
thropologist " ("The Early Navajo and Apache," July, 1895) 
seem to be somewhat hastily derived, either from the authorities 
he cites or from other sources of information which he has not 
cited. 

Unfortunately I am so situated here that it will be impi>S8ible 
for me at this moment to quote from notes which have been left 
in Washington, but I may at least be permitted to express an 
opinion upon a subject with which in times past I endeavored 
to familiarize myself, reserving for a later date the duty of a 
more elaborate examination of Mr Hodge's arguments. 

To make my remarks as succinct as possible, I take issue with 
Mr Hodge in his conclusion, that the Apache tribe is of com- 
paratively recent entrance into our southwest territory (i. «., 
Arizona and New Mexico), a conclusion based upon the fact 
that one or two of the earlier Spanish writers, whom he names, 
do not specifically allude to the Apaches or to having encoun- 
tered opposition from any hostile tribes during their progress 
northward. 

Mr Hodge is honest in his methods and fai? in his application 
of the material at his disposition, and he also frankly quotes 
the contrary convictions of Surgeon Washington Matthews, who 
gives the Navajo myth estimate of a trifle more than seven 
hundred years as the period of Navajo-Apache occupancy of the 
region in (juestion. 

To begin with the latter part of Mr Hodge's proposition first. 
Negative evidence as to the existence of the Apaches at any 
particular time in any particular region infested by them is very 
unsatisfactory evidence. 

Simply because Castafieda de Najera does not allude to any 
such tribe in or about 1540-1541 does not prove anything. 
Castaneda's narrative may be found in Hakluyt. He was 
attached to the expedition of Vasquez de Coronado, moving 
out in search of the cities of Cibola, an expedition of most im- 
posing dimensions. I forget the exact figures of its organization, 
but some idea of its strength may be inferred from Mr Hodge's 



Digitized by 



Google 



288 THK AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

own statement, that it was accompanied by no less than " 5,000 
sheep and 150 cows of Spanish breed '' (p. 237). 

No one possessing the slightest acquaintance with Apache 
tactics needs to be assured that Coron ado's force of mail-clad and 
escmipiled Castilians and aborigines was not likely to be molested 
by the wary savages scanning their every movement from the 
hilltops. 

Before arriving at conclusions in regard to the period of savage 
migrations, every possible source of information should be 
scrutinized and exhausted. 

In the case of the Apache-Navajo these sources would a])pear 
to be for us : 

1. The traditions of the natives themselves. 

a, of the Apache and Navajo. 
6, of contiguous tribes. 

2. Historical data, whether as narratives of early missionaries, 
reports of military and exploring expeditions, municipal records, 
where such exist, church records, or history, properly so called. 
In the matter of history, the first is not always the best. In 
many cases writers of a later epoch are able, from force of cir- 
cumstances, to present conclusions much more just than the 
assumptions, often arbitrary and fantastic, of the earlier com- 
mentators. A case in point is that of the Zunis of New Mexico. 
A government publication can be named, dated about 1857, in 
which it is solem-nly stated that Zufii must once have been in- 
habited by pigmies because the doors are generally so low. 

The traditions of the tribes adjacent to the Apaches are singu- 
larly harmonious in regard to the long-standing and consistent 
hostility dis})layed by that people toward all whom they met 
in their i)rogress southward and southeastward. 

No aboriginal tribe on the American continent — not even the 
Irocjuois orAraucanian — knew so well how to apply the old 
Roman maxim of *^ Divide and rule." In moving down among 
the sedentary Indians, the Apache took good care to be always 
at peace with some while making forays upon others. Thus 
they kept on good terms and even intermarried with the Pueblos 
of Picuris, New Mexico, and came, in a friendly way, to trade in 
the first days of its foundation in front of the church of Our 
Lady of the Angelo of Porciuncula, whose ruins are still to be 
seen amid those of the pueblo of Pecos, fully described by Ban- 
delier. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] NOTES AND NEWS 289 

In passing, it may be noted that this fact was related by a 
Benavides, apparently the same (juoted by Mr Hodge. 

And, strange to add, he says that they came with dog sledges, 
which would show that they were plains Apaches, and had 
been long enough on the plains to have become accustomed to 
the dog, which their brethren and the other tribes to the ex- 
treme west (Pimas, Opatas, Chimahuevis, Yumas, Cocopahs, 
etc.) never employed as a beast of burden. 

They maintained relations of intermittent friendliness with 
the people of Tucson, close to which town as many as 3,000 of 
them are said to have been congregated at one time ; and yet, 
about the very same period, they made an attempt to burn 
down the church of the Pimas at San Xavier del Bac, nine miles 
up the river Santa Cruz. 

A number of writers, among whom, I think, was Humboldt, 
have commented upon this phase of their nature. They would 
go so far as to plunder the settlements in Sonora and take the 
proceeds to the Rio Grande to sell to the Mexicans living along 
that otream. At various times peace has been made and kept 
precariously with Janos, Fronteras, Santa Cruz, Baviske, Basa- 
raca, and other insignificant towns, and even at the date of the 
killing of the gallant Captain li^mmet Crawford, Third Cavalry, 
United States Army, in 1886, the Opata mountain hamlets of 
Nacori and Bacodeguachi were exempt from persecution because 
the Apaches wished to keep open some source of information as 
to what the Mexican troops were doing. 

Apache-Navajo tradition, and Pueblo tradition as well, are 
concurrent in giving the Navajo country as the place of refuge 
sought by many of the Rio Grande Pueblos at the period of the 
great revolt, or, perhai)s it might be better to say. at the period 
of the suppression of that revolt (1692-1694). 

An archeologist might find in one valley the ruins of a village 
destroyed by the Apaches several centuries ago and not ten miles 
away come upon the traces of another which had managed to 
maintain some kind of relations with them until within a gen- 
eration or two. 

Thus Fronteras and Santa Cruz, already mentioned, were sev- 
eral times abandoned on account of Apache inroads, and then 
reestablished. 

In 1866 I was taken by a party of Apaches to the ruins of a 
pueblo on the southern flank of the Sierra Acha, Arizona. " This 



Digitized by 



Google 



290 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

town was destroyed by a party of our peoi)le led by my grand- 
father, who was then a very young man. He destroyed this 
town in the night, carrying oflf the women and children. Our 
I)eople used to keep at peace with those living over there" (on 
the foothills of the Sierra Matitzal and along the Rio Tonto). 
My informant was the chief known to the Americans as " John 
Daisy " — i. e., Pi-cha-indezi = Him, or His, Ear, Long — ^that is 
to say, "The Mule." 

The eighteenth century was more than half advanced before 
the Apache drove the Sobaipuri branch of the Pima tribe out 
of Aravaypa canon. 

A scholar who made very painstaking and learned investiga- 
tions into the former relations existing between Apache and 
Papago (Christian Pima) was the Right Reverend John B. 
Salpointe, who, when I first met him (1870), was the Roman 
Catholic bishop of Arizona. 

So much for Indian tradition, of which more could be given 
were it not from fear of occupying too much space. 

The measure of value to be assigned to Indian tradition is a 
vexed question, which each student must decide according to 
his own experience. I am willing to accept it in all cases as 
true, having due regard for the constant coefficient of ignorance 
attaching to every story related by people who have inadeqate 
means of recording time or whose knowledge of the arts and 
sciences is meager; but it would be harsh and unjust to reject it 
altogether. 

The Roman soldiers returning from the early Punic wars re- 
ported that the enemy had advanced up(m them with beasts of 
burden which had snakes for hands (anguimani). We would 
call such animals elephants. 

An Indian, who had made a hurried trip with a white friend 
from New Mexico, saw in the river below Saint Louis an animal 
with eyes of flame, vomiting steam from its nostrils and groan- 
ing more loudly than a wounded buffalo. He was telling about 
a steamboat. In 1881, at the ruins of " Tolla-hogandi," Arizona, 
a Moqui told Mr Thomas Keam and myself that here had been 
a town of the Moquis, destroyed by the other Moquis because it 
was full of *' singing men " and would not live like its neighbors. 

I ventured the surmise (in " Snake Dance of the Moquis ") that 
the " singing men " were Roman Catiiolic friars chanting vespers, 
and that " Tolla-hogandi " must be the old Christian Pueblo of 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] NOTES AND NEWS 291 

"Aguatubi," a surmise which Dr J. Walter Fevvkes at a later 
date demonstrated to be beyond a doubt correct. 

The Spanish history of North America may be said to be^in 
with the expedition of Vasquez de Coronado from Culiacan 
northeast to the Arkansas or the Platte, as the scholar may elect. 
Of this expedition we have accounts by Coronado himself, by 
Jaramillo, and by Castaneda de Najera, and we also have the 
relations of Cabeza de Vaca and of Father Marco de Niza. Pre- 
vious to this — that is, from the year that Cortes obtained control 
of Teiiochtitlan until 1540 — the reports of Cortfe and the early 
missionaries describe facts in the present capital of Mexico with 
more particularity than those of any other point. 

This was not all that the Spaniards were doing, but it was the 
principal part. Juan de Zumanaga, the first archbishop of 
Mexico, brought over the German Crombauer, with his printing 
press and set him to work at printing catechisms and "Artes " 
of the Aztec language, and a private citizen (name unknown) 
established, in 1543, for the education of Tarascan youth, a col- 
lege which by 1583 had been raised to the dignity of a university, 
whose grand ruins are still to be seen on the island of Tzintzon- 
tzin, in Michoacan ; but from the moment that Spanish writers 
began to direct their attention to the north, then we hear the cry 
of the Chichimecs ! No words are too strong to delineate the 
diabolical character of the Chichimecs. They were wanderers 
from the north, going almost naked, and lurking in the suburbs 
of the largest towns and cities, at one time throwing Zacatecas 
itself into a panic. 

Dr Gustav Bruhl, who devoted much thoughtful attention to 
the matter, translates " Chichimec " as " Mescal-eater." 

Now the mescal, or American aloe, is and has been emphat- 
ically the food of the Apache. Furthermore, Torquemada (** Mo- 
narquia Indiana," Madrid, 1709, lib. v, cap. 40) says that the 
Apaches were the Chichimecs, although, for the sake of avoiding 
discussion, I am willing to include under the same head the 
Tarahumaris, the Comanches, and any other fierce tribes to the 
north. 

But the word Apache itself, so far as now known, does not 
appear in any Spanish writing until we approach 1580-'81, 
when Antonio Espejoled an expedition from the mines of San 
Bartalom6 to rescue two Franciscan friars who had penetrated 
up the Rio Grande certainly as far as the pueblo of Puay, not 



Digitized by 



Google 



292 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

far from which that of Sandia now stands. Torquemada relates 
that these two friars, Francisco Lopez and Agostin Rodriguez, 
were killed hy the Chichimecs, who neither knew nor respected 
God, heing like another Pharaoh. (Mon. Indiana, lib. xxi, cap. 
14, p. 627.) 

From this writer we get the name of the **Faraones" (Pha- 
raohs) Apaches, a designation so long a blind to investigators. 

Possibly from the Spaniards, too, has been derived our game 
of faro, which has been as great a scourge to us as the red-skinned 
Faro's or Faraones were to the Rio Grande. 

Mr Hodge tells us that " the first Spanish known reference to 
the Apache tribe was made by Juan de Onate. This was in 
1598 " (quoting from Onate, " Obediencia y vassalaje de San 
Juan Bantisha," 1598, in Doc. Ined. de Indias, xvi, p. 114, where 
the word occurs as plain as day). Under the name '^Apichi " 
they will be found spoken of in the accounts of Esi)ejo's expedi- 
tion, 1581-'83. 

In most of the Spanish or Mexican references to this tribe 
they are arbitrarily designated as " Coyoteros," '' Mescaleros," 
**Jicarillas,'' *' MogoUons," etc., terms which are unknown to the 
Apaches and which are as illogical and misleading as Bancroft's 
classification under the one general head of " New Mexicans." 

Escudero in (" Noticias Estadisticas del Estado de Chihuahua," 
Mex*., 1834, p. 212) gives a list of nine " parcialidades " which 
correspond both to clans and to local groups (see my " Gentile 
Organization of the Apaches," p. 125, in J. of Am. Folk-I^ore). 
The sixth of these, which he writes ^'Sejenne or Mescaleros," is, 
oddly enough, without doubt, Doctor Matthews' " Tse*jinkini, 
the Ilouse-of-the-dark-cliffs people. These are the descendants 
of the first two human pairs, who had their origin in the San 
Juan mountains, the first pair having been created by the gods 
from two ears of corn brought from the cliff houses in Tse'gihi, 
a canon somewhere in the country north of the Rio San Juan." 

But Escudero 's "Sejenne" (pronounce the Mexican j like hk) 
is the Apache ** Tzekinne," or people who live in the Aravaypa 
cation, or in the houses of stones there to be found. Tze = a rock, 
kin = house. This would imply an admission in Apache or 
Navajo myth that " the first two human pairs " were a rock- 
house people or cliff-dwellers, and that the Apache himself was 
an intrusive element. 

No fault can be found with Mr Hodge's view that the Apache- 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] NOTES AND NEWS 293 

Navajo movement to the southward gained in momentum with 
the conquest of the Rio Grande Pueblos and their subsequent 
revolt from the Spanish yoke, but still more did it derive strength 
from the weakness of Spanish vice-regal rule and the anarchy 
and turbulence immediately following the separation of Mexico 
from the mother country. Torquemada laments that the Kmg 
of Spain has been for years compelled to maintain over four 
thousand dragoons to watch this tribe alone. (This has been 
fully exi)lained in " On the Border with Crook.") 

Mr Hodge is also correct when he describes the Apaches as a 
composite people, but all tribes and all nations, civilized or 
savage, are that. 

The Apaches have solid bands, as among the Tontos, who not 
merely admit their foreign blood, but speak two languages — the 
Apache proper and the Mojave, closely related to the Hualpai, 
and claiming kinship with Pima and Cocopah. A Tonto chief, 
" Patchin," had a second name in the Mojave language, " Pula- 
Sara-trapa," or *' the White-spotted Forehead " (Gentile Organ- 
ization of the Apaches of Arizona, p. 113). Other members of 
the same band could be mentioned in the same manner, were it 
necessary. 

The very name Tonto is a free translation of the Apache word 
I^ifietinne, spelled ^*Vinietinnenne'' by Escudero, meaning stupid 
head or fool, and given by the other Apaches because they sjmke 
so barbarously. 

" Eskiminzin," one of the head chiefs of the Apaches, is of 
part Mexican blood. The tribe is full of Mexicans, with occa- 
sional Pima, Opata, and Tarahumari captives, not a few of whom 
have risen to power and influence among their captors. 

But as the Roman — born in Spain, in Mantua, Capua, or 
Lutelia — no matter what might be the nationality of one parent, 
always claimed to be a Roman, so the Apache is the dominant 
blood at all times among this savage people, and Apache each 
and every one claims to be and is. 

In the literature of this subject there is a very important and 
interesting rei)ort by Don Hugo O'Conor, an insi)ector-general 
of the Si)anish army ; another by a certain Colonel Castro, who 
lived among the Apaches for seven years, was acquainted with 
their dialects, and had an intelligent appreciation of their pecu- 
liarities, both in peace and war; there is a shrewd letter con- 
cerning Moquis and Apaches by Father Eusebio Kino, and some 
38 



Digitized by 



Google 



294 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

information of value in Father Alegre's History of the Com- 
pany of Jesus in Mexico, itself based upon the work of his pre- 
decessors in the missionary field, hut not always exact in the 
matter of dates. John G. Bourke, 

Captain Third Cavalry^ U, S, Arniy. 

Reply of Mr Hodge. — It is for some reasons to he regretted 
that Captain Bourke has taken occasion to criticise certain pas- 
sages of *' 'J'he Early Navajo and Apache " before consulting the 
notes to which he alludes, for over-reliance on his memory has 
led him to err in a number of statements. 

A careful perusal of my paper will show that the mere fact 
that Castaneda (whose narrative does not appear in Hakluy t, as 
Captain Bourke supposes, but in Ternaux-Compans) fails to 
mention any tribe that can be identified with the Apache, not- 
withstanding his detailed description of every noteworthy occur- 
rence, is only a small part of the evidence presented in support 
of my argument that southern Arizona and northern Sonora 
were not occupied by the Apache in the sixteenth century. It 
will also show that even in the early part of the seventeenth 
century the sedentary peoples of New Mexico and Arizona were 
not molested by the Apache or Navajo ; tlierefore the " tactics " 
of the Apache of early times were quite different from those 
with which Captain Bourke has had such a wide and thrilling 
experience. Even had the Apache taken to the heights on the 
approach of the Spaniards, the latter could not have failed to 
observe signs of habitation in the despol)lado between the CJihi 
and Zufii, had there been any. 

Cai)tain Bourke i)resents no evidence, so fiir as I can see, of the 
early occupancy by the Apache of the Wiiite Mountain region 
in Arizona. The fact that " the traditions of the tribes adjacent 
to the Ai)aches are singularly harmonious in regard to the long- 
standing and consistent hostility displayed by that people" is 
of little moment. " Long-standing '' hostility to the Indian 
may mean a period not exceeding a century or so, for in many 
instances the Indian's conception of chronometry beyond a very 
brief period is quite vague. For example, the Tiwa of Isleta re- 
late a tale of " The Man Who Wouldn't Keep Sunday," the home 
of this impious individual having been a prehistoric pueblo ; and 
another regarding the destruction of Pecos, which bears every 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 18951 NOTES AND NEWS 295 

indication of antiquity, yet it is known that Pecos has been 
abandoned only about half a century. It should also be re- 
membered that the association of the Apache with Pecos and 
Picuris, to which Captain Bourke refers, occurred nearly a hun- 
dred years after the coming of Coronado, and it would have 
been strange had they neglected to follow other nomads (the 
Querecho or Tonkawa, for example, who traded with the Pueblos) 
in the use of the dog as a beast of burden, for the plains tribes 
had that animal under domestication before the Spaniards came. 

Captain Bourke is mistaken also in his supposition that the 
first actual Spanish reference to the Ai)ache was made prior to 
1598. The two Franciscan friars mentioned, accompanied by 
Chamuscado, went, in 1580, as missionaries to Puaray (Coro- 
nado's town of Tiguex), where Bernalillo now stands, but were 
killed by the inhabitants of that village in the same year. 
Eighteen years later Ofiate there discovered on the walls of a 
room a partially effaced painting representing the killing ; hence 
the " Cliichimecs " — a term applied in Mexico to any wild In- 
dians — to whom Torquemada attributed the killing, were in this 
case not Apache, but only "peaceful" Pueblos. The name 
Faraones, as applied to a division of the Apache, was not em- 
ployed until the eighteenth century, while the name "Apichi" 
(really '^Apiches "), mentioned by Captain Bourke, occurs not in 
Espejo's narrative, as he supposes, but in Ofiate's letter of March 
2, 1599, published in the Documentos Ineditoa del Archivo de 
Indias, xvi, p. 808. 

The bare fact that the Apache and Navajo are composite 
peoples is unimportant, save in so far as it is possible to trace 
the mixture in their kinship to a very early date, and another 
perusal of my paper will, I think, remove any impression that I 
have been endeavoring to establish what is already well known 
to every one. The writings of O'Oonor, Castro, Kino, and Alegre 
are all comparatively recent ; hence shed no light on the early 
Navajo and Apache, to whom alone my little paper is devoted. 

If on future examination of his notes Captain Bourke suc- 
ceeds in gaining further information regarding the ancient hab- 
itat and condition of the Apache, I shall be very glad, but in 
view of the numerous errors into which my critic's memory has 
led him, I see no reason whatever for changing any of my i)re- 
viously published conclusions. F. W. Hodge. 



Digitized by 



Google 



296 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

Alexandra V. Potanine, who died in China in 1893, was a 
most indefatigable traveler, having accompanied her husband, 
Grigorii Potanine, in his journeys through Siberia, Mongolia, 
Tibet, and China for nearly twenty years. She was an active 
and efficient assistant of her husband in his work of exploration, 
particularly in meteorological observations, in keeping the jour- 
nal, and in having charge of the collections, for which latter 
work the Imperial Russian Geographical Society awarded her 
a gold medal. She also has done much independent work in 
studying and describing the life of the peoples among whom she 
lived, and her writings, published from time to time in Russian 
periodicals, form a valuable contribution to our knowledge of 
the life of the Orient. She died a victim of her zeal for the work 
of exploration. Having been taken sick with fever, she insisted 
on continuing the newly planned route and died on the way 
before reaching Pekin. Her remains were interred at Kiahta, 
on the Russian frontier. 

The Russian Geographical Society has honored her memory 
by publishing, in a separate volume, a collection of her works, 
with the addition of a biographical sketch and a portrait of the 
author. 

Mme. Potanine's writings consist principally of ethnological 
sketches of the native inhabitants of northeastern Siberia and 
central Asia, and her descriptions of the customs, religion, and 
mode of life of these peoples are remarkable in their clearness 
and impartiality. Her powers of observation were very keen, 
her sympathies broad, and her mind cultivated and well in- 
formed. Her style is extremely simple and popular. Some of 
these essays were written expressly for publications intended for 
the instruction of young people in Russia, as, for instance, the 
story of "Dorgie, the Booriat Boy," and the article " Mongolia 
and the Mongols." 

Her description of Tibet and the government of the Dalai- 
Lama is valuable and interesting in its details. The study of the 
religion of Tibet is most exhaustive. She had personally visited 
two large Tibetan monasteries, and spent a whole winter in that 
of Gumbum, in northern Tibet. Julie Mindeleff. 



A SECTION of anthropology has been organized in connection 
with the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia. Dr 
Harrison Allen is chairman. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895J NOTES AND NEWS 297 

The Allentiac Language of Argentina. — Mr J. F. Medina, 
the well-known Chilian archaeologist, lias discovered and repub- 
lished the only copy known to exist of the Jesuit Father Luis 
de Valdivia's ** Doctrina Arte Voc," etc., of the Allentiac lan- 
guage, now extinct, but formerly spoken by the Guarpe Indians 
of Cuyu. The famous missionary published his book in Lima 
in 1607, and it is a most precious little volume in every sense. 

The Guarpes seem to have been cave-dwellers. Their word 
for " water " is caha, a possible representative of the well known 
root word co\ so general in South America. The personal pro- 
nouns are : cm, I ; ca^ thou ; ep, he, she, it ; cucha^ we ; cacha, 
you ; epcha, they. <ni, I, makes cuch, my, and in this state is 
used as the possessive prefix ; e. g., each p/a, my father, and so 
on of the rest; ep goes into epech for phonetic reasons. 

The verbs require an auxiliary, and, with it« personal ending, 
it forms the flectional suffix ; e. g., quilletc, love (as verb); stem, 
quilletc-a; quillelc a-nen^ I love. The other personal suffixes are : 
(2) -npen; (3) -nn; (pi. 1) -cnen; (2) -mnecpen; (8) -vina. The 
adjective precedes the substantive. 

Interrogative and negative conjugations differ slightly in their 
affixes from the others, and the same thing happens when the 
accusative of the personal pronoun is affixed. The principal of 
these are: Que, queunmite, me; xque, quex, xqueanmite, us; en, 
caye, thee; xca, cax.xcaunmi, ye; pu, him ; pux, xpu, them. 

The auxiliary or substantive verbs are several, and their roots 
are he, a or ha, ca, ma^ Ita. 

Lpu is the prefix of past time. 

The vocabulary is like nothing else we know in this country ; 
but we are following traces of the grammatical i)articles. The 
pnmouns seem very like something in the Chaco-Guaycuru' 
grouj), and the postposition Ta is too general to be passed over 
as a chance analogy. 

It is to be regretted that Mr Medina has printed only 200 
copies of his beautiful edition. He is to be heard of at Seville. 

The undersigned has almost ready for the press an essay on 
this most interesting language, with a translation of the cate- 
chism, etc.. and an inversion of the vocabulary into Allentiac- 
Spanish. 

Samuel A. Lafone Quevedo. 

PiLciAo, Argentina. 



Digitized by 



Google 



298 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



[Vol. VIII 



A QUARTERLY BIBLIOGRAPHY OF ANTHROPOLOOIC 
LITERATURE 

COMPILED BY ROBERT FLETCHER, M. D. 



Anoutchine (D. N.) L'amulette 
crilnienne et la trepanation des 
cnXnes, dans les temps anciens en 
Russie. [Reprint] Moscow, 1895, 
18 p., 3 pi. 4°. 

Belloni (Cesare). L'indice cranio- 
grafo. llleprintfrom: BoU.sc-ient., 
Pavia, 1804, xvi.] Pavia, 1895, 
tip. Slice. Bizzoni, 7 p., 1 pi. 8°. 

Berger (P.) M($moire sur une in- 
scription phenicienne de Nar- 
naka, dans Tile de Chypre. Re- 
print from: [Rev. d'assyriol, etc., 
Par, 18<M, iii, 09-88.] I^aris, 
1895, Marcean, 22 p. roy. 8°. 

Boas (Franz). Chinook texts. 
Washington, 1894 [1895], Gov't 
Printing Office, 278 p., 2 pi. 8°. 

Buckley (Edmund). Phallicisra 
in Japan. Chicago, 1895, Univ. 
Press, 34 p., 1 pi. 8°. 

Clodd (Edward). The story of 
"primitive" man. New York, 
1895, D. Appleton & Co. 1(5°. 

Corre (Armand) et Paul Abry. 
Documents de criniinologie retro- 
spective (Bretagne, xvii" et xviii^ 
siL'cles). Lyon, Paris, IS95, Storck, 
Masson, vii, 581 p. 8°. 

De Letamendi (J.) EI Iiombre en 
accion. Ks])ozo de una teorfa 
general del trabajo, en su triple 
aspecto, vit{d,econ6mico v liberal. 
Madrid, 1895, N. Moya, 71 p. 12°. 

Deniker (J.) Sur les ossements 
humains recueillis i)ar M. Diguet 
dans la Biisse-Californie. [Reprint 
from : Bull, du Mus. d'hist. nat. , 
1895.] 1895, Paris, Imp. nat., 
3 p. 8°. 

Dyer (II.) The evolution of in- 
dustry. New York, 1895, Mac- 
millan & Co., 303 p. 12°. 



Elworthy (F. T.) The evil eye: 
an account of this ancient and 
widespread superstition. New 
York, 1895, Scribner's Sons, 470 p. 

8°. 

Escuder (J. M.) Locos y anom- 
alos. Madrid, 1895, 324 p., 1 1., 
1 pi. 12°. 

Ferri (Enrico). Uomicidio nell'an- 
tropologia criminale (omicida 
nato e omicida pazzo) con atlante 
antropologico-statistii'o. Torino, 
1895, frat. Bocca, 747, 339 p., 2 tab., 
6 pi. 8°. 

Fowke (Gerard). Archeologic in- 
vestigations in James and Poto- 
mac valleys. Washington, 1894, 
Gov't Printing Office, 80 p. 8°. 

Oeorgeokis (G.) et L6on Pinean. 
Le Folk-lore des I^esbos. Paris 
[1894], Maisonneuve, xx, 375 p. 
10°. 

Oiannelli (Luigi). Topografia 
cranio-Rolandica nei plagiocefali. 
Siena, 1894, 18 p. 8°. 

de la Orasserie (R.) De Torigine 
et de revolution premiere des ra- 
cines des langues. Paris, 1895, 
Maisonneuve, 2 p. 1., 174 p. 8°. 

Kelly (Vxlmond). Evolution and 
effort, and their relation to re- 
ligion and politics. New York, 
1895, Appleton, 8 -f 297 p. 12°. 

Knowles ( VV. J.) Irish flint saws. 
[ ReprinJ from : J. Proc. Roy. Soc. 
Antiq. Ireland, 1894.] [Dublin, 
1894,] pp. 341-348. 8°. 

Prehistoric pottery from the 

siindhills and it« antiquity. [Re- 
print from : J. Proc. Roy. Soo. 
Antiq. Ireland, 1894.] [Dublin, 
1894,] pp. 243-255. 8°. 

Sepulchral pottery, [n. p., 

n. d.,]8p., 4pL 8°. 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] 



ANTHROPOLOGIC LITERATURE 



299 



Lagnean (Gustave). Influence du 
milieu sur la race ; modifications 
m^sologiques des caracteres eth- 
niques de notre i)opulation. 
[Fram: Compt. rend. Acad. d. sc. 
morales etpolit.] Orleans; Paris, 
1895, Picard et fils, 50 p. 8°. 

LombroBO (Cesare). Die Anar- 
chisten. Eine kriminalpsycho- 
logifiche und sociologische Studie. 
Nach der zweiten Auflage des 
Originals deutsch herausgegeben 
von Dr. Hans Kurella. Hamburg, 
1895, viii, J 39 p., 1 map. 8°. 

MacDonald (Arthur). Abnormal 
woman, a sociologicand scientific 
study of young women, including 
letters of American and European 
gjrls in answer to personal adver- 
tisements, with a bibliographv. 
Washington, 1895, x, 189 p. 12°. 

Martin (A.) Exploration arch6- 
ologiquedansleMorbihan. [Rev. 
arch^ol.] Angers, Paris, 1895, 
Burdin et Cie. , Leroux, 30 p. 8°. 

Martin (Rudolph). Kritische Be- 
denken gegen den Pithecanthro- 
pus erectus Dubois. [RepriiUfrom : 
Globus, Brnschwg., 1895, Ixvii.] 
Braunschweig, 1895, 5 p. 4°. 

Mooney (James). Siouan tribes 
of the East. Washington, 1894 
[1895], Gov't Printing Office, 
101 p., 1 map. 8°. 

Petitot (femile). La station n<5o- 
lithique de Mareuil-les-Meaux 
(iSeine-et-Marne). Meaux, 1895, 
Mai^uerite-Dupre, 30 p., 5 pi. 8°. 

Reygasse (J.-B.) L'humanit^: son 
Evolution depuis la creation jusqu* 
k la fin des temps. Orleans, 
Paris, 1895, Morand, I^thielleux, 
361 p. 16°. 

RockhlU (W.) Notes on the eth- 
nology of Thibet. {Prom : Rep. 
U. S. Nat. Mus., 1893.1 Wash- 
ington, 1895, Gov't Printmg Office, 
83p.,53pL 8°. 

Valentin! (P. -J.- J.) Analysis of 
the pictorial text inscribed on 
two Palenque tablets. Worcester, 
1895, C. Hamilton, 24 p., 2 pi. 8°. 



"Worms (R(^ne). La sociologie et 
le droit. [Reprlni from : Rev. in- 
ternat. de sociol., 1895, iii.] 
Beaugency, Paris, 1805, J.aff'ray, 
Giard et Bri^re, 22 p. 8°. 



Allbutt(8. C.) Nervous diseases 
and modern life. Contemp. Rev., 
Lond., 1895, 210-231. -Allen (J. H.) 
The alleged sympathv of religions. 
New World, Bost., 1895, iv, 310-321. 
— An dree (R. ) Die Sudgranze des 
siichsischeu Ha uses im Braun- 
schweigischen. Ztschr. f. Ethnol., 
Berl., 1895, xxvii, 25-36, 1 pi.— 
Angiolella (G. ) Sullo stato attuale 
dell'antropologia criminale a propo- 
sito di un recente lavoro del Kirn. 
Riv. sper. di freniat., Reggio-Emilia, 
1895, xxi, 173-182.— Antonini (G.) 
Due gozzuti cretinosi criniinali. 
Arch.di psichiat, etc., Torino, 1895, 
xvi, 554-559.— Ardu Onnis (E.) 
Di un indice barot^ubico como carat- 
tere sessuale. Atti. d. Soc. rom. di 
antrop., Roma, 1894, i, 273-291. 
— Baer (A.) Tatouage des crimi- 
nels. [Transl.] Arch, d'anthrop. 
crim., Lyon & Par., 1895, x, 153-174, 
4 pi.— Bailey (L. H.) The plant 
individual in the lijiht of evolution ; 
the philosophy of bud variation, 
and its bearing upon Weissmann- 
ism. Science, N. Y. & Lancaster, 
Pa., 1895, n. s., i, 281-292.— Balfour 
(H.) On the bow as a musical in- 
strument. Rep. Brit. Ass. Adv. 
Sc, Lond., 1894, 778.— Barfurth 
(D.) Ein Zeugnis fiir eine (leburt 
von Siebenlingen l)eim Menschen. 
Auat. Anz., Jena., 1894, x, ASO- 
:i32. — Baring- Oould (S.) Eng- 
lish folk song. Proc. Roy. Insl. 
Gr. Brit. 1894, Lontl., 1895, xiv, 
28(5-288.— Barr (M. W.) Consan- 
guinity of parents in relation to 
idiocy. Phila. Polyclin., 1895, iv, 
124.— BarteU ( M. ) Ein Menschen- 
schwanz. Verhandl. d. Berl. He- 
sellsch. f. Anthrop., Berl., 1894, 

(453-455). Siebenlinge. Ihid , 

(452).— Barth61emy (P.) Ste. Marie 
de Madaga.scar et ses matelots nial- 
gaches. Arch, de ni^'d. nav.. Par., 
1S95, Ixiii, 110-119.— Batuyeflf (N.- 
A.) [(leneral morphological pecu- 
liarities of the crown of human 



Digitized by 



Google 



300 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



teeth as compare<l with those of | 1895, n. s., i, 2.')3, 
other inanimalia and lower vert<»- 
brata; dependence of thene uecu- 
liarities ui)on the physiolojjicai des- 
tination of the ttH3th and their an 



Variations 



th ro|X)logirtil significance.] Trudi 
antrop. Obsh. ]>. Imp. Vovenno- 
Med. Akad. 189:5, S.-Peterb.', 1894, 
i, 2(>-101.— de Baye {le Baron). Note 
sur I'ltge de la pierre en Ukraine. 
Anthropologie, Par., 1895, vi, 1-17. 
— Bedaoe (J.j On complexional 
differences between natives of Ire- 
land, with indigenous and exotic 
surnames resjHictively. Rep. Brit. 
Ass. Adv. Sc, Ix)nd., 1894, 775.— 
Beick (W.) Das Reich der Man- 
niier. Verhandl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. 
f. Anthrop., 1894,(479-488).-Bergeii 
(Fanny D. ) Burial and holiday 
customs and beliefs of the Irish 
peasantry. J. Am. Folk-Lore, Bost. 

<& N. Y., 1895, xxviii, 19-25. 

Survivals of sun-worship. Pop. Sc. 
Month., N. Y., 1895, xlvii, 249-256. 
— BerghauB. (irc)sse und Starke 
desmodernen Menschen. (iesund- 
heit, Frankf. a. M., 1895, xx, 148.— 
Boas (F.) On Dr. Wilham Town- 
send Porter's investigation of the 
5 growth of the school children of St. 
>ouis. Science, N. Y. & I^ncaster, 

Pa., 1895, n. s., i, 225-230. 

The growth of first-born children. 
/Wf/., 402-404. Human fac- 
ulty as determined by race. Proc. 
Am. Ass. Adv. Sc, Salem, 1895, xliii, 

301-327. The Indian tribes 

of the l-,<jwer Fraser River. Rep. 
Brit. Ass. Adv. Sc, Lond., 18<H, 
454-4():i, 1 tab.— Bodio (L.) R«Hai 
de statiHtiqueanthroj>om^*tri(ine du 
Dr. Rodolphe Livi, capitaine mode- 
cin. [Rt*v,J Arch. Ual. de biol., 
Turin, 1895, xxiii, 1 59- IW.— Bolton 
(H. (/.) The game of g(K)se. .1. 
Am. Folk-Lore, Bost. cV: N. Y., 
1895, viii, 145-150. — Brabrook 
(E. \V.) et a!. Ethnograpliical sur- 
vey of the Unite<l Kingdom. Rep. 
Brit. Ass. Adv. Sc, Lcmd., 1894, 
419-42<).-Brinton ( I ). G.) On cer- 
tain morphologic traits of .\merican 
languages. Proc. Am. Ass. Adv. 
Sc. 1894, Salem, 1895, xliii, 330. 
The significance of varia- 
tions in the human skeleton. 
Science, N. Y. & I^mcaster, Pa., 



in the human skeleton and their 
causes. [Abstr.] Proc Am. Ass. 
Adv. Sc, Salem, 1895, xliii, 32t).— 
Buchanan (W. J.) Cbuiparative 
heights and weights of prisoners in 
Bengal jails. Indian M. (Jaz., Cal- 
cutta, 1895, XXX, 144, 1 ch.— Btich- 
ner (L.) Tertiary man. Med. Mag., 
Lond., 1895, iv, 551-5(56.— Balleid 
(A.) The lake village at Glaston- 
burv. Rep. Brit. Ass. Adv. Sc, 
Lon'd., 1894, 431-434.-Bundey (W. 
H. ) The punishment of criminals. 
Rep. Australas. Ass. Adv. Sc, 1893, 
Sydney, 1894, v, 539-556. - Bnateed 
(J. B.) The Korean doctor and his 
methods. Korean Reposit., Seoul, 
1895, ii, No. 5.-CampbelI (J. A.) 
Note on " heavy brains." Lancet, 
Ix>nd., 1895, i, I511.-Capu8 (G.) 
Tatouage en Bosnie-IIerc^govine. 
Bull. Soc d'anthrop. de Par., 1894, 
4. 8., v, 625-(v?3. — Carrara (M.) 
Sullo svilup^M) del terzo dente mo- 
lare nei crinnnali. Arch. di psichiat., 
etc, Torino, 1895, xvi, 15-28. — 
Cermak (K. . IJelwr die Fundstelle 
der geschweiften Becher in Caslau 
(Bohmen) und das Alter der dor- 
tigen jiingeren Lixsschichten. Ver- 
handl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. An- 
throp., 1894, 4mj-470.— Chalke(E. 
1j. ) A curious ciuse of human sacri- 
fice, its medico-legal bearings as to 
identification and mummification. 
Indian M. Rec, ('alcutta, 1895, viii, 
47 49.— Chamberlain (A. F.) In- 
corporation in the Kootenay lan- 
guage. Proc Am. Ass. Adv. Si?, 

1894, Salem, 1895, xliii, 340 IWS — 
Clodd (K.) Prt»sidential acidress. 
[Folk-lore.] Folk-Lore, I^nd., 

1895, vi, 54-81.— da Costa Dorea 
(J. R. ) A idade e o sexo em materia 
criminal. Gaz. med. da Bahia, 
1S93-4, 4. s., iv, 385; 433.— Cun- 
ningham (I). J. ) Dr. Dubois' so- 
cjdled missing link. [Abstr.] Na- 
ture, Lond., 1894-5, li, 428.— Da- 
guillon. Contribution il I'^tude du 
tatouage chez les alienes. Arch. 
d'anthr(»p. crim., Lvon& Par., 1895, 
X, 175-199, 6 pi.— De Bla8io(A.) 
Ulteriori ricen»he intorno al ta- 
tuaggio dei camorristi na{)oletani. 
Arch, di psichiat., etc, Torino, 1894, 
XV, 510-5-29. — Dedichen (H.) De- 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] 



ANTHROrOLOGIC LITERATURR 



301 



generations-antropologiens betyd- 
ning for den praktiserende Ivej^e. 
Tidskr. f. d. norske Laegefor., 
Christiania & Kjobenh., 1893, xiii, 
318-328.— Deniker. Trois micro- 
c^phales vivants. Bull. Soc. d'an- 
tlirop. de Par., 1894, 4. s.. v, 587- 
502.-Dick8on (Emily W.) The 
need for women as poor law guard- 
ians. Dublin J. M. Sc, 1895, xcix, 
309-314.— DieseldorflfCE. P.) Ein 
Thongefiiss mit Darstellung einer 
vampyrkopfigen Gottheit. Ver- 
handl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. An- 
throp., 1894, (576).-Diguet (L.) Note 
8ur la pictographie de la Basse-Cali- 
fornie. Anthropologie, Par., 1895, 
vi, 160-1 75.— Dor8ey(G. A.) Crania 
from the Necroi>oli8 of A neon, Peru. 
Proc. Am. Ass. Adv.Sc 1894, Salem, 
1895, xliii, 358-361.— Dorsey (J. 
O.) Kwapa folk-lore. J. Am. 
Folk-Lore, Boat. & N. Y„ 1895, 
viii, im— Duckworth (W. L. H.) 
Notes on skulls from Queensland 
and South Australia. J. An- 
throp. Inst., Lond., 1894-5, xxiv, 
213-218.— Ella (S.) The origin of 
the Polynesian races. Rep. Aus- 
tralas. Ass. Adv. Sc. 1893, Sydney, 
1894, V, 133-143.— Ernst t A.) Drei 
Nephrit-Beile aus Venezuela. Ver- 
handl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. An- 
throp., Berl., 1895, (36-.38).— Ether- 
idge (R.), jr. A highly ornate 
** sword " from the Coburg Penin- 
sula, North Australia. J. Anthrop. 
Inst., Lond., 1894-5, xxiv, 427-430, 
1 pi.— Evans (A.J.) The Rtjllright 
stones and their folk-lore. Pmk- 
Lore, Lond., 1895, vi, (>-53, 4 pi. 
— Falkenhorst (C.) Riitselhafte 
Veranderungen des menschlichen 
Haares. Gartenlaube, Leipz., 1895, 
114.— F6r6 (C.) Les gestes m(^ta- 
phoriqueschez lesanimaux. Coinpt. 
rend. Soc. de biol., Par., 1895, 10. s., 
ii, 270. — F6r6 et Busquet. Sur 
Taction physiologique d'un poison 
des fleches du Soudan frangais. 
Ibid., 232-2a=>.— Ferrero (G.) La 
crainte de la mort. Rev. scient., 
Par., 1895, 4. s., iii, 361-367.— 
Fewkes (J. W.) A comparison of 
Sia and Tusayan snake ceremonials. 
Am. Anthrop., Wash., 1895, viii, 

118-141. The destruction 

of the Tusayan monsters. J. 

39 



Am. Folk-Lore, Bost. & N. Y., 
1895, viii, 132-137.— Fillmore (J. 
C.) What do Indians mean to 
do when they sing, and how far 
do they succeed? Ibid., 138-142. 
— Fison (L.) The classificatory 
system or relationship. J. An- 
throp. Inst., Lond., 1894-5, xxiv, 
360-371.— Flau. ^influence des 
odeurs sur la voix. Gaz. de gyn4c. , 
Par., 1895, x, 113-118.— Fletcher 
(M. H.) What a dentist saw in 
examining R\e hundred crania. 
Dental Rev., Chicago, 1895, ix, 355- 
363.— Fornasari di Vexce (E.) II 
matrimonio e le generazioni future. 
Arch, di psichiat., etc., Torino, 1895, 
xvi, 57-69.— Fritsch (G.) Venm- 
staltung der Genital-Organe im Ori- 
ent. Verhandl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. 
f. Anthrop., Beri., 1894, (455-458).— 
Oarson (J. G.) Anthropometric 
laboratory. Rep. Brit. Ass. Adv. 

Sc, I^jnd., 1894, 444-453. 

Early British races. Notices Proc. 
Roy. Inst. Gr. Brit., Lond., 1894-5, 
xiv, 248-258. -Oiglioli (E. H.) Di 
alcuni strumenti di pietra e di osso 
tuttora adoperati in Italia nella 
lavorazione delle pelli e del cuoio. 
Arch, per Tantrop., Firenze, 1894, 
xxiv, 245-250. — Oowland {\V.) 
Notes on the dolmens and other 
antiquities of Korea. J. Anthrop. 
Inst, Lond., 1894-5, xxiv, 316-^30, 
1 pl.~ Graves (A. P.) Old Irish 
song. Proc. Roy. Inst. Gr. Brit. 
1894, Ix)nd., 1895; xiv, 169-177.— 
Oreenlees ( T. D. ) Insanit j^ among 
the natives of South Africa. J. 
Ment. Sc, Lond., 1895, xli, 71-78.— 
Oreenley (T. B. ) How long under 
certain conditions could the average 
longevity of man be maintained? 
Tr. Kentucky M. Soc, Louisville, 
1894, n. s., iii, 30-39.— Oregor (W.) 
Notes on Beltane cakes. Folk-Lore, 
Umd., 18a5, vi, 2-5.— Haliburton 
(R. G.) Survival of dwarf races in 
theNewWorid. [Abstr.] Proc Am. 
Ass. Adv. Sc, Salem, 1895, xliii, 
337-344.— Hammond iG. M.) On 
tbe proper method of ascertaining 
the chest expansion by measure- 
ment. Med. Rec, N. Y., 1895,xlvii, 
380.— Harley(L. R.) Race mixture 
and national character. Pop. Sc 
Month., N. Y., 1895, xlvii,86 ^t- 



Digitized by 



Google 



302 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



Helm (O. ) Chemische Untereuch- 
iiiiK westprtnissLscher vonjeschichtr 
Hclier Bronze II iiiid Kupferlegi- 
ruiigen, in8l)esoii(iere des Antiinon- 
gelialtes dersi^ltHJii. Zt«chr. f. 
Ethiiol., Berl., 1895, xxvii, 1 ; 37.— 
Henry (W. O.) Relations of dis- 
ease, crime and vice. J. Am. M. 
Ass., Chicago, 1895, xxiv, 302-305. 
— Herv6 (G.) I^s brachyc^phales 
neolithiques. Rev. mens, he I'ficole 
d'anthrop. de Par., 1894, iv, 393; 

1895, V, 1 8. Les populations 

lacustres. Ibid., 1895, v, 137-154. — 
Hewitt I J. N. B.) The Iroquoian 
concept of the soul. J. Am. Folk- 
Lore, Bost. & N.Y., 1895, viii, 107- 
UH.-Hodge (F.W.) The first discov- 
ered city of Cibola. Am. Anthrop., 
Wash., 1895, viii, 142-152.— Ho ve- 
lacqae (A.) et O. Herv6. Notes 
sur Tethnologie du Mor\^an. Rev. 
mens, de I'Ecole d' anthrop. de Par., 
1895, V, 117-122.— Hutchinson (J.) 
Two cases of dwarfdom with ar- 
rested development of skin and 
apj>endages. Arch. Surg., Lond., 
1895, vi, 140-143.— Jackson (F. G.) 
and A. Montefiore. Notes on the 
Samoyads of the Great Tundra. J. 
Anthrop. Inst., Lond., 1894-5, xxiv, 
338-410, 3 pi.— Joest. Der Haar- 
mensch Ram-a-Samy. Verhandl. 
d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., Berl., 

1894, (43:^-435). —Johnston (C.) 
Race et caste dans I'lnde. Anthro- 
pologie. Par., 1895, vi, 17r>-181.— 
Jones (G. H.) The relations be- 
tween lK)dy and mind as expressed 
in early fanguages, cu8t<jms and 
myths. Rep. Brit. Ass. Adv. Sc, 
Lond., 1894, 779.— Joshi (P. B.) 
On the rite of human sacrifice in 
ancient, mediaeval and modem 
India and other countries. J. An- 
throp. Soc. Bombay, 1893-t, iii, 275- 
300.— Kaarsberg (II.) Same, Nor- 
(lens sidste Nomade. [The Samoy- 
ads, the last nomades of the north.] 
Ugeskr. f. La?ger, Kjobenh., 1895, 
5. R., ii, 217; 241; 269.— Kaden 
(W.) Die Gebiirdensprache der 
Siiditaliener. (iartenlaube, I^ipz., 

1895, 272-275. —ten Kate (H.) 
Beitriige zur Ethnographie der 
Timorgnippe. Internat. Arch. f. 
Ethnog., Leiden, 1894, vii, 242-249, 
5 pi. ; 1895, viii, l-Hi, 4pl.— Keller 



(R.) Dr. Paul Sarasin und Dr. Fritz 
Sarasin, die Wedda's von Ceylon 
uu<l die sie umgel>enden Vofker- 
schaften, ein Versuch, die in der 
Phylogenie des Menschen nihen- 
den iSitsel der Losung naher zu 
bringen. Biol. Centralbl., I^eipz., 
1895, XV, 193 ; 257. — Kirchhoff 
(A.) Vom Ursprung des Kusses. 
Deutsche Rev., Stuttg., 1895, xx, 
216-219.— Koganei. Beitriige zur 
physischen Anthropologic der Aino. 
Mitth. a. d. med. Fac. d. k.-jap. 
Univ., Tokio, 1893-4, ii, 1; 251, 
11 pL, 9 tab. ^tw. Reprint.— KoU- 
mann (J.) Pygmies in Europe. 
Rep. Brit. Ass. Adv. Sc., Lond., 
1894, 781.-Kriz (M.) Ueber die 
Gleicrhzeitigkeit des Menschen mit 
dom Mammuthe in Mahren. Cor.- 
Bl. d. deutsch. Gesellsch. f. An- 
throp., etc., Miinchen, 1894, xxv, 
139-144. — Laborde (J. V.) I^ 
microcephalic vraie et la descend- 
ance de I'homme; etude de trois 
freres mici*oc^phales et d'un jeune 
chimpanz6 femelle. Rev. sclent., 
Par., 1895, 4. s., iii, 577-585.— Land- 
liche Osterbriiuche in deutschen 
Landen. Gartenlaube, Leipz., 1895, 
227, 2pl.— Lameere(A.) L'origine 
de la vie. Rev. univ., Brux., 1894-5, 
V, 189-199. -Lang (A.) Ghost- 
stories and beast-stories. Nine- 
teenth Century, Lond., 1895, 258- 
270.— I*e Oendre (P.) Des divers 
modes de rh^redit^, ; tnmsmissi- 
bilit^ des caract^res acquis counne 
des caract^Tes sp^cifiques ; influence 
du sexe sur I'hercdit^ et de There- 
dite sur le sexe. Rev. prat, d'ol^st. 
et de piediat., Par., 1895, viii, 119- 
128.-Leith (K. T.) The dog in 
myth and custom. J. Anthrop. Soc. 
Bombay, 1893-4, iii, 302-30(5.— Lio- 
tard. Les races de rOgoou^.. An- 
thropologic, Par., 1895, vi, 53-f)4. — 
l*ioy(P.) Grindovinelli nelPfolk 
lore. N. Antologia, Roma, 1895, 
3. s., Ivi, 222-237.— Livi (R.) Saggio 
di antropometria militare. Atti di 
Soc, rom. di antrop., Roma., 1894, 
i, 2*.)2-307.— Lobisch. Die Erniihr- 
ungsfrage in ihrerantropologischen 
und ethnologischen Bedeutung. 
Cor.-Bl. d. deutsch. Gesellsch. f. 
Anthrop., etc., Munchen, 1894, xxv, 
118-121.— Lombroso (C.) II tipo 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] 



ANTHROPOLOGIC LITERATURE 



303 



criminale nei rei Helvatrgi. A rch. di 
pfiichiat., etc., Torino, 1895, xvi, 
571, 1 pi.— Longhi (8.) Di una 
teorica ix)8itivi8ta sulla frode crimi- 
nale. Hcuola jwsitiva, Ilonia, 1894, 
iv, 1011-1060.— Lopes (A. L.) Es- 
tudos de antroiH)logia criminal. 
Rev. de educ. e ensino, Lisb., 1894, 
ix, 273; 321 ; 388; 453.— von Lus- 
chan (F.) Zur Ethnographie der 
Matty-Insel. Internat. • Arch. f. 
Ethnog., Leiden, 1895, viii, 41-5(», 
3 pi.— Luys (J . ) La foule criminelle. 
Rev. de m^d. l^g.. Par., 1895, ii, 70- 
76. — M. Pithecanth ropus erectus. 
Science, N. Y. & I^ancaster, Pa., 
1895, n. 8., i, 2:^9-241.— M.(M.) Le 
\ef!gi della grafia Gazz. d'osp., 
Milano, 1895, xvi, 113-116.— Mc- 
Cormick (J. H.) IMmitive tre- 
phining in Peru. J. Pract. Med., 
N. Y., 1895, X, 437-442.— Macleod 
(K.) Remarks on the physical re- 
quirements of the public service. 
Brit. M. J., Lend., 1895, i, 1021- 
1025.— Magarey (A. T.) Smoke 
signals of Australian aborigines. 
Rep. Australas. Ass. Adv. Sc. 1893, 
Sydnev, 1894, v, 498-513.— Ma- 
kowsky (A.) Spuren des Menschen 
aus der Mammuthzeit in Briinn. 
Verhandl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. An- 
throp., 1 894,(425-427).-Manouvrier 
( L.) IjC cerveau d'un Fu^gien. Bull. 
Soc. d'anthrop. de Par., 1894, 4. s., 
V, 595-614. Also travsL [Abstr.] : 
Rep. Brit. Ass. Adv. Sc, Ix>nd., 

1894, 787.— Mantegazza ( P. ) Fra 
i Micmac. Arch. i>er I'antrop., 
Firenze, 1894, xxiv, 313-325.— von 
MarchesetU (C. ) UelKjr die Her- 
kunfb der gerippten Bronzecisten. 
Cor.-Bl. d. deutsch. Gesellsch. f. 
Amthroj)., etc., Mimchen, xxv, 103- 
105. — Marchoux. Porto Novo et 
ses habitants. Rev. sclent.. Par., 

1895, 4. s., iii, 593-598.— Markham 
(C. R.) A list of the tribes in the 
valley of the Amazon, including 
those on the banks of the main 
stream and of all its tributaries. 
J. Anthrop. Inst., Loud., 1894-5, 
xxiv, 2:^6-284.— Martinez Baca (F.) 
e M. Vergara. I criminali del Mes- 
sico studiati antro]K)logicamente. 
[Abstr.] Arch, di psi(;hiat., etc, 
Torino, 1895, xvi, 29-5(i, 1 pi.— 
Maska. Vorliiufiger Bericht iiber 



den Fund diluvialer Mensc'hen- 
skelette in Predmost. Cor.-Bl. d. 
deutsch. (lesellsch. f. Anthrop., etc, 
Miinchen, 1894, xxv, 137.— Maaon 
(O. T. ) Similarities in culture. Am. 
Anthrop., Wash., 1895, viii, 101-117. 
—Mathews ( R. H.) The Bora, or 
initiation ceremonies of the Ka- 
milaroi tril)e. J. Anthrop. Inst., 
I^nd., 1894-5, xxiv, 411-427, 1 
pi.— Meyer iF.) og Heiberg (P.) 
Sex bund rede og halvfemsindstyve 
Hjernevejninger fra St. Hans Hos- 

Eital. [Six hundred and ninety 
rains weighed at St. Hans Hos- 
pital.] Bibliot. f. Licger, Kobenh., 
1895, 7. R., vi, 125-145.— Middle- 
mass (J.) A heavy brain [651 oz., 
in a lunatic]. Lancet, Lond. , 1895, 
i, 1432-1434.— Mies. Uelwr das 
Gehirngewicht des heranwachsen- 
den Menschen. Cor.-Bl. d. deutsch. 
Gesellscth. f. Anthrop., etc., Miin- 
chen, 1894, xxv, 157-161.— Min- 
deleff (C.) Cliff ruins of Canyon 
deChelly, Arizona. Am. Anthrop., 
Wash., 1895, viii, 153-174.— Mitra 
(S. C.) On the ceremonies per- 
formed by the Kabirpanthi Ma- 
hants of the Saran distnct, on their 
initiation as Ch61as and on their 
succession to the Mahantship. J. 
Anthrop. Soc. Bombay, 1893-4, iii, 
266-269. On some super- 
stitions regarding drowning and 
drowned persons. Ibid.^ 253-26(>. 

Charms or amulets for some 

diseases of the eye. J hid. , 338 345. 

A few ancient beliefs al)out 

the eclipse and a few supei*stitioi\s 
based on those beliefs, ifnd. , 302- 
30(). — Moggi iii.) Cenni sopra tre 
cAsi di atavismo. Gazz. d'osp., 
Milano, 1895, xvi, 10.— Monjar^ 
(J.-E.) Comi)osition moyenne du 
sanjr chez les habitants de Saint- 
Tx)uis Potosi (Mexique). Atti d. xi 
Cong. med. internaz., Roma, 1894, 
iii, med. int., 18-30.— Morgan (E. 
L.) Circumcision: short review of 
the origin and history of this cus- 
tom. Virginia M. Month., Rich- 
mond, 1895-6, xxii, 63-74. Aho, 
Reprint. — Moschen (L.) Crani 
romani della prima cpoca cristiana. 
Atti d. Soc. rom. di antrop., Roma, 
18^)4, i, 253-263. -Munro (R.) On 
ancient bone skates. Rep. Brit. 



Digitized by 



Google 



304 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



[Vol. VIII 



Ass. Adv. Sc, Loml., 1894, 784.— 
Nikolski ( D.-P. ) [ Review of Rus- 
sian works on anthrooolo^y for the 
last three years.] Trudi antrop. 
Obsh. p. Imp. Voyenno-Med. Akad. 
181)3, S.-PeU»rb., 1894, i, 105-149.— 
Nordan (M.) Society's protection 
against the degenerates. Forum, 
N. Y., 1895, 532-543. - Nuttall 
(Zelia.) A note on ancient Mexi- 
can folk-lore. J. Am. Folk-Lore, 
Bost. & N. Y., 1895, viii, 118-129.— 
Ottoleughi (S.) Sulla sutura lac- 
rimo-etmoidale nei delinquenti. 
Gior. d. r. Accad. di med. di 
Torino, 1894, Iviii, 155. — Otto- 
leughi (S.) e U. Rossi. Un 
nuovo tatua^io etnico. Atti d. r. 
Accad. d. fisiocrit. in Siena, 1894, 
4. 8., vi, 669-681. Also, Arch, di 
psichiat., etc., Torino, 1895, xvi, 
1-14.— Paulhau. L'^criture et le 
caractere, A propos d'un livre recent. 
Rev. scient.. Par., 1895, 4. s., iii, 
232-237.— Peli (G.) L'indice cere- 
brale nei sani di mente e negli 
alienati : osservazioni in cinque- 
cento settanta individui d'amlx) i 
sessi. A rch. per Tantrop. , Firenze, 

1894, xxiv, 2:i5-240, 5 tab., 1 ch.— 
Peuta (P. ) Di alcune piii impor- 
tanti anouialie e del loro signiticato 
reversivo nelle mani e nei piedi dei 
delinquenti. Attid. r. Accad. med.- 
chir. di Napoli, 1894, xlviii, 285- 
304, 2 pi. -Peterson (P.) [The 
Grihya Sutra, or household prayer 
book of Apastamba, 5(X) A.I).] J. 
Anthrop. Soc. Bombay, 1893-4, iii, 
318 337.— Piette (E.) La sUition 
de Bi-assennK)uy et \es statuettes 
humaines de la jH^ri<Mle glyptique. 
Anthropolugie, Par., 1895, vi, 
129-151, 7 pi.— Pithecanthropus 
e rectus, eine menscheniihnliche 
Ueljergangsfonnaus Java. Von E. 
Dubois. [Discussion.] Verhandl. 
d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., Berl., 

1895, (78-88).— Pitzorno (M.) Note 
antrojKjlogiche sui Sardi. Gazz. 
d. osp., Milano, 1895, xvi, 5()9.— 
Pitzorno (P. A.) II foro lacero- 
postc*riore e le asimetrie del cranio 
umano. Atti d. Soc. rom. di an- 
trop., Roma, 189-1, i, 2(>l-272.— 
Powell (J.W.) The interpretation 
of folk-lore. J. Am. Folk-Lore, 
Bost. & N. Y., 1895, viii, 97-105.— 



Questionnaire de folklore. Rev. 
univ., Brux., 181W-5, v, 42.— Ques- 
tionnaire sur r heredity psycho- 
physiologique. Ibid., 40-42. — Rade- 
macher. Zwei priiliistorische Be- 
grilbniss-Stiitten in der Eifel und 
an der Lii)j)e. Verhandl. d. Berl. 
(lesellsch. f. Anthrop., Berl., 1895, 
(26-31).— Ranke (J.) Uel)er die 
aufrechte Kori)erhaltung der men- 
schenahulichen Affen und uber die 
Abhiingigkeit der aufrechten Kor- 
perhaltung des Menschen vom Ge- 
liirn. Cor.-Bl. d. deut«cli. Gesellsch. 
f. Anthrop., etc., Miinchen, 1894, 
XXV, 154-157. —von Rath (O.) 
Ein Fall von scheinbar bewiesener 
Telegonie. Biol. Centralbl., Leipz., 
1895, XV, 333-344. Also, transl.. 
Rev. scient.. Par., 1895, 4 s., iii, 
714-718. —Recollections of M. 
Boucher de Perthes. -Blackwood's 
Mag., Lond., 1895, clvii, 939-948.— 
Richer (P.) La station sur les 
handles. Rev. scient. Par., 1895, 
4. 8., iii, 52(5-530.— Robinson (L.) 
On the anthropological significance 
of ticklishness. Rep. Brit. Ass. Adv. 
Sc, Lond., 1894, 778.— Rosenbaum 
(A. B.) Malthuzianizm. Ejened. 
jour. Prakt. Med., St. Petersb., 1894, 
1, 453; 485; 501 ; 5()5; 583. -Ryder 
(J. A.) A dynamic hypothesis of 
inheritance. Science, N. Y. & lAn- 
caster, Pa., 1895, n. s., i, 597 ; 617.— 
Sabatier (A.) L'immortalite du 
protoplasme. [Abstr.l Rev. scient., 
Par., 1895, 4. s., iii, 585-591.— 
Salmon (P.) Denombrement des 
cranes neolithiques de la (laule. 
liev. mens, de rK<'oled'anthrop. de 
Par., 1895, v, 155-181, 1 map.— 
Sanderson (IL S.) Notes (m ('oreai 
and its jwople. J. Anthrop. Inst., 
I^md., 1894 5, xxiv, 2*.)9-31(i.— 
Schellhas (P.) Die Moundbilders 
in den Vereinigten Staaten. Gar- 
tenlaube, Leipz., 1895, 80-84.— 
Schrader (F.) Conrs de geogra- 
phie anthropologique: I'Asie. Rev. 
mens, de rfi(U)le d'anthrop. de Par., 
1895, V, 105-1 l(i.— Schumann (U.) 
Skeletgrjiber mit romis<»hen Bt»iga- 
ben von Borkenhagen (Rommern). 
Verhandl. d. Berl. (n«ellsch. f. An- 
throj)., Berl., 18^)4, (595-(K)l ).-Seler 
(E. ) Fledermaus (lott der Maya- 
Stiimme. 76*V^,( 57 7-585). -Sergi (G.) 



Digitized by 



Google 



July 1895] 



ANTHROPOLOGIC LITERATURE 



305 



Ueber die europiiischen Pyjjiniien. 
Cor.-Bl. d. deutsch., Gesellsch. f. 
Anthrop., etc.,Munchen, IS^H, xxv, 

148-151. Studi di antro- 

pologia laziale. BuU. d. r. Accad. 
lued. di Roma, 1895, xxi, 28-85. 

Varietil umane della Ru8.sia 

e del Mediterraneo ; catalogo siste- 
matico. Atti d. Soc. rom. di an- 
trop., Roma, 1894, i, 231-252.— 
SoIiB Varela (L. A.) Algunas 
raedidas del craneo y de la cam 
tomadas en Chilenos. Actes Soc. 
Bcient. dii Chili, Santiago, 1894, iv, 
125; 137, 2 pi.— Spearman (E. R.) 
Women in French prisons. Nine- 
teenth Century, Ix)nd., 1895, 798- 
812.— Squire (A. J. B.) An atyp- 
ical albino. Lancet, Lond., 1895, 
i, 282.— Starr (F.) Archax)logy in 
Denmark. Pop. Sc. Month., N.Y., 
1895, xlviii, 12-25.— Stephenson 
(F. B. ) Congenital spots on Anna- 
mites ; a means of racial identifica- 
tion ; and remarks on linguistics in 
connection with migration of peo- 
ples. N. York M. J., 1895, Ixi, 2(>9. 
— Btuhlmann (F.) Ein Wahehe 
Skelet und die ethnologische Stel- 
lung der Lendii. Verhandl. d. Berl. 
med. Gresellsch. f. Anthrop., Berl., 
1894. (422-424). -Sully (J.) Studies 
of childhood; fear. Pop. Sc. 
Month., N. Y., 1895, xlvii, 1-11.— 
Szombathy. Bemerkungen iiber 
den gegenwiirtigen Stand der prii- 
historischen Forscliung in Oester- 
reich. Cor.-Bl. d. deutsch. iie- 
selisch. f. Anthrop., etc., Miinchen, 
1894, xxv, 97-103.— Talko-Grint- 
aevich (L D.) [Anthropology of 
the races in Lithuania and White 
Russia.] Tnidi antrop. Obsh. p. 
Imp. Vovenno-Med. Akad. 1893, 
S. Peterb.*, 1894, i, 15(V-188, 1 ch.— 
Tarenetski { A. ) [Post mortem in- 
juries to the skull.] JhUl. ^xyi. 1, 19- 
24, 1 pL— Thomson (B. H.) Con- 
cubitancy in the classificatory sys- 
tem of relationship. J. Anthrop. 
Inst., I^nd., 1894-5, xxiv, 371-;J87. 
The Kalou-Vu (ancestor- 
gods) of the Fijians. Ihid., 340-359. 
—Thurston (R. II. ) The animal as 
a i)rime mover. J. Frankl. Inst., 
Phila., 1895, cxxxix, 1; 100; 1(51, 
1 tab.— Toldt (C.) Zur Somatologie 
der Tiroler. Cor.-Bl. d. deutsch. 



Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., etc., Miin- 
chen, 1894, xxv, 87-95.— Turner 
{Sir W.) On M. Dubois' descrip- 
tion of remains recently found m 
Java, named by him Pithecanthro- 
jms erectus; with remarks on so- 
called transitional forms between 
apes and man. J. Anat. and Phy- 
siol., Lond., 1894-5, xxix, 424-445. 
Tylor (E. B. ) On the occurrence 
of ground stone implements of Aus- 
tralian type in Tasmania. J. An- 
throp. Inst., Lond., 1894-5, xxiv, 
335-340, 1 pi.— Verneau(R.) L'Age 
des sepultures de la Barma Grande 
pr6s de Men ton ; (r^ponse k M. 
d'Acy). Anthropologie, Par., 1895, 
vi, 152-159.— Virchow (R.) Eroff- 
nungsrede. Cor.-Bl. d. deutsch. 
Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., etc., Miin- 
chen, 1894, xxv, 80-87. 

Ueber Zwergrassen. Ibid. , 144-148. 

Festrede des Ehren-Priisi- 

denten. Verhandl. d. Berl. Ge- 
sellsch. f. Anthrop., 1894, (497-513). 

Schiidel aus Sud-America, 

insbesondere aus Argentinien und 

Bolivar. Ibid., (386-408), 1 pi. 

Ein Massai-Knabe. Ibid., 1895,(74- 

78). Schiidel aus einer 

Hohle in Transvaal. iiW(/., (69-73). 

Der Schiidel eines Herer6. 

Ibid., (73). Die Schiidel 

zweier Wassandani. Ibid., (64-69). 

Das Skelet eines Mhehe. 

Ibid., (59-()4).— Vincent (J.-B.) Les 
Canaques de la Nouvolle-Caledonie 
(esijuisse ethnographicjue). Gaz. 
liebd. d. sc. med. de Bordeaux, 
18<>5, xvi, 98; 110; 122; 134.— 
Wiigungen und MessungcMi der 
Kinder. (Tartenlaube, Ix'ipz., 1895, 
303. — Waldeyer. Ueber einige 
Gehirne von Ost-Afrikanern. C^>r.- 
Bl. d. deutsch. GeHellHcth. f. An- 
throp., etc., Miinchen, 1894, xxv, 
151-154.— Wallace (A. R.) The 
method of organic e vol ution . Fort- 
nightly Rev., Ix)nd., 1895, Ixvii, 
211; 435. -Ward (II.) Ethno- 
graphical notes relating to the 
Congo tribes. J. Anthrop. Inst., 
I^nd., 1894-5, xxiv, 285-299.— 
Warner (F.) et nl. Physical and 
mental deviations from the normal 
among children in public, element- 
ary, and other schools. Rep. Brit. 
Ass. Adv. Sc, Lond., 1894, 434-438. 



Digitized by 



Google 



30<^ 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



— Watter8(T.) Some Corean cus- 
toms and notions. Folk-Lore, 
Lond., 1895, vi, 82-84.— Weir (J.), 
jr. The sexual criminal. Med. 
Rec, N. Y., 189o, xlvii, 581-58,3.— 
Wells (F. H.) The habiU*, cus- 
toms, and ceremonies of the abo- 
riginals in the Diamentina, Her- 
l)ert, and Eleanor rivers, in East 



Central Australia. Rep. Australas. 
Ass. Adv. Sc. 1893, Svdnev, 1894, 
V, 515-522. -Windle' (W.) et al. 
Anthropometric work in schools. 
Kep. Brit. Ass. Adv. Sc, ]x)nd., 
1894, 4:^J-448.— Yatea (O. V.) The 
nortljern Balochis; their customs 
and folk-lore. J. Soc. Arts, Lond., 
1894-5, xliii, 702-712. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Digiti^ecibrQjOQSle 




^wv.s«>a^a.^sSUL;i> 



Digitized by 



Google 



THE 



American Anthropologist 



Vol. VIII WASHINGTON, D. C, OCTOBER, 1895 No. 4 



THE ARROW* 

BY FRANK HAMILTON GUSHING 

I 
ITS ANTIQUITY 

One of the most ancient of the things men have made is the 
arrow. There is no weapon the lineage of which can be un- 
brokenly traced further or to a simpler beginning. We have 
been apt to lose sight of this through associating as inseparable, 
alike in origin and use, the bow with the arrow. But I think it 
can be shown that the arrow had been perfected in well nigh all 
its parts, had attained rank as the chief weapon and one of the 
supremest possessions of man, and had given rise to a surprising 
variety of things and uses long ere the simplest bow had been 
conceived of or fashioned. 

If this be true, then the arrow in it« ancestral or embryonic 
form at least, was as old as either the stone axe or the shaped 
knife of flint, if not older; was, in fact, coeval with the knotted 
clubs and rough stones men picked up at need in the wilds they 
earliest traversed ; and we can see that through javelin and dart 
and harpoon it was sprung from the spear and lance, as they 
from the fire-sharpened pike, and this from the mere pointed 
stick — made sharp not by art, but by use — for digging or hurling, 
by turns. 

* Vice-Presidential address before Section H of the American AHsociation for the 
Advancement of Science, read at Springfield meeting, August 20, 1895. 

40 (307) 



Digitized by 



Google 



308 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIlI 

II 

ITS INFLUENCE 

Again, there is no weapon and no single thing that for ages 
held sway so potent over the minda or the destinies of men, or 
wrought more varied influence over their institutions and cus- 
toms than did the arrow ; for I think I can also make clear the 
fact that as it was the chief reliance and resource of primitive 
man in the two main activities of his life, war and the chase, it 
speedily became his first, and ever remained, by representation 
at least, his highest, instrumentality for divining the fate or for- 
tune its use so often decided, and in this way came to affect as 
no other single object of art ever did, the development and his- 
tory of mankind in general the wide world over. 

There is far more basis, then, than mere romance and beauty 
of comparison, for the poetic meaning of the arrow of literature, 
from Biblical and classic allusions, to Shakespeare's own. " Jove's 
thunder-bolts " or " Cupid's darts," " Diana's arrows " or the 
" shining shafts " of Apollo, or of ** Death " and " Destiny," were 
real arrows to the men of old time, for to them the love pang 
was an actual wound from a random and puny childish shot. 
The sharp pain of mortal throe or the slow anguish of fleshly ill 
was from a veritable stroke of the cold, breath-sent shaft of ghostly 
foeman, or was the ceaseless rankling of some venomedbarb of 
envious wizard or gaunt hungering demon.* The fire streak of 
the skies, the bright rays of the sun, the stinging flight of the 
sand-blast or hail-storm, and the sudden frost-bite — ^all of these 
were, indeed, to them the very counterparts and relatives of their 
own man-made but magically fashioned and feathered missiles. 
*' Straight," *' true," or " quick " as " an arrow," " sure as a shot," 
meant more to them than to us, for the force of such phrases 
never wore out so long as archers held their sway and men spake, 
like Homers heroes, with " winged words." 

♦ Thus the Zuili name for a swelling is shc/lina (from 8h</ole, an arrow, and i*na, the 
content, the innermost element, quality, substance, or cause of a thing), and literally 
rendered means " arrow in it" or " arrow-caused." Thus, too, rheumatism is called by 
the Zuflis the " sholitoe evil " or " disease of arrows;*^ and In treating this malady their 
medicine men try, after due manipulation of the affected part, to pluck forth the misty 
arrows or barbs they suppose are within, with magical snare-wands of eagle-feathers, 
blowing lustily the while to cast out these poison-missiles tind thus keep them from 
harming others or themselves. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] THE ARROW 309 

III 
ITS RELATION TO ANTHROPOLOGY 

In presenting to you, then, a study of the arrow, I am not de- 
parting so far as might seem from the requirements of the high 
office you have so kindly called upon me to serve, for I would 
offer something characteristic, not so much of a field, as of a 
method and standpoint of investigation which I believe to be 
peculiarly adapted to the needs of our science ; and I would 
illustrate, and hope I can measurably demonstrate herein, how 
special lines may and should be followed to general, and as far as 
can be, to universally applicable conclusions, these tendered not 
dogmatically, but suggestively ; that we may select, say, single 
phases and arts of humanity and even local manifestations of 
them, and should not only present, but study them, subjectively 
rather than objectively ; not externally and categorically or as 
isolated phenomena, or as mere examples of racial similarities 
and dissimilarities, nor yet, primarily, even as to whence they 
came ethnically, but rather, as to how and why they became at 
all, and originally, — as illustrations, that is, of the laws and prin- 
ciples which have governed man's development under all sorts 
of circumstances and in every age and land. 

It is in this spirit, at least, that I treat of the arrow ; not as a 
weapon merely, not descriptively to any greater than needful 
extent, but in its relation to the history of man and his culture- 
growth ; as an illustration equal to any, I believe, of how certain 
few human things and activities have been born (often so simply 
as to have been inevitable wheresoever man chanced to dwell), 
and of how they have grown, also very naturally and independ- 
ently of at least deliberate devising, and in so doing have some- 
times given rise to multitudinous other and diverse things and 
activities, thus profoundly affecting man's psychological as well 
as racial development, and hence contributing inexorably both 
good and evil lessons and influences to his culture everywhere, 
and everywhere similarly. 

If, moreover, I am at times seemingly too personal in style of 
statement, let it be remembered that well-nigh all anthropology 
is personal history ; that even the things of past man were per- 
sonal, like as never they are to ourselves now. They must, there- 



Digitized by 



Google 



810 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

fore, be both treated and worked at, not solely according to 
ordinary methods of procedure or rules of logic, or to any given 
canons of learning, but in a profoundly personal mood and way. 
If I would study any old, lost art, let us say, I must make myself 
the artisan of it — must, by examining its products, learn both 
to see and to feel as much as may be the conditions under which 
they were produced and the needs they supplied or satisfied ; 
then, rigidly adhering to those conditions and constrained by 
their resources alone, as ignorantly and anxiously strive with my 
own hands to reproduce, not to imitate, these things as ever strove 
primitive man to produce them. I have virtually the same 
hands he had, the same physique, generally or fundamentally 
the same activial and mental functions too, that men had in 
ages gone by, no matter how remote. If, then, I dominate my- 
self with their needs, surround myself with their material con- 
ditions, aim to do as they did, the chances are that I shall restore 
their acts and their aiis, however lost or hidden; shall learn 
precisely as they learned, rediscovering what they discovered 
precisely as they discovered it. Thus may I reproduce an art 
in all its stages ; see how it began, grew, developed into and 
affected other arts and things — all because, under the circum- 
stances I limit myself to the like of, — it became and grew and 
differentiated in other days. 

If the subject be in paths somewhat different from this, as, for 
example, some portions of my present essay are, I shall also think 
of it as it related to primitive men in primitive state of mind. 
I would divine how the men of old felt about their arrows, and 
what, therefore, they did to them and with them. They were 
simple, like little children, given to looking on their favorite 
things as the children of today look upon favorite toys, with a 
vast deal of personal feeling, emphasized in their case, to huge 
proportions, by the tremendous part these arrows bore in their 
lives. They had no knowledge of physics to guide them. Anal- 
ogy was their explanation of relations, and the dramatic inter- 
pretation of these relations and the phenomena thereof their 
only logic, and so, behold, the arrow was for ages looked on as 
a wand of enchantment to those who made and used and lived 
by and loved it ; was to them a symbol — a veritiible portion and 
potency of the mightiest forces and beings that they thought the 
world and four quarters, the sky, or the under earth held ; was 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] THE ARROW 311 

thus transcendent over the skill of their deftest archer ; was a 
thing of magic, and was willful, as like to obey the wind-bird 
with whose feathers they had winged its shaft withal, the god 
in whose breath it wavered, as to obey themselves or him who 
wrought and loosed it ; for itself would decree his luck or his 
fate, not he who sped it, else why all so vainly at times, however 
great his skill or his effort, did he speed it? Therefore it played 
as large a part in their theoretical and mythical as in their prac- 
tical life, and must be theoretically and imaginatively, no less 
than practically and experimentally, studied. 

IV 

MY DISCOVERY OF ARROW-MAKING 

I tell you in detail, then, how, through making many arrows, 
I have studied the arrow and its development practically ; how, 
by using it unweariedly and consorting long with those who 
used it actually with natural purpose and method, as well asi 
pondering deeply upon it in the most primitive moods I could 
muster, I have studied, theoretically, too, its meanings and re- 
lations ; the place it held in men's hearts and minds ere ever 
they knew of goodlier friend or deadlier foe. 

When I was a boy less than ten years of age, my father's 
hired man, while plowing one day, picked up and threw to me 
across the furrows a little blue flint arrow-point, saying : ** The 
Indians made that; it is one of their arrow-heads." I took it 
up fearfully, wonderingly, in my hands. It was small, cold, 
shining, and sharp — perfect in shape. Nothing had ever aroused 
my interest so much. That little arrow-point decided the pur- 
pose and calling of my whole life. It predestined me, ladies 
and gentlemen, to the honor I have in addressing you here to- 
day, on Arrows; for I have studied archeology far more, alas, 
than anything else — ever since I treasured that small arrow 
blade on the lid of an old blue chest in my little bedroom, until 
the cover of that chest was overfilled with others like it and 
with relics of many another kind. 

I was fortunate enough, not long after, to find in a neighbor- 
ing field a place where some of these blades had been made. I 
could see that they had been fashioned in some way by chip- 
ping, for the scales lying there were like those I had been wont 



Digitized by 



Google 



312 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

to strike off to see the sparks fly. When in course of time I 
had gathered a collection of some hundreds of relics from all 
over central and western New York, I began a series of experi- 
ments to learn how these arrows had been made. No one could 
tell me, and I had no books on subjects of anthropology then. 

There was a farmer in our neighborhood who, when young, 
had gone to California. It was in the days of " Forty-nine," and 
he had been pricked in the shoulder by an Indian arrow. He 
may not have killed the Indian, but had, at any rate, his whole 
sheaf of arrows — quite as perfect a set as I ever saw. They were 
all pointed with obsidian tips, like mine in shape and finish, 
but smaller. In recognition of my passion he gave me two of 
them. I thought the points were of glass, and forthwith added 
all the thick pieces of bottle-glass and window-plate I could 
gather, to my store of raw material for practice. With this I 
worked, now and then, throughout a whole season, but the 
products of my hammerings, though fair, were but crude com- 
pared with those of the field. 

When nearly fourteen years of age I discovered in the woods 
south of Medina, New York, an ancient Indian fort. I built a 
hut there, and used to go there and remain days at a time, dig- 
ging for relics while the sun shone, and on rainy days or at night 
in the light of the camp-fire, studying by experiment how the 
more curious of them had been made and used. One evening I 
unearthed a beautiful harpoon of bone. I had a tooth-brush. 
I chopped the handle off and ground it down on a piece of sand- 
stone to the shape of the harpoon blade, but could not grind the 
clean-cut barbs in its edge. I took my store of flint scales and 
set to work on it, using the flint flakes in my fingers, or clamping 
them between 8])lit sticks, saw-fashion. The flint cut the bone 
away as well as a knife of steel would have cut it, but left the 
work rough. Now, in trying to smooth this I made a discovery. 
No sooner had I begun to scrape the bone transversely to the 
edge of the flint than the bone began to cut the flint away, not 
jaggedly, as my hammer-stone would have chipped it, but in long, 
continuously narrow surface flakes wherever the edge was caught 
in the bone at a certain angle. I never finished that harpoon. 
I turned it about and used it as an arrow-flaker by tying it with 
my shoestring to a little rod of wood for a handle and pressing it 
at the proper angle to points on the flint which I wished to re- 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct 18951 THE ARROW 313 

move. I made arrow after arrow thus, in the joy of my new dis- 
covery, until my hands were blistered and lacerated, in one place 
so deeply that the scar remains to this day, and, worn down to 
a mere splinter,! still preserve my first tooth-brush flaking tool. 

(Fig. 1.) 

I did not know at that time that archeologists the world over 
were ignorant, as I had been, of just how flint implements had 
been made, and 1 did not learn until my now so lamented friend, 
Professor Baird, called me to the Smithsonian Institution, in 1875, 
that I was the first man, or rather boy, of our day who had prac- 
tically discovered how to make implements of glass and flint 
flaked from side to side, and in this indistinguishable from those 
made by primitive peoples. 

I have told this history as it occurred for a three-fold reason : 
first, to instance the manner in which I discovered flint-flaking, 
by chancing all ignorantly to follow precisely the course primi- 




Fio. 1.— Experimental flint-chipper of bone. 

tive men must have necessarily followed when and as soon as 
with the hardest and sharpest stone they could get, which was 
fractured flint, they tried to scrape and fashion bone or horn ; 
and, secondly, to convey to you the lesson this boyish experience 
taught me ; that I could learn more by strenuously experiencing 
with savage things and arts or their like than others or I could 
have learned by actually and merely seeing and questioning 
savages themselves about such things and arts. Long before I 
went to the Smithsonian or lived in Zufii I had elaborated from 
the simple beginning I have chronicled here, some seven or eight 
totally distinct methods of working flint-like substances with 
Stone-age apparatus, and subsequently have found that all save 
two of those processes were absolutely similar to processes now 
known to have been sometime in vogue with one people or 
another of the ancient world, and I confidently look to finding 
that the other two, and yet additional methods since experi- 
mentally made out, were somewhere followed by men before me. 
And, thirdly, there is another lesson of later development this 



Digitized by 



Google 



314 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

experience has taught me: that paleolithic man, of the French 
caves at least — that man who is said to have known no other 
art of working stone than by rudely breaking it into shape by 
blows of other stones — could not have existed in such primary 
status of art for more than a few seasons at most ; for even the 
casts of these cave remains that I have seen show carvings in bone 
and reindeer horn finished to such nicety and cut so elaborately 
that with the splendid true flint of Europe, experience in making 
any one of them would have given birth to the wit of making 
and applying a hundred flaking tools. As might be expected, 
therefore, I find among the casts of the French cave objects in 
our National Museum and in the University of Pennsylvania 
several fine and well-worn flint-pressers, a flaker or two, and 
rep>roductions of even one knap per of horn, and all these things 
are polished with art as of polished stone. 



THE TYPICAL ARROW 

Before I briefly relate and show how arrows of the ancient 
world were made I must need describe them, but not in all 
their variety and detail. 

Those of the American Indian are, as a whole, fairly repre- 
sentative of all others, and to the student who would become 
familiar with the characteristics of nearly all classes of these I 
would recommend that most excellent and admirably illustrated 
** Essay on North American Bows, Arrows, and Quivers," written 
by Dr Otis T. Mason and published in the Smithsonian Report 
for 1893, to which I am myself so much indebted. 

You are all familiar with the toy and target arrows of our 
time, but you may not be aware that all toys, wherever found, 
with the slight exception of but a few very modern and mongrel 
mechanical devices, are survivals of either the weapons and uten- 
sils or else of the religious paraphernalia of antecedent times, 
and that this familiar arrow of the archery clubs is no exception 
to the rule, but is an excellent representative in all essentials, 
save only for its blunted pile, of the arrow that won our pre- 
eminent place in the world — the arrow of the Norman Conquest, 
of Cressy, Poitiers, and Agincourt, of old England's matchless 
bowmen. But still it is not quite typical of its prehistoric kind. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] 



THE ARROW 



315 



The arrows of the Age of Stone may be best 
represented, I think, by one of their most highly 
developed forms — that of the famous Cliff-dwell- 
ers of the southwestern canons, for in this we 
find combined the features of nearly all other 
kinds. In that matchless collection of very an- 
cient remains from the cliffs gathered by the 
Wetherell Brothers and the Jay Smith expedi- 
tion and now owned by Colonel C. D. Hazzard, 
of Minneapolis, which is on exhibition, I am 
happy to say, in the Museum of the University 
of Pennsylvania, are many specimens of this 
arrow (Fig. 2). They are from thirty inches to 
nearly a yard in length; are tipped with deli- 
cately flaked, diminutive points or piles of 
chalcedony or obsidian. Some are barbed and 
tanged ; others are merely triangular ; but each 
is set into a nock or deep notch at the point 
of a tapering, hard-wood fore-shaft, and firmly 
attached thereto by alternate cross-wrappings 
of sinew. The fore-shafts are about half as long 
as the shafts or steles, which consist of medium- 
size reeds or canes, and are fitted with should- 
ers and thence tapered sufficiently to be let 
into these slightly smaller ends three or four 
inches— far enough to rest against the stop or 
septum of the first joint — and are held in place 
by a seizing or binding of sinew around the 
shafts at the points of insertion. 

The steles or bodies of these cane rear-shafts 
are some of them grooved with long, straight, 
or wavering lines, and are not only winged at 
the shaftments or base ends with feathers, but 
are also footed — that is, the extremities have 
been split slightly at four, sometimes only three, 
equidistant points, and plugs of wood have 
been set into them and bound in place by sinew 
to receive the nock for the bowstring, somewhat 
as strips of hard wood are let into slots of our 
spruce target arrows to keep them from split- 
41 



Digitized by 



Google 



316 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

ting when drawn or loosed. Each of these arrows is winged 
with three half-plumes, mostly split from the first six pinion 
feathers of eagles or falcons (for they happen, with one or two 
exceptions, to be war arrows), which are laid equidistantly along 
the shaftment the length of one's palm and forefinger down to 
within an inch, more or less, of the footing, and seized at the 
ends with sinew and glue. One of the plumes of each arrow, 
called the *' tail " by the Indians and the ** cock feather " by the 
old English archers, was placed so as to stand out exactly at 
right angles with the nock of the arrow, and, as I shall pres- 
ently show, was most significantly tufted and notched, prima- 
rily to denote that it was to be uppermost when the arrow was 
nocked, so that neither of the opposite feathers or " wings " 
should touch the bow when the arrow was loosed from the 
string. 

Finally, around the shaftment, between the feather-seizings, 
bands or ribands of color were painted, red and black, chiefly, 
and variously disposed, also most significantly, as we shall 
soon see. Arrows of the kind I have just described are called 
"compound." Arrows with shafts made from single rods of 
wood are called " self" arrows, and, strangely enough, although 
apparently simple, they more often than not have tokens of 
derivation from the compound kind, and the successful making 
of them was much more difficult. 

VI 

THE MAKING OP ARllOWS 

As shown by my experiments of many years, by the scatter- 
ing allusions of travelers, and, more than all, by my life with an 
archaic, very archaic, people, the steps in the manufacture of 
arrows, of their points of flinty stone, which men of primitive 
days most widely followed, were few and simple, yet exceedingly 
curious and ingenious. 

They first sought the material, mined it arduously from buried 
ledges with fire, mauls, and skids,* or, preferably, when the coun- 
try afforded, sought it in banks of bowlder-pebbles, digging such 
as were fit freshly from the soil, if possible, and at once blocking 

* The reader is referred to the various masterly essays on this subject by Mr. Wm. H. 
'Holmes and one by Mr H. C. Mercer, published in former issues of this magazlii«t. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] 



THE ARROW 



317 




^<D 



Fio. 3.— Splitting spalls or flakes from mass for 
blade-blanks. 



out from them blanks for their blades by splitting the pebbles 
into suitable spalls, not by free-handed percussion, but by hold- 
ing them edgewise on a hard base and hitting them sharply and 
almost directly on the peri- 
pheries, but with a one-sided 
twist or turn of the maul or 
battering stone. With each 
deft stroke (Fig. 3) the spalls, 
sometimes twenty from a 
single cobble or block of 
moderate size, were with 
almost incredible rapidity 
trimmed to the leaf-shape 
basis of all primitive chipped 
tools by knapping them with 
a horn, bone, or very soft, 
tough, granular stone ham- 
mer mounted in a light 
handle. For this the spall was placed flatwise on the knee or 
on a padded hammer-stone, so called, and held down by the 
base of the thumb of one hand (Fig. 4) and rapidly struck along 
the edge transversely and obliquely to its axis lengthwise, with 

the outwardly twisting kind of 
blows used in the splitting. The 
blanks thus formed were then car- 
ried home for leisurely or op- 
portune finishing, and carefully 
buried in damp soil, not to hide 
them, as has been usually sup- 
posed, but to keep them even- 
tempered or uniformly saturated 
(** full of sap and life, ' these an- 
cients thought), whence the so- 
called " caches " of numerous leaf- 
shape blades which are now and 
then found, for example, through- 
out old Indian ranges. 
In finally forming arrow-points from these trimmed blanks, 
the smallest of them only were chosen. The first care in fash- 
ioning one of these was to remove protuberant points from its 




Fio. 4.— KnappinK or shaping blade- 
V>lank from spall. 



Digitized by 



Google 



318 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



[Vol. VIII 



edge and sides and to thin it down by means of a pitching-tool 
of buck-horn. This was effected in several ways, usually by 
clamping it in a folded pad of buckskin under the knee against 
a hammer-stone or notched wooden block, so that the projecting 
edge rested over the margin or else over the pit of the stone, or 
notch if a block or log were used, and with one hand holding the 
point of the pitching-tool very lightly and slantingly and at a wide 
angle, against or just over the points to be chipped, sharply tap- 
ping the tool with a maul or with a knapping hammer (Fig. 5). 
Thus the blade was quickly thinned down and made almost even- 
edged. It was now further shaped, sharpened, nocked, or barbed 
or serrated, according to intended use, and tanged, with a rounded, 
fiat bodkin of horn (seized to a stick or handle for leverage at one 

end and taper- 
ing therefrom 
to a curved, 
blunt point), 
either by lay- 
ing it on folded 
buck-skin, over 
the hollow of a 
hammer - stone 
(Fig, 6) or the 
palm of the left 
hand, pressing 
it downwardly 
along the edges 
at nearly right 
angles, and al- 
ways slantingly to its length, or else by holding it edge uj) 
between the thumb and all the fingers of the left hand and 
freely flaking it, with the rod held in the right hand (Fig. 7), 
with liandle braced against the ribs for steadying, by pressing the 
sharp edges until they caught in the point or blade of the bod- 
kin, and twistingly wrenching them off by a most dextrous 
motion, which I can exhibit, but not adequately describe or 
illustrate. 

All this sounds complicated and tedious, but I have succeeded 
from the time I found a suitable pebble of fine-grained, ringing, 
cold and fresh quartzite, in making seven finished knife and arrow 




Fig. 5.— Pitching or trimming blade. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] 



THE ARROW 



319 




blades in exactly thirty-eight minutes, and I have often made 
from obsidian or glass a very small and delicate arrow-point — 
the most easily made, by the way — in less than two minutes. 

When a number of the 
points had been finished 
they were warmed by the 
fire and rather ceremoni- 
ously enwrapped in buck- 
skin or fur, not more to 

keep them safe than to J/ — "^ y^^ ] 

"'■ cure " them of all this ff ^ Vv / < 

rough handling and win 
them to favor and 
strength, for by the very 
clink of the perfect ones 
it was known now that . ^.^ 
they were full of life, each v^^j 
of its own — the life and 
fireof the lightning,which '''''' «-c»»^pp*«« ^^ ^^^^^^^^ p^«»««^«- 
could be seen at night when they were rubbed or struck against 
one another or ground on a sharpening stone. 

When war work was 
impending these old-time 
artisans or fletchers went 
forth ** sprout making 
and cane-cutting," as 
they called their gather- 
ing of reeds and twigs ; or 
when later, as the Pueb- 
los did, they abandoned 
the compound arrows of 
their ancestry and took 
to horse and short bows, 
they called it " cane- 
sprouting " when they 
gathered, all green, their 
shaft twigs, or ^'browsing" 
when they designed them 
to serve for the chase. These twigs were cut with due sacrifice 
to the wood sprites, were brought in head or upper ends fore- 




Fio. 7.— Chipping And nocking by cross pressure 
or wrenching. 



Digitized by 



Google 



320 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



most, passed over the store of poiats to make them acquainted, 
and laid down with their tip ends to the east or south if for the 
peaceful hunt, to the west or north if for war. They were peeled 
upwardly, or from butt to tip, that their way of working be not 
balked ; scraped and shaved to uniformity, also from the butt 
upwards, and placed alongside a hot fire or buried in moist, hot 
sand to soften or ** ripen " them ; and then, after being bitten 
straight in the most crooked places (Fig. 8) — it did not much 
matter how crooked they were at first — each in turn was clamped 
between one nether, grooved piece of sandstone or sanded wood 




Fia. 8.— Shaft-biting for preliminary straightening. 

and one small flat piece held over it firmly in the left hand, 
and was shoved and pulled twistingly back and forth until 
smoothed and rounded and further straightened (Fig. 9). 
Finally, each was both seasoned and polished, then straight- 
ened to a nicety by passing it, under heavy pressure, over a 
smooth grooved piece of very hot soapstone, or else, better still, 
by heating it and " stretching '' it through a veritable draw- 
plate of bone, horn, or hard wood (Fig. 10) furnished with 
a single medium hole or with several beveled perforations. 
While being stretched the shaft was wrenched with a quick turn 
here and there at remaining crooked places, then smoothed 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] 



THE ARROW 



321 



down by additional and gentler stretching, that it might be 
coaxed to keep straight. When fully stretched, it was grooved 
along three or sometimes four places on its circumference with 
the tusk of a puma or wild cat (of fiery eye) if for war, with 
elk, beaver, or other gentler kind of tooth if for the peaceful 
chase. With the point of this tooth the shaft was pressed along- 
side of the stretching plate as it was being finally pushed through 
from tip to shaftment place (Fig. 11) or feathering point — twist- 
ingly for at least every alternate groove — that a wavering trail 
might be made for the lightning to traverse from point to quill 
when the feathers whistled, speeding the sure flight of the arrow. 







Fia. 9.— Shaft smoothing by grinding. 

The shaft came forth from this operation lengthened consid- 
erably, polished, groove-marked, straight in the main, but bent 
perhaps along its full length. If so, it was warmed along the 
inner curve of the bend, held, tip outward, in the left hand, the 
butt grasped by the right (Fig. 12), and was bent a little this 
way and that till true, held so a moment, and laid down close 
to the fire, where it speedily dried to rigid straightness, until 
perchance rained on. The shaft was nocked at the lower end 
first by notching it deeply with a flint sawed across (but more 
or less with) the grain and by rasping out the bottom of the 
notch with a blunter-edge knife or sanded string and by heat- 
ing, and spreading the flanges thus formed with a rib or other 



Digitized by 



Google 



322 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 




Fig. 10.— Shaft *• stretching" or finjil straighten- 
ing with draw plate. 



hard edge or with a hot stone. If a split appeared or was likely 

to appear, the foot was whipped with sinew. 

Now it was ready for 

feathering. Three pinion 

feathers, all from the right 

> or all from the left wing of 

eagle, hawk, or turkey 

were chosen and cleft from 

tip to base by splitting and 

pressing the quill apart 

along its inner groove or 

mid rib. The featherings 

— I — -^^^ 1 I ^ were all chosen from cor- 

j \ » k / / responding sides of the 

^^ '^^^^^v^^^j*^ — ^ mid rib, that they might 

/ ^ > ^^ ^1 " be uniform. The pith was 

" "^^^ *^ ■ scraped out of the lower 

parts of the quills until 
they were thin and flexi- 
ble, and the edges of them were pared away. They were now 

laid flat along the shaftment, the bases of the quills toward the 

tip, first the right-wing 

quill, then the left- 
wing quill, so called ; 

finally the tail quill; 

the latter transversely 

to the nock to serve 

as a cock feather. 
All were seized on 

with filaments o f 

mouth -moistened 

sinew, one end held 

in the teeth until a 

turn or two of the ^ 

wrappings had been 

taken to keep the 

feathers in place. 

Then one end of the 

shaft was held under 

the left arm, the other between the thumb and forefinger of the 




Fio. 11.— Shaft grooving with tooth and draw plate. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] 



THE ARROW 



323 



left hand (Fig. 12 a b, a). The thumb and the fore and middle 
fingers of the right hand were moistened, and with them the 
shaftment grasped over the first wrapping. The sinew filament 
was drawn taut and held so between the middle, little, and ring 
fingers and the edge of the palm, and the shaft rapidly twirled 
with the thumb and fingers of the left hand (Fig. 12 a b, 6). 
Thus the bindings of sinew were pressed flatly and tightly on as 
it was wrapped, and, being moistened and very fine at the ends, 
adhered without further fastening. 

Now the lower ends of the featherings were similarly fastened, 
some of the pluming or ate being usually seized on together 




Pio. 12.— Shaft-truing. 

with the quill to strengthen and tuft it, and the plumes being 
stripped down once or twice spirally with a double motion to 
make them lie flat, were finally pulled through at the ends to 
straighten them, and flatten them still more. 

After all the shafts had thus been feathered the whole bunch 
was taken in hand, the butts struck against the ground or a 
stone, then reversed and righted, and with a puff" of the breath 
thrown down, ends forward. According as the arrows rebounded 
and fell, they were carefully sorted into groups, and with the more 
highly developed tribes, like the Zufii, the cock or tail feathers 
42 



Digitized by 



Google 



324 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



[Vol. VIII 



of each group were notched, trimmed, and tufted differently 
from those of the other groups, to denote their classes as being, 
one set of the north, another of the east, and the others, respect- 





Fio. 12 a b. —Feathering and seizing; a, position in holding ; b, of fingers 
in twirling and binding. 

ively, of the south and west. The top- and mid-most shaft was 
reserved as a personal arrow for special treatment, and thedoubt- 
ful shafts were left unfinished. At last, in correspondence to the 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 18951 



THK ARROW 



325 



kinds of shafts as indicated by the cock feathers, the points were 
selected, the keenest and deadliest for the north and the west, the 
broadest and shortest for the south and the east. The tips of the 
shafts were nocked and rasped, each with the base of the point de- 
signed for it ; and the points were then seized on free-handedly 
with sinew, as I have described heretofore. All these increas- 
ingly solemn operations were concluded by the orderly riband- 
ingof theshaftments with the colors of death and blood— black 
and red,— or with the yellow of magic, or the green or blue, of 
life and victory. 

The arrows were finally laid out to the west or the east and 
breath-endowed with lives of their own; then placed with 
their parent, the fire arrow* 
(all save its consort, the per- 
sonal one), in their quiver, 
heads downward, feathers up- 
ward, that the lightning run 
not out nor the feathers speak 
before their time, but sleep till 
wakened for war council and 
** feeding " or medication. 

I find evidence that the Cliff- 
dwellers followed much these 
same methods, save that the 
fore-shafts were made differ- 
ently, and the order of proceed- 
ings, as evidenced dingily by 
traces on these old-time shafts, 
inspected in old-time mood, 
was accordingly different. 

The fore-shafts were, for instance, tapered and rounded, cham- 
fered, and the shoulders cut on them all by twirling (either with 
the fingers or with the hand on the thigh) between gritty 
stones (Fig. 13) — as early a kind of lathe-work as I have learned 
of, this ! Moreover, before the cane-shafts were grouped to the 

^This was not always an arrow, properly, but a Hhaft carried ever ready for use as a 
fire-stick or drill, in the quiver. It was usually, however, made from a well-tried arrow, 
and was called fire-reed or arrow, by the ZuRi. I am assured by that distinguished 
Arabic scholar, Dr Talcott Williams, of Philadelphia, that such must have formerly 
been the practice of the Arabs, for he finds that their terms for arrow and fire-stick 
are likewise similar. 




Fio. 13.— Turning or chamfering of fore- 
shaft. 



Digitized by 



Google 



326 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

four quarters and the points chosen for them, the tips were 
fastened to the fore-shafts, as belonging to them, — being their 
slianks. This and many other interesting, highly significant 
details, I have made out ; how, I cannot pause to relate, but 
with Zuni lore and language, as well as reason, on my side. 

Nor is there time for analyzing all of these customs and ex- 
plaining how many of them are survivals of originations so 
practical and simple withal that they must have been measur- 
ably similar and universal in given conditions of culture-growth ; 
but it may be well for me to explain that, being survivals of 
ages and successions of experience, we must eliminate one after 
another, the more elaborate of them as we think backward in 
time ; that we must do the same with the working processes I 
have been earlier describing also ; and if you will bear with me 
during a few moments more of detailing, I will try thus to lay 
bare not all the stages in stone-working and arrow development, 
but what seem to me to have been their primal beginnings. 

VII 

ORIGIN OP EARLY ART AND OF LANCE-FORM TOOLS 

In a series of lectures given last spring at the Drexel Institute 
of Philadelphia, and in other papers, I have brought forward 
some of the many reasons which have induced me to suppose 
that man began his art development — his really manual and 
therefore mental and human development — on the coast of the 
sea of some tropical or temperate Old-world land. I cannot 
enter into the matter here much farther than to state that this 
human ancestor could not well have developed the habit of erect 
walking until forced from his earliest arboreal habitat and com- 
pelled to fend for life with his own hands, and thus taught to use 
them more for seizing and doing than for climbing and merely 
clutching, and thus also taught by his hands to devise, and with 
them to devise purposefully. 

Now, in this period of transition from forest to open, from a 
condition all but as artless as that of the higher tree-dwelling 
Quadrumana to a condition demanding rudimentary art at least, 
man could not have subsisted, it seems to me, in any other en- 
vironment away from his fruit-giving trees, than near to the food- 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] THE ARROW 



327 



teeming sea, which, in dry season and wet, in cold and in warmth, 
ever abounded in easily taken creatures and things edible. The 
universal craving or liking man has for salt — especially with his 
meat food — would seem to point to some such profound and 
primal experience-period of the race as that. The well-nigh 
universal association of the sea-shell with fire ceremonials, would 
indicate that thus, too, on the coast of the sea he first learned to 
fear fire little enough to capture and keep or carry in shells, its 
seed or young; to loose and feed them, for protection at night, 
and from cold, and thus also to use them — the all-devourers— 
for half eating for him, food else too tough, too cold, or other- 
wise too hurtful for his eating. And, finally, the universal dis- 
tribution of our kind coastwise, it would seem, the whole world 
over, ere ever language even had been developed vocally from 
hand usage and gesticulation far enough to remain steadfast or 
undifferentiated structurally in every great continental area, 
would also, along with much evidence of the arts, not least of 
them the arrow arts, still more strongly evidence the same sort 
of thing. 

We can readily enough conceive that it was on the old ocean 
shore man learned to crack food things — shell-fish and bones — 
against the convenient stones of the beach ; then to crack them 
with stones, and thus to crack stones against other stones in 
order to make them in turn crack these food-things the better, 
and at last to crack such cracking-stones with other stones, 
wherein he became a tool-making creature — that is, used tools 
with which to make other tools or with which to imitate and 
better mere use-made tools; and this was, and here ended, his 
true paleolithic period. 

It was there, too, in the soft sand or mud of the seashore, that 
we most naturally think he learned to dig (for shell-fish and the 
like) with sticks, wearing them sharp thereby, and thus learning 
also to wear them sharp intentionally, in order to make them 
sharp ; and from prodding the sand away from his food, it was 
but a step for him to prod his fellows — or anything else that 
stood in the way of his food — and thus-wise would begin the de- 
velopment of the pike, the lance, and the spear; the harpoon, 
the dart, and the arrow. The seeming likelihood of all this 
would lead me to linger yet a little longer by the seashore with 
my earliest man. Moreover, I think I can thus explain better 



Digitized by 



Google 



328 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

than elsewise quite other things about the arrow than merely 
its beginning, and can perhaps make it evident that I am not so 
fanciful as would seem, in this speculation. 

First, as to the stages of tool and weapon making, there are 
three examples of the way in which awkward-handed, experi- 
enceless-minded beings b^an making (or, rather, using) things 
as tools. They are to be found in the acts of monkeys, imbe- 
ciles, or very young children. I have watched and experi- 
mented with all three studiously and long. If they would break 
a thing, they cannot — or at least they never do— dissociate the 
thing to be broken from the breaking of it. They hit it against 
something bigger. My friend, Thomas Eakins, the scientist- 
artist, of Philadelphia, has a pet monkey named Bobby. As 
Mr Eakins is honoring me by painting my portrait, I have had 
opportunities for observing Bobby, Now, if you give Bobby a 
large, hard nut that teeth will not crack, he instantly looks about 
for a stone or other hard object (he one day chose — literally hit 
upon — my head) and proceeds to maul the nut against it until 
broken. Although his master has surrounded him with con- 
venient stones and sticks, he never uses them against the nut, 
but ever the nut against them, and if his curiosity be aroused 
as to any one of the nut-like stones, he hammers belike this stone 
against another, until it — not the stone he hammers — is broken, 
or if accidentally he breaks the stone he is hammering upon, he 
gains no lesson therefrom, but promptly seeks another stone on 
which to hammer the one he would break. 

Very little children, if untaught or non-observant, do things 
in this way, and as far developed as the Tasmanians were above 
this stage of art, they still practiced edging their hard pebble- 
choppers (Fig. 14) by seizing them with both hands— the more ac- 
curately to direct them — and whacking them until chipped sharp 
obliquely against other stones, and in this they were, but a few 
generations ago, in the true paleolithic period of their develop- 
ment. 

There are also three contemporary examples of the early 
use of a prod as a weapon — of at least the chase These are : 
Bobby again, young children, and (I say it not gracelessly) 
women trying to drive chickens or cattle or other frightful crea- 
tures. Bobby hates a certain too curious cat, and is not suffi- 
ciently scared by her to fear showing fight whenever she appears. 



Digitized by 



Google 





Oct. 1895J THE ARROW 329 

If the cat happens to steal near, but keeps beyond the reach of 
his tether, he does not throw a stone at her; but he has a long 
stick with which he hauls things toward him when put beyond 
his reach and with which he scratches them up when they are 
buried nearby. While it never occurs to him that he can reach 
the cat with a stone by hurling it at her, yet he tries to reach her 
with the stick by lunging it at her. He has thus learned that 
if he cannot punch her in this way, nevertheless he can hit her, 
and educe the desired and delightsome squall by lungingly 
hurling it at her, and he does this now with increasing skill and 
frequency; never by 
actually throwing 
it, but by lurching 
it forward with both 
hands, and as much 
with the body as 
with the hands 
and arms. If you 

ever see awkward ^'°* ^^-'^u^^^^® ^^^ section of Tasmantan 

chopper-pebble. 

women or children 

after anything with a ** sharp stick " you will observe that they 
throw it, if they cannot catch up, in much the same fashion — 
lurchingly, not overhand, as a spear should be thrown, for that 
would discontinue the initial movement. 

And now, I will trace the arrow up from this lowly and slow- 
paced infancy, to his manhood and marriage with the home- 
staying bow, for whom he has ever since so swiftly obeyed and 
run errands. 

VIII 

DEVELOPMENT OP ARROW-FORM MISSILES 

From such breaking of shells, stones, and bones such as I have 
characterized, and much cutting of his fingers thereby, primal 
man must have learned speedily enough to do all sorts of cut- 
ting, scraping, and scratching with the sharp fragments thus pro- 
duced. For long, however, he probably used these fragments 
unmounted, grasping them, perchance, with wads of seaweed or 
grass, or, when large, winding or clasping them in wisps of fiber 
or rolls of integument for holding, as I have grasped the stone 



Digitized by 



Google 



330 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



[Vol. VUI 



here exhibited (Fig. 15), with a fold or two of buckskin, in mak- 
ing with it the shaft-polishers and other like tools I have needed 
to use in ray recent experiments for these demonstrations. 

But by lodging such blades in wood or often wedging sharp 
things into the end of his pike-form digging stick, he must have 
learned in time that the stick, so long as thus armed, dug better 
(and cut his contestants or his prey better, too) than ever merely 

with its wooden tip, no 
matter how well seasoned 
by heat or favored by 
long-tried use this was. 
Then he tied or otherwise 
attached suitable chips to 
his digger, which he may 
have sharpened in the 
old way — at the other 
end (Fig. 16)— as the Tas- 
manians used to, but which we may imagine he now shortened — 
having more of use for its peaceful than for its offensive pur- 
poses * — until, at need for the capture or the fight, he got a reed 
from the seaside rivers or marshes, straight and long and light 
enough to punch withal or fling, if it but had a point, and 




Fio. 15.— Makeshift haft of haminerstone. 




Fio. 16.— a, Tasroanian knife-pointed digging stick ; b, mounted in reed 
shaft as spear. 

mounted his stone-bladed picker in one of its hollow ends, thus 
again lengthening it, at will. Lo! the fore-shafted spear, twin- 
changeling of the shaft-handled dirk atid knife ! Thus was born, 
with many another first form of the things we use, the ancestor 

*The diggiug-»ticks of the Australian women (of the interior) were, unless tipped 
with stone, often six or seven feet long, and were used not only as implements, but 
also as weapons, either as quarter*staffs, sidewise ; or as pikes or headless lances, 
endwise. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895J 



THE ARROW 



331 



alike of the retrieving arrow and of our familiar pocket com- 
panion — pencil and wit-sharpener of those who write — ^long be- 
before man was weaned from the skirts of his Gray Old Nurse, 
the sea— born there, in time to drift with him, ere yet he left her 
side, over the whole shore-land world. 

We have but to note the long and tapering forms of prehis- 
toric stone knife-handles everywhere pointed — not quite usefully 
otherwise than as survivals of an early use — to believe in this 
thought as not improbable. Then, too, we may note the un- 
earthed knives and harpoon-heads of the early coast- and island- 
dwellers of California, or of the ancient fisher-folk of Peru and 
Chili (Fig. 17), to see that each is so like the other as to puzzle 




Fio. 17.— Knife-harpoon heads; a, CHlifornia; 6, Peru; e, Cliff-dweller. 

the sharpest observer. The handle of each, though preserving its 
ridges at either end, alike useful for grip-guard or reed-shoulder 
or tying (6), may not denote that each was used at so late a time 
indifferently for either purpose, but it seems to say that its an- 
cestor was so used for very long. When, some time early, man 
found that the slim-handle knife, getting loose in the shaft of 
his spear, pulled out with the fish he had struck, but that if tied 
with a long enough string held its prey quite as well as the whole 
spear when held by a string in his hand, he had but to transfer 
his retrieving line, which always had hindered the fling, from 
hand-hold to mid of the shaft, and from thence to the hilt of the 
head, to have formed a perfect harpoon. (Fig. 18.) 
Imagine how men in those old days thought of the sharp- 
43 



Digitized by 



Google 



332 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

beaked shafts they cast at fishes and water fowl ! They must 
have longed every day to emulate the osprey and the fish-hawk ' 
But although they made their harpoons hook-beaked with barbs 
(or had made them so already) and claw-headed with recurved 
bone prongs, yet their flights of them were none the better for all 
that ! Then why not tie hawk feather or eagle plume to the body 




Fio. 18.— Knife-headed harpoon. 

of the missile? How such feathers flew and flew, whether with 
the bird they belonged to, or when dropped in the wind I Forth- 
with, you may be sure, they tied wing feathers to their shafts, two 
at first, midway ; but lower down after awhile, and with a third 
feather, the " tail," for the smaller shafts, to keep them straight 
and headwise. Primitive man never, until after the time of 
Homer, got over this believing (as his kind believe today), that 
the flying quality of the feather and of the bird it came from 
gave light swiftness and sharp sureness to his bird-bolts, not the 
feathering in itself 

IX 

ORIGIN OP THE DART-FLINGER AND BOW 

Using spears and harpoons with irregular poles, or shafts of 
jointed cane, man found a mighty advantage in those which had 

knobs or joints 

^ , . —Si S L^^'-^ -^ "^^ '^^^^ enough to 

^'V ' afford sure grasp 

to the hand in 
throwing, espe- 

X , ^^^/j^^__ 113 cially men of the 

' '"■'- water side, where 

their things were 
so often wet and 
slippery ; and still greater advantage they gained from this ex- 
perience later, when with plaited girdles or bands of other sort 




Fia. 19.— Shaft-girdle and clutching-knob. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] 



THE ARROW 



333 



they enlarged these joints at the grasping point or bound to the 
shafts, knobs or catches, of ever better and better device for 
the special work in hand (Fig. 19). They found, too, that for 




Fio. 20.— Finger-throw. 



far throwing and small quarry the light javelin was best, and 
that he who had the longest arm could hurl it the farthest ; he 
who had the strongest fingers and could launch his missiles with 
one or another of them used as a lever behind, like a hook 




Fio. 21.— Spear-noose or slinging strap throw. 

against or inside of its hollow butt (Fig. 20), was surest of aim 
and sliarpest of stroke. 

So presently they began to fit the shafts with straps or tlieir 
fingers with slinging-nooses (Fig. 21) to farther the flight. From 



Digitized by 



Google 



334 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



the soreness which came of much or constant use of such firat 
appliances (I have tried them and know), it was needful to make 
them ever better and better, until the loops became rings for 
the fingers, more rigid, and joined together; and these, in turn, 
became palms of rawhide for the throwing-hands, or of wood 
hollowed straightly and fitted with holes at the sides for the 
thumb and great finger, and with a groove underneath extend- 
ing to the rear end, at which was a notch or a hole for this finger 
when stretched back along the groove and thrust up through 
the hole or over the notch to hold the noose of the sling-strap 
(Fig. 22) or press against the shaft-butt, so as to project with 
force the spear when, if long, it was thrown with both hands. 




F108. 22, 28.— Spear-palm and slingiDg strap. 

Of such early devices as these spear-palms or graspers, so to 
call them, I have happily been able to find two historical ex- 
amples, and doubt not others will yet be found. One of these, 
although a true spear-thrower, is quite such a palm as I have 
described, save only that it is a little too long and is furnished 
with a rude catch of bone in place, as it were, of the fore-finger- 
nail. It was rescued from the Santa Barbara Indians, ere they 
became extinct, by that great voyager Vancouver.* There was 
found, too, some years ago, another of these things, even more 
archaic, a veritable spear-palm, such as I have described, but 

*Thi8 specimen has been discribed in the Journal of the Anthropological Institute 
of Great Britain, vol. xxi, London, 1891, by Mr Charles H. Reed, of the British Mnseum ; 
and both rediscribed and figured by Professor Mason in his little paper on "Throwing- 
sticks from Mexico and California,** published in the proceedings of the National Mu- 
seum, Tol. xvi« No. 932. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] 



THE ARROW 



335 



beautifully iulaid with bits of haliotis shell. I saw it in a col- 
lection of remains from the islands of the same region, but did 
not know, and no one at the time knew, what it was. I have 
now, however, identified it and reproduced a plain one like it 
(Fig. 23) and used it successfully. Perhaps the most interesting 
historic relics showing survival, I believe, of such uses of the 
spear-palm device as are here referred to are to be found in col- 
lections of Etruscan and early Roman remains. 

At the Washington meeting of this Association, as may be re- 
membered by some, my friend, that brilliant and many-sided 
naturalist, Professor Edward S. Morse (who did more for the 
study of " arrows " as a subject than any one previously, in his 




Fio. 24.— Finger position in 
spear-pAlm clutch. 



Fio. 25.— Etruscan •' bow-stretcher ; '" 
probably spear-clutch. 



striking and oft-quoted work on '* Arrow Release ")> held up 
before our section and discussed some of these remarkable little 
bronze relics, telling us that they were called " bow-stretchers " 
or " bow-stringers," ordinarily, in European museums ; that, 
however, antiquarians were not satisfied, nor was he, that they 
were such, and that all sorts of opinions, equally inconclusive, 
had been advanced as to their possible use. He then, seeing me, 
handed the specimen to me, remarking very kindly that " if any 
one could make out their meaning. Gushing could." Although 
then I was dubious, today I am grateful for both the compli- 
ment and the opportunity ; for, comparing this old Etruscan relic 
with such a double spear-ring or clutch or such a spear-palm as 
I have described (Figs. 24, 25), one sees that the spikes or prongs 



Digitized by 



Google 



336 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



[Vol. VIII 



on it so resemble the fingers when thrust up through the holes 
of a spear-palm like the Santa Barbara restoration, that they 
seem to have been made to replace them, as if to receive a spike 
at the butt of the spear, and thus enable the warrior to reserve 
the strength of his whole grasping hand for gripping and brac- 
ing the spear in close work or in projecting it far and with force 
when he would hurl it at the breast of the foe (Fig. 26). With 
this in mind, one sees, too, on re-examining the specimen, how 
the rings fit the fingers exactly for such use, and how they, and 
the prongs also, show wear only inside, where they should be 
worn if used as I have supposed. Finally, in the ornaments of 




Fio. 26.— spear-clutch throw. 

the particular specimens I have examined, one can see plain 
survival of the double-bent bands, the knotted fastenings of 
rawhide, and the prongs, of horn or bone, with which like spear- 
clutchers might have been made long before the age of bronze.* 

« Discussing this and my succeeding paper at the recent meeting of the American 
Association for the Advancement of Science, in Springfield, Professor Morse questioned 
the soundness of my theory regarding the primal use of these so-called " bow stringers " 
or " stretchers.** Referring to the great number of such relics which he had examined 
and Hketched, he called attention to the fact that on some of them the prongs were 
replaced by mere knobs or protuberances. He further argued that such use as I 
asHigned for them, although so important, was nowhere mentioned in classical writ' 
ings. 

In replying, I stated that even this later or bronze form of the objects in question 
was in the two specimens I had examined so perfectly adapted to the fingers for use in 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] 



THE ARROW 



337 



Yet these early kinds of spear-palms and clutchers, while giv- 
ing secure grasp and great power in the holding or hurling of 
heavy weapons, did not greatly increase the distance of their 
flight. So long as they only were known, there still remained the 
superiority of the long-armed thrower. But let us suppose that 




Fio. 27.— Throwing with spear. 

a man holding an extra spear in the hand (point backward) with 
which he hurled another, happened now and then to catch the 
butt of the one thrown on the barb of the one held (Fig. 27), he 
would not fail to find that this gave great additional force to 
his cast. I conceive that it was thus, or in some like simple 




Fio. 28.— Throwing with throw-gpenr. 

way, that it was found expedient to lengthen out, backwardly, 
the rear- or finger-end of the spear-palm, if the spear-palm had 
come into vogue before that, and if not, to make an imitation 

powerfully clutchinic and casting, say, a spear, that I was inclined still to belieTe even 
the knobbed examples he graphically sketched for us could well have served such 
purpose, or may at least have outlived such use originally in somewhat analogous uses. 
I would add also that while classical writers do not, indeed, expressly mention, so far 
as I know, the use of these bronze articles at all, nevertheless some of them, notably 
Xenophon in his Anabasis, do incidentally refer to straps and other devices for fling- 
ing spears, in connection with which these pronged and knobbed rings would have 
served admirably. 

Be all this as it may, the general argument of the paper is not materially affected by 
this single illustration in it. I acknowledge that the small number of specimens I 
have studied, though typical, hardly afford basis for more than a suggestion as to their 
use or derivation, and I am grateful to Professor Morse, therefore, for his words of 
caution. 



Digitized by 



Google 



338 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

th rowing-spear, so to call it — ^a mere spindle or flattened shaft with 
a barb or hook at the end of it, like, for example, the throwing- 
sticks of the Australians (Fig. 28). The spear-throwers of the 
Eskimo (Fig. 29), so instructively classified and described by Pro- 
fessor Mason in his paper on " Th rowing-sticks in the National 
Museum " (Report of the Smithsonian Institution, 1883), are re- 
garded as the most highly developed forms of that apparatus in 
the world. They certainly are the most elaborate ; beautifully 
shaped to fit exactly the grasp of the throwing hand, and are 
provided with efiective shaft-grooves and butt spurs or catches of 
ivory or bone. But there are some peculiarities of these throwing- 
sticks which relate them apparently to an undeveloped form, — 
quite directly to spear-palms somewhat like those of Santa Bar- 
bara and their greatly lengthened out descendant, such as is 
figured and described by Professor Mason (op. cit.) as having 
been found in use and collected near Lake Patzcuaro, Mexico, by 
our well-known, scholarly, and indefatigable writer on anthro- 
pology, my friend, Captain John G. Bourke, of the United States 
Anny. 

On examining any typical collection of Northwest-coast throw- 
ing-sticks, or the illustrations of Professor Mason's paper relative 
to those of the National Museum, one will be surprised to note 
how many are marked or grooved down the backs or under sides 
(Fig. 30). The grooves, thus placed, have no apparent use ; were 
put there, evidently, for some traditional or notional reason. In 
other words, they would seem to be survivals, for some are mere 
scratches, and all lead either directly from the finger holes or 
pits (or else from the side on which these or their substitute 
clasping notches or pegs occur) to the spur insertion or to be- 
yond, being always painstakingly cut or scratched into or across 
the base of this hard ivory spur-block. 

It is this groove particularly which appears to relate these 
sticks to one of the earliest forms, the palm-and-finger form (like 
Fig. 23), for they seem to be survivals of the finger-groove, length- 
ened out, perhaps, to accommodate the string, which was held 
noosed to the backwardly bent middle or fore finger and extended 
to the end of the stick, there to hold the butt of the spear or catch 
thereof until a bone finger (artificial finger-nail, as it were) was 
inserted, after which, as was fit in savage use, the groove was kept 
as a channel from the finger end to this extra end or nail, as n 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] 



THE ARROW 



339 





Fio. 29.— Front of Eskimo spear- 
thrower, showing shaft-groove and 
spur (see also section). 

44 



Fio. .30.— Reverse of Eskimo 
spear-thrower, showing back 
groove (a in figure and section). 



Digitized by 



Google 



340 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

" way trail," so to say, through which the 
strength of the forefinger might reach the 
spear-butt or catch. I would like to refer 
to some examples of this groove as having 
probably been transferred in turn even 
from the th rowing-stick to later forms, 
when these displaced its supremacy in use, 
as may be seen on certain bow -arms of the 
northwest region, the bellies of which are 
quite as uselessly grooved from grip, to 
horn or nock. 

The element next higher in the develop- 
ment of the dart-flinger is not present, how- 
ever, to any great extent, in the Eskimo 
forms, but it is to be found very decidedly 
exemplified in the throwing-slat or atlatl, 
quite independently identified by Profes- 
sor Mason and myself in the remarkable 
Cliff'-dweller collection I have before re- 
ferred to. 

Through the courtesy of my friend Mr 
Stewart Culin, Director of the Archeologi- 
cal Department of the University of Penn- 
sylvania, I have been enabled to study out 
experimentally the original form of this 
interesting flinging-slat or -stick, and to re- 
produce it in its original condition, accu- 
rately and in working form. This little 
apparatus (Fig. 31) is made from a very 
slender and flexible sapling, of light and 
springy but hard wood, such as the Cliff- 
dweller bows were made of, the half or one 
arm of the more finished sort of which it 
almost exactly resembles — that is, the 
small handle is straight or slightly up- 
turned from the ingeniously attached, 
spectacle-like finger loops or rings of hide, 
and thence toward the spur end it curves 
first downward, then rather sharply up- 
ward to the groove, which is short and 
shallow, and to the terminal spur-sink, 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 18951 



THE ARROW 



341 



which is only an inch or two long and is relatively deep. Thence 
to the end, a couple of inches more, the stick is curved down again 
so as to throw up the spur or catch and the little groove at the end 
of which it is cut ; and thus the whole in profile and upside down 
resembles the arm of a Cupid s bow, save that the end or " horn '' 
is thick. 

Just above the handle and finger-loops is a heavy binding, 
first of sinew, then of yucca fiber, lastly of brown yarn, which at 
the outer end firmly seizes to the rounded (or under and back) side 
of the implement a fragment of beautiful black slag or limonite — 
the blood-clot of giants slain in Creation time with lightning of 
the gods of war, according to Zufii lore. On the opposite or flat. 




Fig. 32.— Cliff-dweller atlatl or th rowing-stick In use. 

ui)per, and front side, also at the outer end of the bindings or 
packings, a beautifully ground and polished chalcedony knife- 
blade (the tip only of which protrudes) is bound on and prob- 
ably served to divide the feathers, or as the " father of lightning '' 
(to increase which it was doubtless ground at night), precisely 
as the lightning knives of the Zunis are on their badges of 
war. Finally a little tusk of the wildcat is inserted into the 
packing on the same side, its protuberant point laid close against 
the finger looj), strap, or fastening, so as to hold it from slip- 
ping. I find that originally feather-work was whipped into the 
surface of the packing near either end— of red, yellow, and blue 



Digitized by 



Google 



342 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



[Vol. VIII 



<i:53B 



plumage, probably taken from the jay and the red-headed wood- 
pecker of the south or from humming-birds. All this was both 
fetishistic (the life portion of the flinger) and to brace the knuckles 
so that the spear could be easily held high when flung. Thus 
the shaft of the dart did not lie along'the upper face, as in other 
and long-grooved examples, but merely touched the counter-sink 
near the spur or catch at its end. As the result of this method 

of release and of the 
curved and flexible 
style of the flinging- 
stick, the spear or dart 
could be sped with a 
spring, which added so 
greatly to its force that 
with my reproduction 
of the cliff specimen I 
can throw the harpoon 
twice as far (Fig. 32) as 
with my Eskimo speci- 
men, with less trajec- 
tory and hence more 
accurately. 

Among a people 
armed with such effec- 
tive flingers, I do not 
wonder that their use 
survived that of the 
bow, even away from 
the appropriate habitat 
of the spear-thrower — 
the water side; nor 
need one wonder that 
the famous atlatl of 
the ancient Mexicans 
made famous anew by the amazingly convincing and beau- 
tiful study of it Mrs Zelia Nutall has given us in the first 
volume of the Archeological and Ethnological Papers of the 
Peabody Museum (Harvard University, 1891), and which atlatl 
is, I belive, the lineal descendant of this one of the Cliff-dwellers, 
featlier-work, fetishistic element, and all; nor that it should also 




Fio. 33.— a, Miiya repreaenttUioa of crozier-form 
atlatl held close, with strap, for throw; 6, ditto, re- 
leased, straps flying (Dresden Codex); c, c, Maya and 
Mexican crozier-shaped throwing-sticks ; d, Maya 
spear with holding strap; e, ancient Peruvian sheaf 
of darts, shield, and symbolic throwing-crook (from 
Chimu vase painting). 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] 



THE ARROW 



343 



have been even more highly valued for special purposes by the 
Aztecs than was the bow, for in its many southern forms, as 
figured by Mrs Nutall, are to be found still higher developments. 
I refer especially to the crozier-shape ones and to those " with 
straps " (Fig. 33, a, 6), recalling Fray Diego de Landa's most 
significant description of the Maya forms seen by him in the 
sixteenth century. 

Now, the crozier-shape or bent form of the spear-flinger (Fig. 
33, cc, e) was, as my experiments have indicated, a veritable com- 
bination of the bow and the spear-thrower. In it the spring of 




Fro. 34.-Zuni plumed prayer-stiok of war sacrifice, or " Bearer of the reed of war." 

the bow already appears. It is simply a stringless bow, used 
backward, while in the still more elaborated form of it, that of 
the Mayas, the string also appears, only it was loose at one end 
(Fig. 33, rt, />) or else attached to the spear shaft itself (Fig. 33, ci), as 
shown by the plates in the Dresden Codex (which has opportunely 
been sent me within the last two weeks by that generous patron 
of anthropologic research. M. le Due Loubat). Were I uncer- 
tain of the meaning of these forms I might be reassured by 
certain evidences furnished by the Zufii. The Zuni still have 
traditional knowledge of the use of the spear-thrower and its 
appropriate hoop or net shield by their cliff-dwelling ancestry ; 



Digitized by 



Google 



344 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. Vlil 

and the truthfulness of their vague traditions is substantiated 
by certain survivals among them. One of these, as exemplified 
in certain spear and ring games, I shall refer to in the following 
part of this paper. The presently significant one is apparent 
in their little crooked or crozier-shape prayer wands or staffs. 
Some of these are actual staffs in miniature, and symbolize the 
prayer journey and a number of other things ; but the warrior 
and hunter symbol and sacrifice of this shape, difiers from these 
in being supplied with a holding string. It consists of a split 
twig about a foot long, the upper end of which is bent far over, 
like the head of a shepherd's crook (Fig. 34), and tied at right 
angles to the main part of the shaft with a taut string, on the 
middle of which is a double knot or a dab or two of black paint. 



Fia. 3> —Restoration of aacieat stringed spear-crook or throwiag-bow (from Zafli 
prayer-stick of war) . 

It is plumed on the handle portion or near the base, and at- 
tached to it inside, so as to lie along it and against the string 
at the ** knot '' or paint dab, is a sprout or stem of cane or reed- 
grass. If this little "carrier of the cane" or "war-staflf" be 
but enlarged or restored (as I have experimentally restored it) 
and used with a notched spear-dart like those of the Dresden 
Codex, with or without straps, and if then the missile be pressed 
back against the string and held with fingers (or by its strap) 
until released with a fling, the rebound of the string, as well as 
the spring of the flinging-staff, adds treble velocity to it. And 
it seems to me that the steps are few and short from this already 
strung but reversed flinging-bow (Pig. 35) to the bow of archery. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] 



THE ARROW 



345 



That such steps were actually taken, not in one land and by 
one people alone, but in many lands and by many peoples (and 
from differing forms and styles of throwers to differing develop- 
ments of the bow), can, I think, already be shown. In the first 
place, the Zuni name for the bow is significant. It is pH-hlan-ne^ 
from pi'y " a string " or " stringed " (emphatic form) ; ^hlam, ** a 
slat," " stave," or " staff," and a'-rw, " to go," or aln-a-nCy " go- 
thing " — that is, " a stringed go-staff " or " stringed ^ro-slat." " To 




•::^v..:s^ 



Pio. 36.— The ** Tartar bovr/' as drawn, released, and reversed when braced with 
slack string. 

shoot " (with an arrow) or " to hunt " is ^hahf-ta — that is, " slat- 
direct " or " staff-aim " — whereas the name for an arrow is sho'-o-le 
C* cane " or ** reed "), and is not, it will be seen, referred to in this 
etymology. Again, to hit or pierce with an arrow is ^hlat-k^xiy from 
'hMm, " a staff " or " slat," and (e-k'n, " to stick into "—that is, 
*• to slat-stick " or " slat pierce," in the sense of piercing or stick- 
ing into from or by means of, not with, the slat. Now, all those 
terms, especially the latter two, were formulated, I take it, from use 
of the throwing- or flinging-staff, not from use of the bow in its 



Digitized by 



Google 



346 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



later form ; and they would indicate that with the Zuni ancestry, 
at least, the th rowing-stick both antedated and gave rise to their 
later present form of bow. Of th is there is far more additional evi- 
dence than I can offer here. Nor can I enter into the intensely in- 
teresting results of my experiment study of Mexican and Mayan 
forms of the throwing-stick, all indicating even more strongly the 
same thing, and indicating also the directness of derivation from 

our own great south- 
west, of art elements, 
at least, in these old 
cultures of the south. 
I must, on the con- 
trary, turn a few mo- 
ments to other lands. 
In old world coun- 
tries, language tells 
much the same story 
in, for example, Chi- 
nese and Korean terms 
and characters, accord- 
ing to Mr Culin's pro- 
found studies of these 
peoples and their lan- 
guages, and in the 
Arabic, — of which that 
brilliant and universal 
scholar, Dr Talcott 
Williams, tells me 
archery terms are ap- 
parently quite as dis- 
sociated in derivation 
from an original use of the bow with the arrow as are those I 
have above analyzed. 

When talking on this subject with my lamented friend, the 
artist, Thomas Hovenden, who went to his noble and heroic death 
but a few days ago, he did not at first understand and quite be- 
lieve in my theory, but pushed a canvas toward me, and handing 
me a charcoal stick, bade me draw the form of thrower I then 
thought was the connecting link between flinger and bow. I 




Fio. 37.— Primitive crotch-bow, wide antlers. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895J THE ARROW 347 

drew one — a long, slender twig, with a fork at the end, and a string 
attached to the crotch, both for catching the spear and for bend- 
ing the stick to give it spring when loosed. He looked astounded 
for a moment, then delighted. " Do you know," said he, " that 
as a boy I played with such a sling-stick as that, as other boys 
commonly did when bird hunting on the Irish marshes ; " and in 
the morning he made me one. It was my hypothetical connect- 
ing link between spear-flinger and bow. 

Dr Williams informs me also that when he was a boy the young 
Indians of central New York used some such apparatus, half 




Fio. 38.— Mode of bracinK and releasing bow-crotch. 

toy, half weapon, and that his father once made one for him. You 
are all familiar with the dart-springing stick, which is stuck in the 
ground and while held by one hand is pulled back by the other to 
fling the dart. Certainly every one is acquainted with the " slap- 
jack," destroyer of so many window-panes in school-rooms and 
on city streets. You approvingly remember also, I hope, what 
I have said on an earlier page, of toys; but I wish to explain 
for a moment the development of a throwing-crotch resembling 
these things, in a part of the world wliere its study serves to ex- 
45 



Digitized by 



Google 



348 



THK AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



plain more than merely the origin of its appropriate form of the 
bow. I refer to the vast area of the so-called " Scythian " or 
** Tartar bow.'' Any one who examines one of these extraordi- 
nary bows, and especially who notes the manner of its use, will 
not find much difficulty, it seems to me, in tracing it back to 
what appears to have been its ancestral form in a simple forked 
twig or flinging-crotch, the steps are so obvious and few. 

The Tartar bow (Fig. 36) is a built-up bow, excessively flexed, 
not toward the belly, as are bows usually, but toward the back, 
its ends or horns being still more backwardly flexed, so that they 
even approach each other when the bow is slacked. The string- 
nocks are deep and slanting, and at the base of each horn or ear 
is attached, on the belly side, a bone or other hard block, chiefly 
to catch or slip the string when rebounding, but pierced trans- 




Fio. 39.— Primitive bow-crotch, narrow antlers. 

versely in some specimens, Througli these blocks the ends of 
the string used sometimes to be passed from one side before 
being noosed to the nocks or else it was knotted one-sidedly to 
the nock of the upper arm. Thus when the bow was drawn, not 
only were the arms reflexed more than twice as far by a pull of 
but the same distance to the rear of the grip or bow-hand than 
they would be on the ordinary bow, but the string pulled more 
to one side than the other, so that the curious overhand release 
sometimes observed among Tartar, and, I am told, some other 
Mongolian tribes, was not only facilitated, but in these cases waa 
rendered inevitable. Thus an arrow was half shot, half flung, or 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] 



THE ARROW 



349 




cast from such a bow, and it is this which makes the thumb-ring 
pull and the overhand release natural and which challenges our 
attention ; for the motion of the release (Fig. 36), no less than the 
form of the bow. seem both to have been directly derived from 
a wide-antlered, two-hand dart-flinging crotch (Fig. 37) — half 
slinger, half bow — which probably suggested a still wider-armed, 
spliced and haftless crotch or bow, 
and thus almost immediately pre- 
ceded it in development. With such 
a crotch, if stringed between the two 
antlers or branches and grasped in the 
left hand by the handle at their base 
or juncture, while with the thumb of 
the right hand the string was drawn 
back — the dart meantime being held 
thereto with the fingers of the same 
hand and thus braced for release 
(Fig. 38) — one can see that with a 
sharp fling the dart would be dis- 
charged over the crotch and the 
string fly over the bow-hand, much 
as it does in the Tartar bow-release, 
so to call it. Tliis form in turn is 
but an improvement on the one less 
spread and depending on both out- 
ward and forward release- spring in 
its antlers (Fig. 39) ; and this, finally, 
is but little better than one in which 
the spring of its still less separated 
branches was forward alone, and 
was its sole advantage over the 
long-branched and flexible but one- 
handed throwing-crotch (Fig 40, a), 
recalling in some ways the unre- 
lated Celtic form my iriend Hovenden made, and the primal 
short-branched sling-crotch (Fig. 40, 6) in which it would seem 
was the germ of this peculiar sort of built-up and compound 
ancestor of the Mongolian bow. 

[to be continued] 




Fio. 40.— Durt-fliuger crotches ; a, de- 
veloped form ; b, early form. 



Digitized by 



Google 



350 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



THE BEaiNNINa OF AaRICULTURE 

BY W J MCGEE 

The following pages record a few observations and generaliza- 
tions made incidentally in the course of an expedition through 
the little-known region in Arizona and Sonora (Mexico) called 
by Spanish-Americans " Papagueria," or land of the Papago In- 
dians. The primary purpose of the expedition, which was made 
under the auspices of the Bureau of American Ethnology in con- 
formity with plans of the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institu- 
tion, was the making of a collection representing the arts and 
industries of the Papago Indians. In part the observations re- 
corded herein pertain to subjects concerning which no expert 
knowledge is claimed; in so far as they relate to plants and 
animals they are merely such as any intelligent traveler through 
a region of pronounced peculiarities might be expected to make;* 
but the observed relations of plants, animals, and men, among 
each other and to their common environment, were studied with 
care and generalized with some fullness. Throughout the expedi- 
tion the question as to the influence of a peculiar environment 
on mankind, individually and socially, was constantly borne in 
mind ; and it was this question that directed the observations and 
generalizations. The principal conclusion is in accord with the 
o])inion of Powell and some other students concerning primitive 
agriculture, but the generalizations and inferences are independ- 
ent, and the line of induction is new. 

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE REGION 

Papagueria is an indefinite territorial unit varying with the 
migrations of a nomadic people, and thus with human whim and 
seasonal succession. In a general way, it lies south of Gila river 
in southwestern Arizona, west of the great Sierra Madre of western 
Mexico, and northeast of the Gulf of California. Its northern 



* It iu a pleasure to acknowledc^e obligations to Mr Wm. Dinwiddle, the photographer 
of the expedition, for excellent photographs of the plant forms referred to, and to Mr 
F. v. Coville and Dr J. N. Rose for identifying several species therefrom. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] THE BEGINNING OF AGRICULTURE 351 

and eastern limits were originally fixed by interaction against the 
Apache and other predatory peoples, or rather by an assemblage 
of geographic conditions involving the presence of water in suffi- 
cient quantity to maintain hunter and robber tribes ; the western 
boundary is the limit of habitability to the desert-loving tribe, 
par excellence, of North America ; while on the south the land 
of the Papago merges into that of the Opata, Nevome, and 
Yaki or abuts sharply against the domain of the bloody Seri. 
From the Gila on the north to the rancherias beyond Rio Sonora 
on the south, Papagueria measures some 400 miles ; on the inter- 
national boundary it is nearly 200 miles broad, narrowing south- 
ward ; the area in round numbers may be 50,000 square miles. 

From the foothills of a massive mountain range the land of 
the Papago slopes southwestward as an undulating plain with 
many minor mountain ranges rising sharply from its surface 
along lines generally parallel with the great Sierra. Streams 
gather in the Sierra and in the higher embossed ranges, and the 
larger of them flow in the intermontane valleys northward and 
southward from a subcontinental divide coinciding closely with 
the international boundary ; but in their middle or lower courses 
these stronger streams trend southwestward across the valleys 
and athwart the axes of the minor ranges toward the Gulf of 
California. The great streams heading in the Sierra Madre — 
** Mountain Mother [of waters] '' — carry vast floods in their mid- 
dle courses during the rainy seasons, while at ordinary stages 
they are but slender brooks ; and between the Gila-Colorado and 
the powerful Yaqui (the Indus of Mexico, whose far-reaching 
affluents with their hundreds of tributaries drain most of the 
high Sierra) even the freshet waters are absorbed by the dry air 
and the thirsty soil, and none of the rivers reach down to the 
sea. The smaller streams are more erratic in direction, but the 
smaller and the larger are alike in general character ; all head 
in the mountains and, gathering volume from tributaries, flow 
along or athwart the intermontane valleys for longer or shorter 
distances, and then dwindle or disappear as the waters evaporate 
or sink; for a few hours or days after the storms of the rainy 
seasons all are rushing torrents, and then for days or months they 
are but slender brooks or broad wastes of sun-parched sands. 
All the waterways are deep and rugged gorges or gulches — the 
" barrancas " of the Mexican vernacular — toward the sources. 



Digitized by 



Google 



352 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

broad steep-banked and sand-lined arroyos in the upper valleys, 
and expanded deltaform silt sheets in the lower valleys ; and in 
all permanent streams the midlength arroyo of the upper valley 
is cut out and maintained by the brimming floods of the rainy 
seasons despite the feeble sedimentation of the narrow streamlet 
wandering over the channel bottom during the dry season. 

Papagueria, with its western borderland skirting the Gulf of 
California, is perhaps the most arid region of equal extent on the 
western hemisphere. The annual precipitation over the portion 
lying in Arizona, according to the latest charts of the United 
States Weather Bureau, ranges from about three to something 
over ten inches, the maximum occurring only in the Sierra Madre 
on the east ; the average west of the Sierra is probably less, and 
toward the gulf much less, than five inches. On the Sonoran side 
of the subcontinental divide the rainfall is undoubtedly a little 
-greater, though trustworthy figures are lacking. Within the re- 
gion the districts of January-February and July-August rains 
overlap, and there are thus two rainy seasons during each year. 
To this circumstance many of the characteristics of Papagueria 
may be ascribed. In the first place it is probable that if the 
rainfall were concentrated in a single season, the storm freshets 
would be greater and a part of the scant water supply would 
escape into the gulf, rendering the region more desert than it is ; 
in the second place the semi-annual watering and checking of 
evaporation vivifies the flora and doubtless enables many plants 
that could not survive a ten-month drouth to maintain them- 
selves — certainly the semi-annual rain is a condition to which 
the vegetal and animal life is adjusted, as shown by the two 
seasons of leafing and flowering of different forms.* 

The higher ranges near the Sierra are thinly clothed with pines, 
oaks, and their associates ; the larger foothills as well as the lesser 
ranges and the higher portions of the intermontane plains are 
still more scantily mantled with cactus, yucca, agave, several mim- 
osas, acacia, paloverde, and meager thickets of chaparral ; many 
of the great alluvial aprons which characterize this region of sub- 
aerial j)lanation are given over to cacti and related plants of many 
genera and species, with scattered stems of grasses and occiisional 



* Johannes WHither has shown that the flora of the American deserts is richer than 
that found in the deserts of the Eastern Hemisphere. Nat. Geog. Ma^., vol. iv» 1893, 

p. ICG. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] THE BEGINNING OF AGRlCULTtTRE 353 

tufls of greasewood and rabbit-brush ; the intennontane valleys 
are sparsely dotted with mesquite and related mimosas, and an 
occasional paloverde and the creosote bush in season, intervening 
with vast treeless glades supporting nothing but widely scattered 
blades of silver grass, or with stretches of greasewood and other 
})rickly shrubs ; while the barrancas and the midlength arroyos 
of permanent streams are flanked by cottonwood, willow, giant 
mesquites 40 to 75 feet high, sycamore, ash, and other trees, with 
a rank undergrowth of shrubs, grasses, canes, and vines, all grow- 
ing in tropical luxuriance. Viewed collectively, the flora is fairly 
rich in species, wretchedly poor in individuals ; by reason of the 
vegetal extravagancies of cactus, agave, yucca, and aberrant tree- 
type, the flora is multiform when individuals are viewed, but by 
reason of a prevailing tendency in the differentiation of distinct 
types it becomes monotonously uniform when viewed collectively. 
Leaves are lacking or small and close-folded ; stems and trunks 
are prevailingly gray-green and waxy, and thorns abound on all 
the floral forms ; yet, though many mountains are almost barren 
and many valleys are nearly bare, vegetation is never totally 
absent save from a few shifting sand wastes and the coastward 
malpais — ^the " bad land " of Mexico. 

The animal life is largely nocturnal and crepuscular, and the 
day traveler sees little of the fauna. The most conspicuous ani- 
mate creature, by reason of its works and the number of indi- 
viduals to be seen, is the farmer ant, whose well-kept fields and 
clean threshing-floors dot the great alluvial aprons and some of 
the higher intermontane valleys by tens of thousands — indeed, a 
quarter, if not a third, of Sonoran Papagueria has been reclaimed 
by these thrifty husbandmen for their own uses, so that a full 
half of the grass to be seen in a day's journey is that which the 
farmer ants have, apparently, cultivated and fertilized. In the 
lower valleys, along with the scattered mesquites, the southwest- 
ern ground squirrel abounds ; in the annually flooded deltas, as 
well as along the mountain slopes, the California quail and a 
variety of smaller birds, with a few of larger size, are found ; 
hawks and, in Sonora, eagles are often seen, while the jack rabbit 
and coyote are never far away ; lizards, bright-colored and somber, 
are hourly in view ; the horned toad is seen now and then ; spiders, 
including the tarantula, are plentiful save in the driest valleys ; 
scorpions are common, and in some localities rattlesnakes abound. 



Digitized by 



Google 



354 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. Vlll 

Though the diurnal fauna is rather meager, it is probable that 
the fauna as a whole is, like the flora, fairly rich in species though 
poor (yet hardly so poor relatively as the flora) in individuals. 

CHARACTERISTICS OP THE VEGETAL LIFE 

Perhaps the most conspicuous feature of the flora, except on 
the higher mountains, is the dearth of foliage. The distinctive 
desert types — cactus, yucca, agave — are leafless. The mesquite, 
the prevailing arboreal form, is indeed leaf-bearing, but away 
from the naturally or artificially irrigated valleys the leaves, 
always small, are so reduced in number and size as scarcely to 
conceal the twigs and branches, and during the long dry seasons 
the oppositely arranged pinnate laminoe are so closely folded as 
to display little verdant surface; the greasewood (^Atriplex of 
several species) and rabbit-brush are also small-leaved and their 
foliage, like that of the mesquite, folds up or falls off" during the 
four-month drouths. Most of the paloverdes are leafless through- 
out the greater part of the year, some of them are said to be 
always ; and whole acres of chaparral are almost entirely leafless 
during the drier months, displaying only a greenish gray or 
bluish brown wilderness of trunks, branches, thorns, and naked 
petioles. Even in the valleys where the trees drink from the 
sands below rather than from the air above, and where trunks, 
stems, and fruits are luxuriant, the dry-season foliage is scanty 
and the leaves are folded or rolled in such manner as to present 
a minimum surface to the air and to view — the pinnate leaves 
fold along the midrib, the palmate leaves of the sycamore roll 
themselves into slender cylinders, while other trees shed a part 
of their leafage soon after the end of each rainy season, to send 
forth a fresh foliage with the beginning of the next. Away from 
the watercourses the smaller shrubs are leafless brambles ; and 
even the grasses are strong-stemmed with short and naiTow 
blades. The humid lands of the lower latitudes are clothed 
with the foliage of trees, grasses, and other annual and perennial 
plants during most of the year; but in Papagueria, as in other 
semi-desert regions in some measure, this mantle fails and the 
land is naked or at best thinly veiled by earth-colored stems and 
branches, so that the plains and hillsides are more barren in 
api)earance than in reality and often belie their own fertility. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] THE BEGINNING OF AGRICULTURE 355 

Nearly as conspicuous as the absence of foliage is the presence 
of aberrant typas, chiefly of robust, pulpy forms, peculiar to the 
desert. The great saguaro (Cereus giganteiis), rising 20 to 60 feet 
in a single stem 1 to 3 feet in diameter or in a massive candela- 
brum, bare in the distance as a carved monolith, is the dominant 
form ; and its huge waterlogged stems, ghostly grayish by night 
and ghastly greenish by day, are unlike the typical plant forms 
of the earth and impress the traveler as incongruous with nature. 
In Sonora the congeneric pitahaya abounds; with its great 
curved branches, each a tree-trunk in size and a mushroom in 
texture, it is nearly as extravagant in comparison with typical 
plant forms as the saguaro. Over the lower plains the closely re- 
lated and equally monstrous cina (^Cerem schotti) takes the place 
of saguaro and pitahaya, and dominates the shrubbery. The 
okatillo (^Fouqaiera splendens) with its bare, wide-branching stems 
approaches somewhat more nearly, and the tree-okatillo {Fou- 
quiera spinosa ?) still more closely, normal arboreal forms ; but 
the nopal and nopalito (Opuntin, diflferent species of the flat- 
stemmed type) are no less aberrant, though less conspicuous 
than the saguaro. The cholla (^Opuntia with cylindrical and 
prismatic stems) and other arborescent cacti are fairly congruous 
with trees and shrubs in general habit, though not in texture, 
and thus contribute measurably to the strangeness of the land- 
scape. The agaves and yuccas are only less striking than the 
cacti ; and the pale green, bare-branched paloverde {Parkinsonia 
ton-eyana), with slender needles or minute pinnate leaves in lieu 
of normal foliage, is hardly less aberrant. This assemblage of 
incongruous plant forms gives character to the desert landscape. 

Another conspicuous feature of the flora of Papagueria, like 
other desert regions, is the abundance of thorns, with which 
nearly all the plants are beset. The saguaro and pitahaya and 
their kind are armed with lines of chevaux-de-frise extending 
from base to summit ; the nopal and the cholla are set with wide- 
branching bunches of barbed needles ; each branch of the okatillo 
bristles with a thousand spines, and the water-bearing visnaga 
(Echinocaciaa wlsllzeni leconlel) is crowned and clothed with an 
impenetrable armor of natural bodkins and fishhooks. The 
yuccas and agaves abound in serrated and plain knife edges, and 
in many s|>ecies the needle-tipped and spike-fringed fronds turn 
outward and downward in serried armature. The chaparral is 
46 



Digitized by 



Google 



356 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPoLOOlSf [Vol. Vlll 

a wilderness of thorns; the dwarfish oak trees on the mountain 
sides are beset with needle-pointed knobs; the mesquite and 
smaller mimosas on the more arid plains bristle with thorns, and 
during the dry season the shriveled and case-hardened petioles 
are transformed into cruel spikes; the greasewood and other 
eh rubs are crowded with irritating spines and bristles, and even 
the mild-aired paloverde is armed with pointed and sharp-edged 
processes. Certain ephemeral plants that spring up about the 
burrows in the shadow of the mesquite trees have holly-like 
thorns at the serrate leaf-tips, and the grass blades are knife-edged 
and needle-tipped, while the seeds are enclosed in spiked hulls 
or fringed with spiny awns. In all the land of the Papago there 
are few indigenous plants that are not armed with thorns or spikes 
or spines, or all combined. 

The thorniness of the desert plants is associated with a peculiar 
modification of the surface of stems, leaves, and fruits, often in 
the direction of cutinization, sometimes in the direction of hairy 
coverings.* From root to terminal twig the paloverdes are glazed 
with a resinous epidermal tissue ; the pulpy stems of the saguaro 
and its congeners are enclosed in a thin but strong waxen skin, 
grading into the natural lacquer coating the spines ; the mature 
leaves of the arborescent flora on the mountain sides and along 
the waterways alike are thickened and harsh rather than velvety 
of surface, and many appear to be coated with natural varnish ; 
a few trunks are rough-barked, but usually the branches and 
twigs are smooth and case-hardened. The seeds of the saguaro 
imbedded in the pulp of the fruit are hard and shining of sur- 
face ; the mesquite beans are firmly implanted in woody pods, yet 
are smooth and hard, and the smaller mimosa over the Sonoran 
slopes bears beans in a thin-walled pod that are as hard and glossy 
as lacquered lignum-vitaj ; and the fruits and seeds of annuals 
are so hard as to form a favorite material for beads among the 
Papago women and children. Many of the shrubs bristle with a 
stiff pilage from root to petiole, and sometimes the leaves are 
hairy or coarsely furred, particularly as the moister season 
wanes; and many of the bristles are barbed and brittle, and 
hardly less forbidtling than the thorns and spines. 

Another noteworthy characteristic of the plants of Papagueria 
is the green color of the stems and trunks. In humid lands the 

*Tlio hairiness of the desert plants has boon noted by Coville in Death valley. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 18951 THE BEGINNING OF AGRICULTURE 357 

foliage is green, the trunks and stems generally gray or brown or 
black, the grasses green throughout, while in the arid regions, 
where the foliage is largely lost, the verdure pervades the perma- 
nent body of the plant ; the nopal may become purplish or yel- 
lowish and the okatillo gray or brown, the trunk of the cholla 
may turn dark brown, but in all there is an element, and gener- 
ally a predominant element, of green, and when the setting sun 
reddens the chance cloud banks even of the dry season the com- 
plementar}'^ green of the cacti-clothed landscape becomes almost 
brilliant. The yuccas and agaves are green, greenish gray, or 
greenish yellow, yet never without the element of green ; the 
paloverdes are a soft and sickly green from root to topmost twig ; 
all of the minor and many of the main branches of the mesquite 
and chaparral are tinged with green ; the creosote bush (Larrea 
tridentata or mexicniia) is a dark rich green, especially during the 
winter months ; even the silver grass is seen in the reddened rays 
of the setting sun to show a greenish shade. The predominant 
tone of the desert landscape is gray, the color of bare earth and 
rock ; but there is a strong undertint of green coming from the 
tenuous veil of stark and thorny albeit leafless vegetation. 

In much of Papagueria these features are partially masked 
and the landscape transformed during the rainy season. Even 
a casual dry-season storm produces a decided change : The pin- 
nate leaves of mesquite and paloverde and smaller shrubs open 
and fresh leaflets appear, and the foliage-bearing plants partially 
eclipse the cacti ; in the arroyos the willow and ash leaves expand 
to their widest, the sycamore leaves unroll, and the yellowish 
green foliage of the cottonwood brightens ; with the expansion 
of the old leafage and the burgeoning of the new the prevailing 
thorns are concealed ; the desert varnish softens and stretches 
with the growth of trunks and branches; the silver-gray grasses 
assume a greener tinge, and in the general verdure the sickly 
green of the cacti and agaves pales by contrast. 

The seasonal changes no less than the dry-season characteris- 
tics of the desert flora suggest a meaning for the assemblage of 
distinctive features. The seasonal changes indicate that certain 
features, like the dearth of foliage, are partly, perha])s largely, 
individual or oncogenic ; while the persistence of certain features, 
such as the development of aberrant forms, the permanence of 
thorns, and body verdure, appear to be essentially phylogenic. 



Digitized by 



Google 



358 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

The chief function of the leaf is transpiration ; but in the 
heated air and long drouth of the arid land a constantly trans- 
piring plant soon withers and dies. So it would appear that in 
some way, through the law of natural selection, plants of luxuri- 
ant foliage have been eliminated (save along the lines of abun- 
dant groundwater), leaving plants of scanty foliage to dominate 
the soil. Moreover, under natural selection, as it would appear 
from comparison either of given species or of the floral assem- 
blage with those of humid regions, an individual plasticity has 
been developed whereby the functioning of the foliage is ren- 
dered periodic in an exceptional degree ; and those individuals 
persist and leave most progeny that are best able to adjust the 
rate of transpiration to the varying conditions of season. The 
adaptive devices developed in this hard environment are many 
and suggestive. Compound pinnate leaves fold easily, and so 
plants bearing this type of foliage abound, and some, like that 
of the mesquite, have become so delicately adjusted to external 
conditions as to fold under shock even in the humid season — 
indeed sensitive plants abound throughout the deserts. The 
rolling up of the palmate leaves might almost be termed an in- 
genious device and interpreted as an index of high intelligence 
in the tree; and the prompt burgeoning of new leaves as the air 
grows humid and the rain comes down is an almost pathetic 
expression of gratefulness, and indicates a wonderful delicacy of 
adjustment between organism and environment. The leaf-bear- 
ing plants of Papagueria are conspicuously characterized by cer- 
tain collective habits rather than by classific features ; it is by 
means of these habits that they are enabled to survive the nearly 
continuous drouths ; and thus while the habit is individual in 
expression, it is undoubtedly hereditary in the perfection of its 
development. The inference from the foliage- bearing trees is 
sustained by the facts of the development of other plant forms^ 
like the cacti and the paloverdes, in which leaves are lacking. 
The cacti represent an aberrant type, but the paloverdes are 
trees in all characters save the color and texture of the bark and 
the dearth or absence of foliage ; they prevail only in arid re- 
gions, and in the drier localities displace even the deep-rooted 
mesquite and the abstemious greasewood ; and they are un- 
doubtedly the product of a long-continued process of adaptation 
through natural selection to an arid environment. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] THE BEGINNING OF AGRICULTURE 359 

The predominance of thorns may in part be correlated mechan- 
ically with the elimination of foliage, for as the lamina withers 
the petiole or axillary processes sometimes shrink and case- 
harden and become potential thorns ; but the vast multiplication 
of real thorns cannot be so explained. An explanation appears 
when the relations of the plants and herbivorous animals are 
studied. The thornier plants are better protected from the ani- 
mals, and thereby their chances of survival and procreation are 
enhanced. Moreover in the arid region, unlike the humid land, 
the struggle among species is not territorial or numeric but indi- 
vidual;* it boots nothing to the plant to yield ten thousand 
seeds where only ten young plants can be supported ; and it is 
of no avail to a species in the unconscious efifort of vegetal vital- 
ity to cover its vicinity with progeny so abundantly as to exclude 
other species, since the parched soil will support but a few plants, 
and parents and progeny alike would famish. In the humid 
land the species is perpetuated through multiplication of indi- 
viduals, and within limits through territorial dominion ; but in 
the arid land the relations are changed, and perpetuation of the 
species is secured chiefly or solely through prolonging the life 
of the individual. Thus the thorny armature is doubly bene- 
ficial ; for it first prolongs the life of the individual, which is 
preeminently essential to the perpetuity of the species where 
only a few individuals can exist, and then increases the chances 
of long-lived progeny in sufficient yet not redundant numbers. 
These relations suggest that the desert plants should be found 
exceptionally long of life and exceptionally scant of seeds ; and 
while further observation on these points is needed for demon- 
stration, and while some other relations enter, there is reason to 
opine that long life of individuals and either limited numbers 
or small size of seeds are characteristic of the desert flora — e, (/., 
the typical saguaro bears minute seeds, though in considerable 
numbers, and is exceedingly slow of growth. The many adapt- 
ive devices of plant effort for wide distribution of seeds and 
phy tons (for the choUa and perhaps other cacti seem to have re- 

*Coville, speaking of the flora of Death valley (Contributions from the U. S. National 
Herbarium, vol. iv, p. 43), says: " It is evident • * * that desert shrubs essentially 
present in their environment the anomaly of a struggle for existence, not against 
other plants, but against nonorganic physical forces alone." This admir.ible report 
was not seen until after the expedition to Papagueria, nor indeed until after these 
paragraphs were written. 



Digitized by 



Google 



360 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

vertod to the mode of reproduction by vegetative propagation *) 
must be passed over ; it suffices to note that the development of 
a protective armature of thorns in arid lands seems to be natural 
and necessary and the outcome of phylogenic modification. It 
is significant that in the case of thorns, as in the case of scant 
foliage, a characteristic habit of unrelated plants rises above si^- 
cific aflfiliations — taxonomically the flora is widely diverse, but 
in this as in several other characters it is singularly uniform in 
habit, so that the specific differentiation of the ages is partly 
masked by a conspicuous unification in a certain direction. 

The laccjuered and pilose surfaces of desert plants affect transpi- 
ration. With the cutinization of leaves the stomata are contracted 
or covered, with the exudation of resinous or waxy substances the 
twigs and trunks become coated with an impervious varnish, and 
with the natural lacquering of the seeds they are preserved unto 
the ensuing moister season when the lacquer softens and the germ 
(juickens ; the barbed bristles of leaves and stems protect them 
from at least the smaller herbivores, the harsh or soft pilage 
catches and holds the moisture from the rare rains and dews, and 
the pubescence measurably protects the plant against changes in 
temperature.f Thus it is evident that the cuticular modification 
of the desert plants is beneficial individually and hence phylo- 
genically ; and the noteworthy development of these modifica- 
tions, like the other characteristics of the flora, may be explained 
as adaptations through survival of the fittest. 

The cactus is essentially a reservoir of water pumped from 
beneath and confined l)y a thin yet impervious shell, protected by 
an armature of thorns; and though of different form, the agave 
and yucca are essentially similar in plan. So the aberrant plant 
tyi)e.s characteristic of the desert are most -conspicuously, if not 
prciMuinently, adaptive devices for the storage and presumptively 
for the most eff*ective use of water; in them the energy of the 
plant is mainly expended not in the multiplication and diffiision 
of individuals, nor in energetic growth of individuals, nor in the 
development of permanent structures (for the cacti are notable 
for their paucity of woody or other permanent tissue), but in 
storing a single substance against the time of scarcity that the 



♦Toiim«>y has recently described the mode of reproduction of Opuntia in southwest- 
ern Arizona by the distribution of joints or fragments. 

t The hwt-named function of the plant hairs is specifically recognized by CoTille. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. I89.ij THE BEGINNING OV AGRICULTURE 361 

individual may maintain a lowly and feeble vitality for a long 
period. The roots of the pulpy desert plants are long and often 
large ; yet when these plants are compared with the vegetal organ- 
isms of humid lands, it seems manifest that the function of the 
water collected by the roots and stored in the stems is peculiar — 
the substance appears to perform its duty not so much by flowing 
through, as by remaining in, the tissues. Accordingly the desert 
plant appears to be an exceptionally efifective mechanism for 
utilizing the power of water, a high-power chemical engine rather 
than a low-power hydromotor; and the predominance of these 
forms may be ascribed to the selection and development of this 
peculiar quality through survival under adverse conditions. The 
phylogeny of the pulpy desert plants is obscure ; but it is probable 
that the genera and species were developed with relative rapidity 
during the later geologic periods to fit the peculiar assemblage 
of conditions found in arid lands. Yet although geologically 
modern, they are in many respects allied to primitive plant types, 
and are in many ways antithetic to the higher types differentiated 
during the ages to fit the conditions commonly prevailing over 
the lands of the earth. Thus the forms are aberrant, incongruous 
with prevailing vegetation, though accordant with a distinctive 
set of conditions ; and in the development of this accordance 
they have assumed the habits of leaflessness and thorniness im- 
pressed on unrelated forms by the same rigorous conditions ; so 
that the adaptive similarities have in some respects eclipsed real 
homologies. 

The paloverdes are enclosed in an impervious glazed skin or 
bark, somewhat resembling the dermal covering of the cactus and 
agave ; their conspicuous feature, which they share with the 
pulpy desert plants, is the green color due to abundant and widely 
diffused chlorophyll. Similar coloration, though generally in less 
degree, prevails in the trees and shrubs of Papagueria, where twigs 
and smaller branches, if not main stems, are commonly green- 
ish, sometimes clearly green as in the paloverde. Now, accord- 
ing to Lommeland others, and as taught by Vines,* the function 
of chlorophyll is to absorb certain rays of light, and thus to enable 
the protoplasm with which it is connected to avail itself of the 
radiant energ}'' of the sun's rays for the construction of organic 

* Lectures on " The Physiology of Plants," Cambridge, 1886, Lectures ix, xiii, xvii, etc. 
t Ibid., p. 157. 



Digitized by 



Google 



362 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. V^III 

substance from carbon dioxide and water.f Considering chloro- 
phyll with its associated substances as an adaptive mechanism 
for utilizing the energy of light for the behoof of the plant in 
which it is produced, then it is especially beneficial to the pieager 
flora of the desert; for not only are the individual plants so 
widely scattered that the solar rays reach all parts of the organism 
above ground level, but the insolation is much stronger than in 
humid lands, and is rarely checked by clouds. It seems prob- 
able, too, that the exceptionally effective utilization of water in 
the pulpy plants is directly connected with the action of the 
chlorophyll ; but whether this is the case or not, the abundant 
development of chlorophyll in the stems and trunks of leafless 
or scant-leaved plants is unquestionably adaptive through the 
survival of the chlorophyll-bearers. 

The great lesson of vegetal life in Papagueria is found in the 
delicate adjustment of the varied flora to the dominant condition 
of aridity. Some species are adjusted to the condition largely 
by modified habit of foliation ; other species, like the paloverdes, 
represent profound modification of the arboreal type ; while the 
dominant forms, cactus, agave, and yucca, represent still more 
l)rofound modification of subarboreal, if not primordial vegetal 
types ; and all of the plants, howsoever divergent phylogenically , 
are notably convergent in a certain group of characters, includ- 
ing leaflessness, waxiness, hairiness, thorniness, and greenness. 
By some naturalists the divergent characters of organisms are 
classed as natural or biotic, the convergent or composite charac- 
teristics as artificial or demotic ; but under this classification the 
common peculiarity of the unrelated desert plants would become 
ve.:^etal artificiality. This distinction need not be pursued ; it 
suffices to note that the desert flora reveals in strong light the 
exceeding adjustability of even the more fixed organic types to 
environment, an adjustability so delicate that the affinity thereof 
masks and modifies consanguinity. 

Great interest attaches to the Papago Indians as the inhabit- 
ants of a dec?ert ; yet the extent of the interest can be appreciated 
only when the exceeding rigor of their environment, as mani- 
fested by the flora of the district, is understood. Even if the 
Papago were not interrelated with the flora, as will appear later, 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] THE BEGINNING OF AGRICULTURE 363 

it would be desirable to consider their relations to an environ- 
ment which transforms the stabler organisms of the earth. 

CHARACTERISTICS OF THE ANIMAL LIFE 

A noteworthy feature of the animal life of Papagueria is the 
protective coloring of many of the birds, animals, and reptiles. 
The quail and dove are slaty-gray and not easily discriminated 
from the gray or ashen earth, rocks, and plants of their haunts ; 
the coyote approaches the color of the ground with its scant 
vegetal coloring, and is said to change color with the seasons, 
becoming darker with the wet, lighter with the dry ; the lizards 
are in part bright-colored but in part gray, brown, or leaden, and 
some are chameleons, changing color with their surroundings ; 
many insects, too, display protective coloring, and some, like the 
mantis, have acquired twig-like or leaf-like forms. These charac- 
teristics of imitative protection are prominent, yet perhaps not 
more constant than in other regions. 

Another feature of the animal life is the fleetness and staying 
power of a considerable number of animals, including the deer, 
antelope, jackrabbit, coyote, and certain smaller mammals, as 
well as the bright-colored lizards and some of the hawks. Col- 
lectively the fleetness of the fauna may be adventive rather than 
characteristic, yet it is of interest in connection with another 
feature with which it would appear to be reciprocally related — 
L e., the venomous character of various sluggish animals. The 
latter feature is one which cannot easily be evaluated by reason 
of the frequently absurd popular beliefs on the one hand, and 
the antithetic tendency to exclude all evidence of venom on the 
other hand. It is certain, however, that the rattlesnake, which 
abounds in some localities and is probably the most numerous 
ophidian, is both sluggish and venomous ; the dull and slow- 
moving Gila monster {Heloderma sicspeclain) is almost certainly 
venomous, at least under certain conditions; the indolent but 
pugnacious tarantula is undoubtedly poisonous ; the apathetic 
scorpion and the clumsy centipede are more or less poisonous ; 
the bite of the greatly feared though lazy large-head ant of 
Sonora and other Mexican provinces produces festering sores, 
whether with venom or otherwise ; there are a variety of wasps, 
including one of great size and slow movement, whose stings are 
47 



Digitized by VjOOQIC 



364 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

poisonous ; in southern Sonora the local katydid ia more feared 
than rattlesnake or tarantula, its sting being supposed invariably 
fatal; and there is a large body of evidence indicating that the 
sluggish skunk under certain conditions communicates a poison 
akin to that of rabies. Thus a notably large number of animals 
are known or supposed to be venomous ; even excluding all con- 
cerning which there is reasonable doubt, the ratio of venomous 
to non-venomous species would seem to be large. Granting the 
presence of venom, it may easily be explained as the prevalence 
of thorns among the flora may be explained : In a region capa- 
ble of supporting only a relatively small number of organisms 
per unit of area, the perpetuity of species is best secured by 
the protection of individuals. Now certain lizards, insects, and 
birds are protected by mimetic coloring or form, the Phryno- 
sor?irt, like the plants, is guarded by a thorny armature, and the 
chameleons are shielded by a physiologic mechanism for color- 
change ; but it would seem that venom forms at the same time 
a more effective and a more economical means of protection, 
perfected by phylogenic modification through survival. 

At first blush the fauna of Papagueria displays less of modifi- 
cation than the flora in the direction of fitness to a rigorous en- 
vironment; and this relative immunity may be ascribed to the 
power of locomotion, which permits animals to emigrate from 
the most arid sections during the driest seasons, so that the 
mechanism of locomotion partly replaces the static mechanism 
of resistance developed in the stationary plant. On closer ex- 
amination it is found, however, that the immunity of the ani- 
mals from desert transformation is apparent rather than real j 
the animals, no less than the plants, are delicately adjusted to 
their environment; but the modification is superorganic or social 
rather than organic, as in the case of plants. This faunal modi- 
fication is of special interest to the student of desert tribes, in 
that it is a connecting link between man and lower organisms. 

THE C05PERATIVE CHARACTERISTICS OF LIFE 

Although the animals and plants of Papagueria display pro- 
nounce 1 individuality, and although some of their most prom- 
inent features are adaptive devices for securing independence, a 
striking peculiarity of the region is the cooperation among living 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] THE BEGINNING OF AGRICULTURE 365 

things. Along the lines of groundwater the species are measur- 
ably or wholly antagonistic to their neighbors of distinct species ; 
but over the arid uplands and in the broad waterless valleys all 
plants cooperate, not only with plants of distinct species but with 
animals, for the maintenance of common existence. Sometimes 
the cooperation involves little modification and no loss of indi- 
viduality on the part of the agents; this type may be called com- 
munal: in other cases the cooperation is so intimate that animals 
and plants are not only mutually helpful but so closely interde- 
pendent that neither could exist without the aid of the other; 
this type may be called cominenaaL 

Communality. — A mesquite springs up on the plain ; within 
two or three years the birds resting in its branches drop the seeds 
of cacti, some of which, like vines, are unable to stand alone ; 
and the cactus and the mesquite combine their armature of 
thonis for mutual protection. Then wind-blown grass seeds 
lodge about the roots, and grasses grow and seed beneath the 
sheltering branches ; and next small mammals seek the same 
protection and dig their holes among the roots, giving channels 
for the water of the ensuing rain and fertilizing the spot with re- 
jectamenta. Meantime the annual and semi-annual plants which 
maintain a precarious existence in the desert take root in the 
sheltered and fertilized soil beneath the growing cactus and mes- 
quite, and in season it becomes a miniature garden of foliage and 
bloomage. Then certain ants come for the seeds, certain flies 
and wasps for the nectar, and certain birds to nest in the branches- 
In this way a community is developed in which each participant 
retains individuality, yet in which each contributes to the general 
welfare. So advantageous is the communal arrangement that 
few organisms of the drier portions of Papagueria pursue inde- 
pendent careers ; the vast plains are dotted with communities or 
colonies from a few rods to sonle furlongs apart, while the inter- 
mediate stretches are practically lifeless; and the very soil is 
molded into a succession of hillocks with bare glades between, 
which persist even after the extermination of the colonies through 
climatal change or through human intervention. Thus do a large 
part of the plants and animals of the desert dwell together in 
harmony and mutual helpfulness ; for their energies are directed 
not so much against one another as against the rigorous environ- 
mental conditions growing out of dearth of water. 



Digitized by 



Google 



366 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

This communality does not involve loss of individuality, which 
prevails throughout Papagueria — indeed the plants and animals 
are characterized by an individuality greater than that displayed 
in regions in which perpetuity of the species depends less closely 
on the persistence of individuals. By reason of this individual- 
ity there is a certain enmity between the animal and vegetal col- 
onists. The small birds devour the seeds of the cactus and the 
squirrels nibble the beans of the mesquite, yet not all of the seeds 
are eaten, else a succeeding generation of birds and squirrels 
would starve ; the spiders suck the blood of the flies and the 
wasps paralyze the spiders to serve as food for their young, yet 
not all of the flies and spiders are slain, else their enemies would 
famish ; the hawks and eagles rend the small birds and squirrels, 
yet not all of the peaceful creatures are rent, else the birds of 
prey would perish ; deer and antelope and, since tl^e coming of 
white men, burros and kine crop the grass and browse on the 
tender twigs, yet not all the grass and young shoots are consumed, 
else the herbivores would suff*er and die. * In some respects the 
enmity of the colonists is more bitter than that of antagonistic 
species in humid lands; yet it is adjusted and developed into a 
marvelous solidarity under which the sum of possible vitality is 
increased apparently to a maximum ; singly or collectively the 
colonies support more plants than they would be able to support 
without the aid of their animal associates in the distribution of 
germs and in fertilization ; they support more insects than could 
live with a sparser flora; they support more herbivores than 
could be kept on a flora not fertilized by insects ; collectively the 
colonies support a carnivorous fauna which could not exist if 
either the herbivorous things or the plants on which they live 
were destroyed. If the vitality of the desert were limited to any 
one type the sum would be reduced nearly or quite to nothing- 
ness, for few of the plants and none of the animals are independ- 
ent of their communal associates. The solidarity of life in the 
desert is far-reaching and rises above the antagonism of individ- 
uals and species, for its strength is directed against the hard 
inorganic environment. 

Commensnlity, — Over the great alluvial aprons and in other 
tracts of firm but not too stony soil the fields of the farmer ant 
abound. Where the soil is particularly suitable the farms adjoin 
and cover most or all of the surface over scores of square miles. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] THE BEGINNING OF AGBICULTURE 367 

Each farm includes a clean and well-kept threshing-floor and 
drying-ground 5 to 30 feet across, with the passageway to the 
subterranean habitation in the center, and an annulus 3 to 20 
feet wide of luxuriant grass, on whose seeds the ants subsist. 
Across these annuli run great turnpikes often a foot wide, connect- 
ing farm with farm, sometimes for furlongs. In such a farming 
district there is practically no vegetation except the cultivated 
grass ; not only are other grasses and weeds kept down, but even 
the relatively mighty cactus, grease wood, and mesquite are appar- 
ently exterminated — certainly the prevailing plants of the region 
are absent from the most extensive and best cultivated farming 
districts. Thus the tiny formic farmers have developed an art of 
agriculture, have made conquest of the land for their needs, and 
have artificialized a plant apparently as completely as man has 
artificialized corn and rice; and in the process they have in- 
creased and multiplied to such an extent that they would die of 
famine in millions if their crop should fail, while it seems almost 
, certain that their crop-plant would quickly die out if the culti- 
vation and perhaps fertilization by the animals were withdrawn. 
Thus the rigorous environment of the desert has developed one 
of the most remarkable intelligences of the world, and has ren- 
dered two widely dififerent organisms interdependent. 

To the traveler the saguaro is, partly by reason of its loftiness, 
the most prominent element in the flora. Now the young stem 
of this cactus shoots with considerable rapidity as a rather slender 
column, at first without flower or fruit. After a period said to 
range from 5 to 10 years, and after a height varying from about 
5 to 15 or more feet has been attained, the plant begins to bear 
and the rate of upward growth diminishes. Thereafter it slowly 
thickens and still more slowly increases in height; and in time 
branches start out at right angles to the trunk and soon turn 
upward to form a giant candelabrum. Now it is noteworthy that 
the height at which the saguaro begins to flower and fruit varies 
from district to district with the height of the local flora; in a 
district of greasewood and scrubby chaparral the flowering may 
begin at a height of only 5 to 8 feet, while in a district of vigor- 
ous mesquite the flowering may not begin until the stem is 10 feet 
higher. It is noteworthy also that in the typical districts the 
branches, if not more than 3 to 5 in number, usually spring from 
just below the height at which flowering began (the su[)ernu- 



Digitized by 



Google 



368 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

merary branches spring either sporadically or above the ordinary 
level of the tops of the first crop), and that the branches always 
grow more slowly than the youthful trunk, perhaps no more 
rapidly than the well-grown trunk from which they spring. Thus 
the saguaro would appear to be in some way correlated with 
the surrounding vegetation, and while the correlation might be 
ascribed to soil differences it seems probable that the connection 
is more complex. On examining a large number of examples in 
many districts the impression is produced that the mindless aim 
of the saguaro, through the survival of the fittest, is first to rise 
above its neighbors rapidly as possible before expending energy 
in reproduction ; that it then rests from the activity of stem- 
growth and divides its energy between gradual expansion and 
strengthening of the trunk on the one hand and reproduction on 
the other, yet continues slowly pushing upward until it domi- 
nates the landscape; and that when the main stem becomes ex- 
travagantly high the branches consume most of the energy of 
growth. A reason for this erratic behavior is found when it is 
observed that the flowers are fertilized by insects and that the 
seeds are distributed by birds ; for it is manifest that the finding 
of the plants by flying things is facilitated by their great stature. 
Moreover the flowers are brilliantly white in color and attractive 
in perfume, while the fruit is gorgeously red and sweetly sapid- 
Still further it is manifest that the typical placing of branches is 
the most economical possible at once for the pumping of water 
from below and for bringing the flowers and fruits at the ex- 
tremities within easy sight of the cooperating insects and birds. 
So it would appear that the saguaro is a monstrosity in fact as 
well as in appearance — a product of miscegenation between plant 
and animal, probably depending for its form and life-history, if 
not for its very existence, on its commensals. Whether the small 
black insects that suck the flowers and distribute pollen are wholly 
dependent on the saguaro for existence, like the yucca moth on 
the yucca (as shown by the lamented Riley), is questionable ; and 
it is hardly probable that the birds that consume the saguaro 
fruit are so dependent on it as to have undergone actual differen- 
tiation of characters fitting them to the commensality. 

The lesson of cooperation among subhuman organisms in 
Papagueria is the solidarity of life to the extent that the vital 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] THE BEGINNING OF AGRICULTURE 369 

energies of plants and animals are directed primarily against the 
inorganic environment, rather than against kindred and alien 
organisms, while one of the results of this solidarity is the de- 
velopment of strong individuality. By reason of this cooperation 
the desert was in part reclaimed and a series of superorganic 
organizations— unconscious and undesigned but none the less 
beneficial — was developed before the adv^ent of man. In general, 
social and other institutions are a product of human intelligence 
alone ; and it is of interest to the anthropologist to learn of the 
growth of organizations among lower organisms, and of special 
interest to study the effect on mankind of an environment so 
peculiar as to produce subhuman communality. 

CHARACTERISTICS OF HUMAN LIFE 

The Papago Indians are the desert people of North America. 
They dwell among the cacti, paloverdes, mesquites, and barren 
plains of a region in which human enemies cannot survive. They 
are semi-nomadic in habit; they migrate northward in spring, 
southward in autumn, with tolerable regularity, and remove their 
rancherias with the starting and failing of springs and with other 
changes in water supply. In the wanderings of generations they 
have acquainted themselves with meteorologic conditions and 
with every constant and inconstant source of water ; thereby they 
have acquired an advantage over the invader, who is soon fain to 
retire or famish. 

One of the first characteristics of the Papago to strike the ob- 
server is his capacity for abstinence : The Papago vaquero will 
ride one, two, or even three days without drinking, under a sun 
so fierce and in an air so dry that the tenderfoot dies of thirst in 
a few hours; and a family of a dozen often confine themselves 
for weeks to the contents of a single olla daily for drinking, 
cooking, and all other purposes. So, too, they live on reduced 
rations of solid food for considerable periods without inconveni- 
ence ; indeed their habitual diet is moderate, even allowing for 
the condensed and nutritious character of some of their foods. 
When the interpreter was asked how the people of a rancheria 
were able to subsist for a winter on a certain limited supply of 
food, he replied, ** They eat only twice a day, and if there is not 
enough they eat only once.'' The abstinence from solid food is 
in a measure apparent only, for the Indians are disposed to glut- 



Digitized by 



Google 



370 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

ionize in idleness when opportunity arises, when their capacity 
for consuming is no less striking than their power of abstaining. 
This characteristic of the tribe is possessed by other primitive 
peoples, perhaps in nearly equal degree ; yet it is noteworthy as 
displayed among these Indians. 

Another characteristic of the Papago is strength and fleetness : 
A withered crone (shown in the photographs of the expedition), 
weighing apparently not more than 80 or 90 pounds, arose from 
the ground with a kiho containing a stone mortar 196 pounds in 
weight, carried this burden more than half a mile over a sandy 
road, and then let it down from her back, and this without per- 
cei)tible exhaustion or attracting particular attention among her 
neighbors. Many equally noteworthy feats of strength and en- 
durance might be enumerated. Fleetness is displayed in the 
tribal game of kashaneku, or football, in which it is not unusual 
for contestants to run, kicking the ball before them, 30 or 40 
miles in an afternoon. It should be observed that fleetness has 
apparently declined among the Papago since the introduction of 
the horse ; yet they and other desert tribes have always been 
noted as runners : Bartlett found the Opata couriers to run 40 
or 50 leagues (105 to 131 miles) in 24 hours, and Lumholz men- 
tions that a Tarahumari Indian has been known to carry a letter 
nearly 800 miles in 5 days (these tribes belong to the same family 
as the Papago), while the Seri, who have never acquired the 
horse, are noted as the runners, par excellence, of this region of run- 
ners. Thus, although perhaps not especially distinguished, the 
Papago Indians are noted for strength, celerity, and endurance. 

A third characteristic is apparent longevity : In every rancheria 
wrinkled and gray grandames and grandsires are found, gener- 
ally in considerable numbers, and usually engaged in arduous 
labors ; it is the aged woman who bears the heaviest burden, 
and her consort who performs the hardest field task, for the 
family. It is impossible to obtain exact figures concerning the 
age of the old people, but the proportion of the active aged is 
manifestly much larger than among civilized peoples. In this 
respect, too, the Papago is more or less like neighboring tribes, 
all of whom claim patriarchs and matriarchs who have far out- 
lived the normal span of life. 

Combining these and other characteristics of the desert tribe, 
it appears that they are in harmony with the characteristics of 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] THE BEGINNING OF AGRICULTURE 371 

the animals and plants ; yet they are not so well developed as to 
clearly distinguish the Papago from other tribes, especially from 
those of other portions of the arid regions. When the physio- 
logic or biotic characteristics of plants, animals, and men are 
compared it appears that the plants are most and mankind least 
modified in the direction of fitness to environment, the subhuman 
animal occupying an intermediate position. 

Turning to the institutional or social aspect of the tribe, certain 
fairly distinctive characteristics are found, yet they are measur- 
ably masked by reason of the transition from the primitive state 
to the accultural condition initiated with the introduction of 
European crop-plants and stock. Fortunately there is a sufficient 
vestige of primitive culture to indicate many of the primitive 
customs. The Papago combined the chase for animal quarry 
with the search for vegetal foods ; he gathered the fruits of vari- 
ous cacti and mesquite beans in season ; he collected indurated 
pericarps and berries for beads ; in his southward migrations he 
obtained seeds of corn and pumpkin as well as native beans — 
indeed it is probable that the primary purpose of the migration 
was the collection of seeds, — and on his return in the rainy season 
these were planted about the water holes and arroyo deltas, and 
in time the crop was gathered. There are indications that a 
tribal organization grew out of these customs ; but this question 
need not now be pursued. It suffices to note that, as a consumer 
of seeds and fruits and as a distributer of seeds, the Papago 
entered into the vital solidarity of the desert and contributed 
toward the perpetuation of species that were good in his sight. 
In this way he made partial conquest of the soil and the produc- 
tions thereof for his own behoof, and still further increased the 
sum of desert life : yet his conquest of the land at the time of 
the coming of the Spaniard was far from complete, apparently 
less complete than the conquest made by the farmer ant; and 
the historical Papago has never controlled the scant waters of 
his domain, but sought them where they chanced to occur in the 
hazard of storm and sun, just as he chased game and hunted 
wild fruits. 

For three and a half centuries the Papago has been in contact 
with an alien culture, and there is evidence that during a pre- 
ceding century or more hesuff*ered through the repeated invasion 
48 



Digitized by 



Google 



372 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

of his borders by his hereditary enemy, the Apache ; thus the 
indigenous Papago culture can hardly be considered as* inde- 
pendently autochthonous or indigenous — the process of culture 
development was undoubtedly effected by external influence. 
Fortunately the prehistoric remains of Papagueria throw light 
on an antecedent culture which appears to have been essentially 
indigenous ; and there is reason for opining that the prehistoric 
peoples were the direct ancestors of the Papago and certain other 
southwestern tribes. 

The prehistoric remains comprise greatly reduced ruins of vil- 
lages and irrigation works, as well as " las trincheras " (or in- 
trenched mountains), with included or associated pottery of fine 
texture and finish, and highly polished stone implements ; these 
relics being abundant and distributed over a considerable part of 
Papagueria. Now, on comparing the ruins with modern artifi- 
cial works (including those of the sedentary Mexicans who have 
pushed far into the arid district) certain important differences 
are found : In the first place the ancient villages were much larger 
than the modern rancherias of the Papago ; in the second place 
the ruins are much more numerous than the Papago rancherias 
and Mexican settlements combined ; again the ancient irrigation 
works (of which the Papago have none) are much more extensive 
than the modern acequias, dams, and reservoirs of the Mexicans ; 
and finally the trincheras are unique. The great extent of the 
prehistoric irrigation works is especially impressive; the ancient 
acequia in Arivaca valley was raised above the flood-plain and 
150 feet in width, the confining banks being occupied by nearly 
continuous rows of habitations, while the modern acequia, put in 
through American enterprise, is a simple ditch 8 to 10 feet wide ; 
and a single one of the many prehistoric villages in the valley 
comprised 180 habitations, or fully twice as many as those of the 
modern American, Mexican, and Indian inhabitants. It may be 
noted also that a village in this valley and one or two others else- 
where have remains of what appear to be corrals containing 
tanques for water, indicating the domestication of a rather small 
animal (perhai)s the vicuna). Viewed collectively, the prehis- 
toric remains indicate an ancient population much more exten- 
sive than that of the present ; for the great number of the villages 
may not be ascribed to successive occupation, since the irrigation 
ditches are so large and carried so far up the valley sides as to be 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] THE BEGINNING OF AGRICULTURE 373 

adequate for the supply of a large contemporaneous population 
and at the same time to be inconceivably extravagant if only a 
small population were to be supplied at a given time. It is of 
course possible that the prehistoric precipitation was greater than 
that of the historical period, but there is no special warrant for this 
supposition, which is moreover inlierently improbable and also 
unnecessary. It may be observed summarily that the archeologic 
and ethnologic data in the region indicate a numerous and peace- 
ful agricultural population at a period probably between two and 
five centuries before the Spanish invasion, and suggest (1) that 
this population ]>egan to suffer from forays by a predatory enemy 
dwelling in the high Sierra, (2) that the system of forays gradu- 
ally grew into warfare for vengeance and reprisal, (3) that the 
peaceful folk found a temporary refuge in the trincheras, and 
(4) that the irrigation works were finally destroyed, whereby the 
valley tribe was all but annihilated and driven partly into the 
remoter desert fastnesses, partly into the more northerly valleys 
tributary to the Colorado — the desert remnant being the immedi- 
ate ancestors of the Papago. It is not necessary to dwell on the 
details of this succession or even to affirm its verity beyond the 
trustworthiness of a good working hypothesis ; the essential point, 
which seems to be indisputable, is that the district supported a 
numerous agricultural or largely agricultural population, who 
were able to maintain themselves, despite the prevailing aridity, 
by means of an elaborate system of irrigation. This population 
and culture seem to have been essentially indigenous, and, up to 
the time of decadence, not greatly influenced by external condi- 
tions. Accordingly, during the prehistoric period represented by 
the ruins, the indigenes of Papagueria made conquest, not only 
of the soil as do the modern Papago, but of the waters ; and 
thereby their culture rose to a higher plane, yet a plane which 
may justly be regarded as normal to the desert. 

The lesson of human life in the desert is found in the coopera- 
tion between men, animals, and plants in such wise that the sum 
of vitality is multiplied and at the same time subordinated to 
intelligence : Man consumes fruits and seeds, yet distributes the 
germs of plants useful to him ; as he advances in culture he 
conserves the germs unto the season of germination ; he either 
neglects or directly destroys useless and noxious plants ; and in 



Digitized by 



Google 



374 THK AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

all these ways he improves the flora. Man subsists in part on 
game, yet, under the economy of solidarity, he does not exter- 
minate the game animals and thereby cut off a supply at its 
source, but rather cooperates with them in a communality anal- 
ogous to that between the animals and plants ; he aids, albeit 
unconsciously, the herbivores in escaping the carnivores, and for 
this service they pay tithes in flesh ; he even enters into coopera- 
tion with carnivores, such as the coyote, which he spares to be- 
come his scavengers, and they reciprocate by forming a semi- 
conscious cordon of protectors about the camp or villiige ; and in 
these and other ways a partial cultivation of plants and domesti- 
cation of animals is brought about collectivelj'', and man enters 
into and dominates the solidarity of desert life. Then if peace 
persists he begins to transport and preserve water, and this is the 
germ of irrigation by which the wilderness is made to blossom 
and by which both plants and animals are multiplied and arti- 
flcialized. 

INTERRELATIONS OF LIFE 

When the plants, animals, and men of the desert are compared 
with respect to physiologic or ontogenic characters, it is found 
that the stationary plants have suffered greatest modification, the 
environment-driven animals less, and the environment-molding 
humans least of all; but when they are compared with respect 
to collective or demotic modification, it becomes manifest that 
the moveless plants are least, the moving animals more, and 
prevising men most profoundly modified. 

When the life of the desert is compared with the vital phe- 
nomena of humid regions, it is found that under the pressure 
against an adverse inorganic environment, the beginning of 
the control of environment springs lower on the stem of phyl- 
ogenic development — ;that the desert species, genera, and orders 
enter into a mutually beneficial cooperation while yet the rain- 
fed organisms are frittering energy in internecine strife. Thus 
it would appear that among plants and animals, as among men, 
hard necessity is the mother of progress. It would also appear 
that among plants and animals, as among men, strength lies in 
union ; and progress in combination leads to solidarity. 

The great lesson of plants, animals, and men in the desert is 
found in the modification of organisms and the development of 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] THE BEGINNING OF AGRICULTURE 375 

organizations: Under the hard environment, organisms cease 
to strive against one another and each strives against inorganic 
nature ; under the common pressure they are forced into union, 
and thus cooperation is initiated. Now there are three stages 
in cooperation ; the first stage is that in which the organisms 
merely stand together for mutual protection, but retain undi- 
minished individuality — this is communality ; the second stage 
is that in which individualities blend through miscegenation be- 
tween unlike organisms, as between the yucca and yucca moth — 
this is commensalit}' ; the third stage is that of voluntary inclu- 
sion and exclusion of organisms for the common welfare of the 
solidarity or for the especial weal of the dominant organism, 
whether ant or man — this is the stage unwittingly, yet not un- 
happily, called agriculture. 

The lesson of life in Papagueria may easily, and within limits 
safely, be extended to other regions ; for the phenomena and 
relations are more or less closely paralleled elsewhere. It may 
appear paradoxical to affirm that it is in arid districts, where 
agriculture is most arduous, that agriculture began; yet the 
affirmation is not gainsaid but rather supported by history, and 
is established beyond reasonable doubt by the evidence of the 
desert organisms and organizations. 

So, whatever its last estate, in its beginning agriculture is the 
art of the desert. 



Digitized by 



Google 



376 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VllI 



THE ALGONQUIAN APPELLATIVES OF THE SIOUAN 
TRIBES or VIRGINIA* 

BY WILLIAM WALLACE TOOKER 

The issue, almost simultaneously, of two valuable bulletins 
from the Bureau of American Ethnology — " The Siouan Tribes 
of the East," by James Mooney, and '*The Archeolocry of the 
James and Potomac Valleys," by Gerard Fowke — ^brings to ray 
desk such a collation of facts, historical, geographical, and archeo- 
logical, that it enables me to supplement their efforts from another 
field of research, and at the same time to contribute additional 
memoranda to the nomenclature of our native races, by pre- 
senting analyses of the Algonquian appellatives of these people, 
whose tribal synonymy, confederacy, and migrations have been 
carefully discussed by the first, and the archeology of whose 
territory, from personal researches and excavations, has been 
the theme of the second. 

When Captain John Smith and his companions firat discov- 
ered the falls of the James river, in May, 1607, the native guides 
who accompanied the explorers related remarkable stories of a 
nation living farther up the stream toward the mountains, 
called the Monacans, who, at the time of the falling of the leaf, 
came down and invaded their country. The fear of these 
western Indians was such that no inducements the discoverers 
made could persuade these Powhatans to guide them to the 
habitations of these people. The stories, however, made so deep 
an impression upon the minds of the adventurers that in the 
following spring Captain Smith was assigned to the command 
of sixty men, in order to discover and to search for the com- 
modities of the Monacans, so as to load a ship for home. But 
so unseasonal)le was the time and so opposed was the captain 
of the vessel to load with anything but the " phantastical gold," 
as it is expressed, which he, as well as others, believed was ob- 
tainable among the Monacans^ that it caused much ill-feeling to 



* Read iK'fore Section H, AmericHD Association for the Advaacement of Science, 
ut Springfield, Mass., SeptemY>er 3, 1896. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] SIOUAN TRIBAL APPELLATIVES 377 

arise among the colonists ; for Captain Smith, having been of a 
more practical and conservative nature than many of his asso- 
ciates, preferred to load the ship with cedar, which he justly 
claimed was a more " present dispatch than either durt or the 
reports of an uncertain discovery.'' After considerable delay the 
ship was finally loaded with cedar, and the attempt to discover 
the country of the Monacans was postponed * In the fall another 
effort was made, when Captain Newport, with one hundred and 
twenty men, went forth for the invasion of the unknown country. 
Arriving at the falls, they marched b}' land some forty miles in 
two days and a half, and then returned by the same path. They 
discovered two towns of the Monacans, called Massinacack and 
Mf/whemenchouch. On their return they were delayed by search- 
ing in many places for supposed mines, which was really the 
object of the expedition, having with them a refiner, who per- 
suaded them to believe that he extracted a small amount of silver 
from the rock, and, as they relate, better stuff might be had for 
the digging.! 

Smith condenses the information which he subsequently 
gleaned from the natives as follows: " Vpon the head of the 
Powhatans [James river] are the Monacans, whose chiefe habita- 
tion is at Rasauweak; vnto whom the Mowhenienchughes, the Mas- 
sinnacacks, the Monahassanughs, the Monaskka'panoughs, and other 
nations pay tributes. Vpon the head of the river of Toppahanock 
[Rappahannock] is a people called Mannahoacks, To these are 
contributers the Tauxanias, the Shackaconias, the OntponeaSj the 
Tegninateos, the Whonkentenes, the Stegarakes, the Hasslnnangaes^ 
and divers others, all confederates with the Monacans, though 
many different in language, and be very barbarous, lining for the 
most part of wild beasts and fruits." X 

One of the Mannahoa^ks, belonging to the tribe called the 
Hamnnungaes, whom Smith captured upon the upper waters of 
the river Rappahannock, when interpreted, said that the Mona- 
cans were their neighbors and friends, and did dwell, as they, in 
the hilly countries, by small rivers, living upon roots and fruits, 
but chiefly by hunting. 

This brief summary embraces nearly all the knowledge that 
we possess relating to these tribes during the period of settle- 
ment. After 1609 — although undoubtedly often in contact with 

• Arljcr's Smith, p. 106. f Ibid., p. 438. % Ibid , pp. 306, 367. 



Digitized by 



Google 



378 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

the settlers through trade and otherwise — nothing whatever was 
recorded or preserved relating to them for over sixty years. 
Even the significations of these tribal appellatives, correct in- 
terpretations of which are absolutely necessary for an exhaustive 
and conclusive study of these people, have been forgotten for 
many generations. 

The questions that now arise, and which I shall endeavor to 
answer, are these : First, What were the commodities of the 
Monacans that Smith was instructed to search for? Second, 
What was it that gave rise to lasting impressions in the minds 
of the Virginia colonists that valuable mines of copper, iron, 
gold, and silver were to be found in the same region? Third, 
Can any of the Mannahoacks be identified with tribes or peoples 
of a later historic period ? Fourth, To what language must we 
assign these and other names of Captain John Smith ? 

Mr James Mooney, in his " Siouan Tribes of the East," has 
ably demonstrated by his synopsis of early historical references, 
by his identification of the geographical locations of the tribes 
in after years, and by his conclusions derived therefrom, that the 
Monacans were not the ancestors of the Titscaroras, as has been 
accepted ever since the time of Jefferson, the sponsor for this 
baptism, but were the progenitors of those people, who were sub- 
sequently, by a fortunate series of circumstances, identified by 
Horatio Hale as speaking a primitive dialect of the Siouan tongue, 
thus indicating that the original home of the Siouan family must 
have been in the east. Therefore it is unnecessary at this time 
and place to elaborate further on these points that Mr Hale has 
so learnedly presented from linguistic sources and which Mr 
Mooney has augmented and confirmed from historical channels, 
but to accept it as an incontrovertible conclusion that the Mona- 
cans and their tribal confederacy as such, including the Manna- 
hoacksj must be assigned to the Siouan linguistic stock. 

These truths accepted, I will proceed to analyze those terms, 
descriptive in their character, which we have found applied to 
these people in the early days of the period of colonization. 
These appellatives were bestowed upon them by their neighbors 
on the east, the Powhatans and their confederates, who are well 
known to have been a branch of the Algonquian linguistic stock. 
Therefore there ought to arise no question whatever in the mind 
of the critical student of Smith's works against the dictum now 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] SIOUAN TRIBAL APPELLATIVES 379 

submitted, that every one of these terms, without a single excep- 
tion, are necessarily Algonquian, and consequently should be 
analyzed and translated by the aid of that language, no matter 
what the nativity of the people themselves may have been. This 
declaration will also apply to every aboriginal name occurring 
upon Smith's map of Virginia, for he was never in contact with 
other than an Algonquian long enough to learn a name. Besides, 
the historical evidence would seem to indicate that the greater 
number of these tenns were heard spoken from the lips of the 
Powhatans long before the colonists saw a Monacan. For in- 
stance, Captain Newport's guide and interpreter was a savage of 
Powhatans called Namontack,* Newport named a mine six miles 
above the falls after him because he discovered it.f Smith's in- 
ter))reter while among the MannnkoacksYfas an Algonkin,as was 
also his Tockwogh interpreter while interviewing the Sasquesa- 
hanoughs. His very brief parley with the Mdssawomecks, as he 
relates, was entirely by signs.J Therefore it seems to me that 
failure would be necessarily foreordained in seeking for other 
than Algonquian elements in any of the aboriginal names of 
Virginia as bequeathed to us by Captain John Smith. 

William Strachey, secretary of the colony, 1609 to 1612, who 
was more or less familiar with the language of the Powhatans 
and has left us a valuable vocabulary of that dialect, derives the 
name Monacan from Manohdcan (or Monowhauk)^ "a sword," § 
while Heckewelder, through the Delaware, translates it as "a 
spade or any implement for digging the soil,'' corrupted from 
Monahacan,\\ Heckewelder is so rarely correct in his place-name 
etymologies that he should have due credit for this suggestion, 
for the fact ap[)ears that both of these authorities are correct in 
their identification of the verbal element of the name, but not in 
the grammar, application, or true analysis of the term as applied 
to a people. 

The prefix Mona is undoubtedly the verb signifying '' to dig," 
occurring in the same primitive form in many Algonquian dia- 
lects, from the Cree Momia, in the far north, to the Narragansett 
Mona, on the east, and is reproduced at the south in the Pow- 
hatan Monohacan, *' sword," literally a digging instrument, from 

* Arber's Smith, p. 438. 2 Mooney, p. 26. 

t Strachey, p. 31. |Hecke welder's Names, ed. by Reichel, p. 280. 

X Arber's Smith, p. 422. 

49 



Digitized by 



Google 



380 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

Mono^ " to dig," prefixed to -hacav^ an inatrunientive noun suffix 
used only as a terminal in compound words denotive of things 
artificial,* so designated because so used by the Indians when 
purchased from the settlers. The same verb figures in other 
Powhatan cluster words, thus revealing its identity ; for instance, 
in Mondscunnemu, " to cleanse the ground to fit it for seed,'' mak- 
ing it the equivalent of the Narragansett Monaskunneinun ; Dela- 
ware Muridskamen, " to weede." It will be found by analyzing 
carefully the various synonyms of the term Monacans, or Mona- 
?iacaws,t with its English plural as displayed, that it resolves 
itself into the components of Mond-ackfanongh, from Moim^ " to 
dig;" ack, ** land or earth," with its generic plural of -anovgh, 
" nation or people " — that is, " people who dig the earth " — the 
phonetic sounds of which were shortened into Monacana by the 
English, which may be freely and correctly translated as the 
*' diggers or miners." The term as such probably designated 
the whole confederacy collectively. This abbreviation of the 
sounds of tribal appellatives is characteristic of English notation, 
as in Mohaioks, from Matiqua^iog ; Mohegans, from Manhlgan-enck ; 
PequotSy from Pequttx/og^ and others. 

The '^ chiefe habitation " of the Monacans, according to both 
Smith and Strachey, was at Rasauweak, or Rassawek—a state- 
ment that is fully confirmed by analysis of the name. Its earli- 
est notation, however, appears in the Relation of Captain Gabriel 
Archer,J which Professor Arber suggests may be the official 
report presented by Captain Newport on his first return, in July, 
1607, therefore possibly antedating Smith, in the very corrupt 
form of Monanacah Rahowacah, which, to follow Smith, should 
have been more correctly printed as Monacanough Rassauwek, 
thus indicating that there was originally a grammatical con- 
tinuity between the words as uttered by the savages of the lower 
James. Frequently the sounds represented by w in some of the 
northern Algonquian dialects is replaced by r in the Powhatan 
and other cognate dialects. Allowing for these alternating 
sounds, or what Dr Boas terms alternating apperceptions of one 
and the same sound,§ the derivation of Rassaiiwek is probably 
from ivdssau, " it is bright, it glistens or shines," which, with a 
suffix applicable to the object described,|| was a term much em- 

♦ Howae Grammar of the Cree, p. 182. | American Anthropologist, vol. 2, p. 52. 

t Smith, p. 2. y Tooker; American Antiquarian, vol. 17, p. 8. 

X Arber'a Smith, p. xl?i. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 18951 SIOUAN TRIBAL APPELLATIVES 381 

ployed by many Algonquian tribes to designate any kind of 
white metal or mineral, but which in this case, I believe, for 
many reasons, was a synonym for mica* — an article of trade 
and highly valued by the tribes of the west and east, as indi- 
cated by its discovery in the mounds of Ohio, in the graves of 
Virginia, and elsewhere. The terminal affix -wek or -weak (= 
Massachusetts wek or week), " house or home," is the conditional 
third person singular of the verb — " when (or where) he is at 
home." Thus we have, in accordance with this analysis, Mond- 
ackfafiovgh'Wassau-wek, "the home of the mica diggers," or 
" home of the people who dig the earth for something bright." 
Gerard Fowkef informs us: '* Several mica mines have been 
opened within a mile of the court-house [Amelia county]. The 
miners report that in digging they sometimes discover small 
piles of mica which have been detached from the rock and 
heaped together. These pieces, usually of poor quality, as if 
rejected by the workers, are doubtless from aboriginal excava- 
tions, as they lie beneath several feet of accumulated earth, and 
there is no tradition of early mica mining in this section by the 
whites." 

Although this discovery is not exactly in the direction of 
Rassauwek, as indicated by Smith on his map, it is in the terri- 
tory of the Monacans, and fully confirms the foregoing interpre- 
tation, in the fact that mica mining was one of the industries 
carried on by the early occupants of this valley. The exact site 
of Rassauwek has not been as yet fully established. Smith 
locates it between the two branches of the river ; but Mr Fowke, 
who has devoted considerable personal attention to the question, 
says the point of land between the two rivers is irregular, infer- 
tile, rather difficult of access, and nothing is found to show that 
it was ever occupied by the Indians. On the other hand. Elk 
island, in Goochland county, just below Columbia, bears every 
indication of Indian occupancy, and many specimens of steatite 
pottery, some rough, others tolerably well finished, have been 
found on the island, whereas such are extremely rare elsewhere 
in the vicinity. From which he concludes: "Altogether it is 
very probable that the main town of the Monacans was on Elk 
island." But he describes another Indian settlement, farther 

♦ Compare Wdsogolnmin', mica, Micraac (Rand), and W6sei\nWchk, glass, 
t " Archeologic Investigations," p. 10. 



Digitized by 



Google 



382 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

up upon the left bank of the Rivanna, between that river and 
the James, which corresponds more to Smith's location. While 
suggesting this may have been the site of Rassauwek^ he thinks 
the evidence favors Elk island. Smith's location of tribes out 
of the horizon of his own researches and explorations must be 
regarded as approximate only, although the relations of the 
Indians, which were his sources of information as regards un- 
known countries, were in the main quite accurate, as later dis- 
coveries bore witness. From Mr Fowke's description of the 
island, it may have been at one time the abiding place of an- 
other wing of the confederacy, which the occurrence of steatite 
vessels would seem to indicate. 

This wing of the Mormcans^ the Moiiahasaanughes, were noted 
down by Smith both on his map and in his works. Strachey * 
places them at the foot of the mountains. It will be observed 
that we have here precisely the same verbal prefix as in the 
former term, and it should unquestionably sustain the same 
derivation of Mona, " to dig." Now as to the second component, 
'hassan. In the Massachusetts and in some other dialects hdssuv, 
hdssin, or dssin, with or without the English aspirate, signifies " a 
rock," which, together with its generic plural of -anoagh, " peo- 
ple," gives us Mond'hassun'arwiigh, " people who dig the rock " — 
that is to say, they were " miners or quarry men," which fully 
describes in a most remarkable way those people who excavated 
in the steatite or soapstone quarries. Many of these quarries, 
situated in the valleys and among the hills and forests once occu- 
pied by these })rimitive miners, have been investigated by Mr 
F. H. ('ushing, Mr Gerard Fowke, and others. The accumu- 
lated debris of the diggings, the abandoned ))ot-forms, the frag- 
ments of steatite vessels, and the rude digging implements of" 
stone bear witness of aboriginal labor through a long series of 
years under like conditions. The quarries, especially of Amelia 
county, studied by Mr Gushing, were of considerable extent, 
and must have been worked long anterior to the period of 
colonization — a })eriod from which we must necessarily date its 
decline. 

In Nahijssan, of John Lederer, and Hanohnskie, of Batt, we find 
synonyms of Mond-hassan^anoughy as suggested by Mr Mooney ; 
for the guides and interpretei"s of both of these travelers were 

* History of Travail le, p. 48. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] SIOUAN TRIBAL APPELLATIVES 383 

Alpfonqiiiaiis or spoke the language, and these were forms un- 
doubtedly current among the settlers and traders in their time. 
Farther to the northwest, as laid down on Smith's mai) and 
referred to but once in his history, appears another tribe of the 
Afonncans, under the appellative of the Monasukapnnonglis or 
Monaakhapanoughs, As is evident to all, we have here displayed 
another name with the same verbal prefix, as in the other cases, 
signifying to dig. Surely this confederacy well deserved the 
title bestowed upon them collectively of being the " diggers." 
Analysis of this word, as in the previous terms presented, gives us 
Mona-sukapan'anoughy ** people who dig the sukapan or aickapany 
What is the '^ sukapan^^ f is the problem that now confronts us. 
This is comparatively easy of solution, although seemingly dif- 
ficult at the first glance. The native of Hassunungae^ when 
interj)reted , stated, among other matters, that the Monacans did 
dwell as they and lived upon roots. The generic name for roots, 
tubers, or bulbs was pen, varying in some dialets to pun, pan, 
pin, pon, or bun. Therefore the " sitkapans " were the tubers of 
a plant which these barbarous people dug for food and was 
perhaps their staple product. We, no doubt, find the parallel 
of " Sukapan " in Sagapon (or Sackapim), a component of a place 
name on Long Island, New York, in the term Sagapon' nek, now 
applied to a post-office and hamlet in the town of Southampton, 
from the first syllable of which the village of Sag Harbor derives 
its name. The Micmac (Rand) Seguban, "a ground-nut," is 
another parallel. One of the towns of the Kiiskarawaokes (Inter 
known as the Nanticokes), on the eastern shore of the Chesa- 
j)eake, had the same name. Smith says : * *' Here doth inhabite 
the people of Saraplnagh (= ground-nut people), Xause, Arserk, 
and Nantaqnack, the best Marchants of all other Salva<?es." On 
Long Island the name was applied to the common ground-nut 
{Apios tuberosa, a leguminous, twining plant, producing clusters 
of dark purple flowers and having a root tuberous and i)leasant 
to the taste), which are still to be found in great abundance at a 
swamp in the vicinity known as '' Sagg swamp." The prefix 
which denotes the species cannot in all cases be identified, hut 
the generic name with its localizing affix is easily recognizable. 
Not long since, while in conversation with an intelligent Chippe- 
way Indian in regard to this particular prefix, he informed me 

♦ Arber'sSraith, p. 416. 



Digitized by 



Google 



384 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

that it denoted a species which were "hard or difficult to get out 
of the ground." While the Massachusetts siogkke, " hard or diffi- 
cult," may resemble the Long Island sa(/ga (or sacka) in sound, 
I am inclined to believe he was mistaken, and that the Long 
Island sagga and the Powhatan suka (or sicka) are identical, and 
are the parallel of the Cree sugge, "thick, close together"* — a 
derivation that full3' describes the tubers of the Apios tuberosa, 
which grow close together, strung in clusters on a fibrous root. 
It was probably the same plant discovered by Captain Gosnold 
on one of the Elizabeth isles, on his visit to the New England 
coast in 1602, which John Brierton, one of the voyagers, de- 
scribes as " ground nuts as big as egges, as good as Potatoes, 
and 40 on a string, not two ynches vnder ground." f Dr J. W. 
Harshberger, of the University of Pennsylvania, informs me 
that ^^ Apios tuberosa, or, as it is now called, Apios apios, by the 
recent upheaval in systematic names, is a plant of wide distribu- 
tion and occurs abundantly in Virginia. I have two recorded 
localities for it — Jamestown and southwestern Virginia — and it 
is therefore to be found on the upper James." It was un- 
doubtedly the same plant seen by Hariot on the Roanoke,J viz : 
'"Openauk are a kind of roots of round forme, some of the bignes 
of walnuts, some far greater, which are found in moist and marish 
grounds, growing many together, one by another, in ropes, or as 
tliogh they were fastened with a string. Being boiled or sodden, 
they are a very good meate." Asa Gray, the eminent botanist, 
said : "' Had civilization started in America instead of Asia, our 
ground-nut would have been the first developed esculent tuber, 
and would have probably held its place in the first rank along 
with potatoes and sweet potatoes of later acquisition. Thus the 
Mond-sukapnn'anough were " a people who dig ground-nuts." 
Compare Otchipwe (Baraga) Nin Mond apinl, "I dig potatoes." 
In the historic name of Saponin as applied to a tribe in the an- 
nals of Virginia and North Carolina, and as evident by its 
generic pon^ we have all that remains of the original appellative, 
and I believe Mr Mooney (p. 27) is correct in suggesting its 
derivation therefrom. 

The two tribes visited by Captain Newport, and mentioned by 
Smith as the Mowhemenchughes (or Mouhemenchoach) and the 
Massliincaks, do not seem to come under the same head as the 



* Howse Grammar of the Cree, p. 40. f Arber'a Smith p. 334. ♦ NarrAtive, p. 26. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] SIOUAN TIUBAL APPELLATIVKS 385 

others in being " diggers," although they were confederate or 
tributary with them. The description of some as being very 
barbarous, living for the most part on wild beasts and fruits, 
shows that they were not to any extent agriculturists and fur- 
nishes us a clue to the meaning of the term, when divided into 
its components of Mowhe-menM itghes. The verbal prefix Mowhe 
(or Mouhe) in its sounds is identical with the Delaware mmve, 
Narragansett Mom (or Mouwi)^ '* to gather," *' to bring together," 
"to pick up," etc. Mench is evidently the generic for small 
fruits or grain, in the plural form, the parallel of the Narragan- 
sett weneash, Micmac Menich, Delaware Mlnak, "fruit or berry," 
which gives us with its animate plural affix -nk (or -ugh)^ 
Mowhe-menMugh, "those who gather fruit" — that is to say, they 
were a hunting people, who lived to a great extent on fruit or 
wild berries. There is a possibility and I would suggest that 
in the Mahoc, who occupied the territory between the falls of the 
river and the mountains at the time of Lederer's visit in 1670, 
were the survivors of the Moivhe-meuMughes of Smith, and that 
in the term " Mahoc " we find a survival of the Algonquian term 
for the fruit-pickers. 

Mamnacack is marked as a king's residence on Smith's map. 
Strachey says : * " The neerest called Moiohemlncke, the farthest 
Maa^innncock, distant one from another fourteen miles." Its 
other synonyms are Massinnacacks f and Mamnacak.X This term 
differs from the others in being simply a place-name, showing no 
action as performed by a verb as displayed in the previous inter- 
pretations and as evidenced by its locative termination. As to 
its analysis, 1 would suggest that m' is the impersonal particle, 
asidn, " stones," which, with its substantival ac and locative suffix 
ak (= Narragansett auk-it, Massachusetts ohklt, Delaware hacking), 
gives us M\i8shi-aC'ak, " at the place of stones." It is quite pos- 
sible that it may refer to the " pyramid of stones " which John 
Lederer observed in 1670 near the village of Monacan, ten days' 
travel above the falls. He was told that it represented the num- 
ber of a colony which left a neighboring country because of over- 
population, a condition easily reached among hunting tribes. 
The emigrants, having been chosen by lot, had come to the present 
location under the leadership of a chief called Monack, from whom 
they derived the name of Monacan, Mr Mooney comments on 

* Hist, of Gravaille, p. 131. t Smith, p. 71. J Ibid., p. 4.38. 



Digitized by 



Google 



386 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

this statement: * "As the explorer stopped with them only long 
enough to learn the road to the next tribe, his version of their 
migration legend must be taken with due allowance." This 
pyramid of stones was probably erected for reasons similar to 
that mentioned in the patent for Livingston Manor, New York, 
dated November 4, 1684 : f " Place called by the natives Wa- 
icanaquassick (or, better [i)p. 696, 697], Mmoanaquassick = place 
where stones are gathered together), where the heaps of stones 
lye . . . the said heaps of stones upon which the Indians 
throw on another as they passe by from an ancient custom among 
them." 

The Mannahock or MannaJwack confederacy consisted of per- 
haps a dozen tribes, of which the names of the principal eight 
have been preserved, although only four of them are shown on 
Smith's map. Smith's own acquaintance with them seems to 
have been limited to an encounter with a large hunting party 
in 1608. Smith, however, was a man who knew how to improve 
an opportunit}' ; and having the good fortune to take one of the 
Hassinaiuigiies prisoner, he managed to get from him, by the aid 
of his guide and interpreter Mosco, a very fair idea of the tribes 
and territories of the confederacy, their alliances and warfare, 
their manner of living, and their cosmogony, and succeeded be- 
fore his departure in arranging a precarious peace between them 
and their hereditary enemies, the Powhatan confederacy. 

Smith's intepreter on this occasion was a savage of Wighco- 
comoco, at the mouth of the Potomac river, and the names of 
these Mannahock tribes are of his rendering, and, as the fact ap- 
pears, are Algonquian interpretations of Siouan names. Manna- 
hock, however, is an exception, and is evidently his descriptive 
term for the whole of these people collectively and did not in- 
dicate a separate tribe. I would suggest its analysis from the 
indefinite particle m' prefixed to the verbal radical an, *'to be 
more than," " to surpass," united to the verb hahdnu or ahCinu, 
"he laughs;" ahdnuock, "they are merry;" or, as the term 
would be rendered in the Massachusetts or Narragansett, M'an- 
ahdnaock, " they are very merry, or a very merry people." The 
verbal root is probably imitative. Smith remarks, in striking 
confirmation of this derivation : J "And so we left foure or five 
hundred of our merry Mannahocks singing, dancing, and making 

• Siouan Tribes, p. 29. f I>oc't Hist. N. Y., vol. 3, p. 624. X Arber's Smith, p. 429. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] SIOUAN TRIBAL APPELLATIVES 387 

merry." Dr Hale remarks of Nikonha, from whom he discov- 
ered the Siouan affinity of the Tutelos:* "A wrinkled, smiling 
countenance. Not only in physiognomy, but also in demeanor 
and character, he differed strikingly from the grave and com- 
posed Iroquois among whom he dwelt. The lively, mirthful 
disposition of his race survived in full force in its latest member. 
His replies to our inquiries were intermingled with many jocose 
remarks and much good-humored laughter." In a verity, his 
portrait shows all these characteristics of his race, which, together 
with the translation of their Algonquian appellative, is collateral 
evidence as to the Siouan affinity of some of these tribes. 

There is but little known as to the tribes of this confederacy. 
The pressure of the cruel Iroquois on the north and the advance- 
ment of civilization on the east probably compelled them to 
migrate early to the southward ; therefore I shall devote but a 
few words to the less interesting. The savage whom Smith cap- 
tured said that f " he and all with him were of HaMininga, where 
there are three kings more, like vnto them, namely, the king of 
Stegora, the king of Ihtixantania, and the king of Shakahonia, 
that were come to Mohaskahod, which is onely a hunting town." 
These are the four tribes marked on Smith's map ; consequently 
must have been considered the most important. 

The Hassinnungaes or Hassinuga is derived from hasaun, " a 
rock ; " wonogk, " hole or den," which, with the terminal of the 
animate plural, denotes " those who dwelt in caves or holes of 
the rocks," thus indicating a low state of barbarism, as Smith 
truthfully observes. Its equivalent is found in the Massachu- 
setts Hassimnegk, *' cave " (Eliot), Gen, 29 : 7, 17 ; Hd^sunoiiogqut, 
'* holes of the rocks," Jer. 16: 16. A number of these caves, 
once inhabited by red-men, have been discovered in Virginia. 
William H. Holmes X describes one of these typical rock-shelters, 
situated in Harrison county, due west from the home of this 
tribe. (Strachey, however, states that they lived farther west 
than Smith locates them.) This shelter displayed on its rear 
wall some interesting petroglyphs, and in the debris of its floor 
were found potsherds, arrow points, paint-stones, and other 
objects, both natural and artificial. Professor H. C. Mercer, of 
the University of Pennsylvania, has explored many of these rock- 



♦ Tutelo Tribe and Language, p. 9. J American Anthropologist, vol. 3, p. 217. 

t Arber's Smith, p. 427. 

50 



Digitized by 



Google 



388 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

shelters of Virginia, which showed no great antiquity — ^in fact, 
he was astonished by the comparatively modern evidence of their 
occupancy by the red-men. 

The Stegarakles or Stegoras (= stegan-rufanougfis) survived as 
the StenkenockSj as mentioned by Governor Spotswood, in 1711, 
as one of the tribes living near Fort Christanria, in Virginia, 
which the colonial government desired to secure from the further 
attacks of the Iroquois * This name is undoubtedly Algon- 
quian, as its terminal indicates, but so far I have been unable 
to identify its prefix. 

The Tauxanies, Tanxslntania, or Tauxuntania were probably 
those mentioned by Lederer as the Nuntaneuck^ speaking the 
same language as the Monacan, Nahyamn, Saponin and others. 
This term in one form, Tauxanies (= Tatix-anaughs), seems to 
denote a " people of a short stature ; " Powhatan Tanz or Tanks^ 
"small, little ; " Delaware Tangitto^ " short, small," while its longer 
forms seem to contain the radical -itan, "a flowing stream or 
river; " hence Taux-itanUmoughs, *' people of the little rivers," as 
referred to by Smith. 

The Shakahonia or Shackaconicis were *' the stone people ; " 
Shacahocan-anoughs, Powhatan, [Strachey] Shacahocan, [Smith] 
Shacqaohocany " stone." This meaning as rendered by these two 
authorities is not the literal one, for its instrumentive generic 
suffix 'hocan indicates something artificial.f It denoted possi- 
bly a stone prepared for slinging, tossing, or rolling, according 
to the meaning of its prefix shacka or shacquo-, which I have not 
been able to identify to my satisfaction. In the name Shoccories 
of Lederer and Lawson we find probably its synonym of a later 
period. They were living in close proximity to the Occaneechea 
and Eaos. Possibly the latter were but another village of the 
Shoccories when visited by Lederer, as they were only fourteen 
miles apart, with the same customs. They were devoted to an ath- 
letic game, described by Lederer in 1672 as "slinging of stones;" 
and in 1701, when seen by Lawson, the two tribes were united, 
and had not forgotten their old game mentioned by Lederer, 
which may be recognized as the universal wheel-and-stick game 
of the eastern and southern tribes ; for Lawson says in his nar- 
rative they were much addicted to a sport they call chenco, 
which is carried on with a staff and bowl made of stone, which 

♦ Mooney, p. 21. f Howse's Grammar of the Cree, p. 182. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] SIOUAN TRIBAL APPELLATIVES 389 

they trundle upon a smooth place, like a bowling green, made 
for the purpose.* 

The Ontponeaa (= Ontpoii'anoughs) were another ** people of 
roots or tubers," as shown by its generic pon. The species indi- 
cated by its prefix ont I have been unable to identify. It was prob- 
ably but another descriptive term for the sagapon, for Strachey 
gives us Oiih'punnawk, " a ground-nut." The Meiponiakey of Gov- 
ernor Spotswood, who in 1722 were living, under the protection 
of the English, near Fort Christanna, were probably a remnant 
of these people.f 

The Tegninateos or Tegoneaa, as Smith varies their name, are 
but briefly mentioned. They were probably a people dwelling 
at that time far ofi* in the mountains or, as Smith remarks, " in 
the hilly countries." The name evidently contains the Algon- 
quian element -atin, " hill or mountain," and the terminal of 
•anough or -ailies, '' people." The prefix Tegni or Tego is seemingly 
from the same verbal root as the Narragansett tagu, " to go up," 
and possibly related to the Massachusetts tohkoo, " to climb ; " 
hence Tego-atin'aFioughs, people who climb the mountains, or 
*' the mountaineers," as we might put it. It is quite possible that 
the Totems or Toleras, who are represented in Batt's manuscripts J 
as a " mountain tribe," were the descendants of this nation. 

The Whonkentyaes or Whonkenteas are another tribe of the Man- 
naJiocks, or tributary to them, who are unplaced on Smith's map. 
The phonetic sounds of this appellative suggests that they were 
probably the ancestors of the Akenatzlea, or Occaneeches, as it is 
varied, who were living, as Mr Mooney has indicated, on an island 
just below the confluence of the rivers Dan and Staunton, in 
Mecklenburg county, Virginia, when visited by John Lederer in 
1670. I would suggest that the derivation of the term Whon- 
kentf^'ds or Whon-kenchi-aneas as from the Narragansett awdun^ 
Massachusetts auwon, " there is somebody," i. e., who is strange 
or different from those speaking.§ The second component, -kentie, 
'kemitzie, or -caneeche, seems to have its parallel in various forms 
of the verb '* to talk " or " to speak," as in the Long Island un- 
kenchie^ " the strange talker ; " Narragansett awdun-ken' taunchem f 
** Who are you that discourses ? " Delaware n'iechsin, '' to speak ; " 
Powhatan kehUen, " you tell," which, with its terminal, gives us 

» Mooney, p. 83. tiCol. Hist. N. Y., vol. 3, p. 194. 

t Ibid., p. 37. §See Trumbull's Atgonkin Names for Man, p. 14. 



Digitized by 



Google 



390 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

whon-kentie-aflies, " people of a strange talk, or another speech." 
This analysis confirms Smith's statement that the Mannahocks 
were *^ many different in language." Again, in noticeable cor- 
roboration of this derivation, the Occaneeches seem to have been 
of a different linguistic stock to their Siouan neighbors. Mr 
Horatio Hale, quoting the Virginia historian, Beverley, says : * 
" The general language here used is that of the Occaneeches, 
though they have been but a small nation ever since those parts 
were known to the English ; but in what their language may 
differ from that of the Algonkins I am not able to determine. 
Further on he [Beverley] gives us the still more surprising infor- 
mation that this general language was used by the priests and 
conjurers of the different Virginia nations in performing their 
religious ceremonies in the same manner [he observes] as the 
Catholics of all nations do their mass in Latin." Now, it appears 
to me, on careful consideration of this statement of Beverley's in 
all its aspects, that it is open to only one construction — that is 
to say, if the term Whonkeniies is a translation by an Algonquian 
interpreter of a Siouan description of a nation of another or dif- 
ferent speech, residing among and tributary to them, and is also, 
as I suggest, a synonym for Occaneeche or Akenatzie, it would surely 
lead us to infer that the language of the Occaneeches was not 
Siouan, but was really nothing more nor less than a dialect of 
the Algonquian. It is evident that traders living in the English 
settlements, closely associated with the Powhatan Indians and 
employing them as guides, would not be likely to speak other 
than their language in bartering with the outlying tribes. 

So far as the religion of the Virginia Indians is concerned, Mr 
Mooney observes : f ^' Lederer s account of their religion is too 
general to be definite, and he neglects to state to what i)articular 
tribal language the Indian names belong." In answer to this 
observation, I would remark, all that is necessary in order to 
identify the language to which these names belong is to compare 
Lederer's narration with that of Captain John Smith. Lederer 
says -.J "They worship one God, creator of all things, whom 
they call OkaeP, others Mannith (= Narragansett Manii) ; to him 
alone the high priest, or Periku, offers sacrifice, and yet they be- 
lieve he has no regard for sublunary affairs, but commits the 



♦ Tutelo Tribe and Language, p. 12. X Discoveries, p. U. 

t Siouan Tribes of the East, p. 33. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 18951 SIOUAN TRIBAL APPELLATIVES 391 

government of mankinde to lesser deities, as Qalacosoagh and 
Tagkanysough — that is, good and evil spirits. To these, inferior 
priests pay their devotion and sacrifice, at which they make 
recitals to a lamentable tune of the great things done by their 
ancestors." 

On the other hand, Smith says : * " This sacrifice they held to 
be so necessary that if they should omit it their Okee^ or devel, 
and all their other Quiyoughcosughes, which are their other gods," 
etc. The term Okee of these two early authorities is undoubtedly 
related to the Massachusetts Ohke, " earth," the passive inani- 
mate producer; Ok-as, the passive animate producer or agent 
of production.t Spelman J calls this god Cakeres^ seemingly a 
variation ; related also to the Delaware ^^Kickeron, who ia the 
original of all, who has not only once produced or made all 
things, but produces every day," which Dr Brinton terms the 
eternally active, hidden part of the universe.§ Hence Smith 
may have been in error in assigning to the god Okee the attri- 
butes of his Satanic majesty — a god whom Lederer more correctly 
termed "the creator of all things." In addition, Smith in his 
brief vocabulary gives us Okee, " gods ; " Qaiyoughcosughes, " pettie 
gods and their affinities." The latter term, as well as Lederer's 
two, with the terminal in -osough, is what Howse|| terms the 
form of the adjective animate verb (= Massachusetts -iissu; Nar- 
ragansett -isu; Cree, -issu, '*he is or it is"). Hence we have 
Quiyoughcosughy "' he is lesser or little," which may be related to 
the Massachusetts Ogguhsuasu, " it is lesser or little." To this 
god the Powhatans offered yearly a sacrifice of children.^ Tag- 
kanynough (= Tackan-issu), " he is of the wilderness," " god of the 
forest." This agreement of Smith and Lederer, together with 
the analysis of the names, proves beyond question that the gen- 
eral language used by the Virginia tribes in their religion, and 
in their intercourse with alien tribes, must have been necessarily 
Algonquian. The fact that Beverley, as he remarks, was unable 
to determine the difference between the language of the Occa- 
neeches and that of the Algonkins would indicate to my mind 

♦Arber's Smith, pp. 78, 374. 

tSee Tnimbull'8 Notes 49, 50„Nftrr. Club, ed. R. Williams Key. 

JArber's Smith, p. cv. 

g LenApS and their LeKends, p. 133. 

J Grammar of the Cree, p. 26. 

i Smith, p. 375. 



Digitized by 



Google 



392 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

that they were practically identical, with only an archaic differ- 
ence — a difference similar to that mentioned by Mr Mooney as 
existing between the Cherokee language and that used in the 
sacred formulas of their shamans. Mr Mooney says : * " They 
are full of archaic and figurative expressions, many of which 
are unintelligible to the common people and some of which 
even the shamans themselves are now unable to explain. These 
archaic forms, like the old words used by our poets, lend a 
peculiar beauty which can hardly be rendered in a translation. 
They frequently throw light on the dialectic evolution of the 
language, as many words found now only in the nearly extinct 
Lower Cherokee dialect occur in the formulas which in other 
respects are written in the Middle or Upper dialect." These 
archaic traits have been observed by Hale,t Cushing,t Matthews,§ 
and by other explorers into the secret rites of tribes of other 
linguistic stocks; and all things being taken into consideration, 
this solution of the Occaneeche problem is open to fewer objections 
than to accept the unlikely supposition that the Algonquian 
tribes of Virginia used the Siouan language in their religious 
ceremonies. 

It is perhaps needless for me to observe, after the foregoing 
presentation of the points under discussion, that the questions 
as to what were the commodities of the Moimcmis and what gave 
rise to thoughts of mines, as well as questions third and fourth, 
have been fully answered. The fact that a partial knowledge 
])y the colonists of the language of the Powhatans, acquired dur- 
ing the first few months of the settlement, gave them but an in- 
Hufiicient idea as to what the Monacans dug from the earth, and 
as their knowledge increased and they became more familiar with 
the language, habits, and customs of the natives, they learned that 
the Monacans njined absolutely nothing desirable. As time grew 
apace, the truth soon dawned upon their minds that the neces- 
saries of life were more preferable than the phantom gold and 
other will-o'-wisps of an unknown country, and as these prime 
essentials were procurable from the industrious native agricult- 
urists nearer home, to this food-quest, more than to any other, 
was the remainder of Smith's stay in the colony devoted. 



*Seventh Annual Report of the Bureaa of Ethnology, p. 343. 
t Iroquois Book of Riteti, p. 46. 

X Second Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnolo;?y, p. 12. 
g Fifth Annual Report of the Bureau of Ethnology, p. 456. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1805] UPPER ORINOCO VOCABULARIES 393 

UPPBR ORINOCO VOCABULARIBS 

BY A. EKNST 

I obtained lately a manuscript copy of the vocabularies of 
some languages spoken on the Upper Orinoco and its affluents 
which had been collected by Mr F. Montolieu, a Frenchman, 
who for several years acted first as secretary to the governor of 
the Venezuelan territory Amazonas and was finally governor 
himself (1870 to 1876). The manuscript contains a vocabulary 
of each of the following languages: Baniva, Barre, Yavitero, 
Puinabo, Tupi, and Piaroa. Montolieu began publishing them 
in a Caracas newspaper, El Tlempo (July, 1877), and this part 
was afterwards inserted in the eighth volume of the Biblioiheqae 
liiiguistique amerlcaine (Paris, 1882), pages 274 to 280 ; but this 
comprises only the Baniva, Barre, and the first half of the 
Yavitero (as far as letter H). The rest was never printed, and 
I have thought, therefore, it would be of some interest to publish 
the remainder of the Yavitero, together with the Puinabo and 
Piaroa, languages which still today are very imperfectly known. 

The pronunciation is Spanish ; eu is to sound as in French, 
when written without a diseresis. 

I. Yavitero. 

Lagartijo (lizard), cuito, 

Laolao (a species of fish, of the genus Silurus), muciiri. 

Lapa (Coelogenys paca), iafa. 

Laurel (laurel), cagnizi. 

Lavando (washing), ^//-/aja. 

Lejos (far), te ie, 

Le&n (puma, Felis concolor), egitune, eguane. 

Llevale (take him, conduct hiin),fita gicata-ie. 

Loro (parrot), curicuri. 

Luz (light), camonajadi. 

Madera (wood), caguerand, 

Malo (bad), cuinciji 

Mama (he sucks), yua. 

Mailana (tomorrow), iosinmita. 



Digitized by 



Google 



394 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

Mandioca (cassava plant, Manihot utilissima), machocn, 

Mapanare (a snake of the genus Lachesis), vianiplre. 

Mato (a large lizard, of the genus Tejus), iafatoto. 

Media noche (midnight), faaiyasinari. 

Menor (younger son), cadia, 

Mercancias (merchandise), caguarci. 

Mono (monkey), piiache. 

Mono bianco (a species of monkey, perhaps Midas oedi- 

pus), agudmi. 
Mono chucuto (another species of monkey, genus Brachy- 

urus), caroiri. 
Monte (forest), nguajo. 
Moriche (Mauritia flexuosa, a palm), tegui. 
Morrocoy (Testudo tabulata, a land-turtle), cwixi. 
Muchacho (boy), macica-io (sic !). 
Muchachos (boys), maclcu-io (sic !). 
Mujer, mi (my wife), no-jizo. 
Mujeres, las (the women), sarn-nai-femt. 
Negro (black), momoni. 
Nieto (grandchild), no-ia. 
Onoto (arnatto, Bixa orellana), oio-maja. 
Oye (hear!), mesijejat^ari. 
Paga (i)Siy),fide-uena, 
Paja (straw), ieguari, 
Palo (tree), ala, 
Paloma (pigeon), onoca. 
Papa (father), nafo. 
Para ti (for thee), ^-26. 

Paraguatiin (a tree, Macrocnemum tinctoreura), cafisand 
Pared (wall), yaini, 

Pasado mafiana (day after tomorrow), iasanasajiti, 
Pasear a tu casa (to walk to thy house) yTnonitaJijoL 
Pauji (a genus of birds, Crax), zoita, 
Pauji copete (Crax daubentoni), damoco. 
Pauji roncador (another species), itlri, 
Pava (turkey-hen), io-cuimani. 
Pa von (a fish, Cichla orinocensis), cuna, 
Pequefio (small), jmhiji, guichasidjn, 
Pereza (sloth), cia-mo. 
Perico (small parrot), querequere. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895J UPPER ORINOCO VOCABULARIES 395 

Perro (dog), maidi 

Pez (fish), jimaa. 

Piapopo (a bird of the genus Rhamphastos), iociie. 

Picure (a rodent, a species of Dasyprocta), guaAoto, 

Pijiguao (a palm, Guilielma speciosa), maclcuyo. 

Pintado (painted), soiimeni. 

Pl&tano (plantain, Musa paradisiaca), /am^ma (Span.). 

Plato (plate), /arato (Span.). 

Playa (beach, bank of river), cajasina. 

Poco (little) y juchiaimajd, 

Porque (because), fena. 

Principal horcon (main post of hut), /o^q/i. 

Puerta (door), guaid, 

Puntada de cabeza (head ache), cagulnocifo. 

Quiero (I will), nujateje. 

No quiero (I will not), fata-mijenaiiefi. 

Yo te quiero (I love you), nuUiteja. 

Que quieres? (what do you want?), mesijejateari. 
Rata (rat), marijenajati. 
Raton (mouse), alamo, acamora. 
Raya (a fish, Trygon hystrix), yajique. 
Rayado (another fish, Platystoma fasciatum), coriti. 
Regalo, te (I make you a present of . . .), noregarafi. 
Regalo (a present I make to you), ie-vale, 
Sal (salt), io-qaira. 
Salvaje (savage), caiegua. 
Sapo (toad), tororo, 

Seje (a palm, (Enocarpus bataua), i-a/i. 
Seje chiquito (another palm), cofeti. 
Tapir (Tapirus americanus), macicili. 
Temblador (electric eel, Gymnotus), samai. 
Tengo, no para t( (I have not for yon),falaJima. 
Terecay (a species of river-turtle, Peltocephalus tracaxa), 

siforL 
Tienes (thou hast), mejinian, 
Tigre (Felis on^a) cuadigitao-minari. 
Tierra (earth), cajachi, 
Tijeras (scissors), jy?2i. 
Tinaja (earthen water- vessel), quanana. 
Titi (a monkey, Chrysothrix sciurea), vichece. 
Totuma (calabash), aacasL 
51 



Digitized by 



Google 



396 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

Trdeme (bring me),fttagutane,fifat(ine, 

Tragavenado (Boa constrictor), zorema. 

Vamonos (let us go), uasavaua, 

Vamos 'k dormir (let us sleep), chlma uisaua. 

Vas (you go), ilisajatai-a, 

Vaquira (Dicotyles torquatus), afijija, 

Venado (deer, Cervus sp.), onatajl-o. 

Vendeme (sell me),fiuendene (Span. ?). 

Vengo (I come), no-iojiviata. 

Verde (green), sifotemi. 

Viudita (a monkey, Callithrix torquata), guacuL 

Voy (1 go), nusajisaji, 

Voy i\ hacer (I am going to do), noTnafitifijL 

Vuelvo (I return), no-io. 

Yema (egg), inecinaja. 

Zorro (fox), inarito. 

The Yavitero has many affinities with the Baniva, as pointed 
out already by Martins, who reprinted a short vocabulary of it 
collected by Wallace (Wortersammlung, pp. 261, 262). Monto- 
lieu likewise called it a dialect of the Baniva, saying that it 
differs from the latter principally by the frequent use of the 
sound F in order to form diaeresis. The first part of his vocab- 
ular}'' may be found in volume 8 of the Bihlioiheque linguistiqtte 
americaine, pages 281 to 284, and this being arranged in Spanish 
and Yavitero, I have followed the same system, but added to 
every word its meaning in English and also the scientific names 
of animals and plants, as far as these are known to me. It is 
unfortunate that Montolieu appeared to have no idea of which 
words are most important in making a vocabulary so as to 
render it useful for ethnographical classification. We may be 
thankful, however, for what he did. 

II. PUINABO. 

Agua (water), eut (eii like o, but very short). 

Ahora (now), da-jo-maL 

Algod&n (cotton), de-jii el, 

Anzuelo (fish-hook), vm-piju. 

Aqui esta (here is), nan. 

Araguato (howling monkey), m. 

Asi sera (well), jo-te^a. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] UPPER ORINOCO VOCABULAKIES 397 

A ver (let me see), egle. 

Barbasco (plant for poisoning fish), mau. 

Beber (to drink), bi-vu-ak, 

Bejuco (climbing plant), i-o. 

Bonito (pretty), de-jei. 

Buenos dias (good day !), am-bije-nuk, 

CafLa ((jane), chiirchin, 

Caro (dear), awrbi-baje, 

Casa (house), mo, 

Cazabe (cassaba bread), an. 

Cerro (mountain), ujeL 

Comer (to eat), acorn. 

C6mo te llamas? (what is your name?), bamatan. 

Comprame (buy), ba-jln-ci-un. 

Cuentas (beads), ni-e-gap. 

Dame (give me), acitbugan. 

Dividamos (let us divide), donui. 

Dormir (to sleep), sogle. 

Esta bien (it is well), ejei. 

Fuego (fire), deu (eu = o). 

Hombre (man), no-sl-ante. 

Gracias (thanks), op. 

GruUa (crane), tidi. 

Lejos (far), aijopec. 

Maiz (Indian corn), cojon. 

Malo (bad), ejep. 

Mandioca (cassava plant), inasaca. 

Mono (monkey), cho-o. 

Morrocoy (land-turtle), i-jue. 

Mujer (woman), noaomi-ao. 

No (not), bal-rut. 

Pajaro (bird), au-ip. 

Pescado (fish), yoi 

Pescado pilado (fish, dried and pounded), imut. 

Pifia (pine-apple), ijai. 

Plumas (feathers), s'll-ip. 

Platano (plantain), i-ta. 

Qu6 es esto? (what is this?), IndL 

Te quiero (I love you), mante. 

Rallo (cassava-grinder), el-L 

Rayado (a fish, Platystoma fasciatum), ijen. 



Digitized by 



Google 



398 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VllI 

Sombrero (hat), u-ipe. 

Tabaco (tohsicco) jjeup. 

Tengo hambre (I am hungry), am-uUric, 

Tti (thou, you), mam, 

Vagre (a species of fish, Platystoma), mund, 

Vamonos (let us go), venoc. 

V&mos k beber yucuta (let us drink yucuta), am-bon-de-oc. 

Vdmos k dormir aqui (let us sleep here), vi-oi-en, 

Ven SLck I (come here !), nain vnl-uc, 

V6nde me ! (sell me !), a-jin-ci-un, 

Ya esta I (it is done), ni-ega-de. 

Yo (I), am. 

Zarza (sarsaparilla), jm-2<, tan-peup. 

One, jai-tun. 

Two, jaca-jo. 

Three, jai-paL 

Four, jaca-junue. 

Five, nap'tan. 

The Puinavis dwell on the Inirida, an affluent of the Guaviare. 
Their language appears to be without affinities (Brinton, Ameri- 
can Race, 278). A vocabulary of fifty-three words, as collected 
by Crevaux, is published in volume eight of the Biblioth^que 
linguistlqiLe avierlcaine (Paris, 1882), pages 255 and 256. Monto- 
lieu's vocabulary contains some sixty words, no more than twelve 
of which are to be found also in the list formed by Crevaux, viz. : 

MoNTOMEu. Crevaux. 

1. Water eut, w, eti 

2. To drink bi-vil-nk, u asloua (I drink water). 

3. To eat (iconic aynoc, 

4. Maize co-jon, cana. 

5. Plaintain t-ta, saoun, 

6. Let us go ve-noc, bino. 

7. Come here navn-vai-uc, maiounani arica. 

8. One jai-turij un, atam. 

9. Two jaca-jo, acao, 

10. Three jai-pai, apoui, 

11. Four jaca-junue, acaouno. 

12. Five nap-tan, daptan. 

Of these numbers 1, 6, 7, and the (ivq numerals are evidently 
the same, with slight phonetic changes. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] UPPER ORINOCO VOCABULARIES 399 

III. PlAROA. 

The Piaroas dwell on the mouth of the Mataveni, an affluent 
on the left bank of the Orinoco. Their language appears to be 
unconnected with any other stock (Brinton, American Race, 266). 
Dr Cr^vaux collected a short vocabulary of thirty-seven words, 
which is published in the eighth volume of the Blhliotheqiie lln- 
guistique americaine (Paris, 1882), pages 257 and 258. A more 
extensive vocabulary was formed by (Jhaffanjon and inserted in 
his UOrenoque el le Caura (Paris, 1889), pages 324 to 326. The 
following list, made by Montolieu, contains some additions to 
both. The corresponding words from Cr6vaux and Chaffanjon 
I have distinguished by the initials Cr. and Ch. 

Aji (Capsicum), aoiui ; erate, Ch. 

Anzuelo (fishing hook), anfuati; awdche, Ch. 

Arafia mono (a large spider, Avicularia blondi), ajuca. 

Bien (well), adigtia; adiba, Cr. ; adigiuij Ch. 

Cabuya (string), uarate-zapa, 

CafS (coffee), aijd ; cawe, Ch. 

Camarada (comrade), camarada (Spanish). 

Canalete (oar), ziade; guaiguade, Ch. 

Camisa (shirt), pnnatd; asca hisata, Ch. 

Candela (fire), itfcii; huskuk, Ch. ; ocourn, Cr. 

Canto de guerrA (war song), nanaja. 

Cafio (branch of a river), aje. 

Cana dulce (sugar cane), majd; naha, Ch. 

Casaba (cassava bread), inichi; ynisi, Ch. 

Cebucan (cassava-press), an-na. 

Cerro (mountain), muijaca; ynagiia, Ch. 

Conversar (to talk), tryala, 

Copahiba (copaiva), guaipa, 

Cuchillo (knife), naunde ; naguade, Ch. 

Curare (curare, arrow-poison), maiiana; maeaeme, Ch. 

Dame (give me),jit-t. 

Diablo (devil), anfa-etlsa. 

Dia (day), mono; morho (sun), Ch. 

Donde (where), ten-nL 

No entiendo (I do not understand), enuca-acueae, 

Escopeta (gun), aUupa; cuhupe, Ch. (Span, chopo), 

Escucho (I listen), eaucu (= I understand). 



Digitized by 



Google 



400 THE AMKKICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. Vlll 

Espejo (looking-glass), tejaloba; tijata^ Ch. 

Feo (ugly), suraja. 

Hablo (I speak), jttcua-cwa. 

Hablas (you speak), jitcua-ta. 

Hombre (man), jwrncto; ovo, Ch. 

Grande (large), eninaji; buiOy Ch. 

Luna (moon), camuja; chawa, Ch. 

Machete (cutlas), ureda; curoode, Ch. 

Maduro (ripe), itzu, 

Malo (bad), chura; suraa hiso (very bad), Ch. 

Marima (the inner bark of a species of Lecythis, used as 

cloth), dnta. 
Mujer (woman), nati ; isaho, Ch. 
Nina (girl), pujate; chistiho, Ch. 
Noche (night), iodo, 
Nosotros (we), u-xwto, 
Oro (gold), corao. 

Pequeno (small), piquin-dian; ykia, Ch. 
Periquito (a small parrot), muekL 
Piapoco (a bird, Rhamphastos sp.), pubi, 
Platano (plantain), baruru; paruro, Ch. 
Puerto (port, landing), tabuara. 
Rio (river), paragua. 
Ron (rum), nina-ja-ia (ahiia, water, Cr.). 
Sol (sun), mono canuja; morho^ Ch. 
Sombrero (hat), cadl-uca; kt/uhak, Ch. 
Tabaco (tobacco), ja-jeZ-Tii ; W€, Cr. ; haateiy Ch, 
Tinaja (water- vessel), ramiri 

Totuma (calabash), baraj; makirlba, Ch. ; inourica, Cr. 
Tfi (thou, you), u-cu. 
Vendeme (sell me), i-it, 
Vosotros (you, pi.), u-cuUl 
Yeso bianco (white plaster, gypsum), eredcica, 
Yo (I), T-ten, 

SOME PHRASES. 

Vamos k dormir (let us go to sleep), penetn-jd, 

Vamos k comer (let us eat), chlratucua ; chuscaa (to eat), Ch.* 

Vamonos (let us go), Uiraiimua, 

Ven aca (come here!), ichi-ua; thivaa, Ch. 

*Cfr. the Chibcha htoscua^ to ent. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] UPPER ORINOCO VOCABULARIES 401 

NUMERALS. 

1, nante. 

2, tajo, 

3, uameta, 

4, imute, 

5, imoterua, 

6, caramute nante (5 + 1) . 

7, caramute tajo (5 + 2). 

8, caramute uameta (5 + 3). 
y, tanmoreduL 

10, tanmorede. 



Digitized by 



Google 



402 THK AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



Ci:.A7 FIOURBS FOUND IN OtlATtiMALA 

BY P. J. J. VALENTINt 

The last Quarterly of Publications of the Royal Ethnologic 
Museum, Berlin, volume iv, 1, contains the result of certain ex- 
plorations made by Dr Ch. Lapper in the Central American prov- 
inces of Chiapas and Guatemala. The traveler calls attention 
to the vast amount of hitherto unknown Indian settlements lying 
in ruins on that ancient culture-ground. Although devoid of the 
architectural grandeur and the sculptural finish exhibited in the 
palatial ruins of Chichen Itza, Copan, and Palenque, the author 
says that they nevertheless must not be overlooked by future ex- 
plorers. At the slightest scraping of the surface they yielded a 
crop of interesting relics, principally of pottery, and when viewed 
as a whole they revealed the fact that in culture the people seem 
not to have been so absolutely dependent on those larger centers 
as was believed ; for each of the now collapsed group of structures 
still exhibits that main feature of w^orship, the sacrificial tumu- 
lus with its platform on top and steep staircases subtending 
often an angle of eighty degrees. In plan, however, the con- 
struction appears to conform to their more sumptuous models, 
the precincts and the oblong edifices enclosing inner yards, and 
these yards lying deeper than the common level. Dr Lapper 
found no mortar employed either in the slabs that covered the 
tumuli or in such walls as were built to fortify the places and to 
make them inaccessible to the enemy. The explorer cites not less 
than seventy-one of such places, extending from central Chiapas 
to the confines of Honduras and Guatemala. They are shown 
on a chart, and views and measurements of twenty of them 
also illustrate the text. Those shown on plan 20, representing 
the ruins of Socabaja (department of Quiche, Guatemala), are 
reported by Dr Lapper as of larger extent and of more interest 
than all the others he succeeded in exploring. 

One part of the pottery collected on this tour was presented 
by the explorer to the Berlin Ethnologic Museum, and carefully 
described and commented upon by Dr Ed. Seler, the curator of 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] CLAY FIGURES FOUND IN GUATEMALA 



403 



the American department, in sequence to Dr Lapper's article, 
pages 21-53. Dr Seler's text, as usual, is full of additional his- 
torical information and of suggestive generalizations, proving 
again how much he is at home in a district more than three 
thousand miles distant from his own. 

Among the one hundred and four illustrations given three 
attracted our special attention. They represent figures of clay, 
pertaining to the Sarg collection, which was made on the ground 
explored by Dr Lapper, and which are quoted for the purpose 
of certain comparisons. We regret that Dr Seler should not 
have dwelt a little longer 
on these curious speci- 
mens; possibly he ab- 
stained because they 
have been discussed else- 
where, a fact, however, 
which has not come to 
our knowledge. We re- 
produce those specimens 
in Figs. I, II, and III, 
adding thereto a few 
remarks. 

Although the speci- 
mens were acquired in 
Cob an (Verapaz), we 
doubt if they were the 
product of the tribe of 
Indians living in this 
department. They seem 
to us to be imported. They are of an execution too nice, too 
individual, quite too artistic, and deviate too much from the con- 
ventional pattern exhibited in the pottery manufactured by the 
Indians of the Guatemala- Altos to be modeled by their hands. 
Judging from the features of Fig. Ill, it is evident that this head 
is not that of an Indian; it shows neither the characteristics 
of prominent cheek-bones nor the usual decoration of plumed 
head-dress and earrings. We believe it to be the portrait of a 
Spaniard — the faithful reproduction of the visage of one of those 
stern and haughty **capitanes" who mercilessly made them- 
selves masters of person and property and rulers of the soil 
52 





\ 








S 


& 


f^ 


1-4 


^Jfe % 




t\ 



Figure I. 



Digitized by 



Google 



404 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

they trod. We notice the characteristics of the short-cropped 
hair, the deep-cut folds above the nose, which is strong but 
sharply modeled ; the energetic mouth, whose upper lip is cov- 
ered with a moustache trimmed by scissors, and which, in ex- 
pectation of his " portrait being taken," seems carefully waxed 
and trimmed at both ends. 

We do not venture to state from what part of conquered Central 
America this image of one of the Castilian " bravoes " has found 
its way to Coban, where it was obtained by Mr Sarg. What we 
wish to emphasize is that this head cannot possibly be viewed as 
belonging to the indigenous race, and can hardly have been 
manufactured on the place or neighborhood where it was ob- 
tained. It may be remembered, in this connection, that by 

solemn contract made with the chief- 
tains of the Verapaz, white men, 
save the few missionaries appointed 
by the bishop of Guatemala to con- 
vert the natives, were forbidden to 
visit this province. It is but thirty 
years since t^at the Indians of the 
Verapaz have permitted white men 
to settle among them. 

As regards Figs. I and II we also 
think these clay relics must be con- 
sidered as being imported to the 
Verapaz ; there is no doubt, however, 
^*^"'^ ^^' that they represent specimens of an 

Indian race. This fact is plainly warranted at first sight by the 
peculiar cut of the hair, the pearl string around the neck, the 
scanty shirt, and the large ear-plates. That the latter are square 
and not round, as they are usually represented throughout 
Mexico and the whole of Central America, in sculpture as well 
as in painting, is a fact so exceptional that it must strike the 
eye of every student conversant with the matter. 

Tiie clay figure (I) shows a plump little woman sustaining the 
weight of a large water vessel on her shoulders. We imagine 
her having gone down to the brook to fill it, and that trying to lift 
the heavy vessel she found the task to be too hard for her. So she 
broke down, musing what to do with her own self and what with 
that vexatious burden. Her helplessness is marvelously well 




Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895J CLAY FIGURES FOUND IN GUATEMALA 405 

expressed, and must have been caught in the act itself by the 
watchful eye of one of the tribal artists, who really executed a 
little masterpiece when he made her leer angrily toward the 
cruel foe that keeps her pressed to the ground, and at the same 
time contrasted her feeling of despair with that of self-ridicule, 
expressed in the laughter of the upturned lips. This highest 
apex of art — to depict in the position of the body, and in the 
facial lineaments any predominant or mixed feeling, such as 
would stir the muscles of the human face under the impulse of 
a certain momentary impression — is never seen in any product 
of Indian hand from Puget sound down to Patagonia. The 
only exception we know of is that of the Chiriquian potter-artist. 
Through his work in this line, as shown 
in excavated specimens, we feel almost 
compelled to say that the Chiriquian In- 
dian shows himself the only one of the 
many races of the whole continent who 
knew mirth and merriment, and who did 
not deem it beneath his dignity to repro- 
duce these sentiments in his much-beloved 
clay. Now, we are far from venturing the 
conjecture that our little statuette was im- 
ported from the Isthmian straits to the 
Altos of Guatemala. What we conjecture 
is only this: that it was the product of Figure in. 

the hands and of the mirthful bent of mind of those Chiriquian in- 
vaders, of whom we read in Burgoa that they had come sailing 
in canoes from Nicaragua and farther south to land in Tehuan- 
tepec, taking possession of the islands and waging a long war 
against the Zapotecas, by whom they finally were absorbed. The 
same way, we know, had also come the Mangues, only that this 
tribe succeeded in taking permanent hold of Chiapas. There- 
fore it would not be preposterous to assume that some families 
of those straggling Wablj as they were called by the Zapoteca, or 
Caeoa and Coiba, as the Isthmian Conquistadores called them, 
had kept up their independence as well as their hereditary talent 
in the country of their adoption. The Chiriquians we know of 
wore no square ear-plates or any ear-dress at all, but, having 
settled among the gorgeous Zapoteca, they may have adopted 
the fashion, only that they chose or were forced, for the sake of 




Digitized by 



Google 



406 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. V^III 

individuality, to shape them otherwise ; also the straight fore- 
head, the rounded fat face, and the full sensual lips (Fig. Ill) 
speak of a race distinct from that among which they had come 
to live. 

We leave it to thje expert to refute or confirm the conjectures 
we have hazarded concerning these clay figures from Coban. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] OBITUARY 407 



OBITUARY 

James Constantine Pilling 

The scholarly article on the writings of Padre Andres de 
Olmos on pages 43-60 of this volume was the last notable pub- 
lication of James Constantine Pilling, bibliographer and admin- 
istrative officer; he died July 26, 1895, of locomotor ataxia, 
from which he had been a constant sufferer for years. 

Despite a painful and hopeless malady, Mr Pilling was an 
industrious, prolific, and erudite student of literature relating to 
the native American languages. During 1894 he put through 
the Government press a bibliography of the Wakashan lan- 
guages ; in 1893 he issued a bibliography df the Salishan lan- 
guages and a bibliography of the Chinookan languages (includ- 
ing the Chinook jargon) ; during the next preceding year his 
bibliography of the Athapascan languages was prepared and 
issued ; in 1891 he prepared and revised the most extended of 
his bibliographies, that relating to the Algonquian languages, 
a volume of 625 pages, illustrated by facsimiles of titles of rare 
works ; in 1889 his bibliography of the Muskhogean languages 
was published, and during the preceding year that of the Iro- 
quoian languages was made ready to leave the press ; in 1887 
the bibliographies of the Siouan and Eskimo languages were 
issued. These nine volumes are a rich store of knowledge per- 
taining to American ethnology ; the work is primarily linguistic, 
yet the mode of treatment is such that practically all of the 
more valuable early literature of the American Indians is listed 
and described. The series represents the fruition of the plan 
for a bibliography of the languages of the North American In- 
dians set forth in a quarto volume of nearly 1,200 pages by 
the same, author, issued in the form of proof-sheets in 1885. 
This bibliographic work was projected by Major J. W. Powell, 



Digitized by 



Google 



408 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 

and Mr Pilling was placed in charge of it on account of his learn- 
ing, accuracy, and literary ability. No class of the scientific pub- 
lications of the Government has been received with greater favor 
by scholars ; wherever anthropology is cultivated throughout the 
world, there Filling's bibliographies are known. 

For several years Mr Pilling was chief clerk of the Bureau of 
American Ethnology, and also of the United States Geological 
Survey, and much of his bibliographic material was accumu- 
lated while he was engaged in the performance of the arduous 
duties attending these offices. His faculties were such that he 
was able to carry forward the literary work without prejudice to 
his administrative duties, which were performed with noteworthy 
ability and judgment ; indeed, no inconsiderable part of the suc- 
cess of the two bureaus is to be ascribed to his skill, tact, and 
energy in administrative work. 

In early manhood Mr Pilling came in contact with Major 
Powell, whom he accompanied into the field and by whom his 
bent of mind and subsequent career were measurably deter- 
mined. His interest in Indians and in linguistics grew out of this 
association. He had already made himself a stenographer of 
exceptional skill, and had acquired literary knowledge through 
employment in a book store. His education, begun in the pub- 
lic schools of Washington, was perfected in Gonzaga Collie. 
He was born in Washington November 16, 1846. 

In the world of letters James Constantine Pilling was and will 
be known as a bibliographer of notable acumen and erudition ; 
in the Federal capital he was most widely known as an upright 
and courteous administrative officer. Among his more intimate 
acquaintances at home and abroad he is remembered as a man 
of exceptional integrity and amiability. Powell, who knew him 
long and intimately, says : " In all my life I have never known 
a man more steadfast to his moral and intellectual convictions, 
which were held with that charity for others which is possible 
only to those who have strong and well-founded convictions of 
their own." His official associates, joining in an expression of 
sorrow on receiving the intelligence of his death, said : '* In re- 
calling our associations with him we recollect no discourteous 
act or word, even when the burden of duty pressed most heavily ; 
we recollect.no selfish or narrow decision ; on exchanging ideas 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] OBITUARY 409 

we all, without exception, agree that we have known no man of 
higher integrity or better motives. His administrative work 
was a model, and its results in the bureaus with which he was 
connected constitute a monument." 

Mr Pilling left a consort, to whose tireless solicitude through 
years of painful decline the completion of so much of his work 
is due, and a young daughter. 

W J McGee. 



Digitized by 



Google 



410 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST 



[Vol. VllI 



A QUARTERItT BIBLIOaRAPHT OF ANTHROPOItOaXC 
LITERATURE 

COMPILED BY ROBERT FLETCHER, M. D. 



Achelis (Th.) Ueber Mythologie 
und Kiiltus von Hawaii. Braun- 
schweig, 1895, F. Viewegu. Sohn, 
82 p. 8°. 

Am^ro ( C. ) Boh^miens, Tziganes 
et Gypsies. Mesnil, Paris, 1895, 
Firmin-Didot et Cie., 141 p. 8°. 

Babington (W. Dalton). Fallacies 
of race tlieories as applied to na- 
tional characteristics. London, 
New York, 1895, I^ngrnans, 
Green & Co., xii, 277 p. 8**. 

Baessler (Arthur). Sudsee-Bilder. 
Berlin, 1895, W. Asher & Co., 
372 p., 26 pi., 2 maps, roy. 8^ 

Baldwin (James Mark). Mental 
development in the child and the 
race. London, 1895, Macmillan, 
496 p., 10 pi. 8°. 

Bielilovski (Cesar Alexandrovich). 
[On the anthropological type of 
criminals.] S.-Peterburg, 1895, 
J. I. Liebermann, 126 p., 3 pi. 
8°. 

Birnkoff (Boris). [On the inher- 
itance of functional changes; 
Weissmann's theory of heredity 
and S]>encer's criticisms.] S.- 
Peterburg, 1895, M. Merkusheff, 
31 p. 8°. 

Boggiano (Guido). Viag^i di un 
artlsta nell' America Meridionale. 
I Caduvei (Mbayi\ o GuaycurCl), 
con prefazione ed uno studio 
storico ed etnografico del dott. 
G. A. Colini. Roma, 1895, E. 
liOescher, xxii, 339 p., 1 map. 8°. 

Clodd (Edward). A primer of evo- 
lution. I^mdon, 1895, Ix)ngman8, 
198 p. 18''. 



County folk-lore. Vol.1. I.Glou- 
cestershire, edited by E. Sidney 
Hartland. 2. Suffolk, collected 
and edited by Lady Eveline Ca- 
milla Gurdon ; with introduction 
by Edward Clodd. 3. I^icester- 
shii"e and Rutland, collected and 
edited by Charles J. Billson. 
I^ndon, 1895, I). Nutt, 1 p. 1., 
58 p. ; XV, 202 p. ; 2 p. 1., 153 p. 
8°. 

Contil (L.) Arch^ologie gauloise, 
gallo-romaine et fi-anque. I. Ar- 
rondissementdes Andelys. Paris, 
1895, Leroux, 92 p. 8°. 

Cr^pieux- Jamln (J.) L'^ritureet 
le caract^re. Paris, 1895, F. Alcan, 
442 p. 8°. 

Ferriani ( Lino) . Minorenni delin- 
quent!. Milano, 1895, M. Kan- 
torowicz, 571 p. roy. 8°. 

Poa (^douard). Le Dahomey. 
Paris, 1895, A. Hennuyer, 430p., 
17 pi., 1 map. 8°. 

F5rstemann (E.) Zur Entzifferung 
der Mavahandschriften. Dres- 
den, 1895, R. Bertling, 12 p. roy. 

Galton (Francis) . Finger-print di- 
rectories. London, 1895, Mac- 
millan & Co. 8®. 

Qenning (Karl Avgustovich). 
[Data for the study of the influ- 
ence of militarv service upon the 
physical deve'iopment of sol- 
diers.] S.-Peterburg, 1895, A. S. 
Khomski & Ko., 112 p. 8°. 

aerlni (G. E.) The tonsure cere- 
mony as performed in Siam. 
Bangkok, 1895, 13 pi. 8°. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] 



ANTHROPOLOGIC LITERATURE 



411 



Hanffen (A.) Die deuteche Spra- 
chinsel Gottsohee: Geachichte 
der Mundart, Lebensverhtiltnisse, 
Sitten und Gebrauche, Sagen, 
Miirchen und Lieder. Graz, 1895, 
K. K. Univ.-Buchdr., xvi, 466 p. 
8*». 

Hewitt (J.) The ruling races of 
prehistoric times in India, South- 
western Asia, and Southern Eu- 
rope. London, 1895, Constable, 
417 p. 8°. 

Hoffmann (Walter James). The 
beginnings of writing; with an 
introduction by F. Starr. New 
York, 1895, D. Appleton & Co., 
xiv, 209 p. 8''. 

Hopkins (E. Washburn). The re- 
ligions of India. Boston, 1895, 
Ginn & Co., x, 612 p. 8°. 

Joest (Wilhelm). Welt-Fahrten : 
Beitrage zur Lander- und Volker- 
kimde. 3 v. Beriin, 1895, W. 
Asher&Co., roy. S°. 

Laurent ( ;6mile). Mariages cronsan- 
guinsetd^g^n^rescences. Evreux, 
Paris, 1895, lib. Maloine, 74 p. 16°. 

Le Bon (Gustave). Psychologic 
des foules. Evreux, Paris, 1895, 
F. Alcan, vii, 207 p. 18°. 

laefdvre (Andr^). Origines euro- 
p^nnes. Les Indo-Europ^ennes 
du Nord. Paris, 1895, Maurin, 
31 p. 8°. 

Les temps hom^riques: 



hommes et dieux, moeurs et croy- 
ances. Leyons profess^es tl I'^cole 
d' anthropologic. Paris, Orl&ins, 
1895, Maisonneuve, 163 p. 8°. 

Legrain. D^g^n^rescence sociale 
et alcoolisme. Avec une preface 
par J.-C. Barbier. Paris, 1895, 
Cari^, 255 p. 12°. 

Liebbe (Elias). Cinietiere gallo- 
romain de Seuil, pr^s Rethel 
(Ardennes). Notice relative au 
mobilier fun^raire trouv6 dans la 
s^jpulture de la matrone de Seuil. 
[Reprint frfym : Rev. d' Ardennes 
[etc.], 1895, ii.] Sedan, 1895, 
l>aroche, 6 p., 1 pi. 8°. 

Lombroflo (Cesare). Grafologia. 
Milano, 1895, Hoepli, 242 p. i2°. 

53 



and William Ferrero. The 

female oflTender; with an intro- 
duction by W. Douglas Morrison. 
London, New York, 1895, T. F. 
Unwin, D. Appleton & Co., xxvi, 
313 p., 26 pi. 8°. 

Magnnsson (E.) Odin's horse, 
Yggdrasil. [Cambridge Philo- 
logical Society, Jan. 24, 1895.] 
London, 1895. 8°. 

Mason (Otis Tufton). The origin 
of invention. London, New York, 
1895, W. Scott, Scribner, 419 p. 
8°. 

Maspero (Gaston). Manual of 
Egyptian archaeology and guide 
to the study of antiquities in 
Egypt for the use of students and 
travellers. Translated by Amelia 
B. Edwards; Revised and en- 
larged by the author. New York, 
1895, G. P. Putnam's Sons, xxiii, 
360 p. 12°. 

Meunier (Victor). Selection et 
perfectionnement animal. Paris, 
1895, G. Masson, 224 p. 12°. 

Meyer (Hermann). Bogen und 
Pfeil in Central Brasilien. Leip- 
zig, 1895, Bibliogr. Inst. 8°. 

Morillot {L.),rA hhe, Une hache 
votive en bronze trouv^e ii 
Citeaux. Dijon, 1895, Union 
typog., 23p., Ipl. 8°. 

Mncke (Joh. Richard). Horde 
und Familiein ihrerurgeschicht- 
lichen Entwicklun^. Eine neue 
Theorie auf statistischer Grund- 
lage. Stuttgart, 1895, F. Enke, 
xix, 308 p. roy. 8°. 

Muller (Hendrik P. N. ) Industrie 
des Caflfrea du Sud-Ouest de 1' Af- 
rique. Collection recueillie sur les 
lienx et notice ethnographique. 
Description des objets r^presentes 
par Joh. F. Snelleman. Leyde 
[1895], E. J. Brill, 50 p., 501., 
27 pi. 4°. 

Palazzi (G.) L'origine de I'homme. 
Paris, 1895, imp. Davy, 64 p. 8°. 

Preyer ( W. ) Zur Psychologic des 
Schreibens, mit besonderer Ruck- 
sicht auf individuelle Verschie- 
denheiten der Handschriflen. 
Hamburg und Leipzig, 1895, L. 
Voss, 230 p., 9 pi., 8 diag. 8°. 



Digitized by 



Google 



412 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



Ray (Sidney H.) A comparative 
vocabulary of the dialects of Brit- 
ish New-Guinea. With a preface 
by Dr. R. N. Cust. London, 1895, 
40 p., 1 map. 8®. 

Richer (Paul). Physiologic artis- 
tique de I'homme en mouvement. 
Paris, 1895, O. Doin, 1 p. 1., 334 p., 
6L,6pl. 8°. 

Schlnmberger (Gustave). Me- 
langes d'arch^ologie byzantine. 
1" s^rie. Le Puy-en- Velay, Paris, 
1895, lib. Leroux, 357 p., 16 pi. 
8^ 

Sergi (Giuseppe). Crani antichi di 
Sicilia e Creta. [ReprirU from : 
Atti d. Soc. rom. di antrop., 1895, 
ii.] Roma, 1895, 11 p. 8°. 

Shendrikovski (Ivan Ivanovich). 
[Data for the anthropology of the 
Buriats (inhabitants of the Se- 
lenKi).] S.-Peterburg, 1894, G. 
A. Bernstein, 135 p., 1 1., 21 p., 
11. 8°. 

Starr (Frederick) . Some first steps 
in human progress. Meadville, 
Pa., 1895, Chatauqua-Century 
Press, 305 p. 12°. 

Summary of the archaeology 

of Iowa. [Reprint from : Proc. 
Davenport Acad. Nat. Sc, 1895, 
vi.] Davenport, Iowa, 1895, pp. 
53-124. 8°. 

Snpino (Fel.) Crani peniviani 
antichi. [Reprint from : Atti d. 
Soc. veneto-trentina di sc. nat., 
Padova, 1895, 2. s., ii.] Padova, 
1895, stab. tip. Prosperini, 32 p., 
Ipl. 8^ 

Tarde (Gabriel). Essais et me- 
langes sociologiques. Lyon, Paris, 
1895, A. Storck, 429 p. roy. 8°. 

Leslois del' imitation. 2.ed. 

Paris, 1895, F. Alcan. 8°. 

Teutsch (Fr. ) Die Art der A nsie- 
delung der Siebenbiirger Sachsen. 
[Reprird from: Forsch. z. d. 
Landes-u.Volksk. ix.] Stuttgart, 
1895, J. Engelhorn, 22 p. 8°. 

Tonrnier (VAbhe) et Charles auil- 
lon. Les hommes preiiistoriques 
dans I'Ain. Bourg, 1895, imp. 
Villefranche, x, 107 p., 8 pi. 8°. 



Verrier (E.) Du tatouage en Af- 
rique; ses vari^t^s, sa significa- 
tion ; des survivances du tatouage 
en Europe. Paris, 1895, Andr6 
etCie.,30p. 8°. 

Vishogorod (J. D. ) [Data for the 
anthropology of the Kabardines.] 
S.-Peterburg, 1895, A. M. Men- 
delevich, 94 p., 1 L, 1 tab. 8°. 

'Whitaitt (W. H.) The origin of 
infant baptism. Louisville, Ky. , 
1895, C. T. During, 42 p. 8°. 



d'Acy (E.) Quelques observa- 
tions relativement au gisement in- 
ter-glaciaire de Villefranche. Bull. 
Soc. d'anthrop. de Par., 1895, 4. s., 
vi, 80-87.— Adams (G.) The Chi- 
nese drama. Nineteenth Century, 
Lond., 1895,497-^15.— von Adrian- 
Werburg i F. ) Festrede des Prasi- 
denten. [Geschichte der anthro- 
pologischen Gesellschaft in Wien, 
1870-95.] Sitzungsb. d. anthrop. 
Gesellsch. in Wien, 1895, (17-24).— 
Angelucci ( A . ) Ancora sulla ma- 
niera dei pittori dementi e dei pit- 
tori vecchi. Arch, di ottal., Pa- 
lermo, 1894-5, ii, 399-408.— Antony 
(F.) Le suicide dans Tarm^e alle- 
mande. Arch, de m^d. et pharm. 
mil.. Par., 1895, xxv, 489-495.— 
Arcelin (A.) Quelques problemes 
relatife il Tantiquit^ pr^historique. 
Rev. d. quest, scient., Bnix., 1895, 
2. 8., vii, 5-30. Also, Reprint.— 
Bache (R. M. ) Reaction time with 
reference to race. Psychol. Rev., 
N. Y. & Lond., 1895, ii, 475-486.- 
Ball ( V.) Reputed traces of Negrito 
pygmies in India. Nature, Lond., 
1895,lii,80.— Barr6(P.) Lespeuples 
qui disparaissent : les Todas de 
I'Inde. Rev. scient.. Par., 1895, 4. e., 
iv, 124-126.— de Baye (le Baron), 
Note sur T^poque des m6taux en 
Ukraine. Anthropologie, Par., 1895, 
vi, 374-392.— Beddoe (J.) On the 
Northern settlemente of the West 
Saxons. J. Anthrop. Inst., Lond., 
1895, xxv, 16-20. — Belloni (C.) 
L'indice craniografo. Boll, scient., 
Pavia, 1894, xvi, 104-108.— Benn- 
dorf (O.) Das Monument von 
Adamklissi in der Dobruschda. 
(Rundbau Kaiser Trajans mit Tro- 
phiie nach den dakischen Kriegen.) 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct 18951 



ANTHROPOLOGIC LITERATURE 



413 



Sitzungsb. d. anthrop. Gesellsch. in 
Wien, 1895, (24-29). —Berliner (P.) 
Farbig-plaetische Nachbildung von 
platykneniischen Tibien, sowie von 
verschiedenen Horizontal-Durch- 
echnitten derselben. Verhandl. d. 
BerL Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., 1895, 
(274-279).-Beyer (H. G.) The 
growth of U. S. naval cadets. Proc. 
U. S. Nav. Inst., Annap., 1895, xxi, 
297-333.— Billroth (T.) Wer ist 
musikalisch? Deutsche Rundsch., 
BerL, 1895, xxi, 385-407.— Birkner 
(F.) Zur Anthropologie der Hand 
mit besonderer Beriicksichtigiing 
der als Rassenmerkinal angege- 
benen Schwimmhiiute. Beitr. z. 
Anthrop. u. TJrgesch. Bayerns, 
Munchen, 1894-5, xi, 145-204, 1 pi., 
2 diag.— Bixby (J. T.) The sanc- 
tion for morality in nature and evo- 
lution. New World. Bost., 1895, 
iv, 444^58.— Blaikie (J. B.) Te- 
legony : some aspects of the influ- 
ence of the male in reproduction. 
Teratologia, Lond. & Edinb., 1895, 
ii, 157-178.-Boaa (F.) Zur Eth- 
nologic von Britisch-Columbia. 
Verhandl. d. Gesellsch. f. Erdk. zu 

BerL, 1895, xxii, 265-270. 

Sagen der Indianer an der Nord- 
west-Kiiste America's. Verhandl. 
d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. Anthrop.. 

1895, (189-234). Salishan 

texts. Proc.Ara. Phil. Soc.Phila., 
1895, xxxiv, 31-48.— Boissier (L.) 
L*Afrique romaine: promenades 
arch^ologiques en Alg6rie et en 
Tunisie. La conqu^te des indigenes. 
Rev. d. deux mondes. Par., 1895, 
cxxvii, 13-69.— Bonnemftre (L.) 
Les pierres gravies de la Nouvelle- 
Cal(?donie. Bull. iSoc. d' anthrop. 
de Par., 1895, 4. s., vi, 63-72.— 
Bosanquet (B.) The evolution of 
religion. Internat. J. Ethics, I^nd., 
1894-5, V, 432-444.— Braune (W.) 
und O. Fischer. Der Gang des 
Menschen. 1. Tlieil. Versucheam 
unbelasteten und belasteten Men- 
schen. Abhandl. d. math. phys. 
CI. d. k. sjichs. Gesellsch. d. Wis- 
sensch., Leipz., 1894-5, xxi, 153- 
322, 25 pi. Also RepriiU. — Brinton 
(D. G. ) The aims of anthropology. 
Science, N. Y. & Lancaster, Pa., 

1895, n. 8., ii, 241-252, Carib 

art and its significance. IMd.f 



ii, 265. 



The protohistoric 



ethnography of Western Asia. 
Proc. Am. Phil. Soc, Phila., 1895, 
xxxiv, 3 1-48.— Bruneti6re(F.) La 
morality de la doctrine Evolutive. 
Rev. d. deux mondes. Par., 1895, 
cxxix, 136-162.— Bruni (G.) Mi- 
norenni delinquenti. Arch, di 
psichiat. [et<j.], Torino, 1895, xvi, 
456-459.--CantrelI (J. A.) Ab- 
. normalities in the color of the hu- 
man hair, with a report of cases. 
Med. News, Phila., 1895, Ixvii, 85- 
91 . — Capitan. 1 .e milieu ext^rieur. 
Rev. mens, de Tfecole d'anthrop. de 
Par., 1895, v, 293-308.— Capua (G.) 
Sur la taille en Bosnie. Bull. Soc. 
d'anthrop. de Par., 1895, 4. s., vi, 
99-103.— Carrara (M.) I giuochidei 
criminali. Arch, di psichiat. [etc.], 
Torino, 1895, xvi, 339-355. Also, 

RepriiU. Una mattoide. 76id., 

242-247.— Chamberlain (B.H.) The 
Luchu Islands and their inhabi- 
tants. Geog. Jour., Lond., 1895, v, 
289; 446; 5:{4.-Chervin. La situa- 
tion d^mogi'aphique de la France en 
Europe. Bull. Soc. d'anthrop. de 
Par.. 1894, 4. s., v, 648-686.— Chia- 
tokhin (J.) [Contributions to 
Mongolian folk-lore.] Izvest. vost.- 
sibirsk. otd. Imp. russk. geogr. 
Obsh., Irkutsk, 1894, xxv, 134-141. 
— Claike (S. E. J.) India and its 
women. J. Soc. Arts. , Lond. , 1895, 
xliii, 262-276.— Cohn (L.) Sibirische 
Alterthiimer. Verhandl. d. Berl. 
Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., 1895, (244- 
267, 2 pi.).— Collective investiga- 
tion: lamily measurements. [Cir- 
cular issued by Professors Pearson 
and VVeldon.] Med. Times & Hosp. 
Gaz., Lond., 1895, xxiii, 450. — 
CoUignon (M.) La polychromie 
dans la sculpture grecque. Rev. d. 
deux monde^s. Par., 1895, cxxvii, 
823-848.— Cope (E. D.) The pres- 
ent problems of organic evolution. 
Monist, Chicago. 1894-5, v, 563-573. 
— Cnyer (E. ) Les expressions de la 
physionomie et leurs origines ana- 
tomiques. Rev. scient.. Par., 1895, 
4. 8., iv, 33-42.— D'Abundo (G.) 
Le impronte digital i in 140 crimi- 
nali. Arch, di psichiat. [etc.], To- 
rino, 1895, xvi, 262.— De Silvestrl 
(E.) Osse'rvazioni di antropologia 
criminale nei bambini. Ibid., 177- 



Digitized by 



Google 



414 



THE AMERICAN ANTHUOPOLOGIST 



[Vol. VllI 



182, 1 pl.—Determinatioii (The) 
and rej^iilation of sex in the V)reed- 
ing of horses. Veterinarian, lx>nd., 
1895, Ixviii, 491-496.— Duckworth 
(W. L. H. ) Notes on a collection of 
crania of Esquimaux, exhibited by 
Prof. A. Macalister. J. Anthrop. 
Inst., Ix)nd., 1895, xxv, 72-74.- 
Duerden (J. E.) Discovery of ab- 
original Indian remains in Jamaica. 
Nature, Lond., 1895, lii, 173.— Ou- 
honsset. ifechelle t^nioin pour les 
photographies anthropologiques. 
Bull. Soc. d'anthrop. de Par., 1895, 
4. 8., vi, 53-56.— Durand. Coup 
d*ceil r^trospectif sur diverses ques- 
tions anthropologiques. Ibid.^ 157- 
184. — Barle ( Alice M. ) Flower lore 
of New England children. Atlantic 
Month., Host, 1895, 1 xxv, 459-466. 
— Ehrenreich (P. ) Materialien zur 
Sprachenkunde Brasiliens. Ztschr. 
f. Ethnol., Berl., 1895, xxvii, 149- 
176.— Ellis ( H. ) " Common sense " 
and the Elmira Reformatory. Fort- 
nightly Rev., N. Y. [Lond'.], 1895, 
Iviii, 483.— von Brckert (R. ) Die 
Volker des Kaukasus. Verhandl. 
d. Gesellsch. f. Erdk. zu Berl., 1895, 
50_H2. — Falkenhorat (C. ) Der 
"hose Blick" im Lichte der Sug- 
gestion, (xartenlauhe, Leipz., 1895, 
4:^-439. -P6r6 (C.) Morbid hered- 
ity. Pop. Sc. Month., N. Y., 1895, 
xlvii, 388-399.— Fermond (J.) La 
Cha rente pr^historique : les valines 
de Tardoire et du Bandiat. Bull. 
Soc. de g^og. de Rochefort, 1894-5, 
xvi, 253-271. — Fewke8( J. W.) The 
god ** D" in the Codex Cortejaianus. 
Am. Anthrop., Wash., 1895, viii, 
205-222, 4 pi. — Pornasari di Verce 
(E.) Istruzione e criminalita nella 
Nova Galles del Sud. Arch, di 
psichiat. [etc.], Torino, 1895, xvi, 
190-197.-Pletcher ( Alice C.) Hunt- 
ing customs of the Omahas: per- 
sonal studies of Indian life. Cen- 
tury, N. Y., 1895, 1, 691-702.— 
Fletcher (R.) Medical lore in the 
older English dramatists and poets 
(exclusive of Shakespeare). Johns 
Hopkins Hosp. Bull., Bait., 1895, vi, 
73-84. Also /^fiprmf. — Pogazzaro 
(A.) The origin of man and the re- 
ligious sentiment. Contemp Rev., 
N.Y. [Lond.], 1895, 6")-88.— Foster 
(M.) Thomas Henry Huxley. Pop. 



Sc. Month., N. Y., 1895, xlvii, 776- 
783.— Pouill6e (A.) La peychologie 
des peuples et Tanthyopologie. Rev. 
d. deux mondes. Par., 1895., cxxix, 
365-396.— Fra8er(E.H.) The fish- 
skin Tartars. J. China Branch Roy. 
Asiat. Soc., Shanghai, 1894, n. s., 
xxvi. 1-43.— Fritach{G.) Diegraph- 
ische Methoden zur Bestimmung 
der Verhiiltnisse des menschlichen 
Korpers. Verhandl. d. Berl. Ge- 
sellsch. f. Anthrop., 1895, (172-188). 
— Qalton (F.) La repartition des 
peinesd'emprifionnementen Angle- 
terre. Rev. sclent. , Par. , 1895, 4. s. , 
iv, 274-27().— aalvanescul (T.) The 
altruistic impulse in man ana ani- 
mals. Internat. J. Ethics, Lond., 
1894-5, V, 197-205. -Oarnett (Lucy 
M. J.) Women under Islam. Nine- 
teenth Century, Lond., 1895, 57-70. 
— Ghautier ( E. ) Madagascar et son 
avenir. Rev. scient., Par., 1895, 
4. 8.,iii,431-435.— OeilllC.) Nogle 
Hjemevejninger fra Aarhus Asylet. 
[Weighing of Drains at Aarhus Asy- 
lum.] Bibliot. f. Lseger., Kjobenh. , 
1895, 7. R., vi, 394-418.— von Oott- 
Bchall (R. ) Glossen zur Aesthetik 
des Hiisslichen. Deutsche Rev., 
Stuttg., 1895, XX, 38-54. — Oia- 
bowsky (F.) Das Bezirk von Hatz- 
feldliafen [Samoa] und seine Be- 
wohner. Mitth. a. J. Perthes* geog. 
Anst., Gotha, 1895, xli, 186-189, 
1 map.— Grant (G. C.) A note on 
a heavy brain. Lancet, Lond., 1895, 
ii, 149. — GWfflths (A.) Female 
criminals. N. Am. Rev., N. Y., 
1895, Ixxxi, 141-152.— Ounieri (R.) 
Sul peso del cranio e della mandi- 
bola nei normali, nei pazzi e nei 
delinquenti. Arch, di psichiat. 
[etc.], Torino, 1895, xvi, 259-262.— 
Haberlandt (M.) Animismus im 
Judenthum. Sitzungsb. d. anthrop, 
Gesellsch. in Wien, 1895, (1-4).— 
Haeckel (E.) Thomas Huxley and 
Karl Vogt. Fortnightly Rev., N. Y. 
[Lond.], 1895, Iviii, 464-469.— Hall 
[ W. S. ) The changes in the j)ropor- 
tions of the human body during the 
])erio(l of growth. J. Anthrop. Inst., 
Ix)nd., 1895, xxv, 21-46, 3 ch.— 
Hamy (E.-T.) Considerations sur 
les races jaunes. Anthropologic, 
Par., 1895, vi, 241-256.— Harl« (E.) 
Daim quaternaire de Bagneres-de- 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] 



ANTHROPOLOGIC LITERATURE 



415 



Bigorre (Hautes-Pyr^n^es). 7Wd., 
369-373.— Hodge (F.W.) The early 
Navajo and Apache. Am. An- 
throp., Wash., 1895, viii, 221^-240. 
[Discussion], 287-295. — Hoffman 
(F. L.) The negro in the West In- 
dies. Pub. Am. Statist. Ass., Bost, 
1895, n. s., V, 181-200.— Imlach ( F.) 
Modem miracles of healing. Liver- 
pool M.-Chir. J., 1895, xv, 274- 
:W3.— Jousseaume. Reflexions an- 
thropologicjues tl propos des tumulus 
et silex tallies des Qomalis et des 
Danak il . Anth ropologie, Par. , 1895, 
vi, 393-413.— Jubilaum (das 25 
jahrige)derMunchenerGesellschaft 
fur Anthropologie, Ethnologic und 
Ur^schichte am 16 Miirz 1895. 
Beitr. z. Anthrop. n. Urgesch. Ba- 
yerns, Miinchen, 1894-5, xi, suppl., 
1-38.— Keith (A.) The growth of 
brain in men and monkeys, with a 
sliort criticism of the usual method 
of stating brain ratios. J. Anat. & 
PhysioL, Lond., 1894-5, xxix, 282- 
303.— Kurella (H.) Neuere Ar- 
beiten iiber Vererbung. Centralbl. 
f. Nervenh. u. Psychiat., Coblenz & 
Leipz., 1895, n. F., vi, 292-304.— 
Langdon (A. G.) and J. R. Allen. 
Catalogue of the early Christian in- 
scribed monuments in Cornwall. 
Archseol. Cambrensis, Lond., 1895, 
50-60.— Langkravel (B.) Hunde 
und Naturvolker. Internat. Arch. 
J. Ethnog., Leiden, 1895, viii, 109.— 
Last ( J. T. ) Notes on the languages 
spoken in Madagascar. J. Anthi-op. 
Inst, Lond., 1895, xxv, 46-71.— 
Le Bon (G.) The work of ideas in 
human evolution. Pop. Sc. Month., 
N.Y., 1895, xlvii, 541-548.— lieclftre 
(A.) La sorcellerie chez les Cam- 
bodgiens. Rev. scient., Par., 1895, 
4. s., iii, 129-136.— Le Conte (J.) 
The theory of evolution and social 
progress. Monist, Chicago, 1894-5, 
V, 481-500.— Leder (H.) Ueber 
alte Grabstatten in Sibirien und der 
Mongolei. Mitth. d. anthrop. Ge- 
sellsch. in Wien, 1895, xxv, 9-16.— 
Le Qendre. L'h^rMit^ et la pa- 
thologie g^n^rale. Gaz. hebd. de 
• m^d., Par., 1895, xlii, 266-272.— 
Lehmann-Nitsch^ (R.) Unter- 
suchungen uber die langen Knochen 
der sudbayerischen Reihengniber- 
bevolkerung. Beitr. z. Anthrop. 



u. Urgesch. Bayerns, Miinchen, 
1894-5, xi, 205-2«6, 1 pl.-Le Long 
(G.) La main-d'anivre jI la Nouvelle 
Cal^donie. Science sociale, Par,, 
1895, xix, 189-197.— Letourneau 
(C.) N^crologie de Carl Vogt 
[1817-95]. Rev. mens, de PEcole 
d'anthrop. de Par., 1895, v, 227.— 
Lewis (A. L.) Prehistoric remains 
in Cornwall. J. Anthrop. Inst., 
Lond., 1895, xxv, 2-16, 2 pi.— 
Lewis (J. P.) Archa?ology of the 
Wanni. J. Ceylon Branch Rojj. 
Asiat. Soc, Colombo, 1895, xiii, 
151-178. -Lisaauer. Das Graber- 
feld am Haideberg bei Dahnsdorf, 
Kreis Zauche-Belzig, und **glocken- 
fomige" Griiberinsbesondere. Ver- 
handl. d. Berl Gesellsch. f. An- 
throp., 1895, (97-118).— Lloyd (F. 
E.) and P. L. Washburn. An in- 
stance of webbed fingers in man. 
Pop. Sc. Month., N.Y., 1895, xlvii, 
856.— Lombroso ( C.) A tavism and 
evolution. Contemp. Rev., N. Y. 
[Lond.], 1895, 42-49. Crimi- 
nal anthropology: its origin and 
application. Forum, N. Y., 1895, 
XX, 33-49. Nordau's ** De- 
generation : " its value and its er- 
rors. Century, N. Y., 1895^ 1, 936- 

940. La pazzia nei tempi 

antichi e nei moderni. Arch, di 
psichiat. [etc.], Torino, 1895, xvi. 

404-435. e Carrara. Su sei 

crani di criminali abissini. Gior. 
d. r. Accad. di med. di Torino, 1895, 
3. s., xliii, 294-299.— Luther (Ca- 
lista V. ) The child-wives of India. 
Am. J. Obst., N.Y., 1895, xxxii, 92- 
94.— McQee (W J). Some prin- 
ciples of nomenclature. Am. An- 
throp., Wash., 1895, viii, 279-288.— 
McQuire iJ. D.) On the evolu- 
tion of the art of working in stone. 
Am. Naturalist, Phila., 1895, xxix, 
26-30.— MacRitchie (D.) Dwarf 
types in the Eastern Pyrenees. In- 
ternat. Arch. f. Ethnog., I^iden, 
1895, viii, 117-121. — Manouvrier 
(L.) Discussion des concepts psy- 
chologiques ; sentiments et connais- 
sance; ^tats afFectifs. Rev. mens, 
de PEcole d'anthrop. de Par., 1895, 
V, 41; 185; 309. Discus- 
sion du " Pithecanthropus erectus" 
comma pr^curseur pr^sum^ de 
Phomme. Bull. Soc. d' anthrop. de 



Digitized by 



Google 



416 



THE AMERICAN ANTHKOrOLOGIST 



[Vol. VIII 



Par., 1895, 4. a., vi, 12-47.— Marro 
( A. ) La puberty, sea rapporta avec 
Tanthropologie, la phyaiologie et la 
paychiatrie. Bull. Soc. de m6d. 
inent. de Belg., Gand et Leipz., 
1894, 413 ; 574.— Martin (E.) Ual- 
cooliame dana la race jaune. J. 
d'hyg., Par., 1895, xx, 457^61. 

La acience chez lea Chinoia. 

Rev. acient., Par., 1895, 4. a., iv, 236- 
244.— Marty. Recherchea aur I'ar- 
ch^ologie criminelle dana I'Yonne. 
Arch, d'anthrop. crim., Par., 1895, 
X, 381-41 6. -Mason (O. T.) Abo- 
riginal eandala. Science, N. Y. & 
Lancaster, Pa., 1895, n. a., ii, 134- 
13().— Mathews (R. H I Aborigi- 
nal rock paintinga and carvinga in 
New South Walea. Proc. Roy. Soc. 
Victoria 1894, Melbourne, 1895, n. a., 

vii, 143-156, 2 pi. Auatra- 

lian rock picturea. Am. Anthrop., 
Waah., 1895, viii, 268-278, 2 pi.— 
Menon (C. K.) Village communi- 
tiea in Southern India. J. Soc. Arts, 
Lond., 1895, xliii, 310-325.— Mille 
( P.) Lea asaociationa de malfai teura 
en Tuniaie. Rev. bleue. Par., 1895, 

4. a., iii, 468-471. En Sicile : 

Camorra, Mafta, brigandage. Ibid., 
178-182.— Minime. Letatouageet 
le d^tatouage. J. de m6d. de Par. , 
1895, 2. a., vii, 383-385.— Minot (C. 
S.) Ueber die Vererbung und Ver- 
jiingung. Biol. Centralbl., Leipz., 
1895, XV, 571-587. Also Reprint,— 
Mitra iS. C.) On North Indian 
folk-lore about thievea and robbers. 
J. Anthrop. S(k*. Bombay, 1895, 
iii, 454-460.— Mondio (G.) Nove 
cervelli di delinquenti. Arch, per 
I'antrop., Firenze, 1895, xxv, 2^)- 
56.— Morrison (W. J.) The juve- 
nile offender and the conditions 
whir^h produce him. Internat. J. 
Ethica, Lond., 1894-5, v, 162-181.— 
Nathubhai (T. M. ) On the death 
ceremonies among the Ka]K)la 
Bania and others. J. Anthrop. 
Soc. Bombay, 1895, iii, 483-507.— 
Nina Rodriguez. Negrea cri mi- 
nds au Breail. Arch, di psichiat. 
[etc.], Torino, 1895, xvi, 35()-3(W.— 
Also, Reprint. —NoTdSLVL (M.) A 
reply to my critica. (ycnturv, 
N. v., 1895, 1, 546-551. - Ober 
(F. A.) Aboriginea of the West 
Indies. Proc. Am. Antiq. Soc. 



1894, Worceater, 1895, n. a., ixi 
270-31 3. — Ollivier Beauregard. 
Marionnettes javanaisea. Bull. Soc. 
d'anthrop. de Par., 1894, 4. a., v, 
689-691.— Oppenheim (N.) Why 
children lie. Pop. S(\ Month., N, 
Y., 1895, xlvii, 382-387.— Osboru 
(H. F.) The hereditary mechanism 
and the aearch for the unknown 
factora of evolution. Am. Natu- 
ralist, Phila., 1895, xxix, 418-438.— 
Parkhouse (T. A.) Remarka on 
the native tonguea in the neighbor- 
hood of Port Darwin. Tr. Roy. 
Soc. S. Auatralia, Adelaide, 1895, 
xix, 1-18.— Patrick (J. J. R.) Ex- 
amination of prehiatoric crania. Tr. 
Am. Dent. Aaa. 1893-4, Phila., 1895, 
158-187. Also Reprint.— "Peacools, 
(Mabel). The death dove and ita 
congeners in popular folk-lore. A n- 
tiquary, Lond., 1895, xxxi, 113- 
117. — Pearson (K.) Note on re- 
gression and inheritance in the case 
of two parents. Proc. Roy. Soc. 
Lond., 1895, Ixviii, 240-242.— Peet 
(S. D.) Anthroiwmorphic divini- 
ties. Am. Antiquary, Chicago, 1895, 

xvii, 79-100, 1 pi. The story 

of the creation among the American 
aboriginea a proof of prehistoric 
contact. Ibid., 127-150.— Peters 
(J. P. ) On aome recent results of 
the University of Pennaylvania ex- 
cavationa at Nippur, espe<'ially of 
the Temple Hill. Am. J. Archa?ol., 
Princeton. 1895, 13-46.— Petrie (W. 
F.) Die Bevolkerungsverhaltnisse 
des alten Aegyptens und die Rassen- 
frage. Deutsche Rev., Stuttg. , 1 895, 
XX, 227-233. -Piette (E.) Etudes 
d'ethnograi)hie pr^hiatorique. An- 
throjX)logie, Par.. 1895, v, 276-292.— 
Pitzorno (M. ) Quattordici cranie 
con ossa acceasorie. Arch, per 
I'antrop., Firenze, 1895, xxv, 17- 
27, 1 pi.— Popoff (I. N.) [Discov- 
eries and ancient inscriptions on 
the river Orkhon.] Izvest. vost.- 
aibirsk. otd. Imp. russk. geogr. 
Obsh., Irkutsk, 1894, xxv, 102-125. 
— Porter (W.T.) Thegrowthof St. 
Ix)uis children. Pub. Am. Statist. 
Ahs., Boat., 1894-5, n. s,, iv, 28-34.— • 
Portman (M. V.) Photography for 
anthropologists. J. Anthrop. Inst., 
Lond., 1895, xxv, 75-87.— Powell 
(E. P.) The constructive power of 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. 1895] 



ANTHROPOLOGIC LITERATURE 



417 



the doctrine of evolution. New 
World, Bost., 1895, iv, 506-516.— 
Preatwich (J.) The greater an- 
tiquity of man. Ninetee?ith Cen- 
tury, Lond., 1895, 617-628.— Pro- 
posed (The) ethnographical, ar- 
ch8Bologiciil and photographic sur- 
vey of Wales. Archseol. Cam- 
breusifi, Lond., 1895, i-3.— Proust 
(A.) Le p^l^rinage de la Mecgue 
et la propagation des 6pid6mies. 
Rev. d. deux mondes. Par., 1895, 
cxxix, 368-393.— Putnam (G. R.) 
A Yuma cremation. A m. Anthrop , 
Wash., 1895, viii, 264-267.— Raf- 
falovich (M.-A.) L'aflfaire Oscar 
Wilde. Arch, d'anthrop. crim.. 
Par.. 1895, x, 445-477.— Regnault 
(F.) Deformations crAniennes dans 
1' art antique. Bull. Soc. d' anthrop. 
de Par., 1894, 4. s., v, 691-696.— 
Renonlt (E,) Psychologie de la 
foule au theatre. Rev. scient.. Par., 
1895, 4. 8., iii, 807-809.— Riedel (J. 
G. F.) Alte Gebriiuche bei Heira- 
then, Geburt und Sterbefallen bei 
dem Toumbuluh-Stamm in der 
Minahasa(NordSelebes). Internat. 
Arch. f. Ethnog., Leiden, 1895, viii. 
89-109, 1 pi.— Rinleri De Rocchi 
(L. ) Storia di una famiglia per tre 
generazioni. Arch, di psichiat. 
[etc.], Torino, 1895, xvi, 183-189.— 
Rochet (C.) L'anthropologie des 
beaux-arts. Bull. Soc. d'anthrop. 
de Par., 1895, 4. s., vi, 106-116.— 
Romanes (G. J.) Longevity and 
death. Monist, Chicago, 1894-5, v, 
161-165.— Roule (L.) et P. Reg- 
nanlt. Un maxfllaire inf^rieur 
humain trouv6 dans une grotte des 
PynSn^es. Corapt. rend. Acad. d. 
sc. Par., 1895, cxxi, 141-143.— Sal- 
mon (P.) Liste de 147 gisements 
n^olithiques dont les os-ements 
humains bris6s, detruits, disperses, 
n^glig^s, ou en mauvais ^tat sont 
ou paraissent perdiis pour les re- 
cherches ethnologiques de la Gaule. 
Rev. mens. deTEcole d'anthrop. de 
Par., 1895, v. 214-220. - Sand - 
ford (J. R. ) Notes on the recent 
opening of some prehistoric graves 
in the Uoimbatore District, Madras 
Presidency. J. Anthrop. Soc. Bom- 
bay, 1895,iii, 461-471, 1 pL- Sapper 
(C. ) Beitriige zur Ethno^raphie von 
Siidost-Mexiko und Britisch Hon- 



duras. Mitth. a. J. Perthes' geogr. 
Anst., Gotha, I.S95, xli, 177-186.— 
Sasse (J.) Over friesche schedels. 
Nederl. Tijdschr. v. Geneesk., 
Amst., 1895, 2. R., xxxi, pt. 2, 
257-267.— de Sanssure (L.) Com- 
ment les Chinois congoivent leur 
civilization et leur empire. Rev. 
scient., Par., 1895, 4. s., iii, 65- 
73. — von Schroeder (h.) Ueber 
die Entwicklung der Indologie in 
Europa und ihre Beziehungen ziir 
allgemeinen Volkerkunde. Mitth. 
d. anthrop. Gesellsch. in Wien, 
1895, XXV, 1-8.— Seler (E.) Daw 
Gefass von Chama. Verhandl. d. 
Berl. Gesellsch. f. Anthrop., 1895, 
(307-320).- Shakespear (J. ) The 
Lushais and the land they live in. 
J. Soc. Arts, Lond., 1895, xliii, 167- 
188.— Shinn (Milicent W.) The 
marriage rate of college women. 
Century, N. Y., 1895, 1, 946-948.— 
Slade ( D. D. ) The significance of 
the jugal arch. Proc. Am. Phil. 
Soc, Phila., 1895, xxxiv, 50-67.— 
Sorel (G.) Theories pISnales de 
MM. Durkheim et Tarde. Arch, 
di psichiat. [etc.], Torino, 1895, xvi, 
219-228.— Steinbach(E.) DieMar- 
shall-Inseln und ihre Bewohner. 
Verhandl. d. Gesellsch. f. Erdk. zu 
Berl., 1895, 449-488.— Stelndorff 
(G.) Vierzehn Jahre iigyptischer 
Ausgriibungen. Deutsche Rundsch., 
Berl., 1895, xxi, 261-284.— Stejne- 
ger (L.) Aleut Baidarkas in Kam- 
cliatka. Science, N. Y. & Lancaster, 
Pa., 1895, n. s., li, 62.— Stern (A.) 
Zur ethnographischen Untersuch- 
ung des Tastsinnes der Miinchener 
Stadtbevolkerung. Beitr. z. An- 
throp. u. Urgesch. Bayerns, Mun- 
chen, 1894-5, xi, 109-143, 2 pi.— 
Sully (J.) Studies of childhood : 
material of morality. Pop. 8c. 
Month., N. Y., 1895, xlvii, 648; 
808.— Szombathy(J.) Versuchder 
endgultigen Feststellung des Vir- 
chow'schen Gesichtsindex. Ver- 
handl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. An- 
throp., 1895 (268-274).— Thomson 
(B. H.) Ancestor- worship among 
the Fijians. Pop. Sc. Month., N. Y., 
1895, xlvii, 671-676.— von T3r&k 
(A.) und M. Benedikt. [Brief- 
wechsel iiber Einzelprobleme der 
Kraniologie.J Sitzungsb. d. An- 



Digitized by 



Google 



418 



THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. VIII 



throp. Gesellsch. in Wien, 1895, (4- 
13).— Tooker (W. W.) The name 
Chickahominy, ite origin and ety- 
mology. Am. An throp., Wash. ,1895, 
viii, 2o7-263.— Valentin! (P. J. J.) 
Analysis of the pictorial text in- 
scribed on two Palenque tablets. 
Proc. Am. Antiq. 8oc. 1894, Wor- 
cester, 1895, n. 8., ix, 429-450. 2 pi.— 
Van De venter (J.) De la plurality 
des types de criminels. Bull. Soc. 
de mM. ment. de Belg., Gand et 
Leipz., 1894, 440-459.— Van den 
Qheyn (R. P. J.) Les pygmies. 
Rev. d. quest, scient., Brux., 1895, 
2. s., vii. 31-51, 1 map.— VauvllW, 
Habitations m^rovingiennes, non 
construites, de I'Aisne. Bull. Soc. 
d'anthrop. de Par., 1894, 4. s., v, 
699-707.— Verneau. Tombes Bo- 
goumiles. Ibid., 696-699. — Vir- 
chow (R.) ,Dinka. Verhandl. d. 
Berl. Gesellsch. f. An throp., 1895, 

(148-168). Je ein Schadel 

von Madura und von Java und ein 
Batak-Schadel von Toba auf Su- 
matra. i6iU,(323). Krani- 

ologie der Dahome. Ibid., (286- 
296).— Vlr6 (A.) Pr^historique de 
la Basse-Kabylie (r^on de Bordj 
M^nai'el). Bull. Soc. d'anthrop. de 
Par., 1894, 4. s., v, 710-712.— Voaa 
(A.) Siebenbiirgische und Bos- 
nische Funde (Tordosch und But- 
mir). Verhandl. d. Berl. Ge- 
sellsch. f. Anthrop., 1895, (125- 

135). Stein werkzeugen mit 

Schiiflungsrillen. /MW., (137-141!. 
—Ward ( L. F. i The relation of so- 
ciology to criminology. Am. An- 
throp., Wash., 1895, viii, 241-256.— 
Weber (F.) Bericht iiber neue 
vorgeschichlichte Funde in Bayern. 
Beitr. z. Anthrop. u. Urgesch. 
Bayerns, Miinchen, 1894-5, xi, 297- 
313.— Wegener (P.^ Bericht iiber 
den Urnenfriedhof bei Biilstringen 



(Reg.-Bez. Magdeburg.) Ztschr. f. 
Ethnol., Beri., 1895. xxvii, 121-148. 
—von Weinsier 1 ( R. ) Der priih is- 
torische Wohnplatz und die Be- 
grabnissstatte auf der Losskuppe, 
sudostlich von Lobositzan der Elbe. 
Ihid., 49-81.— Weir (J.), jr. The 
effect of female suffrage on pos- 
terity. Am. Naturalist, Phila , 1 895, 

xxix, 815-825. Suicide in 

the United States. Med. Rec., N. Y., 
1895, xlviii, 217-221.— "Weismann 
(A.) Heredity once more. Con- 
temp. Rev., N. Y. [Lond.], 1895, 

Ixviii, 420-456. Wie sehen 

die Insecten? Deutsche Rev., 
Stuttg., 1895, XX, 434-454.— Weis- 
aenberg (S.) Ueber die Formen 
der Hand und des Fusses. Ztschr. 
f. Ethnol., Beri., 1895, xxvii, 82-111, 
2 pi.— Whitehead (R. W.) The 
thumb as an initial factor of civili- 
zation. Med. Rec, N. Y., 1895, 
xlviii, 188-190.— Whitman (C. O.) 
Bonnet's theory of evolution. 
Monist, Chicago, 1894-5, v, 412-426. 
— Wickremasinghe (D. M. de. Z.) 
Note on a Singhalese inscription of 
1745-46, A. D. J. Cevlon Branch 
Roy. Asiat. Soc., Colombo, 1895, 
xiii, 133, 1 pi.— Widenmann. Re- 
sell neidung bei den Massai. Ver- 
handl. d. Berl. Gesellsch. f. An- 
throp., 1895, ( 302).— von WUalocki 
(H.) Die Lappenbaume im mag- 
yarischen Volksglauben. Mitth. d. 
anthrop. Gesellsch. in Wien, 1895, 
XXV, 17-19 .— Zaborowski. Du 
Dniestre k la Caspienne ; esquisse 
palethnologique. Bull. Soc. d'an- 
throp. de Par., 1895, 4. s., vi, 116- 

138. Populations del' I ndo- 

Chine: les Tsiams, origine et ca- 
ractere. Rev. scient , Par., 1895, 
4. s., iii, 431-435.— Zoja (G.) Sopra 
due crani Somali. Boll, scient., 
Pavia, 1894, xvi, 97-100. 



Digitized by 



Google 



INDEX TO VOLUME VIII 



I»ivgo 

Agriculture, the beginning of 350 

Akas, poisoned arrows of 94 

Allentiac language of Argentina 21)7 

America, stone art in 1 

Aran islands, ethnography of 93 

Argentina, Allentiac language of. 297 

Australia, Paleontographical Society of 92 

Austmlian rock pictures 2(38 

Baldwin, C. E 180 

Beebe researches, publication of. 197 

Book notices. See end of index. 

Bourke, J. G. Snake ceremonial at VValpi, 192; Early Apaches and 

Navajos 287 

Caste in India 23 

Canyon de Chelly, cliff ruins of 153 

Chickahominy, the name 257 

Chinese origin of playing cards 61 

Chiri valley, Huacas of 8 

Cibola, city of 142 

City of Cibola 142 

Clay figures from Guatemala. 402 

Cliff ruins of Canyon de Chelly 153 

Codex Cortesianus, the god ** D " in 205 

Cremation, a Yuma 2(51 

Culture, similarities in 101 

Cushing, F. H. The arrow 307 

Customs of Micmacs 31 

— , mortuary, in New Hebrides 93 

Dorsey, J. 0. (obituary) 180 

Ernst, A. Vocabularies of Upper Orinoco 393 

Ethnography of Aran islands 93 

Fewkes, J. W. Comparison of Sia and Tusavan snake ceremonials, 

118 ; The god " D " in the Codex Cortesianus 205 

Fletcher, R. Colonel Garrick Mallery, U. S. A 79 

54 (419) 



Digitized by 



Google 



r 



418 THE AMERICAN AKTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. YIII 

throp. Ge«en.*'h. in Wien, 1895, (4- I (Reg.-Bez. Magdeburg.) Ztechr. t 
r^i^^Tggjmg (W. W.) The name Etiinol.. Berl., \h\C^, xxvii. 121-1 ♦ 



\ W 



Digitized by 
I. " ' ' 



Google 



Digitized by 



Google 



420 THE AMERICAN ANTHROPOLOGIST [Vol. Vlil 

Page 

God ** D " in the Codex Cortesianua 205 

Guatemala, clay liirures from 402 

Hagar, S. Customs of Micmacs 31 

Hodge, F. W. Tiie early Navajo and Apache, 223, 294; The firet- 

discovered city of Cibola 142 

Huacas of Chira valley 8 

Icazbalceta, J. G. (obituary) 178 

Imperial Russian Geographic Society 196 

India, caste in 23 

Laraborn, R. H. (obituary) 175 

Mallery, Colonel Garrick (obituary) 79 

Miison, O. T. Similarities in culture 101 

Matthews, R. H. Australian rock pictures 268 

McGee, W J. Some principles of nomenclature, 279 ; The begin- 
ning of agriculture 350 

Micmac customs 31 

MindelefF, C. Cliff ruins of Canyon de Chelly 153 

Navajo and Apache, early 223, 287, 294 

New Hebrides, mortuary customs in 93 

Nomenclature, some principles of 279 

Obituaries: R. H. Lamborn, Franklin A. Seely, J. G. Iciizbak«ta, 
Charles C. Baldwin, J. O. Dorsey, W. B. Taylor, 175; J. C. 

Pilling 407 

Padre Andres de Olmos, writings of 43 

Paleontographical Society of Australia ' 92 

Pilling, J. C. Writings of Padre Andres de Olmos, 43; obituary.. . 407 

Playing cards, Chinese origin of. tU 

Poisoned arrows of the Akas <H 

Porter, J. II. Caste in India 23 

Potanine, Alexandra V. (obituary) 29() 

Powell, J. W. Stone art in America 1 

Principles of nomenclature 279 

Putnam, G. R. A Yuma cremation 261 

Quarterly bibliography of anthropologic literature 95, 199, 298, 410 

Quevedo, S. A. L. The Allentiac language of xVrgentina , . 297 

Relation of sociology to anthropology 241 

Rock picrtures, Australian , 268 

Runners, Tanihumari 92 



Digitized by 



Google 



Oct. I895J INDEX TO VOLUME VIII 421 

Page 

Scott, S. M. The Huacas of Chira valley, Peru 8 

Seely, F. A. (obituary) 177 

Similarities in culture 101 

Siouan tribal api)ellatives 376 

Snake ceremonial at Walpi 192 

Stone art in America 1 

Sociology and anthropology, relation of. 241 

Tarahumari runners 92 

Taylor, W. B. (obituary) 184 

Tecumseh^s name 91 

Tooker, W. W. The name Chickahominy, 257 ; Siouan tribal ap- 
pellatives 370 

Upper Orinoco vocabularies 393 

Valentine, P. J. J. Clay figures from Guatemala 402 

Vocabularies, Upper Orinoco 393 

Walpi, snake ceremonial at 192 

Ward, L. F. Relation of sociology to anthropology 241 

Wilkinson, W. H. Chinese origin of playing cards (il 

Writings of Padre Andres de Olmos 43 

Yuma cremation ■ 261 



BOOK NOTICKS 

St;itistics of the Negroes in the United States (Gannett), 81.— Human 
Bones in the Hemenway Collection (Matthews), 86.— Eleventh Report of 
Bureau of Ethnology, 89.— Coi)i)er from the Mounds of the St. John's 
River, Florida (Moore), Tenth Report of Bureau of Ethnology, 189.— 
Tuj^ayan New Fire Ceremony (Fewkes), 190. 



Digitized by 



Google 



Digitized by 



Google 



Vol. VIII 



January, 1895 



No. 1 




ANTmopfflfiosr 




PES 



aoQc 



,tn MTK .Wm. ■JUUL 



^'t* i*y 



'(?©RITER!1TS- 



Stone Art in America, by J. W. PowKix i 

The Huacos of Chira Valley. Peru, by SAMrKi. MaTHHWSON 

vScoTT 8 

Caste in India, by J. H. Porter : 23 

Micniac Customs and Traditions, by Stansbury Hagkr 31 

The Writings of Padre Andres de Olmos in the Languages of 

Mexico, by Jamks C Pim.ing 43 

Chinese Origin of Playing Cards, by W. H. W11.KINSON 6r 

Col. Garrick Mallery, U. S. A.; an Obituary, by Robert 

Fletcher 79 

Hook Notices 81 

Notes and News 91 

Hibmographv of Anthroi»ologic IvITEratttrk 95 



jft "'^ '" **^ "■- ""^ ^*^ * 



"* IV* irj 



•m 



Digitized by VjL^OQIC 



^Mu,aw»^-%. 



Thk Amkkicax Anthropologist 



EDITORIAL COMMITTEE 
FliANK r>AKKK. Ciiaikn! \n 

.i\Mi':s II. mloimtKtt damfj. s. j.amu (n<X)!:(;K r. stktson 

I^ W. IIOIUJK PKKKY p.. IMKIUM: THOMAS AVILSOX 



Tm: Ami:i{I(-.\n An rni:oi'<n «>r,isr iiiclii«U's, Imt i.^ not «'(niliiic(l to, tin* Traii>- 
iU'iioiisof thr Ant!iro|»oloi:i('al Society of Wa^liinL^toii, and aiin.^ to bra incdinin 
<»r «-ofnnniniratio!i iK'tWfcn sin(lrnT> in all Iti'aiu'lics of antliro|)nl«.«jic scitMico, 
Its »*(litors t'arnotly in\ itc tlic coCtju'ration, l»otIi as snl>s<Mil)('r> and cont ri!>ntors. 
of all who a IV intrrc-tvd in AntIiroi>oIoi:y. TIk' t'ontril>nto?-s a!on<\ not tlu' 
IMitcuN, or tlio Sofit'tw a»v rrsp«»nsil)|o i\,v tli(} virus they express. 

Thk Amkkk.w a n rmcoi'oi.o(;isT apju'ars in .larniary, Apiil. .Inly, and ( )(•- 
tohcr. It i< sent ^ratnit.m^ly to Life, Active, and ILmorary Members of the 
Anthn»pol.»Ldt'ai Soririy ; to ('orre^pon<lint: AIend>ers th«* snhs<'rij»tion iv s-_>.tH» a 
\eai", and to ail other snl>s<'rihers s.j.no a year or >^1. 00 a nund»ei-. 

All (•onnnnnieation> to the joui-nal and all eorn^-p^»ndene•' shoidd h<^ addr<>stMl 
to !>r. I'^UAVK Bakkij, 1:;15 C'oreoran Stn-et. Washin^^ton, I>. ('. 



OFFICKIiS OK THE 

Aiit!ir(»|iologi('al Society of AVasliiugton 

Lin>ii)i:\ I 
OTIS T. MASON 

\'i( h-Lir^ioKN i> 
Si;< TioN A -S<.inatolo-y . .... FLANK L. \K!:L 

Sk, iinN B -S.,eio]o-y Tol I N W. LOW FLL 

Sk.tion ('-Lhilo.<ophv, iMdloln-\ . . LFSTLL F. WALM) 
SKciioN D- TeehnolM-y WILLIAM II. IloLMllS 

Oknkkai Si:( KirrvKv. I'LANK lL\MILTON ('FsniN(; 

Si <i:i;rAitv to Tfn: Ho\iu) of MAN\(;e.i;s, \VI]ST<>N FLINT 

rin;\si i{i:ii. PKLLV W. I'lFUCF 

LiKAToK. F, \V. IIOI )(;!-: 

Col .\( II OKS 

.IAMi:s IF i:LolM;i:Tr I>ANIFL>. LAMIi O'Loh'OF L STFT^oN 

WILLI \M IF iXfOLirrLF W.I Mo;FF flloM \S Wl I>oN 



Digitized by 



Google 



T 



i^'"^ ■ "r 



I 

I 

f 



Digitized by 



Google 



\ 



Digitized by 



Google 



iJ 



Digitized by 



Google 



^r^^ 



^ 



AiffnAyis- 5^>!* 












o 





Digitized by 



Google 



(MMMnyoFjaONNMi 




3 9015 03344 4442 



Replaced with Commwrlpt Mirmfnrm 

1993 



NO^-^CItrifMTir 



COllECT/ON 







Digitized by 



Google